•FROM -THE- LIBRARY- OF- 
A,    W,    Ryder 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstlatinbookdeOOcomsrich 


FIRST  LATIN  BOOK 


DESIGNED  AS   A 


MANUAL  OF  PROGRESSIVE  EXERCISES  AND  SYSTEMATIC 
DRILL  IN  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LATIN 


AND    INTRODUCTORY    TO 


CESAR'S  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE  GALLIC  WAR 


■  C.  BY 

D.    Y.   COMSTOCK,   M.A. 

PRINCIPAL   OP   ST.   JOHNSBURY   ACADEMY,   VERMONT. 


ALLYN  AND  BACON 
JlBoston  anJJ  Cljtcago 


at 


Copyright,  1883, 
By  John  Allyn. 


■University  Press: 
John  Wilson  and  Son,  Cambridge. 


PREFACE. 


The  design  of  this  book  is  to  afford  a  thorough  preparation 
for  the  reading  of  Caesar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War. 
It  is  a  very  common  experience  on  the  part  of  teachers  to  find, 
after  several  months  or  a  year  have  been  spent  in  the  study  of 
the  elements  of  Latin,  that,  on  beginning  to  read  some  Latin 
author,  certain  difficulties  present  themselves  at  the  very  outset 
and  increase  with  every  onward  step.  Some  of  the  sources  of 
these  difficulties  are  :  — 

1.  In  nine  cases  out  of  ten,  the  pupil  begins  the  study  of 
Latin  with  no  definite  knowledge  of  his  own  language,  even  in 
the  simplest  points  of  sentence  structure.  As  has  been  said, 
"  he  does  not  appreciate  the  relations  of  things." 

2.  The  beginner  has  been  taught  to  translate  isolated  sen- 
tences, which  are  never  combined  into  connected  narrative. 
Fragments  of  sentences,  phrases,  oblique  cases  of  nouns  and 
pronouns,  all  absolutely  meaningless  in  themselves,  have  consti- 
tuted a  large  portion  of  his  fundamental  work. 

3.  His  elementary  book  has  lacked  logical  method.  Many 
peculiarities  of  the  Latin  language,  which,  in  their  proper  place, 
would  be  shorn  of  all  difficulty,  and  would  appear  as  reasonable 
constructions,  are  presented  to  the  beginner  too  early  in  his 
Latin  study.  These  not  only  demand  a  needless  amount  of 
time  and  labor,  but  also  tend  to  discouraci^e  the  vouns:  student. 


IV  PREFACE. 

A  teacher  of  experience  has  said  :  "  By  a  strange  inversion 
we  supply  an  advanced  student  with  all  the  light  he  can  have, 
but  give  a  beginner,  at  best,  a  meagre  abridgment  of  the  same 
information."  In  this  manual  an  attempt  has  been  made  to 
present  solutions  of  some  of  the  difficulties  which  beset  the 
young  student  of  Latin,  and  to  prepare  him  for  an  intelligent 
study  of  Caesar. 

The  general  plan  of  the  book  is  as  follows  :  — 

1.  It  opens  with  a  short  and  simply  wordqd  review  of  Eng- 
lish Etymology  and  Analysis.  This  may  be  taken  at  the 
outset  as  a  preparation  for  the  Latin  Lessons,  or  left  for  consul- 
tation and  comparison  as  constructions  are  presented  in  Latin 
which  have  parallels  in  English.  At  the  end  of  this  review  are 
placed  such  English  idioms  and  peculiarities  in  the  use  of  Cases 
as  have  similar  or  analogous  uses  in  Latin. 

2.  Elementary  principles  and  definitions  of  Latin  Ety- 
mology form  the  next  chapter.  These  cover  all  essential  points 
from  the  Alphabet  to  the  First  Declension  of  Nouns.  They  are 
briefly  and  clearly  stated,  with  an  explanation  of  every  topic 
(such  as  Quantity)  which  might  present  a  difficulty  to  the  be- 
ginner. All  statements  are  excluded  which  do  not  have  a  direct 
bearing  upon  the  end  in  view,  —  the  mastery  of  the  essentials. 

3.  The  Latin  Lessons,  beginning  with  the  First  Declension, 
follow.  These  contain  references  to  Grammars,  notes  (explained 
below),  test-questions,  and  a  double  exercise,  —  first,  of  transla- 
tion from  Latin  into  English ;  and  secondly,  from  English  into 
Latin.  There  is  no  vocabulary  printed  on  the  same  page  as  the 
Lesson,  thus  removing  from  the  pupil  the  temptation  to  make 
in  the  recitation-room  the  preparation  that  should  have  been 
made  beforehand.  To  avoid,  however,  any  possible  difficulty 
or  confusion  arising  from  the  necessity  of  consulting  a  general 
vocabulary  at  the  outset,  a  special  vocabulary  for  each  of  the 
first  twenty-nine  Lessons  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  book. 


PREFACE.  V 

The  Simple  Sentence  is  introduced  as  early  as  possible, 
the  Present  Indicative  of  a  few  simple  verbs  being  employed. 
A  special  attempt  has  been  made  to  present  the  various  uses 
of  the  Cases,  Verb,  etc.,  in  the  order  in  which  their  force  and 
peculiarities  will  be  best  appreciated  by  the  young  student. 

The  uses  of  the  Subjunctive  have  been  presented  in  a 
simple  and  natural  order  of  development.  Particular  attention 
has  been  bestowed  on  the  constructions  of  Indirect  Discourse, 
and  carefully  graded  material  has  been  given  for  translation 
and  drill. 

The  final  Lessons  contain  a  variety  of  selections  for  transla- 
tion into  Latin,  including  a  large  number  of  sentences  of  differ- 
ent degrees  of  difficulty,  English  translations  from  Caesar,  etc. 

4.  Several  pages  of  Iiatin  Narrative  for  translation,  taken 
from  the  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War,  are  then  given. 
These  are  accompanied  by  notes  and  explanations. 

5.  The  Notes  follow.  These  have  been  prepared  with  great 
care,  and  give  a  compact  and  complete  outline  of  all  essential 
principles  of  Latin  Etymology  and  Syntax,  with  explanation 
of  difficult  constructions,  useful  hints  on  translation,  and  illus- 
trative examples  when  necessary.  Eeferences  are  made  to  these 
Notes  in  every  Lesson ;  and  as  they  are  arranged  in  the  usual 
grammatical  order,  they  will  form  a  convenient  outline  for  fre- 
quent review. 

6.  An  Appendix,  containing  all  the  essential  forms  of 
Inflection,  is  added,  that  the  book  may  serve  as  a  complete 
manual  for  the  beginner ;  if,  however,  the  instructor  prefer  that 
these  forms  should  be  learned  from  a  Grammar,  the  references 
to  the  Latin  Grammars  of  Allen  and  Greenough,  Bennett,  and 
Harkness,  given  in  connection  with  the  Lessons,  will  furnish 
the  same  information. 

7.  At  the  end  of  the  book  are  given  Special  Vocabularies 
and   Examples   for  the   first   twenty -nine  Lessons  (already  re- 


VI  PREFACE. 

ferred  to)  and  a  complete  General  Vocabulary,  Latin-English 
and  English-Latin. 

In  the  preparation  of  this  manual,  the  author  has  been 
greatly  aided  by  the  advice  and  suggestions  of  many  friends, 
whose  experience  in  the  same  and  kindred  departments  of 
instruction  has  made  them  welcome  counsellors ;  to  all  such 
he  desires  to  return  sincere  thanks. 


DAVID  Y.  COMSTOCK. 


Phillips  Academy,  Andover,  Mass., 
June  30,  1883. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Eeview  of  English  Grammar 1 

Introduction  to  the  Latin  Lessons 17 

LATIN  LESSONS. 

LESSON 

I.    Nouns  :  First  Declension 27 

II.     Verbs  ;  The  Simple  Sentence  ;  Subject"  Nominativh      28 

III.  Nouns  :  Second  Declension 29 

Direct  Object. 

IV.  Nouns  :    Second   Declension   (continued) ;   Adjectives  : 

First  and  Second  Declensions 30 

Agreement  of  Adjectives. 

V.     Apposition;  Genitive  Case 31 

Genitive  denoting  Possession. 

VI.    Predicate  Noun  and  Adjective 32 

Sum :  Present  Indicative. 
VII.     Verbs  :  Definitions  ;  First  Conjugation  [continued)    .    33 

VIII.     Verbs  :  Principal  Parts  and  Stems 35 

Declension  of  dea  and  filia. 

IX.     Verbs  {continued)  ;  Dative  Case 36 

Dative  of  Indirect  Object. 
X.     Verbs  :  First  Conjugation  ;  Subjunctive  Mode     .     .    37 
XL     First    Conjugation  :    Imperative    Mode  ;    Vocative 

Case 38 

Second  Declension  :  filius  and  Proper  Names  in  ius. 
XII.    First  Conjugation  :  Infinitives,  Participles,  Gerund, 

Supine 39 

XIII.  Declension  of  Deus ;  Irregular  Adjectives  :  Geni- 

tive in  ius,  Dative  in  i   . 41 

XIV.  Nouns:  Third  Declension;  Elementary  Practice     .    42 


vm 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


LESSON  PAGB 

XV.    Nouns  :  Third  Declension  ;  General  Principles  ; 

Gender 43 

XVI.    Nouns  :  Third  Declension  ;  Consonant-Stems    .    .    44 
XVII.    Nouns  :  Third  Declension  ;  Vowel-Stems       ...    46 

XVIII.     The  Verb  Sum :  General  Practice       47 

XIX.     The  Verb  Possum ;  Use  of  the  Infinitive  ...    48 
Infinitive  as  Complement. 
XX.     The  Infinitive  with  a  Subject  Accusative     .     .    49 

XXI.     Use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode 50 

XXII.    First   Conjugation  :     Passive    Voice  ;    Ablative 

Case 52 

Ablative  of  Means  and  Agent. 

XXIII.  First    Conjugation:    Passive    Voice;.  Ablative 

Case 53 

Ablative  of  Separation. 

XXIV.  First  Conjugation:  Subjunctive  Passive      ...    55 
XXV.    First  Conjugation  :   Passive  Voice  :    Imperative, 

Infinitives,  Participles 56 

XXVI.    Adjectives  :  Third  Declension 57 

XXVII.     Adjectives:  Third  Declension  (continued)           .     .  58 
Subjunctive  expressing  a  Command. 

XXVIII.    Adjectives  :  Regular  Comparison 60 

Declension  of  Comparatives. 

XXIX.    Adjectives  :  Irregular  Comparison  ;  Adverbs  .    .  61 

XXX.     Verbs  :  Second  Conjugation 62 

XXXI.     General  Review 64 

XXXII.    Deponent  Verbs  :  First  and  Second  Conjugations  65 

XXXIII.  Two  Accusatives 66 

XXXIV.  Adjectives  :  Irregular  Comparison 67 

Dative  with  Adjectives. 

XXXV.    Nouns  :  Fourth  Declension 69 

Declension  of  domus. 

XXXVI.    Nouns  :  Fifth  Declension 70 

Compound  Nouns. 
XXXVII.     Verbs  :  Third  Conjugation  :  Active  Voice  ...    71 
XXXVIII.    Verbs  :  Third  Conjugation  :  Passive  Voice      .     .     72 

XXXIX.    Prepositions;  Place 74 

XL.    Deponent  Verbs  :  Third  Conjugation 75 

Ablative  of  Cause  ;  Subjunctive  of  Purpose. 

XLI.    Verbs:  Fourth  Conjugation 77 

Adjectives  used  as  Nouns. 
XLII.    Deponent  Verbs  :  Fourth  Conjugation     ....    78 
Ablative  with  Deponent  Verbs. 


TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 


IX 


LESSON 

XLIII. 

XLIV. 
XLV. 

XLVI. 
XL  VII. 
XLVIII. 


XLIX. 

L. 

LI. 

LII. 

LIII. 

LIV. 

LV. 
LVI. 

LVIL 
LYIII. 

LIX. 
LX. 

LXI. 

LXII. 
LXIII. 

LXIV. 

LXV. 

LXVI. 


LXVII. 
LXVIII. 


PAGE 

Third  Conjugation:  Verbs  in  io.    .    .    .    .    .    .    .    79 

Tenses  of  the  Infinitive. 

Participles 81 

Numeral  Adjectives 82 

Accusative  of  Time  ;  Ablative  of  Time. 
Accusative  of  Extent  ;  Partitive  Genitive    ...    84 

Accusative  :  Adverbial  Uses 85 

Subjunctive  Mode  :   Purpose,    Command,   Exhorta- 
tion      87 

Correlatives. 
Ablative    of   Manner,    Accompaniment,    Specifica- 
tion      88 

Pronouns  :  Personal,  Reflexive,  Possessive  ...      90 

Pronouns  :  Demonstrative 91 

Pronouns  :  Relative 92 

Pronouns  :  Interrogative  ;  Interrogative  Sentences    94 

Single  Questions. 
Pronouns  :  Indefinite 95 

Double  Questions. 

Place  :  Exceptions 97 

Irregular  Veebs  :  Fero 98 

Genitive  after  sum ;  Infinitive  as  Subject. 

Dative  with  Compound  Verbs 100 

Irregular  Verbs  :  E6 101 

Conditional  Sentences. 

Ablative  Absolute 103 

Periphrastic  Conjugations 104 

Dative  of  Agent. 
Irregular  Verbs  :  Fio 106 

Subjunctive  expressing  a  "Wish. 
Irregular  Verbs  :  Volo  and  its  Compounds  .     .     .     107 
Defective  Verbs 109 

Objective  Genitive. 

Impersonal  Verbs 110 

Subjunctive  of  Result;  Substantive  Clauses   .    .    Ill 
Dative    with   Intransitive    Verbs  ;    Intransitive 
Verbs  used  in  the  Passive .     113 

Historical  Present ;  Sequence  of  Tenses. 
Dative  of  Possession;  Two  Datives 114 

Semi-Deponent  Verbs. 
Ablative  with  Comparatives  ;  Ablative  denoting 
Measure  of  Difference 110 


X  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

LESSON  ^AGB 

LXIX.    Causal  Clauses 117 

Kelative  Pronoun  used  for  a  Demonstrative. 

LXX.     Uses  of  the  Ablative  Case 119 

(1)  Denoting  Quality  ;  (2)  with  Adjectives ; 
(3)  denoting  Price. 

LXXI.    Concessive  Clauses 120 

Historical  Infinitive. 

LXXII.    Temporal  Clauses 121 

LXXIII.     Gerund  and  Gerundive 123 

LXXIV.    Supine 125 

LXXV.    Indirect  Discourse:  Questions 126 

LXXVI.     Indirect  Discourse  :  Commands 128 

General  Laws  of  Modes  and  Tenses. 
LXXVII.    Indirect  Discourse  :  General  Practice      .     .     .     129 
LXXVIII.    Indirect  Discourse  ;  General  Practice  ....    130 
Miscellaneous  Sentences  for  Translation  into  Latin    .     .     132 
Caesar's  History  of  the  Gallic  War:   Book  I.  —  Chapters 

1-13 136 

References  and  Explanations  on  the  History  of  the  Gallic 

War 143 

NOTES.  — THE  ESSENTIALS  OF  LATIN  GRAMMAR:  — 

Etymology 149 

Syntax 188 

Order  of  "Words  in  a  Latin  Sentence    .    .  229 

General  Facts  and  Useful  Hints     ....  230 

Hints  on  Translation 232 

APPENDIX,  —  Forms  of  Declension,  Conjugation,  etc.   .    .    236 

SPECIAL   VOCABULARIES   AND   EXAMPLES 259 

GENERAL   VOCABULARY:— 

Latin-English 269 

English-Latin 295 

INDEX .         302 


REVIEW  OF  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


THE  NUMBEES  IN  PAEENTHESES  EEEER  TO  SECTIONS  OF  THIS  EEVIEW. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

1.  Etymology  treats  of  the  Parts  of  Speech  and  their  changes  of 
form  and  meaning. 

2.  There  are  eight  Parts  of  Speech  :  Noun  (or  Substantive), 
Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition,  ConjunC' 
tion,  Interjection, 

3.  A  Noun  (Latin  nomen,  name),  or  Substantive,  is  the^ame  of 
a  person  or  object. 

a.  A  Common  Noun  is  the  name  of  any  person  or  object  of  a  general 

class ;  as,  cify,  man. 
h.  A  Proper  Noun  is  the  name  of  a  particular  person  or  object ;  as, 

Rome,  Caesar. 

c.  A  Verbal  Noun  has  the  general  use  of  a  noun,  but  a  verbal  form 

and  force ;  as.  Seeing  is  believing  ;  To  be  is  better  than  to  seem  ; 
He  gained  his  promotion  by  doing  his  duty  faithfully. 

d.  A  Collective  Noun,  though  singular  in  form,  denotes  a  group  of 

persons  or  objects ;  as,  crowd,  army,  society,  legion. 

4.  To  nouns  belong  Gender,  Person,  Number,  Case. 

5.  Gender  distinguishes  sex.  Names  of  males  are  Masculine ;  of 
females.  Feminine  ;  of  objects  neither  male  nor  female.  Neuter. 

Some  nouns  may  denote  either  sex ;  as,  pupil,  child.  These  are  said 
to  be  of  the  Common  Gender. 

6.  Nouns  have  three  Persons,  The  First  Person  denotes  the 
speaker ;  as,  /,  your  general,  command  you.  The  Second  Person  denotes 
the  person  or  thing  addressed;  as.  Boys,  be  attentive.  The  Third 
Person  denotes  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of;  as,  Haste  makes  waste. 

7.  Number  shows  how  many  are  meant.  The  Singular  Number 
denotes  but  one ;  the  Plural,  more  than  one. 

1 


2     '  REVIEW   OF  ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

'  •* ''  8.*'  Cdise  shows  tte  relation  of  a  Noun  or  Pronoun  to  other  words.  A 
change  of  relation  requires  a  change  of  case.  There  are  four  cases,  —  the 
Nominative,  the  Possessive,  the  Objective,  and  the  Independent. 

a.  The  Nominative  Case  denotes  the  relation  of  a  Subject  to  its 
Verb,  and  answers  the  question  Who  ?  or  What  ? 

h.  The  JPossessive  Case  denotes  the  relation  of  possession,  and 
answers  the  question  Whose  ? 

c.  The  Objective  Case^  denotes  the  relation  of  a  Direct  Object 

(39,  a)  to  the  Transitive  Verb  which  governs  it,  and  answers  the 
question  Whom  ?  or  What  ?  It  is  also  used  with  a  Preposition 
to  form  a  Phrase  (43) ;  as,  Men  gain  wealth  by  industry. 

d.  The  Independent  Case,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  the  Case 

Absolute,  has  no  dependence  on  any  other  word.     Its  most 

common  uses  are :  (1)  as  the  Case  of  Address ;  f  as.  Soldiers, 

we  have  conquered ;  (2)  with  Participles,  forming  a  contracted 

clause ;  as.  The  guard  having  been  killed,  the  prisoner  escaped 

(that  is,  since,  or  when  he  had  been  killed). 

9.   An  Adjective  limits  or  describes  a  Noun  or  the  equivalent  of 

a  Noun ;  as,  Honest  men  prosper ;  To  err  (error)  is  human,  to  forgive 

(forgiveness)  is  divine  ;  That  he  should  come  was  strange. 

a.  Adjectives  are  sometimes  used  as  Nouns,  the  words  with  which 

they  agree  being  understood.  When  thus  used,  they  are  called 
Pronominal  Adjectives,  that  is,  used  for  a  Noun  (11) ;  as. 
The  wise  grow  in  wisdom ;  The  first  is  my  friend,  but  the  second 
I  never  saw  before. 

b.  Adjectives  denoting  number  are  called  Numeral  Adjectives. 

They  are  either  Cardinal,  telling  how  many  (as,  one,  twenty),  or 
Ordinal,  telling  which  one  in  order  (as,  sixth,  third). 

10.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  is  a  change  in  form  by  which  they 
express  different  degrees  of  quality. 

There  are  three  degrees  of  comparison :  the  Positive,  denoting  a 
quality  in  its  simple  state;  as,  wise,  good;  the  Comparative,  denoting 
a  higher  or  lower  degree  than  the  Positive ;  as,  wiser,  better,  less  ;  the 
Superlative,  denoting  the  highest  or  lowest  degree  of  the  quahty ;  as, 
wisest,  best,  least. 

Adjectives  are  compared  in  three  ways  :  (1)  Regularly,  by  adding 
r  or  er  to  the  Positive  for  the  Comparative,  and  st  or  est  for  the 

♦  The  peculiar  uses  of  the  Objective  Case  are  given  in  section  54, 
\  In  Latin,  the  Vocative  Case  (from  t^oco,  I  call) 


REVIEW  OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR.  3 

Superlative,  as,  tall^  taller^  tallest ;  (2)  Irregularly,  as,  good^  better, 
best ;  (3)  By  using  the  Adverbs  more  and  mos*,  or  less  and  leasts 
with  the  Positive. 

11.  A  Pronoun  (Latin  pro,  for,  and  nomen,  name)  is  a  word 
used  for  a  noun,  and,  like  a  noun,  has  Gender,  Person,  Number, 
Case*     Pronouns  are  either  Personal,  Relative,  or  Interrogative. 

a.  A  Personal  Pronoun  indicates,  by  its  form,  the  person  speaking, 

the  person  addressed,  and  the  person  spoken  of.  The  Personal 
Pronouns  are  I,  you  (sometimes  thou),  he,  she,  it,  and  their 
plural  forms,  we,  you  (sometimes  ye),  they, 

b.  A  Relative  Pronoun  refers  to  a  preceding   substantive  (or  its 

equivalent),  called  the  Antecedent,  and  connects  clauses. 
The  Antecedent  may  be  a  Noun,  or  any  word,  or  collection  of 
words,  used  as  a  Noun ;  as.  The  man  who  (Pronoun  and  con- 
nective) came  to  see  me  was  my  friend ;  We  climbed  the  moun^ 
tain,  which  was  a  dangerous  feat.  In  the  last  example,  We  climbed 
the  mountain  is  the  antecedent  of  which,  the  Relative  Pronoun. 
The  Helative  Pronouns  are  who,  which,  tvJiat,  that.  After 
suck  and  same,  as  is  often  used  as  a  Relative  Pronoun. 

c.  An  Interrogative  Pronoun  asks  a  question ;  as.  What  did  you  say  ? 

The  list  is  who,  which,  what, 

12.  A  Verh  expresses  being,  action,  or  state;  as,  am,  run,  sleep. 
A  Verb  is  either  Transitive,  acting  on  a  Direct  Object  (39,  a) ;  as, 
Brutus  killed  his  friend ;  or  Intransitive,  not  acting  on  a  Direct  Object. 
The  word  transitive  means  passing  over ;  that  is,  the  action  passes 
over  from  the  actor  to  the  object  receiving  the  action. 

13.  To  verbs  belong  Voice,  Mode,  Tense,  Number,  Person, 

14.  There  are  two  Voices,  Active  and  Passive.  The  Active  repre- 
sents some  person  or  thing  as  existing  or  acting ;  as.  He  is  praising. 
The  Passive  represents  some  person  or  thing  as  acted  upon ;  as.  We 
are  praised ;  They  are  loved  ;  He  is  conquered. 

15.  Mode  (Lathi  modus,  manner)  shows  how  a  person  regards  an 
action,  etc.,  and  therefore  how  he  states  it. 

''  The  Mode  of  a  verb  shows  the  mood  of  the  speaker." 

a.  The  Indicative  Mode  states  a  fact,  or  asks  a  question  ;  as.  He 

comes  ;  Has  he  come  ? 
h.  The  Potential  Mode  expresses  liberty,  ability,  or  necessity.     It 

employs,  as  Auxiliary  verbs  (25),  may,  can,  must,  might,  could, 

would,  should  ;  as,  I  may  go  ;   We  must  obey. 


4  EEYIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GEAMMAR. 

c.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  states  sometliing  as  possible  (or  uneer- 

tain)  or  impossible;  as,  If  I  were  general;  If  he  should  come. 
More  will  be  said  of  this  mode  when  the  subject  of  Tense  is 
reached  (19). 

d.  The  Imperative  Mode  commands,  exhorts,   or  entreats;    as. 

Soldiers,  advance  ;  Friend,  renounce  your  evil  habits ;  Help  me. 

e.  The  Infinitive  Mode  is  not  limited,  as  the  other  modes  are,  in 

respect  to  person  or  number;  hence  its  name  (infinite,  un- 
limited). The  other  modes  are  called  finite  (i.  e.  limited  in 
person  and  number).  The  Infinitive  Mode  does  not  state  any- 
thing. It  is  often  used  as  a  Verbal  Noun ;  as,  To  be  is  better 
than  to  seem. 

16.  Tense  is  a  distinction  of  time. 
Time  is  present,  past,  oy  future. 

An  act  may  be  thought  of,  in  an^  time,  as 
I.  Indefinite  ;  as,  I  wrote  (whenever  I  wished). 
II.  Imperfect ;  as,  I  was  writing  (action  not  completed) . 
III.  Completed;  as,  I  have  written  (the  writing  is  now  finished). 

17.  The  Indicative  Mode  is  the  only  one  in  which  the  tenses  denote 
proper  distinctions  of  time.  In  the  other  modes,  the  same  names  are 
applied  to  the  tenses,  but,  in  most  instances,  these  names  give  no  idea 
of  the  real  time  thought  of.  That  this  fact  may  be  more  clearly  under- 
stood, the  tenses  of  each  mode  will  be  described  separately. 

a.  The  following  table  shows  for  the  Indicative  Mode,  (1)  The 
^     divisions  of  time ;  (2)  How  the  action  may  be  stated  in  connec- 
tion with  each ;   (3)  Examples ;  (4)  Names  whicb  we  usually 
give  to  the  tenses  :  — 


Time.     Action  stated  as  Examples.       -  Common  Names. 

Present.  ■ 


Past. 


Futwe. 


/  Indefinite,    I  give  (whenever  I  please).  ) 

)  Imperfect,    I  am  giving  (action  7iot  completed).  J 

(^  Completed,  I  have  given  (action  now  completed).  i  ■^''^*^^**^ 

/Indefinite,    I  gave  (whenever  I  pleased).  ) 

)  Imperfect,    I  was  giving  (action  not  completed,).  j 

I  Completed,  I  had  given  (action    completed    in  past )  Past 

^  time).  )  Perfect, 

/Indefinite,    I  shall  give  (at  any  time).  X-ku  -t 

J  Imperfect,    I  sliall  be  giving  (action  not  completed).       ) 
j  Completed,  I  shall  have  given  (action  completed  in  the  )  future 
^  future).  3  Perfect, 


EEVIEW   OF  ENGLISH   GKAMMAR.  5 

h.  The  Imperfect  forms  (present,  past,  and  future)  are  often  called 
progressive,  because  they  denote  the  act  or  state  as  going  on. 
The  Indefinite  forms  (present  and  past)  are  often  expressed  in 
statement SyWiih.  do  and  did,  and  these  are  called  emphatiCf 
because  they  state  more  positively  than  do  the  ordinary  forms. 
In  questions,  these  words  do  not  give  this  force ;  as,  Did  you 
not  visit  the  sick  man  ?     Yes,  I  did  visit  him. 

Note.  We  often  use  forms  which  might  be  misleading  if  not  studied  in 
connection  with  another  thought.  In  the  sentence,  ''When  he  comes,  I  shall 
welcome  him,"  comes  represents  future  time.  Also,  in  the  sentence,  "If  I  do 
not  find  my  trunk  before  Tuesday,  I  shall  go  without  it,"  do  find  is  equivalent 
to  shall  have  found.  The  knowledge  of  this  fact  is  of  great  value  in  expressing 
many  English  sentences  in  Latin,  since  in  that  language  the  distinctions  of 
tense  are  more  carefully  observed. 

18.  The  tenses  of  the  JPotential  Mode  are  four,  —  the  Present, 
Past,  Present  Perfect,  Past  Perfect. 

These  names,  however,  are  of  little  value  in  indicating  distinction  of 
time,  which,  in  very  many  cases,  can  be  decided  only  by  the  sense. 
Some  of  these  peculiar  uses  arise  from  the  lack  of  a  Future  and  Future 
Perfect.  The  Past  Perfect  is  more  accurate  in  its  use  than  any  of  the 
others. 

These  tenses  employ  the  following  Auxiliary  Verbs  (25)  :  — 

a.  May,  can,  must,  to  form  the  Present. 

b.  Might,  could,  would,  should,  to  form  the  Past. 

c.  May  {can,  must)  hai^e,  to  form  the  Present  Perfect. 

d.  Might  (could,  would,  should)  have,  to  form  the  Past  Per- 

fect. 

The  following  examples  show  what  has  already  been  stated,  —  that 
the  sense,  and  not  the  name  of  the  tense,  must  often  decide  the  time 
denoted  by  the  tenses  of  the  Potential  Mode  :  — 

He  ma^/  he  here  {now,  or  to-morrow) ;  I  must  go  (next  year) ;  We 
can  do  that  (to-day,  or  next  week) ;  The  general  said  that  the  town 
must  be  taken  (at  that  time) ;  He  may  have  been  here  yesterday ;  The 
soldiers  may  have  taken  the  town  before  we  can  reach  it. 

Remark.  The  above  examples  show  that  the  Potential  Mode  has,  in  sense 
if  not  in  form,  six  tenses;  the  Present  being  used  when  a  Future  is  required, 
and  the  Present  Perfect  when  a  Future  Perfect  is  needed. 


6  REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

19.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  *  has  only  one  form,  in  common  use, 
that  is  unlike  the  tense-forms  of  the  Indicative  and  Potential.  That 
form  is  were,  in  the  First  and  Third  Persons  Singular,  where  the 
Indicative  has  was;  as,  If  I  were  you;  If  he  were  industrious.  It 
borrows  its  other  tense-forms  from  the  Indicative  and  Potential. 

In  the  Subjunctive,  as  in  the  Potential,  the  sense,  and  not  the  name 
of  the  tense,  must  often  decide  the  time  (18). 

According  to  the  definition  given  in  section  15,  ^,  the  Subjunctive 
states  something  as  possible  (or  douhtfuT)  or  impossible. 

Eour  Subjunctive  tense-forms  will  be  described,  a  thorough  knowl- 
edge of  which  will  be  of  very  great  value  to  the  student  when  he  shall 
translate  Latin  sentences  containing  the  same  thoughts.  These  forms 
denote  action  as :  (1)  Puture ;  (2)  Future  Perfect ;  (3)  Present ;  (4) 
Past.  These  are  chosen,  not  because  tliey  are  the  onl^  tenses  of  the 
Subjunctive,  but  because  they  best  illustrate  the  mode,  or  wa^,  of  ex- 
pressing a  thought  in  the  Subjunctive  Mode.  The  following  will  make 
this,  clear :  — 

a.  Future  Fossibility  (or  Doubt).  1.  If  he  should  come  to-morrow, 
I  would  be  glad.  2.  If  he  should  {have)  come  before  next  Thurs- 
day, he  could  and  would  save  the  prisoner's  life. 

'Present.  1.  If  I  tcere  richer,  I  should  be  contented. 
2.  If  you  loved  your  country,  you  would  be 
fighting  for  it.  3.  If  he  saw  the  snake,  he 
would  be  afraid. 
Past.  If  he  had  been  general,  he  would  have 
managed  aifairs  more  wisely. 


b.  Impossibility, 


Remark.  The  student  will  notice  that  (under  h)  a  tense  past  in  form  is 
used  to  state  something  as  impossible  in  present  time. 

In  the  following  sentences,  tell,  —  (1)  What  time  is  thought  of;  (2)  What 

*  To  Teachers.  No  attempt  has  here  been  made  to  follow  the  system 
ordinarily  adopted  in  school  grammars.  An  excellent  authority  remarks,  "The 
Subjunctive  is  evidently  passing  out  of  use  "  (i.  e.  as  a  for^n  of  the  language), 
and  it  is  important  that  a  student  should  be  so  trained  in  the  use  of  language 
that  he  may  be  able  to  recognize  in  the  Subjunctive  a  medium  of  thought;  and 
this  is  the  only  purpose  that  the  author  has  in  presenting  this  view  of  the 
mode.  The  teacher  may  prefer  to  omit  this  section  until  the  Latin  Sub- 
junctive is  studied.  It  will  aid  the  student  greatly  to  study  the  illustrative 
sentences  given  here;  and  the  teacher  should  emphasize  the  fact  that  correct 
speech  in  English  requires  certain  forms  to  express  certain  thoughts. 


REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR.  7 

each  sentence  means  (that  is,  whether  something  is  stated  as  possible  or  impos- 
sible). Some  of  these  sentences  may  require  to  be  changed  in  form  before  the 
thought  can  be  clearly  seen  :  — 

1.  Were  he  to  confess  his  fault,  he  would  be  forgiven.  2.  Were  he  here,  he 
would  be  among  friends.  3.  If  thy  brother  trespass  against  thee,  rebuke  him ; 
and  if  he  repent,  forgive  him.  4.  If  we  should  not  find  the  house,  I  'd  be  in 
despair.  5.  If  the  doctor  had  come  yesterday,  the  sick  man  would  be  better 
to-day.  6.  If  thou  hadst  been  here,  my  brother  had  not  died.  7.  Were  he 
more  diligent,  he  would  be  more  successful. 

20.  The  Imperative  Mode  has  but  one  tense-form  (the  Present), 
and  one  person  (the  Second).  This  tense  denotes  the  time  of  giving  a 
command;  the  time  of  obeying  is  future;  as,  Soldiers,  when  you  attack 
(shall  attack)  the  enemy  to-morrow,  advance  fearlessly.  A  direct  com- 
mand can  be  expressed  in  the  Second  Person  only.  Such  forms  ab 
"Let  me  go,"  "Let  him  beware,"  express  an  entreaty^  exhortation, 
warning,  etc.  Really,  let  is  in  the  Imperative,  and  go  in  the  Infinitive 
(56,  Remark);  but,  by  constant  use,  let  has  become  a  mere  sign  of 
an  exhortation,  warning,  etc. 

21.  The  Infinitive  Mode  has  two  tenses,  the  Present  and  the  Fer- 
feet ;  as,  to  see,  to  have  seen,  to  he  struck,  to  have  been  struck. 

Notice  that  the  time  of  these  tenses  depends  on  the  time  of  the  prin- 
cipal verb.  The  Present  represents  an  event  as  taking  place  at  the  time 
of  the  principal  verb ;  as,  I  wish  (shall  wish,  had  wished)  to  go.  The 
Perfect  represents  an  event  as  completed  at,  or  before,  the  time  of  tlie 
principal  verb ;  as.  He  is  said  (was  said,  will  have  been  said)  to  have 
heard. 

22.  The  Number  and  Person  of  a  Verb  are  the  same  as  those  of 
its  Subject. 

23.  A  Participle  is  a  Verbal  Adjective  ;  that  is,  it  has  the  general 
meaning  of  a  Verb,  but,  like  an  Adjective,  it  modifies  a  Noun  or  a  Pro- 
noun.    Participles  are  used  in  both  voices,  and  in  three  tenses. 

Active  Participles :  — 

a.  The  Present  Participle  ends  in  ing ;   as.  The  boy,  seeing  the 

danger,  flees ;  He,  hearing  the  sound,  arose. 

b.  The  Past  Participle  differs  from  tlie  others  in  that  it  has  no  strictly 

adjective  use,  but  is  only  used  in  forming  compound  tenses  in 
the  Active ;  as,  I  have  seen  ;  He  had  heard. 
e.  The  Perfect  Participle ;  as.  Having  seen  his  friends,  he  returned  ; 
Having  learned  the  lesson,  he  will  recite. 


8  REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

Passive  Participles :  — . 

d.  The  Present  Participle,  ending  in  d  or  edf  unless  tlie  verb  is 

irregular  (24).     Sometimes,  however,  it  is  preceded  by  being; 
as.  The  soldier  falls  (or  fell),  {being)  severely  wounded. 

e.  The  Past  Participle,  used  in  the  Passive  as  the  same  participle  is 

employed  in  the  Active,  but  with  more  adjective  force ;  as.  He 
has  been  injured. 
/.   The  Perfect  Participle ;  as.  Having  been  wounded,  he  must  be 
(will  be,  was)  carried  home. 

Remark.  Notice  that,  as  in  the  Infinitive  Mode,  the  time  of  a  participle 
depends  on  the  time  of  some  other  verb.  This  will  be  seen  from  the  preceding 
examples.  The  Present  Participle,  therefore,  represents  an  action  as  going  on 
(Active)  or  received  (Passive)  at  the  time  expressed  by  the  principal  verb.* 
Also,  notice  that  the  Perfect  Participle  represents  an  action  as  completed  at  the 
time  of  the  principal  verb. 

24.  Yerbs  are  called  regular,  when  they  form  their  past  tense  and 
past  participle  by  the  addition  of  d,  or  ed  to  the  simple  form ;  as,  help, 
helped.  Yerbs  are  called  irregular,  when  they  do  not  follow  this  law ; 
as,  am  J  was,  been. 

25.  An  Auxiliary  Verb  (Latin  auocilium,  aid)  is  one  used  to 
aid  in  the  conjugation  of  other  verbs ;  as,  He  does  not  think  that  you 
will  tell  me  what  he  has  done  and  can  do,  if  the  opportunity  is  offered. 

26.  Some  Yerbs  are  found  only  in  the  Third  Person  Singular.  They 
never  have  a  personal  subject  (J,  you,  lie),  and  hence  are  called  Im- 
personal Verbs,  They  are  also  called  Unipersonal  (one  person), 
because  used  only  in  the  Third  Person. 

This  subject  (it)  is  very  indefinite  in  its  meaning,  and  if,  when  we 
say,  "  It  rains,"  "  It  snows,"  some  one  were  to  ask,  "  JFhat  rains  (or 
snows)  ?  "  the  question  would  not  be  easy  to  answer. 

It  stands  for  the  thought,  or  general  idea,  of  the  verb ;  or,  as  we 
should  say  in  Latin,  for  the  stem  of  the  verb.  "It  rains,"  "It  snows," 
mean  "  Rain  is  falling,"  "  Sno?/?  is  falling,"  etc. 

27.  A  Defective  Verb  lacks  some  of  its  modes  or  tenses ;  as,  ma^, 
can,  ought,  quoth,  shall. 

*  Therefore  some  grammarians  call  this  tense  of  the  Participle,  in  both 
voices,  the  Imperfect  Participle,  because  its  action  is  represented  as  not  com- 
pleted.  The  Present  Infinitive  is  often  called  the  Imperfect  Infinitive,  for 
a  like  reason. 


REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GKAMMAR.  9 

28.  An  Adverb  is  used  to  modify  a  Verb,  Adjective,  or  another 
Adverb. 

An  adverb  may  express  :  — 

Time;  as,  lately ;  Place;  as,  here;  Cause;  as,  whi/ ;  Degree; 
as,  very,  wholly  ;  Matiner ;  as,  wellj  earnestly  ;  Affirmation ;  as, 
yeSf  certainly  ;  Negation  ;  as,  no,  not. 

29.  A  Preposition  (meaning  placed  before)  connects  a  Noun  or 
Pronoun  with  some  other  word ;  as,  He  lived  in  Rome.  This  Noun  or 
Pronoun  must  be  in  the  Objective  Case  (8,  c). 

Remark.  When  the  Noun  or  Pronoun  is  omitted,  the  Preposition  becomes 
an  Adverb  ;  *  as,  He  ran  doion  the  hill  (Preposition) ;  He  ran  down  (Adverb). 

30.  A  Conjunction  (Latin  con,  together,  and  jungo,  join')  is  a 
word  used  to  connect  words,  phrases  (43),  and  clauses  (41). 

Conjunctions  are  :  — 

a.  Co-ordinate,  when  they  connect  elements  of  equal  importance  ;  as, 

and,  hut. 
h.  Subordinate,  when  they  connect  elements  of  unequal  importance  ; 

as,  if,  because. 
Adverbs  used  as  Subordinate  Conjunctions  are   called  Conjunctive 
Adverbs  ;  as,  when,  while,  before. 

31.  An  Interjection  (meaning  thrown  in,  or  between)  is  a  word 
thrown  into  a  sentence,  not  dependent  on  any  other  word,  and  not 
affecting  the  construction  of  the  sentence.  It  expresses  some  strong  or 
sudden  emotion ;  as,  alas  !  ah  !  Many  other  parts  of  speech  are  some- 
times used  as  Interjections ;  as.  What !  don't  you  remember  me  ? 
Nonsense  ! 


SYNTAX. 

32.  Syntax  treats  of  the  construction  of  sentences,  and  the  relation 
of  their  different  parts  to  each  other. 

33.  A  Sentence  is  a  collection  of  words  expressing  a  complete 
thought ;  as.  The  brave  soldier  received  a  reward  from  his  general. 

34.  Analysis  is  the  separation  of  a  sentence  into  the  elements,  or 
parts,  that  compose  it,  in  order  to  discover  their  relation  to  each  other. 

*  Really,  Prepositions  are  Adverbs  used  as  connectives. 


10  REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GEAMMAE. 

35.  Every  complete  sentence  must  contain  :  —  • 

a,  A  Suhjectf  telling  the  person  or  thing  that  m,  or  ads,  or  is  acted 

upon.     It  answers  the  question  Who  ?  or  What  ? 

b.  A  Predicate,  telling  what  is  said  of  the  Subject.     In  the  sen- 

tence, "Brave  soldiers  fight  with  no  thought  of  fear,"  soldiers 
is  the  Subject,  midijight  with  no  thought  of  fear  is  the  Predicate. 

36.  The  Subject  must  be  a  Noun,  or  the  equivalent  of  a  Noun. 
In  place  of  a  Noun,  as  Subject,  may  be  used  :  — 

a.  A  Pronoun ;  as.  The  man  said  that  he  would  come. 

b.  An  Adjective  ;  as.  The  good  are  happy. 

c.  An  Infinitive  (3,  c)  ;  as.  To  err  is  human. 

d.  A  Clause  (41)  ;  as.  That  he  is  m^  friend  is  true ;   Wh^  he  killed 

his  friend  will  always  be  a  problem. 

e.  Any  word  or  collection  of  words,  not  a  Noun,  but  of  which 

something  can  be  stated  ;  as,  ^  is  a  letter ;  1(9  is  a  preposition ; 
-|-  is  the  sign  of  addition. 

Remark.  Of  course  the  gender  of  such  subjects  as  those  mentioned  in 
c,  d,  e,  must  be  neuter. 

37.  The  Predicate  must  contain  a  Verh,  since  this  is  the  only  part  of 
speech  that  can  make  a  statement.  The  Imperative  Mode  may  form  a 
complete  sentence,  the  Subject  being  understood.  Yerbs  in  other  modes 
may  form  complete  Predicates  ;  as.  Dogs  bark  ;  Birds  fli/  ;  It  rains. 

a.  The  verb  to  he,  however,  cannot  (in  its  ordinary  use)  form  a 

complete  Predicate,  as  it  does  not  state  anything.  Snow  is, 
C(Bsar  was,  The  boy  will  be,  are  not  sentences,  since  each  re- 
quires some  word  to  complete  its  meaning.  Such  a  word  is  called 
a  Complement.  A  Complement  of  the  first  example  would  be  the 
word  white;  of  the  ^econdL,  general  ox  victorious  ;  of  the  third, 
studious.  The  forms  is,  was,  will  be,  simply  connect  the  subjects 
and  the  words  which  describe  them.  To  he  is  therefore  called 
a  Copula  (meaning  link,  coupler). 

b.  Other  verbs,  besides  to  he,  are  used  as  Copulative  Yerbs.     To 

become,  to  appear,  to  seem,  are  the  most  common  of  these ; 
as,  He  became  a  hero  ;  The  boy  appeared  {seemed)  honest. 
€  The  Passive  Yoice  of  the  verbs  to  make,  to  choose,  to  call, 
to  think,  and  others  of  like  meaning,  has  the  same  use  (as 
Copulative  Yerbs) ;  as,  I  have  been  made  {chosen,  called,  con- 
sidered) leader. 


REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR.  11 

Remark.  An  Adjective  used  after  one  of  the  verbs  mentioned  in  a^  b,  c, 
modifies  the  Subject ;  and  as  the  Copulative  Verb  has  no  more  effect  on  the 
case  after  it  than  the  sign  =,  a  Noun  following  such  a  verb,  defining  or  de- 
scribing the  subject,  will  be  in  the  Nominative.  As  both  the  Adjective  and 
Noun  help  to  form  the  Predicate,  they  are  called  the  Predicate  Adjective 
and  Predicate  Noun  (or  Nominative). 

d.  The  principles  stated  above  will  apply  to  any  Noun  or  Adjective 
standing  after  an  Intransitive  Verb,  but  describing  the  Subject; 
as.  He  returned  a  friend ,  who  came  a  foe  (Jriend  and  foe  being 
in  the  Nominative  Case). 

38.  The  principal  elements  (the  Subject  and  Predicate)  may  be 
modified :  — 

a.  By  an  Adjective  element;  that  is,  a  word,  phrase  (43),  or 

clause  (41),  which  performs  the  office  of  an  Adjective;  as,  A 

wise  man  (man  of  wisdom^  man  who  is  wise)  will  care  for  his 

health. 
Under  this  head  should  be  included  any  word,  or  collection  of 

words,  which  may  modify  a  Substantive  ;  for  example  :  — 
A  Possessive  Case;  as.  The  bofs  book  has  been  found. 
An  Appositive  (46) ;  as.  We,  the  people  of  these  United  States, 

are  free ;  The  saying,  "  Honesty  is  the  best  policy, ^^  is  an  old 

proverb. 
A  Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective  (37,  Remaek). 

b.  By  an  Objective  element ;  that  is,  a  word,  phrase,  or  clause, 

used  as  an  Object ;  as,  He  wishes  food  (or  to  eat)  ;  He  says 
that  he  must  go  ;  They  asked  what  I  had  said. 

c.  By  an  Adverbial  element ;  that  is,  a  word,  phrase,  or  clause, 

that  performs  the  duty  of  an  Adverb ;  as,  He  runs  swiftly  (or 
at  full  speed)  ;  He  will  come  when  he  can  (or  to-morrow). 

39.  An  Object  may  be  :  — 

a.  Direct ;  that  is,  receiving  the  full  effect  of  the  action  expressed  by 

a  Transitive  Verb  ;  as.  He  struck  me. 

b.  Indirect ;  that  is,  showing  the  person  or  thing  to  {ox  for)  whom 

(or  which)  anything  is  done,  or  happens  ;  as.  They  told  him  (to 
him.  Indirect  Object)  the  story  (Direct  Object)  ;  Give  me  (to 
me)  the  book. 

40.  Sentences  are  divided,  with  respect  to  iheiT  form,  into  three 
classes  -.  Simple,  Compound,  and  Complex, 


12  KEVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

a.  A  Simple  Sentence  expresses  a  single  complete  thought ;  that 

is,  it  contains  but  one  Subject  and  one  Predicate ;  as,  Caesar 
wrote  a  history  of  his  campaigns  in  Gaul. 

b.  A  Compound  Sentence  contains  two  or  more  Simple  Sen- 

tences, each  expressing  an  independent  thought ;  as.  Put  not 
your  trust  in  money,  but  put  your  money  in  trust;  He  ex- 
ercises, therefore  he  is  well. 

c.  A  Complex  Sentence  contains  one  Simple  Sentence  and  one  or 

more  thoughts  that  are  dependent  upon  it;  as,  Milton,  who 
wrote  "  Paradise  Lost,"  said  that  he  did  not  educate  his  daugh- 
ters in  the  languages,  because  one  tongue  was  enough  for  a 
woman.  * 

41.  In  Compound  and  Complex  Sentences,  each  separate  thought  is 
called  a  Clause,  A  Compound  Sentence,  therefore,  consists  of  two 
Independent y  or  Principal,  Clauses ;  and  a  Complex  Sentence  contains 
one  Principal,  and  one  or  more  Dependent  (or  Subordinate)  Clauses. 

42.  Dependent  Clauses  are  either  Substantive,  Adjective,  or 
Adverbial, 

a.  A  Substantive  Clause  is  one  that  takes  the  place  of  a  Substan- 

tive ;  that  is,  of  a  Noun  or  Pronoun.  The  use  of  such  a  clause, 
as  Direct  Object,  is  seen  in  the  example  (40,  c),  where  that  he 
did  not  educate  his  daughters  in  the  languages,  etc.,  is  the  Direct 
Object  of  said. 

b.  An  Adjective  Clause  performs  the  office  of  an  Adjective.     In 

40,  c,  who  wrote  ''Paradise  Lost,^^  describes  Milton,  and  is  an 
AdjectiviB  Clause. 

c.  An  Adverbial  Clause  takes  the  place  of  an  Adverb.      The 

clause,  because  one  tongue,  etc.  (40,  <?),  is  an  Adverbial  Clause 
expressing  cause,  and  answering  the  question  Whi/  ? 

43.  A  TTnrase  is  a  collection  of  words,  without  Subject  or  Predicate, 
which  may  be  used  as  an  Adjective  or  Adverb ;  as.  She  had  a  voice  of 
wonderful  power,  and  sang  with  great  expression.  Phrases  are  of  several 
forms ;  that  most  common  is  called  a  Prepositional  Phrase,  and  consists 
of  a  Noun  or  Pronoun  and  a  Preposition,  which  connects  it  with  the 
word  which  is  modified  by  the  phrase ;  as,  in  the  example  under  this 
section,  in  which  of  power  is  an  Adjective  Phrase  (=  powerful)  modify- 
ing voice,  and  with  expression  (=  expressively)  is  an  Adverbial  Phrase, 
modifying  sang. 


REVIEW    OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR.  13 

44.  A  Sentence,  according  to  its  meaning,  may  be  :  — 

a.  Declaratory,  when  it  makes  a  statement ;  as.  It  rains. 

h.  Interrogative,  when  it  asks  a  question;  as,  Does  it  rain? 

c.  Ijnperative,  when  it  expresses  a,  command ;  as,  Let  it  rain ;  Go. 

d.  Exclawiatory,  when  it  has  the  form  of  an  exclamation;  as.  How 

it  rains  ! 

SOME  ELEMENTARY  RULES  OF  SYNTAX. 

Nominative  as  Subject. 

45.  A  Noun  or  Pronoun,  used  as  the  Subject  of  a  Finite  Verb,  must 
be  in  the  Nominative  Case. 

Apposition. 

46.  A  Noun  or  Pronoun,  used  to  explain  another  Noun  or  Pronoun, 
and  meaning  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  same  case.  This 
is  called  Apposition  (meaning  near  position) ;  as,  Caesar,  the  general, 
addressed  his  soldiers,  men  tried  in  many  conflicts. 

Predicate  Nominative  and  Adjective. 

a.  A  Noun  or  Pronoun,  used  as  the  Complement  of  to  he  or  any 

other  Copulative  Verb  (37,  a,  b,  c),  describes  the  subject  and 
must  be  in  the  Nominative  Case.  This  principle  is  the  same 
as  Apposition,  except  that  the  descriptive  Noun  or  Pronoun 
requires  a  Copulative  Verb  to  connect  it  with  the  word  which 
it  modifies. 

b.  An  Adjective,  used  as  the  Complement  of  to  be  or  any  other 

Copulative  Verb,  modifies  the  Subject. 
Remark.     In  general,  it  may  be  stated  that  — 

c.  An  Intransitive  Verb  or  a  Passive  form  takes  the  same  case  after 
as  before  it. 

Adjectives  and  Participles. 

47.  An  Adjective  or  Participle  (Verbal  Adjective)  must  describe  or 
limit  some  Noun  or  Pronoun. 

Possession. 

48.  Possession  must  be  expressed  by  the  Possessive  Case  or  by  the 
Preposition  of  with  a  Substantive. 


14  REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 


Direct  Object. 

49.  The  Direct  Object  of  a  Transitive  Yerb  must  be  in  the  Objective 
Case ;  as,  He  obeyed  the  law. 

This  rule  applies  to  Participles  and  Verbal  Nouns  (from  Transitive 
Verbs),  as  well  as  to  all  ordinary  forms  of  the  veji'b ;  as,  The  man,  seeing 
his  friend,  ran  after  him,  shouting  his  name  ;  Obeying  the  law  is  a  citi- 
zen's duty ;  To  preach  honesty  i^ne  thing ;  to  practise  it  is  another. 

Relative  Pronouus^ 

50.  A  Relative  Pronoun  agrees  with  its  Antecedent  in  Gender, 
Number,  and  Person ;  but  its  Case  depends  upon  the  form  of  its  own 
clause;  as.  You  have  injured  me,  who  am  your  friend. 

Verb. 

51.  A  Einite  Verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  Person  and  Number. 

a.  If  there  are  several  subjects,  of  different  persons,  the  verb  will  be 

in  the  Pirst  Person,  rather  than  the  Second  or  Third,  and  the 
Second,  rather  than  the  Third ;  as,  John,  you,  and  I  (that  is, 
we^  have  finished  our  lessons ;  This  gentleman  and  yourself 
(that  is,  you)  have  cast  your  votes. 

b.  A  Collective  Noun  may  take  a  verb  in  the  Singular,  when  the 

body  (or  group)  as  a  whole  is  spoken  of;  but  when  the  separate 
individuals  (or  objects)  are  thought  of,  the  verb  must  be  Plural ; 
as,  A  regiment  of  nine  hundred  men  was  ordered  to  charge; 
The  council  (that  is,  the  members  of  it)  were  in  doubt. 

c.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  subjects  in  the  Singular  number,  it 

will  be :  — 

(1)  Plural,  if  it  agrees  with  them  taken  together  ;  as.  The  master  and 

his  servant  have  come. 

(2)  Singular,  if  it  agrees  with  them  separately  ;  as,  Neither  (either) 

the  man  nor  (or)  his  servant  has  come. 

Tbe  Independent  Case. 

52.  The  Independent  Case  has  no  grammatical  dependence  upon  any 
word  in  the  sentence ;  as.  Citizens^  behold  your  king ;  The  time  having 
arrived,  we  started. 


KEVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR.  15 

Tlie  Infinitive  as  a  Verbal  Noun. 

53.  The  Infinitive  is  often  used  as  a  Verbal  Noun  in  the  Nominative 
or  Objective  Case ;  as,  To  die  for  one's  country  is  noble ;  He  wishes  to 
see  you. 

Some  Peculiar  Uses  of  tlie  Objective  Case.* 

54.  The  Objective  Case  is  used  to  express  -.  — 

1.  The  object  directly  affected  by  an  action  (39,  a). 

2.  The  object  indirectly  affected  by  an  action  (39, 1)). 

3.  The  space  over  which  the  action,  etc.,  extends ;  as,  He  drove  the 

horse  twenty  miles  ;  The  house  \^  fifty  feet  high. 

4.  The  time  during  which  the  action  or  state  continues  ;  as.  He  lived 

fifty  years  ;  She  was  nineteen  years  old. 

5.  The  time  when  (or  at  which)  an  event  takes  place  ;  as.  He  arrived 

(on)  the  next  day. 

6.  The  amount  (or  degree)  to  which  the  action  or  state  is  exerted; 

as.  He  was  injured  a  great  deal. 

7.  The   amount   (or   degree)   of  difference  between  two   objects   or 

actions  ;  as.  He  \%  five  years  older  than  I  (that  is,  older  by  that 
difference)  ;  He  is  <a5  head  taller  than  John ;  He  ran  a  great  deal 
faster  than  his  brother ;  He  is  not  one  cent  richer. 

8.  The  'place  toward  which  motion  is  directed ;  as,  I  went  home ; 

They  desire  to  go  West. 

9.  Price  ;  as.  The  book  cost  two  dollars. 

Remark.  The  Objective  Case,  in  Examples  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  has  the  force  of  an 
Adverb  of  Degree  or  Time,  answering  the  question  How  ?  How  much  1  When  t 
How  long  1  it  is,  therefore,  often  called,  in  such  uses,  the  Adverbial  Objective, 

"It"  and  "There"   as  Introductory  Subjects. 

55.  It  and  There  are  often  used  as  introductory  subjects  (the  real 
subjects  following  the  verb)  to  give  variety  to  the  form  of  the  sentence; 
as.  It  is  a  law  of  war  that  might  makes  right  (=  that  might  makes  right 
is  a  law  of  war). 

The  sentence,  "  There  are  five  men  there,"  means  "  Five  men  are 
there,"  and  the  first  there  has  no  particular  value  as  a  part  of  tiie  sen- 

*  The  remaining  sections  of  this  English  Review  may  be  omitted  for  the 
present,  and  employed  for  comparison  of  idioms  when  the  Syntax  of  Latin 
cases  is  studied.  They  will  be  of  service  to  the  beginner  in  his  study  of  the 
Accusative  with  the  Infinitive,  Accusative  of  Extent,  etc. 


16  REVIEW   OF   ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

teuce.  As  tliey  help  to  fill  out  the  sentence,  they  are  called  Exple- 
tives (from  a  Latin  word  meaning  to  Jill  out).  As  they  stand  in  the 
place  of  Substantives,  they  might  be  called  Expletive  Pronouns. 

The  Objective  Case  as  Subject  of  tbe  InfinitiTe. 

56.  The  Infinitive  Mode  is  often  used  to  denote  an  act,  and  the 
Objective  Case  to  denote  the  actor;  as.  He  ordered  me  to  go.  There- 
fore the  laws  regulating  the  relations  of  Subject  and  Verb  are  these  :  — 

a.  The  Subject  of  a  Tinite  Yerb  (15,  e)  must  be  in  the  Nominative 

Case. 

b.  The  Subject  of  an  Infinitive  must  be  in  the  Objective  Case  ;  as,  I 

knew  him  to  be  a  thief.  Let  him  (Jo)  come.  Whom  (p%"edicate 
Pronoun)  do  you  suppose  him  to  be?  I  wish  him  to  go.  I 
heard  the  bell  {to)  ring. 

Remark.    After  hid,  dare,  feel,  see,  let,  make,  meed.  Hear,  the 

sign  to  is  generally  omitted  with  the  Inhnitive  ;  as  in  the  examples  above. 


INTRODUCTION 


LATIN    LESSONS. 


1.  "  The  Latin  Language  was  the  language  of  Latium  (a  district  in 
ttaly),  of  which  Rome  was  the  chief  city.  The  conquests  of  the 
Romans  caused  it  to  spread  over  the  rest  of  Italy,  and  over  the  greater 
part  of  Trance  and  Spain.  The  Latin  Language  is  no  longer  spoken ; 
but  the  French,  Italian,  Spanish,  and  Portuguese  languages  are  mainly 
derived  from  it." 

Alphabet. 

2.  The  Latin  Alphabet  is  the  same  as  the  English,  except  that  it 
has  no  "w.  K  occurs  only  in  a  very  few  words.  Q,  as  in  English,  is 
always  followed  by  u. 

3.  The  letters  are  divided  into  Yowels  (a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y)  and  Conso- 
nants.    J  and  V  are  consonant  forms  of  i  and  u. 

4.  There  are  several  classes  of  Consonants,  of  which  these  are  the 
most  important :  — 

a.  Liquids  (1,  m,  n,  r).  They  are  called  Liquids  because  they  unite 
easily  in  sound  with  a  preceding  consonant,  or  Jfow  smoothly 
after  it.  This  is  especially  true  of  1  and  r,  and  these  letters 
are  therefore  frequently  called  semi-vowels.  The  English  words 
able,  betray,  snow,  small,  are  examples  of  Liquids  pronounced 
with  other  consonants. 

^.  H  is  not  a  consonant,  but  an  Aspirate  (that  is,  a  rough  breathing 
of  the  vowel  following  it). 

c.  Double  Consonants  (x,  z) .     X  =  cs,  gs ;  z  =  ds. 

d.  Mutes;  so  called  because  they  are  uttered  without  opening  the 

vocal  passage,  therefore  they  are  voiceless. 
2 


18  INTRODUCTION    TO   THE   LATIN   LESSONS. 

Remaek.*  Mutes  may  be  divided,  (1)  according  to  tlie  organ  by 
which  their  pronunciation  is  effected;  (2)  according  to  the  degree 
of  breathing  employed ;  that  is,  they  may  have  a  light  (or  sharp)  sound, 
an  intermediate  sound,  or  a  rough  sound. 

According  to  the  first  division,  they  are  called  Labials  (or  lip-letters)^ 
Palatals  (or  palate-letters),  and  Linguals  (or  tongue-letters).  Accord- 
ing to  the  second  division,  they  are  called  Smooth,  Middle,  and  Rough. 
The  table  here  given  shows  these  two  divisions :  — 


Labials. 

Palatals. 

Linguals. 

Smooth  Mutes, 

p. 

c  (k,  qu), 

t. 

Middle  Mutes, 

b, 

^, 

d. 

Rough  Mutes, 

ph, 

ch, 

th. 

5.  A  IHphthong  (meaning  "double  sound")  is  the  union  of  two 
vowel  sounds  in  one  syllable;  as,  cau-sae  (Eng.  causes).  The  most 
common  Diphthongs  in  Latin  are  ae,  oe,  au ;  the  least  common  are 
eu,  ei,  ui. 

6.  There  are  as  many  Syllables  in  a  Latin  word  as  there  are  single 
vowels  or  diphthongs.  The  English  words  separate,  accurate,  miles, 
crates,  more,  persuade,  would  be  pronounced,  as  Latin  words,  se-pa- 
ra'-te,  ac-cu-ra'-te,  mi'-les,  cra'-tes,  mo'-re,  per-sua'-de. 

Pronunciati  on. 

7.  The  Pronunciation  of  Latin  differs  in  different  countries.  The  two 
methods  which  are  most  commonly  employed  in  American  schools  are 
the  Roman  and  the  English.  These  are  presented  in  the  next  two 
sections. 

Koman  Metliod. 

8.  By  the  Roman  Method,  the  letters  have  the  following  sounds :  — 

Long.  Short. 

^  a  as  m  father.  ^  as  in  idea, 

e  as  ey  in  they.  S  as  in  net. 

Vowels.  ^  i  as  in  machine,  i  as  in  verily, 

6  as  in  old.  6  as  in  obey. 

u  as  00  in  moon.  ti  as  mfull. 
Y  has  a  sound  between  that  of  i  and  u. 

*  The  Teacher  may  omit  this  for  the  present,  employing  the  statements  here 
made  concerning  the  Mutes  for  reference  in  the  future.    The  Table  will  be  very 


INTRODUCTION  TO   THE   LATIN   LESSONS.  19 

Remark.  In  a  syllable  long  hy  'position  (11,  I,  F)  a  short  vowel  is 
pronounced  short ;  but,  before  nf,  ns,  gn,  and  j,  the  vowel  becomes 
long,  and  must  be  pronounced  as  a  long  vowel  (11,  I,  h.  Note). 

Diphthongs  :     ae  like  English  ay  {yes).        ei  as  in  eight. 

oe  like  oi  in  coin.  eu  as  ew  \\\few. 

au  like  ow  in  how.  ui  like  English  we. 

Consonants  :     c,  g,  always  hard,  as  in  car,  gun. 

j  like  y  in  yet ;  s  sharp,  as  in  sale. 

t  as  in  tent ;  v  like  w  in  went ;  qu  as  in  quart* 

bs,  bt,  like  ps,  pt ;  ch  as  k  ;  ph  as/ 

Englisli    Method. 

9.  The  letters  have  their  ordinary  English  sounds.  Notice,  how- 
ever, these  Special  Rules  :  — 

1.  Final  a,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  sounds  like  final  a  in 
America;  but  in  monosyllables  (as  a,  da,  quS)  the  long  sound  is 
usually  given. 

2.  In  tibi  and  sibi,  the  i  in  both  syllables  sounds  like  i  and  y  in 
fitly. 

3.  Es  final  sounds  like  ease. 

4.  Os  final  (in  the  plural)  sounds  like  ose  in  dose. 

Remark.  In  post  and  its  compounds,  OS  sounds  like  ose;  but  in  derivatives, 
0  is  sounded  short;  as,  pos'-te-rus. 

5 .  Ae  and  oe  have  the  same  sound  as  e ;  au  is  like  aw  in  saw  ;  in 
huic  and  cui,  ui  =  1  (as  though  these  words  were  spelled  hike,  ki). 

6.  In  such  words  as  Caius,  Pompeius,  Aquileia,  i  sounds  like  y; 
as,  Pom-pe'-yus,  A-qui-le' -ya. 

7.  C  has  the  sound  of  s,  and  g  the  sound  of  j,  before  e,  i,  y, 
ae,  oe,  eu. 

8.  Ch  is  always  hard  (like  k)  ;  as,  mach'-i-na. 

9.  T  and  c  (before  i)  often  have,  as  in  English,  the  sound  of  sh  ;  as, 
ra'-ti-o  (=  ra-sht-o).  The  hard  sound  is  retained  after  s,  t,  andx; 
as,  jus-ti-or,  Met'-ti-us. 

useful  to  the  student  in  his  study  of  the  Verb,  as  showing  that  most  of  the 
consonant  changes  made  result  from  interchange  between  mutes  of  the  same 
family ;  as,  scriptus  (from  scribo),  rectus  (from  rego),  etc. 


20  INTRODUCTION   TO   THE   LATIN   LESSONS. 

Quantity. 

10.  In  prououuciug  the  English  word  quantity^  the  second  and  third 
syllables  are  more  hastily  pronounced  than  the  first ;  in  other  words, 
it  takes  more  time  to  pronounce  the  first.  This  difference  in  the  length 
or  quantity  of  time  required  to  pronounce  different  syllables  was  far 
more  carefully  observed  by  the  Romans  than  it  is  by  us. 

In  Latin,  syllables  are  long  (-)  or  short  (^).  A  long  syllable  re- 
quires twice  as  much  time  for  pronunciation  as  a  short  one. 

Kules  of  Quantity. 

11.  The  quantity  of  most  Latin  syllables  is  decided  by  the  following 
Rules :  — 

I.  Long  Syllables.     A  syllable  is  said  to  be 

(a)  Long  by  nature,  if  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong  ;  as 
in  mater,  res,  Roma,  Caesar,  aurum,  poena. 
Note.     Vowels,  in  Latin,  are  long  or  short,  not  according  to  fixed  rules,  but 
by  nature  (that  is,  because  the  Romans   made  them  so),  and  therefore  their 
quantity  can  be  learned  only  by  observation  and  practice. 

Remark.  The  vowel  of  a  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long;  as  in  nil 
(for  nihil),  currus  (for  curruia 

(J))  Long  by  position,  if  its  vowel  (short  by  nature)  is  followed  by 
two  consonants   (but  see  II,  ^),   or  a  double  consonant 
(x,  z) ;   as   in   quantus  (Eng.   quantity),  index,  sunt. 
This  is  owing  to  the  distinct  pronunciation  of  both  conso- 
nants.    A  careless  speaker  might  pronounce  the  English 
word  given  above  quanHty,  and  thus  shorten  the  time  of 
the  first  syllable  by  not  sounding  both  consonants. 
Remark.    If,  however,  the  second  consonant  is  h,  the  syllable  is  not  made 
long  (II,  a,  Remark).     For  example,  the  quantity  of  the  negative  particle  in 
(Eng.  un)  remains  short  before  h  in  the  compound  inhonestus  (Eng.  dis> 
{h)onorable). 

Note.  Before  nf,  ns,  gn,  and  j,  a  short  vowel  itself  becomes  long  (8,  Re- 
mark); as  in  infero,  consul,  regnum,  hujus. 

II.  Short  Syllables.     A  syllable  is  said  to  be  short   (a)  If  its 

vowel  is  followed  by  another  vowel  or  by  a  diphthong ;  as 
in  via,  dies.  This  is  because,  in  Latin  as  in  English,  the 
first  vowel  naturally  "  runs  into  "  the  second,  and  loses  its 
value  as  a  separate  letter ;  as  in  impius  (Eng.  impious), 
victoria  (Eng.  victorious). 
Remark.    This  same  law  applies  to  a  vowel  before  h,  which  is  only  a 

breathing  (4,  6);  as  in  prohibeo   (so  also,  Eng.  pro{h)ibition),  veho  (Eng. 

veQi)icle\  nihil  (Eng.  ni(h)ilist). 


INTRODUCTION  TO   THE   LATIN   LESSONS.  21 

b.^  If  its  vowel  (naturally  short)  is  followed  by  a  mute  (4,  d) 
with  1  or  r  (that  is,  the  mute  must  stand  before  1  or  r)  ;  as 
in  agri  (from  ager),  patris  (from  pater);  but  acris  (from 
acer),  matris  (from  mater).  This  is  because  1  and  r 
blend  so  easily  with  the  preceding  mute  that  the  short 
vowel  is  really  followed  by  one  consonant  and  a  half, 
i.  e.  a  semi-vowel  (4,  ^),  and  not  by  two  full  consonants. 
Remark.  If,  however,  1  or  r  is  preceded  by  another  1  or  r,  the  syllable  is 
long;  as  in  carrus. 

Note.  Syllables  whose  quantity  is  decided  by  the  foregoing  rules  will  not 
be  marked  in  this  book.  Ail  other  syllables  are  to  be  considered  short,  unless 
they  are  marked  long. 

12.  Decide,  by  the  rules  given  in  section  11,  and  also  by  the  Note 
at  the  end  of  that  section,  the  quantity  of  every  syllable  in  the  following 
list  of  words  :  — 

tempestas  via  Caesar 

patria  index-  auro 

nihil  mansisset  pervius 

traho  dux  prohibeas 

Accent. 

13.  Accent  is  the  special  emphasis  which  a  particular  syllable  of 
a  word  receives  in  pronunciation ;  as  in  the  English  hap'py,  secure' , 
qual'ity.  English  accent  is  largely  a  matter  of  memory ;  for  example, 
the  following  words  of  two  syllables  are  derived  from  the  same  Latin 
Verb  (fero,  I  bear),  yet  some  are  accented  on  the  first  syllable,  and 
some  on  the  second  :  suffer,  infer',  differ,  defer'.  In  Latin,  Accent  is 
determined  by  these  simple  laws  :  f  — 

a.  In  words  of  two  syllables,  always  accent  the  frst ;   as,  Stella, 

de'us. 

b.  In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  always  accent  the  last  hut 

one,  if  it  is  long  ;  if  short,  accent  the  last  but  two ;  as,  ami'cus, 
proprae'tor,  dilexlt,  tur'ribus,  Ju'piter,  inge'nium. 

*  To  Teachers.  The  author  is  convinced  that  the  term  Common,  as  usually 
applied  to  the  quantity  of  a  vowel  thus  placed,  conveys  little  if  any. meaning 
to  the  mind  of  a  beginner  ;  it  should  not  be  used  in  connection  with  his  study 
of  prose,  but  left  for  his  consideration  when  he  shall  take  up  Latin  poetry. 
The  same  remark  will  apply  to  final  0,  which  will  be  marked  long,  except  in 
the  few  instances  where  it  is  short. 

t  The  accent  as  affected  by  an  Enclitic  is  explained  later;  also  that  of 
Vocatives  like  Mercuri. 


22  INTRODUCTION   TO   THE   LATIN   LEMONS. 

Remarks.  1.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ultima  (Eng.  uUi- 
7nate  -zz  final). 

2.  The  last  syllable  but  one  is  called  the  penult  (meaning  *^  almost  the  last." 
Compare  'Etng. peninsula^  ^^ almost  an  island"). 

3.  The  syllable  before  the  penult  is  called  the  antepenult  (i.  e.  before  the 
penult). 

Parts  of  Speech. 

14.  The  Parts  of  Speech  are  the  same  iu  Latin  as  in  English  (2, 
page  1). 

Inflection. 

15.  Inflection  is  a  change  made  in  the  form  of  a  word  to  show  its 
different  relations  to  other  words. 

a.  In  English,  Nouns  and  Pronouns  are  inflected  to  show  relations 

of  possession,  etc.  This  is  called  Declension,  English  Verbs 
are  inflected  to  show  different  relations  of  voice,  mode,  person, 
etc.  This  is  called  Conjugation.  English  Nouns  and  Pronouns 
have  very  few  changes  of  form.  The  Possessive  Case  is  the 
only  one  that  always  has  a  special  form.  Eor  instance,  the 
words  fish,  sheep,  may  be  Nominative  or  Objective,  Singular  or 
Plural.  In  the  sentence  "The  king  the  slave  in  silence  viewed," 
we  cannot  tell  whether  the  king  viewed  the  slave,  or  the  slave 
viewed  the  king. 

b.  In  Latin,  there  are  six  cases.     Each  has  its  own  uses  and  mean- 

ings; so  that,  while  the  case  of  an  English  Noun  or  Pronoun 
can  very  often  be  decided  only  by  the  sense  of  the  sentence,  the 
case  of  these  same  parts  of  speech  in  Latin  is  almost  always 
shown  by  its  enditig.  Adjectives  are  inflected  (that  is,  declined) 
in  Latin,  as  well  as  Nouns  and  Pronouns.  Latin  Verbs  are 
conjugated ;  their  endings  indicate  voice,  person,  number,  etc. 

Stem. 

16.  The  Stem  of  a  word  is  that  part  from  which  its  different  cases, 
modes,  tenses,  persons,  etc.,  are  formed  by  inflection.  It  is  the  trunk, 
and  the  various  forms  are  the  branches. 

Properties  of  Nouns. 

17.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  Nouns  have  Gender,  Person,  Number, 
and  Case ;  but  the  laws  of  Gender  and  the  number  of  Cases  are  some- 
what different. 


INTRODUCTION   TO   THE   LATIN   LESSONS.  23 

Gender. 

18.  The  Gender  of  English  nouns  is  decided  by  their  meaning.  So 
it  is  in  Latin  nouns,  in  the  case  of  human  beings  and  animals ;  that  is, 
names  of  males  are  Masculine,  and  names  of  females,  Feminine. 

In  many  respects,  however,  the  rules  for  the  gender  of  Latin  nouns 
denoting  things  without  life  are  very  different  from  the  English  rule. 

The  Gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  decided  in  two  ways,  —  by  their  mean- 
ing and  by  their  endings. 

The  Rules  that  decide  Gender  by  meaning  are  general,  and  apply  to 
nouns  of  all  Declensions. 

The  Rules  that  decide  Gender  by  endings  are  special,  and  will  be 
given  wdth  each  Declension  separately. 

Rules  for  Gender  according  to  Meaning.* 

19.  These  Rules  appli/  to  Nouns  of  all  Declensions. 

a.  Names  of  males,  rivers,  winds,  and  mountains,  are  Masculine ;  as, 
agricola  {a  farmer),  Septentrio  {the  north  wind),  Arar 
{name  of  a  river).  Jura  {name  of  a  mountain-chain).  ^ 

h.  Names  oi  females,  countries,  towns,  islands,  and  trees  are  Eeminine; 
as,  mulier  {a  woman),  Gallia  {Gaul),  Roma  {Rome),  Delos 
{an  island),  Corinthus  {a  city  in  Greece),  pirus  {a  pear- 
tree),  Cyprus  {an  island). 

Remark.  Tliere  are  exceptions  to  the  above  laws,  -which  must  be  decided 
by  the  Special  Rules  for  Endings.  They  can  be  learned  only  by  observation 
and  practice. 

c.  These  are  Neuter  :  — 

1.  Indeclinable  Nouns  (as,  nihil,  fSs). 

2.  Infinitives,  Phrases,  Clauses,  and  other  parts  of  speech  used  as 
Nouns.  These  are,  of  course,  indeclinable,  and  would  be  regarded  as 
Neuter  in  English,  when  used  as  Nouns  (36,  Rem.,  page  10)  ;  as.  To 
err  is  human  (that  is,  a  human  thing).     In  the  Latin  for  this  sentence, 

*  This  section  may  be  omitted  until  the  beginner  shall  have  acquired  a 
familiarity  with  the  forms  of  Nouns  and  the  use  of  the  Cases.  In  the  earlier 
lessons  of  this  book,  only  those  nouns  are  used  whose  gender  is  decided  by  the 
English  sense  (as  nauta,  agricola)  and  by  the  Special  Rules  (for  gender  hy 
endings)  given  in  connection  with  each  Declension.  Later,  the  General  Rules 
will  be  required,  and  reference  will  be  made  to  this  section  as  well  as  to 
Note  3. 


24 


INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  LATIN  LESSONS. 


Errare  est  huraanum,  the  Adjective  humanum  is  in  the  neuter 
gender,  agreeing  with  the  Subject  errare. 


Cases. 

20.  Latin  nouns  have  six  Cases :  Nominative,  Genitive,  Dative, 
Accusative,  Vocative,  Ablative.  The  following  table  tells :  (1)  The 
relation  of  each  to  other  words  in  a  sentence  ;  (2)  Its  English  equiva- 
lent ;  (3)  What  question  it  answers.  Notice  that  what  we  express  in 
English  by  a  Preposition  is  very  often  indicated  in  Latin  merely  by  a 
change  in  the  ending  of  a  word  (Inflection). 


Latin  Case. 

Relation  to  othex 
Words. 

Like  what  English 
Case. 

Answers  what 
(Question. 

Nominative. 

Subject. 

Nominative. 

Who  ?  or  What  ? 

Genitive. 

Possession,  or  Of. 

Possessive,  or  Of 
with  Objective. 

Whose? 
^ .  (  Whom  ? 
^J  \  What? 

Dative. 

Indirect  Object. 

Objective  with  To  or 
For. 

To   {  Whom  ? 
For  \  What  ? 

Accusative. 

Direct  Object. 

Objective. 

Whom  ?  or  What  ? 

Vocative. 

Case  of  Address. 

Independent. 

Used  in  addressing  a 
person  or  thing. 

Ablative. 

Adverbial  Phrases. 

Objective  with 
By,  From,  In,  With. 

With 
From 
By 
In 

'whom? 
What  ? 

Remark.  Besides  these  there  was  a  Locative  Case,  answering  the  question 
Where  ?    Its  form  and  use  will  be  described  hereafter. 

N.  B.  It  •will  be  found  very  helpful  to  the  class  if  the  teacher  will  apply 
the  above  principles  to  the  following  sentences,  showing  what  Latin  case  should 
he  used  to  represent  each  Noun  and  Pronoun.  The  use  of  the  Cases  will  be 
more  clearly  understood  by  such  a  practical  application. 


Exercise, 

1.  The  troops  of  the  enemy  were  overcome  in  one  battle.     2.  John's 
companion  will  not  tell  him  the  name  of  the  farmer.     3.  My  friend,  will 


INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  LATIN  LESSONS.       25 

you  give  a  tired  man  some  supper  and  a  room  in  which  he  can  rest  with 
comfort  ?  4.  "  Boys,"  said  the  teacher,  "  you  have  recited  the  morn- 
ing's lesson  well."  5.  The  man  died  from  the  effects  of  sunstroke. 
6.  This  district  is  bounded  by  the  river  Garonne,  the  Atlantic,  and  the 
country  of  the  Belgae.  7.  I  will  keep  these  facts  in  mind.  8.  He  was 
treated  with  great  kindness. 

Declension  of  Nouns. 

21.  Latin  Nouns  have  five  Declensions.     They  are  distinguished :  — 

1.  By  the  final  letter  (or  characteristic)  of  the  Stem  (16). 

2.  By  the  ending  of  the  Genitive  Singular. 

The  Declensions  will  be  presented  separately,  beginning  with  the 
First 


TO  TEACHERS. 

In  the  following  Lessons  the  author  has  not  attempted  to  pre- 
scribe the  exact  amount  to  be  assigned  for  each  day's  recitation. 
Classes  differ  so  much  in  maturity  and  general,  preparation,  that 
the  individual  teacher  must  use  his  own  judgment  as  to  the  length 
of  the  daily  lesson. 

If  any  Lesson  seems  too  long  for  a  single  exercise,  it  may,  of 
course,  be  assigned  in  two  or  more  portions,  or  some  of  the  sen- 
tences may  be  omitted. 

Various  uses  may  be  made  of  the  "  English  into  Latin " 
exercises :  — 

I.   They  may  be  assigned,  one  each  day,  as  a  regular  part  of 
the  next  recitation. 

II.   A  few  sentences  only  from  each  may  be  required. 

III.  The  English  exercises  of  two  successive  Lessons  may  form 
the  material  for  the  third  day's  recitation. 

IV.  The  writing  of  these  sentences  may  be  made  work  at  sight, 
to  be  performed  in  the  class-room,  allowing  the  pupil  to  consult 
the  English-Latin  Vocabulary  for  needed  Latin  theme-forms. 


LATIN    LESSONS. 


EXPLANATION  OF  REFERENCES. 

In  this  book,  References  are  made  :  — 

1.  To  sections  of  the  Latin  Grammars  of  Allen  and  Greenough,  Bennett,  and 

Harkness,  and  to  the  Appendix  (at  the  end  of  this  book) :  for  example, 
A.  25 ;  B.  20 ;  H.  37 ;  App.  5. 

2.  To  the  Notes  (beginning  on  page  149  of  this  book).     These,  in  the  head- 

ings of  the  Lessons,  are  indicated  thus  :  N.  35.     In  the  Exercises,  N.  is 
omitted. 

3.  To  other  portions  of  the  book  (Lessons,  etc.).     These  will  explain  them- 

selves. 

LESSON    I. 

FIRST  DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS. 

Learn  N.  9,  a,  5,  c,  d  (page  153) ;  also  N.  8  (1),  (2),  (5),  (6),  (8). 

Learn  the  Declension  (with  English  meanings)  of  stella,  A.  35 ; 
or  porta,  B.  20 ;  or  mensa,  H.  48 ;  or  silva,  App.  1. 

Remember  that  all  syllables  for  whose  Quantity  rules  have  not 
been  given  (11,  page  20),  ayid  not  marked  long,  are  short. 

Study  each  Latin  word  in  the  following  Exercise  so  as  to  be 
able  to  give  :  — 

1.  Its  Pronunciation.  2.  The  Quantity  of  syllables  for  which 
rules  have  been  given.  3.  Its  Accent.  4.  Its  Stem  and  Gender. 
5.  Its  Case  and  Number.  6.  Its  Meaning.  If  any  form,  as  viae, 
can  be  found  in  more  than  one  Case  or  Number,  tell  what  these 
are,  and  give  its  meaning  for  each.  7.  All  the  Case  Endings  of 
Stella  (6). 


28  LATIN   LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 


Special  Vocabularies  for  the  first  29  Lessons  are  given  on  pages 
259-265.  The  Special  Vocabula^^ies  must  be  so  thoroughly  learned 
by  the  student  that,  when  questioned  by  the  teacher,  the  English 
meaning  can  be  given  at  once,  when  the  Latin  equivalent  is  stated, 
or  the  Latin  word,  when  the  English  meaning  is  given. 

1.  Gloriarum.     2.  Causa.*     3.  Lingua.     4.  Nautls.     5.  Viae. 

6.  Silvas.  7.  Mensam.  8.  Pecuniae.  9.  Agricolis.  10.  Stellae. 
11.  Via.     12.  Victoriarum. 

In  each  of  the  following  English  sentences,  give  the  exact 
Latin  equivalent  for  the  words  printed  in  italics;  for  example, 
farmer  s  =  agricolae,  Genitive  Singular. 

1.  The  farmer'' s  garden  contained  a  bed  of  roses.  2.  That 
sailor  has  a  good  memory.  3.  Sailors,  you  have  won  many  vic- 
tories. 4.  We  intrust  many  facts  to  the  memory.  5.  The  sailors 
will  win  a  victory.     6.  ll\iQ  farmei's'  tables  were  bought  with  money. 

7.  He  brought  the  money  from  Rome.  8.  Rome's  glory  was  great. 
9.  The  sailors'  language  seems  strange  to  the  farmers. 

LESSON    IL 

VERBS;    THE   SIMPLE   SENTENCE;    SUBJECT   NOMINATIVE. 

First  Conjugation  of  Verbs:   Present  Indicative  Active. 

Learn  :  (1)  N.  54  (entire),  56,  57,  a.  (2)  The  Conjugation  of 
am5,  in  the  Present  Indicative  Active,  and  the  English  meanings. 
A.  128;  B.  101;  H.  205;  App.  28. 

The  Simple  Sentence.     Learn  N.  100,  102,  105. 

Subject  Nominative.     Learn  N.  118. 

Agreement  of  the  Verb  with  its  Subject.  Learn  N.  117 
{the  simple  Rule  only). 

*  There  is  no  Article  {a,  an,  the)  in  Latin.  Causa  may  mean  cause,  a 
cause,  or  the  cause. 


LATIN   LESSONS.  29 

EXERCISE. 

Translate  these  sentences,  and  apply  all  the  principles  given  in  the 
Notes  on  this  Lesson. 

1.  Vocamus.  2.  Puellae  vocaiit.  3.  Amat.  4.  Pugrias.  5.  Nauta 
pugnat.  6.  Laudatis.  7.  Voco.  8.  Agricola  vocat.  9.  Lauda- 
miis.     10.   Vocas. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  They  are  calling.  2.  You  {plural)  fight.  3.  The  girl  loves. 
4.  We  praise.  5.  You  {singular)  love.  6.  The  sailors  fight. 
7.  He  praises.  8.  The  girls  call.  9.  You  {singular)  praise. 
10.  The  farmers  are  praising.  11.  He  does  call.  12.  The  girl's 
memory. 

General    Questions. 

What  is  the  Stem  of  mensa  ?  via  ?  What  is  the  Present  Stem  of  amS  \ 
vocd  ?  laudo  ?  pugnO  ?  What  are  the  Personal  Endings  of  the  Present  Tense  ? 
What  Person  does  each  represent  ?  Is  vocamus  a  complete  sentence  ?  Why  ? 
Name  the  Present  Stem  and  Personal  Ending  of  each  Latin  Verb-form  used  in 
this  Exercise  (54,  3).  In  how  many  ways  can  you  translate  amant?  What 
is  a  Simple  Sentence  ?    What  must  every  Sentence  contain  ?    Decline  via. 


LESSON    III. 

SECOND   DECLENSION  OF   NOUNS;    DIRECT  OBJECT. 

Second  Declension  of  Nouns  (Masculine).  Learn  N.  10,  a, 
h,  c.  Learn  the  Declension  (with  English  meanings)  of  servus, 
puer,  ager,  vir.      A.  38 ;  B.  23 ;   H.  51  &  4  ;   APP.  2. 

Direct  Object.     Learn  N.  139. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Apply  all  the  principles  given  in  the  Notes  on  this 
Lesson  and  on  Lesson  LL, 

1.  Magister  pueros  laudat.*    2.  Servl  pugnant.    3.  Puerl  equos 

*  In  Latin,  the  Subject  regularly  stands  first,  and  the  Verb  last  (see  192). 


30  LATIN   LESSONS. 

araant.  4.  Dant  agros.  5.  Pueros  vocatis.  6.  Servum  liberas. 
7.  Puer  puellas  vocat.  8.  Amlci  amicos  amaiit.  9.  Agris.  10. 
Equorum.     11.  Serve.     12.  Libro.     13.  Virl.     14.  Puer. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  man  frees  the  slaves.  2.  The  Eomaiis  iight.  3.  0 
friend  !  4.  Of  books.  5.  I  praise  the  boys'  friends  (120). 
6.  To  the  man,  7.  The  man's  slave  calls  the  boys.  8.  Of  a 
book.  9.  With  money.  10.  For  the  slaves,  11.  To  the  Eo- 
mans'  horses.     12.  We  praise  the  boy. 

General    Questions. 

What  is  the  Stem  of  vir  ?  servus  ?  ager  %  puer  ?  Is  this  a  true  statement : 
"  The  Nominative  and  Vocative  are  always  alike  "  (10,  c)  ?  What  are  the  Case 
Endings  of  equus  ?  liber  ?  What  Verbs  can  take  a  Direct  Object  in  the  Accu- 
sative? What  are  the  Personal  Endings  of  liberol  Decline,  side  by  side, 
equus,  Stella ;  also,  ager,  causa.  What  Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  are 
Masculine  ?  Name  the  Present  Stem  and  Personal  Ending  of  each  Verb-form 
used  in  this  Exercise. 


LESSON    IV. 

SECOND    DECLENSION    OF    NOUNS;    FIRST    AND    SECOND 
DECLENSIONS    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

Second  Declension  of  Nouns  (Neuter).  Learn  N.  10,  a,  b  ; 
8  (3).  Learn  the  Declension  of  bellum,  A.  38 ;  B.  23 ;  or  tem- 
plum,  H.  51;  or  donum,  App.  2. 

Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions.  Learn 
N.  24  &  a.  Learn  the  Declension  of  bonus,  miser,  niger,  A.  81, 
82;  or  bonus,  tener,  sacer,  B.  63,  64,  65;  or  bonus,  liber, 
aeger,  H.  148,  149,  150;   or  magnus,  liber,  niger,  App.  10  &  a. 

Agreement  of  Adjectives.     Learn  N.  108. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Decline  the  Nouns  and  Adjectives.  Give  the  Rule 
for  the  agreement  of  each  Adjective.     Some  of  the  Adjectives  are  not 


LATIN  LESSONS.  31 

in  the  proper  form  and  must  be  corrected^  with  reasons  for  the  cor- 
rections, 

1.  Puerl  bom.*  2.  Equus  nigrl.  3.  Praemia  parvura.  4. 
Viiis  liberls.  5.  Servorum  miserorum.  6.  Doiio  magna.  7.  Sil- 
vae  magnae.  8.  Puellas  magnos.  9.  Templa  magna  Romanorum. 
10.  Nautae  aegrae.  11.  Templi  magnL  12.  Gloriam  magnara 
amas. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  With  small  rewards.  2.  Of  good  friends.  3.  Of  a  great 
forest.  4.  Large  temples  {Accusative).  5.  Good  friend  {Voca- 
tive). 6.  Sick  farmers  {Nominative).  7.  By  a  great  war.  8. 
The  wretched  slaves  fight.  9.  We  call  the  black  horses.  10.  For 
the  small  boys. 

General    Questions. 

What  are  the  Stems  of  miser  T  parvus  ?  Is  final  a  ever  long  f  Where  ?  What 
Cases  are  always  alike  in  Neuter  Nouns  ?  Decline,  side  by  side,  equus,  Stella, 
bellum ;  also,  ager,  causa,  donum ;  also,  vir  bonus ;  also,  agricola  bonus ; 
also,  bellum  magnum.    Give  the  Latin  for  :  Vou praise;  We  fight;  He  gives. 

LESSON    V. 

APPOSITION;    GENITIVE  CASE. 

Apposition.     Learn  N.  106. 

Genitive  Case.  Learn  N.  119  and  CAUTION.  Genitive  de- 
noting Possession,     Learn  N.  120. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.^  Decline  the  Nouns  and  Adjectives,  and  give  the  Rules 
for  their  Case  and  Gender,  Conjugate  the  Verbs ;  give  the  Stem 
and  Personal  Endings  of  each ;  give  the  Rule  for  their  agreement, 

*  The  Adjective  regularly  follows  its  Noun  (193,  1). 
t  Read  carefully  N.  200. 


32  LATIN  LESSONS. 

1.  Genevara,  oppidum  magnum,  occupant.  2.  German!  agros 
Gallomm  *  vastant.  3.  Sabinuslegatus  Gallos  superat.  4.  Oppida 
magna  occupas.  5.  Titum,  amicum  Sablni,  laudatis.  6.  Agrum 
agricolae  vastamus.  7.  Puer  gladium  Titi  legati  portat.  8.  Titus 
et  Sabinus  oppidum  Genevam  occupant  (117,  a).  9.  Libros 
magistii  portas.  10.  Yiri  equos  agricolarum  laudant.  11.  Galli 
et  German!  oppida  et  agros  Eomanorum  occupant.  12.  Legati 
praemia  magna  dant.  13.  Servus  vir!  puerum  amat.  14.  Sab!nus, 
amicus  Tit!,  servos  miseros  liberat.  15.  Copiae  Titi  et  Sabini 
legatorum  oppida  Germanorum  occupant. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Eome's  glory.  2.  With  the  sword  of  Titus,  the  lieutenant. 
3.  A  great  abundance  of  good  books.  4.  We  seize  Geneva ;  the 
lieutenant's  forces  fight.  5.  0  wretched  slave.  6.  The  man's 
friends  love  good  books.  7.  The  farmers'  slaves  praise  the  lieu- 
tenants, Titus  and  Sabinus. 

General    Questions. 

What  is  the  diflference  between  an  Appositive  and  a  Genitive  ?  What  is  the 
regular  position  of  an  Adjective  ?  Give  the  Rules  for  the  Gender  of  Nouns  of 
the  First  and  Second  Declensions. 


-oo^Koo- 


LESSON    VI. 
PREDICATE  NOUN   AND  ADJECTIVE. 

Predicate  Noun  and  Adjective.     Learn  section  37  &  «,  page 
10  ;  also  section  46  &  a,  b,  c,  page  13. 
Learn  N.  107 ;  108  &  1,  3,  4. 
Sum  :  Fresent  Indicative,     Learn  N.  55. 

*  The  regular  position  for  a  Genitive  (unless  it  is  emphatic)  is  after  the 
Noun  on  which  it  depends  (193,  2). 


LATIN  LESSONS.  33 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Analyze  (194,  a).  Give  the  Rule  for  the  form'  and 
agreement  of  each  word, 

1.  Stellae  clarae  sunt.  2.  Viri  multl  agricolae  sunt.  3.  Kosa 
alba  est.  4.  Beat!  estis.  5.  Attcntus  es.  6.  Gladius  legatl 
acutus  est.  7.  Exemplum  viri  boni  bonum  est.  8.  Numerus 
puerorum  et  puellarum  magnus  est.  9.  Portae  oppidi  Genevae 
multae  et  magnae  sunt.  10.  Liber  sum;  liberl  sumus.  11.  Regna 
Germanorum  parva  sunt.  12.  Amicus  Sablnl  es.  13.  Servos 
timidos  vocat.  14.  Perlculum  magnum  est.  15.  Victoriae  Titi 
multae  sunt.  16.  Insula  longa  et  lata  est.  17.  Geneva  est 
oppidum  magnum ;  oppidum  Genevan!  occupatis.  18.  Via  longa 
est ;  nautae  timidi  sunt. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  sailor's  danger  is  great.  2.  We  {feminine)  are  wretched. 
3.  Titus's  friend  is  sick:  4.  The  wars  of  the  Gauls  are  long.  5. 
The  man's  horses  are  black.  6.  You  {singular)  are  small  and 
timid.  7.  The  boy's  book  is  large.  8.  The  man  is  a  teacher; 
the  men  are  teachers.  9.  The  lieutenant  is  the  sailor's  friend. 
10.  The  temples  of  the  Romans  are  long  and  high. 

General    Questions. 

What  is  the  difference  between  an  Appositive  and  a  Predicate  Noun  ?  Pro- 
nounce these  words,  and  give  the  reason  for  the  accent  of  each  :  agricolae, 
mensam,  servdrum,  magister,  praemia,  stellarum,  amicos,  victoriis. 

LESSON    VII. 

VERBS:    DEFINITIONS;    FIRST   CONJUGATION   (continued). 

Transitive  and  Intransitive  ;  Voice  ;  Number  ;  Person  / 
Mode,  —  Indicative  ;  Tense,  —  Present,  Imperfect,  Future  ; 
Personal  Endings ;  Conjugation  and  Present  Stem;  For- 
mation of  Tenses.     Learn  N.  56  ;  51  h  a  ;  60,  61,  1,  2  ;  63,  a; 

64  &  «  {Active  Endings)  ;  65 ;  68,  a,  h,  c  ;  117  &  a. 

3 


34  LATIN  LESSONS. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  (and  English  meanings)  of  the  JPresent, 
Imperfect,  and  Future  Indicative,  Active,  of  amo.  A.  128 ; 
B.  101 ;  H.  205 ;  App.  28. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Analyze  *  each  Verb-form.  Conjugate  the  Tense  in 
which  each  is  found. 

1.  Servum  vocas ;  servos  vocatis.  2.  Puerum  laudabas  ;  pueros 
laudabatis.  3.  Pugnabis  ;  pugnabitis.  4.  Vir  vocat;  virT  voca- 
bant.  5.  Oppidum  occupabinius.  6.  Amabit ;  amamus  ;  amabat. 
7.  Amatis;  amabis;  amabamus.  8.  Portabo;  portabitis;  portabam. 
9.  Titus  agros  Germanorum  vastabat.  10.  Occupabitis  oppida. 
11.  Bonus  est,  et  viros  bonos  amabit.  12.  Titus  et  Sablnus  legatl 
pugnabunt.  13.  Copias  Galklrum  superabas.  14.  Amicos  virl 
vocabit. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  He  calls;  he  will  call;  we  call;  they  used  to  call.  2.  You 
{plural)  were  carrying;  they  will  carry;  we  carry;  he  is  carrying. 
3.  You  {singular)  fight ;  you  {plural)  will  fight ;  you  (singular) 
do  fight ;  we  shall  fight.  4.  The  dangers  are  many  and  great. 
5.  The  temple  is  small.  6.  We  are  free.  7.  You  (singular) 
are  a  lieutenant.     8.  You  (plural)  are  slaves.  ^ 

General    Questions. 

What  is  Mode,  and  what  does  it  show?  (15  &  a,  page  3.)  What  is  Tense, 
and  what  are  the  three  divisions  of  time  ?    (16,  page  4.) 

*  In  the  First  and  Second  Conjugations,  any  form  in  the 
Present  Indicative  =  Present  Stem  +  Personal  Ending  (54,  3). 
Imperfect  Indicative  =  Present  Stem  +  Tense  Sign  (ba)  +  Personal  Ending. 
Future  Indicative  =  Present  Stem  +  Tense  Sign   (bi)  +  Personal  End- 
ing (68  c). 


LATIN  LESSONS.  35 


LESSON    VIII. 

VERBS  :   PRINCIPAL  PARTS  AND  STEMS.     NOUNS  ;  DECLEN- 
SION  OF   FILIA  AND   DEA. 

Principal  Tarts   and   Stefns.       Learn  N.  65,  66,  67,  so  far 

as  they  apply  to  the  Flrsi  Conjugation, 
Declension  of  filia  and  dea.     Learn  N.  9,  e. 

General   Questions  and   Practice. 

How  many  Principal  Parts  has  a  Regular  Verb  ?  Why  are  they  so  called  ? 
What  name  is  given  to  each  ?  How  many  Stems  has  a  Regular  Verb  ?  What 
are  they  called  ?  How  is  the  Present  Stem  found  ?  The  Perfect  Stem  ?  The 
Supine  Stem  ?  From  which  Stem  is  the  Imperfect  Indicative  formed  ?  The 
Future  Indicative  ?  Give  the  Principal  Parts  of  the  Verbs  contained  in  the 
Special  Vocabulary  for  this  Lesson.  Give  the  Stems  of  the  same  Verbs.  Con- 
jugate the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Tenses  of  each. 

Decline  filia ;  dea.  How  do  they  differ  from  other  Nouns  of  the  First 
Declension  ? 

Analyze  these  forms,  and  jt?row  the  Tense,  Person,  and  Number: 
amabitis  ;  narras  ;  vastabant ;  vocatis  ;  dabimus  ;  liberabas  ;  ser- 
vabunt ;  monstrabamus  ;  pugnabo  ;  das  ;  portabis. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  0  goddesses;  of  goddesses.  2.  To  a  daughter;  to  the 
daughters.  3.  The  daughter's  book  is  large.  4.  The  girls  love 
the  lieutenant's  daughters.  5.  For  the  goddesses;  the  temples  of 
the  goddess.  6.  The  man's  daughter  calls  the  boys.  7.  The 
goddesses'  gifts  are  many.  8.  You  {plural)  will  call  the  goddess. 
9.  The  forces  of  the  Eomans  will  lay  waste  many  fields.  10.  The 
wall  is  high ;  the  walls  are  long. 

General    Review. 

V^hat  Nouns  of  the  first  Declension  are  Masculine  ?  Of  what  gender  are  the 
others  ?  What  Nouns  of  the  second  Declension  are  Masculine  ?  Neuter  ? 
Give  the  stem  of  donum ;  via;  puer ;  magister ;  vir.  Decline  together: 
puer,  silva,  donum ;  also,  vir  magnus  ;  also,  equus  niger.  What  is  the 
regular  position  of  an  Adjective  ?  of  a  Subject  ?  of  a  Genitive  ?  of  a  Verb  ? 
Why  is  sum  called  a  Copula  1  Can  sum  take  an  Accusative  as  Object  ?  What 
is  the  Noun  or  Adjective  after  sum  called  ?  Why  ?  Review  the  Vocabularies 
of  Lessons  I.,  IL,  III.,  IV.,  V.,  VL 


36  LATIN  LESSONS. 

LESSON    IX. 
VERBS   {continued);    DATIVE   CASE. 

Learn  N.  61,  entire ;  64,  b;  67 ;  68,  d,  e,  f.  (N.  62  may  be 
learned  or  omitted,  as  the  teacher  may  desire.) 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future 
Perfect  Indicative,  Active,  of-amo.  A.  128;  B.  101;  H. 
205;  App.  28. 

Dative  of  Indirect  Object.     Learn  N.  129. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Analyze  each  Sentence.  Analyze^  each  Verh-form ; 
conjugate  its  Tense.  Give  a  Synopsis  (78)  of  each  Verb,  in  the 
Indicative  Mode.    Give  the  Principal  Parts  and  Stems  of  each  Verb. 

Notice  that  do  is  unlike  other  Verbs  of  this  Conjugation,  as  it 
has  ^  (not  a)  when  it  takes  an  additional  syllable ;  as,  dSmus, 
dSbis  (but  amamus,  amabis). 

1.  Servum  vocavistis.  2.  Oppidum  servaverat.  3.  Oppida 
occupaverimus.  4.  Copiae  Titi  Gallos  superavere.  5.  Viam 
monstravit.  6.  Pabulam  narraveras.  7.  Puerd  librum  dedisti. 
8.  Virls  frumentum  dederit.  9.  Servo  gladium  dedit.  10.  Puer 
nautis  fabnlam  narrabit.  11.  Puerls  attentis  fabulas  narraverunt. 
12.  Amicus  praemium  magnum  non  dederat.  13.  Puellis  viam 
monstravimus.  14.  Copils  peciiniam  non  dabatis.  15.  Injtiriae 
Gallorum  multae  sunt. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  teacher  will  give  the  attentive  boy  a  book.  2.  He  has 
told  his  (^omit)  fiiend  a  good  story.     3.  Many  Germans  overcome 

*  In  the  Indicative  Mode,  of  all  Conjugations,  the 

Perfect  Tense  =  Perfect  Stem  +  the  Personal  Endings  (of  the  Perfect  Indic- 
ative; 64,  h). 

Phf.perfect  Tense  =  Perfect  Stem  +  the  Tense  Sign  (era)  +  the  Personal 
Endings. 

Future  Perfect  Tense  —  Perfect  Stem  +  the  Tense  Sign  (eri)  +  the  Personal 
Endings  (68,/.) 


LATIN  LESSONS.  37 

large  forces  of  the  Gauls.  4.  The  lieutenants,  Titus  and  the  friend 
of  Sabinus,  will  have  seized  the  town  of  Geneva.  5.  He  had 
carried;  we  were  carrying;  you  (^flural)  have  carried.  6.  He  has 
given  ;  he  gave ;  you  {singular)  had  given ;  we  shall  have  given. 
7.  We  called  the  boy;  the  boys  called  the  man;  tbe  girls  were* 
calling. 


LESSON    X. 

VERBS  :    FIRST  CONJUGATION ;    SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 

Learn  N.  63,  b ;  69,  a  (1),  5,  c,  d. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode,  Active  Voice, 
of  amo.     A.  128;  B.  101;   H.  205;  App.  28. 

Remark.  In  this  Lesson  the  meanings  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode  are  not 
required ;  but  numerous  Latin  forms  are  given  for  practice  in  analysis  of  the 
verb.     The  use  of  the  Subjunctive  is  presented  later  (Lesson  XXI.). 

EXERCISE. 

Tell  the  Mode,  Tense,  Number,  and  Person  of  each  word.  Prove 
your  answers  by  analyzing  *  each  Latin  form. 

1.  Des ;  dederis ;  dedissetis  ;  darent.  2.  Amaverit;  anietis ; 
amavisses  ;  amaremus.  3.  Portas  ;  portes  ;  portailJs  ;  portabis. 
4.  Pugnemus;  pugnabas;  pugnavissemus ;  pngnaverimus.  5.  Nar- 
ret;  narraret;  narrabat;  narraverit.  6.  Laudaremus;  laudabimus; 
laudavissent ;  laudavistis.  7.  Servaveras ;  servavere ;  serves; 
servaretis.     8.  Vocavit ;  vocavisset ;  vocabunt ;  vocaverint. 

*  In  the  Subjunctive  Mode  of  the  First  Conjugation,  the  Tenses  contain 
these  elements  :  — 

Present  Subjunctive  =  Present  Stem  (a  changed  to  e)  -f-  Personal  Endings. 

Imperfect  Subjunctive  =  Present  Stem  +  Tense  Sign  (re)  +  Personal  Endings. 

Perfect  Subjunctive  =  Perfect  Stem  +  Tense  Sign  (eri)  +  Personal  Endings. 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive  —  Perfect  Stem  +  Tense  Sign  (isse)  +  Personal 
Endings. 


38  LATIN   LESSONS. 


General    Questions. 

What  questions  does  the  Direct  Object  answer  ?  the  Indirect  Object  ?  What 
Tenses  does  the  Subjunctive  lack  ?  Name  the  Tenses  of  the  Indicative.  How 
does  the  Imperfect  Indicative  differ  in  meaning  from  the  Perfect  ?  Translate 
vocabas  ;  vocavisti.  What  two  meanings  may  vocavisti  have  ?  What  names 
are  given  to  the  Perfect  Tense  ?  How  many  Tenses  are  there  in  the  Indicative 
differing  in  form  1  How  many  differing  in  meaning  1  How  do  the  forms  of 
tlie  Perfect  Subjunctive  differ  from  those  of  the  Future  Perfect  Indicative  ? 
Give  a  Synopsis  of  the  Indicative  and  Subjunctive,  Active,  of  narro  ;  do. 


LESSON    XL 

FIRST  CONJUGATION :   IMPERATIVE  MODE ;  VOCATIVE  CASE. 

SECOND  DECLENSION:    FlLIUS  AND   PROPER  NAMES 

IN   lUS. 

Learn  N.  57,  c;  63,  c ;  64,  c  (Active  Endings);  70;  100. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  inoperative  Active  of  amo. 
A.  128;   B.  101;   H.  205;  App.  28. 

Vocative  Case.     Learn  N.  145. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  filius,  and  also  of  Proper  Names  in 
ius;  as,  Cassius,  Manlius.     N.  10,  d,  e. 

^  EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Analyze  each  Sentence.  Analyze  each  Verb-form 
(64,  c).     Give  Rule  for  the  use  and  form  of  each  word, 

1.  Viros  bonos  amate.  2.  Tite,  oppidura  occnpa.  3.  Mi  * 
fill,  agricolam  voca.  4.  Filius  mens  servum  vocat.  5.  Concilium, 
Cal,  magnum  est.  6.  Proeliura,  Sabine,  nuutia.  7.  Pugnato ; 
pugnanto  ;  pugnatote.  8.  Proelia,  mi  amice,  multa  et  magna  sunt. 
9.  Auxilium  dearum  non  parvum  est.  10.  Copiae  Cassi  (10,  e) 
magnae    sunt.      11.  Copia  frumenti  parva  est.      12.  Date,    virl, 

*  Meus  has  ml  (not  mee)  in  the  Voc.  Sing.  Masc.  In  the  other  forms  it  is 
like  bonus. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  39 

frumentum  equis.  13.  Meam  patriam,  Jull,  serva.  14.  Equi 
Juli  albi  sunt.  15.  Concilio,  puerl,  fabulam  narrate.  16.  Amato; 
laudanto;  vocatote. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Figlit,  my  men.  2.  My  men  fight.  3.  0  Pompey,  save  the 
towns.  4.  My  son,  give  the  money  to  the  daughters  of  Cassius. 
5.  TMarcus  and  Caius  are  good  men.  6.  Call  the  slaves,  Marcus. 
7.  The  lieutenants,  Caius  and  Cassius,  have  seized  the  town  of  the 
Germans.  8.  Sabinus,  my  friend,  the  rewards  of  the  battle  are 
great. 

General    Questions. 

What  Stem  does  the  Imperative  contain  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  use  of 
the  Future  Imperative  ?  How  does  Cassius  differ  in  declension  from  servus  ? 
How  does  meus  differ  from  bonus  ?  Give  the  Vocative  of  Marcus  TuUius ; 
Lucius  Cotta. 

LESSON    XII. 

FIKST  CONJUGATION:   INFINITIVES,  PARTICIPLES,  GERUND, 
AND   SUPINE. 

Learn  N.  57,  d;  58,  a  &  IIemark;  59,  a,  h  ;  63,  d;  71;  72. 
Learn  the  Active  Infinitives,  Participles,  also  the  Gerund 
and  Supine,  of  am 6.     A.  128;  B.  101;   H.  205;  App.  28. 

General    Questions    and    Practice. 

Give  the  Stem  and  Ending  of  the  Present  Infinitive,  also  of  the  Perfect 
Infinitive.  Do  Infinitives  have  Personal  Endings  ?  Give  the  reason  for  your 
answer  (15,  e,  page  4).  Of  what  forms  is  the  Future  Infinitive  composed  ? 
What  Stem  does  it  contain  ?  Give  the  Stem  and  Ending  of  the  Present  Parti- 
ciple of  amd ;  libero ;  vocd.  The  same  Participle  in  English  ends  in  what  let- 
ters? What  Active  Participle  is  found  in  English,  but  not  in  Latin?  {Ans. 
The  Perfect;  as,  having  loved.)  What  Stem  does  the  Future  Participle  con- 
tain ?  Give  its  ending.  What  is  a  Participle  (189)  ?  To  what  Declension  of 
Adjectives  does  the  Future  Participle  belong?  Does  the  Present  Participle 
belong  to  that  Declension  ?    Why  not  ?    Describe  the  Gerund ;  the  Supine.* 

*  The  meaning  and  use  of  the  Supine  are  taken  up  later. 


40 


LATIN  LESSONS. 


In  the  following  sentences,  give  the  exact  Latin  equivalents  for 
words  printed  in  italics :  — 

He  i^^  fighting  bravely.  He  wishes  to  seize  the  town.  We  are 
said  to  ham  praised  the  slave.  He  is  thought  to  he  about  to  fight. 
You  (plural)  are  desirous  (cupidus)  of  fighting.  Titus  will  over- 
come by  fighting.     He  pays  (do)  attention  (opera)  to  fighting. 

Give  a  complete  Synopsis  (78)  of  vasto;  voco;  do;  libero,  in 
the  Active  Voice. 

The  following  Verbs  belong  to  the  First,  Second,  Third,  and 
Fourth  Conjugations.  The  Koman  Numeral  at  the  left  of  each 
indicates  its  Conjugation.  Their  Principal  Parts  are  given,  and, 
in  answering  the  questions  below,  precisely  the  same  Rules  for 
Stems,  Formation  of  Tenses,  etc.,  are  to  be  applied,  as  for  amo. 
(See  N.  67,  68,  69,  70,  71,  72.) 


Present 

Present 

Perfect 

Indicative. 

Infinitive. 

Indicative. 

Supine. 

I. 

servo. 

servare. 

servavT, 

servatum. 

II. 

moneo, 

monere. 

monui, 

monitum. 

III. 

rego. 

regere, 

rexi. 

rectum. 

IV. 

audio, 

audire, 

audivi, 

auditum. 

Questions    and    Application    of  Principles. 

Give  all  the  Stems  of  these  Verbs  (66,  67).  Conjugate  the  Imperfect  Sub- 
junctive of  each;  the  Perfect  Indicative;  the  Perfect  Subjunctive;  the  Pluper- 
fect Subjunctive;  the  Pluperfect  Indicative;  the  Future  Perfect  Indicative. 
Give  all  the  Infinitives  of  each. 

Conjugate  the  Present  Indicative  of  moned;  the  Imperfect  Indicative ;  the 
Imperative;  the  Future  Indicative. 

What  is  the  Present  Imperative,  Second  Person  Singular,  of  regd  1  audio  ? 
What  is  the  Present  Participle  of  servd  ?  moneo  1  regd  ?  Give  the  Gerund  of 
servd;  moned;  regd. 

Give  the  Supine  forms  of  the  four  Verbs. 

How  may  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  Active  of  all  Conjugations  be  found  ? 
C69,6.) 


LATIN  LESSONS.  41 


LESSON    XIIL 

DECLENSION   OF  DEUS ;    IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES;    GENI- 
TIVE IN  lUS,   DATIVE  IN   I. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  deus,  N.  10,/. 

Learn  the  list  of  Adjectives  having  Tus  in  the  Genitive,  and  i  in 
the  Dative,  N.  43,  a,  b.  Decline  them.  A.  83,  «,  ^;  B.  66;  H. 
151 ;  App.  11. 

General    Questions. 

What  is  the  Vocative  Singular  of  servus  ?  deus  1  What  is  the  Nominative 
Singular  Neuter  of  malus  ?  alius  ?  Decline  together  the  Masculine  of  bonus 
and  alius ;  the  Feminine;  the  Neuter.  How  does  alter  differ  from  the  others 
in  declension?  {Ans.  The  i  is  short  in  the  Genitive;  as,  alte'rius,  but  utrius, 
alius.)  How  does  alter  differ  in  meaning  from  alius?  {Ans.  Alius  means 
another  J  of  several;  alter,  the  other,  of  two.)  Decline  together  the  Latin  for 
no  god  ;  any  hoy  ;  another  gift ;  the  other  sailor  ;  one  daughter  (in  the  singu- 
lar); the  other  son;  no  way ;  the  whole  tovm  (in  the  singular).  What  is  a 
Diphthong  ?    Pronounce  deae ;  neuter ;  coelum. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Decline  the  Nouns  and  Adjectives,  Conjugate  the 
Verbs, 

1.  Alii  viri  templa  aedificant.  2.  Injuriae  .alterius  viri  multae 
sunt.  3.  Victoriae  iinius  legatl  non  multae  sunt.  4.  Nulli  agri . 
Germanorum  vacant.  5.  Natiira  amico  meo  vitam  longam  non 
dedit.  6.  Equi  neutrius  servi  nigri  sunt.  7.  Occupate,  viri, 
totum  oppidum.  8.  NullI  pogtae*  Caium  laudabunt.  9.  Aliud 
templum  altum  est.  10.  Lauda,  Cassi,  servos  solos.  11.  Nuntia, 
Marce,  proelium  Caio  soli.  12.  Amici  mei,  po^tae  fabulam  nar- 
rabimus. 

♦  The  mark  ("')  is  called  a  Diaeresis^  and  shows  that  the  vowel  over  which 
it  is  placed  does  not  form  a  Diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel.  Poeta  is 
pronounced  po-6'-ta. 


42  LATIN   LESSONS. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Of  other  gods ;  to  one  god.  2.  Por  the  goddesses  alone. 
3.  Of  any  aid  ;  for  no  aid.  4.  The  life  of  the  other  horse  is  long. 
5.  The  Romans  alone  give  aid  to  the  Gauls.  6.  Julius,  the 
Germans' will  seize  the  whole  town  of  Geneva.  7.  The  glory 
alone  of  the  war  is  great.  8.  The  stars  alone  are  bright.  9.  Other 
forces  will  fight.  10.  We  show  (point  out)  the  dangers  of  one 
battle. 


LESSON    XIV. 

NOUNS:    THIRD   DECLENSION;    ELEMENTARY   PRACTICE. 

Remark.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  have  a  great  variety  of  forms  in 
the  Nominative  Singular  ;  but  their  Case-endings  follow  the  same  law  (N.  6). 
These  nouns  are  Masculine,  Feminine,  and  Neuter;  but  as  their  gender  de- 
pends largely  upon  their  Nominative  endings^  and  as  there  are  over  twenty 
diflferent  endings  in  the  Nominative,  the  Gender  of  nouns  in  the  Third  Declen- 
sion is  not  so  easily  distinguished  as  in  the  other  Declensions. 

The  Stems  of  nouns  in  the  Third  Declension  have  various  endings  ;  and  this 
fact  is  apt  to  present  some- difficulty  to  the  beginner. 

In  this  Lesson,  eight  nouns  are  given  for  practice :  three  Masculine,  two 
Feminine,  three  Neuter.  Their  Gender  can  be  easily  remembered  by  their  mean- 
ing. The  Stem  of  each  can  be  found  by  cutting  off  the  ending  is  from  the 
Genitive  Singular;  as,  milit-,  nfimin-,  reg-  (stems  of  miles,  nomen,  rex). 
English  words  derived  from  the  Latin  are  given  to  show  that  the  Latin  Stem 
is  often  found  in  the  English  word,  and  so  to  aid  the  pupil's  memory. 

Learn  the  Eemakk  at  the  head  of  this  Lesson. 

Learn  N.  6  (for  the  Third  Declension) ;  8  (1),  (2),  (3),  (4),  (5),  (6). 

Learn  the  Declension  of  consul,  miles,  rex,  virgo,  soror, 
caput,  nomen,  corpus.  A.  46,  49;  B.  31,  32,  33,  34,  35,  36; 
H.  58,  59,  60,  61;  A  pp.  3,  4. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate,  Decline  the  Nouns  and  give  their  Stems.  Conjugate 
the  Verbs. 

1.  Legatus  milites  consnlis  landavit.     2.  Soror  regis  virginem 


LATIN   LESSONS.  43 

laudabit.  3.  Caput  equi  magnum  est.  4.  Corpora  virorum  magna 
sunt.  5.  Miles  regi  proelium  nuntiaverat.  6.  Filii  regum  mall 
sunt.  7.  Eiliae  Titi  legatT  virginera  timidam  vocavere.  8.  Amate, 
pueii,  sorores.*     9.  Consules  oppidis  nomina  dederint. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  To  the  kings;  the  king's;  the  kings'  horses.  2.  For  the 
consul's  sisters.  3.  With  the  bodies  of  the  soldiers.  4.  The 
maiden's  sister's  name.  5.  0  sister;  the  consuls'  soldiers.  6. 
For  the  body  of  the  horse.  7.  The  boy's  head  is  small.  8.  My 
friend's  sisters  are  praising  the  consul's  daughters. 

General    Questions. 

What  is  the  Stem  of  miles'?  caput?  virgo  ?  rexl  soror?  consul- 
corpus?  nomen?  What  are  the  Case-endings  of  a  Masculine  or  Feminine 
nomi  ?  of  a  Neuter  noun  ?  In  what  Cases  will  the  endings  vary  with  different 
nouns  ?  {A71S.  Nominative  and  Vocative  Singular.)  What  Cases  are  always 
alike  in  Neuter  nouns  of  all  Declensions  ? 


LESSON    XV. 

NOUNS:    THIRD    DECLENSION;    GENERAL    PRINCIPLES; 
GENDER. 

General  Principles.  Learn  N.  1  &  (2),  (3),  (4),  a;  2  (1), 
(2),  (3),  (4)  ;  11  (entire)  ;  12  (entire)  ;  13  (entire)  ;  14. 

Mules  of  Gender.  Learn  the  Nominative  Gender  Endings  of 
Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension.     N.  4  (3). 

Questions    and    Practice. 

The  answers  to  these  questions  are  given  in  the  Notes  on  this  Lesson,  and 
i7i  the  Examples  under  them. 

Into  what  two  classes  are  nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  divided  (11)? 
What  is  the  Genitive  Plural  of  the  nouns  whose  stems  are  milit-,  navi-, 

*  The  possessive  words,  my,  your,  their,  etc.,  are  not  expressed  in  Latin 
when  they  can  be  readily  supplied  from  the  general  meaning  of  the  sentence. 


44  LATIN  LESSONS. 

jtldic-,  rgg-,  aetat-,  custdd-,  lapid-,  turri-,  virgin-,  capit-,  ndmin-, 
corpor-?  Give  the  Nominative  Singular  of  each.  What  changes  of  conso- 
nants or  vowels  appear  in  them?  Why  is  not  the  Genitive  Singular  of 
corpus,  corposis?  What  is  meant  by  ''increasing  in  the  Genitive "  (16)  ? 
What  is  an  abstract  noun  ?  a  collective  noun  ?  * 

In  the  following  list  of  nouns,  tlie  Nominative  and  Genitive 
Singular  of  each  are  given ;  tell  the  Gender  of  each  noun,  and  give 
the  reason :  — 

Aesias  (aestatis),  opus  (operis),  lux  (lucis),  oratio  (orationis,  a 
speech  or  speaking),  honor  (honoris),  animal  (animalis),  turris 
(turris),  leo  (leonis),  calcar  (calcaris),  mos  (moris),  virtus  (virtu- 
tis),  tempus  (teraporis),  agger  (aggeris),  ntibes  (nubis),  obses 
(obsidis),  mare  (maris),  legio  (legionis,  a  legion),  pater  (patris), 
palus  (paludis),  trames  (tramitis),  pax  (pacis),  rex  (regis),  onus 
(oneris),  civitas  (civitatis),  altitiido  (altitudinis,  height),  caput 
(capitis),  urbs  (urbis),  nomen  (nominis),  riipes  (rupis),flos  (floris), 
genus  (generis),  consul  (consulis),  custos  (custodis),  soror  (soro- 
ris),  nox  (noctis),  hostis  (hostis,  an  enemy),  vectigal  (vectigalis) . 

Decline  the  nouns  whose  stems  are  :  aetat-,  Itic-,  custod-,  virtut-, 
lapid-. 


LESSON    XVI. 

NOUNS:  THIRD  DECLENSION;  CONSONANT -STEMS. 

Eeview  all  the  Notes  at  the  head  of  Lesson  XV.  ' 

Learn  Section  4,  a,  d  (omitting  the  Eemark),  page  17.     Learn, 

also,  N.  15  &  a,  b,  Eemark. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  all  the  Nouns  given  in  A.  46,  49 ;  or  B. 

31,  32,  33,  34,  35,  36;  or  H.  57,  58,  59,  60,  61;  or  A  pp.  3,  4. 

*  An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality  {eis,  height,  bravery,  greatness, 
goodness,  etc. ),  or  of  an  action  (as,  siege,  running),  A  collective  noun  is  defined 
in  section  3,  d,  page  1. 


LATIN   LESSONS.  45 

To  THE  Student.  Remember  that,  to  inflect  a  noun  of  the  Third  Declen- 
sion, two  things  must  be  known:  1,  its  Genitive  Singular  (which  will  show 
the  Stem) ;  2.  its  Gender.  Remember,  also,  that  the  Stems  of  Latin  words  are 
very  often  found  in  English  words  derived  from  them ;  this  fact  is  of  great 
value  as  a  means  of  aiding  the  memory,  as  has  already  been  said.  Many  such 
may  be  found  in  the  Latin  words  used  in  this  Lesson  and  Lesson  XIV. ;  as, 
FLOR-AL  (flor-;  stem  of  flos);  capit-al  (capit-,  stem  of  caput);  princip-al 
(princip-,  stem  of  princeps). 

General   Questions    and    Practice. 

Decline  each  of  the  following  nouns  side  hy  side  with  the  proper 
form  of  the  adjective.  First  decide  the  gender  of  the  noun,  and 
make  the  adjective  agree  with  it  in  gender.  The  Genitive  forms  of 
the  nouns  are  given  in  Lesson  XV.  and  in  the  Vocabulary  for  this 
Lesson. 

Aestas  longus.  Opus  magna.  Lux  clarum.  Honor  magnus. 
Leo  parva.  Mos  bonum.  Longitudo  magna.  Virtus  magnus. 
Tempus  longa.  Legio  nullus.  Pater  bona.  Eex  misera.  Civitas 
uUa.  Caput  alius.  Nomen  solus.  Elos  alba.  Consul  aegrum. 
Gustos  tinus  {in  singular).     Soror  beatus. 

What  Consonants  are  called  Liquids t  Why?  What  Mutes  suffer  some 
change  before  si  Do  nouns  having  consonant-stems  increase  in  the  Genitive ? 
How  do  pater,  mater,  frater  differ  from  the  other  nouns  of  this  class  ? 

EXERCISE. 

*  Translate.  Decline  the  Nouns  and  Adjectives.  Conjugate  the 
Verbs.  Give  the  Stem  of  each  Noun.  Tell  how  the  Nominative 
Singular  is  formed  from,  the  Stem. 

1.  Flores  albi  sunt.  2.  Altitudo  muri  magna  est.  3.  Patrl 
puerl  librum  dedit.  4.  Consules  opus  militum  laudaverant.  5. 
Morem  malum  non  laudabimus.  6.  Soror  regis  filiabus  consalum 
flores  dat.  7.  Virtus  regum  non  parva  est.  8.  Nomina  florum 
multa  sunt.     9.  Principes  *  beat!  sunt. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  To  the  guards  of  the  gates.     2.  In  width  of  fields.     3.  Of 

•  *  The  Gender  is  often  decided  by  the  sense^  without  regard  to  the  Nomi- 
native ending. 


46  LATIN   LESSONS. 

the  king's  soldiers.  4.  By  tlie  great  height  of  the  wall.  5.  To 
my  brothers'  bravery.  6.  The  honors  of  a  good  man  are  great. 
7.  The  light  of  the  stars  is  bright.  8.  The  king  praised  my 
father;  he  will  not  praise  my  mother.  9.  The  leaders  of  the 
Gauls  will  have  laid  waste  the  whole  town. 


LESSON    XVIL 
NOUNS:    THIRD   DECLENSION;    VOWEL-STEMS. 

Learn  N.  16,  entire ;  17,  entire. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  the  Nouns  given  under  one  of  these 
Eeferences  :  A.  52 ;  B.  38,  39 ;  H.  62,  63 ;  App.  5. 

Mixed  Stems  {consonant-stems  in  the  Singular,  vowel-stems  in 
the  Plural).  Learn  N.  18.  Learn  the  Declension  of  urbs  and 
nox,  A.  54 ;  or  of  arx,  B.  40 :  or  of  urbs  and  arx,  H.  64 ;  or  of 
urbs,  mous,  nox,  App.  6. 

Questions. 

Do  nouns  having  i'Stems  increase  in  the  Genitive  ?  Do  those  having  conso^ 
nant-stems  ?  How  do  nouns  {vowel-stems)  usually  form  the  Nominative  Singu- 
lar from  the  Stem  ?  What  nouns  do  not  ?  What  vowel  change  is  very  common  ? 
Give  the  Nominative  Singular  endings  of  nouns  of  this  class.  What  nouns 
have  i  as  the  regular  ending  in  the  Ablative  Singular  ?  What  nouns  have  e 
or  i  ?  What  nouns  seein  to  increase  in  the  Genitive  ?  Explain  this  ?  What  is 
the  Genitive  Plural  of  pars,  nox,  mons,  urbs  ?  Why  ?  What  name  may  be 
given  to  the  stems  of  these  nouns  ?  What  three  classes  of  stems  may  nouns  of 
the  Third  Declension  have  ?  \^Ans,  I.  Consonant  (Mute  or  Liquid);  as,  milit-, 
r6g-,  virgin-,  corpor-:  II.  Vowel  (i);  as,  navi-,  nubi-,  animali-i  Hi. 
Mixed;  as,  urb-,  mont- (Singular);  urbi-,  monti-  (Plural)].  What  nouns, 
in  common  use,  are  Masculine,  contrary  to  the  Kules  of  Gender  (19,  a)  ? 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Decline  the  Nouns  and  Adjectives.  Analyze  the 
complete  Sentences. 

1.  Custodes  leonum  timidi  sunt.  2.  Principes  et  duces  Gallon- 
rum  pugnaverunt.      3.  Montes  et^coUes  Galliae  alti  sunt.      4 


LATIN  LESSONS.  47 

Nautae  mare  et  naves  amant.     5.  Numerus  hostium  magnus  est. 

6.  Dux  hostium  fines  regis  vastaverat.  7.  Calcaria  duels  acuta 
sunt.  8.  Partem  urbis  occupant.  9.  Multa  animalia  pulclira 
sunt.  10.  Gustos  turris  amicus  mens  est.  11.  Monstra,  Tite, 
montem.  12.  Altittidine  montium.  13.  Animalium  magnorum. 
14.  Pars  navium;  naves  multae.  15.  Montes  altos;  maris  alti. 
16.  Vectigali  magno ;  noctium  longarum. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Of  taxes;  by  towers;  of  the  hills;  to  the  leaders  of  the 
enemy.  2.  Soldiers,  lay  waste  the  Germans'  territoiy.  3.  By 
fire ;  of  fires ;  for  a  part  of  the  city.  4.  By  the  sea ;  of  many 
seas ;  O  beautiful  city ;  0  lofty  mountains.  5.  By  a  great  cloud ; 
O  my  father;  by  a  bad  custom.     6.  The  bodies  of  many  .animals. 

7.  Save  the  city,  Caius. 

Decline,  side  by  side,  the  Latin  words  meaning  — 
The  deep  sea ;  a  great  tax ;  a  lofty  mountain ;  a  great  citadel ; 
a  good  custom ;  a  small  body. 


LESSON    XVIIL 

THE  VERB  SUM:    GENEBAL  PRACTICE. 

Learn  N.  55,  83,  84  &  a,  b,  c. 

Learn  the  entire  Conjugation  of  sum.  A.  119;  B.  100;  H. 
204  \  App.  40. 

Questions   and    Practice. 

How  many  stems  has  sum  ?  What  are  they  ?  What  forms  are  lacking  in 
its  conjugation  ?  Give  a  complete  Synopsis  of  sum.  Why  is  not  the  Imper- 
fect Indicative  esam,  and  not  eram  ?  What  is  Mode  ?  Tense  ?  How  many 
meanings  has  fui  ?  By  what  two  names  is  this  tense-form  called  ?  Why  is 
sum  called  a  Copula  ?  What  is  the  Noun  or  Adjective  after  it  called  ?  Why  ? 
Tell  where  these  forms  are  found  :  este  ;  fueratis  ;  sitis ;  estis  ;  fuissemus ; 
fuerit ;  fuisti ;  esses ;  futtirus ;  eratis ;  sis  j  es ;  fuere ;  suntd. 


48  LATIN  LESSONS. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  cities  were  great.  2.  Caius  and  Marcus  will  be  good 
leaders.  3.  The  forces  of  Pompey,  the  leader  of  the  enemy,  are 
great.  4.  You  are  a  good  man,  Marcus.  5.  My  brother  had 
been  a  teacher.  6.  Father,  show  the  boy  (129)  the  beautiful  gifts. 
7.  Boys,  be  attentive.  8.  The  flowers  are  white  and  beautiful. 
9.  The  example  of  the  consul  was  bad.  10.  The  mountain  is 
high.  11.  The  legions  of  the  enemy  will  have  seized  the  city  of 
Rome.  12.  The  number  of  states  will  be  great.  13.  We  have 
been  good  lieutenants  of  good  soldiers.  14.  Men,  give  corn  to 
the  horses.  15.  You  {plural)  will  have  been  timid.  16.  The 
leaders  have  praised  and  will  praise  the  legion.  17.  My  son,  be 
good. 


LESSON    XIX. 

THE  VERB  POSSUM;    USE  OF  THE  INTINITIVE. 

Learn  N.l  (4)  b;  85,  1. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  possum.  A.  120;  B.  126;  H.  290, 
11.  ;  App.  41. 

Infinitive  as  Complement.    Learn  N.  165,  b;  173,  Caution. 

To  THE  Student.     Can  and  could  must  always  be  expressed  by  possum. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Apply  Rale  for  the  use  of  each  word.  Examples  on 
Page  262. 

1.  Urbes  Gallorum  expugnare  non  poterimus.  2.  Caesar  castra 
servare  non  potuit.  3.  Militibus  arma  dare  potueris.  4.  Judex 
injustus  esse  potest.  5.  Milites  ducis  boni  ignavi  esse  non  pos- 
suiit.  6.  Servus  viro  friimentum  dare  poterat.  7.  Noctes  longae 
esse  non  possunt.  8.  Arcem  expugnare  potueratis.  9.  Castra 
Caesaris  loriga  et  lata  sunt.  10.  Partem  hostium  superare  potuisti. 
11.  Date,  duces,  arma  virls. 


LATIN   LESSONS.  49 

Give  the  Latin  f 07'  — 

1.  We  can  fight;  you  (singular)  could  fight.  2.  You  {plural) 
could  have  overcome  Titus,  the  leader.  3.  He  will  not  be  able  to 
seize  the  mountain.  4.  The  keepers  could  not  free  the  animals. 
5.  The  width  of  the  camp  cannot  be  great.  6.  We  consuls  (106) 
had  not  been  able  to  overcome  Caesar's  forces.  7.  No  soldiers  of 
the  king  can  be  cowardly.  8.  The  leaders'  arms  were  many  and 
great. 

Questions  and   Practice. 

How  are  these  forms  obtained  :  possum  *?  possim  ?  possem  ?  potui  1  pos- 
sunt  1  What  forms  of  Conjugation  does  possum  lack  ?  How  is  potens  used  ? 
Translate  rex  potens  est;  consules  potentes  sumus.  Give  a  complete  Syn- 
opsis of  possum.  Tell  how  these  Nominatives  are  formed  from  their  stems  : 
judex ;  virtus  ;  custos ;  civitas.  Decline,  side  by  side,  the  Latin  for  :  a 
large  spur ;  a  long  night ;  a  good  work;  a  cowardly  legion;  no  battle  ;  a  had 
name. 

Why  is  the  Complementary  Infinitive  so  called  ? 


LESSON    XX. 

THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  A  SUBJECT  ACCUSATIVE. 

Learn  N.  143,  166,  189  {the  heading  only)  ;  also  56,  page  16. 

Caution.  Remember  that  a  Participle  is  always  a  Participle,  even  in  a  com- 
pound tense,  as  the  Future  Infinitive  Active,  and  must  agree  with  its  Noun  in 
Gender,  Number,  and  Case. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Give  Rules  for  the  form  and  use  of  all  words.  Ex- 
amples on  Page  262.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  should  he 
translated  precisely  like  a  clause  ;  that  is,  as  though  the  Accusative 
were  Nominative^  and  the  Infinitive  in  the  Third  Person,  Singular 
or  Plural. 

1.  "Urbes  magnae  sunt."  2.  Dicit  urbes  magnas  esse.  3. 
Nuntiabit  Romanos  copias  Gallorum  superavisse.  4.  Negat  (199, 5) 


50  LATIN   LESSONS. 

Caesarem  oppidum  expugnaturum  esse.    5.  "Dux  castra  seiTabit." 

6.  Legatus  dicit  ducem  castra  servaturum  esse.  7.  Putat  legiones 
pugnare  non  posse.  8.  Puto  copias  Sabini  ignavas  esse.  9.  Spe- 
ramus  milites  consulis  Genevarn  occupaturos  esse.  10.  Putabitis 
consules  injustos  fuisse.  11.  Dicit  iter  longum  futurum  esse. 
12.  Dicit  nullos  agros  vacare.  13.  Putas  nautam  Caesari  proelium 
nuntiare  potuisse.  14.  Dicit  maria  lata  et  alta  esse.  15.  Putatis 
rSgem  urbi  Eomae  (106)  nomen  dedisse.  16.  Custodes  nuntiant 
hostes  arcem  occupavisse.  17.  Speras  bella  loiiga  futura  esse. 
18.  Nuntia,  Pompei,  consuli  milites  castra  servaturos  esse. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  He  says  that  the  teacher  praised  the  boy.  2.  The  men  think 
that  the  mountains  are  high.  3.  You  {plural)  hope  that  the  sol- 
diers can  protect  the  city  and  the  citizens.  4.  They  will  deny  that 
the  bodies  of  animals  are  small.  5.  He  hopes  that  the  marches 
will  not  be  long.     6.  "  The  rewards  of  bravery  will  be  great." 

7.  The  king  says  that  the  rewards  of  bravery  will  be  great. 

Questions. 

What  is  a  Direct  Quotation  t  an  Indirect  Quotation  1  What  verbs  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  Infinitive  with  a  Subject  Accusative  ?  Why  can  puto  and  sperd 
be  followed  by  the  same  construction  as  died,  nego,  and  nuntio  (166,  II.)? 
What  Conjunction  is  omitted  in  Latin  after  verbs  of  saying^  etc.  ? 


LESSON    XXL 

USE  OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE.* 

Learn  N.  57,  b ;  170;  174  k  a,  h ;  175  h  a,  b,  c,  Eemaek  1. 
Read  carefully  section  19,  page  6. 

*  To  Teachers.     Although  the  Subjunctive  presents  some  difficulties  to  a 
beginner,  yet  it  seems  best  to  give  him  an  insight  into  that  mode  at  an  early  ^ 
period  of  his  study,  that  he  may  not  be  compelled  to  memorize  the  Subjunctive 
forms  of  all  the  Conjugations,  and  yet  not  make  a  practical  application   of 
them.     If  the  principles   stated  in   this  Lesson  are   emphasized  when  it  is 


LATIN  LESSONS.  51 

Eeview  the  Conjugation  of  the  Subjunctive,  Active,  of  amo, 
sum,  possum. 

8tudy  these  References  in  connection  with  the  Examples  for  this 
Lesson  (page  263),  and  also  ihefollotoing  — 

Hints  for  the  Student.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  has  a  great  variety  of 
uses;  this  Lesson  deals  with  one  which  is  very  common,  and  which  illustrates 
the  whole  mode  better  than  any  other  use.  The  Indicative  states  something  as 
2,  fact ;  the  Subjunctive  states  something,  not  as  a  fact,  but  as  possible  or  im- 
possible. The  sentences  of  this  Lesson  contain  the  Conjunction  si  {if),  and  are 
called  Conditional  Sentences.  They  are  Complex  (section  40,  c,  page  12). 
Of  course,  the  Conjunction  si  introduces  the  Subordinate  Clause.  The  state- 
ment, or  more  important  thought,  will  always  be  found  in  the  Principal  Clause. 
In  these  sentences,  both  the  Indicative  and  Subjunctive  are  used. 

Remember,  it  is  not  si  that  requires  the  Subjunctive,  but  the  thought  to  be 
expressed.  Remember ^  that  the  Subjunctive  has  no  Future  or  Future  Perfect 
Tense;  in  such  sentences  as  these,  the  Present  must  be  used  as  a  Future,  and 
the  Perfect  as  a  Future  Perfect.  Notice  that,  as  in  English,  ivere  (as,  if  I  were 
rich)  indicates  that  something  is  not  true  at  the  present  time ;  such  a  meaning 
must  not  be  decided  by  the  if  clause  altogether,  but  by  the  Principal  clause. 
Study  the  Examples. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Tell  what  time  each  Verb  denotes,  and  what  kind 
of  a  statement  it  makes.     Study  the  Examples,  page  263. 

1.  Si  puellas  laudaretis,  beatae  essent.  2.  Si  judex  Justus 
fuisset,  servum  liberavisset.  3.  Si  Caesar  pugnavit,  hostes  superavit. 
4.  Si  pugnare  potuisset,  copias  Gallorum  siiperavisset.  5.  Si 
legati  oppida  expugnaverint,  servi  liberi  sint.  6.  Si  Caesar  milit^s 
laudavisset,  pugnavissent.  7.  Si  Titus  ignavus  sit,  urbem  iion 
occupet.  8.  Si  hostes  urbem  expugnarent,  periculum  civium 
magnum  esset.  9.  Si  servus  pugnare  posset,  pugnaret.  10.  Sl 
hostes  superaverimus,  oppidum  occupemus.  11.  Si  pugnant,  su- 
perant.  12.  Si  milites  timidi  fuissent,  German!  agros  vastavissent. 
13.  Si  timidi  fuerunt,  non  pugnaverunt.  14.  Si  Titus  periculum 
nuntiet,  urbem  servare  possimus. 

assigned,  the  difficulties  referred  to  can  be  very  greatly  lessened.  Section  19, 
page  6,  if  it  can  be  read  in  the  class-room  and  the  Examples  under  it  briefly 
explained,  will  make  the  expression  of  a  possible  (or  impossible)  statement 
comparatively  easy. 


52  LATIN  LESSONS. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  If  Caesar  should  be  judge,  lie  would  be  just.  2.  If  the 
fathers  were  good,  the  sons  would  be  good.  3.  If  the  mothers 
are  bad,  the  daughters  are  bad.  4.  If  they  were  judges,  they  were 
just.  5.  If  he  should  storm  (should  have  stormed)  the  cities,  he 
would  free  the  slaves.  6.  If  he  fights  (shall  have  fought),  he  will 
overcome  the  enemy.  7.  If  we  are  slaves,  we  are  not  citizens. 
8.  If  he  praises  (shall  praise)  the  sailors,  they  will  fight. 


LESSON    XXII. 

FIRST   CONJUGATION  :    PASSIVE   VOICE ;    ABLATIVE  OF 
MEANS   AND   AGENT. 

Learn  the  Personal  Endings  of  the  Passive  Voice.  N.  64,  a. 
Learn,  also,  N.  73,  a,  h,  c. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  rresent.  Imperfect,  and 
Future  Indicative,  Passive,  of  amo.  A.  129 ;  B.  102 ; 
H.  206  ;  App.  29. 

Ablative  of  Means  or  Instrument.  Learn  N.  146;  151; 
193,  5. 

Ablative  of  Agent,  Learn  N.  151,  Caution  ;  also,  N.  95,  a, 
and  section  4,  b,  page  17. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Apply  Rules  for  Case,  Number,  etc.  Analyze  each 
Verb-form,  giving  its  Stem,  Tense  Sign  {if  it  have  one),  and  Personal 
Ending. 

1.  Urbs  expugnatur;  oppida  expugnantur.  2.  Copiae  Caesaris 
superabuntur.  3.  Servus  liberabitur ;  servi  iTberabimur.  4.  Ama- 
beris;    amamini;    amaris;    amabaminl.       5.    Tite,    vulneraberis. 

6.  Laudamur;    laudabitur ;    laudatis;    laudabunt;    laudabimur. 

7.  Dicit  ducem  signum  tuba  datiirum  esse.     8.  Signum  a  Caesare 


LATIN  LESSONS.  53 

tuba  datur.  9.  Miles  gladio  vulnerabitur.  10.  Equi  ab  hostibus 
vulnerantur.  11.  Lapidibus  vulnerabimirii.  12.  Monies  altl  a 
Tito  legato  occupantur.  13.  Proelium  Caesari  a  mllite  decimae 
legioiiis  nuiitiabitur.  14.  Urbes  hostium  doiiis  magnis  servaiitur. 
15.  Si  periculum  duel  a  servo  nuiitiabitur,  urbs  servabitur.  16. 
Equus  puero  ab  agricola  dabitur. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  tenth  legion  is  praised  by  Caesar.  2.  You  {plural)  will 
be  wounded  by  the  large  stone.  3.  The  signals  are  given  with  a 
trumpet.  4.  You  (singula!*)  will  be  freed  by  the  consul.  5.  They 
will  not  be  able  to  lay  w^aste  the  fields  of  the  enemy.  6.  He  thinks 
that  the  tenth  legion  w^as  able  to  storm  the  great  city.  7.  If  they 
had  been  able  to  fight,  they  would  have  given  the  signal.  8.  Tight, 
soldiers;  overcome  the  enemy's  forces.  9.  He  hopes  that  the 
leaders  will  give  arms  to  the  tenth  legion.  10.  If  they  are  (168,  a) 
wounded  by  the  weapons,  they  will  not  be  able  to  fight. 

Questions. 

What  kind  of  ideas  does  the  Ablative  usually  express  'i  What  is  the  proper 
position  of  an  adverb  or  word  (or  phrase)  used  adverbially  ?  What  is  the  dif- 
ference between  a  means  and  an  agent  ?  When  should  a  be  used,  and  when 
ab  ?  What  tenses  does  the  Subjunctive  lack  ?  How  may  this  lack  be  sup- 
plied ?    How  does  the  Subjunctive  differ  (in  thought)  from  the  Indicative  ? 


LESSON    XXIIL 

FIRST  CONJUGATION  :    PASSIVE  VOICE  ;    ABLATIVE  OF 
SEPARATION. 

Learn  N.  73,  d. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  JPerfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future 
Perfect  Indicative^  Passive,  of  amo.  A.  129;  B.  102; 
H.  206 ;  App.  29. 

Ablative  of  Separation.     Lenrn  N.  147. 


54  LATIN  LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 

Translate,  Analyze,  Apply  Rule  for  the  form  and  use  of  each 
word. 

Read  the  Caution,  Lesson  XX. 

1.  Amati  sunt;  amatus  ero;  amabimini ;  amati  estis ;  ama- 
verunt.  2.  Milites  laudati  erant ;  puellae  laudatae  erunt.  3.  Dux 
a  mllite  vocatus  est.  4.  Virl  tells  lapidibusque  *  vulnerabuntur. 
5.  Pater  amatus  est  a  filils  filiabusque.*  6.  Gives  servitute 
libembit.  7.  Urbs  custodibus  nudata  est.  8.  Eex  peiiculo 
magno  liberatur.  9.  Consules  suspicione  timoris  llberabuntur. 
10.  Colles  multi  viris  nudati  erunt.  11.  Castra  defensoribus  nti- 
dantur.  12.  Muruni  custodibus  defensoribusque  *  nudaverunt. 
13.  Nautae  timore  servitutis  liberati  sunt.  14.  Oppidura  a  militi- 
bus  servatum  est.  15.  Dicit  regem  filios  flliasque*  TitI  servitute 
llberaturum  esse. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  You  (singular^)  have  been  wounded ;  we  were  wounded. 
2.  He  was  called ;  he  used  to  be  called.  3.  I  shall  have  been 
freed;  you  {plural)  had  been  freed.  4.  They  will  have  been 
called  by  the  boys.  5.  The  judges  cannot  free  the  slaves  from 
fear.  6.  He  hopes  that  the  forces  of  the  king  will  overcome  the 
enemy.  7.  If  he  has  been  wounded,  he  is  wretched.  8.  If  he 
should  seize  the  town,  he  would  free  the  tenth  legion  from  great 
fear. 

Questions. 

What  part  of  the  verb  is  amatus  *?  What  decides  its  form  in  a  sentence  ? 
What  stems  are  found  in  the  Passive  Voice  ?  What  is  -que  called  ?  Why  ? 
How  does  it  differ  in  use  from  et  ?  Pronounce  lapidibusque  ;  filiabusque ; 
defensoribusque ;  filiasque.  Decline,  side  by  side,  the  Latin  for  no  small 
animal;  another  great  danger. 

*  Learn  96,  a,  1,  2 ;  195,  3,  4, 


LATIN   LESSONS.  55 

LESSON    XXIV. 

FIRST  CONJUGATION:    SUBJUNCTIVE  PASSIVE. 

Learn  N.  74,  a,  h. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  Subjunctive  Passive  of  am6. 
A.  129;  B.  102;  H.  206;  App.  29. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate.  Analyze^  each  sentence  according  to  194,  c.  Tell 
the  time  and  thought  expressed  by  each  verb.  Study  the  Special 
Examples, 

1.  Si  vita  longa  regibus  daretur,  beat!  essent.  2.  Si  castra 
ab  hostibus  occupata  sint,  defensoribus  nudentur.  3.  Si  laudatus 
es,  beatus  fnisti.  4.  Si  servus  liberetur,  pugnet.  5.  Si  pueri  boni 
fuissent,  laudati  essent.  6.  Si  urbes  expugnatae  sint,  perlculum 
civium  magnum  sit.  7.  Si  pugnetis,  laudemini.  8.  Si  pugna- 
bunt,  laudabuntur.  9.  Si  virtiis  militum  magna  esset,  laudarentur. 
10.  Si  exemplum  amici  mei  malum  est,  non  amatur.  11.  Si  arx 
expugnata  sit,  sorores  filiaeque  regis  timidae  sint.  12.  Si  signum 
tuba  datum  esset,  pugnavissemus.  13.  Si  peciinia  servis  a  rege 
bono  data  sit,  liberentur.  14.  Pilia  agricolae  silvas  multas  mag- 
nasque  esse  dicit. 

Questions. 

What  is  mode  ?  How  does  tlie  Subjunctive  differ  from  the  Indicative  in 
making  a  statement  ?  Does  si  'Hake  the  Subjunctive  "  ?  Give  a  synopsis  of 
the  Indicative  and  Subjunctive,  Active  and  Passive,  of  amd ;  laudd ;  vocO. 
Which  tenses  of  these  modes  are  compound  ?  Which  are  simple  ?  What  is 
the  tense-sign  of  the  Imperfect  Indicative  ?    Imperfect  Subjunctive  ?    Future 

♦  In  general,  special  directions  concerning  the  analysis  of  sentences  are  not 
given  with  the  Exercises.  The  teacher  can  use  his  own  judgment  as  to  the 
extent  to  which  he  desires  this  to  be  practised.  The  directions  for  analysis 
(194)  and  the  "Hints  on  Translation"  (200)  will  be  found  useful  by  the 
beginner. 


56  LATIN   LESSONS. 

Indicative  ?  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  Active  ?  Pluperfect  Indicative  Active  ? 
Give  the  stems  of  laudd ;  do  ;  vulnero.  Conjugate  the  Imperative  Active  of 
ocGupO  ;  liberd.  Tell  where  these  forms  are  found  :  ameris  ;  amatis  ;  amati 
ess§tis  ;  amatus  eras ;  amareris ;  amabimini ;  ames  ;  amatae  sint ; 
am&visses  ;  amentur ;  laudati  estis  ;  laudemini ;  laudabere. 


o>©<o 


LESSON    XXV. 

FIRST    CONJUGATION  :    PASSIVE   VOICE  :    IMPERATIVE, 
INFINITIVE,    PARTICIPLES. 

Learn  N.  75,  76,  77. 

Learn  the  imperative,  Infinitive^  and  Participles,  Passive^ 
of  amo.     A.  129;  B.  102;  H.  206;  A  pp.  29. 

To  THE  Student.  In  future  Lessons,  no  special  directions  will  he  given 
with  eoxh  Exercise.  It  is  expected  that  the  student  will  prepare  himszlf 
thoroughly  on  each.  The  proper  preparation  of  an  Exercise  includes  Trans- 
lation ;  Conjugation  of  Verbs  ;  Declension  of  Nouns  and  A  djectives  ;  Rules 
for  Gender,  Number,  and  Case  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives  ;  Rules  for  Agree- 
ment of  Verbs  ;  Reason  for  use  of  Modes. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Liberator;  liberare;  liberamini;  liberantor.  2.  Voca;  vo- 
canto  ;  vocato  ;  vocate  ;  vocatote.  3.  Putat  pueros  attentos  esse. 
4.  Dicit  milites  a  duce  laudatos  (108)  esse.  5.  Mons  a  Tito 
legato  occupari  (165,  b)  potest.  6.  Dicit  urbem  a  decima  legione 
expugnari  posse.  7.  Consul  opus  servl  laudavisse  putatur.  8. 
Negat  animalia  liberata  esse.  9.  Dicit  puellas  attentas  a  magistro 
laudaii.       10.    Putat   regem    suspicione   timoris    liberatum   esse. 

11.  Milites  ,  Sabini  urbes  hostium    occupatas  esse  nuntiaverunt. 

12.  Negat  agros  vastaii.  13.  Nuntia,  Cassi,  hostes  superatos  esse. 
14.  Putamus  jtidiees  justos  fuisse.  15.  Si  urbs  expugnari  possit, 
expugnetur. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  57 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  We  think  that  the  gifts  were  great.  2.  He  will  deny  that  the 
towers  of  the  citadel  are  high.  3.  The  mountains  can  be  seized 
by  the  lieutenant.  4.  The  leader  says  that  the  Gauls  have  been 
overcome  by  the  soldiers.  5.  You  (^plural)  think  that  many 
cities  have  been  stormed  by  Cassius. 

General   Questions    and    Drill. 

What  names  are  given  to  the  Active  Participles  ?  to  the  Passive  ?  Give  a 
complete  synopsis,  Active  and  Passive,  of  voc6.  Decline  alius;  tinus. 
Decline,  sidelDy  side,  the  Latin  for  no  night ;  a  high  mountain;  a  free  state; 
a  large  head.    Decline,  side  by  side,  pater,  navis,  mare. 


\ 

LESSON    XXVI. 

ADJECTIVES:    THIRD   DECLENSION. 

Learn  N.  24,  b ;  25  &  a,  h ;  26,  «,  b. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  the  Adjectives  mentioned  under  one  of 
these  References:  acer,  levis,  A.  84;  acer,  fortis,  B.  68,  69; 
5cer,  tristis,  H.  153,  154 ;  acer,  fortis,  App.  12,  13. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Aestates  breves  sunt.  2.  Onera  servorum  miserorum  ^ravia 
fuerunt.  3.  Dicit  homines  omnes  mortales  esse.  4.  Milites 
alacres  fortesque  erunt.  5.  Putat  deos  immortales  esse.  6.  Dicit 
socios  celeres  futHros  esse.  7.  Itinere  longo  difficilique  veiiit  {he 
came).  8.  Putat  onus  grave  portari  posse.  9.  Si  socii  omnes 
fortes  sint,  hostes  urbis  superemus.  10.  Si  Caesar  vulneratus 
esset,  tristes  fuissemus.  11.  Onus  leve  a  puero  parvo  portaii 
potest.  12.  Omnia  bell  a  non  iitilia  sunt.  13.  Templa  diis  (131) 
immortalibus  ab  hominibus  mortalibus  aedificata  sunt.  14.  Ars 
longa  est;  tempus  breve  est.     15.  Dicit  aestates  breves  futiiras 


58  LATIN  LESSONS. 

esse.  16.  Si  dux  fortis  esset,  milites  fortes  alacresque  essent. 
17.  Po^tae  filias  dearum  immortales  esse  putaiit. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  leaders'  sons  are  brave.  2.  The  gods  are  friends  and 
allies  of  the  Romans.  3.  The  gift  is  large  and  heavy.  4.  You 
{plural)  are  sad;  he  is  sad.  5.  He  says  that  the  journey  will  be 
easy.  6.  Useful  gifts  were  given  to  the  brave  allies.  7.  0  allies, 
be  brave.  8.  My  friend,  you  can  be  a  good  and  useful  man. 
9.  All  men  (mankind)  are  mortal.  10.  He  says  that  light  burdens 
can  be  carried  by  small  boys.     11.  All  animals  are  not  swift. 

Questions. 

How  do  pater,  navis,  mare,  when  declined  side  by  side,  differ  from  acer  ? 
Tell  the  Stem,  Genitive  Singular  Neuter,  Ablative  Singular  Feminine,  Dative 
Singular  Masculine,  Genitive  Plural  Neuter,  of  these  Adjectives  :  acer ; 
brevis ;  solus ;  celer ;  omnis  ;  alius  ;  alacer.  What  is  meant  by  three 
terminations  (or  endings)  ?  by  two  endings  ?  How  does  homo  differ  in  mean- 
ing from  vir  ?    (See  General  Vocabulary,  vir.) 


LESSON    XXVII. 

ADJECTIVES:    THIRD   DECLENSION;    SUBJUNCTIVE  EX- 
PRESSING A  COMMAND. 

Learn  N.  25,  c;  26,  e  &  Caution. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  atrox,  egens,  par,  vetus,  dives,  A. 
85,  a,  b  ;  or  that  of  Adjectives  given  in  B.  70;  or  in  H.  156,  157, 
158;  or  in  App.  14  &  «  (omitting  praeceps,  iens). 

Subjunctive  expressing  Command,  Eochortation,  etc. 
Learn  N.  164,  c  &  Eemark.     Learn,  also,  section  20,  page  7. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Corpora  Germanorum  ingentia  fuerunt.  2.  Dicit  Caesarem 
divitem  potenteraque  esse.     3.  Putat  urbes  florentes  futuras  esse. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  59 

4.  Oppida  Vetera  sunt.  5.  Dicit  socios  infelices  fuisse.  6.  Si 
duces  uon  fortes  essent,  infelices  essemus.  7.  Milites  Roman! 
audaces  erunt.  8.  Periculum  ducis  et  railitum  par  fuit.  9.  Vie- 
to  riae  recentes  regis  fuerunt  multae.  10.  Dicit  iter  breve  facileque 
futurum  esse.  11.  Amlci  liominum  sapientium  felices  sunt.  12. 
Viii  fortes  a  regibus  nobilibus  laudabuntur.  13.  Si  iwfelix  sis, 
miser  sim.  14.  Gloria  urbium  veteruin  magna  fuit.  15.  Miles 
fortis  a  servo  ignavo  superari  non  potest.  16.  Fortes  simus; 
audaces  este;  boni  sint.  17.  Dux  socios  laudet;  ducem  laude- 
mus.  18.  Lauda,  consul,  milites.  19.  Gives  regem  bonum  ament. 
20.  Servos  liberemus;  felices  sint.  21.  Nautae  naves  aedificent. 
22.  Naves  a  nautis  aedificentur. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  By  the  recent  victories  of  the  Roman  forces.  2.  Of  the 
equal  dangers.  3.  To  the  noble  kings  and  consuls.  4.  0  un- 
happy legions,  be  brave.  5.  Of  huge  bodies.  6.  By  a  wide  sea. 
7.  He  will  have  announced  the  recent  dangers.  8.  He  says  that 
the  city,  is  flourishing.  9.  The  lion  and  horse  are  large.  10. 
Wise  men  are  happy.  11.  Let  us  storm  the  cities  and  towns. 
12.  Friends,  be  wise.  13.  Let  the  king  be  just.  14.  Boys  and 
girls,  love  your  (omit)  father  and  mother.  15.  Let  us  love  (our) 
country. 

Questions. 

What  is  an  adjective  of  one  ending  t  What  adjectives  of  the  Third  Declen- 
sion have  three  endings  ?  Which  have  two  t  Which  have  one  ?  How  many 
endings  have  brevis  *?  ingens  ?  celer  ?  vetus  1  What  Persons  has  the  Present 
Imperative  ?  How  is  the  lack  supplied  ?  Show  how  an  Imperative  thought 
may  be  expressed  in  all  the  Persons  of  sum  and  amO.  Which  of  these 
forms  expresses  a  direct  command  ?  Decline,  side  by  side,  the  Latin  for  a 
noble  name. 


60  LATIN  LESSONS. 


LESSON    XXVIII. 

ADJECTIVES  :    REGULAR   COMPARISON  ;    DECLENSION   OF 
COMPARATIVES. 

Learn  N.  29 ;  30  (entire)  ;  40,  b. 

Declension  of  Comparatives,     Learn  N.  26,  d,  &  CaUTION. 
Learn  the  Declension  of  melior,  A.  86 ;  or  fortior,  B.  69 ;  or 
tristior,  H.  154 ;  or  fortior,  App.  15. 

Questions    and    General    Drill. 

Compare  acutus,  audax,  altus,  ingens,  attentus,  felix,  clarus,  latus, 
potens,  longus,  sapiens,  amicus,  amans.  Decline  the  Comparative  of 
altus,  nobilis,  potens.  In  how  many  ways  are  adjectives  compared,  both 
in  English  and  Latin  ?  Decline,  side  by  side,  the  Latin  for  a  higher  teviple  ; 
a  more  wretched  daughter  ;  the  dearest  son  ;  a  deeper  sea.  To  what  Declen- 
sion of  Adjectives  does  the  Superlative  always  belong  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Dicit  hostes  fortissimos  esse.  2.  Putat  fratres  amantiores 
futtiros  esse.  3.  Aedui  amicissimi  erunt.  4.  Si  equites  fortiores 
fuissent,  Ariovistum  superavissemus.  5.  Dicit  leges  titilissimas 
esse.  6.  Si  Ariovistus,  rex  Germanorum,  amicus  esset,  felices 
essemus.  7.  Pedites  audacissimi  ab  equitibus  siiperari  non  pos- 
sunt.  8.  Dicit  legem  breveiii  esse  titiliorem.  9.  Putat  urbes  Eo- 
manas  amicissimas  fuisse.  10.  Corpora  leonum  ingentia  erant. 
11.  Nuntiat  equites  audaciores  esse.  12.  Opus  fratris  mei  utilius 
est.  13.  Si  aestas  longior  fuisset,  Ariovistus  a  Caesare  superatus 
esset.  14.  Dicit  onus  levius  esse.  15.  Templa  altiora  aedificata 
erunt.  16.  Si  leges  bonae  essent,  civitas  florentior  esset.  17. 
Gives  periculis  recentibus  liberati  sunt.  18.  Dicit  insulas  longis- 
simas  latissimasque  esse.  19.  Si  bellum  brevius  sit,  urbs  expug- 
naiinon  possit.  20.  Pueri,  amantiores  este.  21.  Judex  justior 
sit.  22.  Nuntiabit  dona  Aeduis  ab  Ariovisto,  rege  potentissirao, 
data  esse.  23.  Dicit  murum  defensoribus  ab  bostibus  nudatum 
esse. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  61 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Let  the  forces  be  very  brave.  2.  He  says  that  the  rich  cities 
are  very  flourishing.  3.  Let  the  battle  be  brief.  4.  Life  is  dear  to 
cowardly  soldiers.     5.  Priends,  let  us  free  the  city  from  slavery. 


LESSON    XXIX. 

ADJECTIVES:    IRREGULAR  COMPARISON;*    ADVERBS. 

Adjectives  Jutving  Irregular  Superlatives,  Learn  N.  31, 
a,  b  (learn  the  list). 

Adjectives  having  Irregular  Comparatives  and  Superla- 
tives. Learn  N.  33.  Learn  the  Comparison  (and  meanings)  of 
bonus,  malus,  magnus,  parvus,  multus,  multa,  multum.  A. 
90;  B.  72;  H.  165;  App.  17,  a. 

Adverbs.  Learn  N.  38  (entire);  94:  k  aj  193,  5.  Leani, 
also,  section  28,  page  9. 

Questions    and    Practice. 

Compare  miser,  bonus,  facilis,  utilis,  acer,  malus,  celer,  audax,  mag- 
nus,  similis,  parvus,  fortis,  multus,  multa,  multum,  sapiens.  Which  of 
these  have  no  peculiarities  of  comparison  ?  Which  have  but  one,  and  what  is 
that  ?  What  is  the  rule  for  the  use  of  an  adverb  ?  Give  the  Latin  adverbs 
meaning  attentively,  bravely.  State  the  rule  for  forming  each.  How  may  the 
Comparative  and  Superlative  of  an  adverb  be  found?  Form  and  compare 
adverbs  derived  from  carus,  audax,  diligens  (38,  b,  last  part),  liber,  malus, 
longus,  felix,  facilis  (39),  sapiens,  celer,  fortis,  nobilis,  latus.  What 
adjectives  are  compared  like  acer  ?  like  facilis  ?  Where  does  an  adverb  regu- 
larly stand  in  a  sentence  ?    What  ideas  may  adverbs  express  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Dicit  legatum  oppidum  raajus  expugnare.  2.  Naves  mini- 
mae  (40,  b)  sunt.  3.  Putat  milites  plurimos  pugnaturSs  esse. 
4.  Dicit  iter  difficillimum  fuisse.      5.   Corpora  equorum  majora 

*  The  comparison  of  citerior,  superior,  etc.,  is  presented  later. 


62  LATIN  LESSONS. 

quam  leonum  sunt.  6.  Putat  fratres  Titi  dissimillimos  esse.  7. 
Si  periculum  minus  esset,  audacius  pugnaremus.  8.  Veteres  urbes 
majores  fuerunt.  9.  Copiae  Sabiiii  ducis  acerrirae  pugnabunt. 
10.  Dicit  oppidum  Genevam  celeriter  expugnari  posse.  11.  Mili- 
tes,  audacter  pugneinus.  12.  Turres  facile  servare  poterimus. 
13.  Dicit  castra  diligentissime  servata  esse.  14.  Virtus  Cassi 
major  est  quam  Titi.  15.  Putat  Germanos  omnes  inimicissimos 
esse.  16.  Urbem  diligentius  servemus.  17.  Si  fortius  acriusque 
pugnemus,  ab  Gallis  non  superemur.  18.  Pltirima  templa  minora 
sunt.     19.  Gloria  praemium  melius  est. 

Give  the  Latin  for  these  sentences  and  phrases  (Englisb  words  in 
parentheses  not  to  be  translated  into  Latin)  — 

1.  Many  (men)  think  that  the  war  was  very  great.  2.  They 
had  fought  very  boldly.  3.  If  the  battle  had  been  announced 
more  quickly,  the  city  would  have  been  saved.  4.  Of  very  bad 
kings ;  to  worse  poets.  5.  Of  a  greater  camp ;  to  a  smaller  body. 
6.  He  easily  freed  the  very  wretched  slaves.  7.  The  number  of 
small  animals  is  very  great.  8.  Of  better  sons;  to  very  many 
daughters.  9.  Let  us  be  friendly  and  useful.  10.  The  ships  of 
the  Gauls  are  longer  and  wider  than  (thope)  of  the  Eomans.  11. 
Let  us  be  better  citizens.  12.  He  says  that  the  infantry  and  cav- 
alry were  praised  by  Caesar. 

»oj«{o« 

LESSON    XXX. 

VERBS:    SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

In  the  Second  Conjugation  there  are  the  same  rules  for  the  for- 
mation of  tenses  from  stems  as  in  the  Pirst  Conjugation.  There 
is  only  one  exception:  the  rresent  Subjunctive  [N.  69,  a  (2)]. 

Learn  N.  69,  a  (2);  79,  1.  Eeview  N.  65,  66,  67,  68;  69,  b, 
Cy  d;  and  from  70  to  77. 

Learn  the  entire  Conjugation,  Active  and  Passive,  of  moneo. 
A.  130;  B.  103,  104;   H.  207,  208;   App.  30,  31. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  63 

General    Questions. 

No  Special  Vocabularies  will  he  given  for  the  remaining  Lessons.  Hereafter 
the  meanings  of  all  Latin  words  must  be  obtained  from  the  General  Vocabu- 
lary. 

What  are  the  Principal  Parts  of  moneo  and  habed  1  What  are  the  stems 
of  each  ?  If  the  Perfect  and  Supine  were  formed  like  those  of  amO,  what 
would  they  be?  {Ans.  monevi,  monetum ;  habevi,  habetum.)  How  are 
monui,  monitum ;  habui,  habitum,  formed  from  these  ?  What  is  v  (see  3, 
page  17)  ?  Are  there  any  verbs  in  the  Second  Conjugation  having  6vi,  6tum, 
in  the  Perfect  and  Supine  (79,  1)  ?  Give  the  Principal  Parts  (in  both  Voices) 
and  stems  of  compleo.*  Give  the  Present  Subjunctive,  Active  and  Passive,  of 
am6,  moned.    Give  a  complete  synopsis  of  moneO,  in  both  Voices  (78). 

EXERCISE. 

Notice  carefully  the  Tense-signs. 

1.  Monueratis ;  monetis ;  monebis ;  monuerit.  2.  Monuistis  ; 
mones ;  monebatis  ;  monebunt.  3.  Moneberis ;  monitus  es ;  mo- 
nebatur  ;  monebimim.  4.  Moneris  ;  moniti  eramus  ;  monemiui ; 
moniti  erunt.  5.  Mone  pueros;  monete  ducem.  6.  Si  puerum 
moneas,  felix  sit.  7.  bi  equos  liaberemus,  fortiter  pugnaremus. 
8.  Si  Tit  urn  monuerit,  oppidum  expugnet.  9.  Si  naves  multas 
habuissent,  felloes  fuissent.  10.  Dicit  consulem  ducem  monere. 
11.  Dicit  ducem  a  consule  moneri.  12.  Putat  Gallos  naves  pliiri- 
mas  habuisse.  13.  NuntL.t  naves  militibus  a  Caesare  completas 
esse.  14.  Dicit  consules  sapientes  duces  fortes  monituros  esse. 
15.  Putat  le^tum  a  rege  monitum  esse.  16.  Naves  compleri  non 
potuerunt.  17.  Si  moneretar,  melior  esset.  18.  Si  moneamini, 
feliciores  sitis.  19.  Si  viri  iitiliores  cives  sint,  laudentur.  20. 
Milites  a  ducibus  moniti  erunt.  21.  Galli  templa  altiora  latio- 
raque  habuerunt.  22.  Filiam  Marci  moneamus.  23.  Civem  bo- 
num  sapientemque  laudemus. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  ditches  (fossa)  were  filled.  2.  The  ships  were  being 
filled.      3.  We  (feminine)  shall  have  been  advised.      4.  Let  us 

*  Compled,  /  fill,  fill  up,  is  the  verb  from  which  we  get  the  word  Comple- 
ment (that  ^shich  fills  out  the  Predicate);  also,  Complementary  (that  use  of  the 
Infinitive  which  completes  the  meaning  of  another  verb). 


64  LATIN  LESSONS. 

advise  the  king's  sous.  5.  Let  us  have  peace.  6.  He  will  advise 
the  man  very  well  (adverb  of  good).  1.  You  (plural)  hsid  filled 
the  ships  with  men  and  boys.  8.  He  says  that  the  ditches  have 
been  filled.  9.  He  thinks  that  the  sailors  can  build  a  larger  ship. 
10.  If  he  had  had  very  many  soldiers,  he  would  have  laid  waste 
the  enemy's  fields. 


LESSON    XXXI. 

General    Review. 

(1)  Decline  the  Latin  for  another  danger;  a  wider  sea;  a  greater  animal ; 
a  xiery  small  state  ;  a  loorse  son  ;  a  better  daughter  ;  a  wise  citizen ;  an  easy 
journey  ;  a  heavy  body. 

(2)  Give  the  Gender  Endings  of  the  Third  Declension ;  of  the  Second;  of  the 
First.  What  nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  (in  common  use)  are  Masculine, 
contrary  to  the  Rule  (19,  a)  ? 

What  classes  of  stems  has  the  Third  Declension  ?  Name  the  stems  of  caput, 
mare,  corpus,  rex,  leo,  virgo,  animal,  magnitude,  flos,  miles,  iter,  ignis, 
mens,  mos,  nubes.  Give  the  Ablative  Singular  and  the  Genitive  Plural  of 
these  same  words.  Give  the  Vocative  Singular  of  deus,  Caius  Julius  Caesar, 
filius ;  the  Dative  Plural  of  dea,  filia. 

(3)  What  adjectives  have  ius  in  the  Genitive  Singular?  Do  any  have  ius? 
What  adjectives  have  rimus  in  the  Superlative  ?  What  ones  have  limus  1 
Into  what  classes  are  adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  divided?  How  are 
they  distinguished  ?  What  is  the  Ablative  Singular  of  brevis  ?  acer  ?  pru- 
dens*?  major? 

(4)  Compare  the  adjectives  meaning:  easy^  attentive,  high,  wise,  ba^d,  goody 
wretched,  much,  many,  like,  happy,  small,  bold,  difficult,  eager. 

Compare  the  adverbs  meaning  :  easily,  badly,  fiercely,  wisely j  happily, 
dearly,  boldly,  carefidly,  timidly. 

(5)  Translate  these  sentences  and  tell :  — 

I.    What  TIME  each  denotes.     II.    What  thought  each  expresses. 

1.  Si  puerum  monere  possem,  felix  essem.  2,  Si  pugnavit,  superavit.  3. 
Si  dux  milites  moneat,  sapiens  sit.  4.  SI  naves  aedificatae  essent,  minimae 
fuissent.  5.  Si  sapientes  sunt,  felices  sunt.  6.  Si  urbem  servare  potuerira, 
elves  serventur. 

(6)  Give  the  tense-signs  of  the  following  :  — 

Imperfect  Subjunctive;  Future  Indicative;  Future  Perfect  Indicative  {Ac- 
tive); Perfect  Subjunctive  {Active)',  Imperfect  Indicative;  Pluperfect  Sub- 
junctive {Active)',  Pluperfect  Indicative  {Active).     How  is  the  Present  Sub- 


LATIN   LESSONS.  65 

junctive  {Active  and  Passive)  formed  in  the  First  Conjugation  ?  in  the  Second  ? 
Illustrate  by  super 6  and  habed.  What  Participles  has  the  Active  Voice  ?  the 
Passive?  Give  all  the  Participles  of  libero,  moneo,  do,  babeo,  spero,  com- 
plex 

(7)  Translate  these  sentences,  and  give  the  Rule  for  the  case  and  gender  of 
each  noun  and  adjective  :  — 

Reges  Gallonim  sapientiores  quam  German  or  um  fuerunt.  EquI  animalia 
celerrima  sunt.  Titus  legatus  Caesaris  oppidum  Genevam  expugnabit.  Equi- 
tes  fortissimi  sunt.     Dux  decimae  legion!  friinientura  dedit. 


LESSON    XXXIL 

DEPONENT    VERBS:    FIRST    AND    SECOND    CONJUGATIONS. 

Learn  N.  80,  entire. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  hortor  and  vereor  (see  General 
Vocabulary).  The  Conjugation  of  these  or  similar  verbs  is  given 
in  A.  135 ;  B.  113 ;  H.  232,  and  Note ;  App.  37. 

Notice  that  these  verbs  are  conjugated  exactly  like  the  Passive  of  am6  and 
moned,  with  these  exceptions  :  (1)  The  Future  Infinitive  is  Active  in  form  ; 
(2)  After  the  Infinitive  Mode,  Deponent  Verbs  have  all  the  forms  of  hath 
Voices. 

Questions. 

What  does  Deponent  mean  ?  Why  are  these  verbs  so  called  ?  Give  a  com- 
plete synopsis  of  cdnor,  doceo,  polliceor.  What  stems  does  a  Deponent 
Verb  have?  Give  the  stems  of  doceo  and  terreo.  Give  the  Latin  for  less 
toidely,  more  widely,  very  widely. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Conatus  est;  conans ;  conare;  conabuntur.  2.  Yeretur; 
veriti  sumus;  veriti  eritis;  verebamini;  vereberis.  3.  Opus 
magnum  conati  sumus.  4.  Puerum  parvum  docere  conabitur. 
5.  Puellas  doceamus.  6.  Laudem  magnam  mereamur.  7.  Si 
pueros  puellasque  docuissent,  laetati  essemus.  8.  Hostes  agros 
sociorum  fortium-  populabuntur.  9.  Insulam  minorem  popular! 
conantur.      10.    Hostes  itinere  prohibere  coiiabimur.     11.    Dicit 


66  LATIN  LESSONS. 

viros  fortes  praemia  maxima  meritos  esse.  12.  Putat  militem 
laudem  merittiriim  esse.  13.  Honorem  merebimur.  14.  Laete- 
mur;  milites  hortemur.  15.  Dicit  duces  copias  hortari  et  horta- 
ttiros  esse.  16.  Dicit  leonem  magnum  servos  timidos  terruisse. 
17.  Copiae  hostium  latius  vagabantur.  18.  Minus  late  vagabimini. 
19.  Putat  equites  minus  audacter  pugnattiros  esse.  20.  Milites, 
minus  late  vagaminL  21.  Duci  pectiniam  polliciti  sunt.  22.  Ee- 
gibus  dona  magna  polliceamur.  23.  Verebimur  magnitudinem 
sil varum.     24.  Dicit  homines  pessimos  praemia  non  mereri. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  He  thinks  that  the  tenth  legion  can  keep  the  enemy  from  the 
city.  2.  We  can  try  to  teach  the  boys.  3.  He  says  that  Caius 
and  Marcus  have  been  taught  by  Julius.  4.  The  leaders,  who 
(qui)  have  not  feared  danger,  deserve  praise.  5.  If  he  should 
be  terrified  by  the  danger  of  death,  he  would  not  be  a  Eoman. 
6.  Consuls  could  not  be  terrified  by  bad  men. 


LESSON    XXXIIL 

TWO   ACCUSATIVES. 

Two  Accusatives: 

(1)  Both  denoting  the  same  Person  or  Thing.  Learn  N.  141,  a. 
Learn,  also,  37,  c,  page  10,  arid  N.  103,  a, 

(2)  One  denoting  the  Person,  the  other  denoting  the  Thing, 
Learn  N.  141,  b,  &  Eemark  1. 

Questions. 

What  verbs  take  two  Accusatives  denoting  the  saTue  person  or  thing  ?  What 
verbs  take  one  Accusative  of  the  person^  aiid  another  of  the  thing  ?  What 
happens  when  these  verbs  are  changed  to  the  Passive?  Are  these  strictly 
Latin  idioms  ?    What  two  meanings  may  the  plural  of  littera  have  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Pueros  docebimus  litteras.  2.  Consulem  amicum  appel- 
laverunt.     3.  Titus  amicus  appellatus  est.     4.  Pompeium,  virum 


LATIN  LESSONS.  67 

fortissimum,  imperatorem  creabant.  5.  Gives,  maturate  Caesarem 
consulem    creare.       6.    Ducem    sententiam    consulis    rogavimus. 

7.  Consul  sententiam  rogatur.  8.  Puellae  litteras  a  sorore  mea 
doctae  erant.  9.  Provinciam  florentem  occupare  mattirabimus. 
10.  Jtilium  regem  creemus.  11.  Romanos  frumentum  flagitavistl. 
12.  Gallos  copiam  frtimenti  flagitemus.  13.  Pueri  magistrum 
sermonem  celabunt.  14.  Dicit  fltimina  altissima  latissimaque  esse. 
15.  Viros  artes  multas  docuerit.  16.  Titus  et  Sabinus  milites 
fortissimi  appellati  sunt.  17.  Imperatorem  sermonem  sociorum 
celare  non  potuiraus.  18.  Militem  nomen  imperatoris  rogemus. 
19.  Urbem,  quam  {which)  vides,  Eomam  appellant.  20.  Urbs 
Eoma  appellabitur.  21.  Sperat  puellas  servos  miseros  littems 
docere  conaturas  esse.  22.  Litteras  scrlbit  {writes),  quas  {which) 
puero  dat.     23.  Litterae  Caesaris  longae  sunt. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  If  I  liad  called  the  man  (my)  friend,  lie  would  have  rejoiced. 
2.  You  {plural)  can  ask  the  teacher  (his)  opinion.  3.  He  says 
that  the  soldiers  wdl  demand  corn  of  the  general.  4.  Let  us  call 
the  town  Geneva.  5.  The  large  island  was  called  a  province. 
6.  He  denies  that  other  islands  are  larger.  7.  If  the  enemy 
should  wander  about  less  widely,  we  should  not  be  frightened. 

8.  We  shall    see    the   men    whom   (quos)  you  tried   to  terrify. 

9.  The   rich   men    will   promise  money,   but   will  not  give  (it). 

10.  We  think  that  the  best  and  wisest  citizens  will  elect  Ariovistus 
king. 

LESSON    XXXIV. 

ADJECTIVES:    IRREGULAR    COMPARISON;    DATIVE    WITH 
ADJECTIVES. 

Learn  N.  34,  35 ;  also  the  Comparison  (and  English  meanings) 
of  the  Adjectives  described  in  those  Notes.  A.  91  &  a;  B.  73  ;  H. 
163,  3 ;  166 ;  App.  17,  5,  c. 


68  LATIN  LESSONS. 

Cotnparison  by  Adverbs  (magis  and  maximS).    Learn  N.  37. 
Dative  tvith  Adjectives: 

(1)  To  denote  Advantage  or  Disadvantage.     Learn  N.  131  k  b, 

(2)  With  Adjectives  meaning  like  (or  unlike),  equal  (or  unequal), 
and  near.  Learn  N.  132.  Notice  how  similar  this  is  to  the  Eng- 
lish construction. 

EXERCISE. 

Examples  for  this  Lesson  are  given  on  page  265. 

1.  Negat  nrbes  Galliae  citerioris  majores  quam  Galliae  ulterioris 
esse.  2.  Maria  ultima  altissima  sunt.  3.  Putat  urbem  finibus 
Belgarum  proximam  fuisse.  4.  Aestates  priores  longae  erant. 
5.  Superiorem  partem  collis  castris  compleverant.  6.  Belgae 
proximi  sunt  Germanis.  7.  Dicit  summum  (110,  h)  montem  a 
Tito  teneii.  8.  Duel  servi  fideles  erunt.  9.  Viri  pueris  irati 
(angry)  fuerunt.  10.  Dona  Caesaris  civibus  grata  sunt.  11.  Dicit 
Aeduos  Eomanis  amicos  fuisse.  12.  Urbs  Geneva  Helvetiis  caris- 
sima  fuit.  13.  Gallis  inimici  simus.  14.  Nuntiat  locum  castris 
idoneum  esse.  15.  Urbi  utiles  simus.  16.  Titus  Caesari  similis 
est.  17.  Locus  magis  idoneus  castris  quam  urbi  fuit.  18.  Patri 
meo  siraillimus  es.  19.  Imperator  militibus  fortibus  earns  est. 
20.  Putat  filios  patribus  dissimiles  esse.  21.  Si  Caesar  Pompeio 
inimicus  sit,  laudem  non  mereatur.  22.  Pueri,  quos  (whom)  lit- 
tcms  docere  conatus  es,  fideles  erunt.  23.  Animalia,  quae  (which) 
vidisti,  leonibus  simillima  fuerunt.  24.  Hostibus  pares  esse  po- 
terimus.     25.  Oppidum  propius  Rbeno  quam  Ehodano  est. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  The  lower  part  of  tlie  river  Rhine.  2.  We  are  a  matcli  for 
(equal  to)  the  Belgae.  3.  You  (plural)  are  very  dear  to  all  Ro- 
mans. 4.  He  says  that  the  general  cannot  be  friendly  to  the  con- 
suls. 5.  The  towns  of  hither  Gaul  are  very  small.  6.  The  girls 
are  very  like  (their)  mothers.  7.  You  (singular)  can  be  more 
useful  to  the  city  thaa  to  the  camp.  8.  The  friends  of  Marcus 
are  very  unfriendly  to  Sabinus.  9.  The  width  of  the  upper  part 
of  the  temple  was  very  great. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  69 

LESSON    XXXV. 
NOUNS:    FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

Learn  N.  20  (entire)  ;  21  k  a;  also  the  Case-Endings  of  the 
Fourth  Declension,  N.  6.  Learn  the  Declension  of  the  Nouns 
given  in  A.  68;  or  B.  48;  or  H.  116;  or  App.  8. 

Domus.  Learn  N.  21,  b ;  also  its  Declension.  A.  70,  /;  B. 
49,  4  ;  H.  119,  1 ;  App.  8,  a. 

Questions. 

What  is  the  stem  of  magistratus  1  cornu?  manus?  State  the  laws  of 
gender  for  the  Fourth  Declension,  and  give  two  exceptions.  Give  a  synopsis, 
Active  and  Passive,  of  moved.    Decline  sinister.    Decline  locus. 

EXERCISE. 

Studi/  the  Examples  for  this  Lesson,  page  265. 

1.  Adventum  Ariovisti  German  or  unique  verentur.  2.  A  dextro 
cornu  proelium  commisit  (began).  3.  Curms  Germanorum  maximi 
fuerunt.  4.  Filiae  imperatoris  inf  elicissimae  sunt.  5.  Pollicebiniur 
donum  majus  magistratui.  6.  Equitatus  oppida  omnia  delevit. 
7.  Consul  domi  erit.  8.  Exercittis  populi  Eomani  maximi  fortis- 
simique  fuerunt.  9.  Dicit  exercitus  impetus  omnes  Germanorum 
fortissime  sustenturos  esse.  10.  Mens  manum  movet.  11.  Castra 
movebunt.  12.  Oppidum  quam  (40,  c)  fortissime  oppugnemus. 
13.  Putat  impetum  hostium  a  dextro  cornu  sustineii  posse.  14. 
Dicit  Belgas  Galliae  fmitimos  esse.  15.  Domum  consulis  delea- 
mus.  16.  Si  adventu  Caesaris  hostes  terreantur,  ab  exercitti  Eo- 
mano  superentur.  17.  Manus  meae  magnae  sunt.  18.  Impetus 
Belgarum  sustineamus.  19.  Castra  mota  erunt.  20.  Superiora 
loca  occupavistis.  21.  Equitatus  summum  collem  occupet.  22. 
Templa  pulcherrima  ab  exercitti  deleta  sunt.  23.  Quam  plurimos 
currus  pollicemur. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  B}^  the  hands  of  the  enemy;  to  the  braver  cavalry.  2.  Of  a 
better  army  ;  by  very  many  attacks.     3.  As  many  hands  as  possi- 


70  LATIN  LESSONS. 

ble.  4.  For  smaller  houses ;  of  wise  magistrates.  5.  We  wept; 
you  {plural)  had  wept;  let  him  weep.  6.  Let's  break  up  camp. 
7.  You  (^plural)  were  at  home. 


LESSON    XXXVI. 

NOUNS:    FIFTH  DECLENSION;    COMPOUND   NOUNS. 

Learn  N.  22  (entire)  ;  also  the  Case-Endings  of  the  Pifth  De- 
clension.    N.  6. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  the  Nouns  given  in  A.  72;  or  B.  51; 
or  H.  120 ;  or  App.  9. 

Compound  Nouns.  Learn  the  Declension  of  respublica  and 
jusjurandum.     N.  23,  a,  h. 

Questions. 

What  is  the  stem  of  dies  ?  planities  ?  spes  %  acies  ?  What  nouns  of  this 
Declension  are  complete?  State  the  laws  of  gender,  and  give  exceptions. 
Pronounce  the  Genitive  of  aciSs ;  fides.  State  the  law  respecting  the  quantity 
of  e  in  the  Genitive  and  Dative  Singular. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Acies  longissima  est.  2.  Dicit  aciem  impetnm  Gallornin 
snstinere  posse.  3.  Spes  magnas  habuit.  4.  Eem  Eomanis 
nuntiant.  5.  Nuntiate,  amici,  res  omnes  consul!.  6.  Caesar  jura 
populo  dedit.  7.  Jtira  sociorum  servabit.  8.  Jusjurandum  civi- 
bus  dederat.  9.  JurejmMndo  non  tenebantur.  10.  Dicit  elves 
rempublicam  servaturos  esse.  11.  Respublica  virttite  militum  ser- 
vata  est.  12.  Pnma  acies  impetus  oranes  fortissime  sustinebit. 
13.  Maximam  spem  habebo.  14.  Spes  victoriae  magna  fuit.  15. 
Suspicatur  senatum  Eomanum  fidem  Gallis  dedisse.  16.  Pidem 
servemus.  17.  Servus  fidem  servabit.  1  8.  Fides  hostibus  a  senatti 
data  est.     19.  Negat  ducem  fidem  violavisse  (break).     20.  Eoma 


LATIN  LESSONS.  71 

caput  Italiae  est.  21.  Latittido  planitiei  major  quam  castrorum 
fuit.  22.  Si  suspicati  essent  bellum  longum  fore  (84,  d),  Caesarem 
imperatorem  creavissent.     23.  Consules  seriatui  inimici  sunt. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  By  the  hope  of  victory.  2.  For  the  senate  of  the  Eoman 
people.  3.  We  are  held  by  (our)  oath.  4.  The  commonwealth 
is  dear  to  all  good  men.  5.  Let  us  have  as  great  hope  as  possible. 
6.  Let  the  army  fight  as  boldly  as  possible.  7.  We  suspect  that 
the  line  of  battle  has  not  been  able  to  sustain  the  attack.  8.  The 
attacks  could  not  be  sustained  bv  the  cavalrv. 


LESSON    XXXVIL 

VERBS:    THIRD   CONJUGATION:    ACTIVE  VOICE. 

Eeview  such  portions  of  N.  65  to  72  as  have  already  been  re- 
ferred to  in  connection  with  the  Pirst  and  Second  Conjugations. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  Active  Voice  of  rego  or  tegO. 
A.  131,  page  82  ;  B.  105;   H.  209;  App.  32. 

Caution.  The  peculiarities  of  the  Active  Voice  are  found  in  the  Present 
Indicative;  Future  Indicative;  Present  Subjunctive;  Imperative.  Therefore 
study  with  special  care  N.  68,  a,  c  ;  69,  a  (3);  70. 

Questions    and   Applications. 

Give  the  principal  parts  of  rego;  dico;  duco;  mittd.  Give  the  stems  of 
these  verbs.  Explain  the  form  of  the  Perfect  Indicative  for  each  (79,  2,  a). 
Conjugate  the  Present  Indicative,  the  Future  Indicative,  the  Present  Subjunc- 
tive, and  the  Imperative,  of  amo;  moned;  mittd.  What  are  the  personal 
endings  of  the  Active  Voice  ?  of  the  Passive  ?  Give  a  synopsis,  in  the  Active 
Voice,  of  mitts. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Imperator  auxilia  omnia  dimisit  (99,  2).  2.  Eempublicam 
sapienter  regent.     3.  Dicitis  legatum  pvoeliam  non  commissurum 


72  LATIN  LESSONS. 

esse.  4.  Si  Caesar  copias  duceret,  fortiores  essent.  5.  Si  proelium 
a  dextro  cornti  commlsissent,  exercitus  non  superatus  esset. 
6.  Gallis  obsides  poUiceamur.  7.  Proelium  quam  audacissime 
cominittamus.  8.  Si  summum  montem  ab  hostibus  teneri  dicat, 
castra  moveamus.  9.  Dicunt  Titum  primam  legionem  duxisse. 
10.  Dixistis  Belgas  obsides  non  missuros  esse.  11.  Senatus  dona 
majora  non  mittet.  12.  Suspicaris  locum  castris  non  idoneum 
fore.  13.  Obsides  Germanis  a  magistratibus  dati  erant.  14.  Ex- 
tremum  oppidum  AUobrogum  proximumque  Helvetiorum  finibus 
Geneva  est. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  We  stall  send  hostages.  2.  Let  him  join  battle  on  the  right 
wing.  3.  Let  the  magistrates  rule  the  Commonwealth.  4.  He 
says  that  the  leaders  will  dismiss  the  council.  5.  They  will  have 
led  the  troops.     6.  They  are  very  near  the  AUobroges. 


LESSON    XXXVIIL 

VERBS  :   THIRD   CONJUGATION  :   PASSIVE   VOICE. 

Eeview  such  portions  of  N.  73  to  77  as  have  been  referred  to 
in  connection  with  the  First  and  Second  Conjugations. 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  rego  or  tego  in  the  Passive  Voice. 
A.  131,  p.  82 ;  B.  106;  H.  210;  Apr  33. 

Caution.  The  peculiarities  of  the  Passive  Voice  are  found  in  the  Present 
Indicative;  Future  Indicative;  Present  Subjunctive;  Imperative;  Present 
Infinitive.  Study  carefully  N.  73,  a,  c;  75;  76,  a;  also  Notes  in  Lesson 
XXXVII. 

Questions   and    Practice. 

What  are  the  principal  parts  of  these  verbs  in  the  Passive  :  regd  1  mittfl  1 
mone0 1  superG  1  Conjugate  these  verbs  in  the  following  tenses,  Active  and 
Passive:  Present  Indicative;  Future  Indicative;  Present  Subjunctive.  Con- 
jugate their  Imperative,  Active  and  Passive.  Give  their  Infinitives  and  Par- 
ticiples, Active  and  Passive. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  73 


EXERCISE. 


Study  N.  79,  2.     The  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  employed  in  the  - 
last  Lesson  were  simple  and  very  similar  ;  as  stated  in  N.  79,  2, 
however,  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  have  a  great  variety  of 
forms  in  the  Perfect  and  Supine  {as  in  this  Lesson).     Learn  these 
principal  parts  thoroughly. 

1.  Omnes  portae  iirbis  a  militibus  clausae  sunt.  2.  Consul 
portas  oppidi  claudi  jubet.  3.  Dicit  imperatorem  castra  posuisse. 
4.  Litterae  ab  amico  meo  scriptae  erant.  5.  Victores  oppidum 
deleii  jusserint.  6.  Jubebimus  littems  scrlbi.  7.  Nuntiant  mili- 
tes  decimae  legionis  victores  esse.  8.  Equos  currtisque  reliquerat. 
9.  Dicitur  hostes  vicisse.  10.  Si  Helvetios  vincamus,  obsides 
dent.  11.  Dicit  legiones  Marci  Titique  ab  exercitu  maximo  victas 
esse.  12.  Eeipublicae  titilissimus  esse  potes.  13.  Equitatus 
impetum  Belgarum  non  veretur.  14.  Vincite,  socii;  proelium 
breve  erit.  15.  Si  a  Caesare  ducti  essemus,  urbem  fortius  oppug- 
navissemus.  16.  Dicit  auxilia  castra  relictura  esse.  17.  Putat 
exercitum  vinci  non  posse.  18.  Provincia  Gallis  propior  est  quam 
Belgis.  19.  Castra  ponere  jussi  erant.  20.  Vince;  vincamus; 
vincat. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Let 's  write  a  letter,  2.  We  victors  will  destroy  the  town. 
3.  They  cannot  conquer  the  auxiliaries.  4.  He  says  that  the  legion 
is  not  held  by  the  oath.  5.  If  we  should  be  as  friendly  as  possible 
to  the  senate,  we  would  be  called  good  citizens.  6.  The  general 
is  said  to  have  been  frightened  by  a  slave.  7.  We  shall  be  dis- 
missed by  the  judge.     8.  We  are  at  home. 


74  LATIN  LESSONS. 

LESSON    XXXIX. 

PREPOSITIONS;    PLACE.* 

Learn  N.  95  (entire) ;  commit  to  memory  the  list  of  Preposi- 
tions which  always  require  the  Ablative, 
Flare,     Learn  N.  158. 

Questions    and    Practice. 

What  prepositions,  in  common  use,  are  always  used  with  the  Ablative? 
When  do  in  and  sub  require  the  Accusative  ?  the  Ablative  ?  What  prepo- 
sitions have  double  forms  ?  How  are  they  used  ?  How  does  a  (ab)  differ  in 
meaning  from  e  (ex)  ?  What  does  sub  monte  mean  ?  When  is  to  a  sign  of  the 
Dative?  When  must  it  be  translated  by  ad?  (129,  a.)  What  meaning  have 
these  syllables  in  a  compound  word  (see  99,  1,  2):  con'?  di?  prae  (as  in 
praemitto)?  de  (as  in  deduc6)?  Decline  dies  longior;  senatus  Justus; 
oornu  dextrum. 

EXERCISE. 

Tell  which  sentences  answer  the  question  Where  ?  the  question 
Whither?  the  question  Whence?  Notice  carefully  the  meaning  of 
the  prepositions  used  in  this  Lesson  (see  General  Vocabulary). 

1.  Copias  trans  Ehenum  duxit.  2.  Inter  Ehemira  et  Khodanum 
sunt.  3.  Ad  oppidum  contenderunt.  4.  XJrbi  nomen  dat.  5. 
Bellum  circum  Romara  gerit.  6.  Sine  spe  victoriae  pugnant. 
7.  Milites  sub  jugum  missi  sunt.  8.  Sub  monte  castra  posuit. 
9.  Ab  urbe  ad  castra  contendit.  10.  Ex  oppido  venit  {comes). 
11.  Pro  castns  stetit.  12.  Viros  in  templum  convocatis.  13. 
Agricolae  in  agris  sunt.  14.  Contra  populum  Romanum  conjti- 
ravisti.  15.  In  fiiiibus  Belgarum  vagati  sumus.  16.  In  fines 
Germanorum  exercitum  dticit.  17.  Equitatum  in  hiberna  dedticet. 
18.  De  montibus  ad  mare  contendunt.  19.  Equites  ad  fltiraen 
praemisit.  20.  Erat  (193,  6)  planities  magna.  21.  In  Gallia 
vivit;  in  castris  est.     22.  Servi  sine  praemiis  magnis  non  pugna- 

*  The  regular  construction  is  presented  first.  The  Locative  Case  is  taken 
up  later. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  75 

bunt.  23.  Legionem  novam  in  Gallia  citeriore  conscripsit.  24. 
Legio,  quae  {which)  in  Gallia  ulteriore  conscripta  erat,  in  Galliara 
citeriorem  contendit.  25.  Dicit  cives  pltirimos  contra  rempublicam 
conjiirare.  26.  Post  castra  sunt  loca  superiora.  27.  Trans  flumen 
auxilia  e  castris  et  a  coUe  duximus. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  Let  us  call  together  tlie  boys  into  one  place.  2.  There  can 
be  no  victory  without  arms.  3.  Let  us  send  ahead  the  troops. 
4.  We  shall  easily  lead  the  brave  army  across  the  wide  river.  5. 
If  we  should  be  conquered,  the  city  would  be  in  great  danger.  6. 
The  lieutenant's  troops  have  been  conquered  by  the  brave  slaves. 
7.  We  will  hasten  to  the  camp  as  quickly  as  possible.  8.  He 
comes  (venit)  into  the  city ;  out  of  the  town ;  away  from  the 
camp.  9.  There  is  a  temple  at  the  foot  of  the  hill.  10.  Between 
hope  and  fear.     11.  The  army  will  be  sent  under  the  yoke. 


LESSON    XL. 

DEPONENT  VERBS :    THIRD   CONJUGATION ;    ABLATIVE  OF 
CAUSE;    SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  PURPOSE. 

Eeview  N.  80  &  a,  h.  Learn  the  Conjugation  of  the  Deponent 
Verb  sequor.    A.  135 ;  B.  113 ;  H.  232  &  Note  ;  App.  37. 

Ablative  denoting  Cause.     Learn  N.  149  (entire). 

Subjunctive  denoting  Purpose.*  Learn  N.  179  [Simple 
Rule), 

Sequence  of  Tenses.  Learn  N.  171,  172  (omitting  the  Ee- 
MAiiKs).  Study  the  special  Examples  (and  the  explanations)  for 
this  Lesson,  on  page  265. 

Notice  that  the  Ablative  of  Cause  and  the  Subjunctive  of  Pur- 
pose both  answer  the  question  Why  ? 

*  The  more  technical  constructions  of  Purpose  are  taken  up  later. 


76  LATIN   LESSONS. 

Questions   and    Practice. 

Give  a  complete  synopsis  of  sequor.  What  Active  forms  have  Deponent 
verbs  ?  What  does  sequence  mean  ?  What  tenses  are  Primary  t  Secondary  l 
State  the  law  for  the  "  Sequence  of  Tenses."  Give  the  Latin  for  to  see  in  this 
sentence :  He  is  sent  to  see  Marcus.  What  conjunction  introduces  a  positive 
purpose  ?  a  negative  purpose  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Ducem  amicitiae  causa  sequimtur.  2.  AdventU  amici  iiiei 
laetabar.  3.  Victoriis  multis  gloriati  erant.  4.  Legates  servitute 
liberabit.  5.  Dicit  proelium  ab  equitatti  commissum  esse.  6. 
Propter  virttitem  laudor.  7.  Nuntiant  castra  defensoribus  ntidata 
esse.  8.  Viri  gloriae  causa  pugnant.  9.  Pugnamus  ut  rempub- 
licam  servemus.  10.  Hostes  audacissirae  sequamur.  11.  Caius 
servusque  ab  urbe  profecti  sunt.  12.  Portas  claudamus,  iie  urbs 
deleatur.  13.  Pueros  servum  sequi  jussit.  14.  Copias  in  Galliam 
citeriorem  mittunt  ut  Gallos  terreant.  15.  AuxiHa  ut  oppidum 
expugnent  mittentur.  16.  In  Gallia  morabimur  ut  urbes  hostium 
videamus.  17.  In  urbe  Eoma  natus  es.  18.  Legationes  ad 
Marcum  ut  pacem  peterent  misimus.  19.  Circum  Genevam  mora- 
buntur.  20.  Si  ad  castra  profectus  esset,  laetati  essemus.  21. 
Hostes  sequeris,  ne  in  finibus  Helvetiorum  morentur.  22.  Custo- 
des  cives  malos  sequi  non  potuerunt.  23.  Dicit  consulem  libere 
loqui.  24.  Legationes  pltiriraae  a  civitatibus  multis  ad  Caesarem 
missae  sunt.  25.  Sequimini,  socii,  ducem  fortem.  26.  Profectus 
eram,  ut  ad  fltimen  contenderem.  27.  Si  in  oppido  Geneva  non 
natus  esses,  civis  Romauus  appellareris.  28.  Copias  trans 
Elienum  ducemus,  ut  summum  montem  occupemus.  2^.  Litteras 
sciibebat,  ne  novum  majusque  periculum  amicum  terreret.  30. 
Tiraore  Gallos  non  sectitus  es. 

Give  the  Latin  for  these  sentences,  bearing  in  mind  the  fact  thai 
the  Infinitive  cannot  be  used  to  denote  a  Purpose;  that  is,  to  answer 
the  question  Why  ? 

1.  The  ambassadors  will  be  sent  to  see  the  city.  2.  We  had 
followed  the  enemy  from  the  river  to  the  town.  3.  He  had  left 
soldiers  to  protect  the  town.     4.  Let  us  fight  lest  we  be  slaves. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  77 

5.  Let  us  set  out  for  the  river.  6.  He  says  that  a  large  animal 
followed  the  boys  in  the  forest.  7.  You  {plural)  say  that  the 
ambassadors  were  not  born  in  Gaul.  8.  We  will  fight  for  the 
sake  of  glory. 

LESSON    XLI. 

VERBS:    FOURTH  CONJUGATION;    ADJECTIVES  USED  AS 

NOUNS. 

Learn  N.  67  ;  68,  a,  c;  69,  a  (4). 

Learn  the  Conjugation  of  audio,  Active  and  Passive.     A.  132, 
page  86;  B.  107,  103;   H.  211,  212;  App.  35,  36. 
Adjectives  used  as  Nouns.      Learn  N.  109  &  c. 

Questions   and   Practice. 

What  are  the  stems  of  audio  ?  scio  ?  Give  a  complete  synopsis  of  audio. 
In  what  two  ways  can  "  all  things  "  be  expressed  ?  (Ans.  res  omnes ;  omnia.) 
What  does  felloes  esse  videbantur  mean  ? 

EXERCISE. 

Notice  that,  with  videor  {meaning/  seem),  esse  mai/  be  expressed 
or  omitted,  as  in  English.  Study  the  Examples  for  this  Lesson,  on 
page  266. 

1.  Audivisti  castra  niunita  esse.  2.  Scimus  Caium  urbem 
munituruin  esse.  3.  Dicit  imperium  populi  Eomani  Eheno  finiii. 
4.  Gives  sciunt  consulem  niilitern  ignavum  ptinivisse.  5.  Profectio 
fugae  (132)  simillima  videtur.  6.  Bona  mea  ad  urbem  mittam. 
7.  Nuntiabunt  fltimen  agros  sociorum  finire.  8.  Omnes  audient 
duces  fuga  (149)  legionem  ptinituros  esse.  9.  Munite,  socii, 
oppida  Eom'inorum.  10.  Yita  omnibus  carissima  est.  11.  Dicit 
profectio nem  fugae  similem  fuisse.  12.  Omnes  fortes  nobilesque 
fuerunt.  13.  Sciant  imperium  populi  Romarii  maximum  esse. 
14.  Castra  mtiniamus.  15.  Einitimi  omnes  servum  piinitum  esse 
scient.      16.    Copiae   fortissimae   esse   videntur.      17.    Exercitus 


78  LATIN   LESSONS. 

hostium  minor  quam  Cail  videtur.  18.  Iter  facillimum  videbitur. 
19.  Pueri  patri  quam  matri  similiores  sunt.  20.  Homines  ignavi 
inimici  virorum  bonorum  sunt.  21.  Mali  ptinientur;  boni  lauda- 
buntur.  22.  Multas  res  audiveramus.  23.  Aliud  audiemus. 
24.  Legatus  multa  Caesari  nuntiat.  25.  Dicit  judicem  multa 
dixisse.  26.  Magnam  urbem  magnis  (viris)  aedificabit.  27. 
Urbem  mtiniamus  ne  cives  timidi  sint.  28.  Pueris  dona  dedit, 
ut  amicus  putaretur.  29.  Multi  hostes  veriti  sunt.  30.  Rex 
plurimis  amicus  est.  31.  Non  omnibus  omnia  facilia  sunt.  32. 
Consul  multa  dixit. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  We  will  fortify  the  camp.  2.  Let  us  hear  many  things  {ex- 
press in  two  ways),  3.  The  citizens  say  that  the  judge  will  punish 
the  slave.  4.  The  towns  have  not  been  fortified  by  Caesar.  5. 
Let  us  punish  the  soldier.  6.  The  empire  of  the  Gauls  is  limited 
by  the  river  Rhine.  7.  We  will  set  out  from  the  camp.  8.  We 
have  seemed  very  wise.  9.  He  says  that  the  town  has  been 
fortified. 


oJ«<o 


LESSON    XLIL 

DEPONENT  VERBS:    FOURTH  CONJUGATION;    ABLATIVE 
WITH  DEPONENTS. 

Review  N.  80  &  a,  b.  Learn  the  Conjugation  of  potior.  A. 
135 ;  B.  113  (largior)  ;  H.  232  &  Note  ;   APP.  37. 

Ablative  of  Means  tvith  Five  Deponent  Verbs,  and  also 
with  vivo.     Learn  N.  151,  a. 

Remark.  Vescor  means  /  feed  on ;  vivd,  /  live  on.  Of  the  Deponent 
Verbs  given  in  the  Note,  utor  and  potior  are  most  frequently  used. 

Questions   and    Practice. 

What  Deponent  Verbs  take  the  Ablative  ?  Why  ?  Give  a  synopsis  of 
potior ;  tltor.    Give  the  stems  of  venio ;    conscribo ;    praemittd ;    vlvO. 

Decline  together  the  Latin  for  a  shorter  time  ;  a  longer  sword. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  79 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Trans  Ehenum  incolebant ;  citra  fltlmen  incolunt.  2.  Impe- 
dimentis  castrisque  potiemur.  3.  Navibiis  uti  non  possiimus.  4. 
Multa  aiiimalia  fmmento  vivuiit.  5.  Armis  bene  (39)  titimini. 
6.  Gladiis  utamur.  7.  Dicit  Germanos  equis  non  tisos  esse.  8. 
Hostes  navibus  omnibus  potiti  sunt.  9.  Gives  legibus  titebantur. 
10.  Putat  Eomanos  totius  Galliae  imperio  potituros  esse.  11. 
Oppido  facile  potirl  potuimus.  12.  Venimus  ut  regem  videamus. 
13.  Ne  impedimentis  potiremini,  pugnabant.  14.  Equites  curribus 
Hsi  erunt.  15.  Dux  copias  ab  oppido  profectas  esse  nuntiat.  16. 
Gladio,  mi  fill,  nti  non  potes.  17.  Toto  imperio  potiamur.  18. 
Helvetii  trans  Ehodanum  incoluerant.  19.  Si  ad  castra  veniret, 
felicissimus  essem.  20.  Dicit  Caesarem  venisse,  vidisse,  vicisse. 
21.  Hostes  sequemur,  ne  in  finibus  Belgarum  morentur.  22. 
Domus  urbi  proxima  fuit. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  They  had  obtained  possession  of  Gaul.  2.  Let  him  use  the 
arms.  3.  They  will  not  be  able  to  get  possession  of  Caesar's 
camp.  4.  We  hope  that  the  general  will  get  possession  of  the 
enemy's  winter-quarters.  5.  You  (^plural)  had  come  into  the 
winter-quarters  as  quickly  as  possible.  6.  The  good  were  praised; 
the  bad  were  punished.  7.  The  neighbors  were  unfriendly  to  my 
brothers.  8.  The  winter-quarters  of  Sabinus  were  smaller  than 
Caesar's. 


LESSON    XLIII. 

THIRD    CONJUGATION:    VERBS   IN  10;    TENSES  OF  THE 
INFINITIVE. 

Learn  N.  79,  3.  Learn  the  Conjugation,  Active  and  Passive,  of 
capio.     A.  131 ;  B.  110,  111 ;  H.  218,  219 ;  Apr  34. 

Tenses  of  the  Infinitive.  Learn  N.  173.  This  Note  gives 
Examples,  showing  the  time  expressed  by  the  Infinitive  tenses; 
they  should  be  carefully  studied, 


80  LATIN  LESSONS. 


Questions   and    Practice. 

When  does  a  "  Verb  in  id  "  keep  the  i  1  Give  a  complete  synopsis,  Active 
and  Passive,  of  capid.  What  tenses  has  the  Infinitive  ?  To  what  may  the 
Present  be  equivalent  ?  the  Perfect  ?  What  is  a  Direct  Quotation  ?  an  Indi- 
rect Quotation  ?  What  is  a  Copula  I  a  Comjplement  t  the  Complementari/ 
Infinitive  1 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Dicit  Helvetios  agriciilttira  prohiberi.  2.  Dixerunt  hostes 
itinere  prohibitos  esse.  3.  Putat  oppida  a  Jtib'o  capta  esse. 
4.  Dixit  legionem  fugere.  5.  Speraveram  Eomanos  Genevam 
occupattiros  esse.  6.  Speratis  magistrattis  elves  venire  passtiros 
esse.  7.  Consul  hostes  pacem  facturos  esse  nuiitiavit.  8.  Urbes 
a  legato  forti  legioneque  captae  erunt.  9.  Scimus  agricolas  agros 
colere.  10.  Tela  multa  in  milites  conjicient.  11.  Dixisti  lapides 
magnos  jactos  esse.  12.  Navis,  quam  {which)  videtis,  a  filio  meo 
facta  est.  13.  Helvetios  per  fines  Gallorum  venire  non  pass! 
sunt.  14.  Capite,  milites  fortes,  loca  superiora.  15.  Si  omnes 
tela  conjiciant,  urbs  capiatur.  16.  Eugiamus;  castra  oppugiie- 
luus;  proficiscamur.  17.  Si  gladiis  nsi  essent,  castiis  potiti 
essent.  18.  Colite,  agricolae,  agros,  qui  (which)  longi  latique 
sunt.  19.  Patimini,  jtidices,  civem  divitem  dicere.  20.  Hostes 
fugient;  non  morabimur;  viiicemus. 

Give  the  Latin  for  — 

1.  We  cannot  allow  the  man  to  come.  2.  They  will  not  till  the 
fields.  3.  He  said  that  the  slaves  would  not  fight  bravely.  4. 
They  thought  that  the  town  could  be  taken.  5.  The  weapons 
cannot  be  hurled.  6.  Let  us  throw  stones  and  weapons.  7.  Let 
them  follow  the  cavalry.  8.  We  know  that  the  line  of  battle  can 
sustain  the  attacks.  9.  They  seem  to  be  powerful  and  rich.  10. 
We  were  dwelling  across  the  river  Ehine. 


LATIN   LESSONS.  81 

LESSON    XLIV. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Learn  N.  189  k  a,  c  (first  sentence),  d. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  the  Present  and  Future  Active,  and  the 
Perfect  Passive,  Participles  of  audio. 

Stud^  these  Notes  in  connection  with  the  Uxamples  for  this 
Lesson,  on  page  266. 

Notice  that  only  Deponent  Verbs  have  Perfect  Participles  with  an  Active. 
meaning.  To  express  having  seen,  having  conquered,  etc.,  a  special  construc- 
tion is  used,  which  will  be  explained  in  a  future  Lesson . 

Notice,  also,  the  voivel  changes  m  compound  words ;  as,  rejicid,  interfiicid, 
accipid  (from  jacio,  facio,  capio).    See  N.  2  (5). 

Questions  and   Practice. 

Decline  the  Present  Participle  of  sequor.  How  many  Participles  have 
Deponent  Verbs  ?  What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  voco  and 
Convoc0 1  venio  and  convenio  ?  How  may  Participles  be  often  best  trans- 
lated ?  What  is  a  Participle  ?  What,  therefore,  is  the  rule  for  its  use  ?  To 
what  Declensions  do  the  Participles,  Active  and  Passive,  belong  ?  What  time 
does  the  Present  Participle  denote  ?  the  Perfect  ? 

EXERCISE. 

Compare  these  sentences  carefully  with  the  Examples. 

1.  Equites  a  Caesare  praemissi  revertuutur.  2.  Obsides  reductos 
in  numero  hostium  habuit.  3.  Tela  in  intirum  conjecta  rejicient. 
4.  Ad  Caium  litteras  a  duce  scriptas  mittit.  5.  Legatum  de  ad- 
ventn  legionis  certiorem  fecL  6.  Imperator  de  proelio  certior 
factus  est.  7.  Consules  certiores  facit  exercitum  venisse.  8. 
Titus  hostes  fugientes  secutus  magnum  numerum  peditum  inter- 
fecit.  9.  Milites  a  flumine  progress!  ab  hostibus  capti  sunt.  10. 
Caesar  suspicatus  peiiculum  maximum  fore  (84,  d)  decimam  legi- 
onem  sequi  jussit.  11.  Fortissime  pugnans  interficitur.  12.  Servi 
fortiter  pugnantes  interfecti  sunt.  13.  Adventum  Ariovisti  veriti, 
copias  in  castra  deduceiit.    14.  Obsides  multls  a  civitatibus  missos 

6 


82  LATIN  LESSONS. 

accepSrunt.     15,  Dona  pulcherrima  a  fratre  meo  missa  accipiam. 

16.  Iter  per  provinciam    feciinus,    ut    Gengvam    oppugnaremus. 

17.  Iter  per  fines  Gallorum  faciens  interfectus  erat.  18.  Eegem 
certiorem  fecistis  legiones  a  Gallia  reductas  esse.  19.  Belgae 
superati  in  oppidum  rejecti  sunt.  20.  Civis,  qui  (who)  ad  urbem 
venit,  ducem  fortem  audacter  pugnantem  interfectum  esse  dixit. 
21.  Caesar  ab  Gallia  discedens  Gallis  obsides  reddidit.  22.  Dixe- 
rat  elves  magno  de  periculo  certiores  factos  esse.  23.  Iter  in 
Galliara  quam  celerrime  faciamus.  24.  Nuntiabant  auxilia  supe- 
rata  in  castra  rejici.  25.  Multi  viros  ab  Italia  proficiscentes  lau- 
daverant.  26.  Servos  in  Galliam  transductos  interfecerunt.  27. 
V5cem  consulis  milites  laudantis  auditis.  28.  Senatum  in  templum 
convocavit.  29.  Dicit  senatum  a  Caesare  vocatum  convenisse. 
30.  Consul  ab  hibernis  in  Italiam  discedens  servum  interfici  jussit. 

Give  the  Latin  for  these  sentences  (those  numbered  2,  3,  4,  are 
to  he  written  as  Simple  sentences)  — 

1.  Having  promised  many  gifts  to  tbe  brave  soldiers,  tlie  king 
returns  to  the  city.  2.  The  troops,  that  had  been  sent  forward 
by  the  leader,  could  not  storm  the  town.  3.  After  they  had  at- 
tempted to  obtain  possession  of  the  camp,  they  were  ordered  to 
return.  4.  He  will  follow  the  enemy  as  they  depart  from  the 
town.  5.  The  guards  killed  the  slaves  attempting  to  seize  the 
temple.  6.  Having  followed  the  army  of  the  Gauls  to  the  Ehone, 
he  was  unable  to  lead  across  (his)  infantry.  7.  Having  been  con- 
quered by  the  allies,  the  legion  was  driven  back  into  the  city. 


LESSON    XLV. 

NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES  ;  ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  ;  ABLATIVE 
OF  TIME. 

Learn  section  9,  h,  page  2 ;  also,  N.  41 ;  42  (entire)  ;  43,  a,  c,  d. 

Learn  the  Cardinals  (to  30),  the  Ordinals  (to  12th),  and  the 

answers  to  Questions  given  below.   A.  94;  B.  79;  H.  174;  A  pp.  19. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  83 

Learn  the  Declension  of  unus,  duo,  trgs.  A.  83,  a  ;  94,  5,  c ; 
B.  66,  80;  H.175;  App.  11,  a;  20,  b. 

Accusative  of  Ti^ne.    Learn  N.  142  k  a  ;  also  54,  4,  page  15. 
Ablative  of  Time,     Learn  N.  160;  also  54,  5,  page  15. 

Questions. 

The  Numerals  are  given  m  the  Grammars  and  Appendix;  they  are  not 
given  in  the  Vocabulary. 

What  is  the  Latin  for  25,  18,  100,  1000,  5,  300,  278,  130,  19,  15th,  3d,  9th, 
7th,  2d,  8th  ?  What  question  is  answered  by  the  Accusative  of  Time  ?  by  the 
Ablative  of  Time  ?    What  Cardinals  are  declined  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Septem  lioras  pugnaverunt.  2.  Die  quinto  ad  castra  reverti- 
tur.  3.  Media  nocte  oppidum  oppugnabimus.  4.  Solis  occasu 
exercitum  trans  flumen  duxit.  5.  Quattuor  dies  in  finibus  hos- 
tium  moratus  est.  6.  Prtimento  multos  annos  vixerat.  7.  Tertio 
die  in  fines  Sequanorum  perveniemus.  8.  Duos  menses  trans 
Ehenum  incolm.  9.  Septendeeim  annos  bellum  gerebant.  10. 
Mille  viri  ab  Ariovisto  missi  erant,  ut  castra  oppugnarent. 
11.  Quarta  hora  e  castris  proficiscemur.  12.  Totam  noctem 
copiae  Romanae  iter  fecerunt.  13.  Solis  occasu  castris  impedi' 
mentisque  potitus  es.  14.  Domi  quinque  menses  fueras.  15. 
Novendecira  dies  commeatus  causa  morabimini.  16.  Quam  celer- 
rime  iter  faciaraus  ne  Sequani  navibus  potiantur.  17.  Uno  anno 
oppida  triginta  capta  sunt.  18.  Aestate  ad  urbera  Eomam  veni- 
etis.  19.  Decima  legio  hostes  sex  dies  sectita  partem  maximam 
impedimentorum  cepit.  20.  Tertio  die  Titum  equites  peditesque 
Germanorum  vicisse  audivimus.  21.  In  Italia  centum  urbes  mag- 
nae  fuerunt.     22.  Castra  quarta  hora  ponet. 

English   into    r.atin. 

1.  We  shall  use  the  horses  all  (totus)  day.  2.  Let  him  come 
at  sunset.  3.  We  shall  break  up  camp  at  midnight.  4.  Let  us 
delay  two  days  for  the  sake  of  supplies.     5.  Let  the  king  praise 


84  LATIN   LESSONS. 

the  soldiers  (as  they  are)  setting  out  for  (in)  battle.  6.  Por  two 
hours  the  cavalry  fought  very  bravely.  7.  He  seems  to  deserve 
great  praise. 


LESSON    XLVI. 

ACCLFSATIVE  :    DENOTING  EXTENT   OF   SPACE  ;    PARTITIVE 
GENITIVE. 

Accusative  denoting  Extent  of  Space,  Learn  N.  142  h  b  ; 
also  54,  3,  page  15. 

I>ee1ension  of  Mille.     Learn  N.  43,  e;   APP.  20,  c. 
Partitive  Genitive.     Learn  N.  122,  k  a;  123,  c. 

Caution.     Cardinal  numbers  require  a  peculiar  construction.    N.  123,  a. 
Notice  that  the  Accusative  of  Extent  (either  of  time  or  sjpace)  has  an  Ad- 
verbial force  of  Degree  (telling  How  far  or  How  much),  as  in  English :  the 
tree  is  very  high  ;  the  tree  is  sixty  feet  high. 

Questions. 

When  should  mille,  the  noun,  be  used?  (Ans.  When  more  than  one  thou- 
sand are  spoken  of.)  What  is  the  Latin  for  three  miles  i  Jive  thousand  Tnent 
a  thousand  horses  f  What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  perterreO, 
permoved,  and  terred,  moved?  (99,  1.)  Give  the  Latin  for  a  part  of  the 
soldiers ;  five  of  the  hoys.  What  part  of  speech  does  the  Accusative  of  time 
and  extent  most  resemble  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Domum  pedes  triginta  septem  latam  aedificavit.  2.  Quinque 
milUa  passuum  iter  fecerunt.  3.  Castra  millia  passuum  octo  in 
latittidinem  patebant.  4.  Equum  mille  quingentos  passns  sequitiir. 
5.  Collis  duceiitSs  pedes  altus  fuit.  6.  Mare  mille  pedes  altum 
est.  7.  Dicit  mtirum  decern  millia  pedum  longum  esse.  8.  Unus 
ex  militibus  iter  difficillimum  fore  dixit.  9.  Millia  hominum 
quattuor  ut  urbem  oppiignarent  missa  sunt.  10.  Turris  vigintl 
quinque  pedes  alta  est.  11.  Servos  fugientes  millia  passuum  novem 
sectitus,  ad  oppidum  revertitur.     12.  Agri  Helvetiorum  in  longi- 


LATIN  LESSONS.  85 

tudinem  millia  passuinn  ducenta  et  quadraginta,  in  latitudinem 
centum  et  octoginta  patebant.  13.  Magnam  partem  auxiliorum 
dimisit.  14.  Centum  ex  civibus  contra  regem  conjtiraverunt. 
15.  Domus  mea  altior  latiorque  quam  Marcl  est. 

Englisli   into    liatin. 

1.  The  horse  is  sixteen  hands  high.  2.  Let  us  follow  the 
enemy  for  three  hours.  3.  We  will  pitch  the  camp  on  the  higher 
ground  (places).  4.  They  say  that  the  legion  marched  fifteen 
miles.  5.  The  forests  extend  eight  miles  in  width.  6.  The 
temple  is  two  hundred  feet  long  and  eighty  feet  wide.  7.  Pom- 
pey's  camp  is  larger  than  Caesar's. 


LESSON     XLVII. 

ADVERBIAL  ACCUSATIVE;    CERTAIN   PHRASES   OF  TIME, 
PLACE,    ETC. 

Adverbial  Accusative,  denoting  Degree.  Learn  N.  94,  d^ 
1 ;  142  &  c.  Compare  the  English  :  He  was  hurt  a  very  little ; 
They  were  injured  a  great  deal  (54,  6,  page  15). 

Sow  to  express  sucJi  Phrases  as:  the  red  of  the  Gauls; 
half-way  up  the  hill ;  at  day-break,  etc.     Learn  N.  110,  h  ;  123,  e. 

Plus:  Learn  its  Use.  N.  27,  122,  b.  Learn  its  Declension. 
A.  86;  B.  70;  H.  165,  N.  1 ;  App.  15,  «. 

Study  carefully  the  Examples  mider  the  Notes  for  this  Lesson  j 
also  Special  Examples,  p.  266.  The  Accusative  in  many  of  the  sen- 
tences of  this  Lesson  denotes  Extent  of  Space, 

Questions. 

What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  exercitus,  aoies,  and  agmen'? 
Express  in  Latin  :  at  day-h^eak  ;  at  midnight ;  for  the  most  part ;  m  the  last 
part  of  winter  ;  the  rest  of  the  Belgae  ;  at  noon.  What  part  of  speech  is  plUs 
in  the  Singular '{  in  the  Plural  ?    Give  the  Latin  for  more  wisdom  (sapientia). 


86  LATIN  LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Meridig  veniet.  2.  Castra  tantum  spatii  patebant.  3.  Nul- 
1am  partem  noctis  iter  fecimus.  4.  Exercitum  prima  Itice  eduxit. 
5.  Prima  nocte  servos  emiserunt.  6.  Multo  die  portas  claudi  jussl. 
7.  Priimento  (151,  a)  maximam  partem  vivebant.  8.  Ariovistus 
in  Gallia  plurimum  potuerat.  9.  Impetus  Lostium  paulum  tar- 
dantur.  10.  Eeliqui  Belgae  fortissimi  sunt.  11.  Extrema  hieme 
ad  urbem  venerunt.  12.  Medio  in  colle  templum  fuit.  13.  Dicit 
summum  montem  a  tertia  legione  occupari.  14.  Spero  ducem  in 
Italia  bellum  gesttirum  esse.  15.  In  Gallia  hiemes  longissimae 
sunt.  16.  Princeps  plus  auctoritatis  habuit.  17.  De  secunda 
vigilia  castra  defensoribus  ntidabuntur.  18.  Circum  Eomam 
totam  hiemem  manserunt.  19.  Dicit  reliquos  Suevos  eductos 
esse.  20.  Nihil  impetus  legionis  Eomanos  terrere  potuit.  21. 
Arma  reliquorum  militum  amissa  erant.  22.  Eeliqui  (109)  ad 
castra  sine  vulnere  revertentur.  23.  Bello  servili  (110,  c)  plus 
imperil  liabui.  24.  Eempublicam  metu  maximo  liberabis.  25. 
Suevi,  reliquos  millia  passuum  multa  sectiti,  in  fines  Helvetiorum 
sub  vesperum  pervenerunt.  26.  Magnam  partem  diei  iter  faci- 
emus.  27.  Nihil  periculo  mortis  territus  sum.  28.  Dicit  urbem 
magnam  esse,  et  decem  millia  passuum  in  latittidinem  patere. 
29.  Putaverat  agmen  longius  futtirum  esse. 

£nglisli  into  Latin. 

1.  Let  us  pass  the  winter  in  the  territory  of  the  Suevi.  2.  They 
will  set  out  in  the  fourth  watch.  3.  They  say  that  the  chief  is 
very  powerful  at  home.  4.  More  (men)  will  be  led  out  by  the 
general.  5.  The  rest  of  the  ships  are  very  small.  6.  Let  us 
march  all  (totus)  night.  7.  If  he  should  lose  (his)  arms,  he 
would  be  killed.  8.  He  says  (199,  5)  that  the  gate  is  not  twenty 
feet  wide.     9.  They  can  set  out  at  day-break. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  87 


LESSON    XLVIII. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE  :    PURPOSE,    COMMAND,   AND 
EXHORTATION   (continued). 

Purpose.     Learn  N.  179  &  Caution  1,  d. 

Command  and  Exhortation.     Learn  N.  178  &  Caution  1. 

Correlatives.  N.  195,  8.  Learn  the  meaning  of  these  Cor- 
relatives :  alius  .  .  .  alius  ;  alter  .  . .  alter ;  alii  .  .  .  alii ;  alter! 
.  . .  alter! ;  et  . .  .  et ;  neque  .  . .  neque  ;  n6n  s51um  .  ,  .  sed 
etiam. 

Study  the  Special  Examples  for  tJiis  Lesson,  page  267. 

Notice  that  hortor,  nitor,  rogS,  do  not  state  anything,  and  cannot  tak© 
the  Accusative  and  Infinitive,  like  died.   /  ask,  strive,  or  exhort  for  a  Purpose. 
Remember,  th«  Infinitive  Mode  cannot  express  a  Purpose. 

Questions. 

What  are  Correlatives  f  What  conjunction  is  required  for  a  positive  Pur- 
pose? foT  a.  negative  Purpose?  Where  must  nSn  never  be  used?  (Ans.  In 
Imperative  sentences.)  If  this  Latin  is  not  correct,  make  it  so  :  Hortfttur 
puerOs  bonds  esse. 

EXERCISE. 

-  1.  Ne  vereamur.  2.  Yenit  ut  vinceret.  3.  Nitimur  ut  sapientes 
simus.  4.  Milites  liortabimur  ut  fortiter  pugnent.  5.  Alii  pug- 
nabant,  alii  fugiebant.  6.  Alter  consilium  Justus  fuit,  alter  in- 
justus.  7.  Caesarem  rogaverant  ut  militibus  arma  daret.  8.  Ne 
castra  de  tertia  vigilia  oppugnent.  9.  Legatus  imperatorem  rogat 
ne  per  Galliam  iter  faciat.  10.  Et  pueii  et  puellae  nituntur  ut  a 
magistro  laudentiir.  11.  Neque  consul  neque  judex  oppida  deleta 
esse  dixit.  12.  Alteii  laudati  sunt,  alteri  punientur.  13.  Dicit 
legiones  a  Pornpeio  conscriptas  per  provinciam  iter  facere,  ut  oppi- 
dum  ab  Ariovisto  munltum  occupent.  14.  Ne  servis  mails  dona 
polliceamur.  15.  Audivi  imperatorem  decimam  legionem  ne  hostes 
sequeretur  hortatum  esse.     16.  Hortamini  custodes  ut  quam  dili- 


88  LATIN   LESSONS. 

gentissirai  sint.  17.  Veni  ut  virum  fortem  et  videas  et  laudes. 
18.  Jtidices  nitantur  ne  injusti  appellentur.  19.  Non  solum 
milites  sed  etiam  agricolae  reipublicae  utilissimi  fuerunt.  20.  Co- 
pias  hortati  eraiit  ne  ex  urbe  proficiscerentur.  21.  Caium  horta- 
bantur  ut  contra  rempublicam  conjtiraret. 

iEnglJsh  into  liatin. 

1.  Let  us  not  set  out  at  day-break.  2.  Let  them  not  pass  the 
winter  in  the  forest.  3.  The  Suevi  are  very  near  the  Helvetii. 
4.  He  exhorted  the  soldiers  to  march  ten  miles.  5.  I  will  ask 
the  consul  not  to  punish  the  slave.     6.  Some  are  good,  others  bad. 

7.  Of  the  two  men,  one  was  a  judge,  the  other  a  lieutenant. 

8.  We  wall  not  only  lead  out  the  legion  in  the  fourth  hour,  but 
also  seize  the  mountain-top  before  noon. 


o>Ko 


LESSON    XLIX. 

ABLATIVE    OF    MANNER,    ACCOMPANIMENT,    AND    SPECI- 
FICATION. 

Ablative  expressing  Manner,     Learn  N.  150. 
Ablative  denoting  Accompaniment,     Learn  N.  150,  a. 
Ablative  denoting  In  what  Respect  (Specification).     Learn  N. 
153 ;  36,  b. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  vis.     A.  61;  B.  41;  H.  66;  App.  7. 

Questions    and    Practice. 

When  must  cum  be  used  ?  What  question  does  the  Ablative  of  Manner 
answer?  the  Ablative  of  Specification?  Decline  mille  (the  noun).  Decline 
together  the  Latin  for  great  strength.  Give  a  complete  synopsis  of  vereor; 
jnbed.  What  prepositions  always  take  the  Ablative?  What  prepositions 
take  the  Ablative  or  the  Accusative?  What  adjectives  have  limus  in  the 
Suyerlative  ?     Give  the  Latin  tor  lie  is  older  ;    We  are  younger  (36,  h). 


LATIN   LESSONS.  89 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Consul  clara  voce  dixit.  2.  Miles  ducem  cum  tribus  legio- 
nibus  a  Gallia  venisse  audiverat.  3.  Omnes  sciuiit  regem  civitatem 
sapienter  et  bene  rexisse.  4.  Et  socii  et  auxilia  magna  vi  con- 
tendebant.  5.  Auxilium  a  Caesare  magno  fletti  petunt.  6.  Postero 
die  castra  movit  et  per  fines  Suevorum  iter  fecit.  7.  Dixit  Titum 
cum  equitibus  atque  (96,  a,  3)  auxiliis  ut  loca  superiora  occuparet 
missum  esse.  8.  Galli  reliquos  virttite  praecedunt.  9.  Legionem 
proxime  conscriptam  et  magnam  partem  equitatus  misit  ne  castra 
ab  hostibus  occuparentur.  10.  Magistrattis  modo  servili  obsides 
ptiniebant.  11.  Imperator  nomine  fuit.  12.  Pratres  majores  natU 
sunt.  13.  Locus  omnibus  rebus  castris  idoneus  est.  14.  Bello 
Gallico  navibus  atque  oppidis  hostium  potiti  sumus.  15.  Medi5 
in  colle  aciem  triplicem  quattuor  legionum  instruxit.  16.  Dicit 
Germanos  bellum  cum  Gallis  raultos  annos  gessisse.  17.  Ditior 
(36,  a)  agns  et  equis  fuit.  18.  Pueri  patri  omnibus  rebus  similes 
sunt.  19.  Miles  magna  vi  (149)  et  animi  et  corporis  laudabatur. 
20.  Dicit  laborem  omnia  victtirum  esse.  21.  Agmen  quinque 
millibus  peditum  claudebant.  22.  Hortemur  servos  ut  fideles 
sint. 

iEnellsh  into  liatin. 

1.  Let  us  surpass  all  in  strength  of  body.  2.  He  will  pitch 
(his)  camp  at  the  foot  of  a  very  high  mountain.  3.  They  broke 
up  camp  on  the  following  day.  4.  Let  us  not  march  with  Cassius. 
5.  The  line  of  battle  was  drawn  up  at  the  fifth  hour.  6.  The 
goddesses'  temples  are  larger  than  (those)  of  the  gods.  7.  With 
a  flood  of  tears  (great  weeping)  he  promised  that  the  leader  should 
send  back  the  hostages.  8.  The  allies  bring  up  the  rear  (close  the 
line  of  march)  with  two  thousand  horsemen. 


90  LATIN  LESSONS. 

LESSON    L. 
PRONOUNS:    PERSONAL,   REFLEXIVE,    POSSESSIVE. 

Learn  N.  45,  46,  47  &  Caution  ;  48  &  Caution  ;  108  & 
Kemaek  ;  111,  112,  113  &  a. 

Learn  the  Declension  of  ego,  tu,  sui,  meus,  tuus,  suus,  noster, 
vester.  A.  98,  a,  c;  99,  a;  B.  84,  85,  86;  H.  184,  185.  App. 
21,  22,  23. 

Questions   and    Practcce. 

Why  are  Reflexive  Pronouns  so  called  ?  Give  the  Latin  for  these  sen- 
tences, expressing  a  subject  in  each  :  let  us  teach  ourselves;  the  man  teaches 
himself;  you  teach  yourself ;  I  taught  myself ;  the  leaders  praise  them- 
selves;  the  girl  taught  herself;  the  auxiliaries  will  save  themselves;  sol- 
diers, save  yourselves.  Name  the  Personal  Pronouns.  Why  cannot  sui  be 
used  as  a  Personal  Pronoun  of  the  Third  Person  ?  How  is  the  lack  of  the 
Third  Personal  Pronoun  supplied  ?  In  the  sentence,  '^The  general  called  his 
lieutenant  and  praised  him  for  his  bravery,"  can  his,  him,  and  his  be  expressed 
by  sui  and  suus  1  Give  the  reason  for  your  answer.  Give  the  rule  for  the 
use  of  a  Possessive  Pronoun  (108  &  Remark).  How  can  you  tell  whether 
(after  a  transitive  verb,  as  give)  praemium  suum  means  his,  her,  its,  or  their 
reward  t  Express  in  Latin  (in  the  shortest  form):  our  men  are  hrave ;  he  en- 
couraged his  soldiers. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Nos  laudati  sumus ;  tti  punitus  es.  2.  Vos  nobis  inimici 
fuistis.     3.  Imperator  dixit  se  *  Aeduls  auxilium  pollicitum  esse. 

4.  Milites  se  *  neque  a  vobTs  neque  ab  imperatore  laudari  dicunt. 

5.  Vobis  dona  majora  poUicemur.  6.  Servi  tui  se  venttiros  esse 
ut  castra  nostra  munirent  dixerunt.  7.  Urbs  vestra  finibus  Aedu- 
orum  proxima  est.  8.  Nostn  castra  muro  altissimo  munient.  9. 
Tu  mihi  amicus  atque  utilis  fuisti.  10.  Majores  copiae  a  ducibus 
nostris  missae  esse  dicebantur.  11.  Ne  tui  hostes  vereantur.  12. 
German!  nulla  arma  sibi  ab  Ariovisto,  duce  suo,  data  esse  dixerunt. 
13.   Se  suaque  omnia  regi  dediderunt  {from  dedo).     14.  Dedite, 

♦  Translate  se  like  a  Personal  Pronoun  (that  is,  he,  they). 


LATIN  LESSONS.  91 

cives,  vos  vestraque  omnia  constili.  15.  Nos  (123,  d)  omnes  tibi 
carissimi  sumus.  16.  Alter  consulum  Caius,  alter  amicus  meus 
fuit.  17.  Duodecim  ex  civibus  (123,  a)  commeattis  causa  ad  urbem 
missi  erant.  18.  Et  tu  et  Marcus  Caesari  amicissimi  eritis 
(117,  d).  19.  Te  amicum,  me  hostem  appellant.  20.  Diximus 
proelium  vobis  omnibus  periculosum  fore.  21.  Sibi  sapientissi- 
mus  esse  videtur. 

£nglisli   into   liatln. 

1.  All  of  us  are  Romans.  2.  He  says  that  your  friends  are 
very  brave  soldiers.  3.  All  things  (express  in  two  ways)  have  been 
said  by  us.  4.  Surrender  yourself  and  all  your  goods  (things)  to 
the  brave  leader.  5.  We  think  the  bad  have  been  punished  by 
the  consuls.  6.  The  best  (men)  fight  best.  7.  He  says  that  you 
{singular)  deserve  well  of  (de)  the  state.  8.  Some  are  happy, 
others  most  wretched.  9.  The  men  have  lost  their  swords.  10. 
Soldiers,  you  have  conquered  your  enemies. 


LESSON    LI. 
PRONOUNS  :    DEMONSTRATIVE. 

Learn  N.  49  (entire)  ;  114,  1,  2,  a ;  48,  Caution. 
Learn  the  Declension  of  hie,  ille,  is,  idem,  ipse,  iste.     A. 
101  &  «;  B.  87,  88;  H.  186;  App.  24. 

Questions  and   Practice. 

Why  are  Demonstrative  PronouTis  so  called  ?  In  what  two  ways  may  they 
be  used  ?  Which  is  very  commonly  employed  as  the  Third  Personal  Pro- 
noun'i  Why  not  use  sui  instead?  .  Decline  is  in  the  Masculine  (Jie)\  in  the 
Feminine  {she)-,  in  the  Neuter  {it).  What  are  hie,  ille,  iste  often  called,  and 
why  ?  Decline  the  Latin  meaning  :  this  temple  ;  that  hoy  (yonder) ;  that  door 
(by  you) ;  the  citizen  himself ;  the  same  fact  (res).  When  must  his  and  their 
be  expressed  by  ejus  and  eorum  ^     When  by  suus  ? 


92  LATIN  LESSONS. 

EXERCISE. 

Tell  which  Demonstratives  are  used  as  Adjectives,  and  which  as 
Substantives  (that  is,  as  Personal  Pronouns). 

1.  Hic  vir  deos  immortales  esse  negat.  2.  Ilia  oppida  a  Caesare 
deleta  sunt.  3.  Nos  ipsi  eum  pugnare  vidimus.  4.  Haec  (109) 
a  consule  dicta  sunt.  5.  Dicit  has  legiones  laudem  maximam 
meritas  esse.  6.  Hi  tibi  inimici  erunt ;  illi  nobis  amici  sunt. 
7.  Eadem  dona  ad  Ariovistum  inissa  erunt.  8.  Is  servum  suum 
vocavit,  et  opus  ejus  laudavit.  9.  Virtus  eorum  magna  fuit. 
10.  Pollicetur  se  iis  arma  dattirum  esse.  11.  Hos  fortiter  pug- 
nantes  vidit.  12.  Dixit  eos  hostes  millia  passuum  quinque  secutos 
impedimentis  potitos  esse.  13.  Si  illi  vos  non  sequantur,  urbem 
non  expugnetis.  14.  Centum  milites  eo  tempore  habuit.  15.  Hic 
puer  idem  dicet.  16.  Dixistis  aciem  ipsam  impetum  sustinere 
non  potuisse.  17.  Tii  ipse,  ut  regem  videres,  in  ilia  urbe  quattuor 
dies  raansisti.  18.  Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae.  19. 
Ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt.  20.  Suis  finibus  eos  pro- 
hibent.  21.  Dicunt  eundem  virum  bella  multa  in  Italia  gessisse 
et  patriam  suam  servitiite  liberavisse. 

£nglisli   into   liatin* 

1.  These  books  are  heavy;  those  burdens  are  light.  2.  They 
sent  those  soldiers  under  the  yoke.  3.  At  day-break,  these  things 
{express  in  two  ways)  will  be  announced.  4.  That  house  is  one 
hundred  feet  long.  5.  The  same  camp  was  taken  by  them.  6. 
These  (men)  marched  from  the  deep  river  to  the  lofty  mountain. 
7.  The  temple  is  very  beautiful;  we  ourselves  have  seen  it. 


LESSON    LIT. 

PRONOUNS:    RELATIVE. 

Learn  N.  50,  115  &  a,  c.     Learn  the  Declension  of  Qui.     A. 
103  ;  B.  89 ;  H.  187  ;  App.  25. 


LATIN   LESSONS.  93 

Qui  (=  ut  ego,  tu,  is,  etc.)  in  Clauses  of  Purpose.  Learn 
N.  179,  a  ;  193,  4. 

Notice  that  the  Relative  Pronoun,  both  in  English  and  Latin,  is 
equivalent  to  a  Personal  Pronoun  +  a  connective. 

EXERCISE. 

Directions  for  the  analysis  of  Complex  Sentences,  194,  e, 
1.  Urbs,  quam  vides,  Eoraa  est.     2.  Ego,  qui  te  laudavi,  rex 
Bum.     3.  Milites,  a  quibus  oppidum  captum  erat,  fortes  fuerunt. 

4.  Copias,  quae  areem  expugnarent,  praemlsit.  5.  Inipemtor,  de 
quo  scrips!,  servos  omnes  secum  (53,  a)  transduxerat.  6.  Milites, 
quorum  virtus  magna  fuit,  ut  summum  montem  occuparent  a 
Caesare  missi  sunt.  7.  In  Galliam  decimam  legionem  mittamus, 
quae  oppida  omnia  bostium  deleat.  8.  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa 
(189,  b)  in  partes  tres,  quarum  iinam  incolunt  Belgae,  aliam  Aqui- 
tani,  tertiam  (ii  incolunt),  qui  ipsorum  lingua  Celtae,  nostra  Galli 
appellantur.  9.  Proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Ehenum  inco- 
lunt, quibuscum  bellum  gerunt.  10.  Eorum  una  pars  initium  capit 
a  flumine  Ebodano.  11.  Aquitani  ab  boc  fltimine  ad  Pyrenaeos 
montes  et  eam  partem  Oceani,  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam,  pertinent. 
12.  Pro  multitudine  bominum  angustos  se  fines  babere  arbitra- 
bantur,  qui  in  longitudinem  millia  passuum  ducenta  et  quadraginta, 
in  latitudinem  centum  et  octoginta  patSbant.  13.  Eum  bortatus 
est  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  (112,  a)  occuparet,  quod  pater  ante 
babuerat.  14.  Dux  legiones,  quarum  virtute  urbs  servata  erat, 
laudavit.  15.  Puellae,  quas  te  vidisse  dixisti,  filiae  meae  sunt. 
16.  De  secunda  vigilia  equites  eodem  itinere,  quo  hostes  fugerant, 
profecti  sunt. 

£nglisli   into    liatin. 

1.  That  bouse  (115,  c)  you  see  is  mine.  2.  Tbe  man  who  came 
to  see  you  was  ray  friend.  3.  They  had  come  to  ask  me  my  opin- 
ion about  peace.    4.  I  informed  him  concerning  the  enemy's  attack. 

5.  Let  us  not  say  these  things.  6.  We  will  send  Caius  to  get 
possession  of  the  heavy  baggage.  7.  He  has  brought  (duc6)  with 
him  tbe  hostages  which  he  has  received  from  the  Aquitani. 


94  LATIN   LESSONS. 

LESSON    LIIL 

PRONOUNS:   INTERROGATIVE;  INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 

Learn  N.  51  (entire).  Learn  the  Declension  of  the  Interroga- 
tives  Quis  (^Substantive)  and  Qui  (^Adjective).  A.  104  &  a;  B.  90; 
H.  188  ;  App.  26. 

Single  Questions.     Learn  N.  100,  101  &  «,  Hemakk. 

Study  the  Examples  given  under  the  Notes /or  this  Lesson, 

Questions. 

What  is  the  Latin  for  :  who  praises  Tne  ?  what  man  praises  me  ?  What  is 
the  difference  in  meaning  between  quis  (qui)  and  uter  ?  (43,  b;  51,  Caution.) 
How  many  words  are  spelled  ne?  how  is  each  used  ?  (197,  4.)  What  words 
are  always  Enclitics?  (195,  3.)  When  is  cum  an  Enclitic?  (53,  a.)  What 
effect  has  an  Enclitic  upon  accent  ?  Pronounce  imperatdribusque ;  consu- 
lesne.  How  are  yes  and  no  usually  expressed  ?  Is  this  correct ;  quisue 
venit  1    Give  the  Rule  for  the  use  of  the  Relative  Pronoun. 

EXERCISE. 

Tell  which  of  these  sentences  are  Declaratory ;  Interrogative ; 
Imperative*  Analyze  each.  An  Interrogative  or  Imperative  sen^ 
tence  should  he  analyzed  as  though  it  were  Declaratory ;  as,  "What 
did  that  man  say  ?  "  =  "  That  man  said  what  ?  " 

1.  Quo  {adverb)  mllites  dticentur?  2.  Quis  hostes  fugientes 
veretur?  3.  TJnde  venistis?  4.  Quod  teinplum  vides?  5.  Quam 
urbem  ceperatis?  6.  Utram  in  partem  flurnen  fluit?  7.  Nonne  so- 
lein  orientem  videtis?  8.  Quid  ille,  quern  vidistis,  dixit?  9.  Quod 
periculum  vitabis?  10.  Militesne  ut  fortes  essent  hortati  sunt? 
11.  Ubi  hae  copiae  victae  erant  ?  12.  Uter  consulum  amicus 
vester  est  ?  13.  Num  servus  felix  esse  potest  ?  14.  Cur  haec 
dixisti?  15.  Quamobrem  {or  quam  ob  rem)  urbem  non  oppugna- 
vit  ?  16.  Cur  hoc  difficile  est?  17.  Quae  civitates  ut  pacem 
peterent  ad  te  veniebant?     18.   Dicit  hostes  perterritos  fugisse. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  95 

19.  Sperat  equites  exercitum  fugientem  secutos  numeruin  magnum 
liostium  interfecturos  esse.  20.  Nonne  hostes  castrls  nostris 
potiti  nos  inierficient  ?  21.  Servus,  cui  arma  data  erant,  se  non 
pugnattirum  esse  dixit.  22.  Estiie  sapiens  ?  Non  est.  23. 
Hostesne  vicistis  ?  Vicimus.  24.  Nonne  imperator  vos  nomina 
vestra  rogavit  ?  25.  Ne  fugiamus ;  et  multi  et  fortes  sumus. 
26.  Duxne  legionem  ne  fugeret  liortatus  erat?  27.  Sequimini, 
socil,  agmen  fagiens,  quod  neque  magnum  neque  forte  est.  28. 
Quemadmodum  (or  quem  ad  modura)  castris  Ariovisti  potiri  pos- 
sum us  ?  29.  Quem  ad  modum  me  tibi  amicum  facere  potes  ? 
30.  German!  Eomanos  sibi  obsides  poUicitos  fidem  non  servare 
dicunt. 

£nglisli   into    liatln. 

1.  Who  is  that  man  ?  2.  What  boy  is  this  ?  3.  Is  he  at  home  ? 
4.  Isn't  Caesar  brave?  5.  This  town  cannot  be  stormed,  can  it? 
6.  Why  have  the  men  not  come?  7.  Which  of  the  (two)  boys 
is  more  like  his  father?  8.  Which  (of  several)  is  most  unlike  her 
mother?  9.  Those  boys  have  taught  themselves  (their)  letters. 
10.  Let 's  ask  the  farmer  the  hoise's  name. 


-o^i*io«— 


LESSON    LIV. 
PRONOUNS:    INDEFINITE;    DOUBLE   QUESTIONS. 

Learn  N.  52  (entire).  Learn  the  Declension  of  aliquis,  si 
quia,  ne  quis  (both  as  Substantives  and  Adjectives),  A.  105,  d ; 
B.  91 ;  IL  190,  1,  2 ;  App.  27.  Learn,  also,  the  Declension  of 
quisque,  quidam,  N.  52,  d ;  53,  c. 

Double  Questions.     Learn  N.  101,  h. 

Notice  that  the  simple  forms  of  the  Indefinite  Pronouns  (quis, 
qui)  are  not  used  in  this  Lesson.      (See  N.  52.) 


96  LATIN   LESSONS. 


Questions   and    Practice. 

How  does  the  declension  of  aliquis  and  aliqui  differ  from  that  of  quis  and 
qui  ?  What  other  Indefinite  Pronouns  have  the  same  peculiarity  ?  Which 
may  be  written  as  separate  words,  and  why  ?  Give  the  exact  meaning  of 
aliquis.  What  does  quisque  ditissimus  mean  ?  (53,  b.)  Decline  the  Latin 
meaning :  each  soldier  ;  a  certain  animal.  Why  is  utrum  a  suitable  particle 
to  introduce  a  Double  Question  ?  Give  the  Latin  for  :  are  we  hrave,  or  not  1 
Also  for  these  sentences  (expressing  the  subject  in  each):  each  loves  himself ; 
he  teaches  him;  she  praises  herself ;  they  conquer  them  ;  they  (feminine)  teach 
themselves;  you  praise  yourself ;  they  themselves  praise  you. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Inter  se  (53,  (t)  cohortati  sunt.  2.  Aliquis  Caium  laudabit. 
3.  Si  quern  pugnantem  videat,  eum  laudet.  4.  Hortatus  est  milites 
ne  quod  telum  rejicerent.  5.  Ad  puerum,  ctijus  pater  ii^terfectus 
erat,  aliquod  donura  misit.  6.  Si  qui  fugiant,  eos  interficite.  7. 
Quidam  dixit  nattiram  hominibus  vitam  breviorem  quam  permultis 
animalibus  dedisse.  8.  (^^uisque  nobilissimus  patriam  suam  servabit. 
9.  Si  quod  templum  aedificatum  esset,  deletum  esset.  10.  Cujus 
virtus  magna  fuit?  11.  Si  quibus  inimlcus  sit,  consul  non  creetur. 
12.  Aliqua  castra  a  nostiis  capta  sunt.  13.  Eos  cohortatur,  ne 
quis  vereatur.  14.  Si  quis  perlculo  perterritus  domi  mansisset, 
eum  punlvissemus.  15.  Quendam  delegit,  quern  ad  exercitum 
mitteret  (179,  «).  16.  Navem  metti  relinquebant.  17.  LegatI  a 
senatu  Eomano  missi  interficiuntur.  18.  Omnes  virttitem  civium,  a 
quibus  patria  servata  est,  et  laudant  et  mirantur.  19.  Utrum  domI 
an  in  Gallia  est?  20.  Utrum  Eomanus  es,  annon?  21.  Num 
mihi  inimicl  erunt  ?  22.  Utrum  rex  dona  accepit,  an  earemisit? 
23.  Dixit  se  neque  fide  neque  jiirejurando  teneii  posse.  24.  Plus 
imperil  quam  virttitis  habere  dicitur.  25.  Summa  vi  proelium  a 
dextro  cornti  commissum  est  ab  equitibus,  qui  a  locis  superiori- 
bus  venerant.  26.  PutavistI  queraque  ditissimum  mlliti  pecuniam 
daturum  esse.  27.  Nuntiat  milites  permultos  a  manu  parva 
supemtos  esse.  28.  Legatio  ab  civitate  venit,  quae  eum  ne  bei- 
lum  gereret  bortaretur.    ^9.  Qui  sunt  viri,  quos  secum  babuit  ^ 


LATIN   LESSONS.  97 


English  into  liatin. 


1.  Whom  did  you  send  to  the  camp  ?  2.  Some  one  has  given 
a  sword  to  each  sohlier.  3.  If  he  had  said  anything,  he  would 
have  been  punished.  4.  He  has  stormed  a  town,  fortified  both  by 
nature  and  by  art  (hand).  5.  Didn't  they  say  those  things,  which 
were  not  true  (verus)  ?  6.  Every  man  said  that  he  would  come 
at  sunset.  7.  Let  us  not  choose  any  commander.  8.  Having  fol- 
lowed the  line  of  march  for  three  miles,  they  are  not  able  to  get 
possession  of  the  baggage  which  they  have  lost. 


LESSON    LV. 

PLACE:    EXCEPTIONS. 

Learn  N.  159  &  a,  5,  c,  Eemark  1. 

Eemember  that,  to  express  Place  tvhere,  whence,  and 
whither,  Prepositions  are  required,  as  in  Lesson  XXXIX.  The 
exceptions  are  those  classes  of  nouns  mentioned  in  the  Notes  on 
this  Lesson.  Study  the  Eule  (159,  c),  in  connection  with  the 
Examples  under  it,  so  as  to  be  able  to  apply  it  without  hesitation. 

Questions   and    Practice. 

Many  of  the  proper  nouns  used  are  not  in  the  Vocabulary/,  but  under  159. 
Notice  that  many  names  of  towns  have  no  Singular. 

What  is  meant  by  the  Locative  case?  In  what  Declensions  is  it  found? 
What  cases  does  it  resemble  in  form  ?  What  nouns  omit  the  preposition  to 
express  place  ?  Do  they  illustrate  the  regular,  or  the  exceptional,  use  ?  When 
must  prepositions  be  used  with  Rdma,  Capua,  etc.  ?  Give  the  Latin  for  :  he  is 
at  home  ;  we  are  in  Gaul ;  they  set  out  from  the  camp  ;  he  came  from  Rome  ; 
there  is  a  temple  in  the  city  ;  he  is  in  Capua  ;  they  marched  from  the  river  to 
Lyons ;  he  will  be  at  Veii  ;  they  have  come  to  Carthage  ;  we  will  march  from 
Veii  to  the  camp  ;  he  passed  the  winter  in  the  neighborhood  of  Rome  ;  we  have 
eome  from  the  vicinity  of  A  thens  ;  let  us  march  into  the  country. 

7 


98  LATIN   LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  In  ulteriore  Gallia  duas  legiones,  quae  in  provincia  citeriore 
proxime  conscriptae  erant,  reliquit.  2.  Dixit  se  cum  tribus  co- 
liortibus  Yeios  profecttirum  (199,  2)  de  secunda  vigilia.  3.  Dicit 
exercitum  Londinium  urbem  Britanniae  maximam  prima  Itice  iter 
facttirum.  4.  Ex  Cisalpina  Gallia  ad  Caesarem,  qui  eo  tempore 
Vesontione  fuit,  legati  missi  sunt.  5.  Venite,  amici,  Bibracte. 
6.  Noviodtino,  oppido  Aeduorum,  Lugdtinum  venit.  7.  Utrum 
Sardibus  an  Eomae  mortui  sunt?  8.  Capuaene  natus  es  ?  9. 
Nonne  flumina  Galliae  Transalpinae  longiora  quam  Britanniae 
sunt?  10.  Quot  cohortes  in  legione  sunt?  11.  Utrum  Caesar 
ad  Noviodtinum  hiemabit,  annon?  12.  Utrum  domum  an  rus 
proficiscemur  ?  13.  Quis  mecum  Athenas  ibit  (will  go)  ?  14. 
Num  Bibracte  una  legione  expugnare  potes  ?  15.  Kartliagine 
extrema  (110,  h)  hieme  Eomam  venit.  16.  Loci  natura  Helvetii 
continentur;  una  ex  parte  fltimine  Eheno,  latissimo  atque  altis- 
simo,  qui  agrum  Helvetiura  a  Germanis  dividit ;  altera  ex  parte, 
monte  Jura  (3,  &  Eemark  1)  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  efc 
Helvetios;  tertia,  lacti  Lemanno  et  fltimine  Eliodano,  qui  pro- 
vinciam  nostram  ab  Helvetiis  dividit. 


LESSON    LVL 

IRREGULAR  VERBS:    FERO;    GENITIVE  AFTER  SUM. 

Learn  N.  83,  86.  Learn  the  Conjugation  of  Fero,  Active  and 
Passive.     A.  139;  B.  129;  H.  292;  App.  42. 

Genitive  after  Sum.     Learn  N.  126,  entire. 

Infinitive  as  Subject.  Learn  36,  c,  Eemark,  page  10;  also 
N.  109,  b  ;  165,  a,     Eead  carefully  53,  55,  page  15. 

Study  the  Examples  under  the  Notes /<;/•  this  Lesson. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  99 


Questions   and    Practice. 

To  T^hat  Conjugation  (in  general)  does  fero  belong  ?  How  would  the  Present 
Indicative  (Active  and  Passive)  be  conjugated,  if  fero  were  like  rego  1  What 
is  the  chief  irregularity  of  ferO  ?  (86,  a. )  What  would  these  forms  be,  if  regu- 
lar :  ferre  %  fer  %  ferreni  ?  fertor  ?  ferier  ?  ferri  ?  What  is  the  Latin  for  : 
this  horse  is  Caesar's  ?  What  relation  does  Caesar's  express  ?  Analyze  this 
English  sentence  :  to  die  for  one's  country  is  noble.  Wliat  would  be  the  gender 
of  noble  in  Latin  ?    Why  ? 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Onus  grave  a  servo  timido  fertur.  2.  Dicit  injtirias  latas 
esse.  3.  Nos  omnes  scimus  arma  a  servis  ferri.  4.  Socii  se 
castris  auxiliura  iion  lattiros  esse  dixerunt.  5.  Equi  armaque 
conferentur.  6.  Hostes  tinum  impetum  iiostrorum  ferre  non  po- 
terant.  7.  Dona  atque  praemia  ad  imperatorem  lata  sunt.  8.  Fer, 
puer,  has  littcras  ad  Caesarem.  9.  Ferre  injtirias  est  viri  fortis. 
10.  Haec  domus  Caesaris  fuit.  11.  Putat  eos  impedimenta  in 
unum  locum  contulisse.  12.  Omnia  sunt  victoris.  13.  Impera- 
toris  est  jubere.  14.  Militis  Eomani  est  aut  vincere  aut  mori. 
15.  Onera  feramus.  16.  Si  suis  auxilium  tulissent,  laudati  essent. 
17.  Haec  legio  Marci  est.  18.  Iter  longum  facere  non  facile  est. 
19.  Utrum  regem  malum  feremus,  annon?  20.  Dicit  judicium  de 
bello  ducis  esse.  21.  Hie  dixit  hos  agros  agricolarum  fuisse. 
22.  De  his  duobus  generibus  alterum  est  servorum,  alterum 
civium.  23.  Fortiter  pugnare  ducis  boni  est.  24.  Consulem 
pejorem  tuleratis.  25.  Conferte,  cives,  arma  in  hunc  locum.  26. 
Esse  melius  quam  videri  est. 

Englisli  into  liatin. 

1.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  good  king  to  rule  wisely.  2.  We  have 
borne  the  gift  to  the  city.  3.  He  bears  the  injury  that  he  may  be 
thought  brave.  4.  Let  us  carry  weapons.  5.  He  says  that  the 
general  has  ordered  the  baggage  to  be  collected.  6.  To  call 
together  the  men  was  difficult.  7.  To  free  the  camp  from  danger 
was  very  easy.    8.  These  arms  are  mine.    9.  That  house  is  yours. 


100  LATIN  LESSONS. 

10.  To  fight  as  bravely  as  possible  is  the  legion's  duty.  11.  These 
arms  cannot  be  carried  by  a  small  man.  12.  To  send  corn  to  the 
army  was  more  useful  than  to  promise  auxiliaries. 

LESSON    LVII. 
DATIVE  WITH  COMPOUND  VERBS. 

Learn  N.  133.  Notice  that  the  Dative  thus  used  is  the  Indirect 
Object, 

Learn  the  Principal  Parts  of  these  Compounds  of  fero,  which 
are  the  ones  most  commonly  used :  affero  ;  confer 6  ;  differo  ; 
inf ero ;  ref ero ;  also  of  tollo.  Notice  that  the  Perfect  and  Supine 
of  tollo  are  taken  from  suffer©,  but  used  with  a  different  meaning. 

Learn  N.  1  (6),  and  apply  it  to  the  compounds  of  fero. 

General    Questions. 

What  cases  do  prepositions  (used  alone)  take  ?  What  prepositions  are  used 
in  compound  verbs  taking  the  Dative  ?  What  is  the  meaning  of  assimilation  t 
How  does  it  appear  in  afferd  ?  conferd  ?  infera  ?  possum  I  How  did  the 
Romans  express  you  and  I  ?  Caius  and  I  ?  (193,  8.)  Give  a  synopsis,  Active 
and  Passive,  of  ferC. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Et  ego  et  tti  Galliae  bellum  intulimus  (117,  d).  2.  Caesar 
exercitui  praefuit.  3.  Omnibus  virtute  praestant.  4.  Si  quid 
mihi  accidat,  Roma  expugnetur.  5.  Legioni,  quam  conscripserat, 
Caium  praefecit.  6.  Hi  omnes  lingua  legibusque  inter  se  differunt. 
7.  Bellum  patriae  nostrae  a  cTvibus  pessimis  infertur.  8.  Galliae 
bellum  infer.  9.  Dicunt  se  bellum  noblscum  gesttiros  esse.  10. 
Navibus  eum  praeficiemus.  11.  Litterae  mihi  allatae  sunt.  12. 
Ego  et  Caius  regi  haec  nuntiabimus.  13.  Utrum  oppido  an  castris 
legatus  praeest?  14.  Si  tu  et  amicus  mens  vulnemti  essetis,  ego 
et  frater  tuns  iiifelicissimi   fuissemus.      15.  Spes    fugae    sublata 


LATIN  LESSONS.  J.Ol 

erat.  16.  Dicit  spem  victoriae  ab  imperatore  sublatam  esse. 
17.  Equi  omnium  ut  spes  fugae  toUeretur  remoti  sunt.  18.  Dona 
regis  ab  urbe  referent.  19.  Geneva  profecti  estis  ut  per  provinciam 
nostram  iter  faceretis,  atque  bellum  sociis  nostris  inferre  possetis. 
20.  Ne  spem  fugae  tollamus. 

Englisli   into   liatin. 

1.  This  (tiling)  seems  to  be  easier.  2.  Let  us  make  war  upon 
the  enemies  of  the  state.  3.  These  messages  were  brought  to 
Caesar.  4.  We  will  send  the  tenth  legion  home,  lest  anything 
should  happen  to  the  city.  5.  Are  you  in  command  of  this  camp, 
or  not?  6.  We  differ  from  each  other  in  many  respects  (res). 
7.  We  used  to  be  in  command  of  the  ships.  8.  The  leader  and  I 
have  sent  the  cohort  to  Eome. 


LESSON    LVIIL 

IRREGULAR  VERBS:  EO;  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

Learn  N.  87.  Learn  the  Conjugation  of  E6.  A.  141 ;  B.  132; 
H.  295  ;  App.  43. 

Compounds  of  E5.     Learn  N.  87,  Eemakk. 

Conditional  Sentences.  The  general  principles  have  been 
given  in  Lesson  XXL,  and  should  now  be  reviewed.  Learn  N. 
174,  175  (entire). 

Questions. 

E6 :  When  does  i  become  e  ?    What  would  the  Future  be,  if  not  Ibo  ? 
Decline  the  Present  Participle.     Tell  the  quantity  of  i  in:  ibunt;   itarus 
itH ;  ibam ;  irem.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  adeO  ;  ineo ;  transeO ;  subeo 

What  tenses  does  the  Subjunctive  lack  ?  How  is  this  lack  supplied  in  Con- 
ditional Sentences  ?  Is  the  Conclusion  a  principal,  or  subordinate,  clause ' 
Tell  what  time  and  kind  of  statement  is  expressed  in  each  of  the  following  sen 
tences;  also  what  mode  and  tense  would  be  required  in  Latin  to  express  each 


102  LATIN  LESSONS. 

verb:  if  he  were  now  here,  he  would  he  happy  ;  he  would  have  been  successful, 
if  he  had  been  diligent  j  if  he  calledj,  he  found  him  ;  if  the  hell  should  ring 
{Jbefore  you  start),  you  would  he  late  ;  if  he  saw  the  danger  {now),  we  should  he 
glad  ;  if  he  had  worked,  he  would  now  he  rich. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Jure  (149)  belli  stipendiam  cap  it,  quod  victores  victis  impo- 
nere  consuerunt  (79,  4).*  2.  Dicit  se  mecum  iturum  esse.  3. 
Yoblscum  ibimus ;  quibuscum  ibat  ?  4.  Eomamne  iemnt  (=  ive- 
runt)?  5.  Profectus  est  ut  domum  iret.  6.  Eamus;  ite;  ibitis ; 
aunt;  iit.  7.  Utrum  ibatis  an  veniebatis?  8.  Si  Karthaginem 
ivissent,  interfecti  essent.  9.  Si  pericula  omnia  subeant,  laudem 
mereantur.  10.  Si  Galliam  vicit,  Gallis  victis  stipendium  jure 
belli  imposuit.  11.  Titum  urbi  praeficiamus.  12.  Consilia  de 
sura  mis  rebus  saepissime  ineunt.  13.  Si  insulam  adeat,  barbari 
eum  interficiant.  14.  Eltimen  transire  difficillimum  fuit.  15. 
Dixit   eos  cum  millibus  hominum  quinque  Ehenum  transittiros. 

16.  Dicit  Helvetios  obsides  accipere,  non  dare,  consuesse  (79,  4). 

17.  Si  nuntius  Caesari  non  allatus  sit,  cum  decima  legione  sola  ad 
castra  eat.  18.  Si  flumen  cum  omnibus  copiis  transirent,  raaximo 
in  periculo  essemus.  19.  Omnes  impetus  barbarorum  diutissime 
sustinuerunt.     20.  Si  injTirias  dititius  tulissetis,  nunc  servi  essetis. 

Englisli   into   L.atin. 

1.  Let  him  go  ;  boy,  go;  boys,  go.  2.  If  he  had  come,  he  would 
have  seen  and  conquered.  3.  Let  us  undergo  all  perils.  4.  We 
will  cross  the  river  Ehone  with  the  infantry.  5.  If  he  should  come 
to  Eome  as  often  as  possible,  he  would  be  a  wiser  man.  6.  The 
conquered  do  not  impose  tribute  on  the  conquerors.  7.  War  has 
been  made  on  Gaul,  and  carried  on  with  the  Gauls.  8.  If  any 
one  should  go  to  see  the  consul,  he  would  receive  a  gift.  9.  This 
soldier  is  veiy  like  that  (one).  10.  Peace  is  very  unlike  war  in 
all  respects  (res). 

*  See  also  91,  Remark  ;  98,  d* 


LATIN  LESSONS.  103 

LESSON    LIX. 

ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE. 
Learn  N.  157,  entire.     Study  carefully  tlie  Examples. 

Questions  and  Practice. 

What  does  absolute  mean  ?  What  three  uses  has  the  English  Independent 
Case  (8,  d,  page  2),  with  Participles  ?  In  what  three  ways  may  the  Ablative 
Absolute  be  expressed  ?  Give  the  Latin  for:  the  camp  having  been  fortified,  he 
came  to  Rome;  the  soldiers  being  brave,  the  enemy  were  conquered;  Caesar 
being  the  judge,  you  loill  be  punished.  How  do  these  sentences  (when  ex- 
pressed in  Latin)  differ  from  the  English?  Why?  When  must  the  Ablative 
Absolute  be  usedt  \^Ans.  (Remark  1.)  To  express  the  Perfect  Active  Parti- 
ciple of  any  verb,  not  Deponent ;  as,  having  seen,  having  heard."]  To  what  is 
the  Ablative  Absolute  usually  equivalent?  (Remark  2.)  Translate,  in  at 
least  three  ways  :  hostibus  victis,  castris  potiti  sumus. 

EXERCISE. 

Translate  these  sentences  in  as  many  ways  as  you  can.  Remember 
that  the  Ablative  Absolute  can  generally  be  best  translated  by  a 
clause. 

1.  Cneio  Pompeio  et  Marco  Crasso  consulibus,  mortuus  est. 
2.  Obsidibus  traditis,  Caesar  in  fines  Aeduorum  contendit.  3. 
Nullo  hoste  prohibente,  legionem  in  provinciam  perduxit.  4.  Cae- 
sar, loco  castris  idoneo  capto,  Crassum  ad  fiumen  Ehenum  praemlsit. 
5.  Hostes  apud  oppidum  morati,  agrosque  Eemorum  populati, 
omnibus  vicis  aedificiisque  incensis,  ad  castra  Caesaris  contende- 
runt.  6.  His  verbis  auditis,  legati  se  pacem  cum  populo  Eomano 
non  confirmattiros  dixerunt.  7.  Praesidio  relicto  castris,  de  tertia 
vigilia  mecum  profectus  est.  8.  Nuntiis  acceptis,  consules  cuique 
praemium  majus  poUicentur.  9.  Prima  legione  superata,  impedi- 
mentisque  ab  hostibus  captis,  aliae  legiones  fugerunt.  10.  Aeduis 
petentibus,  victores  se  victis  agros  dattiros  dixerunt.  11.  Oppido 
capto,  castra  sub  monte  ponit.     12.  Imperator,  exercitu  traducto, 


104  LATIN  LESSONS. 

ad  Genevam  quinque  dies  morabitur.  13.  AudTverat  barbaros, 
millia  passuura  tria  nostros  sectitos,  ab  equitibus  pulsos  esse.  14. 
Militibus  in  unum  locum  convocatis,  orationem  longam  habuistl. 
15.  Hoc  concilio  dimisso,  iidem  principes,  qui  ad  Caesarem  ante 
(95)  venerant,  se  baec  ad  suos  relaturos  dixerunt.  16.  Tempore 
brevissimo,  non  mansimus. 

Englisli   into   Ijatln. 

1.  Having  seen  the  city,  he  went  to  the  camp.  2.  Having 
heard  the  voice  of  the  general,  he  fled  as  quickly  as  possible. 
3.  Having  promised  corn  to  the  legion,  he  did  not  give  it.  4. 
Having  fortified  that  place,  they  sent  legates  to  seek  peace.  5.  Hav- 
ing set-fire-to  the  city,  the  barbarians  crossed  the  Ehone. 
Trayidate  these  sentences  into,  Latin,  as  Simple  seiitences  :  — 
6.  When  this  speech  had  been  heard,  aU  praised  the  consul. 
7.  After  the  city  had  been  freed  from  the  fear  of  slavery,  we  all 
said  that  Pompey  deserved  a  great  reward.  8.  When  the  cities 
have  been  destroyed,  we  shall  go  home.  9.  After  the  king  had 
been  killed,  the  citizens  elected  Caius  consul.  . 


LESSON    LX. 

PERIPHRASTIC   CONJUGATIONS  ;    DATIYE  OF  AGENT. 

Learn  N".  82  (omitting  Eemark).     Learn  the  synopsis  of  the 
Periphrastic  Conjugations  (Active  and  Passive)  of  amo.     A.  129 ; 
B.  115 ;  H.  233,  234 ;  App.  39,  a,  h. 
Xiative  of  Agent.     Learn  N.  136. 

Questions    and    Practice. 

What  does  Periphrasl^ic  mean  ?  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  Periphrastic  Con- 
jugations, Active  and  Passive,  of  fero  ;  facio.  How  is  the  real  agent  ex- 
pressed \    What  does  the  Dative  of  Agent  express,  that  the  Ablative  does  not  ? 


LATIN  LESSONS.  105 

Express,  in  Latin :  we  must  carry  these  burdens.  What  name  is  given  to  Per- 
fect tenses  formed  like  dedi,  steti,  pepuli  ?  (79,  6.)  Translate:  vereor  ne 
interficiatur ;  veretur  ut  veniat  (179,  e).  Explain  the  meaning  of  n6 
and  ut  in  these  sentences.  How  do  impedimenta  and  sarcinae  differ  in 
meaning  ? 

EXERCISE. 

(^Special  Examples,  page  267.) 

1.  Hie  liber  milii  legendus  est.  2.  Litteras  ad  fratrem  missu- 
rus  eram.  3.  Quam  celerrime  iter  vobTs  faciendum  erit.  4.  Dicit 
flumen  sibi  transeundum  esse.  5.  De  secunda  vigilia  Gene- 
van! profecttiri  sumus.  6.  Equites,  qui  in  fines  Aeduorum 
commeattis  causa  iverurit,  exspectandi  sunt.  7-.  His  rebus  cog- 
nitis,  Caesarem  |ibi  certiorem  faciendum  esse  de  adventu  hostium 
dixit.  8.  Nonne  castra  oppugnaturl  fuistis?  9.  Utrum  hi  servi 
imperatori  interficiendi  an  liberandi  sunt?  10.  Num  Ehenum 
transittiri  estis  ?  11.  Quid  faciendum  fuit?  12.  Milites  duci 
cohortandi  erant  (80,  Eemark  2).  13.  Existiniat,  agris  Kemo- 
rum  vastatis,  Titum,  qui  oppidum  expugnet,  cum  tertia  legione 
mittendum  esse.  14.  Helvetii  populo  Eomano  bellum  illattiri 
sunt.  15.  Veriti  estis  ne  hostes  nostros  vincerent.  16.  Quis 
veretur  ne  urbs  nostra  a  civibus  deleatur?  17.  Delenda  est  Kar- 
thago.  18.  Dixitne  se  vereri  ut  Crassus  consul  crearetur  ?  19. 
Domum  itiirus  es ;  domus  aedificanda  fuit. 

• 

Englisli   into   Liatin. 

1.  I  am  going  to  follow  the  fleeing  enemy.  2.  They  intended 
to  find  out  these  things.  3.  We  were  about  to  carry  on  war  with 
you.  4.  He  says  that  he  must  make  war  on  the  state.  5.  We 
must  carry  on  many  wars  in  Gaul.  6.  They  will  have  to  march 
through  Italy.  7.  Crassus  must  inform  Caesar  about  these  mat- 
ters (rgs).  8.  The  tenth  legion  must  be  sent  to  get  possession  of 
the  light-baggage.  9.  Were  they  not  going  to  set  fire  to  all  the 
buildings  ?  10.  Having  read  the  book  through  (perlego),  the  boy 
wrote  a  letter  to  his  friend  about  it. 


106  LATIN  LESSONS. 


LESSON    LXI. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS:  FIO;   SUBJUNCTIVE  EXPRESSING  A 
WISH. 

Learn  N.  88  (entire).  Learn  the  Conjugation  of  Fio.  A.  142 ; 
B.  131;  H.  294;  App.  44. 

Subjunctive  eocpressing  a  Wish,     Learn  N.  176  (entire). 

Notice  :  (1)  That  compounds  of  facio  are  formed  and  conjugated  in  two 
different  ways  (Remark  under  N.  88);  (2)  That  a  clause  containing  a  wish 
expresses  something  impossible  (past  or  present)  or  possible  (future). 

The  general  principles  of  Indirect  Cotnmand  have^ already  been  given. 

Review  N.  164,  c  &  Remark;  also  learn  N.  178  k  Caution  1. 

Questions    and    Practice. 

What  are  the  principal  parts  of  facid,  Active  and  Passive;  also  of  these 
compounds  (in  both  Voices):  con  +  facio ;  bene  +  faciC ;  inter  +  facid  ? 
Conjugate  the  Imperative,  Active  and  Passive,  of  fero.  Wliat  verbs  form 
the  Second  Person  Singular,  of  the  Present  Imperative  Active,  like  ferd  ? 
(79,  5.)  Give  the  Second  Person  Singular  of  the  Present  Imperative  and  the 
Future  Indicative  (both  Voices)  of  facio  and  the  compounds  mentioned  in  the 
first  question.  When  must  ne  the  adverb  be  used?  {Ans.  In  negative  com- 
mands and  wishes.)  When  must  ne  the  conjunction  be  used  ?  {Ans.  In  nega- 
tive purposes.)  When  must  n6  the  enclitic  be  used  ?  What  two  meanings 
may  fid  have  ?  • 

EXERCISE. 

1,  Haec  nullo  modo  fieri  possunt.  2.  Hi  viri  eonsules  fient. 
3.  Copias,  Cai,  edtic  et  cum  hostibus  pugna.  4.  Imperator  fis; 
naves  flebant.  5.  Eogavit  ut  ilia  quam  piiinum  fierent.  6.  Ne 
impetus  in  hostes  fiat.  7.  Utinam  consul  factus  esset !  8.  Ne 
moriamur;  utinam  Caesar  viveret !  9.  Ferte,  servi,  haec  arma  ad 
regem  vestrum.  10.  Die,  puer,  haec  patii  tuo.  11.  Si  Galli 
Romanos  vicissent,  nunc  in  servittite  teneremur.  12.  Ne  Belgis 
bellum  inferant,  ne  vincantur.  13.  Belgas  plurimos  manti  minima 
victtiri  sumus.     14.  Nonne  Marcus  veretur  ne  barbari  urbe  poti- 


LATIN  LESSONS.  107 

antur?  15.  Utinam  vos  ipsi  amici  Caesaris  essetis  !  16.  Nuntius, 
quern  duces  praemiserant,  nos  certiores  fecit  Belgas,  omnibus 
portis  oppidi  clausis,  inter  s6  cohortan  ne  arma  trSderent. 

Englisli  into  liatin. 

1.  Let  nothing  (nS  quis)  be  done  without  the  aid  of  Caesar. 
2.  In  the  consulship  of  Cicero  and  Antonius,  these  men  made  war 
upon  the  state.  3.  Bring  (affero)  me  the  books,  Antonius,  that 
I  may  read.  4.  Let  the  messages  be  carried  from  Geneva  to  the 
camp.  5.  Would  that  they  were  better  citizens !  6.  Let  us  not 
order  the  camp  to  be  broken  up.  7.  He  says  that  this  happens 
very  often.  8.  Let  (there)  be  (193,  6)  light;  (there)  was  light. 
9.  Go,  slave;  tell  these  things  to  your  king.  10.  Having  over- 
come the  forces  of  the  Gauls,  he  received  the  hostages  that  they 
had  promised. 


LESSON    LXIL 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  :    VOLO  AND  ITS  COMPOUNDS. 
Learn  N.  89;  90.     Learn  the    Conjugation  of  Vol6;   N616; 
Maio.     A.  138;  B.  130;   H.  293;  App.  45. 

Questions  and   Practice. 

Tell  what  these  forms  would  be,  if  vol6  and  its  compounds  were  conjugated 
like  rego  :  vis  ;  vult ;  nolle ;  velim ;  vellet ;  malle ;  volumus ;  velle ; 
vultis.  Of  what  are  maid  and  nolo  compoimded  ?  Conjugate  the  Imperative 
of  faciO  (Active  and  Passive);  fero  (Active  and  Passive);  oonfioid  (Active 
and  Passive) ;  sum ;  e6 ;  n6l6. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Mens,  queni  Caesar  a  Crasso  teneri  voluerat,  ab  hostibus 
tenebatur.  2.  Ad  oppidum  redibo ;  vos  omnes  fltimen  transire 
vultis.     3.  Is  regnum,  quod  pater  multos  annos  obtinuerat,  occu- 


108  LATIN  LESSONS. 

pare  voliiit.  4.  Visne  ut  me  videas  venire?  5.  Dixit  se  velle 
eum  legem  illius  civitatis  facere.  6.  Tres  milites  ferentes  legatum 
suura,  qui  vulneratus  erat,  vicli.  7.  Nonne  ex  oppido  egredi  vul- 
tis?  8.  Tti  me,  qui  laudari  nolebam,  laudasti  (79,  4).  9.  Hel- 
vetii  agros  finitimorum  vastare  nolunt.  10.  Caesar  se  ab  ulteriore 
provincia  discedere  nolle  dixit.  11.  Regem  bonum  ferre  noluistis; 
nunc  pejorem  ferte.  12.  Barbari  nos,  qui  pugnare  nolumus, 
oppugnabunt.  13.  Germani  sperabant  se  Caesarem  ipsum  victtirob 
esse.  14.  Utrum  pugnare  an  fugere  mavis?  15.  Si  signa  sequi 
nolint,  ptiniantur.  16.  Nolite  (178,  2  k  b)  longius  (40,  a)  proce- 
dere,  ne  a  barbaris  capiamini.  17.  Si  Eomae  manere  malit,  igna- 
vus  appelletur.  18.  Helvetii,  equitatti  nostro  rejecto,  pedites 
flumen  transire  audacissime  conantes  repulerunt.  19.  Nonne 
domi  esse  quam  in  urbe  hostium  maletis  ?  20.  Barbari  omnibus 
in  collibus  instructi  exercitum  ejus  itinere  proliibere  conati  sunt. 

21.  Num  bellum   populo   (133)   Eomano    suo   nomine   indixit? 

22.  Egredere,  Cai,  ex  urbe;  libera  rem  publicam  metti;  profi- 
ciscere. 

£nslisli  into   liatin. 

1.  Are  you  not  unwilling  to  advance  too  far?  2.  Let  us  go 
back  to  our  friends,  whose  buildings  are  in  great  danger.  3. 
Were  they  unwilling  to  surrender  (trado)  their  arms  to  you, 
Caesar  ?  4.  Caesar  ascertained  that  the  higher  places  were  held 
by  his  men,  and  that  the  Gauls  had  moved  their  camp.  5.  Do 
you  {plural)  wish  to  hear  the  words  which  I,  the  consul,  speak? 
6.  The  soldiers,  returning  from  that  battle,  found  a  certain  slave, 
who  had  been  left  near  the  heavy  baggage.  7.  Having  been  made 
consul,  he  led  his  forces  across  the  sea  and  conquered  the  general 
whom  all  had  feared.  8.  He  drew  up  two  cohorts  behind  the 
camp;  he  sent  forward  five  others,  with  all  the  auxiliaries,  to 
storm  the  town. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  109 

LESSON   LXIII. 

DEFECTIVE  VERBS;    OBJECTIVE  GENITIVE. 

Learn  N.  91  &  1,  2.     Learn  the  Conjugation  of  Coepi ;  6di; 
MeminT.  A.  143  (entire) ;  B.  133 ;  H.  297 ;  Apr  46,  &  Remark  1. 
Genitive  as  Object : 

a.  With  Nouns  and  Adjectives.     Learn  N.  124. 

b.  With  Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgetting,     Learn  N.  125. 

Study  very  carefully  the  Examples  under  N.  124,  125. 

EXERCISE. 

Tell  which  Genitives  denote  the  Subject,  and  which  the  Object,  of 
an  Action  or  Feeling. 

1.  Hos  elves  esse  fortes  credere  incipiunt.  2.  Castra  Eomano- 
rum  summa  vi  oppugnare  coepit.  3.  Oppidum  aedificari  coeptum 
est.  4.  Omnes  legiones  e  castiis  egredi  coeperant.  5.  Caesarem 
et  Eomanos  odit,  quod  adventu  eorum  spes  victoriae  sublata  est. 
6.  Nos  omnes  oderimus  illos  homines,  qui  patriam  suam  delere 
conantur.  7.  Meministine?  non  meminl.  8.  Dixit  se  omnesque 
elves  meminisse.  9.  Habetis  ducem  inemorem  vestii  (123,  ^), 
oblitum  sui.  10.  Helvetii,  quod  bellandi  (190)  cupidissimi  sunt, 
in  fines  Gallorum  iter  facient.  11.  Dicit  Eemos  rerum  novarum 
cupidiores  quam  pacis  futures  esse.  12.  Ariovistus  se  non  im- 
peritum  rerum  esse  dixit.  13.  Htijusne  rei  ignan  fuerunt  ?  14. 
Scimus  Helvetiorum  injiirias  Gallorum  maximas  fuisse.  15.  Ob- 
Ilviscimini,  socii,  veterum  injtiriarum.  16.  Ejus  timor  mortis 
magnus  fuit.  17.  Is,  Marco  Messala  et  Marco  Pisone  consulibus, 
regni  cupiditate  inductus  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit.  18. 
Dixerunt  militum  amorem  belli  magnum  esse.  19.  Num  illius 
conjtirationis,  quam  mali  fecerunt,  unquam  obliviscemur  ?  20. 
Dicit  homines  suae  patriae  oblitos  consul!  puniendos  (esse).  21. 
Semper  mortis  Caesaris  meminero.      22.   Nunquam  illius  noctis 


110  LATIN  LESSONS. 

obliviscar.  23.  Eeminiscatur  veteris  incommodi  populi  EomanL 
24.  Hanc  esse  patriam  meam  atque  me  consulem  horum  oblivisci 
non  possum. 

LESSON    LXIV. 
-  IMPERSONAL   VERBS. 

Learn  N.  92  (entire),  93  kl,a,c,  2.  Learn  the  synopsis  of  licet 
and  pugnatur.     A.  145 ;  B.  138  ;  H.  298,  299,  301,  1 ;  App.  47. 

Slud^  the  Examples  under  N.  92,  93, 198.  Eemember  that  emry 
verb  has  a  subject,  whicb  answers  the  question  Wlio  ?  or  What  ? 
Study  the  special  Examples,  page  267  ;  the  subjects  are  printed  in 
italics.     The  subject  may  be  an  Infinitive  Clause  (N.  188,  b,  1). 

Questions   and    Practice. 

What  value  has  it  in  the  sentence:  it  is  wrong  to  steal?  (55,  page  15.) 
What  is  the  actual  subject  of  is?  Translate:  pugnatur;  pugnatum  est; 
pugnaudum  est ;  nobis  maturandum  est ;  optimum  visum  est  mllites 
mittere.  What  is  the  gender  of  visum  and  optimum?  Why?  (109,  b.) 
What  case  must  be  used  with  licet?  oportet?  (197,  2.)  How  do  you  express 
may  and  can  ?  (197,  3.)  In  what  two  ways  can  must  be  expressed  ?  {Ans.  By 
the  Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation  and  by  oportet. ) 

EXERCISE. 

These  sentences  should  be  analyzed.  If  the  Infinitive^  or  a  Clause^ 
is  used  as  Subject,  then  it  must  have  a  Case,  Tell  which  verbs  are 
Impersonal,  and  which  are  used  impersonally. 

1.  Licet  nobis  bellum  cum  iis  gerere.  2.  Licuit  iis  nobiscum 
bella  multa  gerere.  3.  Oportet  me  omnia  fortiter  ferre.  4.  Eum 
ad  mortem  diici  oportuit.  5.  Is  ad  mortem  dticendus  fuit.  6. 
Dicit  se  frumento  uti  oportere.  7.  Pugnabatur  diu  et  acriter  ad 
impedimenta.  8.  Pugnabitur  a  septima  hora  ad  occasum  solis. 
9.  Optimum  videtur  Marcum  ad  eum  mittere.  10.  Dixisti  iter 
per  Galliam  facere  tibi  licere.     11.  Oportet  vos  Ehenum  transire; 


LATIN   LESSONS.  Ill 

Rhenus  vobis  transeundus  est.  12.  Nobis  non  exspectandum  (esse) 
existimatis.  13.  Legibus  bonis  utendum  est.  14.  Mihi  conten- 
dendum  est ;  Caesaii  eundum  est.  15.  Liceat  raibi  ex  urbe  egredL 
16.  Audivit  milites  fltimen  transire  non  dubita(vi)sse.  17.  Moenia 
a  nobis  defensa  sunt  et  vobis  defendenda  erunt.  18.  Consulis 
sapientis  est  bonos  circum  se  semper  habere.  19.  Viros  ut  fortes 
atque  veteris  incommodi  sui  memores  sint  hortatur.  20.  Me  cer- 
tiorem  faciunt  apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimum  et  ditissimum 
Orgetorigem  fuisse.    21.  (Eum)  damnatum  poenam  sequi  oportebat. 

Englisli   into   liatin. 

1.  It  is  very  difficult  to  undergo  perils.  2.  We  must  fight  as 
boldly  as  possible.  3.  We  must  not  forget  the  death  of  our 
leader.  4.  They  had  begun  to  set  out  from  Home.  5.  They 
ought  to  have  been  sent  with  the  cavalry.  6.  We  may  teach 
the  boys  (their)  letters.  7.  He  could  have  marched  twenty  miles. 
8.  We  must  inform  the  citizens  about  the  revolution. 

LESSON    LXV. 
SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  RESULT;  SUBSTANTIVE  CLAUSES. 

Subjunctive  of  Hesult,     Learn  N.  181  (entire). 
Substantive  Clauses.     Learn  N.  188  &  a,  b,  1,  2  (5). 

Remember  that  any  word,  clause,  or  group  of  words  answering  the  question 
What  ?  may  be  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  Notice,  in  the  sentences  of 
the  Exercise,  that  a  clause  may  express  a  result,  and  be,  at  the  same  time,  the 
subject  of  a  verb.  Study  carefully  the  Examples  under  the  Notes  for  this 
Lesson. 

Questions    and    Practice. 

What  is  the  gender  of  an  Infinitive  or  a  Clause  ?  Why  ?  {Ans.  Because  it  is 
indeclinable. )  What  is  regularly  used  instead  of  the  Future  Infinitive  Passive  ? 
(181,  a,  Remark.  )  Give  the  principal  parts  and  synopsis  (as  Impersonal 
Verbs)  of  accidit,  sequitur,  fit.  Analyze  this  English  sentence  :  that  he  is 
my  friend  is  true. 


112  LATIN  LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 


Special  Examples  for  this  Lesson  are  given  on  page  267. 

1.  Ita  acriter  impetus  factus  est,  ut  nostri  fugerent.  2.  Tantus 
timor  omnes  occupavit,  ut  se  flumen  non  transittiros  (esse)  dicerent. 
3.  Yir  ejusmodi  (121)  est,  ut  eum  terrere  non  possimus.  4.  Nemo 
tarn  multa  scripsit,  ut  plura  scribere  nolit.  5.  Cicero  sic  ab  omni- 
bus amatus  est,  ut  consul  fieret.  6.  Accidit,  ut  Itina  plena  esset. 
7.  Sequitur,  ut  ignavus  sis.  8.  Eestat,  ut  de  illo  proelio  dicam. 
9.  His  rebus  fiebat,  ut  et  minus  late  vagarentur  et  minus  facile 
finitimis  bellum  inferre  possent.  10.  Pecerunt  ut  profectio  simil- 
lima  fugae  videretur.  11.  Dixit  fore  ut  omnes  Helve tii  Ehenum 
transirent.  12.  Sperat  fore  ut  Lostes  vincantur  {not  hostes  victum 
ill).  13.  Quis  tam  ignavus  est,  qui  se  suaque  omnia  Ariovisto 
dedere  velit?  14.  Ego  non  is  sum,  qui  mortis  periculo  terreri 
possira.  15.  Imperator  milites  sic  hortatus  est,  ut  a  decima  legione 
ad  occasum  solis  pugnaretur.  16.  Nostri  retineri  non  potuerunt, 
quin  tela  in  hostes  venientes  conjicerent.  17.  Non  est  dubium, 
quin  to  tins  Galliae  (122,  <5)  pltirimum  (142,  c)  pos^int.  18.  Non 
dubito  quin  hie  fortissimus  sit.  19.  Castra  Eemorum  quam  pri- 
mum  oppugnare  non  dubitabimus.  20.  Ne  faciamus  ut  haec  urbs 
ab  Helvetiis  deleatur.  21.  Quis  vestrum  oblitus  nostii  (123,  h) 
esse  potest?  22.  Nostri  virtute  maxima,  quod  (115,  h)  in  spe 
victoriae  saepe  accidit,  pugnare  coeperunt.  23.  Oppida  sua  omnia 
numero  (153)  ad  duodecim,  vicos  ad  quadringentos,  reliqua  aedifi- 
cia  incendunt.  24.  Hac  oraiione  adducti  inter  se  fidem  et  jusjti- 
randum  dant  et,  regno  occupato,  per  tres  potentissimos  populos 
imperio  totius  Galliae  sese  potiri  posse  sperant. 

Snglisli  into  Liatin. 

1.  It  very  often  happens  that  slaves  fight  more  bravely  than 
soldiers.  2.  He  was  so  just  that  he  was  unwilling  to  punish  you. 
3.  He  says  that  the  towns  will  not  be  taken.  4.  The  enemy  are 
so  many  in  number  that  we  cannot  conquer  them.  5.  His  speech 
was  of-such-a-sort  that  we  were  all  influenced  by  it.     6.  Let  us 


LATIN   LESSONS.  113 

always  be  mindful  of  praise  and  glory.  7.  They  cannot  be  re- 
strained from  following  the  enemy.  8.  He  said  that  there  was  no 
doubt  that  the  Bel^fae  were  the  bravest. 


oJ<Ko 


LESSON    LXVI. 

DATIVE    WITH    INTRANSITIVE    VERBS;    INTRANSITIVE 
VERBS  USED   IN  THE   PASSIVE. 

Dative  with  Intransitive  Verbs  (Advantage  or  Disad- 
vantage). Learn  N.  131  &  a.  For  the  Dative  of  Advantage  or 
Disadvantage  with  Adjectives,  see  Lesson  XXXIV. 

Intransitive  Verbs  used  in  the  Passive,  Learn  N.  131,  a, 
Caution  ;  134.     Study  the  Examples  under  N.  198. 

Historical  Present,     Learn  N.  168,  b  ;  172,  Remark  2, 

Sequence  of  Tenses,  Learn  N.  171,  172  (entire).  This 
subject  has  been  partially  presented  in  Lesson  XL. 

Questions. 

What  verbs  are  followed  by  the  Dative  of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage? 
What  case  follows  imperd  ?  jubeo  ?  (197,  1.)  What  mode  follows  imperd  ? 
jubeOl  (179,  d.)  Name  the  Primary  tenses  of  the  Indicative;  the  Secondary 
tenses.  Why  is  the  Historical  Present  so  called  ?  Is  it  a  Primary  or  Secondary 
tense?  What  Deponent  verbs  require  the  Ablative?  (161,  a.)  Verbs  com- 
pounded with  what  Prepositions  require  the  Dative  ?  (133.) 

EXERCISE. 

77ie  classes  of  Substantive  Clauses  em]ployed  in  this  Exercise  are 
described  in  188,  b,  1,  2. 

1.  Haec  araicis  nostris  nocebunt.  2.  Omnia  non  omnibus  pla- 
cent.  3.  Hi  imperatori  non  parituri  erant.  4.  Verebamur  ne 
cives  Ariovisto  regi  Germanorum  servirent.  5.  Mihi  credite,  socii ; 
hostes  vobis  non  resistent.  6.  Legati  Caesarem  Eemis  ignovisse 
et  eos  non  ptinivisse  dixerunt.     7.  Per  eos,  ne  causam  diceret,  se 


114  LATIN  LESSONS. 

eripuit.  8.  Copiis,  qiias  secum  liabuit,  ut  in  fines  Sequanorum 
iter  facerent,  imperavit.  9.  Dicit  se  obsides  Aeduis  a  Eemis  dan 
jussisse.  10.  Sciunt  fore  ut  de  tertia  vigilia  castra  moveantur. 
11.  Crediderunt  Caium  ipsum  imperatorem  creari  oportuisse.  12. 
Si  haec  ita  essent,  tecum  ire  nollem.  13.  Helvetii  legates  ad  eum 
mittunt,  qui  pacem  peterent.  14.  Dum  haec  geruntur,  imperator 
copias  suas  fltimen  (141,  c)  transdticebat.  15.  Civitati  persuasit, 
ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent  (117,  c).  16.  Non 
est  dubium  quin  urbem  expugnatuii  sint.  17.  Navibus  noceri 
non  poterat.  18.  Vobis  legibus  parendum  esse  intelligitis.  19. 
Nobis  hostibus  resistendum  est.  20.  Mihi  persuadetur;  dicit  sibi 
persuasum  esse.     21.  Legionibus  a  Caesare  imperatum  est. 

English  into  Ijatin. 

1.  The  slaves  were  ordered  (jubeo)  to  go.  2.  The  soldiers  are 
ordered  (impero)  to  march.  3.  The  states  are  persuaded  to  go. 
4.  The  consul  is  not  believed.  5.  The  cavalry  will  be  resisted. 
6.  They  say  that  they  have  obeyed  the  general.  7.  These  men 
ought  to  be  resisted.  8.  We  shall  persuade  the  troops  to  go 
(179,  d)  home.     9.  The  city  cannot  be  harmed. 


LESSON    LXVII. 

DATIVE    OF    POSSESSOR;    TWO    DATIVES;    SEMI-DEPONENT 

VERBS. 

native  denoting  the  JPossessor,  Learn  N.  135.  This  use 
is  sometimes  seen  in  English ;  as,  "  To  him  that  overcometh,  a 
crown  of  life  shall  be.'* 

Two  Datives.     Learn  N.  137. 

Semi-Deponent  Verbs,    Learn  N.  81. 

Notice  that  both  the  Dative  of  Possessor  and  the  Dative  of  the 
Person  (two  Datives)  are  Datives  of  Advantage  (or  Disadvantage). 


LATIN  LESSONS.  115 

Questions  and  Practice. 

Give  the  principal  parts  of  auded,  fidd,  gaudeC,  soleO.  Give  the  synopsis 
of  audeo.  What  is  the  meaning  of  Deponent  1  Semi- Deponent  I  When  must 
the  Ablative  Absolute  be  used  ?  Can  Intransitive  verbs  be  used  in  the 
Passive?  Translate:  Caesari  persuaderl  nOn  potest;  duel  ab  omnibus 
paretur. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Viro  quinque  equi  sunt.  2.  Duci  maximus  militum  numerus 
fuit.  3.  Dicit  sibi  in  animo  esse  per  provinciam  iter  facere.  4. 
Utrum  his  civibus  virtus  est,  annon  ?  5 .  Mihi  spes  magna  fuit. 
6.  Illis  oppida  nuraero  (153)  circiter  {or  ad)  viginti  sunt.  7. 
Certiores  fact!  sunt  permultos  servos  Germanis  esse.  8.  Milites 
legionum  duarum,  quae  in  novissimo  agraine  praesidio  impedimen- 
tis  fuerant,*  proelio  nuntiato,  cursti  incitato,  in  summo  colle  ab 
hostibus  conspiciebantur.  9.  Decimam  legionem  subsidio  nostns 
{or  urbi,  nobis,  castiis)  miserat.  10.  Caesar  ab  secunda  legione 
ad  dextrum  cornu  profectus,  suos  urgeri  signisque  in  unum  locum 
coUatisf  duodecimae  legionis  confertos  milites  sibi  esse  impedi- 
mento  vidit.  11.  His  difficultatibus  duae  res  erant  subsidio.  12. 
Partem  suarum  copiarum  transducere  conati  sunt,  eo  consilio,  ut  cas- 
tellum,  cui  praeerat  Quintus  Titurius  legatus,  expugnarent.  13. 
Veriti  sum  us  ne  agros  Eemorum  popularentur,  qui  magno  nobis 
tisui  erant,  commeattique  nostros  prohiberent.  14.  Illi,  ut  (197,  5) 
erat  impemtum,  eductis  quattuor  cohortibus,  quae  praesidio  castris 
relictae  erant,  et  longiore  itinere  (159,  Remark  3)  circumductis, 
ne  ex  hostium  castris  conspici  possent,  omnium  oculis  mentibusque 
ad  pugnam  intentis,t  celeriter  ad  eas,  quas  diximus,  munltiones 
pervenerunt.  15.  Caesar  haec  sibi  curae  esse  dixit.  16.  Audi- 
verat  bos  fltimen  latissimum  transire  ausos  esse.  17.  Yeretur  ut 
exercitus  dicto  audiens  futurus  sit  (82,  Remark).  18.  Num  in 
hunc  locum  venire  audes?  19.  Aestate  rus  ire  solet.  20.  Nonne 
Ariovistus  Galliae  bellum  inferre  audebit  ? 

*  Esse,  with  two  Datives,  is  usually  best  translated  to  serve  (as), 
t  157,  Rem.  2. 


116  liATIN  LESSONS. 


LESSON    LXVIII. 

ABLATIVE   WITH    COMPARATIVES;    ABLATIVE    DENOTING 
MEASURE   OF  DIFFERENCE. 

Ablative  with  Comparatives  (Quam  omitted).*  Learn  N. 
154. 

Ablative  denoting  the  Measure  (or  Degree)  of  Difference, 

Learn  N.  155  (entire).     This  may  express  :  — 
a.  Difference  in  Length,  Height,  Width,  etc, 
h,  Difference  in  Time. 

c.  Difference  in  Distance. 

d.  Various  ideas  of  Difference  in  Amount  or  Degree, 

All  these  forms  have  equivalents  in  the  use  of  the  English  Ob- 
jective Case ;  as,  a.  He  is  a  head  taller ;  b.  He  has  lived  here  two 
years  longer  than  I;  c.  We  are  three  miles  distant  from  home; 
d.  He  is  a  great  deal  richer. 

Remark.  Longe,  hy  far  (really  an  old  Ablative),  expresses  Degree  of 
Difference. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Omnia  consilia  tua  nobis  clariora  luce  sunt.  2.  Nemo  Eomae 
Crasso  fuit  ditior.  3.  Quis  nobilior  Caesare  esse  potest?  4. 
Dixit  Ehenum  altiorem  Ehodano  esse.  5.  Castra  amplius  millibus 
passuum  octo  in  latitudinem  patebant.  6.  Hiems  longior  aestate 
erit.  7.  Patria  mihi  multo  carior  vita  mea  est.  8.  Hie  puer 
biennio  major  est  quam  ilia  puella.  9.  Castra  a  Eoma  millibus 
passuum  quinque  aberant.  10.  Aliud  aedificium  supra  pontem 
spatio  aequo  est.  11.  Flumen  triginta  millibus  passuum  infra  eum 
locum  fuit.  12.  Annum  longiorem  duobus  mensibus  fecerunt. 
13.  In  senatum  paulo  ante  venistL  14.  Miles,  de  quo  paulo  ante 
diximus,  vir  longe  fortissimus  fuit  in  exercitU.     15.  Eo  opere  per- 

*  Of  course,  if  quam  is  expressed,  the  noun  or  pronoun  after  it  will  be  in 
the  same  case  as  that  preceding;  as,  Caesar  fortior  est  quam  Fompeius 
(est). 


LATIN  LESSONS,  117 

fecto,  castella  communit,  quo  (179,  b)  facilius  eos,  se  invito,  transire 
conantes  proliibere  possit.  16.  Legem  brevem  esse  oportet,  quo 
facilius  intelligatur.  17.  Dixit  exercitum  dicto  audientem  non 
fore.  18.  Portis  (159,  Eemark  3)  omnibus  eruptionem  faciunt. 
19.  Eelinquebatur  una  per  Sequanos  via,  qua,  Sequanis  invitis, 
propter  angustias  ire  non  poterant.  20.  Quanto  (155,  b)  gravior 
oppugnatio  fuit,  tanto  crebriores  nuntii  ad  Caesarem  mittebantur. 
21.  Post  ejus  mortem  nihilo  minus  Helvetii  id,  quod  constituerant, 
facere  conantur,  ut  e  finibus  suis  exeant  (181,  e).  22.  Erant 
omnino  itinera  duo,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exire  possent  (181,  c) : 
tinum  per  Sequanos,  angustum  et  difficile,  inter  montem  Juram  et 
flumen  Ehodanum,  vix  qua  (94,  2)  singuli  (41,  a)  cani  dticerentur ; 
mons  autem  altissimus  impendebat,  ut  facile  perpauci  (eos)  pro- 
hibere  possent :  alterum  per  provinciam  nostram,  multo  facilius 
atque  expeditius,  propterea  quod  inter  fines  Helvetiorum  et  Allo- 
brogum  Ebodanus  fluit,  isque  nonnullis  (195,  1)  locis  vado 
-transitur. 

Englisli  into  liatin. 

1.  The  tower  is  ten  feet  higher  than  the  wall.  2.  The  boy  is  a 
whole  head  taller  than  his  father.  3.  Did  the  messenger  come  a 
little  while  ago?  4.  This  temple  is  much  wider  than  that.  5. 
They  are  twenty  miles  from  the  camp.  6.  Priends,  be  brave,  that 
you  may  the  more  easily  encounter  dangers.  7.  He  commands 
(impero)  me  to  go  to  Bibracte.  8.  The  consul  is  much  wiser 
tlian  the  judge. 

LESSON    LXIX. 

CAUSAL  CLAUSES. 

Clauses  expressing  a  Cause,      Learn  N.  182,  «,  ^,  c. 
The  Relative  JPronoun  used  for  a  Demonstrative,     Learn 
N.  115,  d. 


118  LATIN  LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Dumnorix  gratia  apud  Sequanos  plurimum  poterat,  et  Hel- 
vetiis  erat  amicus,  quod  ex  ea  civitate  Orgetorigis  filiam  in  matri- 
monium  duxerat ;  et  cupiditate  regni  adductus  novis  rebus  (131, 
a)  studebat,  et  quam  plurimas  civitates  suo  sibi  beneficio  habere 
obstrictas  volebat.  2.  Quae  quum  ita  sint,  domum  contendemus. 
3.  Quo  facto,  quum  alius  alii  (195,  9)  subsidium  ferrent,  neque 
timerent  ne  ab  hostibus  circumvenirentur,  audacius  resistere  ac 
fortius  pugnare  coeperunt.  4.  Quibus  rebus  cognitis,  Caesar  tres 
cohortes,  quae  Eoma  veiierant,  subsidio  legioiii  praemisit.  5.  In 
priraam  aciem  processit  centurioiiibusque  nominatim  appellatis, 
reliquos  cohortatus  milites,  signa  iuferre  et  manipulos  laxare  jussit, 
quo  facilius  gladiis  titi  possent.  Ciijus  adventti  spe  illata  militibus, 
quum  quisque  in  conspectti  imperatoris  etiam  in  extremis  suis  rebus* 
quam  fortissime  pugnare  cuperet,  paulum  hostium  impetus  tarda- 
tus  est.  6.  Quum  te  fortiorem  Tito  esse  dicas,  copias  tuas  edtic 
et  impetum  in  hostes  fac.  7.  Condemnatus  est,  qui  amicum  suum 
interfecerit.  8.  Magnam  Caesar  injuriam  facit,  quum  libertatem 
nostram  eripiat.  9.  Equitatui  (133),  quem  auxilio  (137)  Caesari 
Aedui  miserant,  Dumnorix  praeerat.  10.  Diutius  quum  nostro- 
rum  impetus  sustinere  non  possent,  alteri  (195,  8)  se,  ut  (197,  5) 
coeperant,  in  montem  receperunt,  alteri  ad  impedimenta  et  carros 
suos  se  contulerunt.  Ad  multam  noctem  pugnatum  est,  prop- 
terea  quod  pro  vallo  can'os  objecerant,  et  e  loco  superiore  in 
nostros  venientes  tela  conjiciebant.  11.  Ex  eo  proelio  circiter 
millia  hominum  centum  et  trigiiita  superfuerunt,  eaque  tota  nocte 
continenter  ierunt ;  nullam  partem  noctis  itinere  (157)  intermisso 
in  fines  Lingonum  die  quarto  pervenerunt,  quum  propter  vulnera 
militum  nostri  triduum  morati  eos  sequi  non  potuissent. 

*  Equivalent  to  in  extremd  suO  periculd. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  119 

LESSON    LXX. 

USES  OF  THE  ABLATIVE   CASE. 

Ablative  denoting  Quality.     Learn  N.  152. 

When  should  the  Genitive  of  Quality  be  used?  (N.  152,  a.) 

Ablative  with  Adjectives: 

a.  With  Fretus,  Contentus  (denoting  Means).    Learn  N.  151,  b. 

b.  With  Dignus,  Indignus.     Learn  N.  156. 

Ablative  denoting  Price.     Learn  N.  151,  c. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Germanos  corporum  ingenti  magnitudine  esse  dixerunt.  2. 
Audiverat  turres  magna  altitudine  esse.  3.  Quod  civitas  erat 
magna  inter  Belgas  auctoritate  atque  hominum  multitudine  prae- 
stabat,  sexcentos  obsides  poposcit.  4.  Iter  quinque  dierum  fecit, 
et  ad  fltimen  pervenit.  Ejus  fltirainis  altitudo  quindecim  pedum 
erat.  5.  Dicit  fratrem  suum  magna  vi  et  animi  et  corporis  fuisse. 
6.  Preti  diis  immortalibus  audacissime  resistebant.  7.  Puer  donis, 
quae  dedisti,  contentus  erit.  8.  Pugnatum  est  diu  atque  acriter, 
quum  hostes  superioribus  victoriis  freti  in  sua  virtute  totius  Aqui- 
taniae  salutem  positam  putarent  (182,  b).  9.  Hic  praemio,  quod 
te  dattirum  (esse)  dixisti,  dignus  fuit.  10.  Consul  tanto  lionore 
indignus  est.  11.  Num  ii,  qui  urbefn  servare  noluerunt,  araicitia 
nostra  digni  sunt?  12.  Putat  se  librum  viginti  sestertiis  vendi- 
tnrum  esse.  13.  Nonne  mihi  domum  tuam  parvo  pretio  vendere 
VIS?  14.  Hi  omnes  intelb'gunt  Germanos  a  Sequanis  mercede 
arcessitos  esse.  15.  Ke  fmmentaria  quam  celerrime  potuit  com- 
parata,  magnis  itineribus  ad  Ariovistum  contendit.  16.  His  rebus 
cognitis,  Caesar  Gallorum  animos  verbis  confirmavit,  pollicitusque 
est  sibi  (137)  earn  rem  ctirae  futuram  (esse).  Dixit  magnam  se 
habere  spem  (=  sperare)  et  beneficio  suo  et  auctoritate  adductum 
Ariovistum  finem  injuriis  facturum  (esse). 


120  LATIN  LESSONS. 


Bngllsli  into  liatin. 


1.  Let  us  sell  these  houses  at  a  very  large  price.  2.  He  will 
sell  that  book  for  fifty  cents  (ten  sestertii).  3.  Was  he  unwilling 
to  fight  for  pay  ?  4.  If  they  had  been  worthy  of  praise,  we  should 
have  praised  them.  5.  A  mountain  of  great  height  occupies 
(contineo)  that  place.  6.  He  will  not  go  to  the  city,  since  he 
prefers  to  remain  at  home.  7.  Ariovistus  did  not  dare  to  come 
into  Gaul,  because  Caesar  was  in  the  province  with  his  army. 
8.  Men  of  unfriendly  disposition  (animus)  cannot  march  through 
our  territory. 

LESSON    LXXI. 

CONCESSIVE  CLAUSES;    HLSTORICAL   INFINITIVE. 

Clauses  denoting  Concession.  Learn  N.  183  &  «,  Cau- 
tion, b. 

Historical  Infinitive.      Learn  N.  167. 

Notice  that  tamen  {yet)  is  very  often  used  as  a  Correlative 
(N.  195,  8)  to  a  Conjunction  meaning  although. 

Questions. 

What  does  the  word  concession  mean  ?  When  must  the  Subjunctive  be  used 
with  etsi  and  tametsi  ?  What  f(5ur  uses  may  qui  have  with  the  Subjunctive  ? 
(N.  197,  6.)  Why  is  the  Historical  Infinitive  so  called?  What  is  peculiar 
about  its  use?  What  are  the  chief  uses  of  the  Infinitive?  {Ans.  1.)  As 
a  Verbal  Noun.  (2.)  As  a  Complement.  (3.)  With  a  Subject  Accusative. 
(4.)  With  a  Subject  Nominative  {Historical).    How  may  quum  be  spelled  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Quum  Crassus  imperator  creatus  esset,  tamen  milites  eum 
sequi  nolebant.  2.  Quum  ad  multam  noctem  pugnetur,  nostri  non 
fugient.  3.  Etsi  mihi  inimlcus  esset  (175,  a,  2),  eum  non  odis- 
sem.     4.  Quae  (115,  d)  tametsi  Caesar  intelligebat,  tamen  proe- 


LATIN  LESSONS.  121 

Hum  sibi  (136)  cominittendam  non  existimavit.  5.  Quum  ea  ita 
sint,  tamen,  si  obsides  ab  iis  mihi  dabuntur,  et  si  Aedius  (131,  a) 
de  injtiriis,  quas  ipsis  (=  Aeduis)  sociisque  eorum  intulerunt,  item 
si  Allobrogibus  satisfacient,  cum  iis  pacem  faciam.  6.  Legatum, 
qui  nihil  morte  (156)  dignum  fecisset  (183,  b),  interfecerunt. 
7.  Quum  mlirus  defensoribus  ntidatus  sit,  hostes  nobis  se  dedere 
nolurit.  8.  Servum  graviter  acctisat,  qui  (182,  c)  litteras  non 
miserit.  9.  Septem  cohortes,  quae  nobis  (137)  subsidio  essent 
(180),  misit.  10.  Nemo  est  (ejus  modi),  qui  pro  patria  (129,  h) 
sua  mori  nolit.  11.  Caesar  Aeduos  frtimentum  flagitare.  Diem 
ex  die  Aedui  (eum)  ducere ;  frtimentum  confern,  comportari, 
adesse  dicere.  12.  Persuadent  finitimis,  uti,  eodem  tisi  consiliS 
(151,  a),  oppidis  vicisque  exustis,  una  (94,  2)  secum  proficis- 
cantur. 

Englisli  into  liatin. 

1.  Althougli  we  are  citizens,  we  are  not  free.  2.  Although 
(etsi)  the  soldiers  were' ordered  (jubeo)  to  advance,  yet  they  did 
not  obey.  3.  Although  we  should  iiave  given-satisfaction-to  (sat- 
isfied) the  Eemi,  yet  they  would  not  make  peace  with  us.  4.  Let 
us  accuse  them  severely,  since  they  have  said  that  they  are  not 
Romans.  5.  We  will  burn  our  towns,  about  fifteen  in  number, 
lest  the  Gauls  capture  them. 

LESSON    LXXII. 
TEMPORAL   CLAUSES. 
Clauses  denoting  Time.     Learn  N.  184  (entire). 

Questions. 
When  does  quum  (cum),  ivhen,  take  tlie  Subjunctive  ?  Which  of  these  are 
correct :  quum  fui ;  quum  eram ;  quum  fuero ;  quum  amabam ;  quum 
monueram?  What  may  dum  mean?  (N.  184,  h ;  183,  d,)  When  do  ante- 
quam  and  priusquam  require  the  Subjunctive  ?  What  meanings  may  quum 
have  ?  What  mode  is  used  with  most  of  the  particles  of  time  ?  Express  in 
two  ways,  a  thousand  nien  (43,  e). 


122  LATIN  LESSONS. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Quum  esset  Caesar  in  citeriore  Gallia  in  hibernis,  ita  uti 
supra  diximus  (197,  5  ;  111,  a),  crebrl  ad  eum  nun  til  afferebantur 
Jitterisque  Labieni  certior  fiebat,  omnes  Belgas  (199,  3)  contra 
populum  Romanum  conjtirare  obsidesque  inter  se  (112,  b)  dare : 
conjtirandi  (190)  causas  multas  esse.  2.  Ubi  neutri  traiiseundi 
(190)  initium  faciunt  (168,  b),  Caesar  suos  in  castra  reduxit. 
3.  Qui  (115,  d)  quum  se  suaque  omnia  in  oppidum  contulissent 
atque  ab  eo  oppido  Caesar  cum  exercitti  millibus  passuum  quinque 
abesset,  omnes  majores  natti  (36,  b;  153)  ex  oppido  egressi  sese 
in  ejus  fidem  venire  dixerunt.  4.  Eodem  tempore  equites  nostri 
peditesque,  qiu  cum  iis  fuerant,  quos  primo  hostium  impetti  pulsos 
(esse)  dixeram,  quum  se  in  castra  reciperent  adversis  liostibus 
(133)  occurrebant  ac  rursus  aliam  in  partem  fugam  petebant ;  et 
servi,  qui  ab  summo  jugo  collis  nostros  victores  fliimen  transisse 
conspexerant,  praedandl  (190)  causa  profecti,  quum  respexissent 
et  hostes  in  nostris  castrls  versarl  vidissent,  ftigerunt.  5.  Dum 
reliquae  naves  convenlrent,  exspectavit.  6.  Dum  paucos  dies  ad 
Yesontionem  rei  frtimentariae  commeattisque  causa  moratur  (184, 
b,  Eemark),  ildem  principes  civitatum  reverterunt  petieruntque 
uti  sibi  (134,  Remark)  de  sua  omniumque  salute  cum  eo  agere 
liceret.     7.  Dum  haec  faciant  (183,  d),  urbem  non  expugnabimus. 

8.  Ne  ejus  supplicio  DivitiacI  animum  ofFenderet,  verebatur.  Ita- 
que  priusquam  quidquam  conaretur,  Divitiacum  ad  se  vocarl  jubet. 

9.  Quod  (115,  d)  postquam  barbari  fieri  animadverterunt,  ad 
flumen  contenderunt.  10.  Priusquam  perlculum  faceret,  idoneum 
esse  arbitratus  Caium  cum  navl  longa  praemittit.  11.  Quibus 
rebus  adductus  non  sibi  (136)  exspectandum  (199,  2)  existimavit, 
dum  in  Santonos  Helvetil  pervenlrent. 

Englisli   into    liatin. 

1.  When  the  work  had  been  finished  (perficio),  he  ordered  two 
legions  to  follow  him.  2.  They  waited  until  the  troops  should 
arrive.     3.  When  he  comes  (168,  a),  we  will  inform  him  concern- 


LATIN   LESSONS.  123 

ing  these  facts.  4.  When  this  battle  had  been  announced  across 
the  Ehine,  the  Eemi  sent  legates  to  ask  (180)  aid.  5.  As  soon 
as  (=  after)  Caesar  arrived  at  the  camp,  he  ordered  a  much  higher 
rampart  to  be  made.  6.  When  the  camp  had  been  fortified,  the 
enemy  began  to  return  home.  7.  When  Caesar  was  setting-out 
into  Italy,  he  sent  Crassus  with  the  twelfth  legion  and  a  part  of 
the  cavalry  into-the-country-of  (into)  the  Veragri  and  Sedtini,  who 
extend  from  the  territory  of  the  Allobroges  and  Lake  Geneva 
(Lemannus)  and  the  river  Ehone  to  the  Alps. 


LESSON    LXXIII. 

'gerund  and  gerundive. 

Gerund.     Learn  N.  190. 

Gerundive.     Learn  N.  189,/;  190,  a. 

Remark.  The  Gerund  has  already  been  employed  in  these  Lessons;  so, 
also,  has  the  Infinitive  (as  a  verbal  noun  in  the  Nominative  Case).  The  use 
of  both  is  very  easily  understood,  being  like  that  of  anywew^er  noim.  The 
use  of  the  Gerundive  (for  the  Gerund)  must  be  studied  with  special  care  (N. 
190,  a).  Study  the  Examples  under  the  Note.  Notice  that  ad,  with  the 
Accusative  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive,  implies  a  purpose. 

Questions   and    Practice. 

What  is  used  as  the  Nominative  of  the  Gerund  ?  What  two  common  uses 
has  the  Gerundive  ?  When  should  it  be  used  instead  of  the  Gerund  ?  Give 
the  rule  for  determining  the  form  of  the  Noun  and  of  the  Gerundive.  Give  the 
Latin  for  :  the  hope  of  seeing  tlie  soldiers  ;  the  opportunity  (facultas)  for  {of) 
leaving  this  place  is  not  given. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Nos  oranes  magistrum  docenclo  se  docere  scimns.  2.  His 
rebus  adducti  et  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  permoti,  constituerunt  ea, 
quae  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent  (181,  c),  comparare  atque  cum 
proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare.     3.  Proximo 


124  LATIN   LESSONS. 

die  Caesar  e  castiis  utrisque  copias  suas  eduxit,  paulumque  a 
majoribus  castris  progressus  aciem  instruxit  hostibusque  pugnandi 
potestatem  fecit.  4.  Ita  nostri  acriter  in  liostes  signo  (157)  dato 
impetum  fecerunt,  itaque  (195,  5)  hostes  celeriter  procurrerimt,  ut 
spatium  pila  in  hostes  conjiciendl  non  daretur.  5.  Quum  fiiiem 
oppugnandi  nox  fecisset,  Iccius  Kemus  (106),  summa  nobilitate 
(152)  et  gratia  inter  suos,  qui  oppido  praefuerat,  tiiius  ex  liis  (123, 
a)  qui  legati  (106)  de  pace  ad  Caesarem  venerant,  nuntiuin  ad  eum 
mittit.  6.  Causa  mittendi  fuit,  quod  iter  per  Alpes,  quo  (159, 
Eemaek  3)  magno  cum  periculo  mercatores  ire  consuerant  (91,  2, 
Eemark),  patefieri  volebat.  7.  Dixit  perfacile  (109,  b)  esse, 
quum  virttite  omnibus  (133)  praestarent,  totius  Galliae  imperio 
(151,  a)  potiri.  Id  hoc  (149)  facilius  eis  persuasit,  quod  undique 
loci  nattira  Helvetii  continentur.  8.  Frtimentum  omne,  praeter- 
quam  quod  secum  portaturi  erant,  combtirunt,  ut,  domum  reditionis 
spe  (157)  sublata,  paratiores  ad  omnia  pericula  subeunda  essent. 
9.  Ubi  nostros  non  esse  virtute  inferiores  intellexit,  loco  (157  (2)) 
pro  castris  ad  aciem  instruendam  natura  (149)  idoneo,  duabus 
legionibus  in  castris  relictis,  ut  subsidio  (137,  Eemark)  dtici 
possent,  proelii  committendi  signum  dedit.  10.  Ariovistus  dicit 
non  sese  Gallis  .(Ji^^),  sed  Gallos  sibi  bellum  intulisse ;  omnes 
Galliae  civitates  ad  se  oppugnandum  venisse.  11.  Utrum  sui 
muniendi,  an  Galliae  occupandae  causa  multittidinem  Germanorum 
in  Galliam  transduxit?  12.  Alii  aliam  in  partem  (195,  9)  perter- 
riti  ferebantur. 

Snglish   into   L.atin. 

1.  They  gave  the  enemy  no  opportunity  for  (of)  leaving  the 
towns.  2.  We  have  come  for  the  purpose  (causa)  of  storming 
your  cities.  3.  He  thinks  that  time  (spatium)  ought  not  to  be 
given  to  the  enemy  for  (ad)  adopting  (capio)  plans.  4.  While 
he  delays  in  these  places  for  the  sake  of  securing  (paro)  ships, 
legates  came  to  him  from  a  large  part  of  the  Sequani,  to  say  (180) 
that  they  wished  to  make  peace  with  him.  5.  We  will  not  give 
the  Eemi  an  opportunity  for  (of)  marching  through  our  province. 
6.  Are  the  Helvetii  desirous  of  carrving  on  wars  with  us  ? 


LATIN  LESSONS.  125 

LESSON    LXXIV. 

SUPINE. 

Supine,     Learn  N.  191  (entire). 

Hotv  a  Purpose  may  he  expressed.     Learn  N.  180. 
Study  N.  180  with  great  care,  and  apply  it  to  the  sentences  of 
this  Lesson. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Helvetii  agros  Aeduorum  populabantur.  Aedui,  quum  s6 
suaque  ab  iis  defendere  non  possent,  legates  ad  Caesarem  mittunt 
rogatum  auxilium.  2.  Ob  earn  rem  ex  civitate  profugit  et  Eomam 
ad  senatum  venit  auxilium  postulatum,  quod  solus  neque  jtireju- 
rando  neque  obsidibus  tenebatur.  3.  Bello  Helvetiorum  confecto, 
totlus  fere  Galliae  legati,  principes  civitatum,  ad  Caesarem  gratu- 
latum  convenerunt.  4.  Perfacile  factti  est  haec  conata  perficere, 
propterea  quod  ipse  suae  civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  est.  5. 
Dixit  se  pacem  petitum  venisse.  6.  Si  hoc  optimum  factti  fuisset 
(175,  b,  2),  eum  interfecissem.  7.  Dumnorigi  Aeduo,  qui  eo 
tempore  principatum  obtinebat  ac  maxime  plebl  (131,  b)  acceptus 
erat,  ut  idem  conaretur  (172,  Eemark  2),  persuadet,  eique  flliam 
suam  in  matrimonium  dat.  8.  Itaque  rem  suscipit,  obsidesque 
uti  inter  sese  dent  (181,  b)  perficit :  SequanI,*  ne  itinere  Helve tios 
prohibeant ;  Helvetii,*  ut  sine  maleficio  et  injuria  transeant. 

Englisli   into    r.atin. 

Express  these  sentences  in  as  many  ways  as  possible,  according  to 
N.  180. 

1.  He  says  that  the  troops  of  the  Sequani  have  come  to  attack 
him.  2.  We  will  send  three  legions  to  storm  the  winter-quarters 
of  Ariovistus.    3.  If  he  had  come  to  see  me,  when  I  was  at  Kome, 

*  Supply  obsides  dent.  - 


126  LATIN  LESSONS. 

I  should  have  sent  him  to  you.  4.  Let  us  go  to  the  city  to  see 
the  king.  5.  To  cross  the  Ehine  will  be  (a  thing)  very  difficult 
to  do.  6.  Is  this  the  best  thing  to  do,  or  not  ?  7.  If  these  things 
should  be  announced  to  our  general,  he  would  order  (impero)  us 
(131,  a)  to  (179,  d)  march  two  miles  to  attack  the  smaller  camp. 
8.  Who  were  those  men  that  sent  you  to  congratulate  me  ? 

LESSON    LXXV. 
INDIRECT  DISCOURSE:    QUESTIONS. 

An  Indirect  Quotation  (N.  186)  may  contain :  — 

(1)  An  Indirect  Statement  (Declaratory)  ;  (2)  An  Indirect  Questio7i  (Inter- 
rogative); (3)  kw  Indirect  Command  (Imperative).  The  Indirect  Statement 
is  described  in  N.  166,  and  many  examples  of  its  use  have  been  employed  in 
the  Exercises;  as,  dux  sese  fortem  esse  dicit.  ("  Fortis  sum"  would  be  the 
Direct  Statement. ) 

Indirect  Statements,     Eeview  N.  166. 
.Direct  Questions.     Eeview  N.  101. 

Indirect  Questions.  Learn  N.  177,  b,  c,  d,  '  An  INDIRECT 
Question  may  follow  :  — 

(1)  A  Verb  of  asking  ;  as,  rogabfi  quis  sit,  /  loill  ash  who  he  is.  (2)  Any 
word  that  hints  a  question;  as,  incertum  est  quid  faoturus  sit,  it  is  uncertain 
(=.  I  wonder)  what  he  is  going  to  do.  The  Subjunctive  mode  (ivisset)  would 
be  required  in  the  following :  /  asked  {wondered,  found  out,  was  uncertain, 
saw,  understood,  judged)  whither  he  had  gone. 

EXERCISE. 

Notice  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  (172). 

1.  Eogavit  utrum  pugnaturus  esset,  necne.  Eogat  num  iturus 
sim.  2.  Utrum  me  visum  (191,  a)  venisti,  annon?  3.  Quam 
in  partem  hostes  fugerunt?  4.  Videbo  quam  in  partem  Ario- 
vistus  iter  fecerit.     5.   Quid  facttirl  sunt  ?     6.   Nobis  non  consta- 


LATIN   LESSONS.  127 

bat  (93,  1,  c)  quid  dicttirus  esset.  7.  XJtram  (195,  7)  in  partem 
Arar  fluit  ?  8.  Arar  (3)  per  fines  Aeduorum  et  Sequanorura 
in  Ehodanum  influit  incredibili  lenitate,  ita  ut  oculis,  in  utrara 
partem  fluat,  jtidicarl  non  possit.  9.  His  (131,  a)  imperavit,  ut, 
quae  diceret  Ariovistus,  cognoscerent  et  ad  se  referrent.  10.  Quod 
jussi  sunt,  faciunt;  ac  omnibus  portis  (159,  Eemark  3)  eruptione 
facta  (157),  cognoscendi  quid  fieret  hostibus  facultatem  non  relin- 
quunt.  11.  Piima  luce,  duplici  acie  instructa,  auxiliis  in  mediam 
aciem  conjectis,  quid  liostes  consilii  (122,  a)  captuii  essent,  ex- 
spectabat.  12.  Dumnorigem  ad  se  vocat ;  quae  in  eo  reprebendat, 
quae  ipse  intelligat,  quae  civitas  queratur,  ostendit ;  monet,  ut  in 
(for)  reliquum  tempus  omnes  suspiciones  vitet.  Dumnorigi  cus- 
todes  ponit,  ut,  quae  agat,  quibuscum  loquatur,  scire  possit.  13. 
Quum  incertus  essem,  ubi  esses,  ire  non  audebam.  14.  Incertum 
est,  utrum  dux  an  miles  Caius  esse  malit.  15.  Num  Gallia  est 
omnis  divisa  in  partes  quattuor?  16.  Num  Caesar  Pompeio  (154) 
fortior  esset,  rogavit.  17.  Quum  ab  bis  quaereret,  quae  civitates 
quantaeque  in  armis  essent  et  quid  (142,  c)  in  bello  possent,  sic 
reperiebat :  plerosque  Belgas  esse  ortos  ab  Germanis. 

English  into  liatln. 

1.  What-sort-of  (quails)  a  man  is  Marcus?  I  asked  wbat- 
sort-of  a  bouse  he  had  sold.  2.  We  will  send-ahead  the  bravest 
soldiers  to  see  in  what  direction  the  Eemi  have  marched.  3.  It 
was  uncertain  whether  he  had  killed  the  slave,  or  not.  4.  He 
asks  whether  we  are  at  home.  5.  Can  Caesar  ascertain  whose 
forces  have  been  conquered  ?  6.  Tell  me,  my  friend,  whether  this 
road  (via)  is  very  long,  or  not.  7.  He  says  (199,  5)  that  they 
cannot  judge  how  brave  those  men  are. 


128  LATIN  LESSONS. 

LESSON    LXXVL 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE   (continued). 

Imperative  Sentences.     Learn  N.  187,  c. 

General  Laws  of  Modes  and  Tenses.  Learn  N.  187  &  «, 
[.  c,  d. 

Translate  the  Latin  of  the  Example  under  N.  187,  e  (both 
Direct  and  Indirect)  ^  as  far  as  voluisset.  Notice  carefully '  the 
changes  in  Mode  and  Tense.  The  Indirect  form  of  the  same  ex- 
tract is  given  in  the  Exercise  below  (sentence  4). 

Questions. 

What  are  tlie  laws  of  modes  and  tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse  ?  When  will 
the  verb  of  a  Subordinate  Clause  be  in  the  Subjunctive  in  Direct  Discourse  ? 
How  is  the  tense  of  a  verb  in  a  Subordinate  Clause  decided  ?  What  mode  is 
used  to  express :  a  Direct  Staternent  l  an  Indirect  Command  1  an  Indirect 
Statement  ?  a  Direct  Question  ?  a  Direct  Cominand  ?  an  Indirect  Question  1 

EXERCISE. 

Tell  what  form  each  verb  would  have,  if  it  were  in  a  Direct 
Quotation. 

1.  Dixit  diem  (=  tempus)  se  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum 
(199,  2)  ;  SI  quid  vellent,  reverterentur  (187,  c).  2.  His  legatis 
Caesar  ita  respondet :  Quum  ea  ita  sint  (183,  a ;  187),  tamen,  si 
obsides  ab  iis  sibi  dentur,  uti  ea,  quae  polliceantur,  (eos)  facttiros 
intelligat,  et  si  Aeduis  de  injtiriis,  quas  ipsis  {=  Aediiis)  sociisque 
eorum  intulerint,  item  si  Allobrogibus  satisfaciant,  sese  cum  iis 
pacem  esse  facttirum.  Divico  respondet :  Ita  Helve tios  a  majori- 
bus  suis  itistittitos  esse,  uti  obsides  accipere,  non  dare,  consuerint 
(79,  4  ;  91,  2,  E.EMARK)  ;  ejus  rei  populum  Eomanum  esse  testem. 
Hoc  response  dat5  discessit.  3.  Ad  haec  Ariovistus  respondit : 
Jus  esse  belli,  ut,  qui  vicissent,  iis  (197,  1),  quos  vicissent,  quem- 
admodum  vellent,  imperarent :  item  populum  Eomanum  victis 
non  ad  alterius  praescriptum,   sed  ad  suum  arbitrium  imperare 


LATIN  LESSONS.  129 

consuesse.  Si  ipse  populo  Eomano  non  praescriberet,  'quemadmo- 
dum  siio  jure  titeretur,  non  oportere  sese  a  populo  Romano  in  suo 
jure  impedlrl.  Aeduis  se  obsides  reddittirum  non  esse,  neque  iis 
neque  eorum  sociis  injuria  bellum  illaturum,  si  stipendiuin  pende- 
rent.  Quum  Caesar  vellet,  congrederetur  (187,  c) ;  (euiii)  intel- 
lecttirum,  quid  (142,  c)  Germani  virtute  possent.  4.  Is  ita  cum 
Caesare  agit  (168,  b)  :  Si  pacem  populus  Eomanus  cum  Helvetiis 
faceret,  in  eam  partem  ittiros  (199,  2)  atque  ibi  futures  Helvetios, 
ubi  e5s  Caesar  constituisset  atque  esse  voluisset. 


LESSON    LXXVIL 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE:    GENERAL  PRACTICE. 

Tell  what  form  each  verb  would  have,  if  it  were  in  a  Direct 
Quotation. 

Eo  concilio  dimisso,  iidem  principes  civitatum  reverterunt 
petieruntque,  uti  sibi  (134,  Eemark)  de  sua  omniumque  salute 
cum  eo  agere  liceret.  Ea  re  impetrata,  sese  omnes  flentes  Caesari 
(138)  ad  peeves  projecerunt.  Loctitus  est  pro  liis  Divitiacus 
Aeduus :  Galliae  totius  factiones  esse  duas :  harum  alterius  prin-  5 
cipatum  tenere  Aeduos,  alterius  Arvernos.  Hi  quum  de  potentatti 
inter  se  multos  annos  contenderent,  factum  esse,  uti  ab  Arvernis 
Sequanisque  Germani  mercede  arcessereiitur  (181,  a),  Horum 
primo  circiter  millia  quindecim  Ehenum  trausisse :  posteaquam 
agros  et  cultum  et  copias  Gallorum  homines  feri  ac  barbari  ada- 10 
massent  (79,  4),  traductos  (199,  2)  pliires ;  nunc  esse  in  Gallia  ad 
centum  et  viginti  millium  numerum.  Cum  his  Aeduos  eorumque 
clientes  armis  contendisse ;  magnam  calamitatem  pulsos  accepisse, 
omnem  nobilitatem,  omnem  senatum,  omnem  equitatum  amisisse. 
Quibus  (115,  d)  proeliis  calamitatibusque  fractos,  (eos)  qui  et  sua  15 
virtute  et  populi  Eomani  amicitia  plurimum  ante  in  Gallia  potuis- 
sent,  coactos  esse  Sequanis  obsides  dare  nobilissimos  civitatis  et 

9 


130  LATIN  LESSONS. 

jurejtiraado  civitatem  obstringere,  sese  neque  obsides  repetittiros 
(199,  2)  neque  auxilium  a  populo  Komaiio  implomttiros.  Unum  se 
esse  ex  omui  civitate  Aeduorum,  qui  addtici  non  potuerit,  ut  jtiraret 
aut  liberos  suos  obsides  daret.    Ob  earn  rem  se  ex  civitate  profugisse 

5  et  Romam  ad  senatum  venisse  auxilium  postulatum  (191,  a),  quod 
solus  neque  jtirejurando  neque  obsidibus  teneretur.  Sed  pejus 
(loli)  victoribus  Sequanis  quam  Aeduis  victis  accidisse,  propterea 
quod  Ariovistus,  rex  Germanorum,  in  eorum  finibus  consedisset 
tertiamque  partem  agri  Sequani,  qui  esset  optimus  totius  Galliae, 

.0  occupavisset  et  nunc  de  altera  parte  tertia  Sequanos  decedere  jube- 
ret,  propterea  quod  paucis  mensibus  (155,  a)  ante  Hamdum  millia 
hominum  viginti  quattuor  ad  eum  venissent,  quibus  locus  ac  sedes 
pararentur.  Futtirum  esse  (181,  «,  Eemark)  paucis  annis,  uti 
omnes  (Galli)  ex  Galliae  finibus  pellerentur  atque  omnes  GermanI 

15  Rhenum  transirent. 


LESSON    LXXVIIL 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE:    GENERAL   PRACTICE. 

XInglisli   into   liatin. 

1.  I  asked  him  whether  he  wished  to  go  with  me,  since  I  had 
invited  him,  or  to  remain  in  the  place  which  he  had  chosen.  2. 
They  said  that  they  thought  that  the  Veneti  were  accustomed  to 
use  all  the  seas  which  were  in-the-vicinity-of  Gaul.  3.  The  king 
replied  that  he  had  crossed  the  Rhine  (because  he  had  been)  invited 
by  the  Gauls,  and  that  Caesar,  alarmed  by  the  messages  which  he 
had  received,  had  enlisted  two  new  legions,  and  had  come  to  attack 
(180)  him.  4.  It  was  said  that  we  had  conspired  among  ourselves, 
(saying)  that  we  would  make  war  on  the  states  (133).  5.  They 
said  that  a  beginning  of  war  had  been  made  by  those,  concerning 
whom  the  general  had  been  informed,  because  they  were  unwilling 
to  give  hostages.     6.  I  shall  ask  whether  he  has  promised  to  give 


LATIN  LESSONS.  131 

back  (that  lie  will  give  back)  the  hostages  that  we  have  sent.  7. 
Lucilius  used-to-say  that  he  wished  those  things  which  he  wrote  to 
be  read  neither  by  the  very  learned  (doctus)  nor  by  the  very  un- 
learned (indoctus).  8.  We  all  know  that  the  Helvetii  informed 
Caesar  that  they  intended  to  march  through  our  province  for  this 
reason,  because  they  had  no  other  way.  9.  He  said  that  all  these 
things  must  be  done  (ago)  by  Caesar,  and  that,  if  the  Eomans 
wished  to  conquer  the  forces  which  had  been  sent  against  them, 
they  must  fight  bravely.  (Express  the  last  verb  impersonally.) 
10.  The  legates  announced  that  all  the  Belgae  were  in  arms,  and 
that  the  Germans,  who  were  dwelling  on-this-side-of  the  Ehine, 
had  joined  themselves  with  them.  11.  Caesar  understood  how 
great  the  danger  was  (177,  c),  and  sent  Galba  to  find  out  what 
states  had  conspired.  12.  Having  heard  the  consul's  speech,  the 
citizens  all  said  that  they  would  send  their  sons  to  the  war,  which 
was  being  carried  on  in  Gaul,  if  he  wished.  13.  He  said  that  he 
did  not  dare  to  cross  the  river,  because  it  was  uncertain  in  what 
direction  the  enemy  intended  to  march  (177,  c). 


132  LATIN  LESSONS. 


MISCELLANEOUS    SENTENCES    FOR   TRANSLATION 
INTO    LATIN. 


In  these  sentences  many  Latin  words  are  used  which  are  not  given  in  the 
General  Vocabularies.  Such  words  follow  the  regidar  laws  of  Oender,  Declen- 
sion, Conjugation,  etc.  Sometimes  a  hint  is  given  with  regard  to  such  words  ; 
as  Plato  (-onis),  (exclamo,  1)  iridicate  that  the  Genitive  0/ Plato  is  PlatoniSr 
and  that  exclamo  is  of  the  First  Conjugation. 

1.  Believe  me  (131,  a),  citizens,  this  man  does  not  intend-to-go.  2.  If  you 
Bhall  not  be  able  to  use  (151,  a)  the  sails  (velum),  use  the  oars  (rfimtis). 
3.  The  Aedui  having  been  conquered  were  compelled  to  give  hostages  to  the 
Sequani.  4.  If  w-e  must  fight  (express  in  two  ways),  let  us  fight  as  bravely 
as  possible.  5.  Having  left  ten  cohorts  near  (ad)  the  sea,  to  serve  as  a 
guard  (137)  to  the  ships,  he  hastened  toward  the  enemy.  6.  If  Caesar  had 
been  informed  (175,  b,  2)  respecting  the  plans  of  the  Gauls,  he  would  have 
urged  the  Romans  to  send  (179,  d)  an  army  into  their  country.  7.  Demaratus, 
the  father  of  king  Tarquinius,  fled  from  Corinth  (Corinthus)  to  Tarquinii 
(-drum).  8.  He  says  that  our  horsemen,  having  followed  the  enemy  about 
three  miles,  captured  very  many  of  them.  9.  The  next  (posterns)  day  he 
calls  together  the  leaders  of  the  forces,  and  tells  (doceo)  them  that  no  city  is 
more  hostile  (infestus)  than  the  royal  (regius)  city  (154).  10.  Being  praised 
by  the  king,  the  soldiers  will  fight  more  bravely.  11.  If  the  Gauls  had  attacked 
(175,  b,  2)  the  town  that  night,  they  would  have  taken  it  easily,  since  no  one 
supposed  (182,  b)  that  they  were-at-hand  (adsum).  12.  When  Pompey  had 
learned  (reperid)  what  (plural)  had  been  done  (gerfl)  at  Corfinium,  he  set 
out  with  two  legions  from  Liiceria,  and  five  days  (155,  a)  after  arrived  at 
Brundisium.  13.  They  say  that  this  city  must  be  stormed;  that  the  citizens 
may  (197,  3)  go  out;  that  the  enemy  can  be  conquered.  14.  Let  the  general 
send  forward  the  greater  part  of  his  soldiers  to  attack  (180)  the  camp.  15.  The 
Gauls  kept-sending  ambassadors  to  me,  the  consul,  who  were-to-confer  (collo- 
quor)  with  me  concerning  peace.  16.  He  intends  to  march  into  Gaul  that  the 
auxiliaries  may  not  be  led  out  of  those  places.  17.  He  says  that,  if  hostages 
should  be  given  to  him,  he  would  make  peace  with  them,  and  would  not  make 
war  upon  their  territory  (133).  18.  Let  us  march  into  the  enemy's  lands 
(ager),  that  they  may  not  winter  in  ours.  19.  Do  you  not  wish  to  remain  at 
home?  20.  Caius  thinks  that,  if  he  should  not  send  men  as  an  aid  (137)  to 
our  leader,  the  forces  of  Ariovistus  would  come  to  the  camp,  and  would  get- 
possession  of  all  the  weapons  (151,  a).  21.  He  said  that,  since  he  had  been 
informed  that  the  Germans  had  come  (199,  3),  he  should  set  out  as  quickly  as 
possible.    22.  Although  Titus  had  hoped  (197, 7)  that  the  courage  of  his  (men) 


LATIN  LESSONS.  133 

wonld  l<e  very  great,  yet  he  did  not  think  that  they  would  conquer  so  great 
forces.  23.  My  father  has  a  house  of  great  height  (152),  which  was  sold  to  him 
by- a  friend,  Cassius  by  name,  for  a  very  small  price  (161,  c).  24.  This  mountain 
is  two  miles  (142,  h)  high,  and  is  much  higher  than  that  hill  which  you  see. 
25.  While  (184,  h,  Remark)  these  things  were  being  done  (ago)  at  Veii 
(-orum),  the  citadel  was  in  great  danger.  26,  The  camp  was  pitched  in  a 
plain  (campus),  which  was  three  miles  (142,  h)  long  and  one-fifth  of  a  mile 
(=  how  many  paces  ?)  wide.  27.  At  the  same  time,  men  were  sent  by  Crassus 
to  Caesar  to  inform  (180)  him  that  all  those  states  had  been  made  provinces  of 
the  Roman  people.  28.  Who  were  those  men  whom  you  sent  to  see  (180)  me  ? 
{Express  in  Jive  ways. )  29.  Such  (so  great)  a  report  (opinio)  of  this  war  will 
be  spread-abroad  (perfero),  that  legates  will  be  sent  to  me  by  those  nations 
(natio).  30.  The  king  replies  that  he  will  not  give-back  the  hostages,  which 
he  has  received,  but  (and,  ac)  will  make  war  on  us  (133).  31.  We  asked 
whether  he  had  said  that  he  would  come  to  Rome.  32.  The  lieutenant  an- 
nounced that  the  Germans,  whom  Ariovistus  was  leading,  had  conquered  the 
Romans  (in)  very  many  battles.  33.  On  the  top  of  the  hill  the  consul  formed 
(instruO)  a  triple  (triplex)  line-of-battle  (composed)  of  the  legions  which  he 
had  enlisted  in  hither  Gaul.  34.  The  barbarians,  frightened  by  the  arrival  of 
our  army,  said  that  they  would  surrender  themselves  and  all  their  (property) 
to  you.  35.  He  encouraged  the  soldiers  of  the  tenth  legion  to  advance  (179  c?  ; 
progredior)  fearlessly  (bravely).  36.  Having  finished  (conficio)  the  German 
(Germanicus)  war  (157),  Caesar  thought  (statuo,  3)  he  ought  to  cross  the 
Rhine ;  but,  since  he  wished  to  cross  without  danger,  he  determined  to  make 
a  bridge.  37.  I  have  always  been  of  such  (is)  a  mind  (152)  as  to  think  (that 
I  thought)  nothing  could  be  better  than  bravery  (154).  38.  The  men  said  that 
they  had  hesitated  to  cross  the  river,  because  it  was  both  very  wide  and  very 
deep.  39.  Caesar,  having  received  (157,  Remark  1)  the  arms  and  hostages, 
will  set  out  into  the  territory  of  the  Ubii.  (Express  in  two  ways  the  words  in- 
italics.)  40.  When  the  senate  had  heard  (184,  a)  that  the  barbarians  excelled 
(praesto)  our  men  (133)  in  bravery,  it  determined  to  send  Caesar  himself, 
hoping  that,  if  he  should  go  (187),the  enemy  would  surrender  the  towns  to  him 
without  a  battle.  41.  He  came  to  free  (180)  the  slaves.  (Express  in  Jive 
ways.)  42.  When  the-contest-had-been-carried-on  (pugno)  for  more  (amplus) 
than  five  days  (154,  h),  Galba,  having  despaired-of  (despero)  victory,  began  to 
.  go  home  by  the  same  route  as  (115,  /)  he  had  come.  43.  It  was  very  difficult 
to  conquer  the  tribes  (gens,  -tis)  that  had  conspired  together  (=  among  them- 
selves), because  they  all  preferred  to  be  killed  fighting  than  to  be  captured. 
44.  If  I  were-to-be-accused  (175,  c,  2)  by  my  fellow-citizens  (civis),  I  should 
prefer  to  go  into  exile  (exsilium)  than  to  be  looked-at  (conspicio)  with  the 
hostile  (infestus)  eyes  of  all.  45.  He  thinks  that  this  fact  (res)  is  very  unlike 
that  (132),  does  n't  he  ?  46.  The  Romans'  bravery  was  so  great  that  they  con- 
quered the  Boii  and  drove  (ag6)  them  many  miles.  47.  The  leader  said  that  the 
citizens  ought  to  be  called  together,  and  that  the  city,  which  had  been  fortified 
by  him,  ought  to  be  defended  by  them.     48.  Do  they  intend  (101,  b)  to  be 


134  LATIN   LESSONS. 

serviceable  (tltilis)  to  us  or  to  the  enemy  ?  49.  The  march  of  the  third  legion 
is  said  to  have  been  hindered  (impedio)  by  a  thick  (densus)  forest  and  a  broad 
river.  50.  It  happened  that  (181,  a)  in  the  consulship  of  Cicero  and  Antonius, 
many  wretches  (sceleratus)  formed  (facio)  a  conspiracy  (conjtiratio)  against 
the  republic.  51.  I  have  heard  that  Plato  (-dnis)  came  to  Tarentum  in  the 
consulship  (157)  of  Camillus  and  Claudius,  two  very  brave  men.  52.  He  is  said 
to  have  said  that  he  thought  it  would  be  very  easy  to  get  possession  of  (161,  a) 
the  government  (imperium)  of  all  Gaul,  since  he  surpassed  (praesto)  all  (133) 
in  wealth  (divitiae,  -arum).  53.  The  Nervii,  concerning  whom  we  have  written 
before,  when  they  were  coming  with  all  their  troops  as  aid  (137)  to  the  Aedui, 
this  battle  having  been  announced,  returned  home.  54.  When  I  was  at  Athens 
(Atlifinae),  I  used  to  see  Marcus,  whose  house  was  very  near  mine  (132). 
55.  If  he  is  about-to-come  to  Rome  without  violence  (vis),  you  may  (197,  3) 
remain  in  the  city,  if  you  wish ;  but-if  (sin)  he  is  going-to-storm  the  city,  I 
fear  that  (179,  e)  we  ourselves  shall  be  killed.  56.  Ought  this  man  to  be  led 
to  death  by  the  consuls,  whom  he  has  protected  at  the  risk  (periculum)  of  his 
life  ?  57.  Your  men  were  frightened,  since  one  was  running  (curro)  from  one 
ship,  another  from  another  (195,  9).  58.  When  night  had  made  (184,  a)  an 
end  of  the  siege  (of  besieging),  the  leader,  a  man  of  great  influence  (152) 
among  his  (countrymen), came  to  seek  (180)  peace.  59.  Let  him,  if  he  wishes, 
use  arms  (161,  a)  to  (causa)  defend  (180)  himself;  let  us  not  (178,  1)  defend 
him.  60.  He  says  that  Nameius,  who  holds  the  chief  place  in  (of)  this  embassy, 
has  been  sent  to  say  that  he  intends-to-march  through  these  places  for  this 
reason,  because  we  are  friendly  to  him.  61.  The-inquiry-must-be-made 
(quaere)  whether  he  is  unwilling  to  go,  or  not  (177,  d),  62.  If  death  were 
feared  (175,  a,  2  &  Remark  4),  Brutus  would  not  have  fallen  in  battle,  and 
the  Decii  would  not  have  exposed  (objicio)  themselves  to  the  weapons  of  the 
enemy.  63.  He  said  that  he  knew  that  Caesar  had  carried  on  very  many  wars 
both  in  Germany  (Germania)  and  in  Gaul.  64.  Being  surrounded  (circum- 
venid)  by  greater  forces  of  the  barbarians,  they  sustained  all  the  attacks  which 
the  enemy  made.  65.  Let  the  cohorts,  which  the  general's  brother  has  sent,  be 
led-back  into  camp.  QQ.  The  enemy's  troops,  which  Labienus  thinks  the 
Romans  have  conquered,  will  storm  our  cities.  67.  He  says  that  the  camp 
must  be  pitched  six  miles  (155,  a)  from  the  Germans'  camp.  68.  Having  sent 
(167,  Remark  1)  the  boy  across  the  river,  he  said  (199,  5)  he  should  not  go 
back  without  him.  69.  When  I  go  (168,  a)  to  Rome,  I  shall  see  the  king, 
concerning  whom  you  have  spoken.  70.  It  is  not  difficult  to  conquer,  when 
the  soldiers  are  very  brave.  71.  My  mother  says  that  she  has  sent  all  the 
letters  (epistola)  which  she  has  written.  72.  He  replied  that  soldiers,  who 
had  been  praised  by  their  commander,  were  much  (155,  c)  braver  than  those 
who  had  been  blamed  (oulpo,  1).  73.  The  consul  said  that  he  had  heard  that 
all  the  larger  cities  had  been  fortified  by  the  same  leaders.  74.  Lead  out  the 
two  legions,  Antonius,  and  follow  the  enemy.  75.  The  Germans,  whom  he 
was  leading,  said  that  they  had  not  been  conquered,  and  could  not  be 
conquered.     76.  Slave,  tell  your  king  that  Romans  will  surrender  themselves 


LATIN  LESSONS.  135 

to  Romans,  not  to  barbarians.  77.  When  the  camp  had  been  pitched  at  the 
foot  of  the  mountain,  we  sent  forward  the  same  scouts  (expldrator)  to  see  (180) 
in  what  place  the  enemy  were  (177,  c).  78.  If  I  were  you  (175,  a,  2),  I  should 
be  happy.    79.  If  he  were  to  ask  (176,  c,  2)  me  to  go  (179,  d),  I  should  go. 

80.  If  he  had  been  unwilling  (175,  h,  2)  to  come,  they  would  have  come  alone. 

81.  He  says  that  the  boy  (115,  c)  you  saw  is  fond  (studiosus)  of  all  the  best 
pursuits  (ars).  82.  Caesar  called  together  the  leaders,  of  whom  there  was  a 
great  number  in  our  camp.  83.  You  said  that  to  conquer  the  Gauls  was  very 
difficult  to  do  (191,  6),  because  they  were  going-to-have  a  much  braver  leader. 

84.  Let  us  send  as  brave  men  as  possible,  since  the  Rhone  must  be  crossed. 

85.  Another  and  greater  danger  is  said  to  have  frightened  the  wretched  citizens. 

86.  Having  overcome  (167,  Remark  1)  the  second  legion,  and  having  captured 
our  ships,  seeing  that  they  could  not  storm  the  camp,  they  had  begun  to  return 
to  the  place  from  which  they  had  set-out.  87.  Word- was-brought- back  (re- 
nuntio)  that  the  ascent  (ascensus,  4)  was  very  easy.  88.  Publius  Considius, 
who  was  regarded  (habeo)  (as)  very  skilled  in  military  science  (124),  and  had 
been  in  Lucius  Sulla's  army,  is  sent-ahead  with  the  scouts  (explorator). 
89.  He  said  that  you  would  find  out  who  he  was  from  the  slave  whom  he  had 
sent  to  you.  90.  Nasica,  when  he  had  come  to  converse  (colloquor)  with  the 
poet  Ennius,  and  the  maid  (ancilla)  had  told  him  Ennius  was  not  at  home, 
thought  that  she  had  said  (it)  at  her  master's  (dominus)  order  (jussu),  and 
that  he  was  within  (intus).  A  few  days  (155,  a)  after,  when  Ennius  had 
come  to  Nasica's  (=  to  Nasica),  Nasica  cries  out  (exclamd,  1)  that  he  is  not 
at  home.  91.  When  Ennius  had  said  that  he  knew  (oognosco)  his  voice, 
Nasica  said  (inquit,  91,  2,  a;  193,  6,  Caution),  "You  are  a  shameless 
(impudens)  fellow  (homo);  I  believed  your  maid,  don't  you  believe  my-own- 
self  (ego  ipse)  ?  " 

SHORT  SENTENCES  TOR  GENERAL  REVIEW. 

92.  I  may  do  this.  We  must  conquer  the  enemy  {write  in  two  ways).  He 
came  to  see  the  city.  Let  us  not  say  this.  93.  Will  Caesar  be  king,  or  not  ? 
He  asks  whether  Caesar  is  going  to  set  out,  or  not.  Don't  say  that  (178,  h), 
94.  Who  is  that  man  ?  He  thinks  that  he  shall  come.  The  soldiers  that  fight 
will  be  praised.  He  says  this  that  he  may  be  thought  wise.  95.  We  are 
ordered  to  set  out  {use  both  jubeo  and  impero).  The  ships  cannot  be  harmed. 
96.  When  this  battle  was  over  (facio),  he  went  to  Rome  {write  the  "  when  " 
clause  in  two  ways).  My  son,  go  with  me.  Having  followed  them  three  miles, 
he  returns  to  the  city.  97.  Having  heard  (of)  this  battle,  they  marched  to  Gaul 
as  quickly  as  possible.  Didn't  you  come  home  to  see  your  brother  ?  {write  in 
five  ways).  Is  this  easy  to  do  ?  No.  The  house  is  twenty  feet  wide.  98.  If  this 
should  be  done,  he  would  be  killed.  The  tower  is  of  great  height.  The  wall  is 
very  high.  The  tower  is  fifteen  feet  higher  than  the  wall.  99.  He  sold  the 
house  for  5000  sestertii.  He  came  to  the  city  of  Geneva.  He  marched  from 
Gaul  towards  Rome.  100.  We  must  inform  him  about  the  war.  He  feared 
that  they  would  come.  I  fear  that  you  will  not  be  brave.  He  says  that  the 
town  will  not  be  taken. 


136  LATIN  LESSONS. 


CAESAR'S  HISTORY  OF  THE  GALLIC  WAR. 
BOOK  L  — Chapteks  1-13. 


References  {to  the  Notes)  and  Explanations  are  given  on  pages  143-148. 
Quantity  is  not  indicated^  except  that  of  the  Penult  in  new  words, 

I.  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres,  quarum  unam  inco- 
lunt  Belgae,  aliam  Aquitaiii,  tertiam,  qui  ipsorum .  lingua  Celtae, 
nostra  Galli  appellantur.  Hi  omnes  lingua,  institutis,  legibus 
inter  se  differunt.     Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  Garumna  flumen,  a  Belgis 

5  Matr5na  et  Sequana  dividit.  Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt 
Belgae,  propterea  quod  a  cultu  atque  liumanitate  provinciae  lon- 
gissime  absunt,  minimeque  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant, 
atque  ea,  quae  ad  efFeminandos  animos  pertinent,  important  > 
proximique  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Ebenum  incolunt,  quibus- 

10  cum  continenter  bellum  gerunt ;  qua  de  causa  Helvetii  quoque 
reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  quod  fere  quotidianis  proeliis 
cum  Germanis  contendunt,  quum  aut  suis  finibus  eos  probibent, 
aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt.  Eorum  una  pars,  quara 
Gallos  obtinere  dictum  est,  initium  capit  a  flumine  Ehodano ;  con- 

15  tinetur  Garumna  flumine,  Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum ;  attingit 
etiam  ab  Sequanis  et  Helvetiis  flumen  Ehenum ;  vergit  ad 
septentriones.  Belgae  ab  extremis  Galliae  finibus  oriuntur ; 
pertinent  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Eheni;  spectant  in  sep- 
tentriones et   orientem  solem.     Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad 

JO  Pyrenaeos  montes  et  eam  partem  Oceani,  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam, 
pertinet ;  spectat  inter  occasum  solis  et  septentriones. 

II.  Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  et  ditissimus  fuit  Orge- 
t5rix.      Is,  Marco   Messala   et   Marco   Pisone   consul! bus,  regni 


LATIN  LESSONS.  137 

cupiditate  inductus  conjuration  em  nobilitatis  fecit  et  civitati 
persuasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent ;  perfacile 
esse,  quum  virtute  omnibus  praestarent,  totius  Galliae  imperio 
potiri.  Id  hoc  facilius  eis  persuasit,  quod  undique  loci  natura 
Helvetii  continentur :  una  ex  parte  flumine  Elieno,  latissimo  atque  5 
altissimo,  qui  agrum  Helvetium  a  Germanis  dividit;  altera  ex 
parte,  monte  Jura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios ; 
tertia,  lacu  Lemanno  et  flumine  Ehodano,  qui  provinciam  nostram 
ab  Helvetiis  dividit.  His  rebus  fiebat,  ut  et  minus  late  vagarentur 
et  minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  inferre  possent ;  qua  de  causa  10 
homines  bellandi  cupidi  magno  dolore  afficiebantur.  Pro  multi- 
tudine  autem  hominum  et  pro  gloria  belli  atque  fortitudinis, 
angustos  se  fines  habere  arbitrabantur,  qui  in  longitudinem 
millia  passuum  ducenta  et  quadraginta,  in  latitudinem  centum  et 
octoginta  patebant.  15 

III.  His  rebus  adducti  et  auctoritate  Orgetortgis  permoti,  con- 
stituerunt  ea,  quae  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent,  comparare; 
jumentorum  et  carrorum  quam  maximum  numerum  coemere; 
sementes  quam  maximas  facere,  ut  in  itinere  copia  frumenti 
suppeteret ;  cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confir-  20 
mare.  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas  biennium  sibi  satis  esse  duxerunt ; 
in  tertium  annum  profectionem  lege  confirmant.  Ad  eas  res  con- 
ficiendas OrgetSrix  deligitur.  Is  sibi  legationem  ad  civitates  sus- 
cepit.  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Castico  Catamantaloedis  filio, 
Sequano,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  raultos  annos  obtinuerat  25 
et  a  senatu  populi  Eomani  amicus  appellatus  erat,  ut  regnum  in 
civitate  sua  occuparet,  quod  pater  ante  habuerat ;  itemque  Dumno- 
rigi  Aeduo,  fratri  Divitiaci,  qui  eo  tempore  principatum  in  civitate 
obtinebat  ac  maxime  plebi  acceptus  erat,  ut  idem  conaretur,  persua- 
det, eique  filiam  suam  in  matrimonium  dat.  Perfacile  factu  esse  30 
illis  probat  conata  perficere,  propterea  quod  ipse  suae  civitatis 
imperium  obtenturus  esset ;  non  esse  dubium,  quin  totius  Galliae 
plurimum  Helvetii  possent ;  se  suis  copiis  suoque  exercitu  illis 
regna  conciliaturum  confirmat.  Hac  oratione  adducti  inter  se 
fidem  et  jusjurandum  dant,  et,  regno  occupato,  per  tres  potentis-  35 


138  LATIN  LESSONS. 

simos  ac  firmissimos  populos  totius  Galliae  sese  potiri  posse 
sperant. 

IV.  Ea  res  est  Helvetiis  per  indicium  enuntiata.  Moribus  suis 
Orgetorigem  ex  vinciilis  causam  dicere  coegerunt.      Damnatum 

5  poenam  sequi  oportebat,  ut  igni  cremaretur.  Die  constituta  causae 
dictionis  Orgetorix  ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam,  ad  homi- 
num  millia  decem,  undique  coegit,  et  omnes  clieutes  obaeratosque 
8U0S,  quorum  maguum  numerum  habebat,  eodem  conduxit;  per 
eos,  ne  causam  diceret,  se  eripuit.  Quum  civitas  ob  eam  rem 
10  incitata  armis  jus  suum  exsequi  conaretur,  multitudinemque  homi- 
num  ex  agris  magistratus  cogerent,  Orgetorix  mortuus  est ;  neque 
abest  suspicio,  ut  Helvetii  arbitrantur,  quiu  ipse  sibi  mortem  con- 
sqiverit. 

V.  Post  ejus  mortem  nihilo  minus  Helvetii  id,  quod  constitue- 
15  rant,  facere  conantur,  ut  e  finibus  suis  exeant.    Ubi  jam  se  ad  eam 

rem  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida  sua  omnia  numero  ad'duo- 
decim,  vicos  ad  quadringentos,  reliqua  privata  aedificia  incendunt ; 
frumentum  omne,  praeterquam  quod  secum  portaturi  erant,  com- 
burunt,   ut,  domum  reditionis  spe  &ublata,  paratiores  ad  omnia 

20  pericula  subeunda  essent ;  trium  mensium  molita  cibaria  sibi 
quemque  domo  efferre  jubent.  Persuadent  Rauracis  et  Tulingis 
et  Latovicis,  finitimis,  uti,  eodem  usi  consilio,  oppidis  suis  vicisque 
exustis,  una  cum  iis  proficiscantur ;  Boiosque,  qui  trans  Elienum 
incoluerant  et  in  agrum  Noricum  transierant  Noreiamque  oppugiia- 

25  rant,  receptos  ad  se  socios  sibi  adsciscunt. 

VI.  Erant  omnino  itinera  duo,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exire 
possent :  unum  per  Sequanos,  angustum  efc  difficile,  inter  montem 
Juram  et  flumen  Ehodanum,  vix  qua  singuli  carri  ducerentur; 
mons  autem  altissimus  impendebat,  ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere 

30  possent :  alterum  per  provinciam  nostram,  multo  facilius  atque 
expeditius,  propterea  quod  inter  fines  Helvetiorum  et  Allobrogum, 
qui  nuper  pacati  erant,  Ehodanus  fluit,  isque  nonnullis  locis  vado 
transitur.  Extremum  oppidum  Allobrogum  est  proximumque 
Helvetiorum  finibus  Geneva.     Ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad  Helvetios 

35  pertinet.     Allobrogibus  sese  vel  persuasuros,  quod  nondum  bono 


LATIN  LESSONS.  139 

anirao  in  populum  Eomanum  viderentur,  existimabant ;  vel  vi 
coacturos,  iit  per  suos  fines  eos  ire  paterentur.  Omnibus  rebus 
ad  profectionem  comparatis,  diem  dicunt,  qua  die  ad  ripam  Rho- 
dani  omnes  conveniant.  Is  dies  erat  ante  diem  quintum  Kalendas 
Apriles,  Lucio  Pisone,  Aulo  Gabinio  consulibus.  5 

VII.  Caesari  quum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  eos  per  provinciam 
nostram  iter  facere  conari,  maturat  ab  urbe  proficisci,  et,  quam 
maximis  potest  itineribus,  in  Galliam  ulteriorem  contendit  et  ad 
Genevam  pervenit.  Provinciae  toti  quam  maximum  potest  militum 
numerum  imperat  (erat  omnino  in  Gallia  ulteriore  legio  una) ;  10 
pontem,  qui  erat  ad  Genevam,  jubet  rescindi.  Ubi  de  ejus  ad- 
ventu  Helvetii  certiores  facti  sunt,  legates  ad  eum  mittunt,  nobilis- 
simos  eivitatis,  cujus  legationis  Nameius  et  Verudoctius  principem 
locum  obtinebant,  qui  dicerent,  sibi  esse  in  animo  sine  ullo  male- 
ficio  iter  per  provinciam  facere,  propterea  quod  aliud  iter  haberent  15 
nullum;  rogare,  ut  ejus  voluntate  id  sibi  facere  liceat,  Caesar, 
quod  memoria  tenebat  Lucium  Cassium  consulem  occisum,  exerci- 
tumque  ejus  ab  Helvetiis  pulsum  et  sub  jugum  missum,  conceden- 
dum  non  putabat;  neque  homines  inimico  animo,  data  facultate 
per  provinciam  itineris  faciendi,  temperaturos  ab  injuria  et  maleficio  20 
existimabat.  Tamen,  ut  spatium  intercedere  posset,  dum  milites, 
quos  imperaverat,  convenirent,  legatis  respondit,  diem  se  ad  de- 
liberandum sumptui'um ;  si  quid  vellent,  ad  Idus  Apriles  reverte- 
rentur. 

VIII.  Interea  ea  legione,  quam  secum  habebat,  militibusque,  25 
qui  ex  provincia  convenerant,  a  lacu  Lemanno,  qui  in  flumen 
Rhodanum  influit,  ad  montem  Juram,  qui  fines  Sequanorum  ab 
Helvetiis  dividit,  millia  passuum  decem  novem  murum,  in  altitu- 
dinem  pedum  sedecim,  fossamque  perducit.  Eo  opere  perfecto 
praesidia  disponit,  castella  commtinit,  quo  facilius,  si  se  invito  30 
transire  conarentur,  proliibere  possit.  Ubi  ea  dies,  quam  consti- 
tuerat  cum  legatis,  venit,  et  legati  ad  eum  reverterunt,  negat  se 
more  et  exemplo  populi  Romani  posse  iter  ulli  per  provinciam  da^-e, 
et,  si  vim  facere  conentur,  proliibiturum  ostendit.  Helvetii,  ea  spe 
ilejecti,  navibus  junctis  ratibasque  compluribus  factis,  alii  vadis  35 


140  LATIN  LESSONS. 

Ehodani,  qua  minima  altitudo  fluminis  erat,  nonnunquam  interdiu, 
saepius  noctu,  si  perrumpere  possent,  conati,  operis  munitione  et 
militum  concursu  et  telis  repulsi,  hoc  conatu  destiterunt. 

IX.  Eelinquebatur  una  per  Sequanos  via,  qua,  Sequanis  invitis, 
5  propter  angustias  ire  non  poterant.     His  quum  sua  sponte  persua- 

dere  non  possent,  legatos  ad  Dumnorigem  Aeduum  mittunt,  ut  eo 
deprecatore  a  Sequanis  impetrarent.  Dumnorix  gratia  et  largi- 
tione  apud  Sequanos  plurimum  poterat,  et  Helvetiis  erat  amicus, 
quod  ex  ea  civitate  Orgetorigis  filiam  in  matrimoniura  duxerat ; 

10  et  cupiditate  regni  adductus  novis  rebus  studebat,  et  quam  pluri- 
mas  civitates  suo  sibi  beneficio  habere  obstrictas  volebat.  Itaque 
rem  suscipit  et  a  Sequanis  impetrat,  ut  per  fines  suos  Helvetios 
ire  patiantur,  obsidesque  uti  inter  sese  dent,  perficit :  Sequani,  ne 
itinere  Helvetios  prohibeant ;  Helvetii,  ut  sine  maleficio  et  injuria 

15  tran scant. 

X.  Caesari  renuntiatur  Helvetiis  esse  in  animo  per  agrum 
Sequanorura  et  Aeduorum  iter  in  SantSnum  fines  facere,  qui  non 
longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt,  quae  civitas  est  in  provincia. 
Id  si  fieret,  intelligebat  magno  cum  periculo  provinciae  futurum, 

20  ut  homines  bellicosos,  populi  Eomani  inimicos,  locis  patentibus 
maximeque  frumentariis  finitimos  haberet.  Ob  eas  causas  ei  mu- 
nition!, quam  fecerat,  Titum  Labienum  legatum  praefecit ;  ipse  in 
Italiam  magnis  itineribus  contendit  duasque  ibi  legiones  conscribit, 
et  tres,  quae  circum  Aquileiam  hiemabant,  ex  hibernis  educit ;  et 

25  qua  proximum  iter  in  ulteriorem  Galliam  per  Alpes  erat,  cum  his 
quinque  legionibus  ire  contendit.  Ibi  Centrones  et  Graioceli  et 
Caturiges,  locis  superior! bus  occupatis,  itinere  exercitum  prohibere 
conantur.  Compluribus  his  proeliis  pulsis,  ab  Oc^lo,  quod  est 
citerioris  provinciae    extremum,  in   fines  Vocontiorum   ulterioris 

50  provinciae  die  septimo  pervenit ;  inde  in  AllobrSgum  fines,  ab 
Allobrogibus  in  Segusiavos  exercitum  ducit.  Hi  sunt  extra  pro- 
vinciam  trans  Ehodanum  primi. 

XI.  Helvetii  jam  per  angustias  et  fines  Sequanorum  suas  copias 
transduxerant,  et  in  Aeduorum  fines  pervenerant  eorumque  agros 

35  populabantur.     Aedui,  quum  se  suaque  ab  iis  defendere  non  pos- 


LATIN  LESSONS.  141 

sent,  legates  ad  Caesarem  mittunt  rogatum  auxilium :  Ita  se  omni 
tempore  de  populo  Eomano  meritos  esse,  ut  paene  in  conspectu 
exercitus  nostri  agri  vastari,  liberi  eorum  in  servitutem  abduci, 
oppida  expugnari  non  debuerint.  Eodem  tpmpore  Aedui  Ambarri, 
necessarii  et  consanguinei  Aeduorum,  Caesarem  certiorem  faciunt,  \ 
sese  depopulatis  agris  non  facile  ab  oppidis  vim  hostium  prohibere. 
Item  Allobroges,  qui  trans  Khodanum  vicos  possessionesque  habe- 
bant,  fuga  se  ad  Caesarem  recipiunt  et  demonstrant,  sibi  praeter 
agri  solum  nihil  esse  reliqui.  Quibus  rebus  adductus  Caesar  non 
exspectandum  sibi  statuit,  dum,  omnibus  fortunis  sociorum  con-  IC 
sumptis,  in  SantSnos  Helvetii  pervenirent. 

XII.  Plumen  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  Aeduorum  et  Sequanorum 
in  Ehodanum  influit  incredibili  lenitate,  ita  ut  oculis,  in  utram 
partem  fluat,  judicari  non  possit.  Id  Helvetii  ratibus  ac  lintribus 
junctis  transibant.  Ubi  per  exploratores  Caesar  certior  factus  est,  15 
tres  jam  copiarum  partes  Helvetios  id  flumen  transduxisse,  quartam 
vero  partem  citra  flumen  Ararim  reliquam  esse,  de  tertia  vigilia 
cum  legionibus  tribus  e  castris  profectus  ad  cam  partem  pervenit, 
quae  nondum  flumen  transierat.  Eos  impeditos  et  inopinantes 
aggressus  magnam  eorum  partem  concidit;  reliqui  fugae  sese  20 
mandarunt  atque  in  proximas  silvas  abdiderunt.  Is  pagus  appel- 
labatur  Tigurinus ;  nam  omnis  civitas  Helvetia  in  quattuor  pagos 
divisa  est.  Hie  pagus  unus,  quum  domo  exisset  patrum  nostro- 
rum  memoria,  Lucium  Cassium  consulem  interfecerat  et  ejus  exer- 
citum  sub  jugum  miserat.  Ita,  sive  casu  sive  consilio  d eorum  25 
immortalium,  quae  pars  civitatis  Helvetiae  insignem  calamitatem 
populo  Eomano  intulerat,  ea  princeps  poenas  persolvit.  Qua  in  re 
Caesar  non  solum  publicas,  sed  etiam  privatas  injurias  ultus  est, 
quod  ejus  soceri  Lucii  Pisonis  avum,  Lucium  Pisonem  legatum, 
Tiguiini  eodem  proelio,  quo  Cassium,  interfecerant.  30 

XIII.  Hoc  proelio  facto,  reliquas  copias  Helvetiorum  ut  conse- 
qui  posset,  pontem  in  Arare  faciendum  curat  atque  ita  exercitum 
transducit.  Helvetii  repentino  ejus  adventu  commoti,  quum  id, 
quod  ipsi  diebus  viginti  aegerrime  confecerant,  ut  flumen  transi- 
rent,  ilium  uno  die  fecisse  intelligerent,  legatos  ad  eum  mittunt;   5 


142  LATIN   LESSONS. 

cujus  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  bello  Cassiano  dux  Hel- 
vetiorum  fuerat.  Is  ita  cum  Caesare  agit :  Si  pacem  populus 
Eomanus  cum  Helvetiis  faceret,  in  earn  partem  ituros  atque  ibi 
futures  Helvetios,  ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisset  atque  esse  voluisset; 

5  sin  bello  persequi  perseveraret,  reminisceretur  et  veteris  incommodi 
populi  Eomani  et  pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum.  Quod  improviso 
unum  pagum  adortus  esset,  quum  ii,  qui  flumen  transissent,  suis 
auxilium  ferre  non  possent,  ne  ob  eam  rem  aut  suae  magnopere 
virtuti  tribueret  aut  ipsos  despiceret ;    se  ita  a  patnbus  majori- 

10  busque  suis  didicisse,  ^ut  magis  virtute  quam  dolo  contenderent 
aut  insidiis  niterentur.  Quare  ne  committeret,  ut  is  locus,  ubi 
constitissent,  ex  calamitate  populi  Romani  et  internecione  e^tercitus 
nomen  caperet  aut  memoriam  proderet. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  143 

CAESAR'S   GALLIC   WAR:    Chapters  1-13. 
REFERENCES  AND  EXPLANATIONS. 

CHAPTER   I. 

Divisa,  189,  b,  —  Quarum,  122.  —  Tertiam,  qui  =  tertiam  partem  ii  in- 
colunt,  qui.  —  Ipsorum,  emphatic,  their  own.  —  Celtae,  107.  —  Lingua,  in- 
stitutis,  legibus,  153.  —  Inter  se,  112,  h.  —  Dividit,  singular,  as  the  rivers 
form  but  one  boundary  (117,  h,  Remark).  —  Horum,  122,  a. — Atque,  96, 
a.  — Minime  saepe,  very  5eZc?om.  —  Effeminandos,  why  not  the  Gerund?  (190, 
a. )  —  Germanis,  132.  —  Quibuscum,  53,  a.  —  Reliquos  Gallos,  123,  e.  — 
Virtute,  153.  —  Suis  finibus,  147.  —  Eorum,  of  the  enem^  (literally,  their). 
To  whom  do  suis,  eos,  ipsi,  eorum  refer  ? — Eorum  una  pars,  onejpart  of  their 
territory  (literally,  of  them,  the  people  being  used  for  their  country);  or  we 
may  supply  finium,  making  eorum  a  Possessive  Genitive.  —  Dictum  est,  the 
subject  is  quam  Gallos  obtinere,  188,  h,  1.  — Ab  Sequanis,  on  {from)  the  side 
of  the  Sequani.  —  Ad  Hispaniam,  near  Spain. 

CHAPTER  II. 

Ditissimus,  36,  a.  — Marco  Messala,  etc.,  157  (3).  —  Nobilitatis,  civitati, 
collective  force,  the  nobles,  the  citizens.  —  Civitati,  131,  a.  —  Cum  copiis,  150, 
a.  — Exirent,  117,  c;  179,  d.  —  Perfacile  to  potiri,  Indirect  Discourse;  the 
verb  of  saying  is  implied  in  persuasit  (186,  a).  The  subject  of  esse  is  potiri, 
etc.  (165,  a). — Why  is  perfacile  Neuter,  and  how  does  it  differ  from  facile? 
(109,  b  ;  40,  d.)—  Give  two  reasons  for  the  mode  of  praestarent  (187,  182, 
b).  —  Omnibus,  133. — Imperio,  151,  a. — Id,  that  step,  or  course.  —  Hoc, 
149.  —  Loci  natura,  by  the  nature  of  their  situation.  —  Una  ex  parte,  on  one 
side.  —  Latissimo,  40,  b.  —  Nostram  =  Romanam.  —  Rebus,  149.  —  Fiebat, 
the  subject  is  ut  — possent  (188,  b,  2).  —  Vagarentur,  possent,  181,  a.— 
Finitimis,  133.  —  Homines,  106.  —  Bellandi,  190.  —Pro,  in  proportion  to, 
considering.  —  Qui  (fines).  —  Millja,  142,  b. 

CHAPTER  III. 

Pertinerent,  181,  c  (ea  =  such  thi^igs).  —  ComT^Bxare,  coemere,  facere, 
confirmare,  165,  &.  —  Quam,  40,  c.  —  Suppeteret,  179. —  Ad  conficiendas, 
190,  a;  137,  a.  — Satis,  here  equivalent  to  a  Predicate  Adjective. — Duxe> 


144  LATIN   LESSONS. 

runt,  they  reckoned.  — In.  tertium  annum, /or  the  third  year.  — Sibi  suscepit, 
133.  — Ad  civitates,  not  the  Dative,  because  legationem  implies  mo^to?i. — 
Persuadet,  168,  h.  —  Castico,  131,  a.  -  Filio,  Sequano,  106.  —  Annos,  142, 
a.  —  Amicus,  107 ;  this  title,  friend,  conferred  by  the  Roman  Senate,  was 
highly  prized  by  foreign  rulers.  —  Sua,  112,  a.  —  Occuparet,  conaretur,  172, 
Remark  2.  —  Plebi,  131,  h. — Acceptus  is  here  an  Adjective.  —  Perfacile, 
etc..  Indirect  Discourse.  Perfacile  agrees  with  the  subject  of  esse  (perficere 
conata).  —  Factu,  191,  h.  —  Illis  probat,  he  shows  {to)  ^^ew.  —  Obtenturus 
esset,  82,  a;  172,  Remark  2;  187. —  Esse,  the  subject  is  quin  — possent 
(188,  h,  2),  which  is  modified  by  dubium  (109,  &).  — Galliae,  122,  &.  — Pluri- 
mum,  94,  c?,  1.  —  Possent,  what  mode  in  Direct  Discourse?  (181,  d.)  —  Copiis, 
wealth.  —  Conciliaturum,  199,  2.  —  Begno  occupato,  167.  —  Galliae  potiri, 
151,  a,  Remark. 

CHAPTEE   IV. 

Per  indicium,  hy  {through)  informers  (literally,  information).  —  Moribus, 
149.  — Ex  —  dicere,  to  plead  his  cause  (=  make  his  defence)  in  {from)  chains. 
—  Damnatum,  agrees  with  eum  (understood),  the  object  of  sequi.  Translate, 
if  he  should  he  condemned  (189,  d).  —  Oportebat,  the  subject  is  (eum)  damna- 
tum poenam  sequi  (188,  h,  1).  —  TJt  cremaretur,  in  apposition  with  poenam 
(181,  e).— Die  constituta,  on  the  appointed  day,  160.  Dies  is  sometimes 
feminine,  when  it  denotes  2,  fixed  time.  —  Ad  (before  hominum).  Adverb  of 
degree  {about),  modifying  decem.  — Millia,  106.  —  Eodem,  Adverb.  —  Diceret, 
179.  —  Exsequi,  assert.  —  Conaretur,  cogerent,  184,  a.  —  Magistratus,  Nomi- 
native. —Ut  arbitrantur,  197,  5.  —  Consciverit,  181,  d. 


CHAPTEE    V. 

Nihilo,  155.  —  Ut  —  exeant,  in  apposition  with  id,  181,  e.  —  Paratos,  Ad- 
jective.— Numero,  153.  -Ad  (before duodecim),  Adverb.  —  Domum,  159,  h ; 
the  motion  is  implied  in  reditionis.  —  Spe,  157.  —  Ad  subeunda,  190,  a  ;  137, 
a.  —  Essent,  172,  Remark  2.  — Trium  mensium,  etc.,  three  months'  supplies 
(121).  —  Domo,  159,  a. — Jubent,  why  is  the  Present  Historical  used?  — 
Rauracis,  131,  a.  ~  TJti  —  ut.  —  Usi,  having  adopted.  —  Consilio,  151,  a. 
—  Oppidis,  157.  —  Una,  94,  2.  —  Cum  iis,  we  should  expect  to  find  secum.  — 
Oppugnarant,  79,  4.  —  Ad  se  limits  receptos,  received  into  their  number.  — 
Socios,  106.  —  Sibi,  133. 

CHAPTEE  YI. 

Itineribus,  159,  Remark  3  ;  the  antecedent  is  sometimes  repeated  for  em- 
phasis. —  Domo,  159,  a.  — Possent,  181,  c ;  that  is,  routes  (of  such  a  kind) 
that  they  could  go  out  by  them.  —  Unum,  alterum,  appositives  to  itinera.  — 


LATIN  LESSONS.  145 

Qua,  94,  2.  —  Ducerentur,  181,  c  (so  narrow  that,  etc.).  —  Singuli,  41,  a.  — 
Perpauci,  40,  d.  —  Possent,  181.  —  Multo,  155.  —  Locis,  159,  Remark  2.  — 
Vado,  151.  —  Finibus,  132.  —  Allobrogibus,  131,  a.  —  Persuasuros,  coactu- 
ros,  199,  2 ;  this  is  Indirect  Discourse,  the  introductory  verb  being  existima- 
bant  (186,  a).  —  Viderentur,  187.  —Bono  animo,  kindly  disposed  (152).  — 
Vi,  how  declined?  —  Paterentur,  Subjunctive  for  two  reasons:  187,  179,  d. 

—  Eos  =  the  Helvetii.  —  Suos  refers  to  the  Allobroges.  — Conveniant,  179,  a. 

—  Ante  diem,  etc.,  study  carefully  161,  b  &  Rule  1.  What  were  tlie  three 
reckoning  points  in  the  month,  and  what  was  the  date  of  each  ?  What  part  of 
speech  is  Apriles  1  (161,  a. )  —  Lucio,  etc.,  157  (3). 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Nuntiatum  esset,  184,  a. —  Eos  conari,  in  apposition  with  id,  186,  a.  — 
Urbe,  the  city  (Rome).  —  Ulteriorem  =  Trans alpinam.  —Ad  Genevam,  159, 
Remark  1.  —  Imperat,  Ze^;ie6.  — Nobilissimos,  109;  106.— Dicer ent,  179,  a. 
—  Sibi  esse  .  .  .  liceat,  Indirect  Discourse  (Declaratory  Sentence),  187,  a.  The 
principal  verbs  are  esse  and  rogare ;  the  subordinate  verbs  are  haberent  and 
liceat.  The  subject  of  esse  is  facere  iter;  the  subject  of  rogare  is  se  (under- 
stood).—Sibi  (before  esse),  135.  —  Voluntate,  149.  — Sibi  (before  facere), 
197,  2.  —  Liceat,  Subjunctive  for  two  reasons:  187;  179,  d.  What  is  the 
subject  of  liceat  1  —  Memoria  tenebat  =  meminerat  (151).  —  Occisum,  pul- 
sum,  missum,  concedendum,  199,  2.  —Sub  jugum,  why  not  sub  jugo"?  (95, 
c. )  What  was  the  military  jugum  I  (see  Vocabulary. )  -  Concedendum  (esse), 
the  subject  is  the  request  of  the  Helvetii.  —  Animo,  152.  — Data  facultate 
(157,  Remark  2),  if  the  opportimity  should  he  given.  —  Faciendi,  190,  a.  — 
Temperatures,  199,  2.  —  Spatium  =  tempus.  —  Convenirent,  184,  6.  —Diem, 
time. — Vellent,  187,  c,  d.  —  Keverterentur,  a  command  in  Indirect  Discourse. 
In  the  Direct  form  the  Latin  would  be  :  Si  quid  voletis,  revertimini.  —Ad 
Idus,  on  the  \2,th  of  April  (161,  3). 


CHAPTEE  YIIT. 

Legione,  militibus,  151.  —  Millia  passuum,  123,  c  ;  142,  h.  —  Decem 
novem,  is  this  the  usual  position  of  a  numeral"?  (193,  1.)  In  what  other  ways 
can  nineteen  be  expressed  ?— Pedum,  121.  —  Disponit,  99,  2.  —  Quo,  why 
not  utl  (179,  &.)  —  Se  invito,  157,  Remark  2.  —  Conarentur,  185;  172,  Re- 
mark 2.  Notice  that  communit  is  followed  by  a  Primary  tense  (possit)  and 
also  by  a  Secondary  tense  (conarentur).  —  Negat  —  dicit  non  (199,  5).  — 
More,  in  accordance  with  the  practice  (149).  — Iter,  the  privilege  of  going.  — 
"Dili,  129.  —Vim  facere,  to  employ  force.  —  Conentur,  187.  —  Prohibiturum, 
for  se  prohibiturum  esse.  — Spe  (147),  disappointed  (downcast)  in  this  hope. 
—  Navibus  junctis  (151),  by  making  bridges  of  boats.  — Alii,  some^  meaning 

10 


146  -      LATIN   LESSONS. 

that  most  of  the  Helvetii  crossed  by  bridges  of  boats  and  rafts.  —  Nonnunquam, 
195,  1.  —  Possent  (177,  Remark  1),  having  tried  {to  see)  whether  {if)  they 
could.  —  Operis  munitione  (=  muro  fossaque),  by  the  strength  of  the  works. 
—  Conatu,  147. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Una  via,  only  the  route.  —  Per  Sequanos  =  per  fines  Sequanorum.  —  Qua, 
159,  Remark  3.  —  Seqnanis  invitis,  157,  Remark  2,  —His,  131,  a. —  Sua 
sponte,  of  themselves ;  that  is,  without  assistance.  —  Possent,  182,  b.  —  Eo 
deprecatore,  through  his  intercession  {he  being  an  intercessor),  157.  —  Gratia, 
149.  —  Plurimum,  94,  d,  1;  142,  c.  —  Helvetiis,  131,  6.  —  Novis  rebus,  for 
a  revolution  {new  things),  131,  a.  — Quam,  40,  c.  —  Sibi  depends  on  obstric- 
tas.  —  Beneficio,  151. —  Ut  patiantur  is  the  object  of  impetrat;  uti  dent, 
the  object  of  perficit,  181,  b.  — Inter  se  dent,  exchange,  53,  d.  —  Sequani, 
Helvetii,  each  the  subject  of  dent  (repeated).  — Ne  prohibeant,  ut  transeant, 
179. 

CHAPTER   X. 

Eenuntiatur,  word  is  brought  back,  93,  2.  —  Helvetiis,  etc.,  see  note  on 
sibi  esse  in  animo.  Chapter  VII.  What  is  the  subject  of  esse  ?  —  Id  si  fieret, 
etc.,  Indirect  Discourse,  187,  a.  Futurum  (esse)  is  the  principal  verb;  its 
subject  is  ut . . ,  haberet,  188,  b,  2;  181,  a.  —  Id  =  facere  iter;  its  position 
is  emphatic.  —  Locis,  132.  —  Munitioni,  133.  — Qua,  94,  2.  —  In  Galliam, 
because  iter  implies  motion.  —  Locis  occupatis,  157.  —  Itinere,  147.  —  Com- 
pluribus,  etc. ;  tlie  order  is :  his  pulsis  compluribus  proeliis,  157.  —  Ab 
Ocelo,  159,  Remark  1.  —  Citerioris  (ulterioris)  provinciae  =  Hither  (Farther) 
Gaul.  —  Extremum  (oppidum),  last,  most  westerly.  — Die,  160.  —Trans,  west 
of  —  Primi,  emphatic  position. 


CHAPTER  XT. 

Angustias,  see  Chapter  VI.  (angustum  et  difficile).  —Possent,  182,  b.  — 
Sua,  109.  —  Eogatum,  191,  a.  —  Ita  meritos  esse  de,  {saying)  that  they  had 
deserved  so  well  of  — Nostri,  with  exercitus.  — Vastari  non  debuerint,  ought 
not  to  have  been  laid  waste,  173,  Caution.  —  Eorum  =  sui.  —  Depopulatis, 
80,  Remark  3.  —  Non  facile  =  vix.  —  Demonstrant  =  eum  certiorem  faci- 
unt.  —  Sibi  praeter  agri  solum,  etc.,  that  they  have  nothing  left  {of  a  re- 
mainder) except  the  soil  of  their  farms  {of  the  field).  —  Sibi,  135.  —  Nihil, 
subject  of  esse.  — Keliqui,  122,  a.  —  Quibus  rebus,  115,  d.  —  Exspectandum, 
198, 199,  2.  — Sibi,  136.  —  Fortunis,  157.  —  Pervenirent,  184,  b. 


LATIN  LESSONS.  147 


CHAPTER  XII. 

Flumen  est  Arar,  there  is  a  river  (called)  the  Arar  (Sa6ne).  —Quod,  what 
is  the  antecedent  ?  —  Lenitate,  150.  —  Utram,  195,  7.  —  Fluat,  177,  c.  —  Pos- 
sit,  181.  —  Per  exploratores,  151,  Caution.  -— Copiarum,  122,  a.  —Flumen, 
141,  c.  —  Ararim,  see  Vocabulary.  —  De  tertia  vigilia,  in  the  third  watch  (de 
shows  that  it  was  after  the  beginning  of  the  watch).  When  did  the  third 
watch  begin?  (see  Vocabulary. )  —  Eorum,  122,  a.  —  Concidit,  79,  6,  Remark. 
—  Transierat,  mandarunt,  79,  4.  —  In  silvas,  in  the  forests  (or  woods).  The 
Accusative  indicates  that  they  retreated  into,  and  hid  themselves  in.  — Tiguri- 
nus,  107.  —  Divisa,  189,  &.  —  Exisset,  79,  4;  184,  a.  —  Memoria,  160.— 
Lucium  Cassium,  what  is  the  Vocative  ?  —  Casu,  149.  —  Quae  pars,  etc.,  — 
ea  pars  civitatis  Helvetiae,  quae.  —  Populo,  133.  —  Princeps,  110,  a.— 
Persolvit,  paid  (in  full,  99,  1).  —  Qua  in  re,  115,  ^.  —  Publicas,  that  is,  done 
to  the  state,  —  Privatas,  personal  {dionoi  to  his  family).  —  Quod  ejus  soceri, 
etc.,  the  order  is  :  quod  Tigurini,  eodem  proelio  (160),  quo  (interfecerant) 
Cassium,  interfecerant  Lucium  Pisonem  legatum  (Cassii),  avum  ejus  {= 
Caesar's)  soceri  Lucii  Pisonis. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

Hoc  proelio  facto  =  post  hoc  proelium.  —  Copias,  123,  e.  —  Ut  posset, 
purpose  of  faciendum  curat  (172,  Remark  2).  —In  Arare,  over  the  Arar.  — 
Pontem  faciendum,  189,  h.  — Intelligerent  (184,  a),  when  they  saw.—Tii . . . 
transirent,  in  apposition  with  id  (181,  ^),  namely,  the  crossing  of  the  river.  — 
Bello  Cassiano,  160;  110,  c.  — Dux  Helvetiorum,  124.  — Is  ita  cum  Caesare 
agit  introduces  a  passage  of  Indirect  Discourse  (186,  187),  extending  through 
the  remainder  of  the  chapter.  This  is  given  under  Note  187,  e,  together  with 
the  Latin  of  the  Direct  form,  and  the  two  should  be  carefully  studied  and  com- 
pared. A  general  outline  of  each  sentence  is  here  given.  Si  to  Helvetiorum. 
This  sentence  is  Declaratory.,  as  far  as  voluisset ;  the  remainder  is  Imperative. 
The  Principal  Verbs  in  the  Declaratory  part  are  ituros  (esse),  futures  (esse) ; 
the  Principal  Verb  in  the  Imperative  part  is  reminisceretur,  let  him  remember 
{he  should  remember)  (187,  c).  —  Constituisset,  Voluisset,  Future  Perfect  In- 
dicative {you  shall  have.,  etc.)  in  Direct  Discourse  (see  187,  e).  — Bello,  151.  — 
Persequi  (eos),  in  pursuing  them.  —  Perseveraret,  the  subject  is  Caesar.  — 
Reminisceretur,  what  form  in  Direct  Discourse  ?  — Incommodi,  the  defeat 
and  death  of  Cassius  (125).  —  Quod  to  niterentur.  This  sentence  is  Impera- 
tive., to  despiceret ;  the  remainder  is  Declaratory.  The  Principal  Verbs  in  the 
Imperative  part  are  (ne)  tribueret,  despiceret,  let  him  not  {—  that  he  should 
not)  attribute  (the  victory),  ttc,  or  despise  them  ;  the  Principal  Verb  in  the 
Declaratory  part  is  didicisse.  —  Quod,  182,  d.  —  Improvise,  notice  the  deri- 
vation  (liter^My  =  in  an  unforeseen  manner).  — Possent,  what  mode  in 


148  LATIN  LESSONS. 

Direct  Discourse  ?  (184,  a.)  — Magnopere,  39.  —  Majoribus,  36,  6.  —  Didlciiie 
zzinstitutos  esse.  —  Insidiis  niterentur,  to  rely  {that  they  should  rely)  on 
ambuscades  (151).  —  Contenderent,  niterentur,  what  mode  in  Direct  Dis- 
course? (181,  Remark.  )  — Qnare  to  proderet.  This  s&niQncQ  is  Imperative y 
the  Principal  Clause  being  ne  (Caesar)  committeret :  let  him  not  (=  that  he 
shmild  not)  cause  the  place  where  they  should  take  (should  have  taken)  their 
stand  to  receive  (literally,  cause  that  it  should  receive)  a  name,  etc.,  or  trans- 
mit the  remembrance  (of  the  defeat  to  future  generations).  —  Gonstitissent, 
Future  Perfect  Indicative  (we  shall  have  taken  our  stand)  in  Direct  Discourse. 
—  Caperet,  proderet,  what  mode  in  Direct  Discourse  ?  (181,  b,) 


NOTES. 


THE  ESSENTIALS   OF   LATIN   GEAMMAE. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

In  Latin  words,  changes  were  often  made  which  rendered  them  easier 
to  pronounce.  These  are  called  Euphonic  changes.  Some  of  the  most 
common  changes  are  these  :  — 

1.  Consonant  Changes. 

(1.)  Qu  was  regarded  as  a  single  consonant,  equivalent  to  C.  Hence 
we  find  cujus  as  the  genitive  of  qui ;  seciitus  (from  sequor)  for  sequu- 
tus  ;  cum  for  quum. 

(2.)  S  between  two  vowels  became  R;  as,  eram  and  er5  (from  stem 
es);  flSris  (from  flos) ;  corporis  (from  corpus). 

(3.)  C  and  G  united  with  S,  forming  X ;  as  pacs  =  pax;  regs  =  rex; 
regsi  =  rexi.     H  did  the  same  ;  as,  vehsi  =  vexi ;  trahsi  =  traxi. 

(4.)  D  and  T  were 

a.  Suppressed  before  S ;  as,  pes  for  peds ;    custos  for  custods ; 

virtiis  for  virtuts  ;  pars  for  parts. 

b.  Changed  to  S  ;  as,  possum  for  potsum  ;  cessi  for  cedsi.     This 

change  is  called  Assimilation.     See  (6),  below. 

(5.)  M  was  changed  to  N  before  a  lingual;  as,  septen(m)decim  ; 
eun(m)dem  (so  English  iden-tity,  from  idem). 

(6.)  Assimilation  (from  two  Latin  words,  ad,  to,  and  siTdiliSy  like,  is  a 
change  made  in  a  consonant  by  which  it  becomes  like  the  following  conso- 
nant. The  form  of  the  word  assimilation  itself  is  the  result  of  this 
change,  d  being  changed  to  s. 

It  is  very  common  in  the  case  of  Prepositions  compounded  with  other 
words.  A  good  example  of  it  is  seen  in  the  verb  affero,  a  compound 
of  ad  and  fer5.  Its  Present  Indicative  is  af-fero;  Perfect  Indicative, 
at-tuli;  Supine,  al-latum. 


150  NOTES. 


2.  Vowel  Chang^es. 

Vowel  changes  are  frequent.  Notes  will  be  given  on  special  changes 
when  they  shall  occur.     Some  of  those  most  common  are  given  here  :  — 

(1. )  E  changed  to  I ;  as,  militis  (from  miles) ;  principis  (from  prin- 
ceps) ;  verticis  (from  vertex) ;  nominis  (from  nomen) ;  retineo  (from 
re  +  teneo). 

(2.)  U  changed  to  I ;  as,  capitis  (from  caput). 

(3.)  O  changed  to  I;  as,  virginis  (from  virg5). 

(4.)  O  changed  to  U ;  as,  corpus  (gen.  corporis)  for  corpos. 

(6. )  A  changed  to  I ;  as,  conficio  (from  con  +  facio). 

(6.)  A  changed  to  E;  as,  confectum  (from  con  +  factum). 

(7.)  OE  changed  to  U;  as,  punio  (from  poena);  munio  (from 
tnoenia). 

(8.)  AE  changed  to  I;  as,  occido  (from  ob  +  caedo). 

(9.)  AU  changed  to  U ;  as,  includo  (from  in  +  claudo). 


NOUNS. 

Outline  of  Kuleg  for  Gender. 

3.  Gender  decided  by  meaning*  These  Rules  apply  to  all  Declen- 
sions ;  A  small  figure  at  the  right  of  a  word  refers  to  Remarks  at  the  end 
of  these  tables, 

Masculine.1  Feminine.2  ^  Neuter. 


Names  of  Males,  Rivers, 
Winds,  and  Moun- 
tains, 


Names  of  Females,  Coun- 
tries, Towns,  Islands, 
and  Trees. 


Indeclinahle  Nouns;  In- 
finitives, Phrases,  Clau- 
ses, and  other  parts  ot 
speech  used  as  inder 
clinable  nouns. 


4.  Gender  decided  by  ending  of  Nominative  Singular. 

(1.)  First  Declension. 
Masculine.  Feminine.  Neuter. 

cf  9,  c.  I  a.  I 

(2.)  Second  Declension. 
us,8er,  ir.  |  I  ""^v 

*  Some  names  of  oivers,  countries,  towns,  etc.,  follow  the  rules  of  gender 
by  ending. 


NOTES. 


151 


Mascijlike. 


6,  or,  OS,  er,  gs  (in- 
creasing in  the  Geni- 
tive to  idis  or  itis). 


US.* 


(3.)  Third  Declension. 
Feminine. 
as,  es  (not  increasing  in 
the  Genitive),  is,  ys, 
X,  s  (preceded  by  a 
consonant),  do,  g5,  io 
(abstract  and  collec- 
tive), us  (Genitive, 
-udis  or  -utis). 

(4.)  Fourth  Declension, 


Neuter. 
a,  e,  i,  y,  c,  1,  t,  men 

(Genitive,  -minis),  ar, 
ur,  us  (Genitive,  -6ris 
or  -6ris). 


I 


(5.)  Fifth  Declension, 


Remarks.     1.   Because  vir  (m,an),  fluvius  (river),  ventus  (wind), 
mons  {mountain),  are  Masculine. 

2.  Because  mulier  {woman),  terra  {land,  country),  urbs  {city),  insula 
(island),  arbor  (tree),  are  Feminine. 

3.  Pelagus  {sea),  virus  (poiso7i),  vulgus  (crowd),  are  Neuter.     Vul- 
gus  is  rarely  Masculine. 

4.  Manus  {hand),  domus  (house),   Idus   (the  15th,   or  IZth,   of  the 
month),  and  several  others,  are  Feminine. 

5.   Dies  (day)  is  Masculine  or  Feminine  in  the  Singular,  and  Masculine 
in  the  Plural.     MeridiSs  (noon)  is  Masculine. 

General  Tie^v  of  all  Declensions. 

5.  Stem  Endings  (or  Characteristics). 


I. 
a 


II. 
6 


III. 
1  or  a  Consonant 


IV. 
u 


V. 
5. 


Stem  Ending. 

6.  Case  Endings. 

Small  figures  at  the  right  refer  to  ^^  Different  Forms''  below. 


Singular. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

F. 

M.                N. 

m.  f.               n. 

m. 

N. 

F. 

Nom.  a 

Qs,  6r,  !r 

um 

(various  endings.) 

iSs 

U 

es 

Gen.  ae 

i 

i 

Is 

is 

us 

US 

ei5 

Dat.  ae 

6 

5 

i 

1 

ui 

u 

ei5 

Ace.    am 

um 

iim 

6m  (to) 

like  Nom. 

um 

u 

6m 

Voc.   a 

6,2  6r,  ir 

um 

liks  Nom. 

(( 

us 

u 

es 

Abl.   a 

6 

6 

6(1) 

6(1) 

u 

u 

e 

152 


NOTES. 


Plural. 


IL 


M. 

N. 

i 

a 

orum 

oriim 

IS 

is 

OS 

a 

i 

g 

is 

is 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

M.  F.                     N. 

M.            N.            P. 

es 

a(ia) 

US 

ua 

es 

Tl 

um  (ium) 

iim  (ium) 

uiim 

uiim 

eriim 

ibus 

Ibiis 

Ibiis* 

Ibiis 

ebiis 

es3 

a(ia) 

us 

ua 

es 

es 

a(ia) 

us 

ua 

es 

Ibiis 

Ibiis 

Ibiis* 

Ibiis 

ebiis 

Different  Forms. 

L 
F. 

NoM.  ae 
Gen.  ariim 
Dat.  isi 
Ace.  as 
Voc.  ae 
Abl.   is^ 


1.  Except  deabus,  filiabus.  2.  Except  deus,  filius,  Cassius,  etc. 
3.  Vowel  stems  have  also  is.  4.  Except  words  of  two  syllables,  ending  in 
cus  (as  lacus)  ;  also  portus  and  a  few  others,  which  have  iibus.  6.  Ex- 
cept res,  spes,  fides,  which  have  6i. 

Formation  of  the  Cases. 

7.  The  following  table  will  be  helpful  to  the  beginner,  since  it  shows 
how  the  Cases  were  anciently  formed  from  the  Stems,  in  the  Five  Declen- 
sions, and  what  changes  and  contractions  were  afterwards  made  ;  — 


I. 

Puella- 


NOMINATIVE.    \P;S^ 
GEKXTXVE.  p;,*^ 

j  puella-i 
{  puellae 
{puella-m 
\  puellam 
j  puella- 
\  puella 
( puella-d 
\  puella 


Dative. 


Accusative. 


Vocative. 
Ablative. 


II. 

Equo- 


III. 
Reg- 


Singular. 


IV. 

Curru- 


equo-s 
equus 

reg-s 
rex 

currus 
currus 

equo-i 
equi 

reg-is 
regis 

curru-is 
currus 

equo-i 
equo 

reg-i 
regi 

curru-i 
currui 

equo-^n 
equum 

reg-em 
regem 

curru-m 
currum 

equo- 
eque 
equo-d 
equo 

reg-s 
rex 
reg-ed 
rege 

curru-s 
currus 
curru-d 
curru 

Die- 


die-8 

dies 

die-i 

diei 

die-i 

diei 

die-m 

diem 

dies 

dies 

die-d 

die 


NOTES. 


153 


Puella- 


NOMINATIVE. 

Genitive. 

Dative. 

Accusative. 

Vocative. 

Ablative. 


)  puellae 
j  puella-rum 
j  puellarum 
ipuella-is 
I  puellis 

{puella-ms 
puellas 
^puella-i 
(  puellae 
{puella-is 
\  puellis 


II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

Equo- 

Reg- 

Currii- 

Die- 

Flural. 

equo-i 
equi 

reg-es 
reges 

curru-es 
currus 

die-s 

dies 

equo-rum 
equorum 
equo-is 
equis 

reg-um 
regum 
reg-ibus 
regibus 

curru-um 
curruum 
cuj'im-bus 
curribus 

die-rum 
dierum 
die-bus 
diebus 

equo-ms 
equos 

reg-ems 
reges 

curru-ms 
currus 

die-ms 
dies 

tquo-i 
equi 
equo-is 
equis 

reg-es 
reges 
reg-ibus 
regibus 

curru-es 
currus 
currubus 
curribus 

dies 
dies 
die-bus 
diebus 

Notice,  in  the  above  table,  that  the  Ablative  Singular  originally  ended 
in  d.  Afterwards,  d  was  dropped  and  the  stem-vowel  was  lengthened  (in 
puella,  equo,  curru).  In  rege,  the  final  vowel  was  not  a  stem-vowel, 
but  a  connecting  vowel,  and  was  not  aft'ected.  Other  changes,  producing 
long  vowels  in  final  syllables,  can  be  pointed  out  and  explained  by  th«? 
teacher. 

General  L.aws  of  Declension. 

8.  (1.)  The  Nominative  and  Vocative  are  always  alike,  in  both  numbers, 
except  in  nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  ending  in  us. 

(2.)  The  Accusative  Singular  of  Masculines  and  Feminines  always  ends 
in  m,  and  the  Accusative  Plural  in  s. 

(3.)  Neuter  nouns  have  the  Nominative,  Accusative,  and  Vocative 
alike  in  both  numbers,  and  these  cases,  in  the  Plural,  always  end  in  a. 

(4.)  In  the  Third,  Fourth,  and  Fifth  Declensions,  the  Nominative, 
Accusative,  and  Vocative  Plural  (in  all  genders)  are  alike. 

(5.)  The  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural  are  always  alike. 

(6.)  The  Genitive  Plural  always  ends  in  um. 

(7.)  The  vowels  i,  o,  u  are  long  when  final. 

(8.)  The  vowel  a  is  short  when  final,  except  in  the  Ablative  Singular. 

(9.)  Final  e  is  sho7't  in  the  Third  Declension,  and  long  in  the  Fifth. 

Nouns  :  First  Declension. 

9.  Latin  nouns  of  the  First  Declension  end  in  a  in  the  Nominative 
Singular. 

a.  The  Stem  ends  in  a  (called  the  Stem-  Vowel,  or  Characteristic). 

b.  The  Case  Endings  are  given  in  6. 


154  NOTES. 

«.  The  Gender  of  nouns  of  the  First  Declension  is  Feminine,  except  of 
a  few  that  are  Masculine  from  their  meaning  ;  as,  nauta,  a  sailor  ; 
agricola,  a  farmer  ;  poeta,  a  poet ;  Belgae,  Celtae  (names  of 
tribes). 

d.  Observe  that  final  a  is  long  in  the  Ablative  Singular. 

e.  Filia,  a  daughter,  and  dea,  a  goddess,  have  filiabus  and  deabus  in 

the  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural,  instead  of  filiis  and  deis.  Were 
it  not  for  some  such  peculiarity,  these  words  could  not  be  dis- 
tinguished, in  those  cases,  from  filius,  a  son,  and  deus,  a  god,  of 
the  Second  Declension. 

Nouns:  Second  Declension. 

10.  Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  end  in  us,  er,  ir  (Masculine),  um 
(Neater). 

a.  The  Stem  ends  in  o. 

h.  The  Case  Endings  are  given  in  6. 

c.  Nouns  ending  in  us  are  exceptions  to  the  law  stated  in  Note  8  (1), 

as  they  have  e  in  the  Vocative  Singular. 

d.  Filius  and  genius  drop  e  in  the  Vocative  ;  so  do  proper  names 

ending  in  ius ;  as,  fill ;  Cassi ;  Juli  (instead  of  filie  ;  Cassie ; 
Julie).  This  does  not  affect  the  accent;  as,  Mercii'ri  (for 
Mercu'rie). 

e.  The  Genitive  of  nouns  ending  in  ius  or  ium  ends  in  ii  or  i  (that  is, 

ii  contracted).  This  does  not  affect  the  accent  ;  as,  ingg'ni  (for 
ingg^nii). 

/.  Deus,  a  god,  is  thus  declined  :  Singular  deus,  dei,  deo,  deum, 
deus,  de5.  Plural  N.  and  V.  dei,  dii  (or,  contracted,  di),  G. 
deorum  (or,  contracted,  deum),  D.  and  Abl.  deis,  diis  (or,  con- 
tracted, dis).  Ace.  de5s. 

g.  Vulgus,  the  crowd,  is  Neuter,  and  has  the  Accusative  like  the 
Nominative.    It  has  no  Plural. 

Nouns  :  Third  Declension. 

11.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  are  divided  into  two  classes  :  — 

a.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  Consonant.     They  have  um  in  the 

Genitive  Plural  ;  as,  militum. 
h.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  the  Vowel  i.    They  have  ium  in  the 

Genitive  Plural ;  as,  navium. 

12.  The  Nominative  Singular  of  most  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  s  to 
the  stem. 


NOTES.  155 

a.  If  the  stem  ends  in  c  or  g,  the  Nominative  will  end  in  x  (1  (3))  ; 

as,  lux  ( =  luc  -h  s) ;  rex  ( =  reg  +  s). 

b.  If  the  stem  ends  in  t  or  d,  those  letters  will  be  dropped  before  the 

final  s  of  the  Nominative  (1  (4)  a)  ;  as,  aetas  (=  aetat  +  s)  ; 
custos  (=  custod  4-  s)  ;  lapis  (=  lapid  +  s). 

13.  In  forming  the  Nominative,  the  vowel  before  the  final  consonant 
of  the  stem  is  often  changed. 

a.  The  most  common  change  is  from  i  to  e ;  as,  miles,  judex,  nomen, 

nubes  (from  the  stems  milit-,  judic-,  nomin-,  nubi-). 

b.  Other  vowel  changes  are  from  i  to  u  (as,  caput,  from  stem  capit-)  ; 

i  to  o  (as,  virgo,  multitude,  from  stems  virgin-,  multitudin-)  ; 
o  to  u  (as,  corpus,  from  stem  corpor-)  ;  e  to  u  (as,  opus,  from 
stem  oper-). 

Remark.  In  the  Genitives  of  corpus,  opus,  flos,  and  others  of  like 
form,  r  takes  the  place  of  s,  according  to  the  law  stated  in  1  (2)  ;  as,  cor- 
poris, operis,  floris,  etc.,  instead  of  corposis,  opesis,  flosis,  etc. 

14.  Nominatives  ending  in  o.  (as,  le5,  multitude,  virgo)  have  lost  the 
final  n  of  the  stem.  The  stems  of  these  nouns  are  leon-,  multitudin-, 
virgin-.  It  will  be  seen  from  these  examples  that  nouns  ending  in  do 
and  go  also  change  the  vowel  (i)  before  n  to  o. 

Consonant-Stems. 

15.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  Consonant  increase  in  the  Genitive; 
that  is,  they  have  more  syllables  in  that  case  than  in  the  Nominative. 
Notice  the  Remark  below. 

a.  The  final  consonant  of  the  stem  may  be  a  Mute  or  a  Liquid  (4,  page 

17)  ;  as,  reg-,  due-,  capit-,  custod-,  consul-,  leon-. 

b.  The  I^ominative  Singular,  except  in  the  case  of  Neuters  and  nouns 

having  Liquid  stems,  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the  stem.  For  Ex- 
amples, see  12,  «,  b. 

Remark.  Pater,  mater,  frater  (Genitives,  patris,  matris,  fratris), 
seem  not  to  increase  in  the  Genitive.  The  reason  is  that  the  stems  are 
really  pater-,  mater-,  frater-,  and  that  they  are  contracted  to  patr-, 
matr-,  fratr- ;  so  that  patris  is  for  pateris,  etc. 

Towel- Stems. 

16.  Nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  the  Vowel  i  do  not  increase  in  the  Geni- 
tive,    Notice  the  Remark  below. 


156  NOTES. 

a.  The  Nominative  Singular,  except  of  Neuters,  is  formed  by  adding  s 

to  the  stem  ;  as,  navis  {=  navi  +  s). 
h  As  in  nouns  having  Consonant-stems,  i  in  the  stem  is  frequently- 
changed  to  e  in  the  Nominative  ;  as,  mare,  nubSs  (from  stems 
mari-,  nubi-). 
c.    Nouns  having  vowel-stems  end  :  — 

(1. )  In  es  and  is  (Feminine,  with  a  few  exceptions). 
(2.)  In  e,  al,  ar  (Neuter)  ;  these  have  i  in  the  Ablative  Singular. 
Remark.  Neuters  (ending  in  al,  ar),  as  animal,  calcar  (Genitives, 
animalis,  calcaris),  see7n  to  increase  in  the  Genitive.  These  forms,  how- 
ever, have  lost  a  final  e  in  the  Nominative  (as  will  be  explained  hereafter), 
and  hence  are  to  be  regarded  as  nouns  ending  in  ale,  are  (26,  h).  Ani- 
male,  calcare  (Genitives,  animalis,  calcaris),  do  not  increase. 

Peculiarities  of  Vowel-Stems. 

17.  Nouns  having  i-stems  differ  from  those  having  Consonant-stems  in 
the  following  respects  :  — 

a.  The  Genitive  Plural  ends  in  ium ;  Neuters  have  ia  in  the  Nomina- 
tive, Accusative,  and  Vocative,  Plural.  This  seems  irregular  ;  but 
it  is  not  at  all  so,  as  um  and  a  are  added  to  the  stem  (ending  in  i) 
just  as  to  a  stem  ending  in  a  consonant. 

h.  The  Ablative  Singular  of  all  Neuters  (ending  in  e,  al,  ar)  ends  in  i. 
The  nouns  ignis,  navis,  turris,  and  some  others,  have  e  or  i  in 
the  Ablative. 

c.  Some  nouns  have  im  in  the  Accusative  Singular  ;  others  (as  turris) 

have  em  or  im.     These  can  be  best  learned  by  practice. 

d.  The  Accusative  Plural  (Masculine  and  Feminine)  is  often  written 

is;  as,  turres  (or  is)  ;  nubes  (or  is). 

18.  Monosyllables  (one-syllable  nouns),  whose  stem  (in  the  Singular) 
ends  in  two  consonants,  are  declined  as  consonant-stems  in  the  Singular, 
but  as  vowel-stems  in  the  Plural.  That  is,  they  increase  in  the  Genitive, 
yet  have  ium  in  the  Genitive  Plural,  and  es  or  is  in  the  Accusative 
Plural ;  as,  urbs,  nox  (Genitive  Plural,  urbium,  noctium).  The  same 
principle  applies  to  many  nouujj  (not  monosyllables)  having  stems  (in  the 
Singular)  ending  in  two  consonants  ;  as,  cbhors,  cliens  (Genitive  Plural, 
cohortium,  clientium). 

19.  The  Rules  for  Gender  according  to  Nominative  endings  are  given 
under  N.  4. 

a.  The  following  nouns,  in  common  use,  are  exceptions  to  these  rules, 
being  Masculine:  dens,  a  toothy  fons,  a  fountain,  mons,  a  moun- 


NOTES.  157 

tairii  pons,  a  bridge  ;  ignis,  firc^  finis,  a  limits  end,  coUis,  a  hill. 
According  to  the  rules,  these  nouns  should  be  Feminvne. 
h.   There  are  many  nouns  not  provided  for  by  the  rules  ;  the  gencjer  of 
these  must  be  learned  by  practice  ;  as,  jus  (Genitive,  juris),  righty 
laio  (Neuter);  iter  (Genitive,  iXinQxis),  journey,  march  (Neuter). 

Nouns  :   Foukth  Declension. 

20.  Nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  end  in  us  (Masculine),*  u 
(Neuter). 

a.  The  Stem  ends  in  u.    The  Case  Endings  are  given  under  6. 
h.   The  Nominative  Singular  of  Masculines  is  formed  by.  adding  s  to 
the  stem  ;  as,  curru  +  s. 

c.  From  7,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  Fourth  Declension  resembles  the 

Third.  The  Genitive  Singular  of  currus,  for  instance,  is  con- 
tracted from  curruis  to  currus,  and  hence  the  long  u  (11,  e, 
p.  21).  Other  instances  of  contraction  are  shown  in  the  Table 
under  7. 

d.  Notice  that,  in  the  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural,  the  u  of  the  stem 

becomes  i ;  also,  that  Neuter  nouns  have  all  cases  in  the  Singular 
(except  the  Genitive)  t^ike. 

Eemark.  Dissyllables  (words  of  two  syllables)  ending  in  cus  (as 
lacus),  and  a  few  others,  have  ubus  in  the  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural. 

21.  Most  nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  are  formed  from  the  Supine 
stem  of  verbs  ;  as,  exercitus,  motus,  adventus  (from  exerceo,  moveo, 
advenio). 

a.  The  Supines  of  verbs  are  therefore  nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension, 
but  have  only  the  Accusative  and  Ablative  Singular. 

h.  Domus  {house  or  home)  belongs  both  to  the  Fourth  and  Second 
Declensions.  Its  inflection  will  be  found  under  the  References 
giren  in  Lesson  XXXV. 

Nouns  :   Fifth  Declension. 

22.  Nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declension  end  in  es.  The  Nominative  = 
Stem  +  s. 

a.  The  Stem  ends  in  e.     The  Case  Endings  are  given  under  6. 
h.  The  Gender  is  Feminine  ;  except  dies  (day),  which  is  usually  Mas- 
culine.    Meridies  {noon)  is  also  Masculine. 

*  Manus,  domus,  Idus  (Plural),  and  a  few  others,  are  Feminine. 


158  NOTES. 

c.  Only  two  nouns,  diSs  and  res,  have  all  the  cases  in  the  Plural.     A 

few  others  have  the  Nominative  and  Accusative,  Plural. 

d.  Contrary  to  the  rule  (11,  ft,  p.  20),  e  is  long  before  i  in  the  Genitive 

and  Dative  Singular  in  all  nouns  except  res,  spes,  fides. 

Compound  Nouns. 

23.  There  are,  in  Latin,  several  Compound  Nouns.  Of  these,  the 
two  most  common  are  :  — 

cc,  Respublica  (=  the  noun  res  +  the  Feminine  adjective  publica), 
meaning  the  puUic  affair ,  that  is,  the  state.  Both  parts  of  the  word 
are  declined, — res  as  the  noun  (Fifth  Declension)  and  publica 
as  the  feminine  of  bonus.  Genitive  =  reipublicae,  or  rei 
publicae. 

l.  Jusjurandum  (=  the  noun  jus  +  the  Neuter  participle  jurandum, 
from  juro,  to  swear) ^  meaning  an  oath.  Jus  is  the  noun,  Third 
Declension  Neuter,  and  jurandum  is  declined  like  bonum.  Geni- 
tive =  jiirisjurandi. 

c.  Pater,  mater,  and  some  other  nouns,  are  often  joined  with  familias 
(an  old  form  of  the  Genitive,  First  Declension,  =  familiae).  The 
first  noun  is  declined  regularly,  but  familias  does  not  change  its 
form  ;  as,  patresfamilias  {the  heads  of  families) ;  matresfamilias 
(matrons). 

ADJECTIVES.* 

24.  Latin  Adjectives  are  declined  like  Nouns.  As  they  must  agree 
with  a  Noun  or  Pronoun  in  Gender,  Number,  and  Case  (io8),  they  are 
declined  in  three  Genders,  two  Numbers,  and  six  Cases.  They  are  divided 
into  two  classes  :  — 

a.  Adjectives  whose  Masculine  and  Neuter  forms  are  like  Masculine 
and  Neuter  nouns  of  the  Second  Declension,  and  whose  Feminine 
form  is  like  a  Feminine  noun  of  the  First  Declension  ;  as,  bonus 
(Masculine),  bona  (Feminine),  bonum  (Neuter).  That  is,  they 
are  declined  exactly  as  servus,  Stella,  bellum,  would  be,  if  de- 
clined side  by  side.  These  Adjectives  are  therefore  called  Adjec 
tives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions, 

h.  Adjectives  declined  like  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  are  called 
Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension, 

*  ^nus,  alius,  and  others  having  the  same  peculiarities  of  declension,  are 
described  under  Numeral  Adjectives  (43). 


NOTES.  159 

All  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions  have  a  separate  form 
for  each  gender;  but  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  differ  in  this 
respect,  according  to  the  rules  stated  in  the  next  Note. 

25.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  JDeclension  may  have,  in  the 
Nominative  Singular,  (1)  a  separate  ending  for  each  gender ;  (2)  one  form 
for  both  Masculine  and  Feminine,  and  another  for  the  Neuter;  (3)  the 
same  form  for  all  genders.  For  convenience,  therefore,  we  say  that  an 
Adjective  of  the  Third  Declension  has  three  endings,  or  two  endingSy  or 
one  ending.     They  can  be  distinguished  by  the  following  rules  :  — 

a.  Adjectives  of  three  endings  end  in  er;  as,  acer  (Masculine),  acris 

(Feminine),  acre  (Neuter). 

b.  Adjectives  of  ttvo  endings  end  in  is,  or  are  in  the  Comparative 

Degree;  as,  fortis  (brave)  ;  fortior  (braver).  These  have,  in  the 
Nominative  Singular,  fortis  (Masculine  and  Feminine),  forte 
(Neuter) ;  fortior  (Masculine  and  Feminine),  fortius  (Neuter). 

c.  Adjectives  of  one  endi7ig  include  those  not  ending  in  er  or  is,  and 

not  in  the  Comparative  Degree;  as,  audax,  ingens,  vetus. 

26.  a.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  ending  in  er  are  i-stems. 
The  fact  to  be  specially  noticed  is  that  they  have  i  in  the  Ablative  Singu- 
lar, and  es  or  is  in  the  Accusative  Plural  (Masculine  and  Fenmiine). 

b.  Adjectives  ending  in  is  are  i-stems.  They  have  i  in  the  Ablative 
Singular,  and  es  or  is  in  the  Accusative  Phcral  {Masculine  and 
Feminine).  Neuter  nouns  (Third  Declension),  ending  in  al  and  ar, 
are  really  Neuter  forms  of  A.djectives  ending  in  is  (the  e  having  dis- 
appeared) ;  as,  animalis,  living,  animale  (animal),  a  living  thing. 

c.  Adjectives  of  one  end  in j  an;  i-stems.     Notice,   however,  (1)  that 

they  increase  in  the  Genitive;  (2)   that  they  have  e  or  i  in  the 

Ablative  Singular.     In  the  Plural  they  are  declined  like  fortis. 

(Vetus,   old,    and  a  few  others  have   consonant-stems  in  both 

numbers.) 
Caution.     As  these  adjectives  have  two  endings  in  the   Accusative 
Singular  (because  the  Accusative,  Neuter,  must  be  like  the  Nominative), 
it  will  be  less  confusing  to  decline  them  in  two  columns,  thus  :  — 

M.  F.  N. 

Nominative  audax  audax. 

d.  Comparatives  have  two  endings  and  Consonant  (Liquid)  stems  ; 

but  notice  that  they  have  e  or  i  in  the  Ablative  Singular.     Also 
notice  that  the  Accusative  Plural  (Masculine  and  Feminine)  has 
5s  or  is. 
Caution.     Beginners  are  very  apt  to  write  the  Nominative  and  Geni- 
tive Plural  ia,  ium.     Notice  that  these  forms  have  no  i. 


160  NOTES. 

27.  Plus,  morCf  is  a  Neuter  Noun  in  the  Singular,  declined  like  jus ; 
hence,  to  express  more  wisdom;  more  pain,  we  must  say  plus  sapientiae ; 
plus  dol5ris  (122,  h). 

In  the  Plural  it  is  an  Adjective,  declined  like  the  Plural  of  any  other 
Comparative,  except  that  it  has  ium  in  the  Genitive. 

28.  As  already  stated,  Adjectives  of  one  ending,  and  also  Comparatives, 
have  e  or  i  in  the  Ablative  Singular.  The  usual  distinction  is  that  the 
form   ending  in  i  is  used  adjectively,  and  the  form  ending  in  e,  suh- 


COMPARISON. 

29.  Adjectives  expressing  quality  are  compared,  in  Latin  as  in  English, 
in  three  ways  :  (1)  regularly ;  (2)  irregularly ;  (3)  by  the  use  of  the 
Adverbs  more  and  most, 

(1.)  Kegular   Comparison. 

30.  The  Comparative  (Masculine)  is  formed  by  adding  ior,  and  the 
Superlative  by  adding  issimus  (Masculine)  to  the  stem  of  the  Positive, 
minus  the  stem  vowel ;  as, 

carus,  dear  ;  carior,  dearer  ;  carissimus,  dearest. 

fortis,  hrave;  fortior,  braver  ;  fortissimus,  bravest. 

audax,  bold;  audacior,  bolder ;         audacissimus,  boldest. 

Remark.  The  Comparative  is  always  of  the  Third  Declension,  and  the 
Superlative  of  the  First  and  Second. 

a.  Participles,  if  used  as  Adjectives,  are  regularly  compared  ;  as, 
amans,  amantior,  amantissimus ;   apertus,  apertior,  apertissimus. 

(2.)  Irregular   Comparison* 

31.  Two  classes  of  Adjectives  do  not  form  their  Superlative  according 
to  the  law  of  Regular  Comparison  :  — 

a.  Adjectives  ending  in  -er  form  the  Superlative  by  adding  rimus  to 
the  Positive ;  as, 
acer,   acrior,   acerrimus;     miser,   miserior,   miserrimus. 
h.  Six  Adjectives  ending  in  -lis  form  the  Superlative  by  adding  llmus 
to  the  stem,  minus  the  stem  vowel  i ;  as,  facilis,  facilior,  facilli- 
mus.     The  list  is  :  — 
facilis,  easy  ;  similis,  like  ;  gracilis,  slender. 

difficilis,  difficult ;         dissimilis,  unlike  ;        humilis,  lowly. 


NOTES.  161 

32.  Compound  Adjectives  ending  in  -dicus,  -ficus,  -v61us  (derived 
from  the  verbs  dico,  facio,  vol5),  form  the  Comparative  and  Superlative  as 
though  thej-  were  participial  forms  ending  in  ns  ;  as, 

maledicus,  abusive  {ill-speaking),  maledicentior,  maledicentissimus. 

munificus,  liberal,  munificentior,  munificentissimus. 

benevolus,  benevolent  (well-wishing),  benevolentior,  benevolentissimus. 

33.  The  Adjectives  bonus  (good),  malus  (bad),  magnus  (great), 
parvus  (S7nall),  multus  (much),  multi  (plural  of  multus,  meaning  many), 
and  a  few  others,  are  very  irregular  in  their  forms  of  comparison.  Like  the 
English  good,  bad,  and  other  adjectives,  the  three  degrees  are  formed  from 
different  stems.  References  to  their  forms  of  comparison  are  given  in 
Lesson  XXIX. 

34.  Five  Adjectives  have  no  Positive.  They  are,  in  the  Comparative, 
citerior  (hither),  interior  (inner),  prior  (former),  propior  (nearer), 
ulterior  (farther).     They  are  derived  from  Prepositions. 

In  English,  also,  we  have  Adjectives  without  a  Positive,  and  derived 
from  Prepositions  ;  as,  (in),  iimer,  innermost  (or  inmost). 

35.  These  four  have  peculiar  Superlatives  :  — 

Exterus  (outside),  superus  (high),  inferus  (low),  posterus  (follow- 
ing). These,  also,  are  derived  from  Prepositions.  References  to  their 
comparison  are  given  in  Lesson  XXXIV. 

36.  The  following  are  more  or  less  peculiar  in  comparison  :  — 

a.  Dives  (rich),  divitior  or  ditior,  divitissimus  or  ditissimus. 

b.  Juvenis   (young),  minor  natu    (less  by  birth;  that  is,  younger), 

minimus  natu  (least  by  birth;  that  is,  yov.ngest).  Instead  of 
minor  natii,  minor  alone  is  often  used  (natii  being  understood), 
especially  in  the  plural  ;  as,  minores,  descendants.  Senex  (old), 
major  natu,  maximus  natu.  Or,  maj5res  alone  is  used  for  the 
Comparative  (natu  being  understood),  in  the  sense  of  elders  or 
ancestors. 

(3.)  Comparison  by  MoKE  and  Most. 

37.  Adjectives  which  have  a  vowel  before  the  ending  us  usually  form 
the  Comparative  and  Superlative  by  the  use  of  the  Adverbs  magis  (more), 
and  maxime  (most)  ;  as,  dubius  (doubtful),  magis  dubius,  maxime 
dubius. 

Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

38.  Adverbs  of  Manner  are  formed  from  Adjectives.  English  Adverbs 
of  Manner  are  formed  by  adding  ly  to  Adjectives  j  as,  dearly,  bravely. 

11 


162  NOTES. 

In  Latin  Adverbs  the  ending  of  the  Positive  shows  from  what  Declension 
of  Adjectives  the  Adverb  is  derived. 

a.  An  Adverb  is  formed  from  the  stem  of  an  Adjective  of  the  First  and 

Second  Peclensions  by  changing  the  stem-vowel  to  e;  as,  care, 
dearly  (from  stems  caro-,  cara-,  dear).  Other  examples  are  : 
digne  (worthily)  ;  pulchre  (beautifully). 

b.  An  Adverb  is  formed  from  an  Adjective  of  the  Third  Declension  by- 

adding  ter  to  the  stem  ;  as,  forti-ter  (bravely),  gravi-ter  (heavily), 

audaci-ter*  (boldly),   acri-ter  (eagerly). 
Adjectives  ending  in  ns  (Genitive,  -ntis)  drop  ti  from  the  stem  before 
forming  Adverbs;  as,  sapienter  (wisely),  for  sapienti-ter ;   prudenter 
(prudently). 

c.  In  Adverbs  regularly  compared,  the  Comparative  is  the  same  in 

form  as  the  Neuter  Accusative  Singular  of  the  Adjective  (Compara- 
tive) ;  as,  carius  (^nore  dearly),  gravius  (more  heavily),  acrius 
(more  eagerly),  sapientius  (more  wisely),  melius  (better). 

d.  The  Superlative  of  the  Adjective  belongs  to  the  First  and  Second 

Declensions.  Therefore,  according  to  the  rule  given  above  (a), 
the  Superlative  of  the  Adverb  will  end  in  e;  as,  carissime, 
acerrime,  facillime,  sapientissime,  pessime. 

Comparison  of  Adverbs:    Peculiar  Forms. 

39.  Bene,  well  (from  bonus),  melius,  optime. 

Magnopere,  greatly;  magis,  more;  maxime,  ^iiost.  There  is  no 
simple  Adverb  derived  from  the  Positive  of  magnus.  Magnopere  = 
magn5  +  opere,  and  is  used  as  the  Positive  of  the  Adverb.  Facile  is 
regularly  used  instead  of  faciliter  (see  a,  below). 

a.  The  Accusative  and  Ablative  Singular  of  the  Adjective  (Neuter)  are 

very  often  used  as  Adverbs  ;  as,  multum,  multo  (much).  Facile 
is  regularly  used,  as  stated  above. 

b.  These  Adverbs  are  compared  in  like  manner,  though  not  formed  from 

Adjectives :  — 

diu,  long  (in  time),  diutius,  diutissime. 
saepe,  often,  saepius,  saepissime. 

Peculiar  Meanings  of  Adjectives. 

40.  a.  The  Comparative  may  be  variously  translated;  as,  audacior, 

bolder,  rather  bold,  too  bold. 

*  Audaciter  is  usually  written  audacter. 


NOTES.  163 

h.  The  Superlative  may  often  be  rendered  by  very;  as,  vir  optimus,  a 
very  excellent  man, 

c.  Quam  (adverb  of  degree)  with  the  Superlative  has  a  peculiar  force. 

Supplicium  quam  gravissimum  means  as  severe  punishment  as 
possible.     So  quam  plurimi,  as  many  as  possible, 

d.  Per  gives  to  a  Positive  almost  the  meaning  of  a  Superlative ;  as, 

permag^us,  very  great  (that  is,  thoroughly  great). 

NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

41.  Numeral  Adjectives  are  Cardinal  and  Ordinal,  as  in  English 
(see  9,  &,  page  2);  as,  unus,  one;  primus, ^rs^. 

a.  A  third  class  of  Numerals  is  composed  of  adjectives  called  Dis- 

tributives,   They  answer  the  questions.  How  many  at  a  time  ? 
How  many  in  a  set  ?    Examples  are  singuli,  one  by  one  ;  bini,  two 
by  two,  in  pairs. 
The  lists  of  these  Numerals  are  given  in  the  Grammars  and  in  the 
Appendix. 

Declension  of  Numeral  Adjectives. 

42.  a.  Ordinal  Adjectives  are  declined  like  bonus. 

b.  Distributive  Adjectives  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

c.  Cardinal  Adjectives,  from  4  to  100,  inclusive,  are  not  declined. 
From  200  to  900,  inclusive,  they  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus ; 

as,  ducenti,  ae,  a  (two  hundred).     The  declension  of  the  other  Cardinal 
Adjectives  is  described  in  the  next  Note. 

43.  a.  Unus  is  peculiar  in  its  declension.  In  general  it  is  like  bonus, 
but  it  has  unius  in  the  Genitive  Singular,  all  genders  (instead  of  uni, 
unae,  uni),  and  uni  in  the  Dative  Singular,  all  genders  (instead  of  uno, 
unae,  uno). 

In  the  Plural  uni  means  alone  or  only  ;  as,  uni  Ubii,  the  Ubii  alone. 

b.  Like  unus  are  declined  these  adjectives,  which  are  not  Numerals, 

but  are  placed  here  because  their  iiTegularities  are  the  same  as 

those  of  unus :  — 
alius  (neuter,  aliud),  other,     ullus,  any. 

nullus,  no.  alter  (genitive,  altertus),  the  other  (of  two) . 

s51us,  alone.  neuter  (genitive,  neutrius),  neither, 

totus,  whole.  uter  (genitive,  utrius),  which  (of  two). 

c.  Duo  has  peculiar  forms  of  declension,  which  are  given  in  the  Gram- 

mars and  the  Appendix. 
Remark.     Ambo  [both)  is  declined  like  duo. 


164  NOTES. 

d.  Tres  (Neuter,  tria)  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  fortis. 

e.  Mille  may  be  a  Noun  or  an  Adjective. 

As  a  Noun  :  (1)  it  is  Neuter  and  is  declined  like  mare,  but  it  has,  in 
the  Singular,  only  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  (mille)  ;  (2)  it  is 
always  followed  by  the  Genitive  (123,  c);  as,  mille  hominum ;  duo 
millia  (or  milia)  passuum  {two  miles). 

As  an  Adjective,  it  is  not  declined,  and  may  be  used  in  agi-eement  with 
a  noun  in  any  case ;  as,  mille  viri ;  cum  mille  viris. 

NUMERAL    ADVERBS. 

44.  Numeral  Adverbs  answer  the  question.  How  often?  The  list  is 
given  in  the  Grammars  and  the  Appendix. 

PRONOUlSrS. 

45.  Pronouns  are  of  seven  classes  :  — 

1.  Personal ;  2.  Reflexive  ;  3.  Possessive  ;  4.  Demonstrative  ;  5.  Rela- 
tive ;  6.  Interrogative  ;  7.   Indefinite. 

The  Personal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns  are  declined  as  Substantives  ; 
their  gender  must  be  decided  by  the  sense.  All  the  other  Pronouns  are 
declined  as  Adjectives,  having  a  separate  form  for  each  gender. 

46.  The  Personal  Pronouns  are  :  First  Person,  ego,  I  (plural, 
nos)  ;  Second  Person,  tu,  you  (plural,  vos).  There  is  no  Personal  Pro- 
noun of  the  Third  Person  in  Latin  ;  but  a  Demonstrative  (usually  is)  is 
used  instead.  As  in  English,  this  pronoun  requires  a  separate  form  for 
each  gender,  and  is  supplies  these  forms.  The  declension  of  is  is  given 
under  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

Remark.     Ego  and  is  can,  of  course,  have  no  Vocative. 

47.  Hefleocive  Pronouns  (that  is,  pronouns  that  turUf  or  refer ^ 
back)  are  so  called  because  they  refer  back  to  the  subject  of  their  sentence 
or  clause.  Hence  they  have  no  Nominative  or  Vocative.  The  Reflexive 
Pronouns  of  the  First  and  Second  Persons  have  case-forms  precisely  like 
the  Genitive,  Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ablative  of  the  Personal  Pronouns. 
The  list  is  :  First  Person,  mei,  of  myself  (nostri,  of  ourselves);  Second 
Person,  tui,  of  yourself  (vestTij  of  yourselves) ;  Third  Person,  sui,  of  him- 
self herself  itself  (sui,  of  themselves) .  The  plural  of  sui  is  declined  like 
the  singular. 

Caution.  Notice  that  sui  cannot  be  used  as  a  Third  Personal  Pro- 
noun, for  two  reasons  :  (1)  it  has  no  Nominative  ;  (2)  it  is  always  used 
reflexively.     The  following  conjugation  of  laudo  in  the  Present  Indicative, 


NOTES.  165 

with  a  subject  and  object  expressed,  will  help  to  make  clear  the  use  of  the 
Personal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns  :  — 

Ego  mS  laudo,  I  praise  myself.  n5s  nos  laudamus. 

tu  te  laudas,  you  praise  yourself.  vos  vos  laudatis. 

is  (ea)  se  laudat,  he  (she)  praises  himself  (herself),     ii  (eae)  se  laudant. 

48.  Possessive  JPronouns  are  formed  from  the  Personal  and  Re- 
flexive Pronouns,  and  are  declined  as  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second 
Declensions.     -They  are  :  — 

meus  (Vocative  Singular,  mi)  my,  or  mine ;  tuus,  your,  or  yours ;  suus, 
his,  her  (hers),  its ;  noster,  oicr,  or  ours;  vaster,  your,  or  yours ;  suus, 
their,  or  theirs. 

Caution.  Suus  (like  sui)  is  used  reflexively.  When  his,  her,  its,  or 
their,  is  not  reflexive,  the  Genitive  of  is  should  be  used  ;  as,  dominus 
servum  suum  vocavit,  et  opus  ejus  laudavit,  the  master  called  his 
(the  master's)  slave,  and  praised  his  (the  slaves)  work.  Beginners  often 
find  the  meaning  of  suus  troublesome.  It  is  an  Adjective,  and  must 
agree  with  its  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  Being  reflexive,  its 
meaning  must  be  decided,  not  from  its  ending,  but  from  the  meaning  of 
the  Subject.     The  following  sentences  will  make  this  clear  :  — 

Rex  servum  suum  vocat,  the  king  calls  his  slave  ;  regina  servum 
suum  vocat,  the  queen  calls  her  slave  ;  pueri  matrem  suam  amant,  the 
hoys  love  their  mother  ;  puellae  patrem  suum  amant,  the  girls  love  their 
father. 

49.  Demonstrative  Prontyuns  (that  is.  Pronouns  that  point  out) 
agree  with  the  Substantives  which  they  limit  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 
They  are  declined,  for  the  most  part,  like  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Sec- 
ond Declensions.  They  (particularly  is)  are  often  used  as  the  Personal 
Pronoun  of  the  Third  Person  (46).  From  their  meaning,  they  all  (except 
ipse)  lack  the  Vocative.     They  are  :  — 

hie,  this  (near  me);  is,  that  (when  used  Adjectively). 

ille,  that  (near  him,  or  yonder);         ipse,  self. 

iste,  that  (near  you);  idem,*   the  same,  =  is  +  dem    (an 

emphatic  syllable). 

Remarks.  1.  From  their  meaning,  hie,  iste,  ille,  are  often  called 
Demonstratives  of  the  First,  Second,  and  Third  Persons. 

2.  Is  does  not  point  out  as  definitely  as  hie,  ille,  iste.  It  is  very 
commonly  used  as  an  Antecedent  to  the  Relative  Pronoun  ;  as,  is  qui,  he 
who  (one  who,  a  man  who).     Sometimes  it  has  no  greater  force  than  the 

*  For  change  of  m  to  n  (as  eiindem  for  eumdem)  see  1  (5). 


166  NOTES. 

Article  the  ;  as,  centum  milites  eo  tempore  habuit,  Tie  had  one  hundred 
soldiers  at  the  time. 

3.  Ipse  is  used  to  add  emphasis  to  some  Noun  or  Pronoun ;  as,  vos 
ipsi,  you  yourselves  ;  vir  ipse,  the  man  himself  (or  the  very  man). 

50.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  qui.  It  has  a  separate  form  for 
each  gender  (qui,  quae,  quod),  since  it  must  agree  in  gender  with  its 
Antecedent.     It  is  to  be  rendered  who,  which,  that,  according  to  the  sense. 

51.  The  Interrogative  Pronoun  resembles  the  Relative  in  de- 
clension.    It  has  two  forms,  which  are  regularly  used  as  follows  :  — 

1.  quis,  quae,  quid,  used  as  a  Substantive  ;  as,  quis  me  laudat } 
who  praises  me  ?  quid  commisit  ?  what  has  he  done  ? 

2.  qui,  quae,  quod,  used  as  an  Adjective  ;  as,  qui  homo  me  laudat  ? 
what  man  praises  me  ?  quod  facinus  commisit  ?  what  deed  has  he  done .? 

Remark.     Quis  and  qui  are  sometimes  used  for  each  other. 

Caution.  When  the  question  refers  to  one  of  two,  we  must  use  uter, 
utra,  utrum  (which  of  the  two  .?). 

52.  Indefinite  Pronouns  do  not  refer  to  definite  objects.  The 
simple  Indefinite  (=  any)  is  quis  (or  qui).  We  very  seldom  find  this 
form,  however,  except  in  compounds,  which,  with  a  very  few  exceptions,  are 
declined  exactly  like  the  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns.  The  com- 
pounds (in  common  use)  that  have  peculiar  forms  are  aliquis,  siquis, 
nequis.  These,  like  the  Interrogative  Pronoun,  have  two  forms,  —  quis 
(Substantive),  and  qui  (Adjective).  These  compounds  are  declined,  in 
general,  like  the  Relative  and  Interrogative  ;  but  notice  that  they  regularly 
have  final  a,  where  the  Relative  and  Interrogative  have  final  ae  (except  in 
the  Nominative  Plural  Feminine). 

a.  Aliquis  ( =  alius  -f-  quis)  means,  literally,  some  one  or  other, 

b.  Siquis  and  nequis  are  written  as  compounds,  or  as  separate  words. 

This  is  because  si  and  ne  are  Conjunctions,  and  connect  clauses  as 
well  as  help  in  forming  the  compound  pronouns. 

c.  The  meanings  of  aliquis,  siquis,  nequis,  are  given  here  :  — 

Substantive,  Adjective. 

aliquis,  any  one,  some  one  ;  aliqui,  any,  some. 

siquis,  if  any  one  ;  siqui,  if  any. 

nequis,  lest  any  one  ;  nequi,  lest  any. 

d.  Other  Indefinite  Pronouns  (the  first  part  declined  like  the  Relative 

and  Interrogative)  are:  quicumque,  whoever  or  whosoever;  qui- 
dam,  a  certain  man  (or  a  certain) ;  quivis  (=  qui  +  vis,  fiom 
vol5),  any-you-please  ;  quisque,  each,  every. 


NOTES.  167 

53.  The  following  General  Remarks  on  the  Pronouns  will  be  found 
useful :  — 

a.  The  Preposition  cum  [with)  is  joined  as  an  Enclitic  (195,  3)  to  the 
Ablative  of  the  Personal,  Reflexive,  Relative,  and  Interrogative 
Pronouns;  as,  mecum,  nobiscum,  tecum,  vSbiscum,  secum, 
quibuscum;  but  cum  lis  (his,  illis). 

t,  Quisque  [eacli]  with  a  Superlative  has  a  peculiar  meaning;  as, 
quisque  sapientissimus,  all  the  wisest.  That  is,  if  each  is 
wisest,  then  all  are.     So  also,  quisque  ditissimus,  all  the  richest. 

c.  The  Enclitic  -que,  added  to  the  simple  Indefinite,  gives  it  a  uni- 

versal force;  as,  quis  (any);  quisque  (each,  every). 
This  same  force  is  given  to  an  Adverb,  by  adding  -que ;  as,  ubi  (where), 
ubique  (everywhere) ;  unde  (whence),  undique  (from  every  side, 
on  every  side). 

d.  The  Preposition  inter,  with  a  Reflexive  Pronoun  in  the  Plural,  gives 

a  peculiar  force  and  meaning ;  as,  inter  nos  amamus ;  inter  vos 
amatis ;  inter  se  amant :  we  (you,  they)  love  each  other. 


VERBS. 

Special  Note  for  licsson  II. 

54.  English  Verbs  are  conjugated  very  much  alike.  In  Latin,  they 
are  divided  into  four  classes  (called  Conjugations),  each  Conjugation 
being  somewhat  unlike  the  others.  They  are  called  the  First,  Second, 
Third,  and  Fourth  Conjugations.  Just  as  we  distinguish  Declensions  of 
Nouns  by  their  Stems,  so  we  distinguish  one  Latin  Conjugation  from  the 
others  by  the  Stem  of  its  Present  Tense,  Indicative  Mode,  which  we  call 
the  Present  Stem.     The  following  facts  should  be  carefully  studied  :  — 

1.  The  Present  Stem,  in  the  First  Conjugation,  like  the  stem  of 
nouns  of  the  First  Declension,  ends  in  a.  The  Present  Stems  of  amo, 
voco,  and  liber5,  are  ama,  voca,  libera. 

2.  English  verbs  have  very  few  changes  of  form  in  conjugation.  For 
instance,  the  Present  Indicative  of  love,  in  its  common  use,  has  loves  in 
the  Third  Person  Singular,  but  love  in  all  the  other  persons  of  both 
numbers.  Hence,  a  Personal  Pronoun,  as  Subject,  is  needed  to  show 
what  the  person  of  each  form  is.  In  Latin  verbs,  however,  there  is 
a  special  ending  for  each  person,  in  both  numbers  ;  and  the  Personal 
Pronoun  can  be  omitted,  because  each  ending  shows  what  Personal  Pro- 
noun is  to  be  supplied  in  translating.  These  endings  are  called  Per- 
sonal Endings* 


168  ^  NOTES. 

In  the  Present  Indicative  of  all  regular  verbs  these  Personal  Endings 
are  :  — 

(  1.  -5  (/).  (  1.  -mus  (we). 

Singular.  <  2.  -s  (you).  Plural.  <  2.  -tis  (you). 

^  3.  -t  (he,  she,  it).  ^  3.  -nt  (they). 

3.  Each  form  in  the  Present  Tense  is  composed  of  the  Present  Stern, 
plus  the  proper  Fersonal  Ending,  In  the  First  Person  Singular  the 
stem-vowel  a  unites  with  the  personal  ending  ;  as,  voco  (for  voca5), 
am5  (for  amao).  The  following  examples  show  how  these  forms  are 
built  up,  and  the  exact  meaning  of  each  element  in  them  :  — 

ama  -f  nt  (love  they),  voca  +  mus  (call  we),  da  +  t  [gives  he). 

4.  Voc5  may  be  translated  in  three  ways  :  I  call ;  lam  calling;  I  do 
call  (section  17,  a,  h,  page  4). 

5.  It  is  evident,  from  what  has  been  stated  (2,  3,  4),  that  a  single  verb- 
form  contains  a  Subject  and  Predicate,  and  hence  may  be  a  complete 
sentence  in  itself ;  as,  am  at,  he  loves. 


Special  Note  for  liesson  VI. 

55.  The  verb  Sum  (/  am)  is  Irregular  and  Intransitive.  Like  the 
English  verb  to  be,  it  cannot  make  a  statement,  but  requires  some  word 
(usually  a  Noun  or  Adjective)  to  complete  its  meaning  ;  that  is,  it  acts  as 
a  Copula,  and  requires  a  Complement.  This  Complement,  whether  a 
Noun  or  Adjective,  must  be  in  the  same  case  as  the  Subject.  Study  care- 
fully section  37,  a,  page  10. 

The  Present  Indicative  of  Sum  is  thus  inflected  :  — 

(  1.  sum,  lam.  i  1.  sumus,  we  are. 

Singular.  <  2.  es,  you  are.  Plural.  <  2.  estis,  you  are. 

I  3.  est,  he  is.  I  3.  sunt,  they  are. 

Notice  that  the  Personal  Endings,  in  several  of  the  forms,  are  like 
those  in  the  Present  Tense  of  amo. 


Transitive  and  Intransitive  Verbs;  Voice;  Number;    Person. 

56.  Latin  Verbs,  like  those  in  English,  may  be  Transitive  or  Intransi- 
tive. Transitive  Verbs  have  two  Voices,  Active  and  Passive.  Intransitive 
Verbs  have  no  Passive  Voice  in  ordinary  use.  As  in  English,  Verbs  have 
two  Numbers  and  three  Persons. 


NOTES.  169 


Modes. 


57.  Latin  Verbs  have  four  Modes,  which  are  very  similar  to  those  in 
English  having  the  same  names.     They  are  :  — 

a.  The  Indicative,  which  states  a  positive  fact,  or  asks  a  direct  ques- 

tion; as,  amat,  he  loves;  quis  vocat  ?  who  calls  ? 

b.  The  Subjunctive,  which  does  not  state  facts,  but  expresses  some- 

thing as  uncertaiyi,  possible,  impossible,  desired,  &c. ;  as,  si  R5mam 
videat,  f  elix  sit,  if  he  should  see  Rome,  he  would  be  happy  ;  servum 
laudemus,  let  us  praise  the  slave. 

c.  The  Imperative^  which  commands;  as,  amicos  ama,  love  your 

friends. 

d.  The  Infinitive,  which,  in  Latin  as  in  English,  does  not  state  or 

command,  and  has  no  person  or  number.  It  expresses  the  idea  of 
the  verb  indefinitely  (see  section  15,  e,  p.  4).  As  in  English,  it 
is  very  frequently  used  as  a  Verbal  Noun ;  as,  scire  est  regere, 
knowledge  is  power  (literally,  to  know  is  to  rule)-.  c5n5tur  trans- 
ire,  he  tries  to  cross. 

Participles. 

58.  Latin  Verbs  have  four  Participles,  or  Verbal  Adjectives :  — 

a.  Active :  Present  and  Future  Participles. 

b.  Passive:  Perfect  Participle  and  Gerundive  (or  Future  Participle, 

Passive). 

Remakk.  These  Participles  agree  with  their  Substantives  in  gender, 
number,  and  case,  and  (with  the  exception  of  the  Present  Participle,  which 
is  of  the  Third  Declension,  one  ending)  are  declined  like  bonus. 


Gerund;  Supine. 

59.  Latin  Verbs  have  two  Verbal  Nouns :  — 

a.  The  Gerund,  which  is  like  the  English  Verbal  Noun  ending  in 

-ing.  It  is  declined  like  a  noun  of  the  Second  Declension,  but 
has  no  Nominative  or  Vocative.  The  Infinitive  takes  the  place  of 
the  Nominative  ;  as,  ars  canendi,  the  art  of  singing ;  canere  est 
jucundum,  singing  (to  sing)  is  pleasant. 

b.  The  Supine,  which  is  a  Verbal  Noun  of  the  Fourth  Declension. 

It  has  only  the  Accusative  and  Ablative.  Its  uses  are  i)eculiar, 
and  will  be  described  hereafter  (191). 


170  NOTES. 

Tenses. 

This  Note  should  he  studied  in  connection  with  sections  16, 17,  page  4. 

60.  The  Tenses  named  in  this  Note  are  those  of  the  Indicative  Mode. 
This  Mode  is  the  only  one  in  which  the  Tenses  properly  distinguish 
time, 

1.  Present;  as,  amo,  I  love. 

2.  Imperfect ;  as,  amabam,  I  was  loving. 

3.  Future;  as,  amabo,  I  shall  love. 

4.  JPerfect ;  as,  amavi,  /  have  loved,  or  /  loved. 

5.  Pluperfect;  as,  amav ersirny  I  had  loved. 

6.  Future  Perfect ;  as,  amavero,  I  shall  have  loved. 

61.  A  comparison  of  these  Tenses  and  their  meanings  with  the  Table 
on  page  4  will  show  that,  — 

1.  The  Present,  Future,  and  Future  Perfect  have  the  same  meaning  as 
the  English  tenses  called  by  the  same  names. 

2.  The  Imperfect  is  like  the  Past  Imperfect  (or  Progressive);  that  is, 
it  denotes  an  action  as  going  on  (or  customary)  in  past  time  ;  as,  laudabat, 
he  was  praising  (he  kept  praising,  he  used  to  praise).  It  must  be  carefully 
distinguished  from  the  Perfect. 

3.  The  Perfect  has  two  meanings,  as  different  from  each  other  as  though 
they  represented  two  distinct  tense-forms,  instead  of  one.     These  are  :  — 

a.  The  meaning  of  the  English  Present  Perfect ;  as,  laudavi,  /  have 

praised.     This  is  called  the  Perfect  Definite  (that  is,  I  have  just 

finished  praising). 
h.   The  meaning  of  the  English  Past  (Indefinite) ;  as,  laudavi,  I  praised. 

This  is  called  the  Perfect  Indefinite  *  (that  is,  I  praised  at  some 

indefinite  time  in  the  past). 

4.  The  Pluperfect  is  like  the  English  Past  Perfect. 

Special  NoTE.f 

62.  As  the  Perfect  has  two  meanings,  and  is  really  equivalent  to  two 
tenses,  it  may  be  found  less  confusing  to  give  a  distinct  name  to  each  of 
these  uses.  We  may,  therefore,  regar(!  the  Tenses  as  seven  in  number. 
The  word  Aorist  means  Indefinite,  and  therefore  the  tenses  may  be  thus 
named  :  — 

1.  Present;  2.  Imperfect;  3.  Future;  4.  Per/ec<  (English,  Present  Per- 

*  This  is  also  called  the  Perfect  Historical. 

t  This  Note  is  for  the  use  of  those  who  prefer  the  seven-tense  system,  and 
may  be  omitted  by  others. 


NOTES.  171 

fed:  I  ham  loved);  5.  Aorist  (English,  Past:  I  loved);  6.  Pluperfect; 
7.  Future  Perfect.  The  Perfect  is  the  same  as  the  Perfect  Definite,  and 
the  Aorist  is  the  same  as  the  Perfect  Indefinite. 

Tenses  of  the  different  Modes. 

6a  a.  The  Indicative  has  all  the  tenses.  As  in  English,  it  is  the 
only  Mode  in  which  the  tenses  actually  distinguish  time. 

b.  The  Subjunctive  lacks  the  Future  and  the  Future  Perfect.     How 

it  supplies  this  lack  will  be  explained  hereafter.  The  real  time  de- 
noted by  the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  must  often  be  decided,  as 
in  English  (19,  page  6),  by  the  sense. 

c.  The  Imperative  has  two   tenses  :    Present    and  Future.      The 

Present,  as  in  English,  has  only  the  Second  Person.  The  Future 
has  the  Second  and  Third  Persons  ;  it  is  seldom  used. 

d.  The  Infinitive  has  three  tenses  ;  Present,   Perfect,   and  Future. 

The  Future  Infinitive,  Active,  is  made  up  of  the  Future  Active 
Participle  and  esse  (Present  Infinitive  of  sum).  The  Future 
Infinitive,  Passive,  is  described  later. 

e.  The  tenses  of  the  Participles  have  already  been  given  (58). 

Personal  Endings. 

64.  In  English,  the  verb-form  love  may  be  in  the  Present  Indicative} 
First  or  Second  Person  Singular,  or  in  the  First,  Second,  or  Third  Person 
Plural ;  a  Personal  Pronoun,  as  subject,  must  be  expressed,  or  other  words 
given,  before  we  can  tell  in  what  person  the  verb-form  is.  In  a  Latin 
tense,  however,  each  of  the  six  forms  shows  its  person  by  its  ending,  and 
the  Personal  Pronouns  may  be,  and  usually  are,  omitted.  These  endings 
are  therefore  called  Personal  Endings  (54,  2).  Only  the  Indicative,  Sub- 
junctive, and  Imperative  have  Personal  Endings.  The  endings  of  the 
Perfect  Indicative  (Active)  and  the  Imperative  are  peculiar,  and  are  given 
separately.     The  following  table  shows  the  Personal  Endings  :  — 

a.  Personal  Endings :  Indicative  and  Subjunctive, 


Active. 

Passive. 

Subject. 

(1.  m  (or 

5) 

(1.  r 

/. 

Singular.  < 

2.S 

Singular.  <^  2.  ris  (or  re) 

you. 

U.  t 

(3.  tur 

he,  she,  it. 

(1.  mus 

fl.  mur 

we. 

Plural.  - 

<  2.  tis 

Plural.  <^  2.  mini 

you. 

V3.  nt 

(3.  ntur 

they. 

172 


NOTES. 


;i.  i. 

Singular.  <  2.  isti. 


b.  Perfect  Indicative ,  Active* 

1.  imus. 

2.  istis. 


Plural. 


J.  it. 


3.  erunt  (or  ere). 


c.  Imperative, 

Active.  Passive. 

Present,  Present. 

Sing.  2.  same  as  Pres.  Stem.  Sing.  2.  re  (like  the  Pres.  Inf.  Act. ). 

Plur.  2.  te.  Plur.  2.  mini. 


Future. 
Sing.  2.  to. 

3.  to. 
Plur.  2.  t5te. 

8.  nto. 


Future. 
Sing.  2.  tor. 

3.  tor. 
Plur.  2.  wanting. 

3.  ntor. 


Conjugations. 

65.  Latin  Verbs  are  divided  into  four  Conjugations  (54).  They  are 
distinguished  by  the  vowel  before  re  in-  the  Present  Infinitive  Active. 
That  part  of  the  Present  Infinitive  which  is  left  after  taking  away  re  is 
called  the  Present  Stem.  This  Present  Stem  is  here  shown  for  the  four 
Conjugations  :  — 


Conjugation. 

Present  Infinitive. 

Present  Stem. 

1. 

amare. 

ama. 

II. 

monere. 

mone. 

III. 

reggre. 

regg.*     . 

IV. 

audire. 

audi. 

Principal  Farts. 

66.  The  Principal  Parts  of  a  verb  are  so  called  because  from  them  all 
the  other  forms  of  the  verb  are  made  up.  They  are  four  in  number.  The 
Koman  figures  indicate  the  Conjugations  :  — 


Present  Indicative. 
Present  Infinitive. 
Perfect  Indicative. 
Supine. 


I.  II. 

amo.  moneS. 

amare.  monere. 

amavi.  monui. 

amatum.  monitum. 


III.  IV. 

rego.  audio, 

reggre.  audire. 

rexi.  audivi. 

rectum.  auditum. 


*  The  Verb-Stem  of  the  Third  Conjugation  is  usually  not  the  same  as  the 
Present  Stem.    It  is  described  in  79,  2,  and  a. 


NOTES.  173 

Remark.  As  the  Passive  has  no  Supine,  it  has  but  three  Principal 
Parts ;  as,  Present  Indicative,  amor ;  Present  Infinitive^  amari ;  Perfect 
Indicative,  amatus  sum. 

Steins. 

67.  A  Verb  has  three  Stems  :  Present,  Perfect,  and  Supine.  The 
Present  Stem  has  been  described  in  65.  To  find  the  Perfect  Stem,  cut  off 
i  from  the  Perfect  Indicative.  To  find  the  Supine  Stem,  cut  off  um  from 
the  Supine.     The  Stems  of  the  verbs  given  in  66  are  ;  — 


Peesent  Stem. 

Pekfect  Stem. 

Supine  Stem. 

I. 

ama- 

amav- 

amat- 

II. 

mone- 

monu- 

monit- 

III. 

reg€- 

rex- 

rect- 

lY. 

audi- 

audiv- 

audit- 

Formation  of  Tenses:  Indicative  Active. 

68.  a.  The  Present  has  no  Tense  Sign.  It  =  Present  Stem  +  Personal 
Endings.  In  the  First  and  Third  Conjugations,  the  stem -vowel  is  lost  be- 
fore o  (as,  amo  =  ama5).  In  the  Third,  there  are  vowel  changes.  In 
the  Fourth,  the  Third  Person  Plural  is  audiunt  (not  audi-nt). 

h.   The  Imperfect  always  has  the  Tense  Sign  ba.     The  vowel  e  (before 
ba)  is  always  long. 

c.  The  Future  of  the  First  and  Second  Conjugations  always  has  the 

Tense  Sign  bi.     The  i  disappears  before  o  [as,  amab(i)o,  mo- 
neb(i)6],  and  becomes  u  in  the  Third  Person  Plural. 
The  Future  of  the  Third  Conjugation  consists  of  the  Present  Stem  + 
Personal  Endings.     E  becomes  a  in  the  First  Person  Singular.     Verbs  in 
io  retain  the  i  (like  those  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation), 

The  Future  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  consists  of>  the  Present  Stem  -I- 
am,  es,  etc.     It  is  inflected  like  that  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 

d.  The  Perfect  =  Perfect  Stem  -f  Personal  Endings  of  the  Perfect,  for 

all  Conjugations. 

e.  The  Pluperfect  always  has  the  Tense  Sign  gra. 

/.    The  Future  Perfect  always  has  the  Tense  Sign  €ri.    The  i  disappears 
before  o  [as,  monu€r(i)6,  amav6r(i)o]. 

Formation  of  Tenses:  Subjunctive  Active* 

69.  a.  The  Present  consists,  in  the  First  Person  Singular  of  the 

(1. )  First  Conjugation,  of  the  Present  Stem  +  m;  a  is  changed  to  e, 
(2.)  Second  Conjugation^  of  the  Present  Stem  +  am. 


174  «  NOTES. 

(3.)  Third  Oonjugation,  of  the  Present  Stem  +  m;  e  changed  to  a. 
(4.)  Fourth  Conjugation^  of  the  Present  Stem  +  am, 
h.  The  Imperfect  always  has  the  Tense  Sign  re.     It  may  be  obtained 
by  adding  m  to  the  Present  Infinitive  Active. 

c.  The  Perfect  always  has  the  Tense  Sign  6ri. 

d.  The  Pluperfect  always  has  the  Tense  Sign  isse. 

Formation  of  Tenses:   Imperative  Active* 

70.  The  Present,  Second  Person  Singular  =  Present  Stem.  As  the 
forms  of  the  Imperatives  of  the  four  Conjugations  differ  somewhat  from 
each  other,  and  are  apt  to  confuse  a  beginner,  this  simple  Kule  will  be 
found  useful  :  All  the  forms  of  the  Imperative  Active  (except  the  Present ^ 
Second  Singular)  can  he  obtained  from  the  Present  Indicative  (Second  and 
Third  PersoQis)  by  changing  the  Personal  Endi7igs  to  those  of  the  Imperative, 

Formation  of  Tenses:  Infinitive  Active* 

71.  a.  Present  —  Present  Stem  +  re. 

h.  Perfect  =  Perfect  Stem  +  isse. 

c.   Future  —  Future  Participle  +  esse  (Present  Infinitive  of  sum). 

Formation  of  Participles,  Gerund,  and  Supine. 

72.  a.  Present  Participle  =  Present  Stem  +  ns  or  ens ;  as,  ama-ns, 
rege-ns,  audi- ens. 

b.  Future  Participle  =  Supine  Stem  -+-  urus ;  as,  amat-urus. 

c.  Gerund  =  Present  Stem  4-  ndi  or  endi ;  as,  ama-ndi,  audi-endi. 

d.  Supine  =  Supine  Stem  4-  urn  ;  as,  monit-um. 

Formation  of  Tenses:  Indicative  Passive. 

73.  a.  The  Present  is  formed  as  in  68,  «,  but  with  Passive  endings. 
Notice,  however,  that  in  the  Third  Conjugation,  the  Second  Person  Singu- 
lar has  6  and  not  i ;  as,  reggris  (Active,  regis). 

d.  The  Imperfect  has  the  regular  Tense  Sign  and  Passive  endings. 

c.  The  Future  of  the  First  and  Second  Conjugations  has  the  Kegular 

Tense  Sign  ;  but  notice  that  the  Second  Person  Singular  has  bS 
(not  bl);  as,  amabgris,  monebgris.  The  Future  of  the  Third 
and  Fourth  Conjugations  has  the  same  general  form  as  the  Future 
Active,  with  Passive  endings  ;  as,  regeris,  audieris. 

d.  The  Perfect  Stem  is  not  used  in  the  Passive  Voice.     The  Perfect, 

Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect,  Passive,  are  compound,  consisting 
of  the  Perfect  Passive  Participle  with  sum,  eram,  ero. 


NOTES.  175 


Formation  of  Tenses:  Subjunctive  Passive* 

74k  a.  The  Present  and  Imperfect  are  formed  as  the  same  tenses  are  in 
the  Active,  but  with  Passive  endings. 

h.   The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  are  compound,  and  consist  of  the  Perfect 
Passive  Participle  with  sim  and  essem. 

Formation  of  Tenses:  Iniperative  Passive* 

75.  Notice  :  — 

a.  That  the  Second  Person  Singular,  Present,  is  the  same  in  form  as 

the  Present  Infinitive  Active. 

b.  That  there  is  no  Second  Person  Plural  in  the  Future. 

c.  That  the  other  forms  can  be  obtained  from  the  Present  Indicative 

Passive  according  to  70. 

Formation  of  Tenses:  Infinitive  Passive* 

76.  a.  In  the  First,  Second,  and  Fourth  Conjugations  the  Present  is 
formed  by  changing  final  e  of  the  Present  Infinitive  Active  to  i.  In  the 
Third  it  is  formed  from  the  Present  Stem  by  changing  S  to  i ;  as,  amari, 
but  regi. 

b.  The  Perfect  =  Perfect  Passive  Participle  +  esse. 

c.  The  Future  =  Supine  (Accusative)    +   iri.      The  word  iri  is  the 

Present  Infinitive  Passive  of  e5  (I  go),  and  amatum  iri  has  the 
idea  of  going  to  be  loved.  This  tense  of  the  Infinitive  is  a  peculiar 
form  and  one  seldom  used.  What  takes  its  place  will  be  explained 
hereafter. 

Formation  of  Passive  Participles* 

77.  a.  The  Perfect  =  Supine  Stem  +  us ;  as,  amat-us. 

b.   The  Gerundive  (or  Future  Participle)  =  Present  Stem  +  ndus  or 
endus ;  as,  ama-ndus,  audi-endus. 

Synopsis* 

78.  A  Synopsis  is  a  general  outline  of  a  Verb.  The  following  Synopsis 
of  amo,  /  love,  shows  from  what  Stem  each  form  is  made.  In  the  Synop- 
sis of  any  other  Conjugation  the  same  Modes,  Tenses,  etc.,  would  be 
formed  from  the  same  Stems.  The  only  differences  would  be  those  peculiar 
to  each  Conjugation,  and  described  in  68-77, 


176 


NOTES. 
ACTIVE. 


Stem. 

Present,  ama- 

Perfect,  amav- 

Supine,  amat- 

Indicative. 

Present,  amo 
Imperfect,  amabam 
Future,  amabo 

Perfect,  amavi 

Plu^ 
perfect,^^^''^^^^ 

Future - ^- 

Perfect,  amavero 

Subjunctive. 

Present,  amem 
Imperfect,  amarem 

Perfect,  amaverim 

T*1ii 
perfect,^^^^^^^^^ 

Imperative. 

Present,  ama 
Future,  amato 

Infinitive. 

Present,  amare 

Perfect,  amavisse 

Future,  ^^^f ^Jf^^ 

6SS6 

Participles. 

Present,  amans 

Future,  amaturus 

Gerund. 

Genitive,  amandi 

Dative,  etc.  amando, 
etc. 

Supine. 

Accusative,  amatum 
Ablative,  amatu 

PASSIVE. 


Stem. 

Present,  ama- 

Supine,  amat- 

Indicative. 

Present,  amor 
Imperfect,  amabar 
Future,  amabor 

Perfect,  «-aU.s 
cram 

Subjunctive. 

Present,  amer 
Imperfect,  amarer 

Perfect,  B.ma.tus  sim 
Pluperfect^^^^^^ 

Imperative. 

Present,  amare 
Future,  amator 

Infinitive. 

Present,  amari 

Perfect,  amat"« 
Future,  amatum  iri 

Participles. 

Ger'dive,  amandus 

Perfect,  amatus 

Gerund. 

NOTES.  177 


Some  Peculiarities  of  the  Four  Conjueations. 

79.  Most  verbs  of  the  First  and  Fourth  Conjugations  have  Principal 
Parts  that  are  quite  similar.  The  Perfect  Stem  is  formed  by  adding  v, 
and  the  Supine  Stem  by  adding  t,  to  the  Present  Stem  ;  but  the  Second 
and  Third  Conjugations,  and  some  verbs  of  the  First  and  Fourth,  have 
peculiarities  which  should  be  carefully  noticed. 

1.  Only  a  few  verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  form  their  Perfect  and 
Supine  Stem  by  adding  v  and  t  to  the  Present  Stem.  Deleo,  /  destroy ; 
fleo,  I  weep  ;  and  the  compounds  of  pleo,  I  fill  (as,  compleo),  are  those 
in  common  use ;  as,  compleo,  complere,  complevi,  completum. 

Most  verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  form  the  Perfect  by  changing  v 
to  u  (3,  p.  17),  and  the  e  of  the  stem  disappears  ;  as,  monui  (for  moneui 
=  monevi).  They  form  the  Supine  by  changing  long  e  of  the  stem  to 
short  i;  as,  monltum  (for  monetum). 

2.  The  Third  Conjugation  (like  the  Third  Declension)  has  the  greatest 
variety  of  forms  of  all  the  Conjugations.  These  differences  occur  in  the 
Perfect  and  Supine,  and  can  be  best  learned  by  practice.  In  other  Conju- 
gations the  Present  Stem  (sometimes  slightly  changed)  is  usually  found  in 
all  the  Principal  Parts ;  but,  in  the  Third  Conjugation,  the  final  S  of  the 
Present  Stem  rarely  appears,  in  any  form,  in  the  Perfect  and  Supine 
Stems.  Rege-,  therefore,  is  called  the  Present  Stem  of  rego,  but  reg- 
is the  Verb- Stem, 

a.  The  Third  Conjugation  is  like  the  Third  Declension  in  another  re- 
spect :  in  many  verbs  s  is  added  to  the  Verb-Stem  to  form  the  Perfect  Stem 
(as,  reg  +  s  =  Perfect  Stem  rex),  just  as  s  is  added  to  the  Stem  to  form 
the  'N'ominative  Singular;  as,  reg  +  s  =  rex,  a  Icing.  Likewise  misi 
(Perfect  of  mitto)  =  mitt-si. 

3.  Verhs  of  tJie  Third  in  io.  Some  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjuga- 
tion end  in  i5,  and  have  some  forms,  in  the  Present-Stem  Tenses,  like 
those  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation.  They  are  called  Verhs  in  io.  Capio, 
/  taJce^  is  one  of  this  class.  Notice  this  simple  Rule  for  remembering  its 
irregularities :  Verhs  in  i5  have  the  forms  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  wher- 
ever the  Fourth  has  {followed  hy  a  vowel.  Hence  we  have  capio  (audi5) ; 
capiebam  (audiebam) ;  capiens  (audiens) ;  but  capere  (audire). 

4.  V  is  often  dropped  in  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect ; 
as,  audieram  (=  audiveram) ;  iit  (=  ivit).  Sometimes  a  contraction 
takes  place  ;  as,  amasse  (=  amavisse) ;  consuesse  (=  consuevisse). 

5.  Dico,  duco,  f acio,  fero  (but  see  88,  Remark),  drop  final  e  in  the 
Imperative  Present,  Second  Singular,  making  die,  diic,  fac,  fer. 

6.  The  Perfect  Stem  of  some  verbs  doubles  the  first  two  (sometimes 
three)  letters  of  the  Present  Stem,  often  with  vowel  changes.     This  is 


178  NOTES. 

called  Reduplication  (that  is,  redoubling)  ;  as,  curro  (Perfect,  cucurri) ; 
do  (Perfect,  dedi) ;  sto  (steti) ;  pello  (pepuli) ;  cado  (cecidi) ;  caedo 
(cecidi);  disco  (didici) ;  posco  (poposci). 

Kemark.  In  compounds,  the  reduplication  is  dropped;  as,  repellS, 
repuli;  incldo  (=  in  +  cad5),  incidi;  incido  (=  in  +  caedo),  incidi. 
But  compounds  of  d5  and  sto  ahvays,  and  those  of  curro  and  some  others 
often^  retain  it;  as,  addo  (addidi);  insto  (institi);  decurro  (decucurri). 

7.  Many  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  do  not  add  s  to  form  the  Per- 
fect Stem.     The  following  verbs,  in  common  use,  should  be  noticed :  — 

a.  Lego  (Perfect,  legi),  I  choose ^  read. 

Three  compounds  of  lego,  however,  have  x  in  the  Perfect  :  diligo  (not 
deligo),  intelligo,  neglig5. 

h.  Verto  (Perfect,  verti),  I  turn. 

c.  Verbs  having  nd  before  final  o;  as,   scandS  (scandi) ;  incendo 
(incendi) ;  contend©  (contend!). 

8.  Section  4,  d  (p.  18),  will  be  found  useful,  as  explaining  many  of  the 
consonant  changes  taking  place  in  the  Third  Conjugation  ;  as,  reg-o,  rec- 
tum; scrib-6,  scriptum. 

Deponent  Verbs. 

80.  Deponent  Verbs  have  a  Passive  form  but  an  Active  meaning.  The 
name  [Deponent]  means  putting  off,  or  aside,  because  they  lay  aside 
(depSnunt)  the  Passive  sense.  They  occur  in  all  four  Conjugations,  and 
are  inflected  like  the  Passive  of  other  verbs  of  these  Conjugations.  Of 
course,  the  Present  Imperative,  Second  Singular,  has  the  same  form  as  the 
Present  Infinitive  Active  would  have. 

Caution.     Notice  that,  in  Deponent  Verbs,  — 

a.  The  Future  Infinitive  is  taken  from  the  Actii^e  Voice  /  as,  hor- 

taturus  esse  (not  hortatum  iri). 
h.  The  forms  of  both  voices  are  found  after  the  Infinitive  Mode  ;  that  is, 
a  Deponent  Verb  has  all  four  ParticipleSy  the  Gerund^  and  the 
Supine. 
Remarks.     1.  Deponents  are  the  only  Latin  verbs  that  have  a  Perfect 
Participle  with  an  Active  meaning.     2.  The  Gerundive  is  regularly  Passive 
in  meaning  ;  as,  milites  cohortandi  sunt,  the  soldiers  must  he  exhorted. 
3.  The  Perfect  Participle  is  sometimes  Passive  in  meaning. 

Semi- Deponent  Verbs. 

81.  Four  verbs  have  no  Perfect  Stem,  and  are  half  Active  and  half 
Passive  in  form.      They  form  the  Present -Stem  tenses,   etc.,  regularly, 


NOTES.  179 

according  to  their  Conjugations.  All  other  forms  they  "borrow  from  the 
Passive  ;  hence  they  are  called  Semi-Deponent  (half -deponent) .  Their 
meaning  is  Active.  The  list  is  :  audeo,  audere,  ausus  sum,  /  dare; 
gaude5,  gaudere,  gavisus  sum,  I  rejoice;  soleo,  solere,  solitus  sum, 
I  am  accustomed  ;  fido,  fidere,  fisus  sum,  I  trust. 

Periplirastic  Conjugations. 

82.  The  word  Periphrastic  is  derived  from  two  Greek  words,  and  means 
roundabout  speaking.  The  English  word  circumlocution  (circum,  around, 
and  loquor,  /  speak)  means  the  same  thing.  The  Future  Infinitives, 
Active  and  Passive,  are  examples  of  roundabout  speaking.  Amaturus 
esse  means,  literally,  to  be  about  to  love;  amatum  iri  has  the  general 
idea  of  the  English  going  to  be  loved.  Other  forms  might  be  mentioned, 
which,  like  the  English  /  am  going  to  go,  state  something  in  a  roundabout 
way.  In  Latin  there  are  two  Conjugations  (compound  in  their  forms), 
which,  from  the  frequency  of  their  use,  are  called  the  Periphrastic  Conju- 
gations.    They  are  thus  formed  :  — 

a.  The  First,  or  Activef  Periphrastic  Conjugation  consists  of 

the  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  and  the  Present  and  Perfect  Infinitive 
of  sum,  with  the  Future  Active  Participle.     It  expresses  intention, 
or  that  something  is  going  to  happen ;  as,  amatiirus  sum,  /  am 
about  to  love,  intend  to  love,  am  going  to  love. 
Remark.     The   Subjunctive  has  no   Future  Tense.      The  Present  is 
sometimes  used  with  a  Future  meaning  ;  but  when  Future  time  is  to  be 
accurately  stated,  and  distinguished  from  Present  time,  the  form  sim  with 
the  Future  Active  Participle  must  be  used.     Amaturus  sim  may,  there- 
fore, be  called  the  Future  Subjunctive  of  amo ;  as,  dubium  est  utrum 
filium  amaturus  sit,  necne,  it  is  doubtful  whether  he  will  love  his  son,  or 
not  (utrum  amet  =  whether  he  loves). 

b.  The  Second,  or  Passive,  Periphrastic  Conjugation  has  the 

same  Mode  and  Tense  forms  as  the_  First ;  but  the  Gerundive  is 
used.  It  expresses  necessity,  duty,  etc. ;  as,  amandus  sum,  / 
ought  to  be  loved,  must  be  loved  ;  amandus  fui,  /  was  (worthy)  to 
be  loved,  ought  to  have  been  loved. 

Irregular  Verbs. 

83.  Each  Conjugation  forms  its  Principal  Parts  according  to  its  own 
laws.  Many  verbs  in  these  Conjugations,  however,  do  not  strictly  obey 
these  laws.  For  example,  pet5  and  quaerS  belong  to  the  Third  Conjuga- 
tion ;  yet  they  have  petivi,  quaes! vi,  in  the  Perfect  (more  like  the  Fourth 
than   the   Third  Conjugation).      We   do  not,    however,   call  such  verbs 


180  NOTES. 

IrregulaVy  because  their  stems  and  inflection  are,  in  gentral^  like  those  of 
their  own  conjugation.  We  call  those  verbs  Irregular,  which  have 
two  or  three  stems  entirely  unlike  each  other  (like  English  am,  was,  been  ; 
goy  went,  gone),  or  which  have  some  forms  of  inflection  not  to  be  found  in 
the  four  Conjugations.  In  studying  an  Irregular  Verb,  always  notice 
how  much  of  it  is  regular,  as  well  as  what  are  the  irregular  forms.  The 
most  common  Irregular  Verbs  are  sum,  fero,  e5,  fio  (and  their  com- 
pounds), vols,  nolo,  malo. 

84.  Sum,  /  am,  has  these  stems  :  Present,  es ;  Perfect,  fu ;  Supine, 
fut  (found  only  in  the  Future  Participle).     Its  chief  peculiarities  are  :  — 

a.  In  the  Present  Indicative,  sum,  sumus,  sunt,  have  lost  the  e  (as 

though  'sum,  etc.).  The  same  is  true  in  the  Present  Subjunctive  ; 
as,  sim  (for  esim). 

b.  The  stem  es  becomes  er  in  the  Imperfect  and  Future  Indicative, 

according  to  1  (2). 

c.  The   Supine,    Gerund,   and  Present  Participle  are  wanting.      The 

Present  Participle  (used  as  an  adjective)  is  found  in  three  com- 
pounds :  potens,  absens,  praesens.  Therefore  we  may  say  that, 
if  sum  had  a  Present  Participle,  it  would  be  ens. 

d.  Instead  of  futurus  esse  we  often  find  fore,  and  instead  of  essem, 

forem  is  sometimes  used. 

85.  Two  Compounds  of  sum  have  peculiar  forms  :  — 

1.  Possum,  I  am  able,  I  can,  is  made  up  of  the  adjective  potis,  able, 
and  sum,  I  am.  Only  the  first  syllable  of  potis  (pot)  is  employed,  so 
that  the  verb  is  really  potsum  (1  (4)  b).  The  same  change  occurs  wher- 
ever pot  would  stand  before  s ;  as,  possunt,  possim  (for  potsunt, 
potsim).  Potesse  is  shortened  to  posse  (hence  the  Imperfect  Subjunc- 
tive is  possem),  and  f  is  dropped  from  fui,  etc.  (potui,  potuisse,  etc., 
for  potfui,  potfuisse). 

It  has  a  Present  Participle  (used  only  as  an  adjective);  but  no  Im- 
perative, Future  Participle,  Gerund,  or  Supine. 

2.  Prosum,  1  am  helpful,  I  assist,  takes  d  before  e  ;  as,  prodesse, 
prSdest,  proderam,  etc.  The  form  prod  is  used  to  separate  the  vowels, 
just  as  re,  back,  and  eo,  /  go,  form  the  compound  redeo,  /  go  back  (like 
the  English  an,  not  a,  before  words  beginning  with  a  vowel). 

86.  Fer5,  I  bear,  has  three  stems,  very  unlike  each  other  :  Present, 
fere  (sometimes  fer);  Perfect,  tul ;  Supine,  lat.  The  tenses  formed  from 
the  Present  Stem  are  exattly  like  those  of  the  Third  Conjugation  with 
these  exceptions  :  — 

a.  The  vowel  e  (or  i)  is  lost :  (1)  in  certain  forms  of  the  Present  In- 
dicative, Active  and  Passive  ;  (2)  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive, 


NOTES.  181 

Active  and  Passive  ;  (3)  in  the  Imperative  (certain  forms),  Active 
and  Passive ;  (4)  in  the  Infinitive,  Active  and  Passive.  The 
Present  Infinitive  Passive  (ferri)  is  the  most  irregular  of  all  the 
forms.  If  like  the  Third  Conjugation,  it  would  be  feri  (like  regi); 
but  it  has  rr,  as  though  it  had  been  shortened  from  fer^ri. 

87.  E6,  /  go^  has  the  stems  i,  iv,  it ;  hence  it  resembles  a  verb  of  the 
Fourth  Conjugation.     It  has  these  irregularities  :  — 

a.  The  vowel  i,  unlike  the  Fourth  Conjugation,  is  short  in  the  Supine 

stem  ;  as,  itUrus. 
h.  The  Present  stem  is  changed  to  e  before  a,  o,  u ;  as,  eo,  eunt,  earn. 

c.  The  Future  Indicative  is  ibo,  a  mixture  of  the  First  (or  Second)  and 

Fourth  Conjugations. 

d.  The  Present  Participle  has  euntis,  etc.,  in  the  Genitive  and  other 

cases,  instead  of  ientis  (as,  audientis).     The  Gerund  is  eundi 

(not  iendi,  as  in  audiendi). 
Remark.     Although  e5  is  Intransitive,  yet  some  of  its  compounds 
(with  Prepositions)  are  Transitive,  and  are  followed  by  the  Accusative ; 
as,  adeo,  I  approach;  transeo,  I  cross  ;  subeo,  I  undergo. 

88.  Fio,  /  am  made,  I  become,  is  used  as  the  Passive  of  facio,  and 
also,  as  its  second  meaning  indicates,  as  an  Intransitive  verb,  in  the  sense 
of  become,  happen  (that  is,  to  be  brought  about).  Some  of  its  tenses  evidently 
are  the  Passive  of  faciS.     Its  peculiarities  are  :  — 

a.  The  Present  Infinitive  is  fieri. 

b.  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  formed  as  though  the  Present  Infini- 

tive were  fiere. 

c.  Tenses  formed  from  the  Present  stem  have  Active  endings,  but  (fre- 

quently) Passive  meanings, 
Kemark.  Compounds  of  facio  with  prepositions  are  regular  in  both 
Voices,  with  vowel  changes  (2) ;  as,  conficior,  confici,  confectus  sum. 
Other  compounds  do  not  change  the  vowel  a  to  i,  and  have  fio  in  the 
Passive;  as,  patefaciS,  /  open  (Passive,  patefio,  patefieri,  patefactus 
sum).  Therefore  this  simple  rule  may  be  foUowed  ;  Facio  always  has 
fio  in  the  Passive ;  but  ficio  is  regular.  Examples  :  Imperatives,  fac,  per- 
fice,  patefi,  conficere ;  Infinitives,  facere,  patefieri,  conficere,  perfici. 

89.  Vols,  /  am  willing,  wish,  resembles,  in  some  respects,  the  Third 
Conjugation  (as  in  the  Future  Indicative).     It  has  these  peculiarities :  — 

a.  The  Present  Infinitive  loould  be  volere,  if  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 
The  o  is  changed  to  e  (=  velere);  then,  as  in  ferere,  the  second 
e  is  dropped  (=  velre);  then  the  r  is  assimilated  (made  like)  to  the 
1  {—  velle).  This  same  e  is  also  seen  in  the  Present  and  Imper- 
fect Subjunctive  (velim,  vellem). 


182  NOTES. 

h.  The  Present  Indicative  would  have  volis,  volit,  volimus,  volitis. 
Volis  is  shortened  to  vis;  volit  to  vult  (=  volt);  volitis  to 
vultis  (=  voltis).     Volimus  becomes  volumus  (like  sumus). 

c.  Velim  (Present  Subjunctive)  =  volam. 

d.  Lack  of  forms,  as  shown  in  the  Grammars  and  Appendix. 

90.  Vols  has  two  compounds  :  nolo,  I  am  unwilling,  and  malo,  / 
would  rather,  I  prefer.  N515  =  non  vol5 ;  malo  =  magis  volo  (as 
though  it  were  mavolo).  Their  similarity  to  volo  will  be  seen  in  their 
conjugation. 

Remark.  Notice  that  n5l6  is  the  only  one  of  the  "  volo  class"  that 
has  an  Imperative.  Notice,  also,  that  this  Imperative  is  a  mixture  of  the 
Fourth  and  Third  Conjugations. 

Defective  Verbs. 

91.  Defective  Verbs  are  such  as  lack  many  tenses,  or  parts  of  tenses. 
The  most  important  Defective  verbs  are  these  three,  which  have  no  tenses 
formed  from  the  Present  stem  :  — 

1.  Coepi,  /  began.  The  verb  incipiS,  /  begiii  (in  +  capio),  supplies 
the  place  of  the  Present ;  as,  incipiunt  credere,  they  begin  to  believe. 
When  coepi  is  followed  by  a  Passive  Infinitive,  it  is  expressed  in  a  Passive 
form  ;  as,  urbem  aedificare  coeperunt,  they  began  to  build  the  city ; 
but  urbs  aedificari  coepta  est. 

2.  Memini,  /  remember,  and  odi,  /  hate.  These  verbs  have,  in  the 
Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect,  the  meaning  of  the  Present,  Im- 
perfect, and  Future.  From  the  fact  that  they  employ  the  tenses  of  com- 
pleted action  to  express  the  meaning  of  the  tenses  of  incomplete  action, 
they  are  often  called  Preteritive  (praeter  +  ire,  to  pass  by);  that  is,  they 
have  only  the  tenses  of  completed  action.  Memini  has  these  Imperative 
forms:  memento,  mementote  (Future). 

E  EM  ARK.  The  Perfect  of  nosco,  /  begin  (or  learn)  to  know,  and  also 
that  of  consuesco,  /  become  accustomed,  have  the  same  peculiarity,  and 
mean,  /  know  (that  is,  I  have  finished  beginning,  and  now  know)',  I  am 
accustomed  (that  is,  have  become  accustomed).     See  98,  d. 

a.  Inquam,  say  I,  quoth  I,  has  only  one  complete  tense,  the  Present 

Indicative.     It  is  used  in  direct  qiwtations  only,  and  never  stands 
first  ;  as,  "  Venite,'*  inquit,  "in  castra." 

b.  These  have  Imperative  forms  only  :  salve  !  ave  !  hail  ! 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

92.  Study  section  26,  page  8.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  an  Impersonal 
Verb  is  one  having  no  personal  subject,   and  is  used  only  in  the  Third 


NOTES.  183 

Person  Singular ;  but  these  verbs  are  more  numerous  in  Latin  than  in 
English,  forming  a  class  of  words  very  important  and  very  frequently 
used.  With  such  verbs  we  often,  in  English,  use  it  as  a  subject ;  as,  it 
rains.  We  hardly  know  what  part  of  speech  to  call  it.  .  In  Latin  no 
such  word  was  expressed  ;  as,  pluit,  it  rains. 

Caution.  It  must  be  clearly  understood,  at  the  very  first,  that  every 
Latin  verb  has  a  subject ;  and  that,  if  the  subject  is  not  expressed^  it  is  to 
be  understood.  The  subject  of  an  Impersonal  Verb  is  its  general  idea 
(that  is,  its  stem).  Pluit  means  rain  is  falling  ;  tonat,  thunder  crashes^ 
roars,  etc.  There  are  a  few  Impersonal  Verbs  in  Latin  that  we  cannot 
translate  into  English,  giving  the  full  value  to  the  stem  as  subject,  since 
the  same  thought  is  differently  expressed  in  the  two  languages.  For 
instance,  me  oportet  really  means  necessity  compels  me  ;  but  the  English 
would  be  /  7nust,  and  therefore  we  must  so  render  it.  Ahnost  all  Im- 
personal Verbs,  however,  can  and  should  be  rendered  with  the  stem  (or 
thought)  as  subject  ;  as,  pugnatur,  fighting  (or,  the  fight)  is  carried  on 
(not  they  fight,  or  it  is  fought). 

93.  Impersonal  Verbs,  in  Latin,  are  of  two  kinds  :  (1)  Those  whose 
regular  use  is  Impersonal ;  (2)  Those  often  used  Impersonally. 

1.  Verbs  regularly  Impersonal.     These  are  :  — 

a.  Verbs  denoting  states  of  the  weather,  etc.  (as  in  English);  as,  pluit, 

it  rains  ;  ningit,  it  siiows  ;  grandinat,  it  hails  ;  tonat,  it  thunders; 
Idcescit,  it  grows  light ;  vesperascit,  it 's  getting  dark,  or  draw- 
ing towards  evening.  The  real  subjects  of  these  verbs  (their  stems) 
might  be  thus  expressed  :  rain,  s7iow,  or  hail,  is  falling;  thunder 
sounds,  crashes,  etc.;  light  (lux)  begins  to  appear,  or  break;  evening 
(vesper)  draws  near. 

b.  Verbs  denoting  mental  state.     These  must  be  rendered  according  to 

the  English  use  of  such  words  ;  as,  me  pudet,  /  am  ashamed 
(literally,  a  feeling  of  shame  possesses  me).  The  most  common  of 
these  verbs  are  given  here,  with  the  Accusative  Case,  which  is 
regularly  used  with  them  as  object,  though,  in  translating,  the 
English  requires  the  Accusative  to  be  rendered  as  though  it  were 
the  subject:  me  miseret,  T  pity ;  vos  poenitet,  you  are  sorry  for, 
you  repent ;  te  pudet,  you  are  ashamed. 

c.  Verbs  having  a  Phrase  or  Clause  as  subject  (as  in  English).     Many 

of  these  are  also  used  with  personal  subjects.  Some  of  them  are  : 
libet,  it  pleases ;  licet,  it  is  permitted  (English,  license) ;  oportet, 
it  is  necessary;  accidit,  it  happens;  accedit,  there  is  another 
(added)  reason  (usually  translated,  it  is  added);  videtur,  it  seems 
best;  restat,  it  remains;  praestat,  it  is  better. 


184  NOTES. 

2.  Very  many  verbs  may  be  used  Impersonally.  Some  of  them  have 
been  given  above  (c)  ;  as,  accidit,  acc5dit,  videtur.  A  very  large  class 
of  them  is  composed  of  Passive  forms  of  Intransitive  verbs.  Intransitive 
verbs  can  he  used  in  the  Passive  only  Impersonally.  A  variety  of  such 
forms  is  given  under  198.  A  few  of  those  most  commonly  used  are  given 
here  (notice  that  the  stem  of  the  verb  is  the  subject) :  pugnatur,  pugnatum 
est,  pugnandum  est,  fighting  is,  was,  must  be  carried  on ;  nobis  matii- 
randum  est,  haste  must  be  made  on  our  part  (or,  we  must  hurry)  \  nocetur, 
harm  is  done,  injury  is  inflicted  :  manetur,  a  stay  (or  stop)  is  made  ;  itur, 
a  march  is  made,  is  in  progress ;  imperatum  est,  the  order  was  given. 

ADVERBS. 

94.  Learn  section  28,  page  9. 

Adverbs  have  the  same  use  in  Latin  as  in  English,  and  are  divided 
'nto  the  same  classes.     Latin  Adverbs  may  be,  — 

a.  Derived  from  Adjectives  or  Participles  (see  38);  as,  care,  acriter, 
docte.  The  Comparative  of  an  Adverb  is  regularly  the  same  in 
form  as  the  Neuter  Accusative  of  the  Adjective  (Comparative). 
See,  also,  d,  below. 

h.  Derived  from  Nouns ;  as,  diii,  noctu,  partim. 

c.  Simple ;  as,  saepe. 

d.  Besides  the  forms  mentioned  in  a,  b,  c,  there  are  forms  of  adjectives 

and  pronouns  used  as  adverbs.     They  can  usually  be  explained  as 
cases. 

1.  The  Accusative  and  Ablative,  Neuter,  are  often  used  as  adverbs. 
The  Accusative  usually  denotes  Degree  or  Extent  (142,  c),  and  the  Ablative, 
Degree  of  Difference  (155);  as,  pliirimum  potest,  he  is  very  (or  most) 
powerful  (literally,  he  is  powerful  to  a  very  great  degree) ;  hostium  impe- 
tus paulum  tardati  sunt,  the  attacks  of  the  enemy  were  checked  a  little 
(literally,  to  a  slight  extent);  nuntii  multo  crebriores  erant,  tlie  mes- 
sages were  (by)  a  great  deal  more  frequent. 

2.  The  Feminine  Ablative  Singular  is  often  used  as  an  adverb  (the  noun 
being  omitted);  as,  qua,  una,  ultra,  inf(e)ra  (parte  or  via),  whither  (by 
which  way),  together  (by  one  way),  beyond  (on  the  farther  side),  below  (on 
the  under  side). 

PREPOSITIOlSrS. 

95.  Prepositions,  in  Latin  as  in  English,  are  connectives  (see  29,  page 
9).     When  not  used  as  connectives,  they  are  adverbs*  (as  in  English)  ; 

*  This  is  the  original  use. 


NOTES.  185 

as,  paulo  post  (or  ante)  venit,  he  came  a  little  while  after  (or  before). 
They  are  followed  by  the  Accusative  or  Ablative.  The  Accusative  is  used 
with  about  thirty  prepositions  ;  the  Ablative  with  about  one  third  as  many. 
Those  (in  common  use)  which  are  always  used  with  the  Ablative  are  seven 
in  number.  They  are  given  below  in  rhyme,  that  they  may  be  more  easily 
remembered  :  — 

a  (or  ab),  dS; 
cum,  ex  (or  e) ; 
sine,  pr5,  prae. 
a.  Two  of  these  have  double  forms  :  a  and  e  are  used  only  before  words 
beginning  with  a  consonant;  ab  and  ex  before  those  beginning 
with  a  vowel  or  consonant  (somewhat  like  a  and  an  in  English)  ; 
as,  a  (or  ab)  flumine,  e  silva ;  but  ab  urbe,  ab  hoc  oppido 
(see  4,  h,  page  17),  ex  agro. 
h.   Notice  that  a  (ab)  means  away  fro'm ;  e  (ex),  out  of;  as,  a  flii- 
mine,/rom  the  river ^  that  is,  from  the  river-hank  ;  but  e  flumine, 
out  of  the  river. 
c.    In  and  sub  with  the  Accusative  answer  the  question  Whither  ?  with 
the  Ablative,  the  question  Where  ?  as,  in  oppidum  venit,  he  came 
into  the  town;  sub  jugum  missi  sunt,  they  were  sent  under  the 
yoke;  but  in  horto  ambulat,  he  is  walking  in  the  garden;  sub 
monte  castra  ponit,  lie  pitches  his  camp  at  the  foot  of  the  moun- 
tain, 

COlSTJUISrCTIONS. 

96.   Conjunctions,  in  Latin  as  in  English  (see  30,  page  9),  are  :  — 
(1.)  Co-ordinate ;  as,  et,  and ;  sed,  hut. 

(2.)  Suhordinate ;  as,  si,  if;  quod,  hecause  ;  ut,  that,  so  that ;  ne,  lest, 
that  not ;  quum,  when,  since,  although. 

a.  There  are  three  words  meaning  and :  — 

1.  Et,  and,  connects  independent  words,  phrases,  and  clauses. 

2.  Que,  and,  always  an  Enclitic  (195,  3),  connects  words,  etc.  that 
naturally  form  a  pair  of  objects  or  thought?,  or  convey  one  general  idea  ; 
as  the  names  of  two  men  in  partnership,  a  general  and  his  army,  the 
senate  and  the  people.  Que  is  joined  to  the  second  of  the  two  words  con- 
nected. If  it  connects  clauses,  it  is  joined  to  the  first  word  of  the  second 
clause. 

3.  Atque  (sometimes  written  ac)  =  ad  +  que,  and  hence  means  and 
in  addition,  and  too,  and  also.  It  indicates  that  the  second  word,  etc.,  is 
more  important  than  the  first  ;  as,  milites  atque  imperator,  the  soldiers 
and  the  commander,  too.  It  is  often  used  after  words  denoting  comparison, 
etc.,  meaning  as  or  than ;  as,  aliter  ac,  otherwise  than. 


186  NOTES. 

b.  Regularly,  with  several  words,  et  was  either  used  before  all  but  the 
first,  or  was  omitted  entirely  ;  as,  equi  et  arma  et  obsides,  or 
equi,  arma,  obsides. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

97.  Interjections  are  used  as  in  English  (see  31,  page  9). 

DERIVED  AND  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

Endings. 

98.  Many  derived  words  have  endings  that  give  them  special  meanings. 
A  few  of  those  most  common  are  given  in  this  Note. 

a.  Nouns  composed  of  the  Supine  stem  of  Verbs  +  or  denote  the 

male  agent;  as,  amator,  monitor,  rector,  auditor,  inventor, 
victor.  Some  nouns,  derived  from  other  nounSy  have  the  same 
ending  tor,  and  denote  the  agent;  as,  viator,  a  traveller  (from 
via).  A  change  of  tor  to  trix  gives  a  noun  denoting  the  female 
agent ;  as,  victrix,  inventrix. 

b.  Nouns  and  Adjectives  ending  in  ulus  (a,  um)  denote  smalhiess, 

and  are  called  Diminutives;  as,  rivus,  a  stream,  rivulus,  a 
rivulet,  or  streamlet  ;  parvus,  small,  parvulus,  very  small  ;  ado- 
lescens,  a  youth,  adolescentulus,  a  mere  youth. 

c.  Adjectives  ending  in  osus  denote  fulness ;  as,  studiosus,  zeal- 

ous, studious  {full  of  study) ;  bellicosus,  warlike  ( filled  with  the 
desire  of  war). 

d.  Verbs  ending  in  sco  denote  the  beginning  of  an  act ;  as,  nosco, 

/  begin  to  know,  or  learn  ;  cognosc5,  I  find  out  ;  lucescit,  day 
begins  to  break.  They  are  called  Inceptives  (from  incipio,  I  begin), 
and  are  of  the  Third  Conjugation.  See  91,  2,  Remark.  The 
noun  adolescens,  a  youth,  is  really  the  Present  Participle  of 
adolesco,  /  groio  up,  and  means  one  who  is  getting  his  full  growth. 

e.  Derivative  Verbs  ending  in  to  or  ito  denote  repeated  or  vigorous 

action;  as,  jacto  (from  jacio),  /  hurl,  keep  throwing ;  clamit5 
(from  clamo),  I  keep  shouting;  ventito  (from  venio),  I  keep 
toming  ;  also,  verbs  formed  from  Supine  stems  ;  as,  versor  (trom 
vert5),  I  keep  tur^iing,  busy  myself,  am  engaged  in.  These  verbs 
are  called  Frequentatives,  and  are  of  the  First  Conjugation. 

Compound  Words :  Prefixes. 

99.  1.  Many  Latin  Prepositions^  when  used  as  the  first  part  of 
Compound  Verbs,  have  the  force  of  adverbs,  and  give  a  special  meaning  to 
the  compounds.  Some  of  these  meanings  are  evident,  and  need  no  ex- 
planation.    The  following  have  some  special  force  :  — 


NOTES.  187 

§,  ab,  away,  off ;  as,  abiit,  he  lias  gone  away ;  quinque  milia  (or 
milibus)  passuum  abest,  he  is  five  miles  off, 

com,  con  (adverbial  forms  of  cum),  together,  thoroughly,  earnestly  ;  as, 
conveniunt,  they  assemble  ;  conferunt,  they  collect ;  conjungere,  to  join 
together;  conficio,  I  complete  ;  cohortor,  I  exhort  earnestly;  collaudat, 
he  praises  highly. 

de,  down,  away ;  as,  demisso  capita,  with  downcast  head  {look)-, 
dejectus,  downcast  (discouraged);  deduce,  I  withdraw,  lead  away. 

in,  on,  against ;  as,  Gallis  bellum  inferS,  /  rmke  war  on  the  Gauls. 

ob,  towards,  to  meet ;  as,  occurro,  /  run  to  meet. 

per,  through,  thoroughly  (through  and  through)-,  as,  epistolam  perlegi, 
I've  read  the  letter  through  ;  perterritus,  thoroughly  frightened. 

2.  The  following  prefixes  (never  written  alone)  give  a  special  meaning 
and  force  to  Verbs  :  — 

dis  (or  di),  apart,  here  and  there,  away ;  as,  discedo,  /  go  away ; 
milites  disponit,  he  places  soldiers  here  and  there ;  ventus  ignem  dis- 
tulit,  the  wind  spread  the  fire  in  every  direction. 

in  (English,  in  or  un)  gives  a  negative  force  ;  as,  innocentia,  blame- 
lessness,  uprightness  (literally,  a  not  doing  harm)',  imperitus,  unskilled; 
integer  (in  +  tango,  I  touch),  whole,  unwearied. 

re  (red),  hack,  behind ;  as,  reduce,  /  lead  hack  ;  me  recipio  (re  + 
capio),  /  retreat,  betake  myself ;  equites  reliquit,  he  left  the  cavalry 
behind. 

se;  apart,  away  ;  as,  secedo,  I  go  away ;  sejungo,  I  disjoin,  separate. 


188  NOTES. 


I^OTES    01^    STJ^TAX. 


THE    SENTENCE. 

ICX).   Sentences,  in  Latin  as  in  English,  are  :  — 
Declaratory  ;  as,  vir  fortis  est,  tJie  man  is  brave. 
Interrogative  ;  as,  quis  aeger  est  ?  who  is  sick  ? 
Imperative  ;  as,  fortes  este,  be  brave  ;  veniant,  let  them  come. 
Exclamatory  ;  as,  quam  sapiens  fuit !  how  wise  he  was  I 

Interrogative  Sentences. 

101.  Questions,  in  English  or  Latin,  may  be  single  or  double.  Is  the 
man  brave  ?    Did  n't  he  call  ?  are  single  questions. 

Is  the  man  brave,  or  cowardly  ?  Did  he  praise,  or  blame  ?  Did  you 
calif  or  not  ?  are  double  questions. 

In  Latin,  every  question  requires  an  interrogative  word.  This  word 
may  be  an  Interrogative  Pronoun  or  Adverb  ;  as,  quis  es  ?  who  are  you  ? 
unde  (cur)  venisti  ?  whe7ice  (ivhy)  have  you  come  ?  Most  of  these  words 
have  a  meaning  and  use  as  in  English.  A  few,  however,  need  special 
mention  :  — 

a.  In  Single  Questions,  expecting  the  answer  yes  or  no,  we  must 

use  a  word  indicating  what  answer  is  expected. 
If  an  answer  merely  is  expected  (either  yes  or  no),  use  -ne.     This  word 

is  always  an  Enclitic  (195,  3),  and  is  joined  to  the  first  word  in  the 

sentence  ;  as,  puerine  venerunt  ?  have  the  boys  come  ? 
If  yes  is  expected,  use  nonne  ;  as,  nonne  vir  bonus  est  ?  is  he  not  a 

good  man  ?  or,  he  is  a  good  man,  is  n't  he  ?    Notice  that  -ne  is  an 

Enclitic  in  nonne. 
If  no  is  expected,  use  num ;  as,  num  miles  fortis  mortem  timet  ? 

does  a  brave  soldier  fear  death  ? 

b.  In  Double  Questions  an  interrogative  word  is  used  with  each 

part  of  the  question.  The  words  most  commonly  used  are  utrum 
(or  -ne,  enclitic)  in  the  first  part,  and  an  in  the  second.  Utrum 
is  really  the  Neuter  of  the  Adjective  uter  (51,  Caution),  and 
means,  which  (thing)  of  these  two  is  the  fact  ?  It  is  not  to  be  trans- 
lated into  English.     An  means  or.     If  the  second  part  is  merely 


NOTES.  189 

or  not^  use  annon ;  as,  utrum  pugnavit  an  fugit  ?  did  he  fight^ 
or  flee  ?  utrum  patriam  amat,  annon  ?  does  he  love  his  country, 
or  not  ? 
Remark.      Yes  and  no,  in  answer  to  questions,  have  no  equivalent 
(in  single  words)  in  common  use.     Such  an  answer  should  usually  be  ex- 
pressed by  repeating  the   verb    (with  a  negative   adverb,   if  no  is   the 
answer) ;  as,  venitne  ?  has  he  come  ?  venit,  yes  (he  has  co7ne) ;  suntne 
amici  tui  ?  are  they  your  friends  ?  non  sunt,  no  (they  are  not). 

Subject  and  Predicate. 

102.  Every  sentence  must  contain  a  Subject  and  a  Predicate. 

a.  The  Subject  of  a  Finite^erb  must  be  in  the  Nominative  Case.     It 

answers  the  question  Who?  or  What?  and  must  be  a  noun  or 
some  word  or  collection  of  words  used  as  a  noun  (see  36,  page  10); 
as,  benefacere  rei  publicae  pulchrum  est,  to  contribute  to  the 
welfare  of  (literally,  to  do  good  to)  the  state  is  honorable  (Subject, 
benefacere  rei  publicae). 
The  Subject,  if  a  Personal  Pronoun,  is  very  frequently  omitted,  as  the 

Personal  Ending  of  the  verb  shows  what  it  is  ;  therefore,  a  sentence  may 

consist  of  but  one  word  ;  as,  vocatis,  you  are  calling. 

b.  The  Predicate  may  consist  of  a  verb  alone,  or  with  modifiers  ;  as, 

agricola  vocat,  the  farmer  calls;  miles  pugnat,  the  soldier  fights  ; 
agricola  puellam  vocat,  the  farmer  calls  the  girl ;  miles  fortiter 
pugnat,  the  soldier  fights  bravely. 
Remark.     The  Direct  Object  of  a  Transitive  Verb  is  in  the  Accusative 
Case  ;  as,  puellam  in  the  sentence  above. 

Copula  and  Complement. 

103.  Review  37,  a,  page  10.  The  verb  sum,  /  aw,  is  the  Copula  in 
Latin.  A  noun  or  adjective,  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  is  the  Com- 
plement. The  Copula  and  the  Complement  form  the  Predicate  ;  as,  puer 
bonus  est,  the  boy  is  good  ;  Brutus  mens  amicus  fuit. 

a.  Review  37,  b,  c,  page  10.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  there  are  other 
Copulative  Verbs  besides  sum ;  as,  fio,  I  am  made,  become ; 
videor,  /  seem,  appear ;  and  the  Passive  of  verbs  signifying  to 
choose,  to  call,  to  think,  etc.;  as,  imperator  creor  (appellor, 
habeor),  /  am  elected  (called,  considered)  general. 

Modifiers. 

104.  Review  38,  page  11.  As  in  English,  a  Subject  or  a  Predicate 
may  be  modified  by  a 


190  NOTES. 

Word;  as,  milites  fortes  urbem  expugnSverunt,  brave  soldiers 
stormed  the  city. 

Phrase;  as,  exercitus  sub  jugum  missus  est,  the  army  was  sent 
under  the  yoke. 

Clause;  as,  oppidum,  quod  hostes  ceperunt,  magnum  fuit,  the 
towUf  which  the  enemy  took,  was  large. 

Sentences  Classified. 

105.  Review  40,  page  11.     Sentences,  in  Latin  as  in  English,  are  :  — 
Simple  ;  as,  magister  puero  librum  dat,  the  teacher  gives  a  hook  to  the 

hoy. 

Compound;  as,  veni,  vidi,  vici,  I  came, ^  I  saw,  I  conquered. 

Complex;  as,  puerum  laudat,  ut  a  puero  laudetur,  he  praises  the  hoy 
that  he  may  he  praised  hy  the  hoy. 

Apposition. 

106.  A  noun  used  to  describe  or  explain  another  Noun,  or  Pronoun, 
and  meaning  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  (by  Apposition)  in  the  same 
case  (46,  page  13)  ;  as,  Labienus  legatus  ad  urbem  Romam  venit, 
Lahienus,  the  lieutenant,  came  to  the  city  (of)  Rome.  Notice  that  Eome  is 
not  in  the  Genitive,  as  it  denotes  the  same  thing  as  city. 

a.  If  the  Appositive  describes  two  or  more  nouns,  it  must  be  in  the 
Phiral ;  as,  per  Marcum  Silanum  et  Titum  Sextium  legates 
delectum  habuit,  he  held  a  levy  (of  troops)  through  (using  as  agents) 
Marcus  Sildnus  and  Titus  Sextius,  his  lieutenants. 

Predicate  Nominative. 

107.  A  Noun  used  to  complete  the  Predicate,  with  esse,  or  any  other 
Copulative  Verb  (103),  agrees  with  the  Subject  in  case,  and  is  called  the 
Predicate  Nominative  (46,  a,  page  13) ;  as,  Cicero  vir  fortissimus  fuit, 
Cicero  was  a  very  hrave  man. 

Remark.    This  same  principle  applies  to  a  Predicate  Adjective  (108, 1). 

ADJECTIVES. 

108.  An  Adjective  or  Participle  (that  is,  a  Verhal  Adjective)  agreos 
with  its  Noun,  or  Pronoun,  in  gender,  number,  and  case  ;  as,  c5piae 
bonae,  good  troops  ;  viri  fortissimi,  very  hrave  men. 

Remark.  This,  of  course,  applies  to  all  Pronouns  having  three  gender- 
forms  (Possessive,  Demonstrative,  etc.). 


NOTES.  191 

1.  An  Adjective  may  be  Attributive  or  Predicate. 

An  Attributive  Adjective  modifies  its  noun  directly ;  that  is,  it  is  not 
connected  with  it  by  esse,  or  some  other  verb  ;  as,  vir  fortis  bonus  civis 
est,  a  brave  man  is  a  good  citizen. 

A  Predicate  Adjective  is  one  which  helps  to  form  the  Predicate,  and  is 
connected  with  its  noun  by  esse,  or  some  other  Copulative  Verb. 

2.  An  Attributive  Adjective,  modifying  more  than  one  noun,  usually 
agrees  with  the  nearest  and  is  to  be  understood  with  the  rest  :  or  it  is 
sometimes  repeated  ;  as,  omnes  agri  et  maria ;  or,  agri  omnes  omnia- 
que  maria,  all  lands  and  seas. 

3.  A  Predicate  Adjective  agrees  with  the  Subject  in  gender,  number, 
and  case  ;  as,  puer  studiosus  est,  the  boy  is  studious. 

4.  A  Predicate  Adjective,  agreeing  with  two  or  more  nouns,  must  be  in 
the  Plural ;  as,  nauta  et  miles  fortes  erunt,  the  sailor  and  the  soldier 
will  be  brave. 

5.  If  the  subjects  are  of  different  genders,  a  Predicate  Adjective  will  be 

a.  Masculine  Plural,  if  the  subjects  denote  living  beings  j  as,  pater  et 

mater  mortui  sunt,  my  father  and  mother  are  dead. 

b.  Neuter  Plural,  if  the  subjects  denote  things  without  life  ;  as,  amor 

et  amicitia  simillima  sunt,  love  and  friendship  are  (things)  very 
much  alike. 

AdjectiTes  used  as  Nouns. 

109.  Adjectives  may  be  used  as  Nouns  :  the  Masculine,  Feminine,  and 
Neuter  denoting  men,  women,  and  things.  This  is  more  common  in  the 
Plural  than  in  the  Singular  ;  as,  Romani,  the  Romans  ;  omnia,  all  things 
{or  property);  nostri,  our  men  (or  soldiers)  ;  finitimi,  the  neighbors ;  novis- 
simi,  the  rearmost  {soldiers);  hibema  (castra),  winter -quarters ;  bona, 
goods. 

a.  Sometimes   Adjectives   are   so   used  in   the   Singular  ;    as,    patria 

(terra),  native  land,  fatherland  ;  fera  (bestia),  a  wild  beast. 

b.  The  Neuter  Singular  of  an  Adjective  very  often  agrees  with  an  In- 

finitive or  Clause  used  as  a  Substantive  (see  36,  Remark,  page  10) ; 
as,  dulce  et  decorum  est  pr5  patria  mori,  to  die  for  one's 
country  is  (a)  delightful  and  honorable  {thing  or  service). 

c.  Sometimes  the  Neuter  Plural  is  used  as  a  Noun,  when  the  general 

sense  must  decide  its  translation ;  as,  bona,  goods;  praeterita, 
past  events  (English,  bygones);  haec  respondit,  he  made  this  reply. 

Special  Uses  of  Adjectives. 

110.  a.  An  Adjective  is  sometimes  used  where,  in  English,  we  should 
use  an  Adverb,  an  Infinitive,  or  a  Relative  Clause.     The  Adjective  usually 


192  NOTES. 

"describes  the  condition  of  the  actor,  rather  than  the  manner  of  the 
action;"  as,  primus  venit,  ^e  came  first  {was  the  first  to  ccmie,  was  the 
first  who  came);  invitus  (laetus,  libens)  veni,  /  came  unwillingly  (joy- 
fully, gladly). 

h.  Often,  in  Latin,  an  Adjective  is  used,  agreeing  with  a  Noun,  where 
the  English  idiom  would  require  a  Noun  followed  by  a  Genitive ; 
as,  summus  mons,  the  top  of  the  mountain;  medio  in  coUe, 
on  the  middle  of  the  hill  [half-way  up  the  hill);  extrema  hieme, 
in  the  last  part  of  winter ;  prima  aestate  (or  inita  aestate),  in 
the  early  part  (or  beginning)  of  summer ;  reliqui  Belgae,  the  rest 
of  the  Belgae. 

c.  Adjectives,  agreeing  with  Nouns,  are  often  employed  in  Latin,  where 

the  English  idiom  requires  a  possessive  form,  or  a  phrase;  as,  do- 
mus  aliQna.fa7iother  person's  house;  bellum  servile j  the  war  with 
the  slaves;  bellum  Veneticum,  the  war  with  the  Veneti. 

d.  When  two  Adjectives  agree  with  one  Noun,  they  are  regularly  con- 

nected by  a  Conjunction  ;  as,  viri  multi  et  boni,  many  good  men 
(literally,  m,en  many  andj  good). 
Remark.     This  rule  does  not  apply  to  Numerals  or  Adjective  Pro- 
nouns ;  as,  decern  (or  illi)  viri  boni. 

PRONOUNS. 
Personal. 

111.  Personal  Pronouns  (as  Subjects)  are  omitted,  unless  required  for 
emphasis ;  as,  veni,  vidi,  vici,  /  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered ;  ego  te  lau- 
davi,  tu  me  culpavisti,  /  have  praised  you,  (but)  you  have  hlayned  me. 

a.  The  speaker  or  writer  often  uses  the  First  Person  Plural,  when  he 
does  not  wish  to  make  himself  prominent  in  what  he  is  saying 
(that  is,  he  avoids  egotism).  Authors  and  editors  often  do  the 
same  in  English;  this  use  of  the  Subject  is  often  called  "the 
editor's  we;''  as,  Labienus,  quern  supra  diximus,  Lahienus, 
whom  we  (=  /)  have  mentioned  above. 

KeflexiTe. 

112.  The  Reflexive  Pronouns  refer  to  the  Subject  of  the  sentence.  The 
use  of  the  Reflexives  of  the  First  and  Second  Persons  (mei,  tui)  can  be 
easily  understood,  but  special  care  must  be  taken  in  the  use  of  the  Reflex- 
ive of  the  Third  Person  (sui),  and  of  the  Possessive  Pronoun  (suus),  which 
is  the  Adjective  form  of  sui  (47,  48). 


NOTES.  193 

a.  In  a  Subordinate  Clause,  sui  and  suus  may  refer  either  to  the  sub- 
ject of  their  own  clause,  or  to  that  of  the  principal  clause ;  as, 
Sabinus  postulavit  ut  hostes  se  suaque  omnia  dederent, 
Sahiiius  deTYianded  that  the  enemy  should  surrender  theynselves  and 
all  their  property ;  Ariovistus  imperat  ut  obsides  ad  castra 
sua  reducantur  et  sibi  reddantur,  Ariovistus  gives  orders  that 
the  hostag£S  shall  he  brought  hack  to  his  camp  and  restored  to  him. 

h.  Inter  se  means  to  each  other j  from  each  other,  each  other,  mutually ; 
as,  obsides  inter  se  dederunt,  they  gave  hostages  to  each  other 
(that  is,  exchanged  hostages);  inter  se  cohortati  sunt,  they  en- 
couraged each  other  {gave  mutual  encouragement). 

Possessive. 

113.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  usually  omitted,  when  they  are  not 
emphatic,  and  can  be  easily  understood  from  the  general  meaning  of  tlie 
sentence;  as,  mater  valet,  my  (your)  mother  is  well.  They  follow  the 
same  law  of  agreement  as  Adjectives. 

On  the  proper  use  of  suus  and  ejus  (eorum,  earum),  see  48,  Caution. 
a.  The  Possessives  are  often  used  as  Nouns  (109)  ;   as,  nostri,  our 
men  ;  su5s  hortatus  est,  he  encouraged  his  men. 

DemonstratiTO* 

114.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  may  be  used  :  — 

1.  As  Adjectives;  as,  ille  miles,  hie  puer,  vir  ipse,  ea  nox,  that 
soldier  there,  this  hoy  here,  the  man  himself  (or  the  very  man),  that  night.  . 

2.  As  Personal  Pronouns.  In  this  use  is  is  very  common,  so  that  it  is 
often  called  the  Third  Personal  Pronoun  (46)  ;  as,  is  venit,  he  came;  ea 
flebat,  she  was  weeping ;  Caesar  id  animadverterat,  Caesar  had  7ioticed 
it  {that  thing  or  fact).  So  also,  ipse  dixit,  he  {himself)  has  said  so;  illi 
se  receperunt,  they  retreated. 

a.  Ipse,  self,  gives  emphasis  to  the  word  with  which  it  agrees,  and 
may  be  translated  in  several  ways  ;  as,  vir  ipse,  the  very  man  (or 
the  TYian  himself)-,  ipsi  se  interfecerunt,  they  killed  themselves 
with  their  own  hands. 

h.  Ille  sometimes  means  "the  former"  (that  is,  the  more  distant),  and 
hie,  the  latter  (that  is,  the  nearer),  of  two  persons  or  things  de- 
scribed ;  as,  ille  huic  subvenit,  the  former  comes  to  aid  the  latter 
(somewhat  like  alter  —  alter). 

c.    Hie  is  often  used  like  the  English  as  follows ;  as,  haee  est  ratio 
oppugnationis,  the  style  of  attack  is  as  follows ;  haec  respondit, 
he  thus  replied  {repXiet  these  things,  or  words). 
13 


194  NOTES. 


Helative* 

115.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  a  Relative  Pronoun  takes  the  Gender, 
Number,  and  Person,  of  its.  Antecedent ;  its  Case  depends  on  the  form  of  its 
own  clause  ;  as,  urbs,  quam  vides,  Roma  est,  the  city,  which  you  see,  is 
Roine ;  ego,  qui  te  laudavi,  rex  sum  ;  milites,  a  quibus  urbs  capta 
est,  fortes  sunt. 

a.  The  Antecedent  is  often  omitted  ;  as,  (eos)  qui  iter  cognoscerent 
misit,  he  sent  men  to  investigate  the  route  ;  quod  jussi  sunt,  (id) 
faciunt,  they  do  what  they  have  been  ordered  {to  do). 

h.  Quod,  id  quod,  or  quae  r5s,  may  be  used  to  refer  to  a  clause,  or 
idea,  as  Antecedent  ;  as,  nostri  redintegratis  viribus,  quod  in 
spe  victoriae  saepe  accidit,  pugnare  coeperunt,  our  men  be- 
gan to  fight  with  renewed  strength,  which  (that  is,  the  renewal  of 
strength)  often  happens  in  the  hope  of  victory  (when  soldiers  hope  for 
victory), 

c.  The  Relative  is  often  omitted  in  English  ;  it  is  never  omitted  in 

Latin.     Its  importance  as  a  connective  is  shown  by  its  use  ;  as,  vir, 
quem  vides,  Caesar  est,  the  man  (whom)  you  see  is  Caesar. 

d.  A  Relative  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  must  often  be  translated 

as  a  Demonstrative  ;  as,  quibus  rebus  cognitis,  profectus  est, 
having  ascertained  these  facts,  he  started. 

e.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  a  Relative  Adverb  may  take  the  place  of  a 

Relative  Pronoun  with  a  Preposition  ;  as,  ad  eum  locum  venit, 
ubi  fuerant  (or,  unde  profugerant),  he  came  to  the  place,  where 
they  had  been  (or,  whence  they  had  fled).  In  this  example,  ubi  = 
in  quo  ;  unde  =  a  quo. 
/.  In  English,  as  is  often  a  Relative  Pronoun,  especially  after  sucli 
and  same.  In  Latin,  therefore,  qui  (after  idem)  should  be 
translated  as.  Qualis  and  quantus  (Relative  Adjectives)  should 
be  translated  as  after  talis,  such,  and  tantus,  such,  so  great 
(195,  8). 

Interrogative  and  Indefinite. 

116.  The  general  meaning  and  use  of  Interrogative  and  Indefinite  Pro- 
nouns can  be  best  learned  from  51  and  52,  and  from  the  Vocabulary. 

VERBS. 

117.  A  Finite  Verb  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  Number  and  Person  ; 
as,  puellae  vocant,  the  girls  call;  hostes  superantur,  the  enemy  are 
overcome  ;  beati  estis,  yo^i,  are  happy. 


NOTES.  195 

Remark.  As  already  stated  (111),  the  Subject  is  generally  omitted, 
if  it  is  a  Personal  Pronoun. 

a.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  Singular  subjects  connected  by  a  co- 

ordinate conjunction,  it  will  be  :  — 

1.  Plural  (as  in  English),  if  it  agrees  with  them  taken  together ;  as, 
virtus  et  vitium  inter  se  contraria  sunt,  virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to 
each  other. 

2.  Singular  (as  in  English),  if  it  agrees  with  them  separately ;  as, 
neque  puer  neque  puella  audit,  neither  the  hoy  nor  the  girl  hears ;  vel 
homo  vel  filius  ejus  hoc  fecit,  either  the  man  or  his  son  has  done  this. 

b.  With  two  or  more  subjects  the  verb  often  agrees  with  the  nearest, 

and  is   understood   with  *  the   others  ;    as,    castra  et  imperator 
magno  in  periculo  versabatur,  the  camp  and  commander  were  in 
great  danger. 
Remark.     Two  Singular  subjects  may  denote  one  thing,  and  then  the 
verb  is  singular;  as  in  the  English,  bread  and  milk  is  healthful. 

c.  A  Collective  Noun  (as  in  English)  may  take  a  Singular  verb,  when 

the  body  as  a  whole  is  spoken  of ;  but  when  the  separate  objects  are 
thought  of,  the  verb  must  be  Plural ;  as,  civitas  jxis  suum  armis 
exsequi  conata  est,  the  state  attempted  to  assert  its  right  by  force 
of  arms;  but  civitati  persuasit  ut  exirent,  he  persuaded  tJie 
state  to  go  out  (that  the  citizens  should  go  out). 

d.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  when  a  verb  has  several  subjects,  of  differe^ni 

persons,  it  will  be  in  the  First  Person  rather  than  in  the  Second  or 
Third,  and  in  the  Second  rather  than  in  the  Third;  as,  ego  et  tu 
et  Cassius  valemus,  CassiicSf  you,  and  /(=  we)  are  well;  tu  et 
filius  tuus  valetis. 


oj*:o 


THECASBS. 

NOMINATIVE. 

118.  The  Nominative  is  the  case  of  the  Subject,  as  in  English.  It 
may  also  be  an  Appositive  or  a  Predicate  Noun,  as  already  described 
(106, 107). 

GENITIVE. 

119.  The  Genitive  is  most  frequently  used  to  modify  another  Noun, 
denoting  a  different  person  or  thing.     It  is  unlike  the  Appositive,  since  the 


196  NOTES. 

latter  denotes  the  sawe  person  or  thing  as  the  word  it  describes.  It  may- 
be translated  by  the  Possessive,  or  by  of  with  a  Noun  ;  as,  templa  deo- 
rum,  the  temples  of  the  gods  ;  pater  puerf,  the  hoy's  fatlier. 

Caution.  In  such  expressions  as  the  city  of  Rome,  of  must  not  be 
rendered  by  the  Genitive,  because  Eome  denotes  the  same  thing  as  city. 
The  Latin  should  be  urbs  Roma  (Appositive). 

Genitive  denoting  Possession. 

120.  The  Genitive  denotes  the  Possessor,  answering  the  question 
Whose?  as,  filius  servi,  the  slave's  son;  castra  Caesaris,  Caesar's  camp. 

Genitive  of  Quality. 

121.  The  Genitive  (with  an  Adjective)  denotes  Quality,  answering  the 
question  Of  what  kind?  or  (as  in  the  English  ten  foot  pole,  five  days' 
march),  Of  what  length,  height,  depth  1  etc. ;  as,  vir  magnae  sapientiae, 
a  man  of  great  wisdom;  res  ejus  modi  (or  ejusmodi),  affairs  of  that 
sort ;  iter  quinque  dierum,  a  five  days'  journey  (or  march)-,  fossa  trium 
pedum,  a  ditch  of  three  feet  (a  three-foot  ditch). 

a.  The  Genitive  of  Quality  is  used  to  denote  Indefinite  Value,  This 
is  expressed  by  the  Genitive  Singular  of  an  Adjective  (Neuter, 
agreeing  with  pretii,  understood).  Among  the  forms  so  used  are 
magni,  parvi,  tanti,  quanti;  as,  magni  tuae  epistolae  sunt, 
your  letters  are  of  great  value. 

Partitive  Genitive. 

122.  The  Genitive  denotes  the  whole  of  which  a  part  is  taken.  This 
is  called  the  Partitive  Genitive.     It  is  used  : — 

a.  With  Nouns,  Pronouns,  and  Adjectives ;  as,  pars  equitum,  a  part 
of  the  horsemen  ;  quis  vestrum  ?  which  of  you  ?  uter  consulum  ? 
which  of  the  (two)  consuls  ?  nihil  reliqui  est,  there  is  nothing  left 
[of  a  remainder). 

h.  With  Neuter  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  of  Degree  (both  used  as 
Nouns);  as,  plus  doloris,  more  grief;  tantum  spatii  (or  loci), 
so  much  space;  satis  eloquentiae  (or  pecQniae),  enough  eloquence 
(or  money). 

123.  Notice  these  facts  concerning  the  Partitive  Genitive :  — 

a.  Cardinal  numbers  regularly  (and  other  words  sometimes)  take  the 
Ablative  with  e  (ex)  or  de,  and  owt  the  Partitive  Genitive  ;  as, 
quinque  ex  militibus  ;  unus  de  n5bis. 


NOTES.  197 

h.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  Partitive  Genitives  ;  nostri  and 
vestri  as  Objective  Genitives  (124)  ;  as,  quis  nostrum  ?  uter 
vestrum  ?     But  we  must  say  nostri  oblitus,  forgetful  of  us. 

c.  Mille  (the  noun)  is  followed  by  the  Partitive  Genitive  ;  as,  quinque 

millia  passuum,  five  miles  ;  sex  millia  hominum. 

d.  Caution.     All  of  us;  all  of  you;  all  of  the  soldiers  ;  etc.,  must  not 

be  expressed  by  the  Partitive  Genitive,  since  all  does  not  denote  a 
part,  but  the  whole.  The  Latin  should  be,  nos  omnes,  we  all ; 
v5s  omnes ;  milites  omnes. 

e.  Caution.     The  top  of  the  mountain ;  the  middle  of  the  night ;  the 

rest  of  the  Gauls;  etc.,  must  not  be  expressed  by  a  noun  and  a 
Partitive  Genitive  (110,  &),  but  thus:  summus  mons;  media 
nox;  reliqui  Galli. 

Subjective  and  Objective  Genitive. 

124.  Many  Nouns  and  Adjectives  have  the  general  meaning  of  Transi- 
tive Verbs ;  for  instance,  amor  in  the  expression  amor  patriae,  love  of 
country.  If  this  were  to  be  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  sentence,  it  would 
be  nos  (tu,  ego,  is,  etc.)  patriam  amamus  (amas,  amo,  amat,  etc.), 
we  (yoUy  /,  he)  love  (loves)  our  {your,  my,  his)  country.  That  is,  patriae, 
as  well  as  patriam,  is  the  Object  of  the  love.  So  also,  cupidi  belli  sumus 
=  bellum  cupimus.  Hence  such  a  Genitive  is  called  the  Objective  Geni' 
tive.  If  a  Genitive  of  Possession  were  used,  it  would  represent  the  actor, 
or  Subject,  and  hence  such  a  Genitive  is  called  the  Subjective  Genitive. 
Amor  Dei  (love  of  God)  may  mean  Deus  nos  amat,  or  nos  Deum 
amamus;  the  former  would  represent  the  Subjective  Genitive,  and  the 
latter  the  Objective  Genitive.  The  following  examples  will  illustrate  both  ; 
militis  amor  belli,  the  soldier's  (Subjective)  love  of  war  (Objective)  = 
miles  bellum  amat.  —  rerum  novarum  cupidi  sunt,  they  are  desirous 
of  a  revolution  (Objective)  =  ii  res  novas  cupiunt.  —  rerum  non  im- 
peritus  (or  ignarus)  fuit,  he  was  not  unskilled  in  (or  ignorant  of)  affairs 
(Objective). — Helvetiorum  injuriae  populi  Romani  magnae  erant, 
the  injuries  inflicted  by  (literally,  of)  the  Helvetii  (Subjective)  upon  (liter- 
ally, of)  the  Roman  people  (Objective)  were  great. 

Genitive  witli  Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgetting. 

125.  Verbs  meaning  to  remember,  to  forget  (that  is,  to  be  mindful  of, 
to  be  forgetful  of),  arc  regularly  followed  by  the  Genitive  ;  as,  nunquam 
illius  noctis  obliviscar,  /  shall  never  forget  that  night;  mortis  ejus 
memini,  /  remember  his  death. 


198  NOTES. 


Genitive  after  Sum. 

126.  a.  As  in  English,  the  noun  which  the  Genitive  limits  is  not 
always  expressed.  Nouns  meaning  duty,  part,  nature,  mark,  property, 
are  often  omitted,  as  in  these  examples  :  militis  Romani  est  aut  vincere 
aut  mori,  it  is  a  Roman  soldier's  (duty)  either  to  conquer  or  die;  im- 
peratoris  est  jubere,  it  is  a  commanders  duty  (right)  to  order  ;  omnia 
sunt  victoris,  all  things  are  {the  property)  of  the  victor  (that  is,  belong  to 
tlie  victor), 

Kemark.  If,  however,  a  Personal  Pronoun  is  used  in  the  English 
sentence,  the  Latin  requires  the  Neuter  of  the  corresponding  Possessive 
Pronoun  ;  as,  tuum  est  videre  ne  mali  mihi  noceant,  it  is  your  (duty) 
to  take  care  {see  to  it)  lest  had  men  harm  me.  In  this  sentence  tuum 
agrees  with  videre  (109,  V). 

h.  The  Genitive  is  often  used  after  sum,  equivalent  to  the  English 
composed  of;  as,  de  his  duobus  generibus  alterum  est  Druidum, 
alterum  equitum,  of  these  two  classes,  one  is  composed  of  the 
Druids,  the  other  of  the  knights. 

Genitive  with  Impersonal  Verbs. 

127.  a.  The  Impersonal  Verbs  miseret,  it  causes  pity ;  poenitet,  it 
causes  repentance ;  pudet,  it  causes  shame;  taedet,  it  causes  weariness; 
piget,  it  causes  vexation,  take  an  Accusative  (of  the  person)  as  Direct 
Object,  and  a  Genitive  expressing  the  cause  of  the  feeling  (93,  b);  as,  eos 
poenitet  horum  consiliorum,  they  repent  of  these  plans  (literally,  it 
causes  them  repentance  for  these  plans). 

b.  The  Impersonal  Verbs  refert  and  interest  {it  is  to  the  advantage 
of,  it  concerns)  take  the  Genitive  of  the  person  to  whose  advantage 
anything  is.  The  subject  of  these  verbs  is  usually  an  Infinitive, 
or  an  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  ;.  as,  interest  omnium  recte 
facere,  it  is  to  the  interest  of  all  to  act  rightly;  interest  rei 
publicae  manus  hostium  distineri,  it  is  to  the  states  advantage 
thai  the  bands  of  the  enemy  be  kept  apart. 

Other  Uses  of  the  Genitive. 

128.  The  Genitive  is  used  before  causa,  gratia  {for  the  sake  of); 
instar  (indeclinable  noun,  meaning  likeness);  pridie  {the  day  before); 
postridie  (the  day  after);  as,  amicitiae  causa  Caesarem  secutus  est, 
he  followed  Caesar  for  friendship's  sake;  haec  saepes  instar  muri  est, 
this  hedge  is  like  {the  likeness  of)  a  wall;  pridie  (postridie)  ejus  diei, 
the  day  before  {the  day  after)  that  day. 


NOTES.  199 

Remark.  Pridie  and  postridie  are  contracted  forms  of  pri5ri  die 
and  posters  die;  so  that  pri(ori)die  ejus  diei  really  means  on  that  day's 
predecessor,  and  posterodie  (in  its  shortened  form)  ejus  diei  =  on  that 
day's  successor. 

DATIVE. 

129.  The  Dative  denotes  the  Indirect  Object^  and  answers  the  question 
To  or  For  whom  (or  what)  ?  as,  agricolae  pecuniam  nautis  dant,  the 

farmers  give  money  to  the  sailors;  non  scholae  sed  vitae  discimus, 
we  learn,  not  for  the  school,  hut  for  life ;  puer  mihi  nomen  dixit,  the  boy 
told  (to)  me  his  name;  multa  parentibus  debemus,  we  owe  much  {many 
things)  to  our  parents. 

Caution,  a.  In  the  sentences,  h£  comes  to  the  city;  we  follow  him  to 
the  gate,  there  is  no  Dative,  because  city  and  gate  do  not  denote  the  indi- 
rect object  of  an  action.  When  the  verb  expresses  motion,  the  Preposition 
ad  with  the  Accusative  must  be  used  ;  as,  ad  urbem  venit.  But  see  159. 

b.  When  for  means  in  defence  of  in  behalf  of  pro  with  the  Ablative 
must  be  used  ;  as,  dulce  est  pr5  patria  mori,  it  is  sweet  to  die 
for  (one's)  country. 

Dative  witli  Intransitive  Verbs. 

130.  Intransitive  Verbs  can,  of  course,  take  only  an  Indirect  Object ; 
as,  res  legioni  feliciter  evenit,  the  affair  turned  out  successfully  (hap- 
pily) for  the  legion. 

Dative  of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage. 

131.  The  Dative  is  very  often  used  to  denote  Advantage  or  Disad- 
vantage ;  that  is,  to  denote  that  something  is  helpful  or  injurious  (to  any 
one),  pleasant  or  disagreeable  (to  him),  ft  or  unfit  (for  his  use),  etc.  The 
Dative  is  thus  used  with  very  many  Verbs  and  Adjectives  ;  as,  domus 
dominis  aedificatur,  n5n  muribus,  a  house  is  built  for  its  owners,  not  for 
the  mice  ;  Aedui  Romanis  amici  erant,  the  Aedui  were  friendly  to  the 
Eomans ;  Caesari  Ariovistus  inimicus  fuit,  Ariovistus  was  hostile  to 
Caesar. 

a.  The  following  Verbs  (and  others  of  similar  meaning)  would  be 
Transitive  in  English  ;  in  Latin  they  are  regularly  Intransitive,  and  take 
a  Dative  of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage  :  — 

1.  Verbs  meaning  to  benefit  or  irijure,  please  or  displease,  command  or 
obey,  serve  or  resist. 

2.  Verbs  meaning  to  believe  or  distrust,  persuade,  pardon,  envy,  threaten^ 
be  angry. 


200  •  NOTES. 

Caution.  These  verbs,  if  used  in  the  Passive,  must  be  Impersonal 
(134). 

h.  Some  of  the  Adjectives  taking  a  Dative  of  Advantage  or  Disadvan- 
tage are  these  :  — 

Friendly,  amicus ;  unfriendly,  inimicus ;  useful,  utilis ;  useless,  in- 
utilis ;  fit,  aptus ;  unfit,  incommodus  ;  acceptable,  gratus ;  dear, 
carus ;  displeasing,  ingratus ;  faithful,  fidelis ;  angry,  iratus. 

Caution.  Juvo,  /  help,  takes  the  Accusative.  Impero,  /  command, 
takes  the  Dative  ;  but  jubeo,  /  order,  takes  the  Accusative. 

c.  The  Dative  of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage  is  often  used  where  we 
should  expect  to  find  the  Ablative  of  Separation  (147).  It  is  thus 
used  with  Verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  ex,  and  sometimes  with 
other  words.  It  usually  represents  a  person;  as,  mihi  hunc 
timorem  eripe,  relieve  me  of  this  fear  (take  this  fear  from  ine); 
scut5  militi  detracts,  having  snatched  a  shield  from  a  soldier. 

Dative  with  Adjectives:    Like,  Equal,   Near. 

132.  The  Dative  is  used  (as  in  English)  to  limit  Adjectives  meaning 
like  (and  unlike),  equal  (and  unequal),  near ;  as,  puer  similis  patri  est, 
the  hoy  is  like  {to)  his  father  ;  hostes  nostris  (militibus)  n5n  pares  sunt, 
the  enemy  are  not  equal  to  (a  match  for)  our  soldiers  ;  proximi  Germanis 
SMTit,  they  are  Clearest  to  the  Germans;  finitimi  Galliae  fuerunt,  they 
were  neighboring  to  Gaul  (bordered  on  Gaul). 

a.  As  prope  (near)  is  a  Preposition,  the  Adjective  and  Adverb  derived 
from  it  very  often  take  the  Accusative,  as  though  they  were  Prepo- 
sitions ;  that  is,  they  retain  the  force  of  the  Preposition  prope ; 
as,  Crassus  proximus  mare  Oceanum  hiemaverat,  Grassus 
had  passed  the  winter  very  near  the  Atlaiitic. 

Dative  witli  Compounds. 

133.  Compound  Verbs  containing  the  Prepositions  ad,  ante,  con,  in, 
inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  and  sometimes  circum,  usually 
take  the  Dative  of  Indirect  Object  ;  as,  virtute  omnibus  praestabant, 
they  excelled  all  in  valor;  aliquid  ei  accidit,  something  has  happened  to 
him;  R5mani  Germanis  bellum  inferunt,  the  Romans  make  war  on  the 
Germans;  moenibus  multitudo  circumjecta  est,  the  multitude  was 
thrown  about  the  walls  (that  is,  surrounded  them). 

Caution.  Of  course,  if  the  simple  verb  is  Transitive  (as,  mitto)  the 
compound  verb  will  remain  Transitive,  and  take  the  Accusative  of  the 
Direct  Object ;  as,  proelium  committo,  I  join  battle;  equites  praemitto, 
/  send  the  horsemen  ahead. 


NOTES.  201 

Dative  with  Tmpersonal  Verbs. 

134.  In  English,  Intransitive  Verbs  have  no  Passive  ;  in  Latin,  they 
may  have  a  Passive,  but  it  must  be  Impersonal.  All  verbs  that  take  only 
the  Dative,  therefore,  can  be  used  in  the  Passive  only  Impersonally.  This 
includes  those  verbs  mentioned  in  93,  2,  as  well  as  such  verbs  as  venio, 
eo,  pugno,  contends,  curro ;  as,  puero  nocetur,  harm  is  done  to  the 
hoy  (the  boy  is  harmed);  militibus  imperatur,  a  coinmand  is  given  to  the 
soldiers  (the  soldiers  are  commanded);  legibus  parendum  est,  ohedience 
must  he  rendered  to  the  laivs  (the  laws  must  be  obeyed);  non  parcitur 
hostibus,  no  quarter  is  given  to  the  enemy  (the  enemy  are  not  spared). 

Remark.  The  Impersonal  Verbs  libet  {it  pleases)  and  licet  (it  is  per- 
mitted) take  the  Dative  ;  as,  licet  mihi  ire,  /  may  go  (literally,  it  is 
permitted  me  to  go). 

Dative  of  Possessor. 

135.  Instead  of  habeo  with  the  Accusative,  the  Dative  is  very  often 
used  with  the  verb  sum,  to  denote  the  Possessor ;  as,  nobis  sunt  libri,  we 
have  hooks  ;  viro  quinque  equi  sunt,  the  man  has  jive  horses. 

a.  The  Dative  is  also  used  with  the  compounds  of  sum  (except  pos- 
sum, which  takes  the  Infinitive,  and  absum,  which  takes  the 
Ablative,  usually  with  a  or  ab);  as,  Caesari  exercitus  n5n 
dSfuit,  an  army  was  not  wanting  {lacking)  to  Caesar. 

Many  of  these  are  provided  for  by  133. 

Dative  of  Agent. 

136.  The  Dative  is  regularly  used  with  the  Gerundive  to  denote  the 
Agent.  This  is  sometimes  called  the  Dative  of  Apparent  Agent,  since  the 
real  Agent  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative  with  £  or  ab  (151,  Caution). 
The  Dative,  in  this  use,  denotes  that  something  must  be  done  on  a  person's 
part,  as  far  as  he  is  concerned,  for  his  advantage,  etc.;  yet  it  may  usually 
be  more  simply  rendered  as  though  it  were  Ablative  ;  as,  omnia  Caesari 
agenda  erant,  aZZ  ^Amf/s  had  to  he  done  by  Caesar  (o7i  Caesar's  part); 
militibus  castra  relinquenda  sunt,  the  camp  must  be  abandoned  by  the 
soldiers. 

Two  Datives. 

137.  Some  verbs  take  two  Datives  ;  one  denotes  the  Purpose,  and  the 
other  is  the  Dative  of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage ;  as,  militSs  subsidio 
Sabino  mittit,  he  sends  soldiers  as  aid  (relief)  to  Sabinus ;  haec  res 
magno  impediments  nostris  erat,  this  circumstance  proved  a  great 
hindrance  to  our  men. 


202  NOTES. 

Remark.  The  Dative  of  Purpose  is  sometimes  used  without  the  Dative 
of  Advantage  or  Disadvantage. 

a.  A  Phrase  (containing  ad)  is  very  often  used  to  express  a  Purpose  ; 
as,  milites  ad  pugnandum  alacres  erant,  the  soldiers  were  eager 
for  fighting ;  ad  urbem  videndam  venit,  he  came  to  see  the  city 
(180). 

Dative  instead  of  tlie  Genitive. 

138.  The  Dative  is  often  used  where  we  should  expect  a  Genitive.  It 
will  always  be  found,  however,  that  the  Dative  expresses  more  than  simple 
Possession  ;  as,  advantage,  disadvantage,  etc. ;  as,  Galli  Tito  ad  pedes  se 
pr5jiciunt,  the  Gauls  throw  themselves  at  Titus's  feet  (literally,  thi^ow 
themselves  before  (pro)  Titus,  at  his  feet)  \  Pulfioni  scutum  transfigitur, 
Pulfio's  shield  is  pierced  through. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

139.  The  Accusative  denotes  the  Direct  Object  of  a  Transitive  Verb ; 
as,  magister  puerum  laudat,  the  teacher  praises  the  hoy ;  oppidani 
portas  clauserunt,  the  townspeople  closed  the  gates. 

a.  Verbs  of  motion,  which  are  Intransitive  (as  simple  verbs),  often  be- 
come Transitive  when  compounded  with  ad,  circum,  in,  trans; 
as,  urbem  adiit,  he  o^pproached  the  city ;  consilia  ineunt,  they 
form  (enter  upon) plans;  nostros  circumvenerunt,  they  entrapped 
(English,  ^'' got  around'')  our  men;  flumen  transitis,  you  are 
crossing  the  7'iver. 

Cognate  Accusative* 

140.  In  English,  an  Objective  Case  may  be  used  after  an  Intransitive 
Verb  (as  well  as  after  a  Transitive  Verb)  to  repeat  the  idea  contained  in 
the  Verb  ;  as,  he  went  his  way  ;  we  ran  a  race ;  I  have  dreamed  a  dreo.m. 
It  is  called  in  English  the  Cognate  Objective  (Cognate,  from  con  +  nascor, 
means  kindred,  related) ;  in  Latin,  it  is  called  the  Cognate  Accusative  ;  as, 
mirum  somnium  somniavi,  /  have  drearaed  a  wonderful  dream  ;  jusju- 
randum  jQravi,  /  have  sworn  an  oath ;  viam  tridui  processit,  he  ad- 
vanced a  three  days'  journey. 

Tw^o  Accusatives. 

141.  Some  Verbs  take  two  Accusatives  :  — 

a.  Verbs  of  making,  calling,  thinking  (as  well  as  verbs  of  similar  mean- 
ing), take  two  Accusatives  (of  the  same  Person  or  Thing),  just  as  in 
English  they  take  two  Objectives  ;  as,  Ancum  Martium  regem 


NOTES.  203 

jpopulus  creavit,  the  people  elected  Ancus  Martins  king  ;  Romu- 
lus  urbem    Romam   vocavit,   Romulus  called  the  city  Borne; 
te   virum   sapientem   put5,  /  think  you  a  wise  man,     "When 
these  verbs  become  Passive,  one  Accusative  becomes  the  Subject^ 
the  other  becomes  the  Predicate  Nominative  (as  in  English);  as, 
urbs  Roma  vocata  est. 
h.  Verbs  of  asking  and  teaching  (as  well  as  verbs  of  similar  meaning) 
take  two  Accusatives  (one  denoting  the  Person  and  the  other  the 
Thing),  as  in  English  ;  as,  sententiam  me  rogavit,  he  asked  me 
my  opinion;    Caesar   friimentum    Aeduos   flagitabat,   Caesar 
kept  demanding  corn  of  the  Aedai ;  pacem  te  poscimus,  we  de- 
mand peace  of  you.     In  the  Passive,  the  Accusative  of  the  Person 
becomes  the  Subject;  the  Accusative  of  the  Thing  remains  (as  in 
English);  as,  sententiam  rogatus  sum,  I  was  asked  my  opinion. 
Remark  1.     Celo,  /  conceal,  takes   two   Accusatives,  like  verbs  of 
asking  ;  as,  me  haec  celabas,  you  were  concealing  these  things  from  me 
(that  is,  you  were  concealing  these  things,  and  were  keeping  me  "in  the 
dark");  amicum  sermonem  celavit. 

Remark  2.  Peto,  /  seek ;  postulo,  /  demand;  quaero,  /  ask,  do 
not  take  two  Accusatives  (like  rogo).  They  take  the  Accusative  of  the 
thing,  but  the  Ablative  of  the  p)erson  (as  the  source  of  information)  with  a 
Preposition.  Peto  and  postulo  take  a  or  ab ;  quaero  takes  a  (ab),  de, 
or  e  (ex);  as,  pacem  a  Romanis  petunt;  auxilium  a  me  postulavit; 
de  lis  causam  quaesivit  {he  asked  them  the  reason). 

c.  Some  Transitive  verbs,  compounded  with  trans,  take  two  Accusa- 
tives, one  being  the  object  of  the  simple  verb,  and  the  other  de- 
pending on  the  Preposition  ;  as,  equites  Rhodanum  transduxit 
(=equites  trans  Rhodanum  duxit);  so  also,   c5pias  flumen 
transmisit  (=  copias  trans  flumen  misit). 
Remark.    In  the  Passive,  the  Accusative  depending  on  the  Preposition 
may   remain ;    as,    major  multitiido   Germanorum   Rhenum   trans- 
ducitur. 

Accusative  used  Adverbially. 

142.  The  Accusative  is  very  often  used  adverbially,  especially  to  de- 
note degree  or  extent.  In  very  many  instances  it  is  like  the  English  Objec- 
tive similarly  used  (see  54,  page  15).     Some  of  these  uses  are  :  — 

a.  The  Accusative  denotes  length  of  time,  answering  the  question,  ITow 
long?  as,  quinque  dies  morabitur,  he  will  delay  five  days;  trl- 
duum  ibi  manebat,  he  remMned  there  for  the  space  of  three  days  ; 
septem  ann5s  in  Gallia  vixit. 


204  NOTES. 

h.  The  Accusative  denotes  extent  of  space,  answering  the  questions  Row 
far  ?  Row  high  ?  How  long  1  etc.  ;  as,  octo  millia  passuum  pro- 
cessit  (progressus  est),  he  advanced  eight  miles  ;  murus  centum 
pedes  longus  est,  the  wall  is  100 /cc^  long  ;  domus  quadraginta 
pedes  alta  f uit,  the  house  was  40  feet  high. 

c.  The  Accusative  has  an  adverbial  force  (of  degree,  extent,  cause,  etc. ) 
in  many  expressions.  Some  of  these,  as  multum,  plurimum,  etc., 
have  been  mentioned  under  94,  d,  1.     Examples  are  :  — 

Suevi  n5n  multum  frumento,  sed  maximam  partem  lacte  atque 
pecore  vivunt,  tlie  Suevi  do  not  live  rtiuch  on  corn,  hut  for  the  most 
part  on  milk  and  {the  flesh  of)  cattle;  plurimum  potest,  he  is 
very  powerful  (he  is  able  to  a  very  great  extent) ;  quid  venitis,  why 
do  you  come  ?  (English,  what  fori);  fama  tantum  valuit,  the  re- 
port had  so  great  influence  (availed  to  such  a  degree). 

Remark.     The  Accusative  of  Place  to  which  is  described  in  159,  h. 

Accusative  as  Subject. 

143.  The  Accusative  is  used  as  the  Subject  of  the  Infinitive  Mode.  In 
English  the  Objective  is  often  used  in  the  same  way  (see  56,  page  16). 
This  use  of  the  Accusative  is  more  fully  described  in  166. 

Accusative  TV'itli  Prepositions. 

144.  The  Accusative  and  Ablative  are  used  with  Prepositions.  The 
list  of  those  (most  common)  that  take  the  Ablative  is  given  under  95; 
those  not  contained  in  this  list  require  the  Accusative.    But  see  95,  c. 

VOCATIVE. 

145.  The  Vocative  is  the  case  of  Direct  Address ;  as,  studios!  este, 
pueri,  hoys,  he  studious.  It  is  like  the  English  Independent  Case,  as,  in 
the  example,  pueri  has  no  dependence  on  any  other  word  in  the  sentence. 

ABLATIVE. 

146.  The  Ablative  usually  expresses  Adverhial  ideas ;  that  is,  it 
answers  the  questions  From  what?  By  whatl  Why?  Row?  Where? 
When  ?     With  what  ?   etc.     In   English,   the  same  ideas  are  expressed 

by  phrases  containing  the  Prepositions  from,  hy,  in,  with,  and  sometimes 
others ;  as,  virum  culpa  liberat,  he  frees  the  man  from  hlame  ;  pallidus 
ira  fuit,  he  was  pale  with  anger  (tells  why)\  clara  voce  dixit,  he  spoke  in 
a  loud  tone  (tells  how);  poster©  die  hostes  superavit,  he  overcame  the 
enemy  the  following  day  (tells  when). 


NOTES.  205 

Ablative  of  Separation. 

147.  The  Ablative  ( =  from)  is  very  frequently  used  to  denote  Separa- 
tion ;  as,  me  timore  liberas,  you  free  me  from  fear;  finitimi  agris 
expulsi  sunt,  the  neighbors  were  driven  from  their  lands ;  conatu  desti- 
terunt,  they  desisted  from  their  attempt, 

a.  Opus  (indeclinable,  used  in  Nominative  and  Accusative)  and  usus, 
meaning  Tieedy  take  the  Ablative,  like  verbs  expressing  separation 
or  privation ;  as,  opus  est  magistratibus  et  pecunia,  there  is 
need  of  magistrates  and  money. 

Ablative  of  Origin,  or  Source. 

148.  The  Ablative  ( =  from )  denotes  Origin  or  Source^  especially  with 
such  a  Participle  as  natus,  horn  {from)  ;  ortus,  sprung  (from)  ;  as, 
Lucius  Catilina  nobili  genere  natus  fuit,  Lucius  Catiline  ca'.ne  from 
noble  stock. 

Ablative  of  Cause. 

149.  The  Ablative  denotes  Cause,  answering  the  question  Why?  In 
a,ccordancs  with  what  ?  as,  pallidus  ira  fuit,  he  was  pale  with  anger ; 
senectute  mortuus  est,  he  died  of  old  age ;  victoria  sua  gloriantur, 
they  boast  of  their  victory ;  stipendium  jure  belli  capit,  he  takes  the 
tribute  by  [in  accordance  with)  the  law  of  war. 

a.  The  Ablative  causa  is  often  used  after  a  Genitive  to  express  cause  ; 
as,  rei  publicae  causa, /o?'  the  republic's  sake;  rei  frumentariae 
(or  commeatus)  causa,  for  the  sake  of  supplies  of  corn  (or  sicp- 
plies) . 

Ablative  of  Manner. 

150.  The  Ablative  denotes  Manner,  answering  the  question  How  ?  as, 
clara  voce  dixit,  he  sjyoke  in  a  loud  tone;  magno  fletu  auxilium  a 
Caesare  petunt,  with  a  flood  of  tears  (great  weejmig)  they  seek  aid  of 
Caesar;  magna  vi  contenderunt,  they  strove  ivith  might  and  main. 

a.  Caution.  If  'with  means  in  company  with,  in  conflict  with,  cum 
must  be  used.  The  Ablative  is  then  called  the  Ablative  of  Ac- 
companiment; as,  cum  decima  legi5ne  venit,  he  came  with  the 
tenth  legion ;  cum  hostibus  pugnant ;  cum  Germanis  bellum 
gerunt. 
Remark.  In  military  reports,  or  in  describing  military  movements, 
cum  is  often  omitted. 


206  NOTES. 

Ablative  of  Means  or  Instrument. 

151.  The  Ablative  denotes  Means  or  Instrument^  answering  the  ques- 
tions By  what  ?  With  what  ?  as,  hostium  fines  ferrS  et  igne  vastant, 
they  lay  waste  the  enemy  s  territory  with  sword  and  flames  ;  Deus  mun- 
dum  omnibus  rebus  bonis  explevit,  God  has  filled  the  world  with  all 
blessings  (good  things);  legione  fossam  perducit,  he  digs  (conducts)  a 
ditch  with  (the  help  of)  the  legion. 

Caution.  If  the  Noun  or  Pronoun  denotes  the  person  by  whom 
something  is  done,  it  requires  the  preposition  a  (ab).  It  is  then  called, 
not  the  MeanSj  but  the  Agent;  as,  pater  a  filiis  amatur,  the  father  is 
loved  by  his  sons;  naves  militibus  a  Caesare  completae  sunt,  the  ships 
were  filled  with  soldiers  (Means)  by  Caesar  (Agent). 

The  indirect  agent  is  expressed  by  per  with  the  Accusative;  as,  Caesar 
per  exploratores  certior  factus  est,  Caesar  was  informed  through  scouts 
(ab  exploratoribus  =  by  the  scouts  in  person).     See  also  136. 

a.  The  Ablative  of  Means  is  used  with  the  Deponent  Verbs  utor,  fruor, 

fungor,  potior,  vescor,  and  also  vivo  (with  the  meaning,  live 
upon)]  as,  auro  et  argento  iituntur,  they  use  (employ)  gold  and 
silver ;  eadem  conditione  deditiSnis  iisus  est,  he  enjoyed  the 
same  condition  (ov  terms)  of  surrender  ;  lacte  vescuntur,  they  live 
on  (feed  on)  milk ;  pecore  vivunt,  they  live  on  (the  ficsh  of)cattle; 
castris  potiti  sunt,  they  got  possession  of  the  camp. 
Remark.  Potior  sometimes  takes  the  Genitive,  in  the  sense  of  become 
master  of;  as,  totius  Galliae  potior,  /  become  master  of  all  Gaul. 

b.  The  Adjectives  fretus,  contentus,  praeditus  (=  prae  +  datus), 

take  the  Ablative  of  Means  ;  as,  freti  virtute  sua,  relyiyig  on  their 
bravery ;  paucis  rebus  contentus  fuit,  he  was  content  with  a  few 
things;  virtute  praeditus  et  copiis  fretus,  Marcellus  hostes 
vicit,  endowed  (gifted)  with  bravery,  and  relying  on  his  troops, 
Marcellus  conquered  the  enemy, 

c.  The  Ablative  denotes  the  Price  paid  for  anything.     It  is  the  ineans 

by  which  it  is  obtained  or  exchanged  ;  as,  viginti  talentis  unam 
orationem  vendidit,  he  sold  one  oration  fm-  20  talents ;  haec 
victoria  Caesari  multo  sanguine  stetit,  this  victory  cost  Caesar 
much  blood  (literally,  stood  to  his  account)]  librum  duodecim 
sestertiis  emit,  he  bought  the  book  for  12  sesterces  (about  60 
cents). 

Ablative  of  Quality. 

152.  The  Ablative  of  Quality  is  used  to  describe  a  person  or  thing, 
answering  the  questions  Of  what  kind?   What  sort  of?  Of  what  appear- 


NOTES.  207 

ance?  etc.  See  Genitive  of  Quality  (121).  Examples  :  Germanl  viri 
corporum  ingenti  magnitudine  fuerunt,  the  Germans  were  men  of  huge 
size  of  body ;  moenia  urbis  magna  altitudine  sunt,  the  walls  of  the  city 
are  of  great  height ;  horrido  aspectu  sunt,  they  are  of  dreadful  appear- 
ance (have  a  dreadful  look,  are  ^^dreadful-looking''). 

a.  Although  the  Genitive  may  be  used  to  denote  Quality^  yet  the 
Ablative  is  more  common.  The  Genitive  must  be  used  to  denote 
actual  measurement  (in  days,  fcet^  etc.);  as  in  the  Examples  under 
121. 

Ablative  of  Kespect. 

153.  The  Ablative  often  answers  the  question  In  what  respect  ?  and  is 
then  called  the  Ablative  of  Respect  (or  Specification).  It  is  used  with 
Nouns,  Adjectives,  and  Verbs ;  as,  rex  nomine  fuit,  he  was  a  kiiig  in 
name;  Gallos  reliquos  virtute  praecedunt,  they  surpass  the  rest  of  the 
Gauls  in  bravery;  puer  patri  omnibus  rebus  similis  est,  the  boy  is  like 
his  father  in  all  respects  ;  majores  natu  sumus,  we  are  older  {greater  in 
respect  to  birth). 

Remark.  The  Ablative  of  the  Supine  is  an  Ablative  of  Respect 
(191,  b). 

Ablative  with.  Comparatives. 

154.  The  Ablative  may  be  used  after  Comparatives,  instead  of  quam 
(with  the  Nominative  or  Accusative)  ;  as,  TuUus  Hostilius  R5mul6 
(=  quam  Romulus)  ferocior  fuit,  Tullus  Hostilius  was  more  warlike 
tJmn  Romulus ;  scimus  solem  majorem  esse  terra  (=  quam  terram), 
we  knoiu  that  the  sun  is  greater  than  the  earth  ;  castra  amplius  millibus 
passuum  octo  in  latitudinem  patebant,  the  camp  extended  more  than 
eight  miles  in  width. 

a.  A  few  Ablatives  (like  opinione,  spe)  are  used  with  a  Comparative, 

and  have  the  force  of  entire  clauses ;  as,  celerius  opinione  om- 
nium venit,  he  came  quicker  than  any  one  supposed  he  would  (lit- 
erally, quicker  than  the  ojnnion,  or  expectation,  of  all). 

b,  Quam  is  often  omitted  after  pliis,  minus,  amplius,  longius,  with- 

out affecting  the  case  of  the  following  noun  ;  as,  amplius  (Accusa- 
tive) tria  millia  (Accusative)  passuum  castra  patebant,  the  camp 
extended  more  than  three  miles ;  that  is,  three  miles  (Accusative) 
and  more  (Accusative). 

Ablative  expressing  Measure  of  Difference. 

155.  The  Ablative  denotes  the  Measure  (or  Degree)  of  Difference  between 
two  objects  compared,  telling  by  how  much  one  thing  is  greater  or  less  than 


208  NOTES. 

another.  Notice  a  similar  use  of  the  Objective  in  English  (54,  7,  page  15). 
Examples  :  ille  vir  t6t5  capita  altior  est,  that  man  is  a  whole  head 
taller  ;  Hibernia  dimidio  minor  est  quam  Britannia,  Ireland  is  a  half 
smaller  than  Erigland  ;  tempus  multo  brevius  est,  the  time  is  much 
shorter, 

a.  The  Ablative  expressing  Measure  of  Difference  is  found  with  all 

words  and  phrases  which  contain  a  Comparative  idea;  as,  hie 
locus  aequ5  spatio  ab  castris  Ariovisti  et  Caesaris  aberat, 
this  spot  VMS  the  sams  distoMce  (off)  from  the  camp  of  Ariovistus 
and  {that  of)  Caesar ;  paulo  post  (ante)  venit,  he  came  a  little 
after  (or  before)  ;  flumen  triginta  millibus  passuum  infra 
(supra)  eum  locum  fuit,  the  river  was  30  miles  below  (or  above) 
that  place. 

b.  The  Ablative  of  Measure  of  Difference  is  very  often  expressed  in  the 

form  of  correlatives  (195,  8),  as,  quo  —  eo  (or  hoc) ;  quanto  — 
tantS,  which  are  to  be  translated  the  —  the ;  as,  quo  major  vis 
aquae  se  incitaverit,  h5c  (eo)  artius  continebuntur,  the  (by 
how  much)  greater  the  force  of  the  current  shall  have  been,  the  (by  so 
much)  more  tightly  will  they  be  held  together, 

c.  The  Ablative  with  Comparatives  (154)  and  the  Ablative  of  Measure 

of  Difference  are  very  often  found  in  the  same  sentence  ;  as,  servus 
multo  fortior  domino  suo  est,  the  slave  is  much  braver  than  his 
master;  turris  quinque  pedibus  mur5  altior  est,  the  tower  is 
five  feet  higher  than  the  wall. 

Ablative  with  Dignus  and  Indignus. 

156.  The  Adjectives  dignus,  worthy,  and  indignus,  unworthy,  take 
the  Ablative  ;  as,  ignavus  vita  indignus  est,  a  coward  does  n't  deserve  to 
live  (is  unworthy  of  life)  ;  milites  laude  dig^i  erant,  the  soldiers  were 
worthy  of  praise. 

Ablative  Absolute. 

157.  The  Ablative  is  often  used  independently  of  the  rest  of  the  sen- 
tence, and  is  then  called  the  Ablative  Absolute  (absolute  means  freed  from 
dependence).  In  English,  the  Independent  Case  is  employed  in  the  same 
way  with  Participles,  and  has  three  uses  :  — 

(1.)  Substantive  +  Participle;  as,  the  camp  having  been  fortified^  he 
came  to  Rome. 

(2.)  Substantive  +  being  +  Adjective  ;  as,  the  soldiers  being  brave,  the 
enemy  were  overcome. 

(3.)  Substantive  +  being  +  Substantive;  as,  Caesar  being  the  judge, 
you  will  be  condemned. 


NOTES.  209 

The  verb  to  he  is  a  Copula ;  hence  hrave  is  a  Predicate  Adjective,  and 
judge,  a  Predicate  Noun.  The  verb  sum  has  no  Present  Participle,  how- 
ever, and  therefore,  in  expressing  these  examples  in  Latin,  being  must  be 
omitted  in  the  second  and  third.  Of  course,  hrave  must  agree  with  soldiers, 
and  judge  must  be  in  Apposition  with  Caesar.  Therefore,  the  Latin  for 
these  examples  will  be  :  — 

(1.)  Substantive  +  Participle,  castris  munitis,  Romam  venit. 

(2.)  Substantive  +  (^>em^)  +  Adjective,  militibus  fortibus,  hostes 
victi  sunt. 

(3.)  Substantive  +  {heing)  +  Substantive,  Caesare  judice,  condem- 
naberis. 

Judging  from  potens  (Present  Participle  of  possum),  we  may  say 
that  the  Present  Participle  of  sum  would  he  ens ;  so  that  militibus 
(entibus)  fortibus,  and  Caesare  (ente)  judice,  will  show  how  much 
alike  the  English  and  Latin  are  in  the  use  of  the  absolute  case  and  the 
Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective. 

RemarIc  1.  Verbs  in  Latin  (except  the  Deponents)  have  no  Perfect 
Active  Participle.  The  Ablative  Absolute  is  required,  to  supply  this  lack 
as  nearly  as  possible;  as,  having  seen  the  city;  having  heard  the  speech, 
must  be  translated  thus  :  urbe  visa  {the  city  having  heen  seen) ;  oratione 
audita  (the  speech  having  heen  heard).  In  these  sentences,  however,  there 
will  be  no  Ablative  Absolute,  as  the  Participles  are  Active  in  meaning : 
having  followed  the  enemy,  our  men  killed  a  large  number  of  them;  having 
delayed  five  days,  he  set  out.  They  must  be  written  thus :  hostes  seciiti 
(Nominative),  nostri  magnum  numerum  eoruip  occiderunt;  quin- 
que  dies  moratus  (Nominative),  profectus  est. 

Remark  2.  The  Ablative  Absolute  phrase,  like  the  English  Indepen- 
dent phrase,  is  usually  equivalent  to  a  shortened  clause,  and  should  gener- 
ally be  translated  as  a  Subordinate  Clause  ;  as,  militibus  fortibus,  because 
the  soldiers  were  hrave;  oratione  habita,  when  the  speech  had  been  de- 
livered; se  invito,  although  he  was  (or  if  he  should  he)  unwilling  (or 
without  his  permission). 

Remark  3.  It  is  much  more  common  than  the  English  Independent 
Case,  and  often  cannot  be  translated  literally  so  as  to  make  good  sense. 
The  student  must  use  that  translation  which  is  best  and  smoothest ;  for  ex- 
ample :  — 

Caesare  jiidice,  if  Caesar  is  judge,  because  Caesar  is  judge;  Cicerone 
et  AntoniS  consulibus,  when  Cicero  and  Antony  were  consuls,  in  the 
consulship  of  Cicero  and  Antony ;  hostibus  victis ;  (1)  when  (although, 
since,  because)  the  enemy  have  heen  conquered;  (2)  having  conquered  the 
enemy ;  (3)  the  enemy  having  heen  conquered ;  (4)  after  having  conquered 
the  enemy. 


210  NOTES. 


PLACE. 


158.  The  Ablative  with  a  Preposition  denotes  place  where  (or  in  which) 
and  whence  (or  from  which);  as,  in  Gallia,  in  Gaul;  ab  oppido,  from  the 
town;  ex  silva,  out  of  the  forest. 

Place  to  which  is  expressed  by  the  Accusative  with  a  Preposition;  as, 
ad  urbem,  to  the  city;  ad  castra,  to  the  camp.  Remember,  this  is  the 
rule ;  the  next  Note  gives  the  exceptions. 

159.  To  express  Place  where  (in  or  at  which) ^  whence  (from  which), 
whither  (to  which),  Prepositions  are  omitted  with  the  following  :  — 

(1)  Names  of  Cities  and  Towns  ;  (2)  domus  (home),  rus  {country); 
(3)  smMll  Islands.     These  nouns  obey  the  following  Rules  :  — 

a.  Flsicefrom  which  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative  ;  as,  Catilina  R5ma 

fugit,  Catiline  has  fed  from  Pome;  rure  revocatus  est,  he  was 
recalled  from  the  country. 

b.  Place  to  which  is  expressed  by  the  Accusative  ;  as,  domum  ivit, 

he  went  home  ;  Corintho  Romam  prof ectus  est,  he  set  out  from 
Corinth  for  Pome. 

c.  Place  in  (or  at)  which  is  expressed  by  a  case  called  the  Locative 

(locus,  place),  which  is  mentioned  in  20,  Remark,  page  24,  as 
the  seventh  Latin  case.  It  is  found  in  the  First,  Second,  and  Third 
Declensions,  has  a  Singular  and  a  Plural  form,  and  has  endings 
like  the  Genitive  Singular  or  Ablative  (Singular  and  Plural).  This 
table  shows  the  endings  of  the  Locative  Case  :  — 


Declension. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

Singular. 

ae. 

i. 

e  (rarely  i). 

Plural. 

is. 

is. 

ibus. 

Some  names  of  Cities  and  Towns  have  no  Singular  form  ;  as,  Athenae 
(arum),  Athens;  Veil  (orum),  Veii ;  Sardes  (ium),  Sardis.  The 
above  table  and  its  correct  use  can  be  remembered  by  this 

Rule  :  To  express  Place  where,  names  of  Cities  and  Towns,  also 
domus,*  rus,  and  small  Islands,  must  have  the  form  of  the 

Genitive,  if  of  the  First  or  Second  Declension  and  Singular  Number. 

Ablative,  if  of  the  Third  Declension  or  Plural  Number. 

Examples  :  Capuae ;  Karthagine  ;  Veils ;  Athenis  ;  Sardibus  ; 
R5mae;  Lugduni  (Nominative  Singular,  Lugdunum)  ;  domi:  at  (or 
in)  Capua,  Cartilage,  Veii,  Athens,  Sardis,  Pome,  Lyons ;  at  home. 

*  Domus,  meaning  home,  is  of  the  Second  Declension  (21,  b). 


NOTES.  211 

Eemark  1.  To  express  towards,  in-the-vicinity-off  near,  from-the- 
vicinity  (or  neighborhood)  -of,  Prepositions  must  be  used  ;  because  without 
them  we  could  not  tell  whether  Romam  ivit  meant  he  went  to  Rome,  or 
towards  Rome.  These  examples  will  show  what  Prepositions  should  be 
used  for  such  meanings  :  ad  Romam  profectus  est,  he  started  towards 
(in-the-directioii-of)  Rome;  ad  Genevam  pervenit,  he  arrived  in-the- 
vicinity -of  Geneva  ;  ad  (circum,  apud)  Capuam  hiemavit,  he  passed  the 
winter  near  Capua ;  a  Capua  venit,  he  came  from-the-neighhorhood-of 
Capita. 

Remark  2.  There  are  some  common,  every-day  words  (loc5,  parte, 
etc.),  which  often  express  Place  where  without  a  Preposition.  These  can 
be  best  learned  by  experience. 

Remark  3.  The  Ablative  expressing  the  way  by  which  (or  through 
which)  is  an  Ablative  of  Means;  as,  via  breviore  ivit,  he  went  by  a  shorter 
way ;  hostes  locis  impeditis  sequitur,  he  follows  the  enemy  through 
places  difficult  of  passage. 

TIME. 

160.  The  Ablative  answers  the  questions  When  ?  Within  wlmt  time  ? 
(like  the  English  Objective  with  a  Preposition,  expressed  or  understood). 
The  Accusative  (142,  a)  answers  the  question  How  long  ?  (like  the  Eng- 
lish Objective) ;  as,  solis  occasu,  at  sunset;  bell5  servili,  in  the  war 
with  the  slaves  (servile  ivar) ;  totam  noctem  ierunt,  they  marched  all 
might ;  quinque  horas  pugnabant,  they  fought  five  hours;  Kalendis 
Martiis,  on  the  first  of  March  (on  the  March  Kalends). 

DATES. 

161.  The  Romans  did  not  number  the  days  of  the  month  as  we  do. 
There  were  three  fixed  points  in  each  month,  and  any  particular  day  was 
reckoned  as  so  many  days  before  the  nearest  of  these  points.  These  three 
points  were  called  :  — 

1.  Kalendae  (arum),  the  Kalends:  the  first  day  of  the  month. 

2.  Nonae  (arum),  the  Nones  (so  called  from  nonus,  ninth;  being 
nine  days  before  the  Ides) :  the  7th  of  March,  May,  July,  and  October, 
and  the  5th  of  the  other  months. 

3.  Idus  (uum).  Feminine,  the  Ides:  the  15th  of  March,  May,  July, 
and  October,  and  the  13th  of  the  other  months.  It  was  the  pay-day  for 
interest,  tuitions,  etc. 

a.  The  names  of  the  Months  are  Adjectives  ;  as,  Kalendae  Apriles 
(often  written  Kal.  Apr.),  the  1st  of  April ;  Idibus  Novembribus 
(Id.  Nov.),  on  the  V3fh  of  November. 


212  KOTES. 

h.  To  express  March  2'^th,  the  Eomans  said  the  5th  day  before  the  April 
KalendSf  because  they  included  the  day  from  which  and  the  day  ta 
which  they  counted.     "We  should  suppose  that  this  would  be  ex- 
pressed thus  :   quints   die   ante    Kalendas  Apriles;   but  they 
said  ante   diem   quintum   Kalendas   Apriles,  as  though  ante 
diem  were  a  Preposition  followed  hy  the  Accusative. 
Rule  1.     To  find  how  many  days  before  the  Kalends  an  English  day 
of  the  month  falls,  add  two  to  the  number  of  days  in  that  month,  and 
eubtract  the  number  of  the  given  date  ;  as,  March  28th  =  31  +  2  (33)  — 
28  =  5  ;   that  is,  March  28th  =  the  5th  day  before   the  April   Kalends. 
By  adding  two,  they  counted  in  the  first  day  of  the  next  month,  because  it 
was  an  extra  day,  beyond  the  month;  this,  with  the  dsij  fvm  which  they 
reckoned,  made  the  two  extra  days. 

Rule  2.  To  find  how  many  days  before  the  Nones  or  Ides  an  English 
day  of  the  month  falls,  add  one,  and  subtract  the  number  of  the  given 
date;  as,  ante  diem  quartum  Nonas  Junias  =  (5  +  1)  —  4  =  June  2j 
ante  diem  quartum  Idus  Septembres  =  (13  +  1)  —  4  =  Sept.  10. 

MODES   OF  THE  VERB. 

Indicative. 

162.  The  Indicative  Mode  is  used 

a.  To  state  something  as  afact;  as,  puerum  laudat,  he  praises  the  boy; 

veni,  vidi,  vici,  /  camCy  I  saiv,  I  conquered. 

b.  To  ask  a  direct  question  ;  as,  quis  putat  Cassium  ig^avum  esse  ? 
,  who  supposes  that  Cassius  is  a  coward  ?  pugnatne  servus  ?  does 

the  slave  fight  ? 
The  forms  of  questions  are  given  in  101. 

Imperative. 

163.  The  Imperative  Mode  expresses  a  direct  command  (that  is,  one  to 
the  Second  Person);  as,  convoca,  magister,  pueros,  teacher,  call  the 
boys  together ;  studios!  este,  be  industrious;  cave,  beware. 

Caution.  To  express  a  prohibition  (negative  command)  a  peculiar 
idiom  is  required.     This  is  given  in  178,  Caution  2. 

Subjunctive.* 

164.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  has  a  variety  of  uses  ;  the  simplest  are  :  — 

*  Only  a  few  of  the  simplest  uses  are  given  in  this  section;  the  Mode  is 
more  fully  described  hereafter.  This  Note  gives  such  uses  of  the  Subjunctive 
as  can  be  readily  appreciated  by  contrast  with  the  Indicative  and  the  Im- 
perative. 


NOTES.  213 

a.  To  state  something  as  doubtful  or  possible  ;  as,  si  Caesar  pugnet, 

German5s  superet,  if  Caesar  should  fight ^  he  would  overcome  the 
Germans. 
(The  Indicative  states  2^  fact.) 

b.  To  ask  an  indirect  question  ;  as,  rogat  quid  die  am,  he  asks  what  1 

am  saying.     It  is  also  used  to  ask  a  qnestion  implying  doubt  or 
uncertainty  ;  as,  quis  putet  Cassium  ignavum  esse?  who  would 
suppose  that  Cassius  is  a  coward  ? 
(The  Indicative  asks  a  direct  question,  and  one  which  does  not  imply  a 
doubt. ) 

c.  To  express  an  indirect  command  ;  that  is,  commanding  an  act  in 

which  the  First  or  Third  Person  is  to  be  the  actor,  but  the  com- 
mand is  not  addressed  to  the  First  or  Third  Person  (see  Remark, 
below).  It  may  express  all  such  ideas  as  exhortation,  ivarning, 
etc.;  as,  magister  pueros  convocet,  let  the  teacher  call  the  boys 
together;  omnes  studiosi  simus,  let  us  all  be  studious ;  caveat, 
let  him  beware. 
(The  Imperative  expresses  a  direct  command.) 

Remark.  If,  in  an  Imperative  sentence,  the  First  or  Third  Person  is 
required,  the  Subjunctive  must  be  used.  This  table  will  show  the  forms 
of  command,  exhortation,  etc.,  for  amo  and  sum,  in  all  Persons,  Present 
Tense  :  — 

Singular. 

1.  amem,  let  me  love.  1.  sim,  let  me  be, 

2.  ama,  love  {thou).  2.  es,  be  (thou). 

3.  amet,  let  him  (her,  it)  love.  3.  sit,  let  him  (her,  it)  be.  ' 

Plural. 

1.  amemus,  let  us  love.  1.  simus,  let  us  be, 

2.  amate,  love  (ye).  2.  este,  be  (ye). 

3.  ament,  let  them  love.  3.  sint,  let  them  be. 

d.  To  express  purpose,  answering  the  questions,   Why  ?  For  what  ?  as, 

Caesar  militSs  misit  ut  urbem  expugnarent,  Caesar  sent  sol- 
diers to  take  (that  they  'might  take)  the  city.  Notice  that  expug- 
narent does  not  state  a  fact,  but  something  intended,  or  possible. 

INFIlSriTIVE. 

165.  The  Infinitive  is  usually  employed  as  an  indeclinable  Verbal 
Noun  (aa  in  English). 


214  NOTES. 

a.  The  Infinitive  is  often  used  as  Subject  of  a  Verb  {impersonal).     Of 

course,  a  Predicate  Adjective  will  be  Neuter  (109,  b).  Examples: 
esse  melius  quam  videri  est,  to  be  is  better  thmi  to  seem  ;  dulce 
pro  patria  mori  est,  to  die  for  (one's)  native  land  is  sweet. 

b.  The  Infinitive  is  used  after  many  verbs,  sometimes  as  Object,  and 

sometimes  to  fill  out  their  meaning.  In  the  latter  use  it  is  called 
the  Complementary  Infinitive  (that  is,  it  completes  the  thought)  ; 
as,  Caesar  bellum  cum  Germanis  gerere  constituit,  Caesar 
determined  to  carry  on  war  with  the  Germatis ;  urbem  expugnare 
non  possunt,  they  cannot  take  the  city  by  storm ;  iter  facere 
coepit,  lie  began  to  march. 

Infinitive  with  Subject  AccusatiTe. 

166.  Verbs  and  expressions  of  telling,  thinking,  perceiving,  knowing 
(and  others  of  similar  meaning),  are  followed  by  the  Infinitive^  with  the 
Accusative  as  Subject.  This  use  of  the  Infinitive  may  be  more  easily  un- 
derstood, if  stated  thus  :  — 

I.  Verbs  of  saying  are  followed  by  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive, 
when  they  introduce,  not  a  Direct  Statement  (that  is,  the  exact  words  of 
the  speaker),  but  an  Indirect  Statement  (that  is,  the  general  idea  of  what 
he  said,  but  not  his  exact  words).  Such  an  Indirect  Statement,  in  Eng- 
lish, is  introduced  by  the  Conjunction  that;  but  the  word  that  is  omitted 
in  Latin.  Examples  :  (Direct  Quotation)  ^^The  sailors  fight,'*  **  Nautae 
pugnant ; "  (Indirect  Statement)  He  says  that  the  sailors  fight,  Dicit 
nautas  pugnare. 

II.  A  beginner,  however,  often  finds  it  hard  to  understand  why  a  verb 
of  thinking  should  follow  the  same  rule  as  a  verb  of  telling.  The  reason  is 
that,  when  a  person  thinks,  he  "says  to  .himself,"  as  in  this  sentence  :  1 
said  to  myself  (=  thoitght,  determined,  hoped)  that  I  should  be  elected. 

A  similar  construction  is  seen  in  English  (56,  page  16)  after  verbs  of 
seeing  and  hearing ;  as,  I  heard  him  {to)  call;  he  saw  the  boy  {to) 
jump. 

In  Latin,  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  a  very  common  construc- 
tion, after  verbs  of  saying,  etc.  ;  as,  dicit  (negat,  respondet,  putat, 
sperat,  audit,  credit)  Romanos  superatiiros  esse  Gall5s,  he  says 
{denies,  replies,  thinks ,  hopes,  hears,  believes)  that  the  Romans  will  overcome 
the  Gauls, 

Caution.  Verbs  of  asking  do  not  state  anything,  and  therefore  cannot 
take  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive.  They  should  be  followed  by  a  Sub- 
junctive o^  Purpose  or  Indirect  QucsHon  (see  179,  d  ;   177,  b). 


NOTES.  215 


Historical  Infinitive. 

167.  Latin  writers  often  use  the  Present  Infinitive,  instead  of  the  Im- 
perfect and  Perfect  Indicative  (without  have).  It  is  then  called  the 
Historical  In/initiiJe.  In  this  use  its  Subject  is  in  the  Nominative 
Case.  Perhaps  some  verb  (like  coepi),  upon  which  the  Infinitive  depends, 
has  been  omitted.  It  is  used  in  lively  descriptions  ;  as,  flagitare,  ducere, 
and  dicere,  in  these  sentences  :  Caesar  Aeduos  frumentum  flagitare. 
Diem  ex  die  Aedui  ducere ;  friimentum  conferri,  comportari,  adesse 
dicere,  Caesar  kept  demanding  corn  of  the  Aedui,  The  Aedui  kept  putting 
(him)  offy  day  after  day  ;  they  said  (at  one  time)  that  the  corn  was  being 
collected f  (at  another)  that  it  was  on  the  way,  (and  again)  that  it  was  at 
hand. 

TENSES. 

168.  Indicative,  The  Indicative  has  all  the  Tenses,  which  are 
described  in  61. 

a.  Both  the  Future  and  Future  Perfect  are  sometimes  required,  when 

the  English  verb  contains  the  idea  of  a  Future,  but  does  not  have 
a  Future  form  (17,  Note,  page  5)  ;  as,  si  Romam  venerit  (or 
veniet),  felix  ero,  if  he  comes  (that  is,  shall  have  co7ne,  shall 
come)  to  Rome,  I  shall  he  happy, 

b.  The  Present  Tense  is  often  used  for  a  past  tense,  to  represent  a  past 

event  vividly,  as  though  now  taking  place.  It  is  then  called  the 
Present  Historical  (like  the  Historical  Infinitive,  167), 
because  it  really  describes  past  events ;  as,  dum  haec  geruntur, 
dux  nuntios  mittit,  while  these  things  are  going  on,  the  leader 
sends  messengers.  Webster,  when  pleading  a  case  before  a  jury,  thus 
used  the  Present  Historical  :  "The  deed  is  done.  He  (the  crimi- 
nal) retreats,  retraces  his  steps  to  the  window,  passes  out  through 
it  as  he  came  in,  and  escapes.     The  secret  is  his,  and  it  is  safe." 

Remark.  The  Present  Historical  is  almost  always  used  with  dum, 
while,  though  the  other  verbs  in  the  sentence  may  be  in  tenses  denoting 
past  time  ;  as,  dum  haec  parantur,  Saguntum  jam  oppugnabatur, 

while  these  preparations  are  being  made,   Saguntum  was  already  under 
siege  (being  besieged). 

169.  Imperative  Tenses,  The  Imperative  Mode  has  only  one 
tense  (the  Present)  in  common  use.  The  Future  is  used  in  laws  and  com- 
mandments (like  the  English,  '*Thou  shalt  not  steal").  The  Present 
Imperative  tells  the  time  of  giving  the  command,  the  time  of  obeying  may 


216  NOTES. 

he  future  (as  in  English).  The  Present  has  only  one  Person,  the  Second  ; 
how  the  lack  of  the  First  and  Third  Persons  is  supplied  is  explained  in 
164,  c,  Remark. 

170.  Subjunctive  Tenses,  The  Subjunctive  Mode  has  no  Future 
or  Future  Perfect.  This  lack  is  sometimes  supplied  (for  the  Future)  by 
the  use  of  the  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation  (as  shown  in  82,  Remark), 
and  sometimes  by  using  the  Present  Subjunctive  as  a  Future  and  the  Per- 
fect as  a  Future  Perfect  (as  described  in  175).  The  Imperfect  Subjunc- 
tive also  has  a  peculiar  use  (described  in  175,  Remark  1).  In  a  word, 
the  time  denoted  by  the  Subjunctive  tenses  must  often  be  decided  by  the 
sense,  and  not  by  the  name  of  the  tense  (see  19,  page  6). 

Primary  and  Secondary  Tenses. 

171.  Tenses  expressing  Present  or  Future  time  are  called  Primary  (or 
Principal);  those  expressing  Past  time  are  called  Secondary  (or  Historical). 

Historical  means  describing  past  events  (as  in  the  terms,  Historical  Pres- 
ent and  Historical  Infinitive).     The  tenses  are  thus  divided  :  — 
Primary :  Present,  Future,  Perfect  (Definite),  Future  Perfect. 
Secondary :  Imperfect,  Perfect  (Indefinite,  or  Aorist),  Pluperfect. 

Sequence  of  Tenses. 

172.  The  tense  of  a  verb  in  the  Subjunctive,  in  a  Dependent  Clause,  is 
determined  by  the  tense  of  the  verb  on  which  it  depends.  That  is.  Present 
or  Future  time  must  be  followed  by  Present  or  Future  time,  and  Past  time 
must  be  followed  by  Past  time.  This  law  is  called  the  Sequence  of  Tenses 
(from  sequor,  I  follow) ,  and  can  be  thus  stated  :  Primary  tenses  follow 
Primary  tenses,  and  Secondary  tenses  follow  Secondary.  This  is  illustrated 
by  the  following  :  — 

(^venio     ut  te  videam,  /  come  that  I  may  see  you. 

Jveniam  ''  ''         "        I  shall  "      " 

jveni        "  "         "        I  have  ''      ** 

tvgnero    "  "         "        I  shall  have   "      " 


Primary. 


j^veniebam  ut  t5  viderem,  Twos  comiyig  that  I  might  see  you. 
Secondary.  •<  veni  "  "         **        I  came  *'        *'        " 

Iveneram    *'  "         "        Ihadcome       *'         "         " 

Also,  rogo  quid  agas,  /  ash  what  you  are  doing  (Present  Subjunctive). 
rogabo  quid  acturus  sis,  /  will  ask  what  you  are  going  to  do,  or 
will  do  (Future  Subjunctive). 
Remark  1.     The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  {not  the  Perfect)  is  regularly 
used  after  Secondary  tenses  ;  as,  viderem  in  the  examples  above. 


NOTES.  217 

Remark  2.  The  Historical  Present  (168,  b),  being  really  Sipast  tense, 
is  regularly  followed  by  a  past  tense  ;  as,  Helvetii  legates  ad  Caesarem 
mittunt,  qui  pacem  peterent,  the  Helvetii  send  envoys  to  Caesar  to  ask 
for  peace. 

173.  Infinitive  Tenses,  The  tenses  of  the  Infinitive  are  named 
Present,  Perfect,  and  Future ;  but  the  Present  may  have  the  meaning  of  a 
Present  or  Imperfect,  and  the  Perfect  may  have  that  of  the  Perfect  or 
Pluperfect.  The  time  of  an  Infinitive  tense  is  determined  by  the  time  of 
the  verb  on  which  it  depends.     If  the  Infinitive  denotes,  — 

(1.)  The  savie  time  as  the  principal  verb,  use  the  Present. 

(2.)  Time  before  that  of  the  principal  verb,  use  the  Perfect. 

(3.)  Time  after  that  of  the  principal  verb,  use  the  Future. 

Compare  these  rules  carefully  with  the  following  examples  :  dicit 
militem  pugnare,  he  says  that  the  soldier  fights;  dixit  magistrum 
pueros  laudare,  he  said  that  the  teacher  was  praising  the  boys;  putat 
Romanos  fortissimos  fuisse,  he  thinks  that  the  Romans  have  been  very 
brave;  nuntiavit  Gallos  nostros  superavisse  (superaturos  esse),  Ae 
announced  that  the  Gauls  had  overcome  (would  overcome)  our  men. 

Caution.  With  verbs  denoting  necessity,  permission,  ability  (as, 
oportet,  licet,  possum)  the  Present  Infinitive  must  be  translated  by  the 
Pel  feet,  when  those  verbs  are  in  the  Perfect ;  as,  oportuit  me  ire  (not 
ivisse),  I  ought  to  have  gone  (it  was  necessary  for  me  to  go);  mihi  venire 
licuit,  I  might  have  come  (it  was  permitted  me  to  come)]  urbem  videre 
potuisti,  you  could  have  seen  the  city  (you  were  able  to  see). 

CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

174.  A  Conditional  Sentence  consists  of  a  Principal  Clause,  making  a 
statement,  and  a  Subordinate  Clause,  connected  by  si  (if),  or  a  compound 
of  si  (as,  nisi,  unless;  etsi,  although;  sin,  but  if).  The  clause  containing 
si  is  called  the  Condition;  the  clause  containing  the  statement  (that  is, 
the  Principal  Clause)  is  called  the  Conclusion.  The  Condition  is  also 
called  the  Protasis;  the  Conclusion,  the  Apodosis. 

Conditional  Sentences  are  divided,  — 

(1.)  According  to  the  time  denoted  by  them. 

(2. )  According  to  the  kind  of  statement  made,  or  the  thought  expressed. 

a.  Time.     Conditional  Sentences  may  express  Past,  Present,  or  Future 

time. 

b.  Kind  of  Statement.     As  the  Mode  of  a  verb  expresses  the  "mood" 

of  the  speaker,  he  will  use  thii  Indicative  to  make  a  simple  state- 
ment (that  is,  a  statement  without  any  hint  of  doubt);  but  he  will 
use  the  Subjunctive  to  state  something  which  he  regards  as  uncer" 
tain  (that  is,  possible)  or  contrary  to  the  truth  (that  is,  impossible). 


218 


NOTES. 


Table  of  Conditional  Sentences* 

175.  This  Table  shows  what  time  and  what  thought  a  Conditional 
Sentence  may  express.  Remember  that  the  Subjunctive  has  no  Future  or 
Future  Perfect.  The  Present  is  also  used  as  a  Future  (as  in  c),  and  the 
Perfect  as  a  Future  Perfect  (as  in  Remark  3). 


;r      ^ 


^  ?^  ^    S 

+-  .^,  ->*  -^ 

>  > 


3 


to    ^5S 

3  ^sS 


O 


^ 


5>     3    . 


•"*   '^    ;s   <^ 


>       §       > 


.ti     '^-    ^    > 


r^  % 


^  Z^. 


O  CO 
O  « 


II 

P. 

a 

1 

P4 

iH 

s:3 

1^ 

t 

h-t  m 

m 

If 

-M* 

^w 


I 


a 

H 


I 


I  § 

p.  tc 


03  e 


5.^ 

o    ^ 


.==  t:  ^  ^ 

Eti     S     1J     S 


5  s 


a     ^ 


S  II  «  S 

rt^  *="  ftf 


CO       ^ 

— '  CP 

OP      5 


*«  ^  '<*  ^ 

©  ^  fl  ft 

"    w    P  O 

^   aj  +=*  .. 

^,-^  O  ••-• 


^    o    I 

s      — 

^-^  i 

O      (-!      "^ 


<2  cT^ 
s  .§  ?^ 

«  S  e 

eg    e    <U 

g  §  o 

Ip 
III 

.S    tS    +3 


t  r  .JS 


.r  a 


§  I 


a  «  «,  "S 

.£  X  Id  ^ 

§  §     02    P 

^  aT  !^  i-H  ^   o    a>   g    S 


3^  "^atli'^- 


•A 


^   o 

Is--' 


s   (M 


1"^ 


7-  S  ? 


Mils 


I   ft  «     - 

!.a    I 


«  :S  ^  5^  ^  .^ 


5   5  's       -^  M 


NOTES.  219 


Subjunctive  of  Wish. 

176.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  a  wish.  Of  course,  the  In- 
dicative cannot  denote  such  an  idea,  as  the  thing  wished  for  must  be 
possible  or  impossible.  *'  There  is  an  if  about  every  wish ;  "  and,  in  Latin, 
a  sentence  expressing  a  wish  is  really  a  clause  of  a  Conditional  Sentence, 
following  the  laws  stated  in  175,  a  (2),  b  (2),  c  (2). 

With  the  Subjunctive  of  Wish  the  particles  utinam,  O  si  (would 
that)  are  often  used. 

a.  A  wish  for  something  impossible  at  the  present  time  requires  the 

Imperfect  Subjunctive  ;  as,  (utinam)  copias  majores  habere- 
mus!  would  tliat  we  (now)  had  greater  forces  ! 

b.  A  wish  for  something  impossible  in  past  time  requires  the  Pluperfect 

Subjunctive  ;  as,  (utinam,  O  si)  milites  fortiores  fuissent ! 
would  that  the  soldiers  had  been  braver  I 

c.  A  wish  for  something  possible  in  the  future  requires  the  Present  Sub- 

junctive ;  as,  (utinam)  pater  veniat!  would  that  my  father  would 
come  ! 
Caution.     A  negative  wish  requires  ne,  and  not  n5n ;  as,  ne  vivam, 
si  scio,  I  wish  I  may  not  live,  if  1  know. 

Subjunctive  In  Questions* 

177.  a.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  ask  a  question  implying  a  doubt 
(see  examples  under  164,  b), 

b.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  ask  an  Indirect  Question;  as,  rogavit 

quis  se  vccaret,  he  asked  who  was  calling  him  (Direct  Question^ 
"Quis  me  vocat?") 

c.  The  question  is  often  hinted^  but  not  tqqWy  asked ;   as,  cog^novit 

quid  fecerit,  he  has  found  out  [by  inquiry)  what  he  has  done  ; 
die  mihi  quid  facias,  tell  me  (for  I  wish  to  know)  what  you  are 
doing ;  quae  agat,  quibuscum  loquatur,  scit,  he  knows  (by  in- 
quiry) what  he  does  (and)  with  whom  he  converses. 

d.  Indirect  Questions  are  either  single  or  double ;  like  Direct  Questions, 

they  require  interrogative  words.  (Review  101.)  Notice,  how- 
ever, these  two  points  in  which  they  differ  from  Direct  Questions  : 
(1.)  In  a  Single  Indirect  Question,  num  (whether)  is  regularly 
used,  but  it  does  not  necessarily  expect  the  answer  No;  (2.)  In 
Double  Indirect  Questions,  utrum  —  an  (or  -ne  —  an)  are  used, 
as  in  Direct  Questions  ;  but  or  not  is  expressed  by  necne 
(annon  being  used  in  Direct  Questions)  ;  as,  rogavit  utrum 
amicus  an  inimicus  essem,  he  asked  whether  I  were  a  friend  or 
foe;  dubium  est  utrum  venturus  sit,  necne,  it  is  doubtful 
^    whether  he  will  come,  or  not. 


220  NOTES. 

Eemarks.  1.  Sometimes  si  is  used  in  the  sense  of  whether  (as  iii 
English).  This  use  is  common  with  exspecto,  in  a  single  question ;  as, 
si  venirent  exspectavi,  /  waited  (to  see)  whether  they  would  come.  2. 
Ut  {how)  is  sometimes  used  in  questions  ;  as,  docebat  ut  omni  tempore 
tatius  Galliae  principatum  Aedui  tenuissent. 

Subjunctive  of  Command,  Exhortation,  etc 

178.  Any  form  of  Command  not  direct  (that  is,  implying  that  the 
First  or  Third  Person  is  the  actor,  and  expressing  exhortation,  warning, 
etc.)  requires  the  Subjunctive. 

Cautions.  1.  To  express  a  negative  form  of  exhortation,  etc.,  ne,  and 
not  n5n,  must  be  used  ;  as,  ne  pugnemus,  let  us  not  fight. 

2.  To  express  d^  prohibition  (that  is,  a  negative  command  to  the  Second 
Person),  the  Imperative  must  not  be  used.  There  are  several  forms  that 
may  be  used  ;  these  two,  however,  are  most  common  :  — 

a.  For  the  Singular,  nS  with  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  ;  as,  ne  hoc  flii- 
men  transieris,  don't  cross  this  river  (literally,  do  not  have  crossed, 
etc. ).  The  use  of  the  Perfect  arises  from  the  fact  that  the  Romans 
often  wished  to  describe  an  act  as  finished. 
h.  For  the  Singular  or  Plural,  use  noli  (Imperative  of  nol5)  with  the 
Complementary  Infinitive  ;  as,  nolite  ignavi  esse,  do  not  he  cow- 
ardly (literally,  he  unwilling  to  he). 

Subjunctive  of  Purpose. 

179.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  a  purpose,  answering  the 
questions  JVhy  ?  For  what?  A  Purpose  may  be  positive  or  negative;  the 
conjunction  ut  (also  written  uti),  that,  in  order  that,  is  commonly  used 
with  the  positive,  and  ne,  that  not,  lest,  with  the  negative;  as,  venit  ut 
urbem  videret,  he  came  that  he  might  see  [to  see)  the  city ;  pugnamus 
ne  servi  simus,  we  fight  that  we  may  not  he  slaves. 

Cautions.  1,  The  Infinitive  must  not  he  used  to  denote  a  Purpose  (see 
first  example).  2.  Ut  non  must  not  he  used  for  a  negative  Purpose,  hut  for 
a  negative  Result  (181). 

a.  The  Relative  qui  is  very  often  used  to  introduce  a  clause  of  Purpose, 
being  equal  to  ut  is  (ego,  tii,  etc.);  as,  c5pias  misit  quae  (=  ut 
eae)  urbem  expugnarent. 
h.  The  Ablative  quo  (=  ut  eo)  is  regularly  used,  instead  of  ut,  when 
there  is  a  Comparative  in  the  clause.  It  is  thus  both  a  Conjunc- 
tion (ut)  and  an  Ablative  of  Measure  of  Difi'erence  (155);  as, 
l5gem  brevem  esse  oportet,  qu5  facilius  intelligatur,  a  law 
should  he  short,  that  it  may  the  more  easily  he  understood. 


NOTES.  221 

c.  Quominus  (also  written  quo  minus,  hy  which  the  less)  takes  the 

Subjunctive,  with  the  meanings  that  not,  fromy  etc.,  after  verbs 
signifying  to  hinder,  prevent,  object,  being  equivalent  to  ne,  lest; 
as,  quid  Caesarem  impedit  quominus  urbem  oppugnet  ? 
(hiiiders  from  assaulting)-,  recusavit  quominus  sub  imperio 
populi  Roman!  esset  {refused  to  he). 

d.  Verbs  of  asking,  coimnanding  (except  jubeo),   urging,  permitting 

(except  patior),  and  others  of  like  meaning,  take  a  Subjunctive  of 
Purpose,  a7id  not  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive,  as  they  do  not 
make  a  statement;  as,  legiones  hortatus  est  ut  pugnarent,  he 
urged  the  legions  to  fight. 

e.  Verbs  oi  fearing  take  the  Subjunctive  :  with  ne,  when  the  event  is 

not  desired  ;  with  ut,  when  it  is  desired.  Translate  ne  by  that  or 
lest,  ut  by  that  not,  and  the  Present  Subjunctive  like  the  Future 
Indicative.  Study  these  examples  carefully,  and  notice  that  ^^not " 
comes  from  the  thought,  rather  than  from  ut:  vereor  ne  le5 
veniat,  I  fear  that  (Jest)  the  lion  will  come  (literally,  /  have  my 
fears  about  his  not  coming);  vereor  ut  vincat,  I  fear  that  he  will 
not  conquer  (literally,  I  have  tny  fears  about  his  conquering), 
f  Ut  is  often  omitted,  especially  after  verbs  of  asking,  commanding, 
and  others  of  similar  meaning  ;  as,  huic  mandat,  Remos  adeat, 
he  instructs  him  to  visit  the  Remi, 

180.  There  are,  in  common  use,  five  ways  of  expressing  a  Purpose  ;  but 
the  hifinitive  is  not  one  of  them.     He  came  to  see  the  city  may  be  written  :  — 

1.  venit  ut  urbem  videret.       3.  venit  ad  urbem  videndam  (190,  a). 

2.  venit  qui  urbem  videret.     4.  venit  urbis  videndae  causa  (190,  a). 

6.  venit  urbem  visum  (191,  a). 

SubjunctlTe  of  Kesult* 

181.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  a  result.  A  positive  Result 
regularly  has,  for  its  conjunction,  ut,  so  that ;  a  negative  Result  has  ut 
non,  so  that  not. 

Remark.  The  Subjunctive  of  Result  is  common  after  sic  (ita,  tam), 
so;  talis,  such  ;  tantus,  so  great;  is,  such;  ejusmodi,  of  such  a  kind. 

a.  A  Subjunctive  of  Result  is  used  with  Impersonal  Verbs  like  accidit 
(fit),  it  happens;  sequitur,  it  follows ;  and  other  verbs  and  ex- 
pressions of  like  meaning.  Of  course,  the  thing  that  happens,  etc. , 
is  the  real  Subject  of  such  a  verb  ;  as,  accidit,  ut  luna  plena 
esset,  it  happened  to  be  full  moon  {that  the  moon  was  full);  sequi- 
tur, ut  haec  falsa  sint,  it  follows  that  these  things  a,re  false. 


222  NOTES. 

Remark.  The  Future  Infinitive  Passive  (as  amatum  iri)  is  seldom 
found.  In  its  place  is  used  futiirum  esse  (or  fore)  followed  by  a  Sub- 
junctive of  Result  ;  as,  dixit  fore  (futiirum  esse)  ut  omnes  inter- 
ficerentur  (not  omnes  interfectum  iri),  he  said  that  (it  would  happen 
that)  all  would  be  killed. 

h.  A  Result  clause  may  also  be  the  Object  of  a  verb  ;  as,  fecerunt  ut 
profectio  consimilis  fugae  videretur,  they  made  their  departure 
seem  very  like  a  flight;  ne  committat  ut  locus  hoc  nomen 
capiat,  let  him  not  cause  the  place  to  take  this  name. 

c.  The  Relative  qui  is  often  equivalent  to  ut  is,  ego,  etc.,  introducing 

a  Result.  This  use  of  the  Subjunctive  expresses  a  Result  of  some 
quality  of  the  Antecedent,  and  hence  is  called  the  Characteristic 
Result.  Sometimes  the  thought  of  Result  is  not  at  once  evident, 
and  we  must  supply  some  such  word  as  talis,  tantus,  ejusmodi, 
to  modify  the  Antecedent  and  give  to  it  the  idea  of  quality,  which 
the  Romans  associated  with  it;  as,  n5n  is  (=  talis)  sum  qui 
(=  ut  ego)  periculo  terrear,  /  a,m  not  such  (a  coward)  as  to  be 
[that  I  am)  terrified  by  danger;  tempestas  (tanta)  coorta  est, 
quae  (=  ut  ea)  naves  rejiceret,  a  storm  arose  (so  great)  which 
(that  it)  drove  the  vessels  back. 

d.  Quin,  a  peculiar  compound  of  the  Relative  Pronoun  and  non  (or 

ne),  is  used  with  the  Subjunctive  after  words  implying  doubt,  and 
is  translated  by  tJiat,  but  that.  The  qui  is  an  old  Ablative,  equiva- 
lent to  quo ;  so  that  quin  =  ut  eo  non.  Quin  is  sometimes  used 
instead  of  quSminus  (179,  c)  after  verbs  of  hindering,  etc.  Ex- 
amples are  :  non  est  dubium  (or  non  dubito)  quin  fortis  sit, 
there  is  no  doubt  (or  I  do  not  doubt)  that  he  is  brave;  nunquam 
me  poteris  deterrere,  quin  haec  loquar,  you  can  never  deter  7ne 
from  saying  these  things. 

Cautions.  1.  If  the  thought  is,  /  doubt  whether,  or  it  is  doubtful 
whether,  the  Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Question  must  be  used  ;  as,  fortisne 
an  ignavus  sit,  dubium  est.  2.  Dubito,  meaning  /  hesitate,  takes  the 
Infinitive  ;  as,  nostri  flumen  transire  non  dubitaverunt. 

e.  A  clause  of  Result  is  often  used  as  an  appositive  ;  as,  id,  quod  con- 

stituerant,  facere  conantur,  ut  e  finibus  suis  exeant  (ut  — 
exeant  is  in  apposition  with  id). 

How  to  express  Cause  or  Reason. 

182.  a.  Quod  (because),  quoniam  (since),  quia  {because),  regularly 
require  the  Indicative. 


NOTES.  223 

b.  Quum  (or  cum),  meaning  since,  and  introducing  a  reason,  requires 

the  Subjunctive ;  as,  quum  fortis  sit,  vincet,  since  he  is  brave,  he 
will  conquer. 

c.  The  Relative  qui  is  often  equal  to  quum  is  (ego,  etc.)  meaning 

since  he  (I,  etc.),  and  takes  the  Subjunctive  of  Cause;  as,  con- 
demnatus  est,  qui  amicum  interfecerit,  he  has  been  condemned, 
since  he  has  killed  his  friend. 

d.  Quod  is  often  used  to  introduce  a  Substantive  Clause  (188,  b)  which 

may  be  Subject  or  Object ;  as,  quod  Regulus  rediit  mirabile 
videtur,  the  fact  that  Reguhcs  returned  seems  strange.  It  is  gen- 
erally best  translated  by  the  fact  that,  or  as  to  the  fact  that. 

e.  For  quod  (because)  with  the  Subjunctive,  see  187,/. 

How  to  express  Concession* 

183.  Concession  means  granting ;  for  instance,  although  he  is  innocent 
means  granting  that,  etc. 

a.  Quum  (or  cum),  meaning  although,  requires  the  Subjunctive  of 

Concession ;    as,  quum   pauci    sint,  fortissimi    sunt,   although 

they  are  few,  they  are  very  brave. 
Caution.     Etsi,  tametsi,  meaning  although,  being  compounds  of  si, 
take  the  Indicative  or  the  Subjunctive  according  to  the  laws  of  Conditional 
Sentences  (175).     Quamquam  (although)  takes  the  Indicative. 

b.  The  Relative  qui  is  often  equal  to  quum  is  (ego,  etc.)  meaning 

although  he  (/,  etc.),  and  takes  the  Subjunctive  of  Concession  ;  as, 
culpatur,  qui  innocens  sit,  he  is  blamed,  although  he  is  innocent. 

c.  Quamvis  (  =  quam  +  vis,  Second  Person  Singular  of  volo)  means, 

literally,  as  much  as  you  'please,  but  is  translated  although.  It 
requires  the  Subjunctive  ;  as,  quamvis  fortes  sint,  although  they 
are  brave  (let  them  be  as  brave  as  you  please). 

d.  Dum,  modo,  dummodo,  meaning  provided,  require  the  Subjunc- 

tive of  Concession  ;  as,  dum  eat,  provided  he  go. 

Clauses  of  Time. 

184.  a.  Quum  (or  cum),  when,  regularly  takes  the  Subjunctive  in  the 
Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  tenses,  but  the  Indicative  in  the  others  ;  as, 
quum  in  citeriSre  Gallia  esset ;  quum  quaesivisset.  The  Imperfect 
and  Pluperfect,  Indicative,  sometimes  occur,  emphasizing  a,  fact. 

Caution.  Ubi,  when,  postquam  (or  posteaquam),  after,  and  others 
of  like  meaning,  take  tlie  Indicative. 


224  NOTES. 

h  Dum,  meaning  until,  and  implying  purpose,  takes  the  Subjunctive  ; 
when  it  means  while,  or  until  (not  denoting  purpose),  it  takes  the 
Indicative  ;  as,  dum  reliquae  naves  convenirent,  exspectavit, 
he  waited  until  the  rest  of  the  ships  should  assemble ;  but  dum 
pauc5s  dies  moratur,  while  he  tarries  a  few  days. 

Remark.  Dum,  meaning  while,  regularly  takes  the  Present  Histori- 
cal (168,  h.  Remark),  as  moratur,  in  the  above  example. 

c.  Antequam  and  priusquam,  meaning  before,  take  the  Subjunctive, 
when  there  is  an  idea  of  doubt  or  purpose  ;  but  when  they  simply 
connect  two  facts,  one  occurring  before  the  other,  they  take  the 
Indicative  ;  as,  priusquam  quidquam  conaretur,  Divitiacum 
ad  se  vocari  jubet,  before  he  should  attempt  anything ,  etc.;  ad 
eum  locum  contendit,  antequam  hostes  oppidum  expugna- 
rent,  he  hastened  to  that  place,  before  the  enemy  should  capture  the 
town  (=  lest,  ne);  but  neque  prius  fugere  destiterunt  quam  ad 
flumen  pervenerunt. 

Remark.  Antequam  and  priusquam,  as  in  the  last  example,  are 
often  written  as  separate  w^ords. 

Subjunctive  "by  Attraction." 

185.  The  Subjunctive  is  often  used  in  a  dependent  clause,  not  for  any 
reason  of  its  own,  but  because  the  verb  on  ivhich  it  depends  is  in  the  Sub- 
junctive. Such  a  clause  must  be  so  closely  connected  with  the  other  Sub- 
junctive clause  as  to  become  a  necessary,  or  explanatory,  part  of  it,  and  its 
verb  is  said  to  be  in  the  Subjunctive  by  Attraction ;  as,  velit  in  this 
sentence  :  nem5  tam  potens  est  ut  omnia  quae  velit  efficere  possit, 
no  one  is  so  powerful  as  to  be  ahle  to  accomplish  all  that  he  wishes.  That 
is,  velit  is  a  part  of  the  Result. 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE    (Oratio  Obliqua). 

186.  A  Direct  Quotation  gives  the  exact  words  of  the  speaker  ;  an  In- 
direct Quotation  gives  the  general  idea  of  what  he  said,  but  not  his  exact 
words.  "We  call  the  former  Direct  Discourse  (OratiS  Recta);  the  latter. 
Indirect  Discourse  (Oratio  Obliqua).  In  changing  from  the  Direct  to 
the  Indirect,  the  First  Person  regularly  becomes  the  Third. 

a.  Review  the  whole  of  166 ;  also  177,  b,  c,  d.  The  constructions  of 
Indirect  Discourse  are  found,  not  only  after  Verbs  of  saying,  ask- 
ing, thinhioig,  perceiving,  knowing,  but  also  in  connection  with 
any  Verb,  IN'oun,  or  Adjective,  containing  the  same  idea;  as, 
cognovit  virum  fortem  esse   (Object),  he  ascertained  that  the 


NOTES. 


225 


man  was  brave  ;  cognitum  est  virum  fortem  esse  (Subject),  it 
was  ascertained,  etc.;  certior  factus  est  exercitum  venisse,  ^e 
was  informed  that  the  army  had  come;  spes  (fama)  erat  Caesarem 
venturum  esse,  there  was  a  hope  {report)  that  Caesar  would  come; 
die  mihi  quid  facias,  tell  me  what  you  are  doing, 

liaws  of  Modes  and  Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse. 

187.  In  changing  from  the  Direct  to  the  Indirect  Discourse,  the  Verbs 
of  all  Subordinate  Clauses  become  (or  remain)  Subjunctive.  The  Mode 
of  the  Principal  Verb  depends  on  the  kind  of  sentence.  The  modes 
ordinarily  found  in  both  Principal  and  Subordinate  Clauses,  and  in 
Declaratory,  Interrogative,  and  Imperative  Sentences,  are  shown  in  this 
Table  :  — 


Sentence. 


a.  Declaratory,     } 


Clause. 
(  Principal. 


DiKECT   DiSCOUESE.      INDIRECT  DiSCOUaSE. 


Subordinate. 


b.  Interrogative.  \  P^^i^^ipal. 

(  Subordinate. 


c.  Imperative. 


(  Principal. 
(  Subordinate. 


Indicative. 

Indicative.* 

Indicative. 
Indicative.* 

Imperative. 
Indicative.* 


Accusative  with 

Infinitive. 
Subjunctive. 

Subjunctive. 
Subjunctive. 

Subjunctive. 
Subjunctive. 


*  Remarks.  1.  Of  course,  if  the  Subjunctive  (expressing  Purpose, 
Result,  Cause,  etc.)  were  used  in  the  Direct  Discourse,  instead  of  the 
Indicative,  it  would  be  retained  in  the  Indirect  Discourse. 

2.  If  a  Subordinate  Clause  is  not  a  part  of  the  quotation,  but  is  merely 
explanatory,  its  verb  may  be  in  the  Indicative  ;  as,  dixit  oppidum,  quod 
vides,  Ariovisti  fuisse,  he  said  that  the  town,  which  you  see,  had  beeri 
(the  property)  of  Ariovistus. 

d.  Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse.    The  Tense  of  the  Subjunctive 

in  Indirect  Discourse  is  decided  by  the  laws  for  the  Sequence  of 
Tenses  (172).  Refcaember  that  the  tense  of  the  introductory  verb 
(dic5,  respondeo,  puto,  etc. )  must  be  carefully  noticed  in  apply- 
ing these  laws. 

e.  This  passage  (Caesar's  Gallic   War,  I.  13)  will  furnish  applications 

of  these  principles  :  — 


16 


226 


NOTES. 


Direct  Discotjrse. 
Divico  said  to  Caesar  :  — 
"Si  pacem  populus  Eomanus 
cum  Helvetiis  facietf  in  earn  partem 
ibunt  atque  ibi  erunt  Helvetii,  ubi 
eos  constitueris  atque  esse  volueris : 
sin  bello  \)QY^Q(\}\i  perseverahis^  remi- 
7iiscere*  et  veteris  incommodi  populi 
Romani,  et  pristinae  virtutis  Hel- 
vetiorum.  Quod  improviso  unum 
pagum  adortus  es,  cum  ii  qui  flumen 
transierant  suis  auxilium  ferre  non 
possent,  ne  ob  earn  rem  aut  tuae 
magnopere  virtuti  tribueris  [178, 
2  (a)],  aut  nos  despexeris :  nos  ita  a 
patribus  majoribusque  nostris  didi- 
cimuSf  ut  magis  virtute  quam  dolo 
contendamus,  aut  insidiis  nitamur. 
Quare  noli  committer e  [178,  2  (&)], 
ut  is  locus  ubi  constiterimus  ex 
calamitate  populi  Romani  et  inter- 
necione  exercitus  nomen  capiat,  aut 
memoriam  prodat^ 


Indirect  Discourse. 
Divico  said  to  Caesar  (that)  :  — 
Si  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum 
Helvetiis  faceret,  in  earn  partem 
ituros  atque  ibi  futiiros  Helvetios, 
ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisset  atque 
esse  voluissict :  sin  bello  persequi 
perseveraret,  reminisceretur  et  vete- 
ris incommodi  populi  Romani,  et 
pristiuae  virtutis  Helvetiorum. 
Quod  improviso  unum  pagum  ador- 
tus essety  cum  ii  qui  flumen  transis- 
sent  suis  auxilium  ferre  non  possent, 
ne  ob  cam  rem  aut  suae  magnopere 
virtuti  tribueret,  aut  ipsos  despiceret  : 
se  ita  a  patribus  majoribusque  suis 
didicisse,  ut  magis  virtute  quam 
dolo  contenderenty  aut  insidiis  nite- 
rentur.  Quare  ne  committeret,  ut  is 
locus  ubi  constitissent  ex  calamitate 
populi  Romani  et  internecione  exer- 
citus nomen  caperet,  aut  memoriam 
proderet. 


/.  The  sentence,  The  leader  praised  the  soldier  because  he  had  fought 
bravely,  may  have  two  meanings  :  (1)  that  the  speaker  gives  the 
reason  ;  (2)  that  the  speaker  quotes  the  leader' s  i^^i^on.  The  Latin 
for  the  first  is  quod  pugnaverat ;  for  the  second,  quod  pugna- 
visset,  because  it  is  quoting  the  leader's  reason  (Subordinate 
Clause)  indirectly.  The  sentence,  The  boy  did  not  come,  because 
he  was  sick,  may  be  written  :  puer,  quod  aeger  erat,  non  venit ; 
or  puer,  quod  aeger  esset,  non  venit.  The  first  is  the  reason 
given  by  any  one;  the  second  is  the  boy's  reason  (=  as  he  said). 

SUBSTANTIVE   CLAUSES. 

188.  "A  Substantive  Clause  is  one  which,  like  a  Noun,  is  the  Subject 
or  Object  of  a  verb,  or  in  Apposition  with  the  Subject  or  Object."  (Review 
42,  a,  page  12.) 

a.  Of  course,  the  verb  of  which  a  Substantive  Clause  is  Subject  must  be 
Impersonal,  or  used  Impersonally  ;  as,  accidit  ut  luna  plena 
ftsset  J  utrum  vincat  an  vincatur,  incertum  est. 

*  Imperative. 


2.  Subjunctive  Clauses  of 


NOTES.  227 

h.  Substantive  Clauses  are,  — 
1.  Infinitive  with.  Subject  Accusative:  me  ire  oportet. 

(a.)  Purpose  (after  askj  fear,  command, 

etc.;  179,  d,  e). 
{b.)  Result    (after  happen,    effect,    doubt, 
etc. ;  181,  a,  b,  d). 

3.  Indicative  with  Quod  (the  fact  that)-,  182,  d. 

4.  Indirect  Questions ;  as  in  the  second  example  under  a  (above). 

PAETICIPLES. 

189.  A  Participle  is  a  Verbal  Adjective;  that  is,  it  agrees  with  some 
Noun  or  Pronoun  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  Participles  are  declined, 
the  Present  Active  being  in  the  Third  Declension  (one  termination),  like 
recens,  and  the  others  in  the  First  and  Second,  like  bonus. 

a.  The  names  of  the  Tenses  of  Participles  (except  of  the  Future)  give 

no  accurate  idea  of  the  time  expressed.  The  time  of  the  Present 
and  Perfect  Participles  (like  that  of  the  Present  and  Perfect  Infini- 
tive, 173)  depends  on  the  time  of  some  other  verb.  The  Present 
Participle  denotes  an  action  as  going  on,  and  the  Perfect  Participle 
as  completed,  at  the  time  of  that  verb;  as,  pugnans  (vulneratus) 
cadit  (cecidit),  he  falls  (fell)  fighting  (wounded). 

b.  A  Participle  may  be  used  as  a  Predicate  Adjective  ;  as,  Gallia  in 

tres  partes  est  divisa,  Gaul  is  divided  (in  a  divided  condition) 
into  three  parts. 

c.  The  Active  Voice  (except  in  Deponent  Verbs)  has  no  Perfect  Parti- 

ciple. Its  place  is  supplied  by  the  Ablative  Absolute  (in  which  the 
Perfect  Passive  Participle  is  used),  or  by  the  Pluperfect  Subjunc- 
tive with  quum  (when,  after,  etc. ) ;  as,  having  seen  the  city,  urbe 
visa,  or  quum  urbem  vidisset. 

d.  A  Participle  is  often  best  translated  by  a  clause  ;  as,  eum  procur- 

rentem  vulneravit,  he  wounded  him  as  he  ran  forward;  eos 
transductos  necavit,  he  carried  them  over  and  put  them  to  death. 

e.  The  Future  Active  Participle  is  most  frequently  used  with  sum  to 

form  the  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation  (82,  a) .     The  form  esse 
is  frequently  omitted  (199,  2). 
/.  The  Gerundive  (or  Future  Passive  Participle)  has  two  regular  uses  : 
(1.)  With  sum,  to  form  the  Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation  (82,  b), 
when  it  always  denotes  necessity ;  as,  urbs  delenda  est,  the  city  must  be 
destroyed;  maturandum  est,  haste  must  be  made. 
(2.)  Instead  of  the  Gerund,  as  explained  in  190,  a. 


228  NOTES. 

g.  The  Gerandive  is  also  used  as  a  Predicate  Participle ;  as,  n5n  vidS- 

tur  ferendus,  he  does  not  seem  bearable. 
h.  The  Gerundive  is  used  with  euro  (/  care  for^  provide  for)  and  some 

other  verbs  to  denote  a  Passive  Purpose  ;  as,  naves  aedificandas 

ciiravit,  he  arranged  for  the  building  of  ships. 

GERUND. 

190.  The  Gerund  is  a  Verbal  Noun  of  the  Second  Declension,  lacking 
the  Nominative  and  Vocative,  and  used  only  in  the  Singular.  The  Infini- 
tive supplies  the  place  of  its  Nominative  ;  as,  scire  est  regere,  knowledge 
is  power  (knowing  is  ruling);  bellandi  cupidi  sunt,  they  are  desirous  of 
waging  war;  facultas  regrediendi  non  datur,  an  opportunity  for  [of) 
retreating  is  not  afforded. 

a.  A  Transitive  Gerund  (that  is,  one  from  a  Transitive  Verb)  sometimes 
takes  an  Object  in  the  Accusative,  but  regularly  it  does  not.  This 
Eule  should  be  followed:  TThen  the  Gerund  would  take  a  Direct 
Object,  the  Gerundive  should  be  used  instead.  The  Noun  or  Pro- 
noun that  would  be  the  Object  takes  the  case  that  the  Gerund  would 
have,  and  the  Gerundive  agrees  with  it,  as  an  Adjective.  For  in- 
stance, tlie  hope  of  seeing  the  cities  should  not  be  written  spes 
urbes  videndi,  but  spes  urbium  videndarum :  also,  ad  pacem 
petendam  (not  petendum);  facultas  ejus  loci  relinquendi 
(Gerundive),  an  opportunity  for  (of)  leaving  that  place. 

SUPINE. 

191.  The  Supine  is  a  Verbal  Noun  of  the  Fourth  Declension,  having 
only  the  Accusative  and  Ablative  Singular. 

a.  The  Accusative  (often  called  the  Former  Supine)  is  used  after  verbs 

oi  motion,  and  denotes  ^wrjoose  (180).     If  it  is  from  a  Transitive 

Verb,  it  may  take  a  Direct  Object ;  as,  venerunt  pacem  petitum, 

they  came  to  seek  peace. 

Eemark.     The  Future  Infinitive  Passive  (as,  laudatum  iri)  is  a  pecu^ 

liar  instance  of  the  use  of  the  Supine  in  um.     The  form  iri  is  the  Passive 

Infinitive  of  e5  (I go);  so  that  dicit  nocitum  iri  means  he  says  that  harm 

is  going  to  be  done. 

b.  The  Ablative  of  the  Supine  is  an  Ablative  of  Respect,  or  Specification 

(153),  and  is  most  frequently  used  with  Adjectives  ;  as,  probat 
perficere  c5nata  perfacile  factu  esse,  he  shows  that  to  accomplish 
their  undertakings  is  {a  thing)  very  easy  to  do  (literally,  with  respect 
to  the  doing). 


NOTES.  229 


ORDER  OF  WORDS  IN  A  LATIN  SENTENCE. 

192.  No  absolute  laws  can  be  given  for  the  order  of  words  in  a  Latin 
sentence,  as  it  is  constantly  changed  to  make  one  or  more  words  emphatic. 
There  is,  however,  a  regular  arrangement,  which  is  usually  observed  in 
ordinary  prose.  This  Megular  Order  is  :  1.  The  Subject ;  2.  Modi- 
fiers of  the  Subject ;  3.  Modifiers  of  the  Verb  ;  4.  The  Verb. 

193.  A  few  rules  for  the  position  of  certain  words  are  here  given  :  — 

1.  An  Adjective^  expressing  Quality,  (if  not  emphatic)  follows  the 
word  which  it  describes  ;  but  a  Numeral  precedes. 

2.  A  Genitive  (if  not  emphatic)  follows  the  word  on  which  it  de- 
pends ;  as,  liber  pueri,  the  boy's  book.  Pueri  liber  means  the  boy's  boolz 
(and  not  the  girl's). 

3.  Direct  and  Indirect  Object,  The  Direct  Object  stands  nearer 
the  Verb  than  the  Indirect  ;  as,  puero  librum  dat. 

4.  Pronouns,  A  Demonstrative  Pronoun  precedes  its  Noun.  A 
Eelative  Pronoun  stands  first  in  its  clause,  because  it  is  a  connective.  An 
Interrogative  Pronoun  stands  first,  because,  as  an  interrogative  word,  it 
serves  to  introduce  the  sentence  or  clause  (like  nonne,  num). 

5.  An  Adverbial  element  (Adverb,  Ablative,  Phrase)  regularly  stands 
immediately  before  the  word  which  it  modifies. 

Caution.  Ne  —  quidem,  not  even,  must  have  the  emphatic  word  be- 
tween them ;  as,  ne  Caesar  quidem,  not  Caesar  even, 

6.  Est,  sunt,  etc.  {there  is,  there  are),  often  stand  first. 

Caution.  Inquit,  quoth  he,  must  follow  one  or  more  words  of  the 
quotation. 

7.  A  Preposition  very  frequently  stands  between  its  noun  and  the 
adjective  modifying  the  noun  ;  as,  magn5  in  periculo  ;  omnibus  cum 
copiis. 

8.  In  the  order  of  Personal  Pronouns,  the  Latin  is  the  reverse  of  the 
English;  as,  ego-et  tu,  you  and  I;  ego  et  Caesar,  Caesar  and  I, 

ANALYSIS  OF  SENTENCES. 

194.  Sections  34  to  44,  pages  9-13,  should  be  carefully  studied.  The 
same  general  principles  apply  to  the  analysis  of  both  English  and  Latin 
sentences.  They  are  here  stated  in  brief  form  :  (1.)  Tell  whether  it  is 
Simple,  Compound,  or  Complex. 

a.  Simple  Sentence.  (2.)  Tell  whether  it  is  Declaratory,  Inter- 
rogative, Imperative,  or  Exclamatory.  (3.)  Tell  its  Subject  and 
Predicate.  (4.)  Name  the  modifiers  of  the  Subject  (if  there  are 
any).  (5.)  Name  the  modifiers  of  the  Verb  (if  there  are  any),  and 
tell  what  each  expresses,  —  manner ^  cause,  etc. 


230  '  NOTES. 

b.  Compound  Sentence,    Analyze  each  Clause  as  a  Simple  Sen- 

tence, and  name  the  Connective,  if  one  is  expressed. 

c.  Complex  Sentence,     Analyze  the  Principal  Clause  as  a  Simple 

Sentence.  Name  the  Subordinate  Clauses  ;  tell  what  each  modi- 
fies, and  why;  analyze  each  as  a  Simple  Sentence,  naming  its 
Connective. 

GENERAL  FACTS  AND   USEFUL  HINTS. 

195.  1.  Two  negatives  equal  an  afl&rmative  ;  as,  nulli,  none;  nonnulli, 
some;  nunquam,  never;  nonnunquam,  sometimes. 

2.  Ne  quidem,  not  even,  always  have  the  emphatic  word  between 
them ;  as,  ne  equites  quidem,  not  the  horsemen  even. 

3.  An  Enclitic  is  a  word  which  is  always  attached  to  another.  The 
word  means  leaning  on,  as  though  Enclitics  were  too  weak  to  stand  alone. 
The  most  common  Enclitics  are  -que  (and),  -ne  (asking  a  question),  and 
cum  (with)  when  used  with  Personal,  Reflexive,  Relative,  and  Interroga- 
tive Pronouns.  As  an  illustration  of  the  weakness  of  -que,  compare  the- 
English  bread  *n'  milk,  horse  'n'  carriage  (as  those  expressions  are  some- 
times hastily  pronounced). 

4.  When  an  Enclitic  is  added  to  a  word,  the  acce7it  is  placed  on  the 
syllable  before  the  Enclitic;  as,  itine'ribus,but  itineribus^que;  Ci'cero, 
but  Cicero'ne  (as.  Cicerone  valet?  is  Cicero  well?). 

5.  Itaque  may  be  a  Conjunction  meaning  therefore  (i^taque),  or  ita 
-f-  que,  meaning  and  so  (ita'que).  In  the  former  sense  it  stands  at  the 
beginning  of  a  sentence  ;  in  the  latter,  the  que  connects  the  clauses  of  a 
sentence. 

6.  Two  Adjectives  (not  Numerals)  modifying  a  noun  are  regularly  con- 
nected by  et  or  que ;  as,  urbes  multae  et  magnae,  ma7iy  great  cities. 

7.  Quis  =  ?x-^o?  (of  several).  XJter  =  which  one?  (of  two).  Alius 
=  another  (of  several).  Alter  =  the  other  (of  two).  Alienus  =  another's; 
as,  servus  alienus,  another's  slave. 

8.  Words  used  in  pairs  .£ire  called  Correlatives  (because  they  relate  to 
each  other). 

Usually,  the  first  has  a  Demonstrative  idea,  the  second,  a  Relative  force. 
The  most  common  Correlatives  are  :  — 

alius  —  alius,  one  —  another.  e5  —  qu3,  thither  —  whither. 

alii  —  alii,  some  —  others.  et  —  et,  both  —  and. 

alter  —  alter,  the  one  —  the  other.  ibi  —  ubi,  there  —  where. 

alter!  —  alteri,  the  one  party  —  the       inde  —  unde,  thence  —  wheTice. 

other  party.  is  —  qui,  lie  —  who. 

aut  —  aut,  eith£r  —  or. 


.     NOTES.  231 

neque  (nee) — neque  (nee),  neither  talis  —  qualis,  such  —  as. 

—  no7\  tametsi  —  tamen,  although  —  yet, 
non  solum  —  sed  etiam,  not  only  tantus  —  quantus,  as  great  —  as, 

—  hut  also.  tot  —  quot,  as  many  —  as. 
quum  —  turn,  not  only  —  hut  also.  turn  —  quum,  at  that  time  —  when. 
quum  —  tamen,  although  —  yet.  vel  —  vel,  either  —  or. 

9.  Alius  has  a  peculiar  use.  To  express  these  sentences  :  some  did 
one  thing,  and  some  another ;  one  was  running  from  one  shi]?,  another 
from  another,  it  would  seem,  right  (in  view  of  8,  above)  to  say,  alii  aliud 
fecerunt,  alii  aliud ;  alius  alia  ex  navi  currebat,  alius  ex  alia.  This, 
however,  would  be  merely  repeating  the  same  words,  and  therefore  the 
Latins  simply  said,  alii  aliud  fecerunt;  alius  alia  ex  navi  currebat. 
Also,  alius  alii  auxilium  tulerunt,  they  hore  aid  to  one  another  {one  to 
another). 

196.  "When  shall  I  use  Quin,  and  when  Quominus?"  A  good 
authority  says  ;  "The  use  of  quominus  springs  from  the  courtesy  of  the 
Latin  language.  It  is  more  polite  to  say,  *  I  will  hinder  you  so  that  you 
shall  the  less  do  what  you  wish,'  than  to  say,  *  so  that  you  shall  not  (quin) 
do  it.'  So  after  reciis5  the  refusal  is  less  point  blank  with  quSminus 
than  with  quin." 

197.  1.  Impero  takes  the  Dative  ;  jubeo,  the  Accusative. 

2.  Licet  takes  the  Dative  of  Advantage  ;  oportet,  the  Accusative. 

3.  May  (meaning  permission),  can,  must,  might  (meaning  per- 
mission), could,  should  (meaning  duty),  are  not  signs  of  the  Subjunctive, 
but  require  separate  verbs.  May  and  might  require  the  proper  tense 
of  licet ;  can  and  could  require  possum  ;  must,  ought,  should,  re- 
quire oportet  or  the  Gerundive. 

4.  Ne  may  be  an  Adverb  ;  as,  ne  eamus,  let  us  not  go.  Ne  may  be  a 
Conjunction  ;  as,  vereor  ne  veniat,  I  fear  that  he  will  come  (lest  he  may 
come).  N6  is  an  Interrogative  word,  always  Enclitic;  as,  audivitne  ? 
did  he  hear  ? 

5.  Ut  (meaning  as)  takes  the  Indicative,  forming  with  it  a  parentheti- 
cal clause  ;  as,  ut  aiunt,  as  they  say. 

6.  The  Relative  Qui  may  be  equivalent  to 

Ut  is,  ego,  etc.,  expressing  Purpose  (179,  a). 
Ut  is,  ego,  etc.,  expressing  Result  (181,  c). 
Quum  is,  ego,  etc.,  expressing  Cause  (182,  c). 
Quum  is,  ego,  etc.,  expressing  Concession  (183,  h). 

7.  Quum  (cum)  meaning 

When,  takes  the  Subjunctive  in  WiQ  Imperfect  diXidi  Pluperfe&t  \Q\i%Q%  \ 
but  the  Indicative  in  the  other  tenses. 


232  NOTES. 

Since,  takes  the  Subjunctive  in  all  tenses. 

Although^  takes  the  Subjunctive  in  all  tenses. 

8.  Jubeo,  /  order;  veto,  I  forbid;  cog5,  /  corrtfel ;  patior,  I  allow, 
are  regularly  followed  by  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive,  and  not  by  ut  and 
the  Subjunctive. 

198.  These  forms,  as  well  as  others  from  the  same  Verbs,  are  often  used 
Impersonally  :  — 

ipMgTidXuT,  fighting  is  carried  on;  nocetur,  haryn  is  done;  non  ex- 
spectandum  est,  no  delay  must  he  made  ;  quaeritur,  the  question  is  asked  ; 
cogitandum  est,  thought  must  he  taken;  imperatum  est,  the  order  was 
given  ;  maturandum  est,  haste  must  he  made ;  ad  arma  concurritur,  a 
general  (con)  rush  to  arms  is  made;  parendum  est,  obedience  must  be 
rendered ;  prospiciendum  est,  provision  mtcst  be  made  (rei  frumenta- 
liae,  for  the  corn  supply);  praecavendum  est,  care  (precaution)  must  he 
taken;  his  rebus  occurrendum  (esse)  existimavit,  he  thought  that  a 
rem.edy  must  he  found  for  these  things;  parcitur  hostibus,  quarter  is 
given  to  the  enemy ;  legibus  utendum  est,  use  must  he  made  of  the  laws. 

199.  1.  Dubito  takes 

The  Infinitive,  when  it  means  hesitate, 
Dubito  and  dubius  take 

The  Subjunctive  with  quin,  when  mea»ing  doubt  (or  doubtful)  that. 
The  Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Question;  as,  dubitat  utrum  hoc  facile  an 
difficile  sit. 

2.  Esse  is  very  often  omitted,  especially  with  the  Future  Participles, 
This  should  never  cause  any  difficulty,  as  the  Infinitive  will  always  be 
required  by  a  word  of  saying,  thinking,  etc. ;  as,  Caesar  se  castra  rnStQ- 
rum  (esse)  dixit;  exspectandum  (esse)  non  existimavit,  he  did  not 
think  that  any  delay  should  he  made. 

3.  Remember  that  not  only  verbs,  but  words  and  phrases,  of  saying, 
thinking,  etc.,  require  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive  ;  as,  fama  erat,  eum 
interfectum  esse ;  habeo  spem  maximam  hostes  pacem  facturSs 
(esse) ;  Caesarem  certiorem  facio  me  venisse. 

4.  Case  of  the  Person  after  Verbs  of  asking :  — 

Rogo  takes  the  Accusative  ;  peto,  postulo,  the  Ablative  with  a  (ab) ; 
quaerS,  the  Ablative  with  a  (ab),  de,  or  e  (ex). 

5.  To  express  I  say  —  not,  use  nego  rather  than  dic5  non;  as,  negat 
se  venire  posse,  he  says  that  he  canH  come. 

HINTS  ON  TRANSLATION. 

200.  The  beginner  will  notice,  of  course,  that  the  order  of  words  in  a 
Latin  sentence  is  often  very  different  from  the  order  of  words  in  the  same 


NOTES.  233 

sentence  when  expressed  in  English.  For  example,  in  this  sentence,  Apud 
Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  et  ditissimus  fuit  Orgetorix,  Among  the 
Helvetii  hy  far  the  noblest  and  richest  (man)  was  Orgetorix,  the  subject 
stands  last ;  yet  the  sentence  makes  perfectly  good  sense  when  read  exactly 
in  the  order  of  the  Latin  words. 

In  every  Latin  sentence  the  same  method  of  translation  should  he 
observed,  as  nearly  as  possible.  It  will  often  be  necessary,  after  the 
general  meaning  of  a  sentence  has  been  found,  to  change  the  order  of 
certain  words  to  secure  a  better  English  order  ;  but  the  pupil  who  has 
mastered  the  idea,  in  just  the  order  of  words  that  the  Latin  presents,  will 
find  no  difficulty  in  giving  the  sentence  a  more  natural  English  order. 

To  the  Teacher,  A  good  example  for  practice  is  the  sentence  on 
page  139,  lines  25-29.  If  the  teacher  will  read  with  the  class  several  such 
sentences  each  day,  even  before  the  class  has  mastered  the  meaning  and 
forms  of  all  the  words  contained  in  those  sentences,  the  pupils  will  very 
soon  be  able  to  **hold  the  sentence  in  suspense"  until  the  whole  has  been 
read  and  the  entire  thought  developed. 


APPE:tTDIX. 

FOEMS  OF  DEOLEITSIOlf,  OONJUGATIOU,  ETC. 

The  References  are  to  the  Notes,  in  which  Principles  and  Exceptions  are 
more  fully  stated. 


NOUNS. 
1.  First  Declension  (N.  9):  Stem-Vowel,  A. 


Singular. 

Nominative,  silva,  a  {the)  forest. 

Genitive.  silvae,  of  a  forest. 

Dative.  silvae,  to  {for)  a  forest. 

Accusative.  silvam,  a  forest. 

Vocative.  silva,  0 forest! 

Ablative.  silva,  with  {by,  etc.)  a  forest. 


Plural. 

silvae,  ybres^5. 

sil  varum,  of  forests. 

silvis,  to  {for)  forests. 

8ilv3i,s,  forests. 

silvae,  0 forests! 

silvis,  with  {by,  etc.)  forests. 


a.  For  the  Declension  of  Dea  and  Filia,  see  N.  9,  e. 

2.  Second  Declension  (N.  10):  Stem- Vowel,  O. 

Singular,  slave  (m.)  boy  (m.)  feld  (m.)  man  (m.) 

NoM.  servus  puer  ager  vir 

Gen.  servi  puerl  agri  viri 

Dat.  servo  puero  agro  viro 

Ace.  servum  puerum  agrum  virum 

Voc.  serve  puer  ager  vir 

Abl.  servo  puero  agro  viro 

Plural. 

NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

a.  For  the 
N.  10,  d.      " 

b.  For  the 


servi 


pueri 


servorum   puerorum 


servis 
servos 
servi 
servis 


pueris 
pueros 
pueri 
pueris 


agri 

agrorum 

agris 

agros 

agri 

agris 


viri 

virorum 

viris 

viros 

viri 

viris 


gift  (N.) 

donum 

doni 

dono 

donum 

donum 

dono 

dona 

dSnorum 

donis 

dona 

dona 

donis 


Declension  of  Filius  and  Proper  Names  in  ius  (as,  Cassius),  see 
Declension  of  Deus,  see  N.  10, y. 


236 


APPENDIX. 


3.  Third  Declension;  I.  (N.  15,  a,  b)  Stem  ending  in  a  Consonant 


{Mute). 

Singular.    Icing  (m.) 

NoM.  rex 

Gen.  regis 

Dat.  regi 

Ace.  regem 

Voc.  rex 

Abl.  rege 

Plural. 

N.,  Acc.jV.  reges 
Gen.  regum 

Dat.,  Abl.  regibus 


judge  (m.) 

judex 

judicis 

judici 

judicem 

judex 

judice 


soldier  {m.)  manhood  (f.)  head  (n.) 


miles 

militis 

militi 

militem 

miles 

milite 


virtus 

virtutis 

virtuti 

virtutem 

virtus 

virtute 


caput 

capitis 

capiti 

caput 

caput 

capite 


judices        milites        virtutes        capita 
judicum      militum       virtutum      capitum 
judicibus    militibus     virtutibus    capitibus 


4.  Third  Declension:  II.  (N.  15, a,  b)  Stem  ending  in  a  Consonant 

(Liquid). 


Singular. 

consul  (m.) 

sister  (f.  ) 

maiden  (f.) 

name  (n.) 

body  (n.) 

NOM. 

consul 

soror 

Virgo 

nomen 

corpus 

Gen. 

consulis 

sororis 

virginis 

nominis 

corporis 

Dat. 

consul! 

sorori 

virgini 

nomini 

corpori 

ACG. 

consulem 

sororem 

virginem 

nomen 

corpus 

Voc. 

consul 

soror 

Virgo 

nomen 

corpus 

Abl. 

consule 

sorore 

virgine 

nomine 

corpore 

Plural. 

N.,Acc.,V. 

consules 

sorores 

virgines 

nomina 

corpora 

Gen. 

consulum 

sororum 

virginum 

nominum 

corporum 

Dat;,  Abl. 

consulibus 

sororibus 

virginibus  nominibus 

corporibus 

Remark.     Pater,  Mater,  Frater  (Genitives,  Patris,  Matris,  Fra- 
tris)  do  not  increase  in  the  Genitive  (N.  15, Remark). 

5.  Third  Declension:  III.  (N.  16,  17)  Stem  ending  in  a  Vowel  (I). 


Singular 

.    tower  (f.) 

cloud  (f.) 

sea  (n.) 

animal  (n.) 

spur  (n.) 

Nom. 

turris 

niibes 

mare 

animal 

calcar 

Gen. 

turris 

nubis 

maris 

animalis 

calcaris 

Dat. 

turri 

niibi 

mari 

animali 

calcari 

Ace. 

turrem  (im 

)  niibem 

mare 

animal 

calcar 

\^oe. 

turris 

niibes 

mare 

animal 

calcar 

Abl. 

turre  (i) 

nube 

mari 

animali 

calcari 

Plural. 

NOM. 

turres 

nubes 

maria 

animalia 

calcaria 

Gen. 

turrium 

niibium 

marium 

animalium 

calcarium 

Dat. 

turribus 

niibibus 

maribus 

animalibus 

calcaribus 

Ace. 

turres  (is) 

nubes(is) 

maria 

animalia 

calcaria 

Voc. 

turres 

niibes 

maria 

animalia 

calcaria 

Abl. 

turribus 

niibibus 

maribus 

animalibus 

calcaribus 

APPENDIX. 


237 


6.  Third  Declension:    IV.  (N.  18)  Stem  ending  in  a  Consonant 
(Singular)  and  a  Vowel  (Plural). 

Singular,  city  (f.)    mountain  (m.)   night  (f.) 


Stem. 

NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

Plural. 

Stem, 

NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


(urb-) 

urbs 

urbis 

urbi 

urbem 

urbs 

urbe 


(mont-) 

mons 

montis 

monti 

montem 

mons 

monte 


(noct-) 

nox 

noctis 

nocti 

noctem 

nox 

nocte 


cohort  (f.) 

(cohort-) 

cohors 

cohortis 

cohort! 

cohortem 

cohors 

cohorte 


client  (c.) 

(client-) 

cliens 

clientis 

client! 

clientem 

cliens 

cliente 


(urbi-)  (monti-)  (nocti-)  (cohorti-)  (clienti-) 

urbes  montes  noctes  cohortes  elientes 

urbium  montium  noctium  cohortium  clientium 

urbibus  montibus  noctibus  cohortibus  clientibus 

urb§s  (is)  montes  (is)  noctes  (is)  cohortes  (is)  elientes  (is) 

urbes  montes  noctes  cohortes  elientes 

urbibus  montibus  noctibus  cohortibus  clientibus 


7.  Third  Declension;  Irregular  Forms, 
Singular,  old  man  (m.)     force  (f.) 

NoM.  senex 

Gen.  senis 

Dat.  sen! 

Ace.  senem 

Voc.  senex 

Abl.  sene 

Plural. 

N.,  Ace,  V.  senes 

Gen.  senum 

Dat.,  Abl.  senibus 

8.  Fourth  Declension  (N.  20):   Stem- Vowel,  U. 

,      Singular.  Plural.  Singular. 


orce  (f.) 

ox^  cow  (c.) 

Jupiter  (m.) 

vis 

bos 

Jiipiter 

vis 

bo  vis 

Jovis 

.  •  • 

bovi 

Jovi 

vim 

bovem 

Jovem 

vis 

bos 

Jiipiter 

vi 

bove 

Jove 

vires 

boves 

virium 

boum 

viribus 

bobus  (biibus) 

Plural. 


chariot  (m.) 

horn  (n.) 

NOM. 

currus 

currus 

cornu 

cornua 

Gen. 

curriis 

curruum 

cornus 

cornuum 

Dat. 

currui 

curribus 

cornti 

cornibus 

Ace. 

currum 

currus 

cornii 

cornua 

Voc. 

currus 

curriis 

cornii 

cornua 

Abl. 

curru 

curribus 

cornu 

cornibus 

238 


APPENDIX. 


a.  Domus,  house,  home  (N.  21,  6),  belongs  to  the  Second  and  Fourth  De- 


clensions. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

NoM.              domus 

domiis 

Gen.               domus  (domi*) 

domuum  (domorum) 

DAT.               domui  (domo) 

domibus 

Ace.               domum 

domos  (domus) 

Voc.               domus 

domiis 

Abl.  ,            domo  (domu) 

domibus 

9.  Fifth  Declension  (N.  22) : 

;  Stem- Vowel,  E. 

Sing,  day  (m.)      Plur. 

Sing,  thing  (f.)        Plur. 

faith  (f.) 

NoM.       dies              dies 

res 

res 

fides 

Gen.        diei              dierum 

rgi  (N. 

22,  d)  rerum 

fidgi 

DAT.        diei               diebus 

r6i 

rebus 

fidgi 

Ace.        diem            dies 

rem 

res 

fidem 

Voc.        dies              dies 

res 

res 

fides 

Abl.        diS                diebus 

re 

rebus 

fide 

ADJECTIVES. 


10.  First  and  Second  Declensions  (N.  24,  a):  US. 


Magnus,  great. 

Singular. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

NoM. 

magnus 

magna 

magnum 

Gen. 

magni 

magnae 

magni 

DAT. 

magno 

magnae 

magno 

Ace. 

magnum 

magnam 

magnum 

Voc. 

magne 

magna 

magnum 

Abl. 

magno 

magna 

magno 

Plural. 

NOM. 

magni 

magnae 

magna 

Gen. 

magnorum 

magnarum 

magnorum 

DAT. 

magnis 

magnis 

magnis 

Ace. 

magnos 

magnas 

magna 

Voc. 

magni 

magnae 

magna 

Abl. 

magnis 

magnis 

magnis 

a.  First 

and  Second  Declensions:  EB. 

Liber,. /Vee. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.    liber 

libera 

liberum 

Hberi 

liberae          Ubera 

G.    Kberi 

liberae 

Hberi 

liberorum 

Hberarum    Kberorum 

D.    libero 

liberae 

libero 

liberis 

Hberis 

Hberis 

Ac.  liberum    liberam 

liberum 

liberos 

Hberas 

\          Hbera 

V.    Kber 

libera 

liberum 

Hberi 

Hberae          Hbera 

Ab.  libero 

Hbera 

libero 

Uberis 

Hberis 

Hberia 

*  Really  the  Locative  Case  (N.  159,  c). 


APPENDIX. 


239 


Niger,  hhch. 
Singular. 

M.  F.  N. 

NoM.  niger       nigra  nigrum 

Gen.  nigri       nigrae  nigri 

Dat.  nigro      nigrae  nigro 

Ace.  nigrum  nigram  nigrum 

Voc.  niger       nigra  nigrum 

Abl.  nigro      nigra  nigro 


Plural. 

M.  F.  N. 

nigri  nigrae  nigra 

nigrorum  nigrarum  nigrorum 

nigris  nigris  nigris 

nigros         nigras  nigra 

nigri  nigrae  nigra 

nigris  nigris  nigris 


11.  First  and  Second  Declensions  :  Genitive  in  lUS,  Dative  in 
i.    For  the  entire  list  of  these  Adjectives  {with  English  meanings)^  see  N.  43,  6. 
The  declension  of  the  Singular  of  unus,  alius,  uter,  and  alter  is  her* 
given*     The  Plural  endings  are  like  those  of  bonus. 


M. 

NoM.   iinus 
Gen.    unius 
Dat.    uni 
Ace.    unum 
Abl.    uno 

M. 

NoM.  alius 

Gen.  alius 

Dat.  alii 

Ace.  alium 

Abl.  alio 


F. 

una 

iinius 

uni 

linam 

iina 

F. 

alia 

alius 

alii 

aliam 

alia 


n. 
iinum 
unius 
uni 
unum 
tino 

N. 

aliud 

alius 

alii 

aliud 

alio 


M. 

F. 

N. 

uter 

utra 

utrum 

utrius 

utrius 

utrius 

utri 

utri 

utri 

utrum 

utram 

utrum 

utro 

utra 

utro 

M.  F.  N. 

alter  altera  -  alterum 

alterius  alterius  alterius 

alteri  alteri  alter! 

alterum  alteram  alterum 

alters  altera  altero 


12.  Third  Declension; 


M. 

NoM.  acer 

Gen.  acris 

Dat.  acri 

Acc.  acrem 

Voc.  acer 

Abl.  acri 


Singular. 

F. 

acris 

acris 

acri 

acrem 

acris 

acri 


Three  Endings:  ER  (N.  25,  a;  26,  a). 
Acer,  sharp. 


N. 

acre 

acris 

acri 

acre 

acre 

acri 


Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

acribus      acribus      acribus 
acres  (is)  acres  (is)  acria 
acres  acres  acria 

acribus     acribus      acribus 


13.  Third  Declension:  Two  Endings:*  18(^.25,5;  26,6). 
Fortis,  brave. 


Singular. 


NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


M.  and  F. 
fortis 
fortis 
forti 
fortem 
fortis 
forti 


N. 

forte 

fortis 

forti 

forte 

forte 

forti 


Plural. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

fortes 

fortia 

fortium 

fortium 

fortibus 

fortibus 

fortes  (is) 

fortia 

fortes 

fortia 

fortibus 

fortibus 

*  The  Declension  of  Comparatives  is  given  in  15. 


240 


APPENDIX. 


14.  Third  Declension:  One  Ending  (N.  25,  c;  26,  c). 


NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


Singular. 

M.  and  F.  N. 

audax  {hold)    audax 


audacis 
audaci 
audacem 
audax 
audace  (i) 


audacis 
audaci 
audax 
audax 
audace  (i) 


Plural. 

M.  and  F. 
audaces 
audacium 
audacibus 
audaces  (is) 
audaces 
audacibus 


N. 

audacia 

audacium 

audacibus 

audacia 

audacia 

audacibus 


Recens,  recent, 

recens  recens  recentes  recentia 

recentis  recentis  recentium  recentium 

recenti  recenti  recentibus  recentibus 

recentem        recens  recentes  (is)  recentia 

recens  recens  recentes  recentia 

recentibus  recentibus 


recente  (I)       recente  (i) 


In  the  following  Adjectives  (one  ending)  only  the  Nominative  and 
Genitive,  Singular  and  Plural,  are  given  to  show  the  general  form 
of  declension :  — 


Sing.  M.  and  f.  n. 
NoM..  par  {equal)  par 
Gen.    paris  paris 

(Abl.  pari) 


M.  and  f.         n. 
dives  {rich)  dives 
divitis         divitis 


M.  and  f.  n. 

vetus  {old)  vetus 
veteris        veteris 


Plural. 

NoM.   pares 

paria 

divites 

(ditia) 

veteres 

Vetera 

Gen.    parium 

parium 

divitum 

divitum 

veterum 

veterum 

Singular,    m.  and  f.  n. 

NoM.     praeceps  {headlong)  praeceps 

Gen.      praecipitis  praecipitis 

Plural. 


M.  and  F.  N. 

iens  {going)   iens 
euntis  euntis 


NOM. 

praeclpites                praecipitia 

euntes           euntia 

Gen. 

praecipitium              praecipitium             euntium       euntium 

15. 

Comparatives  have  Two  Endings, 

and  are  thus  declined:  — 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M.  and  F.               N. 

M.  and  F.                   N. 

NOM. 

fortior             fortius 

fortiores           fortiora 

Gen. 

fortioris          fortioris 

fortiorum         fortiorum 

DAT. 

fortiori            fortiori 

fortioribus       fortioribus 

Ace. 

fortiorem       fortius 

fortiores  (is)    fortiora 

Voc. 

fortior             fortius 

fortiores           fortiora 

Abl. 

fortiore  (i)     fortiore  (i) 

fortioribus       fortioribus 

APPENDIX.  241 

a.  Pliis  (N.  27)  is  a  Neuter  Noun  in  the  Singular,  and  an  Adjective  in  thi 

Plural. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Neuter.  m.  and  f.  n. 

NoM.  plus  plures  plura 

Gen.  pluris  plurium  pltirium 

Dat.  loanting  pluribus  pluribus 

Ace.  plus  plures  (is)  plura 

Abl.  plure  pluribus  pluribus 

COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

16.  Regular  Comparison.     (See  N.  30.) 

The  following  classes  of  Adjectives  are  somewhat  Irregular  in  Comparison* 

a.  Adjectives  ending  in  er.    (See  N.  31,  a.) 

b.  Six  Adjectives  in  lis.     (See  N.  31,  6.) 

c.  Adjectives  ending  in  dicus,  ficus,  and  volus.    (See  N.  32.) 

17.  Irregular  and  Defective  Comparison.     (See  N.  33.) 

a.  bonus,  melior,  optimus,  good,  better,  best. 
malus,  pejor,  pessimus,  bad,  worse,  worst. 
magnus,  major,  maximus,  great,  greater,  greatest, 
parvus,  minor,  minimus,  little,  less,  least. 

multus, — ,  plurimus,  much,  most  (Masculine). 

multa, ,  pliirima,  much,  most  (Feminine). 

multum,  pliis  (App.  15,  a.),  pliirimum,  much,  more,  most  (Neuter). 
multl,  plures,  plurimi,  many,  more,  most. 

b.  These  Adjectives  have  no  Positive  (see  N.  34) ;   they  are  derived  from 
Prepositions :  — 

PREP.  PCS.  COMP.  SUP. 

(cis,  citra),  citerior,  citimus,  hither,  hithermost. 

(in,  intra),  interior,  intimus,  inner,  innermost  (inmost). 

(prae,  pro),  prior,  primus, /b?'mer,j^?'s^ 

(prope),  propior,  proximus,  nearer,  nearest  (next). 

(ultra),  ulterior,  ultiTnus,  farther,  farthest. 

c.  These  are  also  derived  from  Prepositions  (N.  35) ;  the  Positive  is  generally 
used  as  a  Noun :  — 

PCS.  COMP.  SUP. 

exterus,  exterior,  extremus  (or  extimus)  outer,  outermost. 

inferus,  inferior,  infimus  (or  imus),  lower,  lowest. 

posterus,  posterior,  postremus  (or  postumus),  hinder  (later),  last 

superus,  superior,  supremus  (or  summus),  higher,  highest. 

d.  For  the  Comparison  of  dives,  juvenis,  senex,  see  N.  36,  a,  b. 

e.  For  Comparison  by  magis  and  maxime,  see  N.  37. 

18.  For  the  Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs,  see  N.  38,  39. 

16 


242 


APPENDIX. 


19.  The  Numeral  Adjectives  (N.  41)  and  Adverbs  (N.  44)  are:  — 


Cardinal, 

Ordinal, 

answering  the  question, 

which  in  order  ? 

Distributive, 

Adverbs, 

answering  the 
question, 

answering  the 
question. 

answering  the 
question, 

Jww  many  ? 

how  many  each  ? 

how  often  ? 

1 

unus,  a,  um 

primus,  a,  um 

singuli,  one  by 

semel,  once. 

2 

duo,  ae,  o 

secundus  or  alter 

bini              [one. 

bis 

3 

tres,  tria 

tertius 

terni  or  trini 

ter 

4 

quattuor 

quartus 

quaterni 

quater 

5 

quinque 

quintus 

quinT 

quinquies 

6 

sex 

sextus 

seni 

sexies 

7 

septem 

Septimus 

septeni 

septies 

8 

octo 

octavus 

octoni 

octies 

9 

novem 

nonus 

noveni 

novies 

10 

decern 

decimus 

deni 

decies 

11 

undecim 

undecimus 

undeni 

undecies 

12 

duodecim 

duodecimus 

duodeni 

duodecies 

13 

tredecim 

tertius  decimus 

terni  deni 

tredecies 

14 

quattuordecim 

quartus  decimus 

quaterni  deni 

quattuordecies 

15 

quindecim 

quintus  decimus 

quini  deni 

quindecies 

16 

sedecim 

sextus  decimus 

seni  deni 

sedecies 

17 

septendecim 

Septimus  decimus 

septeni  deni 

septies  decies 

18 

duodeviginti 

(octodecim) 

duodevicesimus 

duodeviceni 

duodevicies 

19 

undeviginti 

(novendecim) 

undevicesimus 

undeviceni 

undevicies 

20 

viginti 

vicesimus 

viceni 

vicies 

21 

unus  et  viginti 

(viginti  unus) 

vicesimus  primus 

viceni  singuli 

semel  et  vicies 

30 

triginta 

tricesimus 

triceni 

tricies 

40 

quadraginta 

quadragesimus 

quadrageni 

quadragies 

60 

quinquaginta 

quinquagesimus 

quinquageni 

quinquagies 

60 

sexaginta 

sexagesimus 

sexageni 

sexagies 

70 

septuaginta 

septuagesimus 

septuageni 

septuagies 

80 

octoginta 

octogesimus 

octogeni 

octogies 

90 

nonaginta 

nonage  simus 

nonageni 

nonagies 

100 

centum 

centesimus 

centeni 

centies 

101 

centum  et  unus 

centesimus  primus 

centeni  singuli 

centies  semel 

200 

ducenti,  ae,  a 

ducente  simus 

duceni 

ducenties 

300 

trecenti 

trecentesimus 

treceni 

trecenties 

400 

quadringenti 

quadringente  simus 

quadringeni 

quadringenties 

500 

quingenti 

quingentesimus 

quingeni 

quingenties 

600 

sexcenti 

sexcentesimus 

sesceni 

sexcenties 

700 

septingenti 

septingentesimus 

septingeni 

septingenties 

800 

octingenti 

octingentesimus 

octingeni 

octingenties 

900 

nongenti 

nongentesimus 

nongeni 

nongenties 

1000 

miUe 

millesimus 

singula  millia 

millies 

2000 

duo  millia 

bis  millesimus 

bina  millia 

bis  miUies 

APPENDIX. 


243 


20.   Numeral  Adjectives.     The  following  require  special  notice  :  — 
a.  Unus  is  declined  in  11,  a,  of  the  Appendix. 
h.  Duo  and  tres  *  are  thus  declined:  — 


M. 

F. 

N. 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

N,V. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

tres 

tria 

Gen. 

duorum 

duarum 

duorum 

trium 

trium 

DAT. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribuB 

Ace. 

duos  (duo) 

duas 

duo 

tres  (tris) 

tria 

Abl. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribus 

c.  Mille  (N.  43,  e)  is  indeclinable,  as  an  Adjective;  as  a  Noun  {Neuter)  it 
has,  in  the  Singular,  Nom.  mille  ;  Ace.  mille.  In  the  Plural  it  is  declined 
like  the  Plural  of  mare,  thus:  Nom.  millia  j  Gen.  miUium,  etc. 

PRONOuisrs. 

21.  The  Personal  Pronouns f  (N.  46)  are  thus  declined:  — 

First  Person.  Second  Person. 

N.    ego,  /.  nos,  we,  tu,  thou,  vos,  ye  or  you. 

G.    mei,  of  me.  nostrum  (til),  o/ws.  tui  vestrum  (vestri) 

D.    mihi,  to  (for)  me.         nobis,  to  (for)  us.  tibi  vobis 

Ac.  me,  me.  nos,  us.  te  vos 

V.    wanting.  wanting.  tu  vos  ^ 

Ab.  me,  by  (from,  with)  me.  nohia,  by  (etc.)  us.  te  vobis 

22.  The  Reflexive  Pronouns  of  the  First  and  Second  Persons  are 

described  in  N.  47. 

The  Reflexive  Pronoun  of  the  Third  Person  is  declined  alike  in  both 
numbers :  — 

Gen.      sui,  of  himself,  herself  itself,  themselves. 

Dat.      sibi,  to  (or for)  himself,  herself  etc. 

Ace.      se  or  sese,  himself  herself  etc. 

Abl.      se  or  sese,  by  {from,  with)  himself  herself  etc. 

23.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  declined  like  magnus  and  niger 
(see  N.  48).     Meus  has  mi  in  the  Vocative  Singular  Masculine. 

24.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  (N.  49)  are  thus  declined :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

NoM. 

hie 

haec 

hoc,  this. 

hi 

hae 

haec,  these. 

Gen. 

hujus 

hujus 

hujus 

horum 

harum 

horum 

Dat. 

huic 

huic 

huic 

his 

his 

his 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

hos 

has 

haec 

Abl. 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his 

his 

his 

Nom. 

is 

ea 

id,  that. 

ii  (ei) 

eae 

ea,  those. 

Gen. 

ejus 

ejus 

ejus 

eorum 

earum 

eorum 

Dat. 

ei 

ei 

ei 

iis  (eis) 

iis  (eis) 

iis  (eis) 

Ace. 

eum 

eam 

id 

eos 

eas 

ea 

Abl. 

eo 

ea 

eo 

iis  (eis) 

iis  (eis) 

iis  (eis) 

*  Declined  like  the  Plural  of  fortis. 

t  How  is 

the  lack  of 

a  Third  Personal  Pronoun 

I  supplied  V 

(N.  46.) 

APPENDIX. 

Singular. 

Singular. 

M. 

F.                N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

me* 

iUa         iUud,  that. 

ipse* 

ipsa 

ipsum, 

self. 

illius 

illius     illius 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsius 

illi 

illi          iUi 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsi 

iUum 

iUam     iUud 

ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

iUo 

iUa         iUo 

ipso 

ipsa 

ips5 

244 


NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 
Abl. 

Iste,  ista,  istud,  that  {near  you),  is  declined  like  ille. 

idem,  the  same. 
Singular.  Plural. 

M.  F.  N.  M.  F.  N. 

NoM.  Idem         eadem      idem  iidem  (ei-)  eaedem       eadem 

Gen.  ejusdem  ejusdem  ejusdem  eorundem  earundem  eorundem 
Dat.  eidem       eidem       eidem  iisdem  or  eisdem 

Ace.  eundem   eandem    idem  eosdem        easdem       eadem 
Abl.  eodem      eadem      eodem  iisdem  or  eisdem 

25.   The  Relative  Pronoun  Qui  (N.  50),  is  thus  declined:  — 
Who,  Which,  That. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

n. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

NOM. 

qui  ' 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

cujus 

cujus 

cujus 

quorum 

quarum 

quorum 

Dat. 

cui 

cui 

cui 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Ace. 

quem 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Abl. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

26.  The  Interrogative  Pronoun  Quis  (Qui,  N.  51)  is  declined  in  the 
Plural  like  the  Relative.    The  Singular  is :  — 

Whof    Which?    What? 

quae  quid  (quod) 

cujus  cujus 

cui  cui 

quam  quid  (quod) 

qua  quo 

27.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  are  described  in  N".  52.  The  simple  forms 
(Quis,  Qui)  are  rare.  Most  of  the  Compounds  are  declined  like  the  Relative 
and  Interrogative.    Aliquis,  si  quis,  ne  quis,  are  thus  declined:  — 

Some  one,  Any. 

Plural. 


NOM. 

quis  (qui) 

Gen. 

cujus 

DAT. 

cui 

Ace. 

quem 

Abl. 

quo 

Singular. 

NoM.  aliquis  t   aliqua 
Gen.  alicujus   alicujus 
Dat.  alicui        alicui 
Ace.  aliquem  aliquam 
Abl.  aliquo       aliqua 


aliquidt  aliqui  aliquae        aliqua 

alicujus  aliquorum  aliquarum  aliquorum 

alicui  aliquibus    aliquibus    aliquibus 

aliquid  aliquos         aliquas        aliqua 

aliquo  aliquibus    aliquibus    aliquibus 

The  Plural  of  ille  and  ipse  is  like  that  of  magnus  or  bonus. 

Or  aliqui  (Masculine),  aliquod  (Neuter),  when  used  as  an  adjective. 


APPENDIX. 


245 


VERBS:  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

28.  Active  Voice.  —  Amo,  /  love. 

Principal  Parts. 

Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  Indie,  Supine. 

amo,  amare,  amavi,  amatum. 

Steins :  Present^  ama  ;  Perfect,  amav  ;  Supine,  amat. 


INDICATIVE  MODE. 
Present  Tense. 


SINGULAB. 

amo,  /  love. 
amas,  you  love. 
amat,  he  {she)  lovts. 


PLURAL. 

amamus,  we  love. 
amatis,  you  love, 
amant,  they  love* 


amabam,  I  was  loving, 
amabas,  you  were  loving, 
amabat,  he  was  loving. 


Imperfect. 


amabamiud,  we  were  loving, 
amabatis,  you  were  loving, 
amabant,  they  were  loving. 


amabo,  /  s 
amabis,  you  will  love, 
amabit,  he  will  love. 


Future. 


amapbimus,  we  shall  love. 
amabit  is,  i/ou  will  love, 
amabunt,  they  will  love. 


Perfect. 


amavi,  /  have  loved,  I  loved. 
amavisti,  you  have  loved,  you  loved. 
amavit,  he  has  loved,  he  loved. 


amavimus,  we  have  loved,  we  loved. 
amavistis,  you  have  loved,  you  loved, 
amaverunt  (ere),  they  have  loved, 
they  loved. 


amaveram,  /  had  loved, 
amaveras,  you  had  loved, 
amaverat,  he  had  loved. 


Pluperfect. 

amaveramus,  we  had  loved, 
amaveratis,  you  had  loved. 
amaverant,  they  had  loved. 

Future  Perfect. 


amavero,  /  shall  have  loved. 
amaveris,  you  will  have  loved. 
amaverit,  he  will  have  loved. 


amaverimus,  we  shall  have  loved, 
amaveritis,  you  will  have  loved. 
amaverint,  tliey  will  have  loved. 


2 

46 

APPENDIX. 

SUBJUNCTIVE.* 

SINGULAB. 

Present. 

PLURAL. 

amem 

ames 

amet 

amemus 

ametis 

ament 

Imperfect. 

amarem 

amares 

amaret 

amaremus 

amaretis 

amarent 

Perfect. 

amaverim 

amaveris 

amaverit 

amaverimus 

amaveritis 

amaverint 

Pluperfect. 

amavissem 

amavisses 

amavisset 

amavissemus 

amavissetis 

amavissent 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

3. 

2.  amate 
Future. 

,  love  {ye). 

2. 
3. 

amat5,  thou  shalt  love. 
amato,  he  shall  love. 

2.  amatote,  ye  shall  love, 

3.  amanto,  they  shall  love 

INFINITIVE. 

Present,    amare,  to  love. 
Perfect,     amavisse,  to  have  loved. 
Future,     amaturus    esse,    to   be 

about  to  love. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present. 
Future. 


amans,  ( 

amatiirus,  about  to  love 


Ace.  amatum,  to  love. 
Abl.  amatu,  to  love. 


GERUND.  SUPINE. 

Gen.  amandi,  of  loving. 
Dat.  amando,  to  {for)  loving. 
Ace.  amandum,  loving. 
Abl.  amando,  by  loving. 

*  The  Subjunctive  has  a  great  variety  of  meanings;  they  can  be  best  learned 
by  a  study  of  the  different  uses  of  the  mode,  as  they  are  presented  in  the 
Lessons. 


APPENDIX. 


247 


verbs:  first  conjugation". 

29.  Passive  Voice.  —  Amor,  /  am  loved. 


Principal  Farts* 

^res.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Pejf.  Ind. 

amor, 

amari. 

amatus  sum 

Stems 

:  Present,  ama ;   Supine^ 

INDICATIVE   MODE. 
Present  Tense. 

amat 

SINGULAR. 

amor,  /  am  loved. 
amaris  (re),  you  are  loved. 
amatur,  he  (she,  it)  is  loved. 


PLURAL. 

amamur,  we  are  loved. 
amamini,  you  are  loved, 
amantur,  they  are  loved. 


Imperfect. 

/  was  loved. 


amabar 
amabaris  (re) 
amabatur 


amabor 
amaberis  (re) 
amabitur 


amatus  sum 
amatus  es 
amatus  est 


amatus  eram 
amatus  eras 
amatus  erat 


amatus  ero 
amatus  eris 
amatus  erit 


amabamur 
amabamini 
amabantur 


Future. 

/  shall  be  loved. 


amabimur 
amabimini 
amabuntup 


Perfect. 

/  have  been  loved,  was  loved. 

amati  sumus 
amati  estis 
amati  sunt 

Pluperfect. 

/  had  bee7i  loved. 

amati  eramus 
amati  eratis 
amati  erant 

Future  Perfect. 

/  shall  have  been  loved. 

amati  erimus 
amati  eritis 
amati  erunt 


248 


APPENDIX. 


SINGULAR. 

amer 

ameris  (re) 
ametur 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 


PLURAL. 

amemur 
amemini 
amentur 


amarer 
amareris  (re) 
amaretur 


Imperfect. 


amaremur 
amareminl 
amarentur 


amatus  aim 
axaatus  sis 
amatus  sit 


Perfect. 


amati  simus 
amati  sitis 
amati  sint 


amatus  ess^m 
amatus  esses 
amatus  esset 


Pluperfect. 


amati  essemus 
amati  essetis 
amati  essent 


2.  amare,  b$  (thou)  loved. 


IMPERATIVE. 
Present. 

I   amamini,  be  (ye)  loved. 


2.  amator,  thou  shalt  be  loved. 

3.  amator,  he  shall  be  loved. 


Future. 


2.  wanting. 

3.  amantor,  they  shall  be  loved. 


INFINITIVE. 

Present,    amari,  to  be  loved. 

Perfect,    amatus  esse,  to  have  been  loved. 

Future,    amatum  iri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect,    amatus,  having  been  loved. 

Gerundive,     amandus,  to-be-loved,  deserving  to  be  loved. 


APPENDIX. 


249 


VERBS:    SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

Moneo,  /  warn,  advise, 
Prin.  Parts :   Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.  Supine. 

30.  Active:    moneo,  monere,  monui,  monitum. 

31.  Passive:   moneor,  moneri,  monitus  sum. 

Steins:  Present^  mone ;  Perfect,  monu;  Supine^  monit. 
Notice  that  only  a  few  tenses  of  moneo  are  here  given  in  full ;  the 
others  have  the  same  tense-signs  and  endings  as  in  amo. 

(30)  ACTIVE.  (31)  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE.       SUBJUNCTIVE.        INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 


SINGULAR. 

moneor  monear 

moneris  (re)        monearis  (re) 
monetur  moneatur 

PLURAL. 

moneamur 
moneamini 
moneantur 


SINGULAR. 

moneo  mone  am 

mones  moneas 

monet  moneat 

PLURAL. 

monemus  moneamus  monemur 

monetis  moneatis  monemird 

monent  moneant  monentur 

Imperfect  (like  amo). 
monebam,  etc.     monerem,  etc.        |   monebar,  etc. 

Future  (like  amo). 
monebo,  etc.  |   monebor,  etc. 

Perfect  (liJce  amo). 
monui,  etc.  monuerim,  etc.       I  monitus  sum,etc.  monitus  sim,  etc. 

Pluperfect  (like  amo). 
monueram,  etc.  monuissem,  etc.     I  monitus  eram,  monitus   essem. 


monerer,  etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


monuero,  etc. 


SING. 

Pres.  2.  mone 
Fut.    2.  moneto 
3.  moneto 


PLUR. 

monete 

monetote 

monento 


PLUR. 

monemini 

wanting. 
monentor 


Future  Perfect  (like  amo). 

I   monitus  ero,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

SING. 

Pres.  2.  monere 
Fut.   2.  monetor 
3.  monetor 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  monere      Perf.  monuisse     I   Pres.  moneri   Perf.  monitus  esse 
Fut.    moniturus  esse  |   Fut.    monitum  iri 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  monens      Fut.    moniturus    I   Perf.  monitus  G've.  monendus 
Gerund,  monendl.  o,  um,  o  I  y^^^^^  ^^^^^ 
bupiNE.    monitum,  monitu   ) 


250 


APPENDIX. 


VERBS:   THIRD  CONJUGATION. 
Rego,  /  direct,  rule, 

Prln.  Parts  s       Pres.  Ind.       Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.  Supine. 

32.  Active:        rego,  regere,  rexi,  rectum. 

33.  Passive:       regor,  regi,  rectus  sum. 
Steins:  Present,  rege  (N.  79,  2);  Perfect,  rex;  Supine, red. 

(32)  ACTIVE.  (33)  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE.        SUBJUNCTIVE.        INDICATIVE.        SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 


SINGULAR. 

SINGULAR. 

regS 

regam 

regor                     regar 

regis 

regas 

regeris  (re)           regaris  (re) 

regit 

regat 

regitur                   regatur 

PLURAL. 

PLURAL. 

regimus 

regamus 

regimur                 regamur 

regitis 

regatis 

regimim                regamini 

regunt 

regant 

reguntur             .  regantur 

regebam 

SINGULAR. 

regam 

reges 

reget 

PLURAL. 

regemus 

regetis 

regent 

rexX 


SING. 

Pres.  2.  rege 
Put.     2.  regito 
3.  regito 


Imperfect  (like  moneo). 
regerem  J      regebar  regerer 

Future. 

SINGULAR. 

regar 

regeris  (re) 
regetur 

PLURAL. 

regemur 
regemini 
regentur 
Perfect  (like  moneo). 
rexerim  |       rectus  sum         rectus  sim 

Pluperfect  (like  moneo). 
rexissem  |       rectus  eram        rectus  essem 

Future  Perfect  (like  moneo). 
I       rectus  ero 
IMPERATIVE. 

PLUR.  SING. 


INFINITIVE, 


•I 


regite 
regitote 
regunto 
ACTIVE. 


Pres.  2.  regere 

Fut.    2.  regitor 

3.  regitor 

PASSIVE. 


PLUR. 

regimim 

wanting 

reguntor 


Pres.  regere  Perf.  rexisse    Pres.  regi  Perf.  rectus  esse 
Fut.   rectum  iri 


[  Fut.   recturus  esse 
PARTICIPLES.  Pres.  regens  Fut.  recturus  Perf.  rectus  G've.  regendus 
VERBAL  NOUNS.     Gerund,  regendi,  etc.  Supine,  rectum,  rectu. 


APPENDIX. 


251 


VERBS:    THIRD  CONJUGATION, 

34.  Verbs  in  IO. 

This  class  of  Verbs  is  described  in  Note  79,  3. 
Prin.  Parts:   Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf. 

Active  :  capio,  /  taJce.  capere 

Passive  :         capior  capi 

Steins  :  Present,  cape ;  Perfect,  cep  ; 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE.  INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 


Perf.  Ind, 

Supine. 

cepi 

captum 

captus  sum 

capt. 

capio 
capis 
capit 

capimus 

capitis 

capiunt 

capiebam 

capiam 
capies 
capiet,  etc. 

cepi 

ceperam 

cepero 


Pres.  2.  cape 
Put.    2.  capit 6 
3.  capit 6 


SINGULAR. 

capiam 

capias 

capiat 

PLURAL. 

capiamus 

capiatis 

capiant 


capior 
caperis  (re) 
capitur 


SINGULAR. 

capiar 
capiaris  (re) 
capiatur 

PLURAL. 

capiamur 
capiamini 
capiantur 


capimur 
capimini 
capiuntur 

Imperfect. 

caperem  |   capiebar  caperer 

Future. 

capiar 

capieris  (re)  ^ 

capietur,  etc. 

Perfect. 

I   captus  sum 
Pluperfect* 

I   captus  eram 
Future  Perfect. 

I   captus  ero 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres.  2.  capere 

Fut.    2.  capitor 

3.  capitor 

INFINITIVE, 
cepisse         I   Pres.  capi  Perf.  captus  esse 

I   Fut.    captum  iri 


ceperim 


cepissem 


capite 

capitote 

capiunto 


captus  Sim 


captus  essem 


capimini 

wanting 
capiuntor 


Pres.  capere        Perf. 
Fut.    capturus  esse 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  capiens      Fut.    capturus      |   Perf.  captus 
Gerund,  capiendi,  6,  urn,  o  )  y^^^^^  ^^^^^^ 
bupiNE.    captum,  captu     .    ) 


G've.  capiendus 


252 


APPENDIX. 


VERBS:    FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 
Audio,  /  hear. 


Prin.  Parts:    Pres.  Ind.      Pres.  Inf. 

35.  Active:        audio  audire 

36.  Passive:       audior         audiri 
Steins  :  Present,  audi ;  Perfect,  audiv ; 

(35)  ACTIVE. 

INDICATIVE.      S  UB  JUNCTIVE.         INDICATIVE. 
Present. 


Supine. 
auditum 


Perf.  Ind. 
audivi 
auditus  sum 
)upine,  audit. 

(36)  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 


SINGULAR. 

SINGULAR. 

audio 

audiam 

audior 

audiar 

audis 

audias 

audiris  (re) 

audiaris  (re) 

audit 

audiat 

auditur 

audiatur 

PLUKAL. 

PLURAL. 

audimus 

audiamus 

audimur 

audiamur 

auditis 

audiatis 

audimini 

audiamini 

audiunt 

audiant 

audiuntur 

audiantur 

Imperfect. 

audiebam 

audirem 

1   audiebar 
Future. 

audirep 

SINGULAR. 

SINGULAR. 

audiam 

audiar 

audies 

audieris  (re) 

audiet 

audietur 

PLURAL. 

PLURAL. 

audiemus 

audiemur 

audietis 

audiemini 

audient 

audientur 

Perfect. 

audivi 

audiverim 

1    auditus  sum 
Pluperfect. 

auditus  Sim 

audiveram 

audivissem 

1    auditus  eram 

auditus  essem 

Future  Perfect. 

audivero 

1   auditus  ero 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres.  2.  audi 

audite 

Pres.  2.  audire 

audimini 

Fut.    2.  audits 

auditote 

Fut.    2.  auditor        wanting. 

3.  audits 

audiunto 

3.  auditor        audiunt  or 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  audire 

Perf.  audivisse 

Pres.  audiri     Perf.  auditus  ese 

Fut.    audi  turns  esse 


I    Fut.    auditum  iri 
PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  audiens      Fut.    auditiirus    |    Perf.  auditus  G've.  audiendus 
Gerund,  audiendi,  o,  um,  6  j  y^rbal  Nouns. 
Supine,    auditum,  u  > 


APPENDIX. 


253 


DEPONENT  VERBS:   ALL  CONJUGATIONS. 

37.  (See  Note  80.) 

The  Principal  Parts  and  meanings  of  these  verbs  are  given  in  the   Vo^ 
cabulary.  0 

INDICATIVE. 
I.  II.  III.  IV. 


Pres. 

hortor 

vereor 

sequor 

potior 

hortaris  (re) 

vereris  (re) 

sequeris  (re) 

potiris  (re) 

hortatur 

veretur 

sequitur 

potitur 

hortamur 

veremur 

sequimur 

potimur 

hortamini 

veremini 

sequimini 

potimim 

hortantur 

verentur 

sequuntur 

potiuntur 

Imp. 

hortabar 

verebar 

sequebar 

potiebar 

Fut. 

hortabor 

verebor 

sequar 

potiar 

Perf. 

hortatus  sum 

veritus  sum 

secutus  sum 

potitus  sum 

Plup. 

hortatus  eram 

veritus  eram 

secutus  eram 

potitus  eram 

F.  P. 

hortatus  ero 

veritus  ero 

secutus  ero 

potitus  ero 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. 

horter 

verear 

sequar 

potiar 

Imp. 

hortarer 

vererer 

sequerer 

potirer 

Perf. 

hortatus  sim 

veritus  sim 

secutus  sim 

potitus  sim 

Plup.  hortatus  essem   veritus  essem  secutus  essem   potitus  essem 


hortare,  ator 


IMPERATIVE, 
verere,  etor      sequere,  itor      potire,  itor 


INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  hortari  vereri  sequi  potiri 

Perf.   hortatus  esse       veritus  esse       seciitus  esse       potitus  esse 
Fut.     hortaturus  esse  veriturus  esse  secuturus  esse  potiturus  esse 

PARTICIPLES. 


Pres. 

hortans 

verens 

sequens 

potiens 

Fut. 

hortaturus 

veriturus 

secutiirus 

potiturus 

Perf. 

hortatus 

veritus 

seciitus 

potitus 

G've. 

hortandus 

verendus 
VERBAL 

sequendus 

NOUNS. 

potiendus 

Ger. 

hortandi,  etc. 

verendi,  etc. 

sequendi,  etc. 

potiendi,  etc. 

Sup. 

hortatum,  ix 

veritum,  u 

secutum,  u 

potitum,  u 

38.  Semi-Deponent  Verbs.     (See  Note  81.) 

audeo,  audere,  ausus  sum,  dare ;  gaudeo,  gaudere,  gavisus  sum, 
rejoice;  fido,  fidere,  fisus  sum ^  trust ;  soleo,  solere,  solitus  sum,  6e 
wont. 


254 


APPENDIX. 


PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGATIONS. 

39.  a.  First  (or  Active). — Amaturus  sum,  /  am  about  to  love  (see  N.  82). 
Amattirus,  Moniturus,  Rectums,  Auditurus,  — 

Imperf.       Future.        Perfect.       Pluperf. 


Indic.  sum  eram         ero  fui  fueram 

SuBj.  Sim  essem       fuerim     fuissem 

Infin.  esse  fuisse       

b.  Second  (or  Passive).  —  Amandus  sum,  /  must  be  loved. 

Amandus,  Monendus,  Regendus,  Audiendus, — 

Present.       Imperf.       Future.        Perfect.      Pluperf. 
Indic.  sum  eram         ero  fui  fueram 

SuBj.  Sim  essem       fuerim     fuissem 

Infin.  esse  fuisse       


Fut.  Perf. 
fuero 


Fut.  Perf. 
fuero 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 
40.  Sum,  I  am.    (See  Note  84.) 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf  Ind.  Supine. 

Prin.  Parts  t       sum,  esse,  fui,  wanting. 

Stems :  Pres.  es  ;  Perf.  fu  ;  Sup.  fut  (found  in  the  Future  Participle). 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. 

PLURAL. 

sumus,  we  are. 


SINGULAR. 

sum,  /  am. 

es,  thou  art  (you  are). 

est,  he  (she,  it)  is. 


eram,  /  was. 
eras,  you  were. 
erat,  he  (she,  it)  was. 

ero,  I  shall  be. 
eris,  you  will  be. 
erit,  he  will  be. 

fui,  /  have  been  (was). 
fuisti,  you  have  been  (were). 
fuit,  he  has  been  (was). 

fueram,  I  had  been. 
fueras,  you  had  been. 
fuerat,  he  had  been. 

fuero,  /  shall  have  been. 
fueris,  you  will  have  been. 
fuerit,  he  loill  have  been. 


estis,  you  are, 
sunt,  they  are. 
Imperfect. 

eramus,  we  were. 
eratis,  you  were. 
erant,  they  were. 

Future. 

erimus,  we  shall  be. 
eritis,  you  will  be. 
erunt,  they  will  be. 
Perfect. 

fuimus,  we  have  been  (were).  ^ 

fuistis,  you  have  been  (were). 
fuerunt  (ere),  they  have  been  (were). 
Pluperfect. 

I   fueramus,  we  had  been. 

fueratis,  you  had  been. 
I    fuerant,  they  had  been. 
Future  Perfect. 

fuerimius,  we  shall  have  been, 
fueritis,  you  will  have  been, 
fuerint,  they  will  have  been. 


APPENDIX 

• 

2 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

OF  Sum. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

SINGULAR. 

sim 

essemi 

fuerim 

fuissem 

SIS 

esses 

fueris 

fuisses 

sit 

esset 

fuerit 

fuisset 

PLURAL. 

simus 

essemus 

fuerimus 

fuissemus 

sitis 

essetis 

fueritis 

fuissetis 

sint 

essent 

fuerint 

fuissent 

255 


IMPERATIVE. 
Present.  2.  es,  be  thou.  este,  he  ye. 

Future.    2.  esto,  thou  shalt  be.  estote,  ye  shall  be. 

3.  esto,  he  shall  be.  sunto,  they  shall  be* 

INFINITIVE. 
Present,  esse,  to  be. 
Perfect,  fuisse,  to  have  been. 
Future,   futurus  esse,^  to  be  about  to  be. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present,  wanting 
Future,    futurus 

1  For  essem,  forem  is  often  used.    2  Yox  futurus  esse,  fore  is  often  used. 

Compounds  of  Sum. 

41.  Possum  (/  am  able,  can)  =■  potis  (able)  +  sum.  Possum  =  pot- 
sum  ;  t  becomes  s  before  s  (N.  1  (4)  6),  as,  pos-sum,  and  is  retained  before 
e,  as,   pot-es.    The  verb  is  described  in  N.  85,  1. 

Prin.  Parts:  possum,  posse  (for  pot-esse),  potui  (for  pot-fui). 


INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

possum,  /  am  aUe,  can.  possim 


INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Perfect. 
potui,  /  could.  potuerim 

Pluperfect. 
potueram  potuissem 

Future  Perfect. 
potuero 

IMPERATIVE. 

wanting 
INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  posse         Perf.  potuisse 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  potens  (used  as  an  adjective), 
powerful. 

a.  In  Prosum,  Iprojit,  help,  pro  becomes  prod  before  e,  as  in  the  Present 
Indicative:  (Singular)  pro-sum,  prod-es,  prod-est;  (Plural)  pro-sumus, 
prod-estis,  pro-sunt.    Other  instances  are  prod-eram,  prod-ero. 


potes,  you  can. 

possis 

potest,  he  can. 

possit 

possumus,  we  can. 

possimus 

potestis,  you  can. 

possitis 

possunt,  they  can. 

possiut 

Imperfect. 

poteram,  /  could. 

possem 

Future. 

potero,  /  shall  be  able. 

256 


APPENDIX. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

42.  Pero,  /  hear.    (See  Note  86.) 

Prill.  Farts:  Active:   fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum. 
Passive:  feror,  ferri,  latus  sum. 


ACTIVE. 


INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 
INDICATIVE.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.       fero 

feram 

feror 

ferar 

fers 

feras 

ferris  (re) 

feraris  (re) 

fert 

ferat 

fertur 

feratur 

ferimus 

feramus 

ferimur 

feramur 

fertis 

feratis 

ferimini 

feramini 

ferunt 

ferant 

feruntur 

ferantur 

Imperf .  ferebam 

ferrem 

ferebar 

ferrer 

Put.        feram 

ferar 

Perf.       tuli 

tulerim 

latus  sum 

latus  Sim 

Plup.      tuleram 

tulissem 

latus  eram 

latus  essem 

P.  Perf.  tulero 

latus  ero 

Imp.  Pres.     fer 

ferte 

ferre 

ferimini 

Put.      ferto 

fertote 

fertor 

wanting 

ferto 

ferunto 

fertor 

feruntor 

Inf.  Pres.  ferre 

Perf.  tulisse 

Pres.  ferri 

Perf.  latus  esse 

Put.    laturus 

esse 

Put.    latum  iri 

Part.  Pres.  fer  ens  Put.  laturus 

Perf.  latus 

G've.  ferendus 

Ger.  ferendi,  etc.    Sup.  latum,  u 

43.  Irregular  Verbs:  EO,  I  go,    (See  Note  87.) 
Prin.  Parts :  eo,  ire,  ivi,  itum. 


INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE, 
eam,  eas,  eat 
eamus,  eatis,  eant 
irem,  ires,  Iret 
iremus,  iretis,  irent 


Pres.  SING,  eo,  is,  it 

PLUR.  imus,  itis,  eunt 
Imperf.       ibam,  ibas,  ibat 

ibamus,  ibatis,  ibant 

ibo,  ibis,  ibit 

ibimus,  ibitis,  ibunt 

ivi  iverim 

iveram  ivissem 

Put.  Perf.    ivero 

Imperat.  Pres.  I,  ite ;  Fut.  ito,  ito,  itote,  eunto. 

Infin.  Pres.    ire  Perf.  ivisse  Put.  iturus  esse 

Part.  Pres.    iens  (Genitive,  euntis)  Put.  iturus 

Gerund.  eundi,  etc.  Supine,  itum,  itu 


Future. 

Perf. 
Pluperf. 


APPENDIX. 


257 


44.  Irregular  Verbs:  Flo  (/ am  made^  become)  is  the  Passive  of  Facio 
(See  Note  88.) 

SUBJUNCTIVE, 
flam,  fias,  flat 
fiamus,  fiatis,  fiant 
fierem,  fieres,  etc. 

factus  sim 
factus  essem 

Imperat.  Pres.  fi,  fite ;  Fut.  fito,  fito,  fitote,  flunto 

Infin.  Pres.  fieri  Perf.  factus  esse  Put.  factum  iri 

Part.  Perf.  factus  G've.  faciendus 

45.  Irregular  Verbs  :  Volo  and  its  compounds  (see  Notes  89,  90) :  — 
volo,  velle,  volui,  to  wish. 

nolo  (=  non  volo),  nolle,  nolui,  to  be  unwilling. 
malo  (=  magis  volo),  malle,  malui,  to  wish  rather,  prefer. 
Present. 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  SING. 

fio,  fis,  fit 

PLUR 

.  flmus,  fitis,  fiunt 

Imp. 

fiebam,  fiebas,  etc 

Fut. 

flam,  fies,  etc. 

Perf. 

factus  sum 

Plup. 

factus  eram 

Fut.  Perf. 

factus  ero 

INDIC. 

SUB  J. 

INDIC.                 SUB  J. 

INDIC. 

SUBJ. 

volo 

velim 

n516              nolim 

malo 

malim 

VIS 

velis 

nonvis         nolis 

mavis 

mails 

vult 

velit 

nonvult       nolit 

ma  vult 

malit 

volumus 

velimus 

nolumus     nolimus 

malumus 

malimus 

vultis 

velitis 

nonvultis    nolitis 

mavultis 

malitis 

volunt 

velint 

nolunt         nolint 
Imperfect. 

malunt 

malint 

volebam 

vellem 

nolebam     nollem 
Future. 

malebam 

mallem 

volam 

nolam 

Perfect. 

malam 

volui 

voluerim 

nolui            noluerim 
Pluperfect. 

malui 

maluerim 

volueram 

voluissem  nolueram    noluissem 

malueram 

maluissem 

Future  Perfect. 

voluero 

noluero 

maluero 

IMPERATIVE. 
Pres.  nSli,  nolite,  do  not. 

Fut.  nolito,  nolitote,  thou  shalt  not,  ye  shall  not, 
nolito,  nolunto,  he  shall  not,  they  shall  not. 

INFINITIVE, 
velle  voluisse      nolle  noluisse      malle  maluisse 

PARTICIPLES, 
volens,  loiUlng.  nolens,  unwilling. 


258 


APPENDIX. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

46.  (See  Note  91.)  The  following  have  (in  common  use)  only  the  tenses 
fonned  from  the  Perfect  Stem:  coepi,*  1  began  {have  begun)-,  meinini,t  I 
remember;  6di,t  I  hate. 

r coep-      \ 
Synopsis.  <  memin-  >  i,  eram,  ero,  erim,  issem,  isse 
Ud-  ) 

Remark  1.  Passive  forms  of  coepi  (as  coeptus  sum)  are  used  with  the 
Passive  Infinitive  (N.  91,  1). 

Remark  2.  Inquam  and  other  Defective  verbs  are  described  in  N. 
91,  a,  b, 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

47.  (See  Note  92.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  used  in  the  Third  Person  Singu- 
lar of  the  Indicative  and  Subjunctive  Modes  (all  tenses),  and  also  in  the 
Infinitive.  A  synopsis  of  three  classes  of  Impersonal  verbs  is  here  given,  as 
well  as  their  Principal  Parts :  — 

1.  Regularly  Impersonal  (licet,  Second  Conjugation). 

2.  Used  Impersonally  in  tlie  Active  (constat,  accidit,  First  and  Third 
Conjugations). 

3.  Used  Impersonally  in  the  Passive  (pugnatur,  nocetur  [see  N. 
134]). 

Prin.  Parts:  constat,  constare,  constitit,  it  is  evident, 
licet,  licere,  licuit,  it  is  permitted.  > 

accidit,  accidere,  accidit,  it  happens. 
pugnatur,  pugnarl,  pugnatum  est,  fighting  is  carried  on. 
nocetur,  noceri,  nocitum  est,  harm  is  done. 


constat 

licet 

accidit 

pugnatur 

nocetur 

constabat 

licebat 

accidebat 

pugnabatur 

nocebatur 

constabit 

Hcebit 

accidet 

pugnabitur 

nocebitur 

constitit 

licuit 

accidit 

pugnatum  est 

nocitum  est 

constiterat 

licuerat 

acciderat 

pugnatum  erat 

nocitum  erat 

constiterit 

licuerit 

acciderit 

pugnatum  erit 

nocitum  erit 

constet 

liceat 

accidat 

pugnetur 

noceatur 

constaret 

liceret 

accideret 

pugnaretur 

noceretur 

constiterit 

licuerit 

acciderit 

pugnatum  sit 

nocitum  sit 

constitisset 

licuisset 

accidisset 

pugnatum  esset 

nocitum  esset 

constare 

licere 

accidere 

pugnarl 

noceri 

constitisse 

licuisse 

accidisse 

pugnatum  esse 

nocitum  esse 

constaturum  liciturum 

pugnatum  iri 

nocitum  Iri 

esse 

esse 

*  The  Present-stem  tenses  of  coepi  are  borrowed  from  incipio,  /  begin. 

t  Novi,  /  hnow  (from  nosco),  and  consuevi,  /  am  wont  (from  con- 
suesco),  as  well  as  memini  and  odi,  are  used  in  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect, 
and  Future  Perfect,  with  the  meaning  of  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future; 
that  is,  they  are  preteritive  verbs  (N.  91,  2  and  Remark). 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES  AND  EXAMPLES. 


These  Vocabularies  have  been  prepared  for  the  first  29  Lessons.  The  same 
Latin  words  are  also  given  in  the  General  Vocabulary.  Beyond  the  2^th  Les- 
son, Special  Examples  are  given  for  such  Lessons  as  require  them. 


adv.,  adverb. 
conj.,  conjunction. 


Abbreviations. 

f .,  feminine  gender. 
m.,  masculine  gender. 


n.,  neuter  gender, 
prep.,  preposition. 


LESSON  I. 


agricola,  ae,  m.  farmer. 
causa,  ae,  f.  cause,  reason, 
gloria,  ae,  f.  glory. 
lingua,  ae,  f.  tongue,  language. 
memoria,  ae,  f.  memory. 
mensa,  ae,  f.  table. 
nauta,  ae,  m.  sailor. 


amo.  Hove. 
laudo,  I  praise. 


ager,  agri,  m.feld, 
amicus,  i,  m.  friend. 
do,  /  give. 
equus,  1,  m.  horse, 
liber,  libri,  m.  booh. 
libero,  I  free,  release. 


Nouns. 

bellum,  I,  n.  war. 
donum,  i,  n.  gift. 
praemium,  i,  n.  reward. 
templum,  i,  n.  temple. 


peciinia,  ae,  f.  money, 
Koma,  ae,  f.  Rome. 
rosa,  ae,  f.  rose, 
silva,  ae,  f.  forest, 
Stella,  ae,  f.  star, 
via,  ae,  f.  way,  road, 
victoria,  ae,  f.  victory. 


LESSON  IL 


puella,  ae,  f.  girl, 
pugno,  I  fight. 
voco,  /  call. 


LESSON  IIL 


magister,  tri,  m.  master^  teacher, 
puer,  1,  m.  boy. 
Komanus,  i,  m.  a  Roman, 
servus,  i,  m.  slave. 
vir,  viri,  m.  man. 


LESSON  IV. 

Adjectives. 

aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  sick. 
bonus,  bona,  bonum,  good. 
liber,  libera,  liberum,/ree. 
magnus,  magna,  magnum,  great, 

large, 
miser,  misera,  miserum,  wretched. 
niger,  nigra,  nigrum,  blacJc. 
parvus,  parva,  parvum,  small. 


260 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES   AND   EXAMPLES. 


LESSON  V. 


c5pia,  ae,  f.  (in  the  Singular)  aburi- 
dance,  plenty;  (in  the  Plural) 
forces^  troqpSy  supplies. 

et,  conj.  and. 

GaUi,  orum,  m.  the  Gauls. 

Geneva,  ae,  f.  Geneva, 

Germani,  orum,  m.  the  Germans. 

gladius,  I,  m.  sword. 


legatus,  i,  m.  legate,  lieutenant. 
occupo,  /  occupy,  seize. 
oppidum,  i,  n.  town  (fortified). 
porto,  I  carry. 
Sabinus,  i,  m.  Sabinus. 
supero,  I  overcome. 
Titus,  i,  m.  Titus. 
vasto,  /  lay  waste. 


LESSON  VI. 


acutus,  a,  um,  sharp. 
albus,  a,  um,  white. 
altus,  a,  um,  high,  lofty,  deep. 
attentus,  a,  um,  attentive. 
beatus,  a,  um,  happy,  fortunate. 
clarus,  a,  um,  bright,  clear. 
exemiplum,  i,  n.  example. 
insula,  ae,  f.  island. 
latus,  a,  um,  wide,  broad. 


longus,  a,  um,  long, 
multus,  a,  um,  much,  many. 
Humerus,  i.  m.  number. 
periculum,  I,  n.  peril,  danger. 
porta,  ae,  f.  gate,  door, 
regnum,  i,  n.  kingdom, 
sum,  /  am. 
timiduSt  a*  um,  timid. 


LESSON  vm. 

dea,  ae,  f.  goddess,       filia,  ae,  f.  daughter,       murus*  I,  m.  wall. 
Principal  Parts  of  Verbs* 


PRES.  INDIC. 

,      PRES.  INFIN. 

PERF.  INDIC. 

SUPINE. 

amo. 

amare. 

amavi. 

a.matum,  love. 

do. 

dare. 

dedi, 

datum,  give. 

laudo. 

laudare. 

laudavi. 

laudatum,  praise. 

libero. 

liberare. 

libera  vi. 

liberatum,  /ree. 

monstro, 

monstrare. 

monstravi. 

monstratum,  show. 

narro, 

narrare, 

narravi. 

narratum,  tell. 

ports. 

portare, 

porta  vi. 

portatum,  carry. 

pugno. 

pugnare. 

pugnavi. 

■pugnBstuinjJight. 

servo. 

servare. 

servavi. 

servatum,  save,  protect 

vasto. 

vastare. 

vastavi. 

vastatum,  lay  waste. 

LESSON  IX. 

The  new  Verbs  used  in  this  Lesson  are  given  in  the  Vocabulary  for  Lesson  VIH 


fabula,  ae,  f.  story. 
frumentum,  i,  n.  corn. 


injuria,  ae,  f.  injury,  wrong. 
non,  adv.  not. 


SPECIAL   VOCABULARIES   AND  EXAMPLES. 


261 


LESSON   XI. 


auxilium,  i,  n.  (in  Sing.)  aid;  (in 

Plur.)  auxiliaries. 
Caius,  i,  m.  Caius. 
Cassius,  i,  m.  Cassius. 
concilium,  i,  n.  council. 
filius,  i,  m.  son. 
Juliust  it  m.  Julius. 


Marcus,  i,  m.  Marcus. 
meus,  a,  um,  my,  mine. 
nuntio,  are,  etc.  announce. 
patria,  ae,  i.  fatherland,  native  land. 
Pompeius,  i,  m.  Pompey. 
proelium,  i,  n.  battle. 


LESSON  XIII. 


aedifico,  are,  etc.,  build. 

alius,  a,  ud,  other. 

alter,  era,  erum,  the  other  (of  two). 

natiira,  ae,  f.  nature. 

neuter,  tra,  trum,  neither. 

nullus,  a,  um,  no,  none. 

poeta,  ae,  m.poet. 


solus,  a,  um,  only,  alone. 

totus,  a,  um,  entire,  whole. 

ullus,  a,  um,  any. 

unus,  a,  um,  one, 

uter,  tra,  trum,  which  (of  two). 

vaco,  are,  etc.,  be  empty,  unoccupied- 

vita,  ae,  f.  life. 


LESSON  XIV. 


caput,  capitis,  n.  head,  [capit-al] 

consul,  consulis,  m.  consul. 

corpus,  corporis,  n.  body,  [corpor- 
al.] 

malus,  a,  um,  bad,  evil. 

miles,  militis,  m.  soldier,  [mili- 
tary.] 


nomen,  nominis,  n.  name,  [nomin- 
ate] 
rex,  regis,  m.  king,  [reg-al] 
soror,  sororis,  f.  sister. 
Virgo,  virginis,  f.  maiden,  [virgin] 


LESSON  XVI. 


altitildo,  inis,  f.  height. 

ci vitas,  atis,  f.  state. 

custos,  odis,  m.  keeper,  guard. 

dux,  ducis,  m.  and  f.  leader,  chief. 

flos,  floris,  TO.,  flower. 

f rater,  tris,  m.  brother. 

honor,  oris,  m.  honor. 

latitude,  inis,  f.  width. 

Iegi5,  onis,  f.  legion. 


leo,  onis,  m.  lion. 
longitudo,  inis,  f.  length. 
lux,  liicis,  f.  light. 
mater,  tris,  f.  mother. 
mos,  moris,  m.  custom. 
opus,  eris,  n.  work,  task. 
pater,  tris,  va.  father. 
princeps,  ipis,  m.  chief,  prince. 
tempus,  oris,  n.  time. 
virtus,  litis,  f.  manhood,  courage. 


262 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES   AND   EXAMPLES. 


LESSON  XVII. 


animal,  alls,  n.  animal, 

arx,  arcis,  f.  citadel. 

calcar,  aris,  n.  spur. 

coUis,  is,  m.  hill. 

dux,  ducis,  m.  and  f .  leader,  chief. 

finis,  is,  m.  (in  Sing.)  end,  limit ;  (in 

Plur.)  territory. 
Gallia,  ae,  f.  Gaul. 
hostis,  is,  m.  and  f .  enemy  (regularly 

in  the  Plural,  to  denote  the  enemy 

as  a  body). 


ignis,  is,  m.Jire, 

mare,  is,  n.  sea. 

mons,  mentis,  m.  mountain. 

navis,  is,  f.  ship. 

nox,  noctis,  f.  night. 

nubes,  is,  f.  cloud. 

pars,  partis,  f .  part. 

pulcher,  chra,  chrum,  beautiful. 

turris,  is,  f.  tower. 

urbs,  urbis,  f.  city, 

vectigal,  alls,  n.  tax. 


LESSON  XIX. 


arma,  orum,  n.  arms, 
Caesar,  aris,  m.  Caesar, 
castra,  orum,  n.  camp, 
expugno,  are,  etc.,  storm,  take  by 
storm. 


ignavus,  a,  um,  cowardly. 
injustus,  a,  um,  unjust. 
judex,  icis,  m.  judge. 
Justus,  a,  um.tjust^. 


Examples. 

Urbem  expugnare  potes,  you  can  (are  able  to)  storm  the  city. 
Hostes  superare  potuisti,  you  could  have  (were  able  to)  overcome  the 
enemy. 


LESSON  XX. 


dicit  (3d.  Conj.),  he  says. 
iter,    itineris,    n.    way,  journey, 
march. 


nego,  are,  etc.,  deny^  say  not 
puto,  are,  etc.,  think,  suppose. 
spero,  are,  etc.,  hope. 


Examples. 

**  Urbs  magna  est,"  (he  says)  "  The  city  is  great.^' 

Dicit  urbem  magnam  esse,  he  says  {that)  the  city  is  great. 

Sperat  urbes  magnas  futuras  esse,  he  hopes  (that)  the  cities  will  be 
great. 

Putat  iter  longum  fuisse,  he  thinks  (that)  the  journey  was  (has  been) 
long. 


SPECIAL  VOCABULAKIES  AND   EXAMPLES. 


263 


LESSON  XXI. 
Examples. 

SI  pugnat,  hostes  superat,  ifhejights,  he  overcomes  the  enemy. 

Si  pugnabat,  hostes  superabat,  if  he  was  fighting,  he  was  over- 
coming, etc. 

Si  pugnabit,  hostes  superabit,  if  he  fights  {shall  fight),  he  will 
Fact,  -j      overcome,  etc. 

Si  pugnavit,  hostes  superavit,  if  he  fought  (has  fought),  he 
overcame  (has  overcome),  etc. 

Si  pugnaverit,  hostes  superabit,  if  he  fights  (shall  have  fought), 
he  will  overcome,  etc. 

Future  Possible.  Si  pugnet,  superet,  if  he  should  fight,  he  would  over- 
come. 

Future  Possible.  Si  pugnaverit,  superet,  if  he  should  have  fought,  he 
would  overcome. 

Pres.  Impossible.  Si  pugnaret,  superaret,  if  he  were  fighting  (now),  he 
would  be  overcoming. 

Past  Impossible.  Si  pugnavisset,  superavisset,  if  he  had  fought,  he 
would  have  overcome. 


LESSON  XXII. 


a,  or  ab,  prep,  (in  this  Lesson)  by. 
decimus,  a,  um,  tenth. 
lapis,  idis,  m.  stone. 
signum,  I,  n.  sign,  signal. 


telum,  i,  n.  weapon. 
tuba,  ae,  f.  trumpet. 
vulnero,  are,  etc.,  wound. 


Examples. 

Titus  gladio  vulneratur,  Titus  is  wounded  with  a  sword  (Means). 

Urbes  ab  Ariovisto  expugnantur,  the  cities  are  stormed  by  Ariovistus 
(Agent). 

Oppidum  a  (or  ab)  militibus  servatum  est,  the  town  was  saved  by  the 
soldiers  (Agent). 

LESSON  XXIIL 


defensor,  oris,  m.  defender. 

nudo,  are,  etc.,  strip. 

-que,  enclitic  conj.  (N.  195,  3)  and. 


servitus,  litis,  f.  slavery. 
suspicio,  onis,  f.  suspicion, 
timer,  oris,  m.fear. 


Examples* 

Urbem  timore  libero,  I  free  the  city  f^om  fear. 

Miirus  defensoribus  nudatus  est,  the  wall  has  been  stripped  of  defenders. 


264 


SPECIAL   VOCABULAEIES  AND  EXAMPLES. 


LESSON  XXIV. 

Sxamples. 

Compare  the  Examples  for  Lesson  XXL 

Si  ignavi  f  uissemus,  urbs  expugnata  esset,  if  we  had  been  cowardly, 
the  city  would  have  been  taken  by  storm. 

Si  pugnares,  laudareris,  if  you  were  fighting  (now),  you  would  be 
praised. 

Si  lauderis,  pugnes,  if  you  should  be  praised  (hereafter),  you  would  fght. 

Si  laudatus  sis,  pugnes,  if  you  should  have  been  praised  (hereafter),  etc. 

LESSON  XXVL 


aestas,  atis,  f.  summer. 
alacer,  cris,  ere,  eager,  active. 
brevis,  e,  brief,  short. 
celer,  eris,  ere,  swift,  quick. 
diflacilis,  e,  difficult. 
faeilis,  e,  easy, 
fort  is,  e,  brave. 
gravis,  e,  heavy. 

homo,  inis,  m.  and  f.  man  (i.  e.  hu- 
man being). 


immortalis,  e,  immortal. 
levis,  e,  light. 
mortalis,  e,  mortal. 
omnis,  e,  all,  every. 
onus,  eris,  n.  load,  burden. 
socius,  i,  m.  ally,  companion, 
tristis,  e,  sad. 
utilis,  e,  useful. 


LESSON  XXVII. 


audax,  acis,  bold. 
dives,  itis,  rich. 
felix,  icis,  happy. 
florens,  entis,  flourishing. 
infelix,  icis,  unhappy. 
ingens,  tis,  huge,  mighty. 
nobilis,  e,  noble. 


par,  paris,  equal. 
potens,  tiSi  powerful. 
recens,  tis,  recent. 
Romanus,  a,  um,  Roman, 
sapiens,  tis,  wise. 
vetus,  eris,  old. 


LESSON  XXVIIL 


amans,  tis,  loving,  affectionate. 
amicus,  a,  mxd.,  friendly . 
Aedui,  orum,  m.  ^^e  Aedui. 
Ariovistus,  i,  m.  Ariovistus. 
cams,  a,  um,  dear. 


eques,  itis,  m.  horseman;    (Plural) 

cavalry. 
lex,  legis,  f.  law. 
pedes,  itis,  m.  foot-soldier ;  (Plural) 

infantry. 


SPECIAL   VOCABULARIES   AND   EXAMPLES.  265 


LESSON  XXIX. 


acriter,  sharply,  fiercely. 
attente,  attentively. 
audacter,  boldly. 
celeriter,  swiftly,  quickly. 
diligenter,  diligently,  carefully. 
dissimilis,  e,  dissimilar,  unlike. 
facile,  easily. 


for  titer,  bravely. 

inimicus,  a,  um,  unfriendly ;  (as  a 

noxm)  foe,  personal  enemy. 
quam,  adv.  than. 
sapienter,  wisely. 
similis,  e,  similar,  like. 


Example. 

Virtus  militum  major  quam   ducis  fuit,   the  soldiers'  bravery  was 
greater  than  the  leader'' s. 

No  Special  Vocabularies  will  be  given  for  the  remaining  Les- 
sons;   FOR  SOME  OF  THEM,  HOWEVER,  SPECIAL  EXAMPLES  ARE  PROVIDED. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 

Gives  mall  civitati  inimici  sunt,  bad  citizens  are  hostile  to  the  state. 
Locus  castris  magis  idoneus  est,  the  place  is  more  suitable  for  a  camp. 
Puer  sorori  similis  est,  the  boy  is  like  (his)  sister. 
Gallis  Belgae  proximi  sunt,  the  Belgae  are  nearest  to  the  Gauls. 
Summus  mons  ab  hostibus  tenetur,  the  top  of  the  mountain  is  held  by 
the  enemy. 

Servis  pares  sunt,  they  are  a  match  for  {equal  to)  the  slaves. 


LESSON  XXXV. 

a  dextro  (sinistro)  cornii,  on  {from)  the  right  (or  left)  wing. 
castra  movet,  he  breaks  up  {moves)  camp. 
Caesar  domi  est,  Caesar  is  at  home. 


LESSON  XL. 

Xiaudo  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  lauder,  I  praise  Caius,  that  I  may  be  praised 

by  Caius. 
Laudabo  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  lauder,  /  shall  praise  Caius,  that  I  may 

be  praised  by  Caius. 
Laudavi  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  lauder,  /  have  praised  Caius,  that  I  may  be 

praised  by  Caius. 
Laudavero  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  lauder,  I  shall  have  praised  Caius,  that 

I  may  be  praised  by  Caius. 


266  SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES   AND   EXAMPLES. 


'  Xjaudabam  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  laudarer,  /  was  praising  Caius,  that 

I  might  be  praised  by  Caius. 
Laudavi  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  laudarer,  I  praised  Caius,  that  1  might  be 

p7'aised  by  Caius. 

Laudaveram  Caium,  ut  a  Caio  laudarer,  I  had  praised  Caius,  that  I 
might  be  praised  by  Caius, 

LESSON   XLI. 

Multi  regem  laudant,  many  (men)  praise  the  king. 

Omnia  omnibus  non  sunt  utilia,  all  things  are  not  useful  for  all  (men). 

Multa  audit,  he  hears  many  (things). 

Jiidices  justi  esse  videntur,  the  judges  seem  to  be  Just. 


LESSON  XLTV. 

Consul  ab  urbe  discedens  servum  interfici  jussit,  the  consul,  (as  he 
was)  departing  from  the  city,  ordered  the  slave  to  be  killed. 

Litteras  a  puero  scriptas  misit,  he  sent  the  letter  (which  had  been) 
written  by  the  boy. 

Dux  hostes  ad  flumen  seciitus  legionem  reduxit,  the  leader,  having 
followed  the  enemy  to  the  river,  led  bach  the  legion. 

Xiapides  conjectos  rejiciunt,  they  throio  bach  the  stones  (which  had  been) 
hurled. 

Per  Galliam  iter  fecit,  he  marched  through  Gaid. 

Titum  de  victoria  certiorem  feci,  /  informed  (made  more  certain) 
Titus  about  the  victory. 


LESSON  XLVII. 

Impetus  paulum  tardatus  est,  the  attach  was  cheched  a  little. 
Plurimum  poterat,  he  was  very  powerful  (i.  e.  to  a  very  great  extent). 
Maximam  partem  frumento  vivunt,  for  the  most  part  they  live  on 
torn, 

Pliis  auctoritatis  habet,  he  has  more  (of)  authority. 

De  tertia  vigilia,  in  the  third  watch. 

Castra  tantum  spatii  patebant,  the  camp  extended  over  so  much  (of) 


Prima  luce,  at  day-breah.  Multo  die,  late  in  the  day.  Prima  nocte, 
in  the  early  part  of  the  night. 

Exercitus  (from  exerceo),  a  drilled  army;  agmen  (from  ago),  an  army 
on  the  march ;  acies,  a  line-of -battle. 


SPECIAL   VOCABULARIES   AND   EXAMPLES.  267 


LESSON  XL VIII. 

Rogat  Caesarem,  ut  veniat,  he  asks  Caesar  to  come  {that  he  may  come). 

Milites  hortatus  sum,  ne  fugerent,  /  exhorted  the  soldiers  not  to  fiet 
{that  they  should  not  flee). 

Nitemur  ut  vincamus,  ive  shall  strive  to  conquer. 

Alter!  fortes  erant,  alter!  fugerunt,  the  one  party  were  brave,  the 
other  fled. 

LESSON  LX. 

Pugnaturi  sumusj  we  are  going  tojight. 

Hoc  mihi  faciendum  est,  this  {thing)  must  be  done  by  me ;  I  must  do  this. 
Quis  nobis  mittendus  fuit  ?  who  ought  to  have  been  sent  by  us  ?  whom 
ought  we  to  have  sent  f 

Ducend!  erunt,  they  will  have  to  be  led. 

LESSON  LXIV. 

The  subject  of  each  Impersonal  form  is  printed  in  italics. 
Mihi  non  exspecta-ndwai  est,  /  must  not  wait  {delay  must  not  be  made  by 
me). 

Pugnd-tura.  est,  fighting  was  carried  on. 

Z7ie-ndum  est  arm!s,  use  must  be  made  of  the  arms. 

Iiicuit  Caio  Romam  venire,  Caius  might  have  come  to  Rome  {it  was  per- 
mitted to  Caius  to  come  to  Rome). 

Oportuit  me  injurids  ferre,  1  ought  to  have  borne  the  injuries  {it  was 
necessary  for  me  to  bear  the  injuries).  This  sentence  may  also  be  written; 
Injuriae  mihi  f  erendae  f  uerunt. 

Optimum  v!sum  est  copids  mittere,  it  seemed  best  to  send  troops. 

Urbem  expugnare  potuit,  he  could  have  stormed  the  city. 

LESSON  LXV. 

Fit  ut  naves  capiantur,  it  happens  that  the  ships  are  taken. 

Dixit  fore  ut  sub  jugum  mitteremur,  he  said  that  we  should  be  sent 
under  the  yoke  (literally,  that  it  would  come  to  pass  that,  etc.). 

Non  est  dubium  qu!n  Justus  sit,  there  is  no  doubt  {it  is  not  doubtful) 
that  he  is  just  (about  his  being  just). 

Caesar  non  is  {=  talis)  fuit,  qui  (=  ut  is)  fugeret,  Caesar  was  not  the 
man  to  flee  (literally,  not  such  a  man  that  he  would  flee). 


GE:f^EEAL   YOOABULAET. 


Latin -Englishf 


pers.,  personal, 
y\m\,  plural.  '" 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

ahh,  ablative,  int.  ^  future. 

adj.,  adjective,  gen.,  genitive, 

ace,  accusative,  impers.,  impersonal, 

adv.,  adverb.  indecl.,  indeclinable, 

coll.,  collective.  indef.,  indefinite. 

comp.,  compas^ative.  inf.,  injinitive. 

conj.,  conjunction,  interrog.,  interrogative, 

def.,  defective.  irr,,  irregular. 

deg.,  degree,  m.,  masculine, 

dem.,  demonstrative.  n.,  neuter. 

dep.,  dejjonent.  nom.,  nominative. 

diff.,  difference.  num.,  numeral. 

dim.,  diminutive.  "paxt.,  participle. 

distrib.,  distributive,  ipsLSS.^  passive, 

f.,  feminine,  i^eri.,  perfect. 

Numeral  Adjectives  (except  unus,  duo,  tres,  mille)  are  wo*  ^ivew  /w  ^Au 
Vocabulary  ^  but  may  be  found  in  the  lists,  page  242. 


prep.,  preposition, 

pres.,  present. 

ipron.,  pronoun. 

quest.,  question. 

refl.,  reflexive, 

rel.,  relative. 

semi-dep.,  semi-deponent. 

sing.,  singular. 

sup.,  superlative, 

voc,  vocative. 


A. 

a,  ab,  prep,  with  abl.  [A  is  used  only 
before  a  consonant;  ab,  before  a 
vowel  or  consonant],  from,  by,  on 
the  side  of;  a  dextr5  cornu,  on 
the  right  wing.  Sometimes  used  as 
an  adverb  (=  ojf );  as,  ab  millibus 
passuum  quinque,^ve  miles  off. 

abdo,  dere,  didi,  ditum  (ab  +  do), 
remove,  hide.  Sese  in  silvas,  to 
go  into  the  forests  and  hide. 

abduco,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (ab  + 
duco),  lead  away,  withdraw. 

abeo,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum  (ab  +  eo), 
go  away,  depart, 

absum,  esse,  fui  (ab  +  sum),  be 
absent  (away),  be  distant,  be  wanting. 


ac,  conj.    See  atque. 

acceptus,  a,  um,  part,  as  adj.  (ac- 

cipio),     acceptable,    welcome,    6e- 

loved. 
accido,   ere,  accidi   (ad  +  cado), 
fall  upon,    happen;    accidit   (im- 
pers.), it  happens. 
accipio,  ere,  cepi,  ceptum  (ad  + 

capio),  receive,  accept. 
accuso,    are,    avi,    atum    (ad  + 

causa),  accuse,  blame. 
acer,    acris,    acre,    sharp,    keen, 

eager,  vigorous. 
acies,  ei,  f.,  old  gen.,  acie  (root  ac 

in  acer),  sharp  edge,  keenness,  line 

of  battle. 
acriter,  acrius,  acerrime  (acer), 

vigorously,  keenly,  fiercely. 


270 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


acutuS}  a,  um,  sharp,  pointed. 
ad,  prep,  with  ace,  to,  towards,  near, 

in  {into)  the  vicinity  of,  according 

to,  for. 
ad,  adv.  (with  numerals),  about. 
adamo,    are,    avi,    atum    (ad  + 

amo),  love  exceedingly,  covet. 
adduce,    ere,    xi,    ctum    (ad  + 

duco),  lead  to,  induce,  infuence. 
adeo,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum  (ad  +  eo), 

go  to,  approach,  visit, 
adhibeo,  ere,  ui,  itum  (ad  +  ha- 

beo),  summon,  invite. 
adorior,  iri,  ortus  sum,  dep.  (ad 

+  orior,  rise  up  against),  attach. 
adscisco,  ere,  scivi,  scitum  (ad  + 

solo),  receive,  admit. 
adsum,  esse,  adfui  or  affui  (ad  -f 

sum),  be  near,  be  present,  aid. 
adventus,   us,    m.    (ad  +  venio), 

coming,  arrival. 
adversus,    a,    um    (ad  +  verto, 

turn),   contrary,    opposite,  face  to 

face. 
aedificium,  I,  n.  (aedifico),  build- 
ing. 
aedifico,    are,    avi,   atum,  build, 

construct. 
Aeduus,    a,   um,    of    the    Aedui, 

Aeduan, 
Aeduus,  i,  m.  an  Aeduan;  (plur.) 

the  Aedui,  a  Gallic  tribe, 
aeger,  gra,  grum,  sich,  feeble. 
aegre,  aegrius,  aegerrime  (aeger), 

with  difficulty,  scarcely,  hardly. 
aequus,  a,  um,  equal,  just,  right. 
aestas,  atis,  f.,  summer. 
affero,  ferre,  attuli,  allatum  (ad 

+  fero),  bring  (to). 
afficio,  ere,  feci,  fectum  (ad  + 

facio),   affect,    injluence ;    dolore 

affici,  to  be  greatly  vexed,  or  dis- 
tressed. 
ager,  agri,  Wi.,feld,  territory. 
aggredior,  edi,  essus  sum,  dep. 

(ad  +  gradior),  go  against,  attack, 
agmen,  inis,  n.  (ago),  army  (on  the 

march) ;  primum  agmen,  the  van; 

novissimum  agmen,  the  rear. 
ago,  ere,  egi,  actum,  lead,  drive, 

act,  do,  treat  (=  discourse). 


agricola,    ae,    m.    (ager  +  colo), 

farmer. 

agricultura,  ae,  f.  (ager  +  colo), 
agriculture, 

alacer,  cris,  ere,  eager,  active. 

albus,  a,  um,  white. 

alienus,  a,  um  (alius),  another^s, 
foreign,  unfavorable. 

aliquis  (qui),  qua,  quid  (quod), 
indef.  pron.,  some,  any,  some  one, 
any  one  (or  thing). 

alius,  a,  ud  (gen.  alius),  other,  an- 
other; alius  ....  alius,  one  .... 
another;  alii  aliam  in  partem, 
some  in  one  direction  and  some  in 
another. 

Allobroges,  um,  m.  (sing.  Allo- 
brox),  the  Allobroges,  a  people  in 
the  southeastern  part  of  Gaul. 

Alpes,  ium,  f.,  the  Alj)s. 

alter,  era,  erum  (gen.  alterius), 
the  other  {oi  two),  the  second;  alter 
....  alter,  the  one  . ...  the  other. 

altitudo,  inis,   f.   (altus),   height, 


altus,  a,  um,  high,  tall,  lofty,  deep, 
amans,  tis  (amo),  part,  as  adj.,  lov- 
ing, affectionate, 
Ambarri,  orum,  m.,  the  Aedui  Am- 

barri,  clients  of  the  Aedui,  north  of 

the  Allobroges. 
amicitia,  ae,  f.  (amicus),  friend^ 

ship. 
amicus,  a,  um  (amo),  friendly, 
amicus,  i,  m.  (amo),  fiend. 
amitto,  ere,  misi,  missum  (a  + 

mitto),  send  away,  let  go,  lose. 
amo,  are,  avi,  atum,  love,  be  fond 

of. 
amor,  oris,  m.  (amo),  love,  affection. 
amplius,  adv.  (comp.  of   ample), 

more,  further. 
amplus,   a,  um,   of  large    extent, 


an,  interrog.  adv.,  or. 

angustiae,  arum,  f.  (angustus), 
narrow  pass,  defle. 

angustus,  a,  um,  narrow. 

animadverto,  ere,  tl,  sum  (ani- 
mus +  ad  +  verto,  turn),  notice, 
punish  (Eng.  "attend  to"). 


GENEKAL   VOCABULARY. 


271 


animal,    alls,  n.,    living   creature, 

animal. 
animus,   i,   m.,    mind,    disposition; 

esse  in  animo,  intend. 
annon,  interrog.  adv.,  or  not;  used 

only  in  direct  questions, 
annus,  i,  m.,  year. 
ante,  prep,  with  ace,  before. 
ante,     adv.,     before,     ago;    paulo 

ante,  a  little  while  ago. 
antea,    adv.    (ante  +  is),    before, 

formerly. 
antequam,    or    ante  ....  quam, 

conj.  (literally,  before  than,  or  that), 

before. 
Antonius,  i,  m.,  Antonius,  a  Roman 

name. 
appello,    are,    avi,    atum,    call, 

name. 
Aprilis,  e,    of  April;    Kalendae 

Apriles,   the  April  Kalends,  the 

first  of  April. 
apud,  prep,  with  ace,  near,   with, 

among,  in  the  presence  of. 
Aquileia,  ae,  f.,  Aquileia,  a  town  at 

the  head  of  the  Adriatic. 
Aquitani,    orum,     m.,    people    of 

Aquitania,  the  Aquitanians. 
Aquitania,   ae,   f.,   Aquitania,   the 

southwestern  division  of  Gaul. 
Arar,  aris,  m.   (ace.  Ararim),  the 

Arar,  now  the  Saone,  tributary  of 

the  Rhone, 
arbitrium,  i,  n.,  judgment,  will. 
arbitror,  ari,atus  sum,  de\).,  judge, 

think. 
arcesso,  ere,  ivi,  itum,  summon, 

invite. 
Ariovistus,    i,    m.,     Ariovistus,    a 

king  of  the  Germans. 
arma,  orum,  n.,  arms,  weapons. 
ars,    artis,    f.,    5^*7/,    art,    science, 

pursuit. 
Arverni,  orum,  m.,  the  Arverni,  a 

Gallic  people. 
arx,  arcis,  f.,  citadel,  stronghold. 
Athenae,  arum,  f.,  Athens,  a  city 

of  Greece. 
atque  (or  ac),  conj.  (ad  +  que),  and 

too,  and  also ;  with  words  of  com- 
parison, as,  than. 


attente,  adv.  (attentus),  attentive- 
ly, diligently. 

attentus,  a,  um,  attentive, 

attingo,  ere,  tigi,  tactum  (ad  + 
tango),  touch,  border  on,  reach. 

auctoritas,  atis,   f.,  authority,   in^ 

^  Jluence,  power. 

audacter  (or  audaciter),  adv. 
(audax),  boldly,  courageously . 

audax,  acis  (audeo),  bold,  auda- 
cious, daring. 

audeo,  ere,  ausus  sum,  semi-dep. 
(N.  81),  dare,  venture. 

audiens,  part,  as  adj.  (audio), 
obedient. 

audio,  ire,  ivi,  itum,  hear,  hear  of. 

aufero,  ferre,  abstuli,  ablatum 
(ab  +  fero),  bear  away,  remove. 

Aulus,  i,  m.,  Aulus,  a  Roman  per- 
sonal name. 

aut,  conj.,  or;  aut ....  aut,  either 
. ...  or. 

autem,  conj.,  but,  moreover,  how- 
ever. 

auxilium,  i,  n.,  aid,  assistance ; 
(plur.)  auxiliaries,  auxiliary  troops. 

avus,  i,  m.,  grandfather. 


barbarus,  a,  um,  foreign,  strange ; 
barbari,  orum,  m.,  barbarians. 

beatus,  a,  um,  happy,  fortunate. 

Belgae,  arum,  m.,  the  Belgae,  a 
people  of  Northern  Gaul. 

bellicosus,  a,  um  (bellum),  war- 
like, eager  for  war. 

bello,  are,  avi,  atum  (bellum), 
carry  on  war,  fight. 

bellum,  1,  n.,  war, 

bene,  adv.  (bonus),  wdl,  success- 
fully, 

beneficium,  i,  n.  (bene  +  facio), 
favor,  kindness. 

Bibracte,  is,  n.",  Bibracte,  the  chief 
city  of  the  Aedui. 

biduum,  i,  n.  (bis  +  dies),  space 
of  two  days, 

biennium,  I,  n.  (bis  -f-  annus), 
space  of  two  years. 


272 


GENERAL  VOCABULAEY. 


Boii,  orum,  m.  the  Boii,  a  wander- 
ing people  of  Germany  and  Gaul. 

bonus,  a,  um,  good,  friendly,  well- 
disposed;  bona,  orum,  n.,  goods, 
property. 

brevia,  e,  short,  brief. 

Britannia,  ae,  f.,  the  island  of  Brit- 


cado,  ere,  cecidi,  casum,  fall, 
perish. 

caedo,  ere,  cecidi,  caesum,  cut, 
hill. 

Caesar,  aris,  m.,  Caius  Julius 
Caesar,  a  famous  Roman  general, 
conqueror  of  Gaul. 

Caius,  i,  m.,  Caius,  a  Roman  personal 
name. 

calamitas,  atis,  f.,  calamity,  disas- 
ter, loss. 

calcar,  aris,  n.  (calx,  heel),  spur. 

Calendae,  see  Kalendae. 

capio,  ere,  cepi,  captum,  take, 
seize,  select,  adopt,  reach. 

caput,  itis,  n.,  head,  capital  (chief 
city). 

carrus,  i,  m.,  cart,  wagon. 

Carthago,  see  Karthago. 

carus,  a,  um,  dear,  beloved,  precious. 

Cassianus,  a,  um  (Cassius),  per- 
taining to  Cassius,  Cassian;  bello 
Cassiano,  in  the  war  with  Cassius. 

Cassius,  i,  m.,  Cassius,  a  Roman 
name;  Lucius  Cassius,  the  consul 
slain  by  the  Helvetii. 

castellum,  i,  n.  (dimin.  of  cas- 
trum),  fort,  redoubt. 

Casticus,  i,  m.,  Casticus,  a  chief  of 
the  Sequani. 

castra,  orum,  n.  (sing,  castrum, 
fort),  camp,  encampment. 

casus,  us,  m.  (cado),  that  which 
befalls,  chance,  misfortune,  acci- 
dent. 

Catamantaloedes,  is,  m.,  Cata- 
mantaloedes,  father  of  Casticus. 

Caturiges,  um,  m.,  the  Caturiges^  a 
Gallic  tribe. 


causa,  ae,  f .,  cause,  reason,  excuse  ; 
causam  dicere,  to  plead  a  case ; 
causa  (with  a  gen.  preceding),  ybr 
the  sake  {of). 

celer,  eris,  ere,  swift,  quick. 

celeriter,  adv.  (celer),  swiftly, 
quickly. 

celo,  are,  avi,  atum,  hide,  conceal. 
N.  141,  Remark  1. 

Celtae,  arum,  ra.,  the  Celts,  Gauls, 
a  people  of  central  Gaul. 

Centrones,  um,  m.,  the  Centrones, 
a  Gallic  tribe. 

centurio,  onis,  m.  (centum),  cen- 
turion, captain  of  100. 

certus,  a,  um,  sure,  certain;  certi- 
orem  facere,  to  inform. 

cibarius,  a,  um  (cibus,  food),  per- 
taining to  food;  cibaria,  orum, 
n.,  provisions,  supplies. 

Cicero,  onis,  m.,  Marcus  TmIUus 
Cicero,  a  famous  Roman  orator. 

circiter,  adv.  of  degree,  about, 
nearly. 

circum,  prep,  with  ace,  about, 
around,  near,  in  the  neighborhood 
of- 

circumduco,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (cir- 
cum +  duco),  lead  around,  draw 
around, 

circumvenio,  ire,  veni,  ventum 
(circum  +  venio),  come  around, 
surround,  deceive,  cheat. 

cis,  prep,  with  ace,  on  this  side  of 

Cisalpinus,  a,  um  (cis  +  Alpes), 
on  this  side  of  the  Alps  (south  of  the 
Alps),  Cisalpine. 

citerior,  us  (cis;  N.  34),  on  this 
side,  hither. 

citra,  prep,  with  ace.  (cis),  on  this 
side  of. 

civis,  is,  m.  and  f.,  citizen,  fellow- 
citizen. 

ci vitas,  atis,  f.  (civis),  state,  citi- 
zenship. 

clarus,  a,  um,  bright,  clear,  loud. 

claudo,  ere,  si,  sum,  shut,  close; 
claudere  agmen,  close  the  line  of 
march,  bring  up  the  rear. 

cliens,  tis,  m.  and  f.,  dependant, 
subject,  client* 


GENEEAL  VOCABULARY. 


273 


Cneius,  I,  m.,  C nexus,  a  Roman  per- 
sonal name. 

coemo,  ere,  emi,  emptum  (con  + 
emo),  buy^  buy  up, 

coepi,  isse,  def.  vb,  (N.  91,  1),  be- 
gan, have  begun ;  part,  coeptus. 

cognosco,  ere,  novi,  nitum  (con 
+  nosco),  become  acquainted  with, 
ascertain,  find  out^  know,  N.  91, 
2,  Rem. 

cogo,  ere,  coegi,  coactum  (con  + 
ago),  bring  together^  collect,  force, 
compel. 

cohors,  tis,  f.,  cohort,  the  tenth  part 
of  a  legion. 

cohortor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep. 
vb.  (con  +  hortor),  encourage,  ex- 
hort. 

collatus,  part,  of  confer©. 

coUis,  is,  m.,  hill. 

coUoquor,  i,  cutus  sum,  dep.  vb. 
(con  +  loquor),  speah  with,  con- 
verse, confer. 

colo,  ere,  ui,  cultum,  till,  cultivate, 
honor. 

comburo,  ere,  bussi,  bustum, 
(con  +  tiro,  burn),  burn  up. 

commeatus,  us,  m.  (commeo), 
means  of  transport,  supplies,  pro- 
visions. 

commeo,  are,  avi,  atum  (con  + 
meo,  go),  go  bach  and  forth,  visit. 

committo,  ere,  misi,  missum  (con 
+  mitto),  join,  connect ;  proelium 
commit tere,  to  join  battle,  begin 
an  engagement.  Also,  cause,  give 
occasion. 

commoveo,  ere,  movi,  motum 
(con  +  moveo),  move  greatly,  ex- 
cite, alarm. 

communis,  ire,  Ivi,  itum  (con  + 
munio),  fortify  on  all  sides,  in- 
trench, secure. 

compare,  are,  avi,  atum  (con  4- 
paro),  make  ready,  get,  procure, 
bring  together. 

compleo,  ere,  evi,  etum  (con  + 
pleo,  fill),  fill  up,  finish,  complete ; 
montem,  cover. 

oomplures,  ia  (con  +  plures), 
%evcral  (together),  very  many. 


comports,  are,  avi,  atum  (con  + 
ports),  bring  together,  collect, 

con,  inseparable  prefix,  together  (or 
adds  emphasis). 

cSnatum,  i,  n.,  also  cSnatus,  us, 
m.  (cSnor),  attempt,  undertaking, 

concedS,  ere,  cessi,  cessum,  yield, 
grant,  concede. 

concidS,  ere,  cidi  (con  +  cadS), 
fall,  perish. 

concidS,  ere,  cidi,  cisum  (con  + 
caedS),  cut  to  pieces,  cut  down, 
kill. 

conciliS,  are,  avi,  atum  (concili- 
um), unite,  win,  procure,  secure. 

concilium,  i,  n.,  council,  assembly. 

concursus,  us,  m.  (con  +  currS), 
running  together,  onset,  attack. 

condemns,  are,  avi,  atum  (con  + 
damns),  sentence,  condemn. 

condiicS,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (con  + 
diicS),  lead  together,  collect,  hire. 

confers,  ferre,  tuli,  coUatum 
(con  +  ferS),  bring  together,  col- 
lect; se  conferre,  to  betake  them' 
selves, 

confertus,  a,  um,  close,  crowded, 

conficiS,  ere,  feci,  fectum  (con-h 
f ado),  finish,  accomplish,  exhaust. 

confirms,  are,  avi,  atum  (firmus), 
make  firm,  establish,  assure,  en-- 
courage. 

congredior,  i,  gressus  sum,  dep. 
vb.  (con  +  gradior,  go),  meet 
(with),  contend,  ^^come  on.'^ 

conjiciS,  ere,  jeci,  jectum  (con  -f- 
jaciS),  throw  together,  hurl,  put. 

conjungS,  ere,  xi,  ,ctum  (con  + 
jungS),  join  together,  unite. 

conjuratiS,  Snis,  f.  (conjtirS),  con- 
spiracy. 

conjiirS,  are,  avi,  atum  (con  + 
jurS),  swear  together,  conspire. 

cSnor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  vb.,  en- 
deavor, try,  attempt. 

consanguineus,  a,  um  (con  + 
sanguis,  blood),  related  by  blood; 
as  a  noun,  kindred,  relatives. 

consciscS,  ere,  scivi,  scitum  (con 
+  sciS),  approve ;  sibi  mortem,  to 
commit  i 


274 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


conscrlbS,  ere,  psl,  ptum  (con  + 
scribo),  write  in  a  list,  enroll  en- 
list, levy* 

consequor,  I,  cutus  sum  (con  + 
sequor),  dep.  vb.,  follow  afters 
overtake,  obtain. 

consido,  ere,  sedi,  sessum  (con  + 
sido,  settle),  settle,  encamp. 

consilium,  i,  n.,  counsel,  advice, 
plan,  design,  purpose,  wisdom,  coun- 
cil of  war, 

consimilis,  e  (con  +  similis),  quite 
like,  very  similar, 

consists,  ere,  stiti,  stitum  (con  + 
sisto),  take  a  stand,  halt,  depend 
on,  consist  in. 

conspectus,  us,  m.  (conspicio), 
full  view,  sight,  presence. 

conspicio,  ere,  spexi,  spectum 
(con  +  specie,  look),  behold^  look 
at,  perceive,  see. 

constituo,  ere,  ui,  iitum  (con  + 
statuo)  place  together,  establish, 
determine,  erect. 

constitutus,  a,  um,  part,  as  adj., 
established,  appointed. 

consto,  are,  stiti,  statum  (con  + 
sto),  stand  firm,  agree ;  constat, 
impers.,  it  is  evident,  settled,  ^^  stands 
to  reason.^* 

consuesco,  ere,  suevi,  suetum 
(con  +  suesco,  be  wont),  become 
accustomed,  be  wont ;  consue- 
VI,  /  am  accustomed.  N.  91,  2, 
Rem. 

consul,  ulis,  m.,  consul,  one  of  two 
chief  magistrates  at  Rome,  elected 
annually. 

consiimo,  ere,  sumpsi,  sumptum 
(con  +  sumo),  spend,  destroy,  con- 
sume. 

contends,  ere,  di,  tum  (con  + 
tends,  stretch,  strain),  strive,  has- 
ten, contend,  fight. 

contentus,  a,  um  (contineS),  con- 
tent, satisfied. 

continenter,  adv.  (contineS),  un- 
interruptedly, without  cessation. 

contineS,  ere,  ui,  tentum  (con  + 
teneS),  hold  together,  hem  in, 
hound. 


contra,  prep,  with  ace,  against^  qppo* 
site, 

conveniS,  Ire,  veni,  ventum  (con 
+  veniS),  come  together,  assemble, 
meet ;  convenit,  impers.,  it  is  fit- 
ting, agreed. 

convocS,  are,  avi,  atum  (con  + 
vocS),  call  together,  summon. 

cSpia,  ae,  f.,  plenty,  abundance  ; 
copiae,  arum,  f.,  forces,  troops, 
supplies,  wealth. 

Corinthus,  i,  f.,  Corinth,  a  city  in 
Greece. 

cornii,  us,  n.,  horn,  wing  (of  an 
army);  a  sinistrS  cornu,  on  the 
left  wing. 

corSna,  ae,  f.,  crown,  wreath. 

corpus,  oris,  n.,  body,  person. 

Crassus,  i,  m.,  Crassus,  a  Roman 
name. 

creber,  bra,  brum,  frequent,  nu- 
merous. 

credS,  ere,  didi,  ditum,  trust,  be- 
lieve. 

cremS,  are,  avi,  atum,  burn. 

creS,  are,  avi,  atum,  create,  make, 
elect,  appoint. 

culpS,  are,  avi,  atum,  blame. 

cultus,  lis,  m.  (colS),  culture,  lux- 
ury, civilization. 

cum,  prep,  with  abl.,  with,  in  com- 
pany with. 

cum  ==  quum. 

cupiditas,  atis,  f .  (cupidus),  eager- 
ness,  desire,  ambition. 

cupidus,   a,  um,    eager,   desirous, 


cupiS,  ere,  ivi,  itum,  desire,  long 
for,  wish. 

cur,  interrog.  adv.,  why  ?  for  what 
purpose  f 

cura,  ae,  f.,  care,  regard,  attention. 

curS,  are,  avi,  atum  (cura),  care 
for,  manage,  attend  to;  with  ge- 
rundive, cause  to  be  done ;  as,  pon- 
tem  faciendum  curare,  cause  a 
bridge  to  be  built. 

currS,  ere,  cucurri,  cursum, 
run. 

currus,  lis,  m.  (currS),  chariot, 
wagon. 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


275 


cursus,  us,  m.  (curro),   running j 

speedy  course, 
custos,    odis,    m.  and  f., 

guard. 


damno,  are,  avi,  atum,  condemn, 

sentence. 
de,  prep,  with  abl.,/ro?7i,  down  from, 

of,  concerning,  about  (of),  during, 

in;    de  secunda  vigilia,  in  the 

second  watch.   In  compounds,  down, 

away, 
dea,  aej  f.,  goddess. 
debeo,  ere,  ui,  itum  (de  +  habe6), 

owe,  ought,  must. 
decedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessum  (de  + 

cedo,  go  away),  retire,  withdraw, 

depart,  die. 
dedo,  ere,  didi,  ditum  (de  +  do), 

give  up,  surrender,  deliver  up. 
deduce,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (de  +  du- 

c6),  lead  down,  withdraw,  conduct, 
defends,  ere,  di,  sum  (de  +  fen- 
do,  only  in  compounds),  ward  off, 

defend,  protect. 
defensor,  oris,  m.  (defend©),  de- 

fender. 
dejectus,  a,  um  (dejicio),  part,  as 

adj.,  downcast,  disappointed. 
deleo,    ere,    evi,    etum,    destroy, 

overthroiu, 
delibero,  are,  avi,  atum,  weigh, 

consider,  deliberate. 
deligo,  ere,  legi,   lectum   (de  + 

lego,  select),  choose  out,  select. 
demonstro,  are,  avi,  atum  (de  + 

monstro),  point  out,  show,  declare. 
depopulor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  vb. 

(de  +  v^v^ot), plunder,  lay  waste, 

devastate. 
deprecator,  6ris,m.  (de  +  precor, 

pray),  intercessor,  mediator. 
desisto,  ere,  stiti,  stitum  (de  + 

sisto,  stand),  cease,  desist. 
despicio,    ere,     spexi,    spectum 

(de  +  specie,  look),  look  down  on, 

despise. 
deus,  i,  m.,  god,  deity. 


dexter,  tra,  trum,  on   the   right 

hand,    right;     dextra    (manus, 

understood),  right  hand. 
dico,  ere,  xi,  ctum,  say,  mention, 

tell,  appoint;  causam  dicere,  to 

plead  a  case, 
dictio,    onis,  f.    (dico),    speaking, 

pleading. 
dictum,   i,   n.    (dico),   word,    com- 

maml;  die  to  audiens,  obedient, 
didici,  perf .  of  disco, 
dies,   ei,   m.    (sometimes    f.),  ''day, 

time;  multo  die,  late  in  the  day; 

diem  ex  die,  day  after  day. 
differs,  ferre,   distuli,    dilatum 

(dis  +  fero),  differ, 
diflacilis,  e  (dis  +  facilis),  difficult, 

difficult  to  pass. 
difficultas,     atis,     f.     (difficilis), 

trouble,  difficulty. 
dignus,  a,  um,  worthy,  deserving, 
diligens,     tis,     diligent,    attentive, 

careful. 
diligenter,    adv.    (diligens),  with 

care,  punctually. 
dimitto,  ere,  misi,  missum  (dis 

+  mitto),  send  different  ways,  dis- 
miss, send  out.      ^ 
dis  (or  di),  inseparable  prefix,  apart, 

in  various    directions,    hither    and 

thither. 
disced©,  ere,  cessi,  cessum  (dis 

+  cedo),  depart,  go  away, 
disco,  ere,  didici,  learn, 
dispone,  ere,  posui,  positum  (dis 

+  pono),  place  here  and  there,  dis- 
tribute, station. 
dissimilis,  e,  unlike,  dissimilar. 
ditior,  see  dives.   N.  36,  a, 
diu,   -tius,  -tissime,  for   a   long 

time,  long. 
dives,  ditior,  ditissimus,  rich. 
Divico,  onis,  m.,  Divico,  a  Helvetian 

noble. 
divide,   ere,  visi,  visum,  divide, 

separate. 
divisus  (divido),  part,  as  adj.,  di- 


Divitiacus,  i,  m.,  Diviiiacus,  brother 
of  Dumnorix,  an  Aeduan,  friend  of 
Caesar. 


276 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  give,  grants 

permit,  allow. 

doceo,  ere,  ui,  ctum,  teach,  in- 
form, show,  instruct. 

dolor,  oris,  m.,  pain,  grief. 

dolus,  i,  m.,  cunning,  deceit,  f^aud. 

domus,  us  (i),  f.,  house,  home; 
doml,  at  honie. 

donum,  i,  n.  (do),  gift,  present. 

dubitatio,  onis,  f.  (dubito),  doubt, 
hesitation. 

dubito,  are,  avi,  atum,  dmbt,  hesi- 
tate (with  inf.). 

dubius,  a,  um,  doubtful,  uncertain. 

duco,  ere,  xi,  ctum,  lead,  guide, 
bring,  7'eckon,  think,  put  off;  in 
matrimonium,  marry. 

dum,  conj.,  while,  until,  provided. 

Dumnorix,  igis,  m.,  Dumnorix, 
brother  of  Divitiacus,  an  Aeduan. 

duo,  ae,  o,  num.  adj.,  two. 

duplex,  icis  (duo  +  plico,  fold), 
twofold,  double. 

dux,  ducis,  m.  and  f.  (duco),  leader, 
guide,  chief. 


e  (or  ex),  out  of,  from. 

educo,  ere,  xl,  ctum  (e  +  duco), 

lead  forth,  draw  out. 
effemino,  are,  avi,  atum  (ex  + 

femina,  woman),  make  womanish, 

weaken,  enervate. 
effero,  ferre,  extuli,  elatum  (ex 

+  f  ero),  carry  or  bear  forth,  carry 

out,  lift  up,  elate. 
ego,  mei,  pers.  pron.,  /. 
egredior,  i,  gressus  sum,  dep.  vb. 

(e  +  gradior,  go),  go  forth  or  out, 

depart. 
ejicio,    ere,    jeci,    jectum    (e  + 

jacio),  cast  out,  drive  forth,  expel; 

se  ejicere,  rush  forth. 
ejusmodi  (or  ejus  modi),  gen.  of 

is  +  modus  (N.  121),  of  that  sort 

or  kind,  such. 
emitto,  ere,  misi,   missum  (e  + 

mitto),  send  forth  or  out,  let  go, 

cast. 


enuntio,  are,  avi,  Stum  (e  +  nun- 
tio),  report,  announce,  declare. 

eo,  ire,  ivi,  itum,  irr.,  go,  march. 

eo,  adv.  (abl.  of  is),  thither;  as  abl. 
of  degree  of  diff.,  quo  magis  .  .  . 
eo  minus,  the  more  .  .  ,  the  less. 

eodem,  adv.  (abl.  of  idem),  to  the 
same  place. 

eques,  itis,  m.  (equus),  horseman ; 
(plur.)  equites,  um,  cavalry, 
knights. 

equitatus,  us,  m.  (equus),  cavalry 
(in  a  body). 

equus,  i,  m.,  horse. 

eripio,  ere,  ui,  reptum  (e  +  ra- 
pio),  snatch  away,  take  away,  res- 
cue. 

eruptio,  onis,  f.  (e  +  rumpo, 
break),  bursting  forth,  sortie,  sally. 

et,  conj.,  and,  also,  even;  et  . . .  et, 
both  .  .  .  and. 

etiam,  conj.  (et  +  jam),  and  also, 
even,  indeed,  yet,  besides ;  sed 
etiam,  but  also. 

etsi,  conj.  (et  +  si),  even  if,  although. 

exemplum,  i,  n.,  example. 

exeo,  ire,  ivi,  itum  (ex  +  eo),  go 
forth  or  out,  march  out. 

exercitus,  us,  m.  (exerceo,  train), 
trained  army,  army,  infantry. 

existimo,  are,  avi,  atum  (ex  + 
aestimo,  regard),  Judge,  think, 
consider. 

expeditus,  a,  um  ( ex  +  pes,  ybof), 
literally,  freed  (from  a  snare),  un- 
encumbered, light-armed,  without 
baggage,  free  from  obstacles,  handy, 


explorator,    oris,    m.     (exploro, 

search  out),  spy,  scout. 
expugno,  are,  avi,  atum  (ex  + 

pugno),  take  by  storm,  storm,  cap- 
ture. 
exsequor,  i,  cutus  sum,  dep.  vb. 

(ex  +  sequor),  follow  out,  fnish, 

assert,  maintain. 
exspecto,  are,  avi,  atum  (ex  + 

specto),  look  for,  wait  for,  await, 

delay,  wait  to  see. 
exterus,  a,  um  (ex),  more  common 

in  the  comp.  and  sup.,    exterior. 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


277 


extremus  (or  extimus),  outer ^ 
foreign. 

extra,  prep,  with  ace,  also  adv.,  on 
the  outside  oj\  beyond^  besides. 

extremuaj  a,  um  (exterus),  outer- 
most, farthest^  most  remote,  extreme^ 
last. 

exuro,  ere,  ussi,  ustum  (ex  + 
tiro,  hurn)^  hum  up,  consume. 


fabula,  ae,  f.  (for,  speah),  story. 
facilis,  e  (facio),  easy  (to  do),  easy, 

practicable. 
facile,  adv.  (facilis),  easily,  readily. 
facio,   ere,  feci,  factum ;   (pass.) 

fio,  fieri,  factus  sum,  make,  do, 

perform,   construct ;    copiam   fa,- 

ceve,  furnish  a  supply ;  certiorem 

facere,  to  inform, 
factio,    onis,    f.    (facio),   faction, 

party. 
facultas,  atis,   f.   (facio),    ability, 

opportunity,     abundance,     s^^pply  ; 

(plur.)  resources. 
familia,  ae,  £.,  household,  retinue  of 

slaves  or  dependents,  family. 
felix,  lois,  happy. 
fere,  adv.,  almost,   nearly,  for  the 

most  part,  genejmlly. 
fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum,  irr.,  bear, 

carry,  bring,  endure,  produce. 
ferus,  a,  um,  loiUU  barbarous,  cruel. 
fidelis,  e  (fides),  trusty,  faithful. 
fides,  ei,  f.  (fido),  trust,  confidence, 

faith,   pledge,    promise,     security, 

protection. 
p.do,   ere,  fisus    sum,    semi-dep., 

trust. 
filia,  ae,  f.,  daughter. 
fllius,  i,  m.,  son. 
finio,  ire,  ivi,  itum  (finis),  limit, 

bound. 
finis,  is,  m.,  end,  limit,  boundary; 

(plur.)  territory,  country. 
finitimus,  a,  um  (finis),  bordering 

upon,  adjoining ;  as  a  noun  (plur.), 

neighbors. 


fio,  fieri,  factus  sum,  irr.,  pass,  of 
facio,  be  made,  become ;  fit,  im- 
pers.,  it  happens ;  certior  fio,  /  am 
informed. 

firmus,  a,  um,  firm,  strong,  power- 
ful, valiant. 

flagito,  are,  avi,  atum,  demand 
{earnestly  or  repeatedly),  dun. 

fleo,  ere,  evi,  etum,  weep,  cry, 
lament. 

fletus,  us,  m.,  weeping,  tears. 

florens,  tis  (fios),  flourishing,  pros- 
perous. 

flos,  oris,  m.,  flower. 

flumen,  inis,  n.  (fiuo),  river, 

fluo,  ere,  xi,  x.unijflow. 

fore  =  futurus  esse  ;  forem  = 
essem. 

fortis,  e  (fero),  strong,  brave,  val 
iant. 

fortiter,  adv.  (fortis),  bravely,  cour- 
ageously. 

fortitude,  inis,  f.  (fortis),  bravery, 
fortitude. 

fortuna,  ae,  f.  (fors,  chance),  for- 
tune, chance. 

fossa,  ae,  f.  (fodio,  dig),  ditch. 

frango,  ere,  fregi,  fr actum,  breah, 
crush,  subdue. 

frater,  tris,  m.,  brother,  ally. 

fretus,  a,  um,  relying  upon,  depend- 
ing on.     N.  151,  b. 

frumentarius,  a,  um  (frumen- 
tum),  belonging  to  corn,  abounding 
in  corn ;  res  friimentaria,  corn- 
supply,  supplies. 

friimentum,  i,  n.,  corn,  grain. 

fuga,  ae,  f.,  flight,  rout. 

fugio,  ere,  fugi,  fugitum,  flee, 
escape,  shun. 

fundo,  ere,  fiidi,  fusum,/>owr*  out, 
scatter,  rout.  . 


G. 

Gabinius,  i,  m.,  Gabinius,  a  Roman 
name. 

Gallia,  ae,  f.,  Gaul,  including  Bel- 
gium, France,  and  the  greater  part 
of  Switzerland. 


278 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


Gallicus,  a,  um,  Gallic. 

Gallus,  1,  m.,  a  Gaul;  as  a  noun, 

Galli,  the  Gauls. 
Garumna,  ae,  m.,  the  Garonne^  a 

river  of  Gaul, 
gaudeo,  ere,  gavisus  sum,  semi- 

dep.,  rejoice,  be  glad. 
Geneva  (or  Genava),  ae,  f .,  Geneva, 

a  city  of  the  Allobroges. 
genns,  eris,  n.,  birth,  race,  kind. 
Germania,  ae,  f.,  Germany. 
Germanus,  a,  um,   German;  as  a 

noun,  Germ.ani,  the  Germans. 
gero,   ere,   gessi,   gestum,    bear, 

carry  on  (war),  perform. 
gladius,  1,  m.,  sword. 
gl5ria,  ae,  f .,  glory,  fame, 
glorior,  ari,  atus   sum   (gloria), 

dep.,  boast,  glory. 
Graioceli,  orum,  m.,  the  Graioceli, 

a  people  of  Hither  Gaul, 
gratia,  ae,  f.  (gratus),/ai;or,  esteem, 

popularity,   influence,  friendship; 

gratia  (abl.),  for  the  sake  (of). 
gratulor,     ari,     atus    sum,    dep. 

(gratus),  congratulate,  wish  joy. 
gratus,  a,  um,  grateful,  agreeable, 

acceptable. 
gravis,  e,  heavy,  severe. 
graviter,    adv.    (gravis), 

severely. 


H. 

habeo,  ere,  ui,  itum,  have,  hold, 
regard,  consider,  deliver  (a  speech). 

Hariides,  um,  m.,  the  Harudes,  a 
German  tribe. 

Helvetius,  a,  um,  Helvetian;  as  a 
noun,  Helvetii,  orum,  the  Hel- 
«?e<mw5,^people  of  Helvetia  (Switzer- 
land). 

hiberna,  orum,  n.  (hiems),  winter- 
quarters  (really  an  adj.,  castra 
being  understood). 

hic,  haec,  hoc,  dem.  pron.,  this,  he, 
she,  it,  the  latter,  as  follows. 

hiemo,  are,  avi,  atum  (hiems), 
pass  the  winter,  winter. 

hiems,  emis,  f.,  winter. 


Hispania,  ae,  f.,  Spain. 

homo,   inis,    m.   and  f.,   a 
being  (man  or  woman),  man,  per- 
son.    (See  vir.) 

honor,  oris,  m.,  honor,  esteem,  office. 

hora,  ae,  f.,  hour. 

hortor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  exhort, 
encourage,  urge. 

hostis,  is,  m.  and  f .,  enemy  (public) ; 
inimicus,  personal  enemy. 

hiimanitas,  atis,  f.,  humanity,  kind- 


I. 

ibi,  adv.  (is),  there,  in  that  place. 
Iccius,  1,  m.,  Iccius,  a  chief  of  the 

Remi. 
idem,   eadem,  idem,    dem.  pron. 

(is  +  dem,  emphatic),  the  same, 
idoneus,  a,  um,  fit,  suitable. 
Idiis,   uum,  f.  plur.,  the  Ides,  the 

15th  of  March,  May,  July,  October ; 

13th  of  the  other  months, 
ignarus,    a,    um,    ignorant,    inex- 
perienced, 
ignavus,  a,  um,  idle,  cowardly, 
ignis,  is,  m.,  fire, 
ignosco,   ere,  novi,  notum    (in, 

not  +  nosco),    overlook,   pa7'don, 

forgive. 
illatus,  part,  of  inferS. 
ille,  ilia,    illud,    dem.  pron.,   that 

(yonder),  he,  she,  it,   the  former, 

the  well-known  or  famous. 
immortalis,    e    (in,    not   +  mor- 

talis),  immortal,  eternal, 
impedimentum,  i,  n.  (impediS), 

hindrance ;  (plur.)  heavy-baggage. 
impedio,  ire,  ivi,  itum  (in  +  pes), 

entangle,  hinder,  impede, 
impeditus,  a,  um  (impedio),  part. 

as    adj.,    hindered,    impeded,    ob- 

structed. 
impended,    ere    (in    +    pendeo, 

hang),  overhang,  impend,  threaten. 
imperator,  oris,  m.  (impero),  com- 
mander-in-chief general,  chief. 
imperitus,  a,  um  (in,  not  +  peri- 

tus,   skilled),  unskilled,    ignorant, 

unacquainted  with. 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


279 


imperium,  I,  n.  (impero),  com- 
mand, authority  J  ordei',  power^  gov- 
ernment, empire, 

impero,  are,  avi,  atum,  command, 
order,  rule  over,  levy  (troops). 

impetro,  are,  avi,  atum,  accom- 
plish, effect,  obtain  by  request. 

impetus,  us,  m.,  attach,  onset,  vio- 
lence, 

imploro,  are,  avi,  atum,  entreat, 
implore,  beg  for, 

impono,  ere,  posui,  positum  (in 
+  pono),  place  on,  impose  on, 

imports,  are,  avi,  atum  (in  + 
ports),  bring  in,  import. 

improviso,  adv.  (in,  not  +  pro- 
video,  foresee),  on  a  sudden,  un- 
expectedly, 

imus,  see  inferus. 

in,  prep,  with  ace.  and  abl.  (1)  With 
ace.  (answering question  Whither  f), 
into,  against,  towards;  in  reli- 
quum  tempus,  for  the  future ; 
in  Santonos,  into  the  country  of 
the  Santoni,  (2)  With  abl.  (an- 
swering question  Where  f),  in,  on, 
among,  over. 

incendo,  ere,  di,  sum,  set  fire  to, 
burn,  inflame,  excite, 

incertus,  a,  um  (in,  wo^  +  certus), 
uncertain,  doubtful. 

incipio,  ere,  cepi,  ceptum  (in  + 
capio),  talce  up,  begin,  commence ; 
supplies  the  present-stem  tenses  of 
coepi. 

incite,  are,  avi,  atum,  hasten, 
rouse,  incite,  spur  on. 

incolo,  ere,  colui  (in  -f-  colo), 
dwell,  inhabit. 

incommodum,  i,  n.  (in,  not  + 
commodum,  advantage),  misfor- 
tune, disaster. 

incredibilis,  e  (in,  not  -f  credo), 
incredible. 

inde,  adv.  (is),  from  that  place, 
thence. 

indicium,  i,  n.  (index,  informer), 
information ;  per  indicium  =  per 
indices. 

indico,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (in  +  dico), 
declare,  proclaim. 


indignus,  a,  um  (in,  not  +  dig* 
nus),  unworthy,  wrong. 

induce,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (in  +  duco), 
bring  on  or  in,  move,  induce,  influ- 
ence. 

ineo,  ire,  ivi,  itum  (in  +  eo), 
go  into,  enter,  begin  ;  consilium 
ineo,  I  form  a  plan. 

infelix,  icis  (in,  not  +  felix),  un- 
happy. 

infero,  ferre,  intuli,  illatum  (in 
+  f  ero),  bring  in  {upon,  or  against) : 
signa  inferre,  advance  (to  the  at- 
tack); bellum  inferre,  to  make 
war  on ;  spe  illata,  hope  being  in- 


inferus,  a,  um,  below;  Comp.  in- 
ferior, lower,  inferior ;  Sup.  infi- 
mus  (imus),  lowest,  lowest  part  of. 

influo,  ere,  xi,  xum  (in  +  fluo), 
flow  into,  flow,  empty  into. 

infra,  prep,  with  ace.;  also  an  adv., 
below. 

ingens,  tis,  huge,  vast,  mighty, 

inimicus,  a,  um  (in,  not  +  ami- 
cus), unfriendly,  hostile ;  as  a 
noun,  an  enem,y  (personal). 

initium,  i,  n.  (ineo),  beginning. 

injiiria,  ae,  f.  (in,  not  +  jus),  injury, 
wrong ;  injuria  (abl.),  unjustly, 

injustus,  a,  um  (in,  not  +  Justus), 
unjust,  wrong, 

inopinans,  tis  (in,  not  -f  opinor, 
think),  not  expecting,  unawares. 

inquam,  def.  (N.  91,  a),  say. 

insidiae,  arum,  f.  (in  +  sedeo,  sit), 
ambush,  plot,  treachery,  stratagem. 

insigne,  is,  n.  (insignis),  mark, 
badge;  (plur.)  insignia,  badges  of 
office. 

insignis,  e  (in  +  signum),  marked, 
distinguished,  noted,  remarkable. 

instituo,  ere,  ui,  utum  (in  + 
statuo,  establish),  establish,  ar- 
range, draw  up  (in  battle  array), 
bring  up,  train,  educate. 

institutum,  i,  n.  (instituo),  custom, 
practice. 

instruo,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (in  +  struo, 
build),  construct,  arrange,  draw  up 
(in  battle  array). 


280 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


insula,  ae,  f.,  island. 
integer,  gra,  grum  (in,  »ot  +  tan- 
go), sound,  fresh. 
intelligo,  ere,  lexi,  lectum  (inter 

+  lego),     perceive,      understand, 

know. 
intentus,  a,  um,  intent,  attentive, 
inter,    prep,    with    ace,    between, 

among,  during;  inter  se  amant, 

they  love  each  other. 
intercede,    ere,    cessi,    cessum 

(inter  +  cedo,  go),  go  between^ 

intervene. 
interdiii,   adv.    (inter  +  dies),   by 

day,  in  the  day-time. 
interea,  adv.   (inter  +  is),   in  the 

meantime,  meanwhile. 
interficio,  ere,  feci,  fectum  (inter 

+  facio),  kill,  slay. 
intermitto,    ere,    misi,  missum 

(inter  +  mitto),  cease,  interrupt, 

discontinue,  let  pass. 
internecio,  onis,  f.  (inter  +  neco, 

kill),  massacre. 
intra,   prep,  with    ace. ;    also  adv., 

within. 
invenio,  ire,  veni,  ventum  (in  + 

venio),  come  upon,  find,  discover, 

invent. 
invito,  are,  avi,  atum,  invite,  sum- 
mon. 
invitus,  a,  um,  unwilling;  me  in- 
vito, without  my  consent. 
ipse,  a,  um,  dem.  pron.,  self,  very, 

he,  she,  it. 
iratus,  a,  um  (ira,  anger),  angry, 

enraged. 
is,  ea,  id,  dem.  pron.,  that,  this,  he, 

she,  it. 
Iste,  a,  ud,  dem.  pron.,  that  (near 

3'ou),  that  (of  yours). 
ita,  adv.  (is),  in  that  manner,  so,  to 

such  a  degree ;  ita  ut  (uti),  just  as. 
Italia,  ae,  f.,  Italy. 
itaque,   conj.  (ita  +  que),  and  so, 

therefore,  accordingly.    N.  195,  5. 
item,  adv.  (is),  likewise,  also. 
iter,  itineris,  n.  (eo),   way,  road, 

journey,  march,  pass;  iter  mag- 
num,/orcec^  march. 


jacio,  ere,  jeci,  jactum,  throio, 
hurl, 

jam,  adv.,  now,  already. 

jubeo,  ere,  jussi,  jussum,  order, 
bid,  command. 

judex,  icis,  m.  (jiis  +  dico),  judge. 

jiidicium,  i,  n.  (judex),  court,  trial, 
judgment,  decision, 

judico,  are,  avi,  atum  (judex), 
judge,  decide. 

jugum,  i,  n.  (jungo),  yoke;  a  yoke 
formed  by  two  upright  spears  sup- 
porting a  third  (horizontal),  under 
which  a  defeated  army  was  made  to 
pass  in  token  of  subjection;  ridge 
of  a  mountain  or  hill. 

Jiilius,  i,  m.,  Julius,  a  Roman  name ; 
also,  as  an  adj.,  pertaining  to  (of) 
July. 

jumentum,  i,  n.  (jungo),  beast  of 
burden  (ox,  horse). 

jungo,  ere,  nxi,  nctum,  join,  con- 
nect. 

Jura,  ae,  m..  Jura,  a  mountain- 
chain  extending  from  the  Rhine  to 
the  Rhone. 

jiiro,  are,  avi,  atum  (jus),  Cake  aw 
oath,  swear,  promise  under  oa^k^ 

jus,  jiiris,  n.,  law,  right. 

jusjurandum,      jurisjurandi, 
(jiis  +  juro),  oath. 

Justus,  a,  um  (jus),  j^Msi,  right. 

K. 

Kalendae  (or  Calendae),  arumi 
f.,  the  Calends,  first  day  of  each 
month. 

Karthago  (or  Carthago),  inis,  f., 
Carthage,  a  city  of  North  Africa. 


Labienus,  i,  m.,  Labienus,  Caesar's 

ablest  lieutenant. 
labor,   oris,   m.,    toil,   labor,   hard' 

ship. 


GENERAL  VOCABULAET. 


281 


lacus,  us,  m.,  laTce. 

laetor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  (lae- 
tus,  glad),  rejoice^  exult. 

lapis,  idis,  m.,  stone. 

largitio,  onis,  f.  (largior,  bestow 
gifts),  liberality,  generosity,  brib- 
ery. 

latitude,  inis,  f.  (latus),  breadth, 
width. 

Latovici  (or  Latobrigi),  orum, 
m.,  the  Latovici,  a  Gallic  people. 

latus,  part,  of  fero. 

latus,  a,  um,  wide,  broad,  spa- 
cious. 

laudo,  are,  avi,  atum  (laus), 
praise,  commend, 

laus,  laudis,  i.,  praise,  glory. 

laxo,  are,  avi,  atum,  loosen,  open, 
expand ;  manipulos  laxare,  to 
open  the  ranlcs. 

legatio,  onis,  f.,  embassy,  legation. 

legatu^s,  1,  m.,  ambassador,  legate, 
lieutenant. 

legio,  onis,  f.,  legion,  consisting  of 
ten  cohorts  of  foot-soldiers  and  300 
cavalry  ;  the  total  number  varied 
from  4,200  to  6,000. 

lego,  ere,  legi,  lectum,  choose, 
select,  read. 

Lemannus,  i,  m.,  Lahe  Geneva. 

lenitas,  atis,  f.  (lenis,  gentle), 
gentleness,  smoothness, 

leo,  onis,  m.,  lion. 

levis,  e,  light. 

lex,  legis,  f.,  law. 

liber,  era,  erum,/ree. 

liber,  bri,  m.,  booh. 

libere,  adv.  (liber),  freely,  unre- 
servedly. 

liberi,  orum,  m.,  children. 

libero,  are,  avi,  atum  (liber), 
mahefree,  release,  liberate. 

libertas,  atis,  f.  (liber),  liberty, 
freedom. 

licet,  ere,  uit,  impers.,  it  is  allowed 
or  permitted ;  mihi  licet  ire, 
/  may  go. 

Lingones,  um,  m.,  the  Lingones, 
a  Gallic  people. 

lingua,  ae,  f.,  tongue,  language. 

linter,  tris,  f.,  boat,  skiff. 


littera  (or  litera),  f.,  (sing.)  letter 

(of  the  alphabet) ;  (plur.)  ^e^^er  (that 

is,  an  epistle),  document. 
locus,  i,  m.,  (plur.)  loca,  orum,  n., 

place,  situation,  condition, 
locutus,  part,  of  loquor. 
Londinium,  i,  n.,  London. 
longe,  adv.  (longus),  by  far,  far. 
longitiido,  inis,  f.  (longus),  length. 
longus,  a,  um,  long,  distant. 
loquor,  i,  lociitus  sum,  dep.,  speak, 

talk,  tell,  say. 
Lucilius,  i,  m.,  Lucilius,  a  Roman 

name. 
Lucius,    i,    m.,    Lucius,   a  Roman 

name. 
luna,  ae,  f.,  moon. 
lux,  liicis,  f.,  light ;  prima  luce, 

at  daybreak, 

M. 

magis,  adv.  (magnus),  more,  rather. 
magister,   tri,  m.   (mag-,  root  of 

magnus),  master,  teacher. 
magistratus,   us,   m.   (magister), 

office    of  magistrate,    magistracy, 

magistrate. 
magnitiido,    inis,    f.    (magnus), 

greatness,  size. 
magnopere,  adv.  (magno  +  ope- 

re),   very  much,    greatly,   exceed- 
ingly. 
magnus,  a,  um  (comp.  major;  sup. 

maximus),    great,    large ;     iter 

magnum,  forced  march, 
major  (with  or  without  natu),  older 

(N.  36,  b),  plur.  as  noun,  ancestors, 

elders. 
maleficium,  i,  n.  (male  +  facio), 

wrong-doing,  crime,  mischief, 
malo,  malle,  malui,  irr.  (magis  + 

volo),  choose  rather,  prefer. 
malus,  a,  um  (comp.  pejor;   sup. 

pessimus),  bad,  evil, 
mando,  are,  avi,  atum  (manus  + 

do),  2^ut  into  one^s  hands,  commit, 

consign,  command ;   fugae    se,    to 

betake  one^s  self  to  fight. 
maneo,    ere,     mansi,    mansum, 

stay,  remain,  abides 


282 


GENEKAL  VOCABULARY. 


manipulus,  I,  m.,  maniple,  a  com- 
pany of  soldiers,  three  of  which 
formed  a  cohort. 

manus,  us,  f.,  hand,  band  (of 
troops). 

Marcus,  i,  m.,  Marcus,  a  Roman 
name. 

mare,  is,  n.,  sea. 

mater,  tris,  f.,  mother. 

matrimonium,  i,  n.  (mater),  mar- 
riage ;  in  matr.  ducere,  to  marry. 

Matrona,  ae,  m.,  the  Matrona  (now 
the  Marne),  a  river  in  Gaul. 

mature,  are,  avi,  atum,  hasten, 
make  haste. 

maxime,  adv.  (maximus),  very 
greatly,  especially,  exceedingly. 

maximus,  sup.  of  magnus. 

medius,  a,  um,  middle,  midway,  in 
the  middle  of;  miedio  in  coUe, 
half-way  up  the  hill. 

melior,  comp.  of  bonus. 

memini,  isse,  def.,  remember,  bear 
in  mind.     N.  91,  2. 

memor,  oris,  mindful. 

memoria,  ae,  f.  (memor),  memory, 
recollection. 

mens,  mentis,  f.,  mind,  reason, 
judgment. 

mensa,  ae,  f.,  table. 

mensis,  is,  m.,  month. 

mercator,  oris,  m.,  merchant,  trader. 

merces,  edis,  f.,  pay,  wages,  bribe. 

mereor,  eri,  itus  sum,  dep.,  de- 
serve, be  worthy  of,  earn. 

meridies,  ei,  m.  (medius  +  dies), 
midday,  noon,  south. 

Messala,  ae,  m.,  Messala,  a  Roman 
name. 

metus,  lis,  m.,fear,  dread. 

meus,  a,  um,  poss.  pron.  (ego, 
mei),  my,  mine. 

miles,  itis,  m.,  soldier  (infantry). 

mille,  adj.  indecl.,  thousand. 

mille  (nom.  and  ace.  sing.),  n.,  thou- 
sand; (plur.)  millia  (or  milia), 
um,  n.,  thousands;  tria  millia 
passuum,  three  miles. 

minime,  adv.  (minimus),  least,  by 
no  means;  minime  saepe,  very 
seldom. 


minimus,  sup.  of  parvus,  least. 

minor,  comp.  of  parvus,  smaller^ 
less. 

minus,  adv.,  comp.  of  parum,  less; 
si  minus,  if  not. 

miror,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  (mirus), 
wonder  at,  admire. 

mirus,  a,  um,  wonderful,  strange. 

miser,  era,  erum,  wretched,  unfor- 
tunate. 

mitto,  ere,  misi,  missum,  send,  lei 
go,  cast. 

modo,  adv.  (modus),  only. 

modus,  i,  m.,  measure,  manner, 
mode,  way ;  ejus  modi,  of  that  sort. 

moenia,  ium,  n.  (munio),  walls  (of 
a  town),  f or tif  cations. 

molitus,  part,  as  adj.  (molo,  grind, 
Eng.  mill),  ground. 

moneo,  ere,  ui,  itum,  remind, 
warn,  advise. 

mons,  montis,  m.,  mountain. 

monstro,  are,  avi,  atum,  show, 
point  out. 

morior,  mori,  mortuus  sum,  dep., 
die;  fut.  part.,  moritiirus. 

moror,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.,  delay, 
tarry,  hinder. 

mors,  mortis,  f.  (morior),  death. 

mortalis,  e  (mors),  mortal;  as  a 
noun,  a  mortal,  a  human  being. 

mortuus,  part,  as  adj.  (morior), 
dead. 

mos,  moris,  m.,  (sing.)  manner,  cus- 
tom, practice  ;  (phir.)  character. 

moveo,  ere,  movi,  motum,  move, 
excite;  castra  mover e,  breah  up 
camp. 

mulier,  eris,  f.,  woman. 

multitude,  inis,  f.  (multus),  multi- 
tude, crowd. 

multo,  adv.  (abl.  of  multus,  as  deg. 
of  diff.),  much,  by  far. 

multum,  adv.  (ace.  neut.  of  mul- 
tus), much,  very,  exceedingly. 

multus,  a,  um  (comp.  neut.  pliis; 
sup.  plurimus)  much  ;  (plur.) 
many,  numerous;  multo  die,  late 
in  the  day. 

munio,  ire,  ivi,  itum,  fortify,  de- 
fendf  protect. 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


283 


munitio,  onis,  f .  (munio),  fortiji- 

cation,  rampart. 
murus,  i,  m.,  wall^  rampart. 

N. 

nam,  con j., /or. 

Nameius,  i,  m.,  Nameius,  a  Helve- 
tian chief. 

narro,  are,  avi,  atum,  tell,  re- 
late. 

nascor,  nasci,  natus  sum,  dep., 
be  born,  arise,  be  produced. 

natu,  m.,  only  in  the  abl.  (nascor), 
by  birth,  in  age;  major  natu 
(N.  36,  6),  older ;  as  noun,  elders, 
ancestors. 

natura,  ae,  f.  (nascor),  birth,  na- 
ture. 

nauta,  ae,  m.  (navis),  sailor,  sea- 
man. 

navis,  is,  f.,  ship;  navis  longa, 
ship  of  war. 

ne,  conj.,  that  not,  lest,  so  that  not. 

ne,  adv.  (especially  with  subjunctive 
of  command,  etc.),  not ;  ne  .  .  . 
quidem,  not  even  (emphatic  word 
between). 

ne,  inteiTog.  enclitic  particle.  See 
N.  195,  3. 

nee  =  neque. 

necessarius,  a,  um,  necessary,  re- 
lated; as  a  noun,  m.,  relative,  kins- 
man. 

necne,  adv.,  or  not;  used  in  indirect 
questions. 

nego,  are,  avi,  atum,  say  no,  deny, 
refuse. 

negotium,  i,  n.  (nee  +  otium, 
leisure),  occupation,  employment, 
business;  tibi  negotium  do,  I  em- 
ploy you. 

nemo,  m.  and  f.  (ne  +  homo),  no 
man,  no  one,  nobody.  The  gen. 
and  abl.  are  borrowed  from  nullus. 

neque  (or  nee),  conj.  and  adv.  (ne 
+  que),  and  not ;  neque  .  .  .  ne- 
que, neither  .  .  .  nor. 

nequis  (or  nequi),  nequa,  nequid 
(or  nequod),  indef.  pron.,  lest  any. 
See  N.  52,  b. 


neuter,  tra,  trum  (ne  +  uter), 
gen.  neutrius,  neither  (of  two) ; 
(plur.)  neither  party . 

niger,  gra,  grum,  blach,  dark. 

nihil,  n.  indecl.,  nothing;  used  as 
adv.,  not  at  all,  in  no  respect. 

nihilo,  adv.  (abl.  of  nihilum,  noth- 
ing), in  no  respect ;  with  com  p.  as 
deg.  of  diff.,  nihiia  minus,  never- 
theless, none  the  less. 

nitor,  1,  nisus,  or  nixus  sum,  dep., 
strive,  attempt. 

nobilis,  e  (nosco),  famous,  noble. 

nobilitas,  atis,  f.  (nobilis),  nobility 
(of  rank);  as  a  coll.  noun,  the  no- 
bility, the  nobles. 

noceo,  ere,  ui,  itum,  harm,  injure. 

noctii,  f.,  on]y  in  abl.  (nox),  by 
night. 

nolo,  nolle,  nolui,  irr.  (non  + 
volo),  be  unwilling,  wish  not,  re- 
fuse. 

nomen,  inis,  n.  (nosco),  name. 

nominatim,  adv.  (nomino,  name), 
by  name,  expressly. 

non,  adv.  (ne  +  iinum),  not,  by  no 
means. 

Nonae,  arum  (nonus,  ninth  [day 
before  the  Ides]),  f.  plur.,  Nones, 
the  7th  of  March,  May,  July,  Octo- 
ber, and  the  5th  of  other  months. 

nondum,  adv.  (non  +  dum),  not 
yet. 

nonne,  interrog.  particle  (non  + 
ne),  expecting  the  answer  Yes ; 
nonne  venit,  hasnH  he  come? 

nonnulli,  ae,  a  (non  +  nullus), 
some,  several. 

nonnunquam,  adv.  (n5n  +  nun- 
quam),  sometimes,  at  times. 

Noreia,  ae,  f.,  Noreia,  capital  of 
the  Taurisci,  a  German  people  of 
Noricum. 

Noricus,  a,  um,  Noric,  pertaining 
to  Noricum. 

nosco,  ere,  novi,  notum,  become 
acquainted  with,  learn ;  in  perf.- 
stem  tenses,  know;  novl,  I  know. 
N.  91,  Rem. 

noster,  tra,  trum,  poss.  pron.  (nos), 
our,   ours;   as  noun,  nostri,   m., 


284 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


our  men  {soldiers,  friends),  nostra, 
n.,  our  possessions  (goods). 

Noviodunum,  i,  n.,  Noviodunum, 
name  of  three  towns  in  Gaul. 

novissimus,  a,  um  (novus),  new- 
est (that  is,  of  soldiers,  the  latest  or 
last),  hindmost,  in  the  rear ;  agmen 
novissimum,  the  rear. 

novus,  a,  um,  new,  strange,  un- 
usual; res  novae,  revolution. 

nox,  noctis,  f .,  night ;  multa  noc- 
te,  late  at  night. 

nubes,  is,  f.,  cloud. 

nud5,  are,  avi,  atum  (nudus, 
bare),  strip,  deprive. 

nullus,  a,  um  (ne  +  uUus),  gen. 
nullius,  no,  none,  not  any. 

num,  interrog.  particle ;  in  direct 
questions,  not  translated,  and  ex- 
pects answer  iVo;  in  indirect  ques- 
tions, Whether. 

numerus,  i,  m.,  number,  quantity, 
multitude. 

nunc,  adv.,  now,  atjjresent. 

nunquam,  adv.  (ne  +  unquam), 
never. 

nuntio  (or  nuncio),  are,  avi,  atum 
(nuntius),  announce,  report,  bring 
news. 

nuntius,  i,  m.,  messenger,  message, 
news* 

nuper.  adv.  (for  noviper,  from 
novus),  newly,  lately,  recently. 


o. 

ob,  prep,  with  ace,   on  account  of, 

for.  _ 
obaeratus,  i,  m.  (ob  +  aes,  money), 

debtor. 
objicio,  ere,  jeci,  jectum  (ob  + 

jacio),    throw  against,    throw  up, 

oppose,  expose. 
oblitus,  a,   um  (obliviscor),  for- 
getful. 
obliviscor,  i,  oblitus  sum,  dep., 

fo'^get. 
obse«t,    idis,    m.    and    f.,    hostage, 

pledge,  security. 


obstrictus,    part,    of    obstringo, 

bound,  attached. 

obstringo,  ere,  strinxi,  strictum 
(ob  +  stringo,  bind),  bind  close, 
pledge. 

obtineo,  ere,  ui,  tentum  (ob  + 
teneo),  hold,  possess,  gain,  obtain. 

occasus,  us,  m.  (occido),  fall,  set- 
ting ;  occasus  solis,  sunset,  the 
west. 

occido,  ere,  cidi,  casum  (ob  + 
cado),  fall  doivn,  fall,  perish. 

occido,  ere,  cidi,  cisum  (ob  + 
caedo),  cut  down,  kill,  slay. 

occisus,  part,  of  occido,  slain. 

occupo,  are,  avi,  atum  (ob  + 
capio),  seize,  occupy. 

occurro,  ere,  curri  and  cucurri, 
cursum  (ob  +  curro),  run  to- 
wards, meet  with,  encounter. 

Oceanus,  i,  m.,  ocean,  the  Atlantic. 

Ocelum,  1,  n.,  Ocelum,  a  Gallic  town. 

oculus,  1,  m.,  eye,  sight. 

odi,  odisse,  def.,  hate.    N.  91,  2. 

offendo,  ere,  fendi,  fensum,  of- 
fend, displease. 

omnino,  adv.  (omnis),  wholly,  alto- 
gether, in  all,  at  all. 

omnis,  e,  all,  every. 

onus,  eris,  n.,  load,  burden. 

oportet,  ere,  uit,  impers.,  it  is 
necessai'y,  ought,  must. 

oppidum,  i,  n.,  town  (walled). 

oppugnatio,  onis,  f.  (oppugno), 
siege,  assault,  attack. 

oppugno,  are,  avi,  atum  (ob  + 
pugno),  attack,  assault,  besiege, 
storm. 

optimus,  sup.  of  bonus. 

opus,  eris,  n.,  work,  task,  for tif  ca- 
tions or  "  works. ^^ 

opus,  n.  indecl.,  need  ;  opus  est, 
there  is  need,  it  is  necessary. 

oratio,  onis,  f.  (oro,  speak),  speech, 
oration,  words. 

Orgetorix,  igis,  m.,  Orgetorix,  a 
chief  of  the  Helvetii. 

oriens,  tis,  part,  of  orior,  rising; 
sol  oriens,  (he  rising  sun,  the  east. 

orior,  iri,  ortus  sum,  dep.,  r/.>e, 
arise,  begin,  spring  from,  descend. 


GENERAL   VOCABULAKY. 


285 


ortus,    part,    of    orior,    descended^ 

born. 
ostendo,  ere,   di,   sum  and  turn 

(ob,    towards  +  tendo,   stretch)^ 

show,  declare. 


pabulum,  i,  n.  (pasco,  feed),food^ 

fodder. 
paco,  are,  avi,  atum  (pax),  pacify^ 


paene,  adv.,  almost,  nearly. 
pagus,  i,  m.,  district,  canton. 
par,  paris,  equal,  like,  a  match  for. 
paratus,    a,    um    (paro),     ready, 


pareo,  ere,  ul,  itum,  obey. 

paro,  are,  avi,  atum,  prepare,  get 

ready,  provide,  procure. 
pars,  partis,  i.,  part,  share,  portion, 

direction,  side. 
parum,   adv.   (parvus),    too  little, 

not  enough. 
parvus,  a,  um  (comp.  minor ;  sup. 

minimus),  small,  little. 
passus,  part,  of  patior. 
passus,  us,  m.,  pace  (five  Roman 

feet) ;  mille  passus,  a  mile  ;  duo 

millia  passuum,  two  miles. 
patefacio,  ere,  feci,  factum  (pa- 

teo  +  facio),    throw  open,   open, 

expose;  pass.,  patefio. 
patens,  tis  (pateo),  open,  wide. 
pate5,  ere,  ui,  lie  open,  extend. 
pater,  tris,  m.,  father,  ancestor. 
patior,   pati,   passus   sum,    dep., 

suffer,  allow,  permit. 
patria,  ae,  f.  (pater),  native  land, 

fatherland. 
pauci,  ae,  a,  few. 
paulo,  adv.  (abl.  of  paulus,  as  deg. 

of  diff.),  by  a  little,  a  little. 
paulum,  adv.  (ace  neut.  of  paulus), 

little,  somewhat. 
paulus,  a,  um,  little,  small.    ' 
pax,  pacis,  f.,  peace,  quiet. 
pecunia,    ae,    f.    (pecus,    cattle), 

money;  literally,  wealth  estimated 

in  cattle. 


pedes,  itis,  m.  (-^0:1)^  foot-soldier; 

(plur.)  infantry. 
pejor,  us,  comp.  of  malus,  worse; 

pejus  as  noun,  a  worse  thing. 
pello,  ere,  pepuli,  pulsum,  drive, 

conquer,  rout. 
pendo,    ere,    pependi,   pensum, 

weigh,  pay. 
per,  prep,  with  ace,  through,  through- 
out,  by;    in    compounds,    through, 

thoroughly,  very. 
perduco,    ere,    xi,  ctum  (per  -f 

duco),  bi'ing  through  or  all  the  way, 

lead,  conduct,  extend,  construct. 
perfacilis,  e  (per  +  facilis),  very 

easy. 
perficio,  ere,  feci,  fectum  (per  + 

facio),   finish,    accomplish,    bring 

about. 
periculosus,  a,  um  (periculum), 

perilous,  dangerous. 
periculum,  i,  n.  (root  in  experior, 

try),  trial,  rish,  danger,  peril. 
perlego,  ere,  legi,  lectum  (per  + 

lego),  read  through. 
permoveo,    ere,    movi,    motum 

(per  +  moveo),  move  thoroughly, 

arouse,  excite. 
permulti,  ae,  a  (per  +  multus), 

very  many. 
perpauci,    ae,    a  (per  +  pauci), 

very  few. 
perrumpo,    ere,    rupi,    ruptum 

(per  +  rumpo),    break   through, 

force  a  passage, 
persequor,    i,    cutus    sum,    dep. 

(per  +  sequor),   follow  persist- 

ently,  2>ursue,  take  vengeance  on. 
persevere,  are,  avi,  atum,  ^ersw^, 

persevere. 
persolvo,  ere,  solvi,  soliitum  (per 

+  solvo,  release, pay),  pay  (in  full). 
persuadeo,   ere,  si,  sum  (per  + 

suadeo,    advise),   persuade,    con- 
vince, prevail  upon. 
perterreo,  ere,  ui,   itum.  (per  + 

terreo),  frighten  thoroughly,  ter- 
rify. 
pertineo,  ere,  ui  (per  +  teneo), 

reach,  extend  to,  relate  or  pertain 

to,  tend  to. 


286 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


pervenio.  Ire,  veni,  ventum  (per 

+  venio),  come  {through)  to,  ar- 
rive at,  reach. 
pes,  pedis,  m.,  foot. 
pessimus,  sup.  of  malus,  worst. 
peto,  ere,  ivi  (ii),  itum,  seek,  ask, 

strive  after. 
pilum,  i,  n.,  heavy  javelin,  javelin. 
pirus,  i,  f.,  pear-tree. 
Piso,    onis,    m.,    Piso,    a    Roman 

name. 
placeo,  ere,  ui,  itum,  please,  sat- 
isfy, seem  good. 
planities,    ei,    f.    (planus,    level), 

level  ground,  plain. 
plebs,  plebis,  f,,  the  common  people, 

the  multitude. 
plenus,  a,  um  (root  in  compleo), 

full,  complete. 
plerumque,    adv.     (ace.    neut.    of 

plerusque),   for    the  most  part, 

mostly. 
plerusque,  aque,  umque ;  usually 

in  the    plur.,    plerique,    aeque, 

aque,  very  many,  the  most,  most. 
pliiriniura,  adv.  (ace.  neut.  of  pluri- 

mus),    very    much,    exceedingly ; 

plurimum    posse,     to    be    very 

powerful. 
pliirimus,  sup.  of  multus ;  usually 

in    plur.,    plurimi,    ae,    a,    very 

many,  most ;    quazu  plurimi,   as 

many  as  possible. 
plus,  pluris,  comp.  of  multus;  in 

the  sing.,  a  neuter  noun  (N.  27), 

more ;  plus  audaciae,  more  {of) 

boldness ;    in  the    plur.,    an    adj., 

more,  several. 
plus,  adv.  (ace.  neut.  of  plus,  above), 

more;  plus  posse,  to  have  more 

power. 
poena,  ae,  f.,  penalty,  punishment. 
poeta,  ae,  m.,  poet. 
polliceor,    eri,    itus    sum,    dep., 

promise,  offer. 
Pompeius,  i,  m.,  Pompey,  a  famous 

Roman  general,  rival  of  Caesar. 
pono,   ere,  posui,  positum,  put, 

place,    station ;    castra    ponere, 

pitch  a  camp. 
pons,  pontis,  m.,  bridge. 


poposci,  perf.  of  posc5. 

populor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep. 
(populus),  lay  waste,  ravage,  dev^ 
astate,  depopulate. 

populus,  1,  III.,  people,  nation,  tribe. 

porta,  ae,  f.,  gate,  entrance,  door. 

porto,  are,  avi,  atum,  carry,  bear, 
convey. 

posco,  ere,  poposci,  ask  for,  de- 
mand. 

possessio,  oiaiB,  i., possession,  estate, 
jjroperty. 

possum,  posse,  potui,  irr.  (potis, 
able  +  sum),  be  able,  can,  have  in- 
fluence or  power  ;  plus  (pluri- 
mum) posse,  to  have  more  {very 
great)  power. 

post,  prep,  with  ace.,  after,  behind. 

post,  adv.,  after,  afterwards. 

postea,  adv.  (post  +  is),  after  this, 
afterwards. 

posteaquam,  conj.  (postea  + 
quam),  after  {that),  after. 

posterus,  a,  um  (post),  comp. 
posterior ;  sup.  postremus  and 
postumus,  following,  next. 

postquam,  conj.  (post  +  quam), 
after  {that),  after,  when,  as  soon 
as. 

postremus,  sup.  of  posterus,  lat- 
est, last,  in  the  rear. 

postridie,  adv.  (postero  +  die), 
on  the  following  day ;  p.  ejus 
diei,  on  the  day  after  that  day. 

postulo,  are,  avi,  atum  (posco), 
ask,  demand. 

potens,  tis,  part,  of  possum  as  adj.. 
able,  powerful,  influential. 

potentatus,  us,  m.  {jpotens),  power, 
dominion,  rule. 

potestas,  atis,  f.  (possum),  power, 
ability,  opportunity,  right;  potes- 
tatem  facere,  to  give  an  oppor- 
tunity. 

potior,  iri,  itus  sum,  dep.  (potis, 
able),  get  possession  of,  obtain,  be- 
come master  of. 

prae,  prep,  with  abl.,  before,  in  front 
of,  in  comparison  with. 

praebeo,  ere,  ui,  itum  (prae  + 
habeo),  furnish,  offer,  show. 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


287 


praecedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessum 
(prae  +  cedo,  go)^  go  before^  sur- 
pass, excel. 

praeceps,  cipitis  (prae  +  caput), 
headlong,  hasty,  steep, 

praedor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep. 
(praeda,  prey),  plunder,  rob, 
make  booty. 

praeficio,  ere,  feci,  fectum  (prae 
+  facio),  set  over,  place  in  com- 
mand of. 

praemitto,  ere,  misi,  missum 
(prae  +  mitto),  send  before  or 
ahead,  send  in  advance. 

praemium,  i,  n.,  reioard. 

praescribo,  ere,  psi,  ptum  (prae 
+  scribo),  dictate,  command,  pre- 
scribe, appoint. 

praescriptum,  i,  n.  (praescribo), 
command,  order,  direction. 

praesidium,  i,  n.,  defence,  guard, 
protection,  garrison,  aid. 

praesto,  are,  stiti,  stitum  (prae 
+  sto),  surpass,  excel,  show ;  im- 
pers.,  praestat,  it  is  better . 

praesum,  esse,  fui,  irr.  (prae  + 
sum),  be  in  command  of,  have 
charge  of. 

praeter,  prep,  with  ace.  (prae), 
beyond,  except,  besides,  contrary 
to. 

praeterea,  adv.  (praeter  -f  is), 
besides  this,  besides,  moreover. 

praeterquam,  adv.  (praeter  + 
quam),  besides,  except. 

premo,  ere,  pressi,  pressum, 
press,  press  hard  or  hard  press. 

pretium,  i,  n.,  price,  value,  pay. 

primo,  adv.  (abl.  of  primus),  at 
first. 

primum,  adv.  (ace.  of  primus), 
first,  in  the  first  place ;  quam 
primum,  as  soon  as  possible  ; 
quum  primum,  as  soon  as. 

primus,  a,  um,  sup.  of  prior,  firsts 
foremost,  principal ;  primum  ag- 
men,  the  van;  prima  liice,  at 
daybreak. 

princeps,  cipis  (primus  +  capio), 
first,  chief;  as  a  noun,  m.  and  f., 
leader,  leading  man^  chief. 


principatus,  lis,    m.    (princeps), 

fi7'st  rank  or  place,  chief  position, 
leadership. 

prior,  us  (no  pos.,  sup.  primus), 
former,  j^revious,  superior, 

pristinus,  a,  um,  former,  early, 
original. 

priusquam,  conj.  (prius  +  quam), 
before,  sooner  than. 

privatus,  a,  um,  private,  one^s 
own. 

pro,  prep,  with  abl.,  before,  in  front 
of,  in  behalf  of  or  for,  instead  of 
in  proportion  to,  considering. 

probo,  are,  avi,  atum,  try,  ap- 
prove, show,  prove. 

procedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessum  (pro 
+  cedo,  go),  advance,  proceed. 

procurro,  ere,  curri  or  cucurri, 
cursum  (pro  +  curro),  run  for- 
ward, rush  forth. 

prodo,  ere,  didi,  ditum  (pro  -h 
do),  give  forth,  hand  down  (to  pos- 
terity), deliver,  betray. 

proelium,  i,  n.,  battle,  combat. 

profectio,  onis,  f.  (proficiscor), 
departure,  setting  out. 

profectus,  part,  of  proficiscor. 

proficiscor,  i,  profectus  sum, 
dep.  (pro  +  facio,  that  is,  put 
one's  self  forward),  set  out,  go, 
march. 

profugio,  ere,  fiigi,  fugitum 
(pro  +  fugio),  escape,  flee,  flee 
for  refuge. 

progredior,  i,  gressus  sum,  dep. 
(pro  +  gradior,  go),  go  forward, 
advance,  proceed. 

prohibeo,  ere,  ui,  itum  (pro  + 
habeo),  hold  back  or  off,  check,  re- 
strain, keep  from. 

projicio,  ere,  jeci,  jectum  (pro  + 
jacio),  throw  forth  or  forward, 
prostrate. 

prope,  adv.  (comp.  propius ;  sup. 
proxime),  near,  almost. 

prope,  prep,  with  ace,  near,  close  to. 

propior,  us  (no  pos.;  sup.  proxi- 
mus),  nearer. 

propter,  prep,  with  ace.,  on  account 
of,  by  reason  of. 


288 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


propterea,  adv.  (propter  +  is), 
for  this  reason,  on  that  account  ; 
with  quod,  because  that. 

prosum,  prodesse,  profui,  irr. 
(pro  +  sum),  be  helpful,  benefit. 

provide©,  ere,  vidi,  visum  (pro 
+  video),  foresee,  provide  for, 
care  for. 

provincia,  ae,  f.  (pro  +  vinco), 
subdued  region,  province. 

proxime,  adv.  (prope),  next,  very 
recently,  last. 

proximus,  sup.  of  propior,  nearest, 
next,  following ;  with  iter,  shortest 
road. 

publicus,  a,  um,  of  the  state,  public. 

puella,  ae,  f.,  girl. 

puer,  i,  m.,  boy,  child. 

pugna,  ae,  i.,  fight,  combat,  battle. 

pugn5,  are,  avi,  atum  (pugna), 
fight,  contend. 

pulcher,  chra,  chrum,  beautiful, 
handsome,  noble. 

pulsus,  part,  of  pello. 

punio,  ire,  ivi,  itum  (poena), 
punish. 

put5,  are,  avi,  atum,  thinh,  sup- 
pose, recJcon,  judge. 

Pyrenaeus,  a,  um ;  as  a  noun, 
Pyrenaei  (montes),  the  Pyre- 
nees, a  mountain  range  between 
Gaul  and  Spain. 

Q. 

qua,  adv.  (abl.  of  qui,  via  under- 
stood), by  which  way,  where. 

quaero,  ere,  quaesivi  (ii),  quae- 
situm,  seeh,  ask,  inquire. 

qualis,  e,  (1)  interrog.  adj.  (quis), 
of  what  nature  or  kind,  of  what 
sort,  2uhat  kind  of;  (2)  rel.  adj. 
(qui),  as;  talis  .  .  .  qualis,  such 
.  .  .  as. 

quam,  adv.  (ace.  of  quis),  how,  how 
much,  as,  than ;  with  superlative, 
as  possible  ;  quam  primum,  as 
soon  as  possible. 

quamobrem,  adv.  (quam  +  ob  + 
rem),  for  what  reason,  wherefore, 
why,  on  this  account. 


quantus,     a,    um    (quam),    how 

great,  how  much;  as  a  correlative 

to  tantus,  as;  as  an  abl.  of  deg. 

of  diff.,    quanto  .  .  .  tanto,   the 

.  .  .  the. 
quare,  adv.  (qua  +  re),  for  what 

cause  or  reason,   why,    wherefore, 

therefore. 
-que,  enclitic  conj.,  and. 
quemadmodum,  adv.  (ad  +  quem 

+  modum),   after  what  manner, 

how. 
queror,    i,    questus    sum,    dep., 

complain,  lament. 
qui,  quae,  quod,  rel.   pron.,  who, 

which,  what,  that. 
quidam,   quaedam,   quoddam  or 

quiddam,  indef.  pron.,  a  certain 

one,  a  certain,  some  one,  somebody, 

something. 
quidem,     adv.,     indeed,    certainly, 

at    least ;    ne  .  .  .  quidem,    not 

even. 
quin,   conj.    (qui  +  ne),    that  not, 

but  that,  that;    quin  Ireva,  from 

going. 
quis     (or    qui),     quae,    quid    (or 

quod),      interrog.     pron.,     who  f 

which  f  what  f 
quisquam,      quaequam,      quid- 

quam  or  quicquam,  indef.  pron., 

any,  some,  any  one,  something. 
quisque,    quaeque,    quidque    or 

quodque,  indef.  pron.,  each,  every, 

any;  quisque  ditissimus,  all  the 

wealthiest  men. 
quo,    adv.   (abl.  of    qui),    whither, 

where,  why,  wherefore ;  with  com- 
paratives, as  deg.  of  diff.,  qu5  .  .  . 

eo,  the  .  .  .  the. 
quo,   conj.   (abl.  of  qui),   in  order 

that,  that  (regularly  with  compara- 
tives). 
quod,   conj.  (ace.  of  qui),  in  that, 

that,  because,   as  to  the  fact  that ; 

quod  si,  now  if,  but  if 
quominus   (or  quo  minus),  conj., 

by  lohich  the  less,  so  that  not,  lest. 
quoniam,   conj.    (quum   +    jam), 

since  now,  because,  since. 
quoque,  conj.,  also,  too. 


GENEKAL   VOCABULARY. 


289 


quot,  indecl.  adj.,  how  many,  as 
many,  as ;  tot .  .  .  quot,  as  many 
,  .  ,  as. 

quotidianus,    a,    um    (quotidie, 

daily),  every  day,  daily,  ordinary. 
quum  (or  cum),  conj.,  when,  after, 
lohile,  since,  because,  although  ; 
quum  .  .  .  turn,  not  only  .  .  .  but 
also ;  quum  primum,  as  soon  as. 


R. 

ratis,  is,  f.,  Jloat,  raft. 

Rauraci,  orum,  m.,   the  Rauraci, 

a  Gallic  people,  on  the  Rhine, 
recens,  tis,  fresh,  new,  recent. 
recipio,  ere,  cepi,  ceptum  (re  + 

capio),  take  back,  recover,  receive , 

se    recipere,    withdraw,    betake 

one^s  self. 
reddo,    ere,    didi,   ditum  (re  -h 

do),    give    back,    restore,    return, 

give  up. 
redeo,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum,  irr.  (re 

+  eo),  go  back,  return. 
reditio,  onis,  f.  (redeo),  returning, 

return. 
reduco,  ere,  xi,  ctum  (re  +  duco), 

lead  back,  bring  back. 
refers,  ferre,  tuli,  latum,  irr.  (re 

+  fero),   bring  back,   carry  back, 

pay  back,  announce,  report. 
regnum,  i,   n.   (rex),    sovereignty, 

rule,  authority,  kingdom. 
rego,  ere>  xi,  ctum,  rule,  govern, 

guide,  direct. 
rejicio,   ere,  jeci,   jectum  (re  + 

jacio),    cast,  hurl  or  throw  back, 

throw  away,  drive  back. 
relictus,  part,  of  relinquo. 
relinquo,  ere,  liqui,  lictum  (re  + 

linquo,  leave),  leave  behind,  leave, 

abandon. 
reliquus,    a,   um   (relinquo),    re- 
maining, rest  of,  future ;   reliqui 

Galli,  the  rest  of  the  Gauls;  nihil 

est  reliqui,  there  is  nothing  left ; 

in    reliquum    tempus,  for  the 

future. 


reminiscor,  i,  dep.   (re  +  root  of 

memini),  recall  to  mind,  recollect, 

remember. 
remitto,  ere,  misi,  missum  (re  + 

mitto),  send  back,  hurl  back,  give 

back,  restore. 
removes,  ere,  movi,  motum  (re 

+  moveo),  move  back,  take  away, 

remove. 
Remus,    i,    m.,   one  of  the  Remi; 

(plur.)    Kemi,   orum,   the  Remi, 

0,  (^llic  people. 
ren^tio,  are,   avi,   atum  (re  + 

nuntio),  bring  back  word  or  news, 

report. 
repello,  ere,  puli,  pulsum  (re  + 

pello),  drive  back,  repel,  repulse, 

drive  away. 
repentinus,  a,  um,  sudden,  unex- 
pected. 
reperio,  ire,  peri,  pertum,  fnd, 

discover,  learn,  ascertain. 
repeto,  ere,  ivi,  itum  (re  +  peto), 

seek  or  ask  again,   demand  back, 

claim. 
reprehend©,  ere,  di,  sum,  blame, 

rebuke,  reprove. 
res,  rei,  f.,  thing,  affair,  fact,  event, 

circumstance,  property ;  res  f ami- 

liaris,  private  property ;  res  fru- 

mentaria,  provisions,  corn-supply ; 

respublica  (or  res  publica),  the 

state ;  res  novae,  revolution. 
rescinds,  ere,  scidi,  scissum  (re 

+  scindS,   cut),   cut  down,   break 

down,  destroy. 
resists,    ere,    stiti    (re  +    sistS, 

place),  withstand,  resist,  oppose. 
respiciS,  ere,  spexi,  spectum  (re 

+  speciS,  look),  look  back,  look  be- 
hind, consider. 
respondeS,  ere,  di,  sum,  ansioer, 

reply,  respond. 
responsum,    i,    n.     (respondeS), 

answer,  reply. 
respublica  (or  res  publica),  rei- 

publicae,  f.,  republic,  state,  com- 
monwealth. 
rests,  are,  stiti  (re  +  stS),    stay 

behind,   remain ;    impers.,  restat, 

it  remains. 


19 


290 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


retineo,  ere,  ui,  tentum  (re  + 
teneo),  hold  back,  retain,  keep, 
check,  restrain. 

reverto,  ere,  ti,  sum,  and  re- 
verter, 1,  sus  sum,  dep.  (re  + 
verto,  turn),  turn  back,  return; 
the  perfect-stem  tenses  are  from  the 
active  forms;  the  others  are  from 
the  deponent. 

rex,  regis,  m.  (rego),  king. 

Rhenus,  i,  m.,  the  Rhine,  eastern 
boundary  of  Gaul. 

Rhodanus,  i,  m.,  the  Rhone,  a  large 
river  of  S.  E.  Gaul. 

ripa,  ae,  f.,  bank  (of  a  river). 

rogo,  are,  avi,  atum,  ask,  request, 
beg. 

Roma,  ae,  f.,  Rome,  a  city  of  Italy, 
capital  of  the  Roman  Empire. 

Romanus,  a,  um  (Roma),  Roman ; 
as  a  noun,  a  Roman,  the  Romans. 

rosa,  ae,  f.,  rose. 

rursus,  adv.  (reversus),  back, 
again. 

rus,  ruris,  n.,  the  country;  ruri, 
in  the  country. 


Sabinus,  i,  m.,  Sabinus,  one  o^ 
Caesar's  lieutenants. 

saepe,  adv.  (comp,  saepius ;  sup. 
saepissime),  often,  frequently ; 
minime  saepe,  very  seldom. 

salus,  utis,  f .,  safety,  security,  place 
of  safety. 

Santoni,  orum  (or  Santones,  um), 
m.,  the  Santones,  a  Gallic  people. 

sapiens,  tis,  wise,  discreet. 

sapienter,  adv.  (sapiens),  wisely, 
prudently. 

sarcina,  ae,  f.,  pack,  burden;  espe- 
cially in  plural,  sarcinae,  baggage 
(carried  by  each  soldier),  light  bag- 
gage. 

Sardes,  ium,  f,,  Sardis,  capital  of 
Lydia. 

satis,  (1)  indecl.  adj.  ;  (2)  indecl. 
noun;  (3)  adv.,  enough,  sufficient, 
sufficiently,  quite. 


satisfacio,  ere,  feci,  factum  (satis 
+  facio),  give  satisfaction,  satisfy, 
apologize. 

scio,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum,  know, 
understand. 

scribo,  ere,  psi,  ptum,  write. 

secutus,  part,  of  sequor. 

sed,  conj.,  but,  but  yet. 

sedes,  is,  f.  (sedeo,  sit),  seat,  resi- 
dence, abode. 

Segusiavi,  orum,  m.,  the  Segu- 
sidvi,  a  Gallic  people. 

sementis,  is,  f .,  a  sowing. 

semper,  adv.,  alivays,  ever. 

senatus,  us,  m.  (senex,  old),  coun- 
cil of  elder's,  senate. 

sententia,  ae,  f.,  opinion,  thought, 
purpose,  decision. 

septentriones,  um,  m.  (literally, 
the  seven  plough-oxen),  the  north  ; 
the  seven  stars  forming  the  constel- 
lation called  the  Great  Bear. 

Sequana,  ae,  m.,  the  Seine,  a  river 
in  Gaul. 

Sequanus,  a,  um,  of  the  Sequani, 
Sequanian ;  as  a  noun  (masc.  plur.), 
the  Sequani,  a  Gallic  people. 

sequor,  i,  cutus  sum,  dej).,  follow, 
jmrsue. 

sermo,  onis,  m.,  discourse,  conver- 
sation. 

servilis,  e  (servus),  of  a  slave,  ser- 
vile. 

servio,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum  (servus), 
be  a  slave  to,  serve, 

servitus,  utis,  f.  (servus),  slavery, 
servitude. 

servo,  are,  avi,  atum,  preserve, 
save,  keep,  guard;  fidem  servare, 
to  keep  one's  word. 

servus,  i,  m.,  slave,  servant. 

sestertius,  i,  m.,  a  sestertius  or  ses- 
terce, coin  worth  about  five  cents. 

si,  conj.,  if;  in  ind.  quest,  whether, 

SIC,  adv.,  thus,  so. 

signum,  i,  n.,  mark,  sign,  signal, 
standard ;  signa  inf  erre,  to  march 
to  the  attack,  attack ;  signa  con- 
vertere,  face  about. 

silva,  ae,  f.,  forest,  wood. 

similis,  e,  like,  similar. 


GENERAL  VOCABULAEY. 


291 


sin,  conj.  (si  +  ne),  but  if^  if  how- 
ever. 

sine,  prep,  with  abl.,  without. 

singuli,  ae,  a,  distrib.  adj.,  single, 
one  by  one. 

sinister,  tra,  trum,  left,  on  the 
left^  unfavorable. 

siquis  (siqui),  siqua,  siquid  (si- 
quod),  iiidef.  pron.  (also  written 
separate!}^),  if  any,  if  any  one, 
whoever^  whatever. 

sive,  conj.  (si  +  ve),  also  written 
sen,  or  if,  whether ;  sive  .  .  . 
sive,  whether  .  .  .  or. 

socer,  eri,  m.,  father-in-law. 

soclus,  i,  m.,  companion,  ally. 

sol,  solis,  m.,  sun. 

soleo,  ere,  itus  sum,  semi-dep., 
be  wont,  be  accustomed. 

solum,  i,  n.,  ground,  soil,  land. 

solum,  adv.  (ace.  of  solus),  only, 
merely. 

solus,  a,  um  (gen.  ius),  alone,  only, 
merely. 

soror,  oris,  f.,  sister. 

spatium,  i,  n.,  space,  distance,  ex- 
tent^ period  (of  time),  opportunity. 

specto,  are,  avi,  atum  (specio, 
looh),  look  at,  observe,  (of  territory) 
face,  lie  towards. 

spero,  are,  avi,  atum  (spes),  hope, 
expect,  long  for. 

spes,  ei,  f.,  hope,  expectation. 

spolium,  i,  n.,  spoil,  plunder. 

sponte,  f.  abl.  (only  other  case  in 
use,  gen.  spontis),  of  one's  own 
free  will  or  accord,  by  one's  self 
without  aid. 

status,  ere,  ui,  utum,  set  up, 
establish,  determine,  decide. 

Stella,  ae,  f.,  star. 

stipendium,  i,  n.,  tax,  tribute,  pay. 

sto,  stare,  steti,  statum,  stand, 
stand  firm  or  fast,  persist,  cost. 

studeo,  ere,  ui,  be  eager  for,  favor, 
desire,  study. 

sub,  prep,  with  ace.  or  abl.  (N.  95,  c), 
under,  beneath,  at  the  foot  of,  to- 
wards; sub  monte,  at  the  foot  of 
the  mountain  ;  sub  vesperum, 
towards  evening. 


subeo,  ire,  Ivi  (ii),  itum  (sub  + 
eo),  go  under,  approach,  undergo, 
encounter. 

sublatus,  part,  of  tollo. 

subsidium,  i,  n.,  relief,  reserve, 
help,  protection. 

Suevus,  a,  um,  of  the  Suevi,  Sue- 
vian;  as  a  noun  (plur.),  the  Suevi, 
a  verj^  powerful  people  of  Germany. 

sui,  sibi,  se  (sese),  refl.  pron.  3d 
pers.,  of  {to,  etc.)  himself,  herself 
itself,  themselves. 

sum,  esse,  fui,  irr.,  be,  stay,  belong, 
serve;  vobis  est  in  animo,  you 
intend;  praesidio  urbi  esse,  to 
serve  as  a  protection  to  the  city. 

summus,  sup.  of  superus,  highest, 
chief  greatest,  most  important,  top 
of ;  res  summae,  most  iniportant 
subjects ;  summa  vi,  with  all  their 
might;  summus  mons,  top  of  the 
mountain. 

sumo,  ere,  sumpsi,  sumptum, 
taJce,  assume,  claim,  undertake  ; 
supplicium  de  te  sumere,  to 
inflict  punishment  on  you. 

superior,  us,  comp.  of  superus, 
higher,  upper,  former,  superior, 
greater. 

super o,  are,  avi,  atum  (super, 
above,  over),  overcome,  surpass,  ex- 
cel, survive. 

supersum,  esse,  fui  (super,  over 
+  sum),  be  over  and  above,  be  left, 
survive. 

superus,  a,  um,  comp.  superior ; 
sup.  supremus  or  summus  (su- 
per, above),  upper,  above.  See 
summus. 

suppeto,  ere,  ivi  (ii),  itum  (sub 
+  peto),  be  at  hand,  be  in  store. 

supplicium,  i,  n.,  punishment,  pen- 
alty, torture. 

supra,  prep,  with  ace.  or  adv.,  above, 
before,  previously. 

suscipio,  ere,  cepi,  ceptum  (sub 
+  capio),  take  up,  undertake ; 
sibi  suscipere,  to  take  upon  one's 
self  undertake. 

suspici5,  onis,  f.,  suspicion,  dis- 
trust. 


292 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


suspicor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.,  sus- 
pect, distrust,  mistrust, 

sustineo,  ere,  ui,  tentum  (sub  + 
teneo),  sustain,  bear,  endure,  with- 
stand. 

suus,  a,  um,  poss.  and  refl.  pron. 
(sui),  his,  her,  its,  their ;  masc. 
plur.  sui,  one^s  friends,  soldiers, 
etc. ;  neut.  plur.  sua,  one's  prop- 
erty, possessions. 


T. 

talis,  e,  such  (in  quality),  of  such  a 
kind. 

tain,  adv.,  so,  so  very. 

tamen,  conj.,  yet,  nevertheless,  still. 

tametsi,  conj.  (tamen  +  etsi),  al- 
though, notwithstanding, 

tango,  ere,  tetigi,  tactum,  touch, 
reach,  border  on. 

tantum,  adv.  (ace.  neut.  of  tantus), 
so  much,  so  far,  only, 

tantus,  a,  um  (tam),  so  great,  such 
(in  size),  so  much,  so  many ;  tanto, 
abl.  of  deg.  of  diff.,  by  so  much, 
the, 

tardo,  are,  avi,  atum  (tardus), 
delay,  check,  hinder. 

tardus,  a,  um,  slow,  sluggish,  tardy. 

tego,  ere,  xi,  ctum,  cover,  hide, 
defend. 

telum,  1,  n.,  weapon  (thrown  from  a 
distance),  spear,  javelin, 

tempero,  are,  avi,  atum,  restrain, 
govern,  refrain,  abstain. 

templum,  i,  n.,  temple. 

tempus,  oris,  n.,  time,  season,  occa- 
sion ;  in  reliquum  tempus,  for 
the  future, 

teneo,  ere,  ui,  tentum,  hold,  keep, 
occupy,  possess,  bind. 

terreo,  ere,  ui,  itum,  frighten, 
alarm,  terrify. 

testis,  is,  m.  and  i.,  witness. 

Tigurinus,  a,  um,  of  the  Tigurlni; 
as  a  noun  (masc.  plur.),  the  Tigu- 
rlni, a  Helvetian  tribe. 

timeo,  ere,  ui,  fear,  be  afraid  of. 


timidus,  a,  um  (timeS),  timid, 
afraid,  cowardly. 

timor,  oris,  m.  (timeo),  fear, 
alarm. 

Titus,  i,  m.,  Titus,  a  Roman  per- 
sonal name. 

tollo,  ere,  sustuli,  sublatum, 
raise,  take  away,  remove,  destroy, 
be  elated  (pass.). 

Tolosates,  ium,  m.,  the  Tolosates, 
inhabitants  of  Tolosa  (modern  Tou- 
louse). 

tot,  indecl.  adj.,  so  many, 

totus,  a,  um  (gen.  ius),  all,  the 
whole,  entire, 

trado,  ere,  didi,  ditum  (trans  + 
do),  give  over,  give  up,  surrender, 

traduco,  see  transduco. 

trans,  prep,  with  ace,  across,  be- 
yond, over,  on  the  farther  side  of, 

Transalpinus,  a,  um  (trans  + 
Alpes),  situated  beyond  the  Alps, 
Transalpine, 

transduco  (or  tradiico),  ere,  xi, 
ctum  (trans  +  duco),  lead  across 
or  over,  bring  over,  transport, 

transeo,  ire,  ivi  (ii),  itum  (trans 
+  eo),  go  over,  pass  over,  cross, 

tres,  tria,  num.  adj.,  three, 

tribuo,  ere,  ui,  iitum,  impart, 
render,  attribute,  ascribe, 

triduum,  i,  n.  (tres  +  dies),  space 
of  three  days,  three  days, 

triplex,  icis,  threefold,  triple. 

tristis,  e,  sad,  gloomy,  sorrowful, 

tu,  tui,  pers.  pron.,  thou,  you, 

tuba,  ae,  f.,  trumpet, 

Tulingi,  orum,  m.,  the  Tulingi,  a 
Gallic  people. 

turris,  is,  f.,  tower. 

tuus,  a,  um,  poss.  pron.  (tu),  thy, 
your, 

u. 

ubi,  adv.   and  conj.,   where,  when, 

after. 
ulciscor,  i,  ultus  sum,  dep.,  take 

vengeance  on,  avenge,  punish. 
ullus,  a,  um  (gen.  ius),  any,  any 

one. 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


293 


ulterior,  us  (ultra,  beyond),   sup. 

ultimus,  farther,   ulterior,   more 

remote, 
ultimus,  a,  um  (sup.  of  ulterior), 

farthest,  most  distant,  last. 
lina,  adv.  (abl.  of  unus,  via  under- 
stood), at  one  or  the  same  time,  to- 
gether; with  cum,  together  with. 
unde,    adv.,    ichence,   from    which 

place. 
undique,  adv.  (unde  +  que),  from 

all  sides,  on  all  sides,  everywhere. 
unquam,    adv.   (for  iinumquam), 

at  any  time,  ever. 
iinus,  a,  um  (gen.  lus),  num.  adj., 

one,     only,     alone  ;     (plur.)     iini, 

alone, 
urbs,  urbis,  f.,  city,  the  city  (Rome), 
urgeo,  ere,  ursi,  press,  press  hard, 

crowd,  oppress. 
usus,  Us,  m.  (utor)j  use,  practice, 

service,  advantage. 
ut,  conj.,  that,  in  order  that,  so  that, 

(with   verbs   of   fearing)   that  not; 

as  an  adv.,  how,  as. 
uter,  tra,  trum  (gen.  utrius),  which 

(of  two). 
uterque,  traque,  trumque  (uter 

+  que),  each  (of  two),  both. 

Utl  r=  ut. 

iitilis,  e  (utor),  useful,  serviceable, 
advantageous. 

utinam,  adv.  (in  clauses  expressing 
wish),  would  that  !  0  that  ! 

utor,  1,  usus  sum,  dep.,  use,  make 
use  of,  employ,  adopt,  enjoy. 

utrum,  adv.,  used  in  double  ques- 
tions (uter) ;  in  direct  questions, 
not  translated  ;  in  indirect  ques- 
tions, whether. 


vaco,  are,  avi,  atum,  be  empty,  be 
unoccupied. 

vadum,  I,  n.,  ford,  shoal. 

vagor,  arl,  atus  sum,  dep.,  wander 
about,  roam. 

vallum,  1,  n.,  wall,  rampart,  in- 
trench ment. 


vasto,  are,  avi,  atum,  lay  waste^ 

ravage,  devastate,  destroy. 
vectigal,  alis,  n.,  tax,  revenue. 
vel,  conj.,  or,  even ;   vel  .  .  .  vel, 

either  .  ,  .  or. 
vendo,  ere,  didi,  ditum,  sell,  offer 

for  sale. 
Veneti,   orum,   m.,   the    Veneti,  a 

Gallic  people. 
venio,  ire,  veni,  ventum,  come. 
verbum,  i,  n.,  word ;  (plur.)  words, 

language,  conversation. 
vereor,  eri,  itus  sum,  dep.,  fear, 

dread,  be  afraid  of. 
vergo,  ere,  incline,  lie  towards,  be 

situated  towards. 
vero,  adv.  (abl.  of  verus,  true),  in 

truth,  truly,  but,  indeed. 
versor,  ari,  atus  sum,  dep.  (ver- 

to,    turn),    move    about,    be    busy, 

dwell,  be. 
Verudoctius,  i,  m.,  Verudoctius,  a 

Helvetian. 
Vesontio,    onis,    m.,     Vesontio,    a 

town  of  the  Sequani. 
vesper,  eri,  m.,  evening;  sub  ves- 

perum,  towards  evening. 
vester,     tra,    trum,    poss.    pron. 

(vos),  your,  yours. 
vetus,  eris,  old,  ancient. 
via,  ae,  f.,  way,  road, journey,  march. 
viator,  oris,   m.   (via),   wayfarer, 

traveller. 
victor,  oris,  m.  (vinco),  conqueror, 

victor  ;  as  an  adj.,  victorious. 
victoria,  ae,  f.  (victor),  victory. 
victus,  part,  of  vinco ;   as  a  noun, 

victi,  the  conquered,  vanquished. 
vicus,  i,  m.,  village. 
video,  ere,  vidi,  visum,  see,  be- 

hold,  perceive. 
videor,  eri,  visus  sum,  dep.  (pass. 

of  video),  seem,  appear,  seem  good. 
vigilia,  ae,  f.  (literally,  a  watching, 

watch),  a  watch,  a  fourth  part  of 

the  night.     The  night  was  divided 

into  four  vigiliae,  or  watches,  ex- 
tending from  sunset  to  sunrise.    The 

third  watch  began  at  midnight.    The 

length  of  each  watch  depended,  of 

course,  on  the  season  of  the  year. 


294 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


vinco,  ere,  vici,  victum,  conquer, 

overcome,  subdue. 
vinculum,    i,     n.    (vincio,    bind), 

bond,  fetters,  chain;  ex  vinculis, 

in  chains. 
vir,  viri,  m.,  man,  brave  man,  hero  ; 

homo  means  man  or  woman,  human 

being,  (in  plur.)  mankind. 
virgo,  inis,  f.,  maiden,  maid,  virgin. 
virtus,    utis,    f.    (vir),    manliness, 

courage,  bravery,  worth,  ability. 
VIS,  VIS,  f.,  force,  power,  violence; 

(plur.)  vires,  ium,  strength,  power; 

vim  facere,  to  use  violence. 
vita,  ae,  f.  (vivo),  life. 
vito,  are,  avi,  atum,  avoid,  shun, 

escape. 


vivo,  ere,  vixi,  victum,  live,  dwell, 


vix,  adv.,  with  difficulty,  scarcely, 
hardly. 

voco,  are,  avi,  atum  (vox),  call, 
summon,  invite,  name. 

Vocontii,  orum,  m.,  the  Vocontii, 
a  Gallic  people. 

volo,  velle,  volui,  irr.,  wish,  de- 
sire. 

voluntas,  atis,  f.  (volo),  wish,  will, 
consent,  good- will. 

vox,  vocis,  f.,  voice,  sound,  word. 

vulgus,  i,  n.,  common  people,  crowd. 

vulnero,  are,  avi,  atum  (vulnus), 
wound,  hurt. 

vulnus,  eris,  n.,  wound,  injury. 


English -Latin. 


able  {to  be),  possum. 

about  (=  concerning),  de. 

about,  adv.  with  num.  adj.,  circiter, 

ad. 
about  to,  use  the  1st  Periphrastic  Con j. 
abundance,  copia. 
accuse,  accuse. 

accustomed  (to  be),  consuevi,  soleo. 
across,  trans. 
active,  alacer. 
advance,  progredior. 
advise,  moneo. 
after,  (conj.)  postquam  ;   (prep,  or 

adv.)  post. 
against,  contra,  in. 
ago,  ante, 
aid,  auxilium. 
alarm,  commoveS. 
all,  omnis. 
allow,  patior. 
ally,  socius. 
alone,  solus. 
Alps,  Alpes. 

although,  quum,  etsi,  tametsi. 
always,  semper. 
ambassador,  legatus. 
among,  inter,  apud,  in. 
and,  et,  que,  atque  (and  also), 
animal,  animal. 
announce,  nuntio. 
another,  alius. 
any,  ullus ;  any  one,  anything,  ali- 

quis,  aliquid;  if  any,  siquis. 
arms,  arma. 
arm,y,  exercitus. 
arrival,  adventus. 
arrive,  pervenio. 
ascertain,  cognosce. 
asTc  (N.  199,  4),  rogo,  peto,  quaero. 
attack,  impetus  :   to  attack,  oppug- 

no,  impetum  in  (+  ace.)  facere. 
attempt,  Conor. 


attentive,  attentus. 
auxiliaries,  auxilia. 
away  from,  a,  ab. 


B. 


bad,  malus. 

baggage     (heavy),      impedimenta  \ 

(light)  sarcinae. 
barbarian,  barbarus. 
battle,  proelium. 
be,  sum ;  be  distant,  absum. 
bear,  fero. 
beautiful,  pulcher. 
because,  quod. 
before,  ante. 
begin,  coepi,  incipio  (for  pres.-stem 

tenses). 
beginning,  initium. 
behind,  post. 
believe,  credo. 
besiege,  oppugno. 
best,  optimus. 
between,  inter. 
black,  niger. 
body,  corpus. 
bold,  audax. 
boldly,  audacter. 
book,  liber. 
born  (to  be),  nascor. 
both  .  .  .  and,  et  .  .  .  et. 
boy,  puer. 
brave,  fortis. 
bravery,  virtus. 
break  up  camp,  castra  movere. 
bridge,  pons. 
brief,  brevis. 
bright,  clarus. 
bring,  fero,  affero. 
bring  back  word,  renuntio. 
broad,  latus. 
brother,  f rater. 
build,  aedificd. 


296 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


building^  aedificium. 

burden,  onus. 

burn,  burn  up,  exuro,  comburd* 

but,  sed. 

bj/,  a,  ab. 


call,  voco ;  call  together,  convoco. 

camp,  castra. 

can,  could,  possum. 

capture,  capio,  expugno. 

careful,  dlligens. 

carry,  porto,  fero. 

carry  on  war,  bellum  ger5. 

Carthage,  Karthago. 

cause,  causa. 

cavalry,  equitatus,  equites. 

certain  (a),  quidam. 

chief,  princeps. 

choose,  deligo. 

Cicero,  Cicero. 

citadel,  arx. 

citizen,  civis. 

city,  urbs. 

close,  claudo. 

cloud,  nubes. 

cohort,  cohors. 

collect,  confer©,  cogo. 

come,  venio. 

command,  jubeo,  impero  ;   to  be  in 

command  of,  praesum. 
commander,  imperator. 
compel,  cogo. 

commonwealth,  respublica. 
concerning,  de. 
congratulate,  gratulor. 
conquer,  vinco. 
conspire,  conjuro. 
consul,  consuL 
contest,  see  fight< 
corn,  frumentum. 
council,  concilium. 
country,  fines,  patria  {native  land), 

rus. 
courage,  virtus. 
cowardly,  ignavus. 
cross,  transeo. 
custom,  mos. 


D. 

danger,  periculum. 

dare,  audeo. 

daughter,  filia. 

day,    dies  ;     at    day-breah,    prima 

liice. 
dear,  carus. 
death,  mors. 
deep,  altus. 
defend,  defendo. 
delay,  moror. 
demand,  postulo. 
deny,  nego. 
depart,  discedo. 
depth,  altitude. 
deserve,  mereor. 
desirous,  cupidus. 
destroy,  deleo. 
determine,  constituo. 
die,  morior. 
differ,  differo. 
difficult,     diificilis ;     very    difficult, 

perdiflacilis. 
direction,  pars. 
dismiss,  dimitto. 
do,  facio,  ago. 
door,  porta. 
doubt  {to),  dubito ;  there  is  no  doubt 

that,  non  est  dubium  quin. 
draw  up,  instruo. 
drive  bach,  rejicio. 
duty,  see  N.  126,  a, 
dwell,  incolo. 


E. 

each,  quisque. 

eager,  alacer. 

easy,  f acilis  ;  very  easy,  perfacilis. 

easily,  facile. 

elect,  creo. 

embassy,  legatio. 

empire,  imperium. 

encounter,  subeo,  occurro. 

encourage,  hortor,  cohortor. 

end,  finis. 

enemy,  hostis ;   the  enemy,  hostes. 

enlist,  conscribo. 

equal,  par. 


GENEEAL   VOCABULARY. 


297 


every,  quisque,  omnis. 
example,  exemplum. 
exhort,  hortor,  cohortor. 
exile,  exsilium. 
extend,  pertineo. 
eye,  oculus. 


fact,  res. 

fall,  cado. 

far,  by  far,  longe. 

farmer,  agricola. 

father,  pater. 

fear,  timor,  metus. 

fear  {to),  vereor,  timeo. 

few,  pauci. 

field,  ager. 

fierce,  ferox. 

fight  (to),  pugno  ;  the  fight  (contest) 
is  carried  on,  pugnatur. 

fill,  compleo. 

find,  invenio,  reperio. 

find  out,  cognosce. 

fire,  ignis. 

flee,  fugio. 

flourishing,  florens. 

flower,  flos. 

follow,  sequor. 

following,  posterus. 

foot,  pes  ;  at  the  foot  of  the  moun- 
tain, sub  monte. 

for  (=  towards),  ad. 

forces,  copiae. 

forest,  silva. 

forget,  obliviscor. 

fortify,  munio. 

free,  liber. 

free  (to),  libero. 

friend,  amicus ;  friendly,  amicus. 

frighten,  terreo,  perterreo. 

from,  a,  ab  (away  from),  e,  ex 
(out  of)',  from  each  other,  inter 
nos,  se,  etc. 


G. 

gate,  porta. 

Gaul,  Gallia ;   a  Gaul,  Gallus. 
general,  imperator. 
German^  Germanus. 


get  possession  of,  potior. 

gift,  donum. 

girl,  puella. 

give,  do ;  give  back,  reddo. 

glory,  gloria. 

go,    eo  ;    go  out,    exeo ;    go  baclc, 

redeo. 
god,  deus. 
goddess,  dea. 

going  to,  use  1st  Periphrastic  Conj. 
good,  bonus. 
government,  imperium. 
great,  magnus ;  so  great,  tantus  ; 

how  great,  quantus. 
greatness,  magnitude. 
guard,  custos,  praesidium, 

H. 

hand,  manus. 

happen,  accido. 

happy,  beatus,  felix. 

harm,   noceo  ;    harm  is  done,   no» 

cetur. 
hasten,  mature,  contend©. 
have,  habeo. 
head,  caput. 
hear,  audio. 
heavy,  gravis. 
height,  altitude. 
hesitate,  dubito. 
high,  altus. 
hill,  coUis. 
hinder,  impedio. 
hither,  hue. 
hold,  teneo  ;  hold  in  possession,  ob- 

tineo. 
home,  domus. 
honor,  honor. 
hope,  spes. 
hope  (to),  spero. 
horse,  equus. 
horseman,  eques. 
hostage,  obses. 
hour,  hora. 
house,  domus. 

how,  quam,  quemadmodum. 
how  great,  quantus. 
huge,  ingens. 
hurl,  conjicio. 


298 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


impose^  impono. 

in,  in. 

infantry,  pedites,  peditatus. 

influence,  auctoritas ;  (to),  adduce. 

inform,  certiorem  (es)  facere. 

injury,  injuria. 

intend  to,  1st  Periphrastic  Conj. 

into,  in. 

invite,  invito. 

island,  insula. 

Italy,  Italia. 

J. 

Join  {to),  jungo,  conjungo. 

join  battle,  proelium  committere. 

journey,  iter. 

judge,  judex. 

judge  (to),  judic5. 

just,  Justus. 


keep  from,  prohibeo. 
keeper,  custos. 
king,  rex. 
kill,  interficio. 
know,  scio. 

L. 

lake,  lacus. 

language,  lingua. 

large,  magnus. 

last  part  of,    extremus  ;    as,   ex- 

trema  hieme. 
lay  waste,  vasto. 
lead,  duco ;  lead  across,  transduce, 

lead    back,    reduco ;     lead    out, 

ediico. 
leader,  dux. 
leave,  relinquo. 
legate,  legatus. 
legion,  legio. 
length,  longitudd 
less,  minus. 
lest,  ne. 


letter,  (of  the  alphabet)  littera ;  (an 
epistle)  litterae;  epistola. 

lieutenant,  legatus. 

life,  vita. 

light,  lux. 

light,  levis ;  light  baggage,  sar- 
cinae, 

like,  similis. 

limit  (to),  finio. 

line  of  battle,  acies  ;  line  of  march, 
agmen. 

lion,  leo. 

lofty,  altus. 

long,  longus. 

lose,  amitto. 

love  (to),  amo. 

lower,  inferior. 

Lyons,  Lugdiinum. 

M. 

magistrate,  magistratus. 

maiden,  virgo. 

make,  facio  ;  make  war  upon^  bel- 

lum  infer o. 
man,  vir,  homo. 
many,     multi ;     very    many,    per- 

multi. 
march,  iter  ;  to  march,  iter  facere. 
master  (teacJier),  magister. 
memory,  memoria. 
message,  nuntius. 
messenger,  nuntius. 
midnight,  media  nox. 
mile,   mille  passiis  ;  miles,  millia 

passuum. 
military  science,  res  militaris. 
mind,  animus,  mens. 
mindful,  memor. 
money,  peciinia. 
more,  plus,  amplius. 
mortal,  mortalis. 
mother,  mater. 
mountain,     mons  ;      mountain  -  top, 

summus  mons. 
move,  moveo. 
much,  multus  ;  adv.,  multo  (with 

comp.). 
must,  oportet  or  gerundive. 
my,  mine,  meus. 


GENEEAL   VOCABULARY. 


299 


name^  nomen. 

nature,  natura. 

wear,  prope. 

neighbors,  finitimi. 

neighborhood  of  {in  the),  ad,  circum. 

neither,  neque  (nee). 

new,  novus. 

night,  nox. 

no,  nullus. 

noble,  nobilis. 

noon,  meridies. 

nor,  neque  (nee). 

not,  non  ;  in  negative  commands  and 

wishes,  ne. 
nothing,  nihil. 
number,  niunerus. 


o. 

oath,  jusjurandum. 

obey,  pareo. 

obtain  possession  of,  potior. 

often,  saepe. 

one,  unus  ;  one  .  .  .  another,  alius 

.  .  .  alius ;  the  one  .  .  .  the  other, 

alter  .  .  .  alter. 
only,  solus  ;  adv.,  solum  ;  not  only, 

non  solum. 
opinion,  sententia. 
opportunity,  potestas,  facultas. 
or,  aut,  vel ;    in  double  questions, 

an ;   or  not,  (direct  questions)  an- 

non,  (indirect  questions)  necne. 
order,  jubeo    (with  ace),    impero 

(with  dat.). 
other,    alius  ;    the    other    (of    two), 

alter. 
ought,  oportet,  debeo. 
out  of,  e  (ex). 
overcome,  supero. 


pain,  dolor. 

party  pars. 

pass  the  luinter,  hiemo. 

pay,  merces,  pretium. 


peace,  pax. 

people,  populus. 

peril,  periculum. 

persuade,  persuaded. 

pitch  camp,  castra  ponere. 

place,  locus;  places^  loca. 

plan,  consilium. 

poet,  poeta. 

point  out,  monstro,  demonstro. 

Pompey,  Pompeius. 

possession  {get  or  obtain),  pbtior. 

possible  {as),  quam  +  superlative. 

powerful,    potens  ;    to  be  more  (or 

very)   powerful,    plus   (or  pluri- 

mum)  posse. 
praise  {to),  laudo. 
praise,  laus. 
prefer,  malo. 
price,  pretium. 
promise,  polliceor. 
protect,    servo  ;     esse    praesidio 

(+  dat.  of  advantage). 
province,  provincia. 
punish,  punio,  animadverto. 


quick,  celer. 


Q. 


R. 


rampart,  vallum. 

read,  lego. 

reason,     causa  ;    for    this    reason, 

propterea. 
receive,  accipio,  recipio. 
recent,  recens. 
rejoice,  laetor,  gaudeo. 
release,  llbero. 
remain,  maneo. 
reply  {to),  respondeo. 
reply,  responsum. 
respublica, 
resisto. 
respecting,  de. 
rest  of,  reliquus. 
restrain,    retineo  ;     restrain  from^ 

retinere  quin. 
return,  reverter,  redeo. 


300 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


revolution,  res  novae. 
reward,  praemium. 
Rhine,  Rlienus. 
Rhone,  Bhodanus. 
rich,  dives. 
right,  jiis. 
river,  flumen. 
road,  via,  iter. 
Roman,  Komanus. 
Rome,  Roma. 
rose,  rosa. 
route,  iter. 
rule,  rego. 

s. 

sad,  tristls. 

sailor,  nauta. 

salce  of  {for  the),  causa. 

same.  Idem. 

satisfy,  satisfacio. 

save,  servo. 

say,  dico  ;   he  says,  dicit. 

science  (military),  res  militaris. 

sea,  mare. 

see,  video. 

seek,  peto. 

seize,  occupo. 

seem,  videor. 

self,  ipse. 

sell,  vendo. 

senate,  senatus. 

send,  mitto  ;  send  ahead  or  for- 
ward, praemitto  ;  send  bach,  re- 
mitto. 

serve  (as),  sum,  with  dat.  of  purpose. 

sesterce  or  sestertius,  sestertius. 

set  f  re  to,  incendo. 

set  out,  proficiscor. 

severe,  gravis. 

ship,  navis  ;  ship  of  tvar,  n.  longa. 

short,  brevis. 

show,  monstro. 

sich,  aeger. 

side  of  (on  this),  cis,  citra. 

signal,  signum. 

since,  quum. 

sister,  soror. 

size,  magnitudo. 

skilled,  peritus. 


slave,  servus.  i 

slavery,  servitus. 

small,  parvus. 

so,  ita,  tam ;  so  many,  tot. 

soldier,  miles. 

some  .  .  .  others,  alii  .  .  .  alii. 

some  one,   something,    aliquis,    ali- 

quid. 
son,  filius. 

sort  (of  such  a),  ejusmodi. 
speak,  dico,  loquor. 
speech,  oratio. 
spur,   calcar. 
star,  Stella. 

state,  civitas,  respublica. 
stone,  lapis. 

storm,  take  by  storm,  expugno. 
story,  fabula. 
strength,  vis. 
summon,  voco,  convoco. 
sunset,  occasus  solis. 
supplies,  commeatus,  copiae. 
suppose,  puto. 
surpass,  praesto  (with  dat.),  prae- 

cedo  (with  ace). 
surrender,  dedo. 
suspect,  suspicor. 
sustain,  sustineo. 
sword,  gladius. 


table,  mensa. 

take,    capio  ;     take   by    storm,    ex- 
pugno. 

tall,  altus. 

tax,  vectigal,  stipendium. 

teach,  doceo. 

teacher,  magister. 

tell,  dico,  narro. 

temple,  templum. 

terrify,  terreo,  perterreo. 

territory,  fines,  ager. 

than,  quam. 

that,  conj.,  ut ;  dem.  pron.,  is,  ille ; 
rel.  pron.,  qui. 

that  not,    (purpose)   ne,   (result)   ut 
non. 

thing,   res  or  the  neuter  form  of  an 
adj.  or  pron. 
I   think,  puts,  existimo. 


GENEEAL  VOCABULARY. 


301 


this,  hie. 

through^  per. 

throw,  jaeio. 

till  (to),  eolo. 

time,  tempus. 

timid,  timidus. 

to,  ad. 

tongue,  lingua. 

top  of,  summus. 

towards,  ad,  sub  (of  time). 

tower,  turris. 

town,  oppidum. 

tribute,  stipendium, 

troops,  copiae. 

trumpet,  tuba. 

try,  Conor. 


u. 

'  uncertain,  ineertus. 
under,  sub. 
undergo,  subeo. 
understand,  intelligo. 
unfriendly,  inimicus. 
unhappy,  infelix. 
unjust,  injustus. 
unlike,  dissimilis. 
imtil,  dum. 
unwilling  {to  be),  nolo. 
upper,  superior. 
urge,  hortor,  cohortor. 
use,  utor, 
useful,  utilis. 


V. 

very,  (1)  sup.  of  adj.  or  adv.;  (2)  per 

as  a  prefix. 
vicinity  of   (in  the),    ad,   circum  ; 

from  the  vicinity  of,  a,  ab. 
victor,  victor. 
victory,  victoria. 
violence,  vis. 
voice,  vox. 


w. 

wait,  exspecto. 

wall,  murus  ;  ivalls  oj  a  city,  moe- 
nia ;  as  a  rampart,  vallum. 

wander  about,  vagor. 

luar,  bellum. 

watch,  vigilia. 

way,  via,  iter. 

weapon,  telum. 

weep,  fleo. 

well,  bene. 

what,  interrog.,  quis  (qui)  ;  rel., 
qui. 

when,  quum,  ubi. 

whether,  utrum,  num. 

which,  (of  two)  uter,  (of  several) 
quis  (qui). 

w\ile,  dum ;  a  little  while,  paulis- 
per ;  a  little  while  ago,  paulo  ante. 

white,  albus. 

who,  interrog.,  quis  (qui);  rel.,  qui. 

whole,  totus. 

why,  cur,  quare. 

wicked,  malus. 

wide,  latus. 

width,  latitude. 

wing  (of  an  army),  cornu. 

winter  (to pass  the),  hiemS ;  winter- 
quarters,  hiberna, 

wise,  sapiens. 

wish,  volo. 

with,  cum. 

without,  sine. 

woods,  silva. 

word,  verbum. 

work,  opus. 

worthy,  dignus. 

wound,  vulnus ;  to  wound,  vulnerS. 

wretched,  miser. 

write,  scribo. 


yet,  tamen. 

yoke,  jugum. 

your,  yours,  tuus,  vester. 


INDEX. 


In  this  Index  N.  stands  for  NOTE,  L.  for  LESSON,  and  A.  for  APPENDIX.     The  sig- 
nijicance  of  other  abbreviations  is  evident,  and  needs  no  explanation. 


a,  final,  long  in  Abl.  sing.,  N.  8  (8),  9,  d. 

a  (ab),  how  used,  N.  95,  a;  how  diff.  from 
e  (ex),  N.  95,  b ;  with  Abl.  of  Agent,  N. 
151,  Caution  ;  as  prefix,  N.  99, 1. 

Ablative  Case,  pi.  ending  in  -abus,  N.  9,  e ; 
ending  in  -i,  or  -e  or  -i,  N.  17,  b,  26,  28  ; 
position,  N.  193,  5.  Use  (general),  20  (page 
24),  N.  146  ;  used  Adverbially,  N.  39,  a,'94, 
1,  2,  146;  with  e  (ex)  or  de,  instead  of 
Part.  Gen,,  N.  123,  a,  L.  xlvi ;  with  peto, 
postulo,  quaero,  N.  141,  r.  2, 199,  4 ; 
of  Separation,  N.  147,  L.  xxiii  (but  see  N. 
131,  c) ;  with  opus  and  usus,  N.  147,  a; 
of  Source,  Birth,  etc.,  N.  148 ;  of  Cause,  N. 
149,  L.  xl ;  of  Manner,  N.  150,  L.  xlix ;  of  Ac- 
companiment, N.  150,  a,  L.  xlix;  of  Means 
and  Agent,  N.  151,  L.  xxii,  xlii ;  with  utor, 
etc.,  N.  151,  a,  L.  xlii,  with  Adj.  (fretus, 
etc.),  N.  151,  &,  L.  Ixx,  —  (dignus,  etc.)  N. 
156,  L.  Ixx ;  of  Price,  N.  151,  c,  L.  Ixx  ;  of 
Quality,  N.  152,  L.  Ixx;  of  Respect,  N.  153, 
191,  b,  L.  xlix;  with  Comparatives,  N.  154,  L. 
Ixviii ;  of  Measure  of  DiflF.,  N.  155,  L.  Ixviii ; 
Ablative  Absolute,  N.157,  L,  lix;  of  Place,  N. 
158, 159,  L.  xxxix ,  Iv ;  of  Time ,  N .  160 ,  L.  xlv. 

Abstract  Nouns,  page  44  (*  at  bottom  of  page). 

ac  (atque),  N.  96,  a. 

Accent,  13  (page  21);  of  Gen.  and  Voc.  in 
-i  (for  -ii  and  -ie),  N.  10,  fZ,  e  ;  as  affected 
by  an  Enclitic,  13*  (page  21),  N.  195,  4. 

accidit,  inflection,  A.  47. 

Accompaniment,  howexpr.,  N.  150,  <x,  L.  xlix. 

A.ccusative  Case,  20  (page  24);  in  -im,  N. 
17,  c ;  in  -is  (pi.),  N.  17,  d,  18,  26 ;  as  Direct 
Object,  N.  102,  r.,  139,  L.  iii  ;  Cognate, 
N.  140  ;  two  Ace,  N.  141,  and  c,  L.  xxxiii ; 
used  Adverbially  [54  (page  15)],  expr.  Time, 
Distance,  Degree,  etc.,  N.  39,  a,  94,  1,  142, 
L.  xlv-xlvii;  with  Prep.,  N.  95,  L.  xxxix ; 
of  Place  to  which,  N.  158,  159,  6,  L.  xxxix, 
Iv;  with  Inf.,  N.  143,166,199,  3,  L.  xx; 
with  propior  and  proximus,  N.  132,  a ; 
position,  N.  193,  3. 


Active  Voice,  14  (page  3). 

Adjectives,  9  (page  2),  N.  24-43;  A.  10-20; 
position,  193,  1.  Use  (general),  47  (page 
13),  N.  108 ;  Attrib.  and  Pred.,  N.  108,  1- 

5  ;  used  as  Nouns,  N.  109,  L.  xli ;  agreeing 
with  Inf.  or  Clause,  N.  109,  b,  126,  a,  r., 
L.  Ivi;  connected  by  et  or  -que,  N.  195, 

6  ;  special  uses,  N.  110.  [See  also  Declen- 
sions of  Adjectives,  Comparison,  Nume- 
ral Adj.,  etc.] 

Adjective  Clause,  42,  b  (page  12). 
Adjective  Element,  38,  a  (page  11). 
Adverbial  Accusative,  see  Accusative. 
Adverbial  Clause,  42,  c  (page  12). 
Adverbial  Element,  38,  c  (page  11) ;  position, 

N.  193,  5. 
Adverbs,  28  (page  9) ;  position,  N.  193,  5  > 

formation,  N.  38,  a,  b,  39  (bene,  magno- 

pere,  facile),  94  ;  Comparison,  N.  38,  c, 

d ;  Numeral  Adverbs,  N.  44.     Use,  N.  94, 

L.  xxix ;  Relative  Adv.  for  a  Relative  Phrase, 

N.  115,  e. 
Agent,  expr.  by  Abl. ,  N.  151,  Caution,  L.  xxii ; 

expr.  by  Dat.,  N.  136,  L,  Ix ;  indirect  (with 

per),  N.  151,  Caution. 
alienus,  alter,  alius,  N.  195,  7. 
aliquis,  N.  52,  and  a,  c;  L.  liv ;  A.  27. 
alius,  N.  43,  b;  L.  xiii ;  A.  11;  alius  .  .  . 

alius,  N.  195,  8,  9;  L.  xlviii ;    alius, 

alter,    alienus,   diff.    in  meaning,    N. 

195,  7. 
Alphabet  (Latin),  page  17. 
alter,  N.  43,  b ;  L.  xiii ;  A.  11 ;  alter  .  .  . 

alter,  N.  195,  8 ;  L.  xlviii. 
ambo,  how  declined,  N.  43,  b. 
amo,  inflection,  A.  28,  29. 
an,  see  Double  Questions. 
Analysis  of  Sentences,  34  (page  9),  N.  194. 
Antecedent,  11,  b  (page  3) ;  omitted,  N.  115,  a. 
Antepenult,  and  its  accent,  13,  b  and  r.  3 

(page  21). 
antequam  and  priusquam,  with  Indie. 

and  Subj.,  N.  184,  c ;  L.  Ixxii. 


INDEX. 


303 


Aorist,  N.  62, 171. 

Apodosis,  N.  174. 

Appendix,  pages  235-258. 

Apposition,  38,  a  (page  11),  46  (page  13) ;  N. 

106,  L.  V ;  in  such  phrases  as  the  city  of 

Rome,  N.  119,  Caution  ;  expr.  by  Clause  of 

Result,  N.  181,  e. 
as,  a  Rel.  Pron.,  N.  115,/;  as  possible,  how 

expressed,  N.  40,  c. 
Asking  (verbs  of),  constr.  with  rogO,  peto, 

postulo,  quaero,  N.  199,  4. 
Assimilation,  N.  1  (6). 
"  Attraction,"  Subj.  of,  N.  185. 
Attributive  Adjectives,  N.  108, 1,  2. 
audeo,  N.  81 ;  A.  38. 
audio,  inflection,  A,  35,  36. 
aut  .  .  .  aut,  N.  195,  8. 
Auxiliary  Verbs,  25  (page  8). 
ave,  Imperative,  N.  91,  2,  b. 

bene,  how  compared,  N.  39. 
bonus,  N.  33,  A.  17,  a. 
bos,  how  declined,  A.  7. 

C  and  g  (with  s,  forming  x),  N.  1  (3),  12,  a,. 

Caesar's  "  Gallic  War,"  —  Bk,  I.,  chap.  1-13, 
pages  136-142 ;  Notes  on  the  same,  pages 
143-148. 

ca7i,  how  expressed,  N.  197,  3. 

capio,  inflection,  A.  34.   [See  Verbs  in  -io.] 

Cardinal  Adjectives,  9,  b  (page 2),  N.  41 ;  how 
declined,  N.  42,  c,  43.  [See  under  unus, 
duo,  tres,  mille.] 

Case,  8  (page  2),  15,  a,  b  (page  22) ;  Table  of 
Latin  Cases,  20  (page  24) ;  Case-endings,  N. 
6;  formation  of  cases,  N.  7. 

causa,  with  Genitive,  N.  128,  149,  a. 

Cause,  expr.  by  Ablative,  N.  149,  L.  xl ;  by 
Indie,  and  Subj.  Modes,  N.  182,  L.  Ixix. 

celo,  with  two  Accusatives,  N.  141,  r.  1. 

certiorem  facio,  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  N. 
199  3. 

citerior,  etc.,  N.  34,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  b. 

Clauses,  41  (page  12) ;  as  modifiers,  42  (page 
12),  N.  104  ;  as  Subject,  36,  d  (page  10) :  as 
Object,  42,  a  (page  12).  [See  Causal,  Con- 
cessive, and  Temporal  Clauses.'] 

coepi,  N.  91,  1,  L.  Ixiii,  A.  46. 

cogo,  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  N.  197,  8. 

Collective  Nouns,  3,  d  (page  1) ;  with  pi.  verb, 
51,  b  (page  14),  N.  117,  c. 

Commands,  Direct,  N.  163,  178,  Caution  2, 
L.  xi ;  Indirect,  N.  164,  c,  178 ;  Negative, 
N.  178,  Caution  2. 

Comparative  Degree,  10  (page  2);  how  de- 
clined in  Latin,  N.  26,  d,  A.  X5;  plus,  N. 


27,  A.  15,  a ;  translated  rather,  too,  qidte^ 
N.  40,  a ;  with  Abl.,  N.  154,  L.  ixviii. 

Comparison  of  Adjectives,  10  (page  2),  N.  29 ; 
Regular,  N.  30,  L.  xxviii,  A.  16 ;  Irregular, 
N.  31-36,  L.  xxix,  xxxiv  [see  under  Ir- 
regular Comparisonl  ;  by  magis  and 
maxime,  N.  37 ;  of  Participles,  N.  30,  a. 

Comparison  of  Adverbs,  N.  38,  39. 

Complement,  37,  a  (page  10),  46,  a  (page  13), 
N.  55, 103,  L.  vi. 

Complementary  Infinitive,  N.  165,  b,  L.  xix. 

Complex  Sentence,  40,  c  (page  12),  N.  105. 

Compound  (1)  Nouns,  N.  23,  L.  xxxvi ;  (2) 
Words,  N.  99 ;  (3)  Sentences,  40,  b  (page  12), 
N.  105. 

con  (com,  etc.),  as  prefix,  N.  99,  1. 

Concession,  how  expressed,  N.  183,  L.  Ixxi. 

Conditional  Sentences,  N.  174,  175,  L.  xxi, 
Iviii. 

Conjugation,  15  a  (page  22) ;  the  Four  Con- 
jugations, general  statement,  N.  54,  65 
[See  under  First,  Second,  Third,  and 
Fourth  Conjugations;  Verbs  in  -io; 
Periphrastic  Conjugations,  Deponent, 
Semi- Deponent,  Irregular,  Defective, 
and  Impersonal  Verbs];  peculiarities  of 
the  Four  Conjugations,  N.  79. 

Conjunctions,  30  (page  9),  N.  96  ;  omitted,  N, 
96,  b.    [See  et,  -que,  atque.] 

Consonants,  3  (page  17) ;  Consonant  Changes, 
N.  1,  79,  8 ;  Double  Consonants,  4,  c 
(page  17) ;  Consonant  Stems  (Third  Dec), 
N.  11, a,  15. 

constat,  inflection,  A.  47. 

consuevi,  with  Pres.  meaning,  N.  91,  e., 
A.  46. t 

Contracted  Syllables  (length  of),  11,  e  (page 
21),  N.  7,  20,  c. 

Copula  {to  be)  and  Copulative  Verbs,  87  (page 
10),  N.  55, 103,  L.  VI. 

Correlatives,  N.  195,  8,  L.  xlviii. 

cum  (prep.),  with  Abl.,  N.  150,  a,  L.  xlix; 
omitted,  N.  150,  R. ;  Enclitic,  N.  53,  a, 
195,  3. 

cum  (quum),  with  Indie,  and  Subj.,  N. 
182,  b,  183,  a,  184,  a,  'L.  Ixix,  Ixxi,  Ixxii. 


d  and  t,  before  s,  N.  1  (4),  12,  6. 

Dates,  N.  161. 

Dative  Case,  20  (page  24) ;  how  formed,  N.  7 ; 
plural  form  in  declension,  N.  8  (5) ;  ending 
in  -i,  see  -ius  in  Gen.  Sing.  ;  ending  in 
-abus,  N.  9,  e,  L.  viii ;  ending  in  -ubus, 
N.  20,  R. ;  of  Indirect  Object,  N.  129,  L.  ix; 
when  to  must  be  trans,  by  ad,  N.  129,  a\ 
when /or  must  be  trans,  by  pro,  N.  129,  b  \ 

r 


304 


INDEX. 


with  Intrans.  Verbs,  N.  180,  (in  the  Passive) 
131,  a,  Caution,  134,  L.  Ixvi ;  of  Advantage 
or  Disadvantage,  N.  131,  L.  Ixvi ;  with  Ad- 
jectives, N.  131,  6,  132,  L.  xxxiv ;  for  Abl. 
of  Separation,  N.  131,  c ;  with  Compound 
Verbs  containing  Prepositions,  N.  133,  L. 
Ivii;  denoting  Possession,  N.  135,  L.  Ixvii ; 
of  Agent,  N.  136,  L.  Ix ;  two  Datives,  N.  137, 
L.  Ixvii ;  for  Genitive,  N.  138 ;  position,  N. 
193,  3. 

de,  as  a  prefix,  N.  99,  1;  with  Abl.,  instead 
of  Part.  Gen.,N.  123,  a 

dea,  N.  6,  9,  e,  L.  viii. 

Declaratory  Sentences,  44,  a  (page  13),  N.  100; 
in  Indirect  Discourse,  N.  187. 

Declension,  15,  a  (page  22);  general  laws, 
N.  8 ;  Declensions  of  Nouns  (how  distin- 
guished), 21  (page  25).  [See  ynder  the 
different  Declensions  of  Nouns  and  Ad- 
jectives.'] 

Defective  Verbs,  27  (page  8),  N.  91,  L.  Ixiii,  A. 

46. 

[See  coepi,  memini,  odi,  inquam, 

salve,  ave.] 
Degree,  expr.  by  Obj.  or  Ace,  54,  6  (page  15), 

N.  142,  L.  xlvii ;  Degree  of  Difference,  54, 

7  (page  16),  N.  155,  L.  Ixviii. 
Demonstrative  Pronouns,  N.  49  ;  as  Adj.,  N. 

114,  1;   as  Pers.  Pron.,  N.  114,  2,  L.  li, 

A.  24;  position,  N.  193,4. 
Dependent  Clauses,  41  (page  12). 
Deponent  Verbs,  N.  80;    inflection,   A.   37; 

with  Abl. ,  N.  151,  a,  L.  xlii.    [See  under  the 

different  Conjugations  of  Verbs.] 
Derived  Words,  N,  98.     [See  Endings.] 
deus,  N.  6, 10,/;  L.  xiii 
die,  due,  fae,  fer,  N.  79,  5 
dies,  N.  22,  b-d,  A.  9.    [See  Fifth  Declen- 
sion.] 
dignus,  with  Abl.,  N.  156,  L.  Ixx. 
Diminutives,  N.  98,  b. 
Diphthongs,  5  (page  18);    quantity.  11,  a 

(page  20). 
Direct  Object,  89,  a  (page  11),  49  (page  14), 

N.  102,  R.,  139.  L.  iii ;  position,  N.  193,  3. 
Direct  Questions,  see'  Questions. 
dis  (di),  as  a  prefix,  N.  99,  2. 
Distributive  Adjectives,  N.  41,  a ;    how  de- 
clined, N.  42,  b. 
diu,  compared,  N.  39,  b. 
dives,  compared,  N.  86,  a ;  declined,  A. 

14,  a. 
domus,  N.  21,  b;  expr.  Place,  N.  159,  L. 

XXXV,  A.  8,  a. 
Double  Questions,  see  Questions. 
dubito,  with  Subj.  and  Inf.,  N.  181,  d,  and 

Cautions,  199, 1. 


dubius,  with  Subj.,  N.  181,  d,  199, 1. 
dum,  [ivhile)  with  Hist.  Pres.,  N.  168,  r.,.  L, 

Ixvi ;  (until)  N.  184,  6,  L.  Ixxii ;  {provided] 

N.  183,  d,  L.  Ixxii. 
dummodo,  with  Subj.,  N.  183,  d. 
duo,  N.  43,  c,  L.  xlv,  A.  20,  b. 


e,  final,  quantity  in  declension,   N.  8  (9); 

lo7ig  b^ore  i,  N.  6,  22,  d:,  -e,  -al,  -ar, 

with  Abl.  in  -i,  N.  16,  r.,  26,  b. 
e  (ex),  N.  95,  a  ;  how  diflf.  from  a  (ab),  N. 

95,  6;  with  Abl.  instead  of  Part.  Gen.,  N. 

123,  a. 
ego,  N.  46,  L.  1,  A  21. 
ejusmodi,  meaning  and  use,  N.  121. 
Enclitics,  N.  53,  a,  195,  3  ;  as  affecting  accent 

of  a  word,  N.  195,  4. 
Endings    with   special   meaning :  —  Nouns 

(-or,    -ulus),    N.  98,    a,    b ;    Adjectives 

(-ulus,  -osus),  N.  98,  6,  c  ;  Verbs  (-sco, 

-to),  N.  98,  rf,  e ;  -que  (as  in  quisque), 

N.  53,  c  ;  -vis  (as  in  quivis),  N.  52,  d. 
English  Grammar  Reviewed,  pages  1-16. 
English  Method  of  Pronunciation,  9  (page  19). 
eo,  N.  87,  L.  Iviii,  A.  43;  compounds  often 

transitive,  N.  87,  R. 
eo  .  .  .  quo,  N.  195,  8. 
esse  omitted,  N.  199,  2. 
est,  sunt  (there  is,  there  are),  N.  193,  6. 
et  .  .  .  et,N.  195,8. 
et,   -que,   atque,   N.  96,  a  j    omitted, 

N.  96,  b. 
etsi  in  Concessions,  N.  183,  Caution. 
Etymology,  defined,  1  (page  1). 
Euphonic  Changes,  N.  1,2. 
Exclamatory  Sentences,  44,  d  (page  13),  N.  100. 
Expletives  (it,  there),  55  (page  15). 
Extent  of  Space,  54,  3  (page  15),  N.  142,  6, 

L.  xlvi ;  of  Time,  54,  4  (page  15),  N.  142,  a, 

160,  L.  xlv. 
exterus,  N.  35,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  c. 


facile,  for  faciliter,  N.  89. 

facilis,  etc.,  N.  31,  b,  L.  xxix,  A.  16,  6. 

facio  and  its  compounds,  N.  88,  R. ;   Imper. 

fac,  N.  79,  5.     [See  fio.] 
Fearing,  verbs  of,  with  Subj.,  N.  179,  e. 
fero,  N.  86,  L.  Ivi,  A.  42. 
fido,  N.  81,  A.  38. 

Fifth  Declension,  N.  22,  L.  xxxvi,  A.  9. 
filia,  N.  9,  e,  L.  viii. 
filius.  how  declined,  N.  10,  d,  L.  xi. 
Finite  Verbs,  15,  e  (page  4),  51  (page  14),  56, 

a  (page  16),  N.  117. 
fio,  N.  88,  L.  Ixi,  A.  44. 


INDEX. 


3  5 


First  Conjugation,  N.  65-78 ;  Synopsis,  N.  78, 

L.  vii-xxv,  A.  28,  29;  Deponent  Verbs,  L. 

xxxii,  A.  37;  First  Periphrastic  Conj.,  N. 

82,  a,  L.  Ix,  A.  39,  a. 
First  Declension  of  Nouns,  N.  9,  L.  i,  viii,  A.  1. 
First  and  Second  Declensions  of  Adjectives, 

N.  24,  a,  L.  iv,  A.  10,  11. 
for,  expr.  by  Dative,  N.  129;  by  pro,  N.  129,  b. 
fore  and  forem  for  futurus  esse  and 

essem,  N.  84,  d\  fore  ut  with  Subj. 

for  Fut.  Inf.  Pass.,  N.  181,  a,  R. 
Fourth  Conjugation,  N.  65-77,  L.  xli,  A.  35, 

36;  Deponent  Verbs,  L.  xlii,  A.  37. 
Fourth  Declension,  N.  20,  21,  L.  xxxv,  A.  8. 
Frequentative  Verbs,  N.  98,  e. 
fretus,  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  h. 
fruor,  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  a. 
fungor,  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  a. 
Future  Tense,  17,  a  (page  4) ;  Indicative,  N. 

60,  61,  1,  68,  c,  73,  c  ;  trans,  by  Present 
form,  N.  168,  a ;  Imperative,  N.  70,  75,  &, 
c  ;  Infinitive,  N.  71,  c,  76,  c,  191,  r.  ;  sub- 
stitute for  Fut.  Inf.  Pass.,  N.  76,  c,  181,  a, 
R.  ;  Fut.  Inf.  Act.  without  esse,  N.  189, 
e,  199,  2  ;  Fut.  Inf.  in  Deponent  Verbs, 
N.  80,  a ;  Fut.  Participle,  {active)  N.  58,  a, 
72,  h ;  {passive)  N.  58,  6,  77,  b. 

Future  Perfect  Tense,  17,  a  (page  4),  N.  60, 

61,  1,  68,/,  73,  d\  trans,  by  Present /orwi, 
N.  168,  a. 


g  (with  s,  forming  x),  N.  1  (3),  6, 12,  a. 

gaudeo,  N.  81,  A.  38. 

Gender,  5  (page  1) ;  general  rules,  (by  mean- 
ing) 18,  19  (page  23),  N.  3  ;  {by  eliding)  N. 
4.  Exceptions  {by  ending),  —  First  Dec, 
N.  9,  c  ;  Second  Dec,  N.  10,  g  ;  Third  Dec, 
N.  19,  a,  b ;  Fourth  Dec,  N.  20*;  Fifth  Dec. , 
N.  22,  b.  Gender  of  an  Infinitive,  Phrase, 
or  Clause,  36  (page  10),  19,  c,  2  (page  23) ; 
of  an  Indeclinable  Noun,  19,  c,  1  (page  23) 

General  Facts  and  Useful  Hints,  N.  195- 
199. 

Genitive,  20  (page  24) ;  endings  in  the  Five 
Declensions,  N.  6;  ending  in  -ii  or  -i,  N. 
10,  e  ;  general  use,  N.  119,  L.  v  ;  of  Posses- 
sion, N.  120,  L.  v;  of  Quality,  N.  121,  L.  Ixx ; 
of  Value,  N.  121,  a;  Partitive,  N.  122,  123; 
Subjective  and  Objective,  N.  123,  b,  124, 
L.  Ixiii ;  with  Adjectives,  N.  124,  L.  Ixiii ; 
with  Yerhs  of  remembering  arndforgetting, 
N.  125,  L.  Ixiii ;  after  sum,  limited  noun 
omitted,  N.  126,  a,  L.  Ivi ;  expr.  by  Neuter 
of  Poss.  Pron.,  N.  126,  R. ;  equivalent  to 
Eng.  composed  of,  N.  126,  6,  L.  Ivi ;  with 
Impersonal  Verbs,  N.  127 ;  with  causa  or 


gratia,  N.  128,  L.  xl ;  with  pridie  and 

postridie,  N.  128,  r.  ;  with  potior,  N. 

151,  a,  R. ;  position,  N.  193,  2. 
genius,  how  declined,  N.  10,  d. 
Gerund,  N.  59,  a,  72,  c,  190  ;  L.  Ixxiii. 
Gerundive,  N.  58,  b,  77,  b ;  uses,  N.  189,/,  190, 

a,  L.  Ixxiii ;  without  esse,  N.  199,  2. 
gratia,  with  Genitive,  N.  128. 

h,  a  breathing,  4,  b  (page  17),  11,  b,  r.,  c,  r. 
(page  20),  N.  95,  a. 

hie,  N.  49  and  r.  1,  114,  c,  L.  li,  A.  24. 

Hints  on  Translation,  N.  200. 

Historical  Tenses,  N.  171 ;  Present,  N.  168,  b, 
L.  Ixvi ;  Perf. ,  N.  61,  b ;  Historical  Infini- 
tive, N.  167,  L.  Ixxi. 

Hortatory  Subjunctive,  see  Subjunctive. 

hortor,  inflection,  A.  37.  [See  Deponent 
Verbs.] 

i  final,  quantity,  N.  8  (7) ;  i  short  in  Supine, 
of  eo,  N.  87,  a ;  -i  in  Abl.,  N.  17,  6,  26 ;  -i 
or  -e  in  Abl.,  N.  17,  b,  26,  c,  d,  28. 

ibi  .  .  .  ubi,  N.  195,  8. 

idem,  N.  49,  L.  li,  A.  24. 

Idus,  N.  20*,  161,  3. 

ille,  N.  49,  and  r.  1,  114,  b,  L.  Ii,  A.  24. 

-im  in  Ace  Sing.,  N.  17,  c. 

Imperative  Mode,  15,  d  (page  4),  20  (page  7), 
N.  57,  c,  163 ;  Tenses,  N.  63,  c,  169 ;  forma- 
tion, N.  70,  75 ;  die,  due,  fac,  fer,  N. 
79,  5 ;  Imperative  Sentences,  44,  c  (page 
13),  N.  100.     [See  Commands.] 

Imperfect  Tense,  N.  60,  61,  2;  formation, 
(Indicative)  N.  68,  6,  73,  6,  (Subjunctive) 
69,  b,  74,  a. 

impero,  with  Dat.,  N.  131,  b,  Caution,  197, 
1,  L.  Ixvi;  with  Subj.,  N.  179,  d;  L. 
Ixvi. 

Impersonal  Verbs  and  Verbs  used  Imperson- 
ally, 26  (page  8),  N.  92,  93,  L.  Ixiv  ;  exam- 
ples, N.  198 ;  inflection,  A.  47  ;  used  with 
the  Gen.,  N.  127;  used  with  the  Dat.,  N. 
134,  L.  Ixiv,  Ixvi ;  with  Clause  as  Subject, 
N.  188,  L.  Ixiv,  Ixv.  [See  licet  and 
oportet.] 

in,  as  prefix,  N.  99,  1,  2;  with  Ace.  and 
Abl.,  N.  95,  c,  L.  xxxix. 

Inceptive  Verbs,  N.  98,  d. 

incipio,  as  Pres.  of  coepi,  N.  91, 1. 

inde  .  .  .  unde,  N.  195,  8. 

Indeclinable  Adjectives,  N.  42,  c,  43,  e. 

Indeclinable  Nouns,  gender  of,  19,  c,  1  (page 
23),  N.  3. 

Indefinite  Pronouns,  N.  52, 116,  L.  liv,  A.  27- 
[See  under  aliquis,  siquis,  nequis; 
etc.] 


20 


306 


INDEX. 


Independent  Case,  8,  d  (page  2),  52  (page 
14). 

Indicative  Mode,  15,  a  (page  3),  N.  57,  a,  162; 
Tenses,  17  (page  4),  N.  60,  61,63,  a;  for- 
mation of  tenses,  N.  68,  73 ;  special  force  of 
Fut.,  Fut.  Perf.,  and  Pres.  (Historical),  N. 
168  ;  in  Conditional  Sentences,  N.  174, 175 ; 
in  Indirect  Discourse,  N.  187,  R.  2. 

Indirect  Discourse,  N.  166, 186,  187,  L.  Ixxv- 
Ixxviii ;  laws  of  Modes  and  Tenses,  N.  187, 
L.  Ixxvi ;  general  practice,  L.  lxxvii,lxxviii. 

Indirect  Object,  39,  b  (page  11),  N.  129,  L.  ix, 
Ixvi ;  position,  N.  193,  3. 

Indirect  Questions,  N.  177,  h-d^  L.  Ixxv. 

inferus,  N.  35,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  c. 

Infinitive  Mode,  15,  e  (page  4),  56  (page  16), 
N.  57,  rf ;  Tenses,  N.  68,  rf,  71,  76 ;  time  de- 
noted^ N.  173,  L,  xliii ;  Fut.  Inf.  in  Depo- 
nent Verbs,  N.  80,  a.  Use,  as  Subject  or 
Object,  36,  c  (page  10),  53  (page  15),  N.  57, 
d,  165,  L.  Ivi ;  modified  by  Neut.  Adj.,  N. 
109,  ft,  126,  a,  R.;  Complementary,  N.  165, 
by  L.  xix;  with  Objective  as  Subject,  56,  b 
(page  16);  with  Accusative  as  Subject,  N. 
166,  L.  XX ;  not  used  after  verbs  of  asking, 
urging,  etc.,  N.  166,  Caution;  Historical 
Inf.,  N.  167,  L.  Ixxi;  in  Indirect  Discourse, 
N.  166, 186,  187,  L.  xx,  Ixxv-lxxviii. 

Inflection,  15  (page  22). 

inquam,  N.  91,  2,  a;  position,  N.  193,  6- 

inter  nos,  se,  etc.,  N.  53,  d,  112,  b. 

interest,  with  Gen.,  N.  127,  b. 

interior,  N.  34,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  b. 

Interjections,  31  (page  9),  N.  97. 

Interrogative  Pronouns,  11,  c  (page  3),  N.  51, 
116,  L.  liii ;  position,  N.  193,  4. 

Interrogative  Sentences,  44,  b  (page  13),  N. 
100,  101.     [See  Questions.'] 

Intransitive  Verbs,  12  (page  3) ;  used  in  the 
passive,  N.  93,  2,  134,  L.  Ixvi ;  becoming 
trans,  in  compounds,  N.  87,  R.,  139,  a. 

Introduction  to  Latin  Lessons,  pages  17-25. 

ipse,  N.  49  and  r.  3, 114,  a,  L.  li,  A.  24. 

Irregular  Comparison  of  Adjectives,  L.  xxix, 
xxxiv ;  ending  in  -er,  N.  31,  a,  A.  16,  a ; 
ending  in  -lis  (six),  N.  31,  b,  A.  16,  6;  ending 
in  -dicus,  -ficus,  -volus,  N.  32,  A.  16, 
c;  bonus,  etc., N.  33,  A.  17, a;  eiterior, 
etc. ,  N.  34,  A.  17,  b ;  exterus,  etc. ,  N.  35, 
A.  17,  c ;  dives,  juvenis,  senex,  N.  36. 

Irregular  Verbs,  N.  83-90,  A.  40-45.  [See 
sum,  possum,  prosum,  fero,  eo, 
fio,  volo,  nolo,  malo] 

-is,  in  Ace.  pi.,  N.  6, 17,  d,  18,  26. 

is,  ea,  id,  L.  li,  A.  24  ;  as  Dem.  Pron.,  N.  49 
and  R.  2  ;  as  Pers.  Pron.,  N.  46. 

iste,  N.  49  and  r.  1,  L.  li,  A.  24. 


it,  not  expressed,  26  (page  8),  65  (page  15),  N. 

92,  L.  Ixiv. 
i'taque  and  ita'que,  N.  196, 5- 
-ius,  in  Gen.  Sing.,  N.  43,  a,  b,  49,  L.  xiii.  li, 

A.  11,24. 


j,  consonant  form  of  i,  3  (page  17). 
jubeo  and  impero,  difference  in  construc- 
tion, N.  131,  b.  Caution,  197, 1,  8,  L.  Ixvi. 
Jupiter,  declined,  A.  7. 
jusjurandum,  N.  23,  b. 
juvenis,  how  compared,  N.  36,  b. 
juvo,  with  Acc;  N.  131,  6,  Caution. 

k,  rare  in  Latin ,  2  (page  17). 

Latin  Language,  1  (page  17). 
Latin  Lessons,  pages  27-148. 
let,  as  a  sign  of  a  Command,  etc.,  20  (page  7), 

N.  164,  c. 
libet,  with  Dat.,  N.  134,  R. 
licet,  N.  93, 1,  c  ;  with  Dat.,  N.  134,  r.,  197 

2,  3,  L,  Ixiv;  inflection,  A.  47. 
Liquids,  4,  a  (page  17). 
Locative  Case,  20,  R.  (page  24),  N.  159. 


m  changed  to  n,  N.  1  (5). 

magis,  N.  37,  39 ;  in  malo,  N.  90,  A.  45. 

magnopere,  compared,  N.  39. 

major  natu,  N.  36,  b,  L.  xlix. 

malo,  irr.  verb,  N.  90,  L.  Ixii,  A.  45. 

malus,  N.  33,  A.  17,  a. 

Manner,  how  expressed,  N.  150,  L.  xlix. 

maxime,  N.  37,  39. 

may,  how  expr.  in  Latin,  N.  197,  2,  3,  L. 
Ixiv. 

memini,  N.  91,  2;  with  Gen.,  N.  125,  L. 
Ixiii,  A.  46. 

meridies,  N.  4,  r.  5,  22,  b. 

mens,  N.  48,  L.  xi,  A.  23. 

mille,  N.  43,  e,  123,  c,  L.  xlvi,  A.  20,  c. 

minor  natu,  N.  36,  &,  L.  xlix. 

miseret,  with  Gen.,  N.  127,  a. 

Mixed  Stems  (Third  Dec),  N.  18,  L.  xvii,  A.  6. 

Mode,  defined,  15  (page  3).  [See  under  In- 
dicative, Subjunctive,  etc.] 

modo,  provided,  with  Subj.,  N.  183,  d, 

moneo,  inflection,  A.  30,  31. 

Months  (names  of),  really  Adjectives,  N.  161,  a. 

multum,  multo,  as  Adverbs,  N.  39,  a. 

multus,  N.  33,  A.  17,  a. 

must,  how  expr.  in  Latin,  N.  82,  b,  197.  2, 5^, 
L.  Ix,  Ixiv. 

Mutes,  4,  d  and  r.  (page  17). 


INDEX. 


807 


natu,  N.  36,  b,  L.  xlix. 

ne,  in  negative  Wishes,  N.  176,  Caution;  in 
neg.  Commands,  N.  178,  1,  2 ;  in  neg. 
Purposes,  N.  179, 

-ne,  in  Questions  (single),  N.  101,  a,  195,  3, 
L.  liii ;  -ne  ...  an,  N.  101,  b,  177,  d. 

ne  .  .  .  quidem,  N.  193,  5, 195,'  2. 

nego,  for  dico  non,  N.  199,  5. 

neque  (nee)  .  .  .  neque  (nee),  N. 
195,  8. 

nequis,  N.  52,  b,  c,  L.  liv,  A.  27. 

neuter,  N.  43,  b,  L.  xiii,  A.  11. 

Neuter  Nouns,  general  law  of  decl.,  N.  8  (3); 
ending  in  -e,  -al,  -ar,  N.  16,  R.,  17,  b. 

no,  how  expr.  in  Latin,  N.  101,  R. 

nocetur,  inflection,  A.  47. 

noli,  in  neg.  Commands,  N.  178,  2,  b. 

nolo,  N.  90,  L.  Ixii,  A.45. 

Nominative,  8,  a  (page  2),  45  (page  13),  20 
(page  24),  N.  102,  a,  118  ;  how  formed  in 
the  Five  Declensions,  N.  7  ;  variety  in  for- 
mation in  Third  Dec,  N.  12-15,  b,  16,  a, 
ft,  R. 

nonne,  use,  N.  101,  a,  L.  liii. 

non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  N.  195,  8. 

nos,  for  ego  C  editorV  we  "),  N.  Ill,  a. 

no^ter,  N.  48,  L.  1,  A.  23. 

nostrum,  nostri  (Gen.  pf.),  diff.  in  use, 
N.  123,  b. 

Notes,  on  Latin  Etym^  iogy,  pages  149-187 ; 
on  Latin  Syntax^  pages  188-233. 

novi,  with  Pres.  meaning,  N.  91,  r.,  A.  46t. 

Nouns,  3  (page  1),  N.  3  23.  [See  under  First, 
Second,  etc.,  Declerislovis.} 

nuUus,  N.  43,  b,  L.  xiii,  A.  11. 

num,  use,  N.  101,  a,  177,  d,  L.  liii,  Ixxv. 

Number,  of  Nouns  and  Verbs,  7  (page  1),  22 
(page  7),  51  (page  14). 

Numeral  Adjectives  [see  also  Cardinal,  Oj"- 
dinal,  and  Distributive  Adjectives,  and 
unus,  duo,  tres,  mille],  9,  b  (page  2), 
N.  41, 42, 43,  L.  xlv,  A.  19, 20 ;  do  not  take 
Part.  Gen.,  N.  123,  a. 

Numeral  Adverbs,  N.  44,  A.  19. 

O  final,  quantity  in  decl.,  N.  8  (7)' 
ob,  as  prefix,  N.  99,  1. 
Object,  Direct  and  Indirect,  39  (page  11). 
Objective,  8,  c  (page  2) ;  as  Adv.,  54  (page  15) ; 
as  Subject  of  Infin.,  56,  b  (page  16);  Ob- 
jective Genitive,  N.  124,  L.  Ixiii. 
Obliviscor,  with  Gen.,  N.  125,  L.  Ixiii. 
Odi,  N  91,  2,  L.  Ixiii,  A.  46. 
oportet,  N.  92,  Caution,  93,  1,  c,  197,  2, 3, 
.  L.  Ixiv. 

opus,  with  Abl.,  N.  147,  a. 
Oratio  Obliqua,  see  Indirect  Discourse, 


Order  of  words  in  a  Latin  Sentence,  N  198, 

193. 
Ordinal  Adjectives,  9,  b  (page  2),  N.  41,42,  a, 

L.  xlv,  A.  19. 
O  si,  use,  N.  176. 
ought,  how  expr.  in  Latin,  N.  82,  6, 197,  3. 

par,  inflection,  A.  14,  a. 

Participles,  23  (page  7),  47  (page  13),  N.  58, 
108,  189,  L.  xliv ;  time  denoted,  23,  r. 
(page  8),  N.  189,  a;  formation,  N.  72,  77  ; 
how  compared,  N.  30,  a;  of  Deponent 
Verbs,  N.  80,  6,  L.  xliv;  how  best  trans., 
N.  189,  rf;  in  Abl.  Abs.,  N.  157,  L.  lix. 

Partitive  Genitive,  N.  122,  123,  L.  xlvi ;  how 
to  express  all  of  us,  the  top  of  the  moun- 
tain, etc.,  N.  123,  d,  e. 

Parts  of  Speech,  2  (page  1),  14  (page  22). 

parvus,  N.  33,  A.  17,  a. 

Passive  Voice,  14  (page  3),  46,  c  (page  13). 

Past  Tense,  17,  a  (page  4). 

paterfamilias,  etc.,  N.  23,  c. 

patior,  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  N.  197,  8. 

pelagus,  gender,  N.  4,  R.  3. 

Penult,  and  its  accent,  13,  ct,  b,  and  r.  2 
(page  21). 

per,  as  prefix,  N.  40,  d,  99,  1 ;  with  Ace.  of 
Indirect  Agent,  N.  151,  Caution. 

Perfect  Tense,  17,  a  (page  4) ;  Stem,  N.  67,  79 ; 
Definite  and  Aorist,  N.  61,  3,  62 ;  forma- 
tion, (Indicative)  N.  68,  d,  73,  d,  (Sub- 
junctive) N.  69,  c,  74,  b,  (Infinitive)  N.  71, 
b,  76,  6 ;  V  dropped,  N.  79,  4 ;  Redupli- 
cated, N.  79,  6;  of  lego,  verto,  etc.,  N. 
79, 7  ;  with  Pres.  meaning,  N.  91,  2  and  r.  ; 
Participle,  N.  58,  6,  77,  a,  80,  r.  1, 157,  R.  1, 
(in  Deponents)  with  active  meaning,  N.  80, 
R.  1,  157,  R.  1,  189,  c. 

Periphrastic  Conjugations,  N.  82,  L.  Ix,  A.  39. 

Person,  6  (page  1),  22  (page  7),  51  (page  14), 
N.  117,  d. 

Personal  Endings,  N.  54,  2,  64. 

Personal  Pronouns,  11  (page  3),  N.  46,  L.  1,  A. 
21 ;  usually  omitted,  N.  Ill ;  Third  Person, 
how  supplied,  N.  46, 114,  2;  position,  N. 
193,  8. 

peto,  with  a  (ab),  and  Abl.,N.  141,  r.  2, 
199,4. 

Phrase,  43  (page  12),  N.  104 ;  as  Subject,  36,  e 
(page  10). 

Place,  N.  158, 159,  L.  xxxix,  Iv. 

Pluperfect  Tense  (in  Eng.,  Past  Perfect ^ 
17,  a,  page  4),  N.  60,  61,  4,  68,  e,  69,  d, 
73,  d,  74,  b. 

plus,  N.  27, 122.  b,  L.  xlvii,  A.  15,  a  ;  plus, 
minus,  etc  ,  with  other  cases  instead  of 
Abl..  N.  154.  b. 


308 


INDEX. 


poenitet,  with  Gen.,  N.  127,  a. 
Positive  Degree,  defined,  10  (page  2). 
Possession,  how  expr. ,  48  (page  13),  20  (page 

24) ;  by  Gen.,  N.  120,  L.  vj  by  Dative,  N. 

136,  L.  Ixvii. 
Possessive  Pronouns,  N.  48,  113,  L.  1,  A.  23 ; 

used  as  Nouns,  N.  113,  a,  126,  a,  r. 
possum,  N.  85,  1,  L.  xix,  A.  41. 
posterus,  N.  35,  A.  17,  c. 
postquam,  posteaquam,  with  Indie, 

N.  184,  Caution. 
postridie,  with  Gen.,  N.  128,  r. 
postulo,  with  a  (ab)  and  AbL,  N.  141,  r.  2, 

199,  4. 
Potential  Mode,  15,  h  (page  3),  18  (page  5). 
potior,  inflected,  A.  37 ;  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  a, 

L.  xlii;  with  Gen.,  N.  151,  a,  R. 
Predicate,  35,  6,  37  (page  10),  N.  102,  6,  103  ; 

Pred.  Noun  and  Adj.,  37,  R.  and  d  (page  11), 

46,  a,  6,  (page  13),  N.  107  and  r.,  108,  L.  vi. 
Prefixes,  N.  40,  d,  99. 
Prepositions,  29  (page  9)  ;  with  Ace.  and  Abl., 

N.  95,  L  xxxix ;  as  Adverbs,  29,  r.  (page  9), 

N.  95 ;    cum  omitted,  N.  150,  a,  r.  ;   fre- 
quent position,   N.  193,  7  ;   in  and  sub, 

N.  95,  c,  L.  xxxix. 
Present  Tense,  17,  a  (page  4),  N.  60,  61,  1; 

Stem,  N.  54,  1,  65,  67;   formation  of  the 

Present,  {Indie.)  N.  54,  3,  68,  a,  73,  a; 

{Suhj.) N.  69, a,  74,  a,{Imper. ) N. 70, 75,  a; 

{inf. )  N.  71,  a,  76,  a ;  time  expr.  hy  Pres. 

Inf.,  N.  173;  Pres.  Participle,  N.  58,  a,  72, 

a ;  no  Pres.  Partic.  in  sum,  N.  84,  c,  157 ; 

Historical  Present,  N.  168,  b,  L.  Ixvi. 
Preteritive  Verbs,  A.  46t. 
Price,  how  expr.,  54,  9  (page  15) ;  N.  151,  c. 
Principal  Clauses,  41  (page  12). 
pridie,  with  Gen.,  N.  128,  r. 
Primary,  or  Principal  Tenses,  N.  171. 
Principal  Parts  of  Verbs,  N.  66 ;  of  Impersonal 

Verbs,  A.  47. 
prior,  N.  34,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  b. 
priusquam,  with  Indie,  and  Subj.,  N.  184, 

c,  L.  Ixxii. 
pro  (or  prod),  as  prefix,  see  prosum. 
Prohibitions,  how  expr.,  N.  178,  Caution  2. 
Pronominal  Adjectives,  9,  a  (page  2). 
Pronouns,  11  (page  3),  N.  45-53,  111-116,  L. 

1-Uv ;  position,  N.  193,  4.     [See  the  various 

classes  of  Pronouns,  —  Personal,  Relative, 

etc.] 
Pronunciation  of  Latin,  7-9  (pages  18, 19). 
propior,  N.  34,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  b;  with 

Dat.  or  Ace,  N.  132,  a. 
prosum,  N.  85,  2,  A.  41,  a. 
Protasis,  N.  174. 
pugnatur,  inflection,  A.  47. 


Purpose,  expr.  by  Dat ,  N.  137,  L.  Ixvii ;  by  a 
Phrase,  N.  137,  a;  by  the  Subj.,  N.  164,  rf, 
179,  L.  xl,  xlviii ;  expr.  injive  ways,  N.  180, 
L.  Ixxiv. 

qu  =  c,  N.  1  (1). 

qua,  as  an  Adverb,  N.  94,  2. 

quaero,  with  a  (ab),  de,  e  (ex),  and  Abl., 

N.  141,  R.  2, 199,  4. 
Quality,  expr.  by  Gen.,N.  121,  152,  a;   by 

Abl.,  N.  152  and  a,  L.  Ixx. 
quam  with  Superlative,  N.  40,  c  ;  omitted 

(Abl.  with  Comparatives),  N.  154,  L.  Ixviii. 
quamquam,  with  Indie,  N.  183,  Caution. 
quamvis,  with  Subj.,  N.  183,  c. 
Quantity,  10  (page  20) ;  Rules,  11,  12  (pages 

20,  21).   [See  also  Vowels,  long  and  short.] 
-que,  Enclitic,  N.  195, 3;  force  in  quisque, 

etc.,  N.  53,  c. 
Questions  {single  and  double),  Direct,  N.  101, 

a,  b,  L.  liii,  liv,  Ixxv;  Indirect,  N.  177,  d, 
N.  Ixxv ;  implying  a  doubt^  N.  164,  6, 
177,  a. 

qui  (Relative),  N.  50,  L.  lii,  A.  25. 

qui  in  clauses  of  Purpose,  Result,  Cause, 
and  Concession,  N.  179,  a,  181,  c,  182,  c, 
183,  b,  197,  6,  L.  lii,  Ixv,  Ixix,  Ixxi.    • 

quia,  with  Indie,  N.  182,  a. 

quicumque,  N.  52,  d. 

quidam,  N.  52,  d. 

quin,  with  Subj.,  N.  181,  d,  199,  1,  L.  Ixv. 

quis  (qui),  Interrogative,  N.  51,  L.  liii,  A. 
26;  Indefinite,  N.  52,  L.  liv,  A.  27;  how 
diff.  from  uter,  N.  51,  Caution,  195,  7- 

quisque,  N.  52,  d\  with  Superlatives,  N.53| 

b,  L.  liv. 

qui  vis,  N.  52,  d. 

quo  for  ut,  N.  179,  b. 

quo  .  .  .  eo,  the  .  .  .  the,  N.  155,  b. 

quod,  with  Indie ,  N.  182,  a,  d ;  with  Subj., 

N.  187,/. 
quod  (id  quod,  quae  res),  N.  115,  b. 
quominus,  N.  179,  c,  196. 
quoniam,  with  Indie,  N.  182,  a. 
quum   (cum),    with    Indie    and    Subj., 

(since)  N.  182,  b,  L.  Ixix;  (althmgh)  N. 
183,  a,  L.  Ixxi ;  {ivhen)  N.  184,  a,  L.  Ixxii ; 

quum  .  .  .  tamen,  N.  195, 8;  quum 

.  .  .  tum,  N.  195,  8. 

re  (red),  as  prefix,  N.  85,  2,  99,  2. 

Reduplication,  N.  79,  6. 

refert,  with  Gen.,  N.  127,  6. 

Reflexive  Pronouns,  N.  47, 112,  L.  1,  A.  22. 

rego,  inflection,  A.  32,  83.     [See   Third 

Conjugation.] 
Relative  Clauses  of  Purpose,  etc.,  see  qui. 


INDEX. 


309 


Relative  Pronouns,  11,  b  (page  3),  50  (page  14), 
N.  50,  115,  L.  lii,  A.  25 ;  not  omitted  in 
Latin,  N.  115,  c ;  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence,  N.  115,  d]  trans,  as,  N.  115,/; 
position,  N.  193,  4. 

Respect,  or  Specification,  see  Ablative. 

respublica,  N.  23,  a. 

Result,  liow  expr.,  N.  181 ;  Result  Clauses  as 
Subject,  Object,  or  Appositive,  N.  181,  a,  b, 
e,  L.  Ixv. 

Regular  Comparison,  see  Comparison. 

rogo,  peto,  postulo,  quaero,  used 
with  wliat  cases,  N.  199,  4. 

Roman  Method  of  Pronunciation,  8  (page  18). 

rus,  in  expressions  of  Place,  N.  159. 

S  changed  to  r,  N.  1  (2),  13,  «.,  84,  b. 

salve,  Imperative,  N.  91,  2,  b. 

-SCO,  Verb-ending,  see  Inceptive  Verbs. 

se,  as  prefix,  N.  99,  2. 

Second  Conjugation,  N.  65-77,  L,  xxx,  A.  30, 
31 ;  peculiarities  of  Perfect  and  Supine,  N. 
79,  1;  Deponent  Verbs,  L.  xxxii,  A.  37; 
Second  Periphrastic  Conj.,  N.  82,  6,  A.  39,  b. 

Second  Declension  of  Nouns,  N.  10,  L.  iii,  iv, 
xi,  xiii,  A.  2. 

Secondafy  Tenses,  N.  171.  [See  Sequence  of 
Tenses.'] 

Semi-Deponent  Verbs,  N.  81,  L.  Ixvii,  A.  38. 

senex,  declined,  A.  7  ;  compared,  N.  36,  b. 

Sentences,  definition,  33  (page  9) ;  Simple, 
Complex,  Compound,  40  (page  11),  N.  105; 
Declaratory,  Interrogative,  Imperative,  44 
(page  13),  N.  100 ;  Miscellaneous  Sentences 
FOR  Translation  into  Latin,  pages  132-135. 

Separation,  see  under  Ablative  and  Dative. 

Sequence  of  Tenses,  N,  172,  L.  xl,  Ixvi. 

sequor,  A.  37.     [See  Deponent  Verbs.'] 

should,  how  expr.  in  Latin,  N.  197,  3. 

si,  in  Conditions,  N.  174, 175 ;  for  num,  N. 
177,  R.  1. 

Simple  Sentences,  40,  a  (page  12). 

Single  Questions,  see  Questio7is. 

siquis,  N.  52,  and  b,  c,  L.  liv,  A.  27. 

soleo,  N.  81,  A.  38. 

solus,  N.  43,  6,  L.  xiii,  A.  11. 

Stem,  definition,  16  (page  22) ;  Stem-Endings 
of  Nouns,  N.  5;  Stems  of  Verbs,  N.  54,  1, 
67.  [See  also  Present,  Perfect,  and  Su- 
pine Stems.] 

sub,  with  Ace.  and  Abl.,  N.  95,  c,  L.  xxxix. 

Subject,  35,  a,  36  (page  10),  45  (page  13),  N. 
102;  its  modifiers,  38  (page  11);  when 
omitted,  N.  Ill ;  Subject  of  an  Impersonal 
Verb,  26  (page  8),  N.  92  and  Caution,  93; 
Subject  of  the  Infinitive,  56  (page  16),  N. 
166. 


Subjective  Genitive,  N.  124. 

Subjunctive,  (Eng.)  15,  c  (page  4),  19  (page 6), 

(Lat.)  N.  57,  b,  164 ;  Tenses,  N.  63,  b,  69,  74, 

170.    Uses,  —  Expressing :    Condition^  N. 

164,  a,  174,  175,  L.  xxi,  xxiv,  Iviii ;   Wish, 

N.  176,  L.  Ixi ;  Question  (implying  doubt), 

N.  164,  b,  177,  a,  {Indirect)  N.  164,  b,  177, 

b,c,d,h.  Ixxv  ;  Command,  Exhortation, 

etc.,  N.  164,  c,  178,  L.  xxvii,  xlviii,  Ixxvi ; 

Purjwse,  N.  164,  d,  166,  Caution,  179,  L.  xl, 

xlviii;  liesult,  N.  181,  L.  Ixv;   Cause,  N. 

182, 187,/,  L.  Ixix ;  Concession,  N.  183,  L. 

Ixxi ;    Time,  N.  184,   L.  Ixxii ;    Indirect 

Uiscourse,   N.  186,  187,  L.  Ixxv-lxxviii ; 

"  Attracti07i,''  N.  185. 
Substantive  Clauses,  42,  a  (page  12),  N.  188, 

L.  Ixv. 
sui  and  suus,  N.  47, 48  and  Caution,  112,  a, 

L.  1,  A.  22,  23. 
sum,  inflection,  A.  40;  as  Copula,  N.  55, 103, 

L.  vi,  xviii ;  peculiarities,  N.  84 ;  with  Pred. 

Gen.,  N.  126,  L.  Ivi ;  with  Dat.  of  Poss., 

N.  135,  L.  Ixvii;  Compounds,  with  Dat., 

N.  135,  a. 
sunt,  there  are,  N.  193,  6. 
Superlative  Degree,   10  (page  2);   trans,  by 

very,  N.  40,  b,  as  possible,  N.  40,  c ;  with 

quisque,  N.  53,  b. 
superus,  N.  35,  L.  xxxiv,  A.  17,  c. 
Supine,  N.  21,  a,  59,  6,  72,  d ;  stem,  N.  67, 79, 

and  1,  2  ;  Use,  N.  153,  r.,  191,  L.  Ixxiv ;  in 

Fut.  Inf.  Pass.,  N.  191,  B. 
Syllables,  6  (page  18) ;  long  and  short,  10, 11, 

12  (pages  20,  21);  contracted,  11,  e  (page 

21),  N.  7,  20,  c. 
Synopsis  of  Verb,  N.  78. 
Syntax,  definition,  32  (page  9) ;  Latin  Syntax, 

pages  188-232. 

t  before  s,  N.  1  (4),  12,  b ;  in  possum,  N. 
85,  1,  A.  41. 

talis  .  .  .  qualis,  N.  195, 8. 

tametsi,  see  Concession;  tametsi  . 
tamen,  N.  195,  8. 

tantus  .  .  .  quantus,  N.  195,  8. 

Temporal  Clauses,  see  Time. 

Tense,  definition,  16  (page  4);  not  always 
accurately  indicating  time  in  Eng.  Verbs, 
17,  Note,  18,  19  (pages  5,  6),  N.  168,  a ; 
names  and  uses  of  the  tenses,  (Eng.)  17-21 
(pages  4-7),  (Latin)  N.  60-63,  168-173 ;  of 
Participles,  23,  R.  (page  8),  N.  189,  a  [see 
also  Present,  Imperfect,  etc.] ;  formation, 
N.  68-76.  [See  Secondary  Tenses,  and 
Sequence  of  Tenses.] 

there  is,  there  are,  55  page  15),  N.  193,  6. 

Third    Conjugation,    N.    65-77,    L.    xxxvii, 


310 


INDEX. 


xxxviii,  A.  32,  33 ;  variety  of  forms,  N.  79, 

2-8 ;  Verbs  in  -io,  N.  79,  3,  L.  xliii,  A.  34 ; 

Deponent  Verbs,  L.  xl,  A.  37. 
Third  Declension  of  Adjectives,  N.  24,  6-28  ; 

L.  xxvi-xxviii,  A.  12-15. 
Third  Declension  of  Nouns  (three  classes  of 

nouns),  N.  11, 18 ;  L.  xiv-xvii.  A,  3-7;  Nom. 

how  formed,  N.  12,  13, 14, 15,  b,  16,  a,  b; 

Gender,  N.  4, 19,  ci,  b. 
Time,  {how  long)  54,  4  (page  15),  N.  142,  a, 

160,  L.  xlv;  (wheri)  54,  5  (page  15),  N.  160, 

L.  xlv ;   Dates,  N.  161 ;  Temporal  Clauses, 

N.  184,  L.  Ixxii. 
to,  omitted  with  Eng.  Inf.,  56,  R.  (page  16) ; 

when  rendered  by  Dat.,  N.  129 ;  by  ad,  N. 

129,  a. 
-to.  Verb-ending,  see  Frequentative  Verbs. 
tot  .  .  .  quot,  N.  195,  8. 
totus,  N.  43,  b,  L.  xiii,  A  11. 
transduco,  -mitto,  etc.,  with  two  Ace, 

N.  141,  c. 
Transitive  Verbs,  definition,  12  (page  3). 
Translation,  Hints  and  Rules,  N.  200,  201. 
tres,  N.  43,  rf,  L.  xlv,  A.  20,  b. 
-trix.  Noun-ending,  N.  98,  a. 
tu,  N.  46,  L.  1,  A.  21. 
turn  .  .  .  quum,  N.  195,  8. 
tuus,  N.  48,  L.  1,  A.  23. 
Two  Adjectives,  connected  by  et  or  -que, 

N.  195,  6. 
Two  Negatives  =  an  Affirmative,  N.  195, 1. 


U  final,  quantity,  N.  8  (7). 

ubi,  with  Indicative,  N.  184,  Caution. 

-ubus  in  Dat.  and  Abl.,  N.  20,  R. 

ullus,  N.  43,  b,  L.  xiii.  A.  11. 

ulterior,  N.  34,  L,  xxxiv,  A.  17,  b 

Ultima,  13,  R.  1  (page  22). 

-ulus,  as  ending,  see  Diminutives. 

una,  as  Adverb,  N.  94,  2. 

unus,  N.  43,  a,  L.  xlv,  A.  11. 

usus  (Noun),  with  Abl.,  N.  147,  a. 

ut,  in  Purpose  clauses,  N.  179 ;  =  that  not, 

N.  179,  e ;  in  Result  clauses,  N.  181 ;  =  as, 

N.  197,  5  ;   =  how,  N.  177,  R.  2  ;  omitted, 

N.  179,/. 
uter,  N.  43,  6,  L.  xiii,  A.  11;  how  difiF.  from 

quis,  N.  51,  Caxition,  195,  7,  L-  liii- 
utinam,  use,  see  Wish. 
utor,  fruor,  etc.,  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  a, 

L.  xiii. 
utrum  .  .  .  an,  see 


V,  cons,  form  of  u,  3  (page  17) ;  dropped  in 
Perf.  Stem,  N.  79,  4. 

Value,  how  expressed,  N.  121,  a. 

vel  .  .  .  vel,  N.  195,  8. 

Verbal  Nouns,  3,  c  (page  1),  53  (page  15),  N. 
57,  d,  59.  [See  Infinitive,  Gerund,  and 
Supine."] 

Verbs,  see  under  Transitive ;  Intransitive ; 
Voice ;  Mode ;  Tense ;  Person ;  Number ; 
Principal  Parts;  Stems;  Conjugations 
(First,  Second,  Third,  Fourth);  Synopsis; 
Participles;  Gerund;  Supine;  Verbs  in 
-io ;  Deponent  Verbs ;  Semi-Deponent 
Verbs ;  Irregular  Verbs ;  Defective 
Verbs;  Impersonal  Verbs. 

vereor,  inflection,  A.  37. 

vescor,  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  a. 

vester,  N.  48,  L.  1,  A.  23. 

vestrum,  vestri  (Gen.  pi.),  how  diflF.  in 
use,  N.  123,  b. 

veto,  with  Ace.  and  Inf.,  N.  197,  8. 

vetus,  N.  26,  c,  A.  14,  a. 

virus,  gender,  N.  4,  R.  3. 

vis,  inflection,  A.  7 ;  -vis,  as  ending,  N. 
52,  d. 

vivo,  with  Abl.,  N.  151,  a. 

Vocabulary,  —  Latin-English,  pages  269-294 ; 
English-Latin,  pages  295-301 ;  Special  Vo- 
cabularies and  Examples,  pages  259-267. 

Vocative  (Eng.  Independent  Case,  8,  d,  page 
2),  20  (page  24) ;  law  of  form,  N.  8  (1) ;  Ex- 
ceptions, N.  10,  c,  d  (filius,  etc.),  / 
(deus),  A.  23  (mens);  use,  N.  145, 
L.  xi. 

Voice,  14  (page  3),  N.  56. 

volo,  N.  89,  L.  Ixii,  E.  45. 

Vowels,  pronunciation  (Roman  and  English 
Methods),  8,  9  (pages  18,  19) ;  quantity,  11, 
12  (pages  20,21);  vowel  long  before  another 
vowel  •  (diei,  etc.)  N.  22,  d,  (unius,  etc.) 
N.  43,  A.  11,  (illius,  etc.)  A.  24  ;  vowel 
changes,  N.  2,  (Third  Dec.)  N.  13,  14, 
(Fourth  Dec.)  N.  20,  d ;  vowel  stems  (Thiid 
Dec.  of  Nouns  and  Adj.),  N.  11,  b,  16-18. 
26,  a,b,c. 

vulgus,  gender,  N.  10,  g. 

•W,  not  in  Latin,  2  (page  17). 

Wish,  how  expr.,  N.  176,  L.  Ixi. 

with,  when  expr.  by  cum,  N.  150,  a,  L.  xlix 

yes,  how  expr.  in  Latin,  N.  101,  R. 


University  Press :  John  Wilson  &  Son,  Cambridee. 


**™fffi  BOOK  IS  DtnS  ON  THF,  LAST  DATE 
STABIPED  BELOW 

AN  INITIAL  FINE  OP  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS   BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY    AND    TO    $1.00    ON    THE    SEVENTH    DAY 

OVERDUE.                            REC'D   LD 

m    6t>^-8PiVl 

MAY  .h"  u 

"tO 

T^uG^.T^^'^ 

J\V3u 

■•;a.  CIR.  WB^^*^ 

"       -^r^far'S^--' 

6  0ct'55PW 

^CT3  2  1955  1^^ 

29May'63Mf 

-..TO    ■-*' 

■.\,r-'      ■ 

^^iuveso^ 

REC'D    J 

JUL    91963 

» 

20Noy'633'i 

LD  21-100m-12,'43  (8796s) 

bm.  t 


'"^S^wm: 


YB  00293 


M29253 


-760 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  gAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


